JP7730038B2 - gaming machines - Google Patents

Description

Regarding gaming machines.

In a slot machine, play begins when a predetermined number of medals are inserted and a start lever (start signal) is operated. Multiple rows of reels with multiple symbols arranged around the periphery begin to spin. The spinning is stopped by a stop button (stop button). If a predetermined symbol combination (e.g., a winning combination such as "777") is lined up on a winning line, the slot machine typically transitions to a special game state (a game state in which the probability of winning a small prize, etc., is higher than normal) that is more profitable for the player than the standard game state. In addition to these basic gameplay features, slot machines offer various effects to enhance overall entertainment value. When medals are dispensed, a payout sound is emitted, the number of medals won is displayed, and a backlight effect is activated, allowing the player to confirm that the medals have been dispensed appropriately.

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2019-217068

Improvements in the performance of this type of gaming machine are desired.

a display device;
The performance switch and
It has a performance switch lamp,
In a display device, information relating to a performance is displayed in each of N display areas (N is an integer of 3 or more) divided into areas, a selection display indicating that one of the display areas is selected is displayed by sequentially switching at a constant speed , and when a performance switch is operated, a predetermined performance can be executed in which the selection display can be stopped and displayed in one of the display areas,
When a predetermined effect is being executed and an operation input of the effect switch is possible, the effect switch lamp can be flashed,
In a display device, when a selection display indicating that one of the display areas is selected is displayed by sequentially switching the display at a constant speed, the time from when a certain display area is selected and displayed among the display areas to when the next display area to be selected and displayed among the certain display areas is selected and displayed is T1, and the time T2 for the selection display to make one revolution of the N display areas is
Comparing the flashing cycle T3 of the performance switch lamp,
T2<T3,
A predetermined effect can be started by operating the start switch,
When a predetermined performance is started by operating the start switch in a situation where no wait occurs, the predetermined performance can be started before the operation of the stop switch is enabled.
Gaming machine.

This invention can improve the performance of gaming machines.

FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the outside of the cabinet of the slot machine PS1. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing the back surface of the front panel PS2. FIG. 2 is a view showing the inner surface of the cabinet PS3. FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating functional blocks. 10 is a flowchart showing a program start process. 10 is a flowchart showing a power-off process. 10 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process. 10 is a flowchart showing a power-off recovery process. 10 is a flowchart showing the main game progress. 10 is a flowchart showing a setting change process. 1 is a diagram illustrating a reel arrangement in the present embodiment. FIG. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating the symbol combinations in this embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating the symbol combinations in this embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating the symbol combinations in this embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating the symbol combinations in this embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating the symbol combinations in this embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating the symbol combinations in this embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating a condition device according to the present embodiment. A diagram explaining the internal lottery placement number in this embodiment. A diagram explaining the internal lottery placement number in this embodiment. A diagram explaining the internal lottery placement number in this embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a case where the MAX bet switch is not operated after the payout process is completed. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating the case where a MAX bet switch is operated after the payout process is completed. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating the case where a settlement operation is performed using the settlement switch after the dispensing process is completed. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a case where no gaming medals are inserted after the settlement process is completed. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating the case where a gaming medal is inserted after the settlement process is completed. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a case where payout is performed normally. 10 is a diagram illustrating a case where dispensing is not performed normally (when a hopper empty error occurs). FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a case where dispensing is not performed normally (when a hopper retention error occurs). FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when payout is performed normally. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when dispensing is not performed normally (when a hopper empty error occurs). FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when dispensing is not performed normally (when a hopper retention error occurs). A figure showing an example of the form of a push order navigation image. This is a diagram showing an example of a push order navigation image displayed on a liquid crystal display. This figure shows an example of when a specified error occurs while the push order navigation image is being displayed. This is a time chart for when the MAX bet switch is not inserted after the payout process based on the winning push order role is completed. This is a time chart when the MAX bet switch is operated after the payout process based on the winning push order role is completed. This is a time chart for when the MAX BET switch is not operated after the payout process based on the winning of the cherry combination is completed. This is a time chart when a MAX BET switch is operated after the payout process based on the winning of the cherry combination is completed. This is a time chart for when no gaming medals are inserted after the automatic insertion process based on the winning of a replay role is completed. This is a time chart when a gaming medal is inserted after the automatic insertion process based on the winning of a replay role is completed. This is a time chart when a settlement operation is performed using the settlement switch after the payout process based on the winning push order role is completed. This is a time chart when a settlement operation is performed using the settlement switch after the automatic insertion process based on the winning of a replay role is completed. This is a time chart for when a payout is not made normally after a cherry win (when a hopper empty error occurs). This is a time chart for when payout is not performed normally after a cherry win (when a hopper retention error occurs). FIG. 2 is a diagram showing each area stored in a main control ROM. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an interrupt initial setting area and automatic allocation according to the priority of the interrupt initial setting area. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between power-on processing and interrupt vector addresses for timer interrupt processing. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating the relationship between interrupt vector addresses of power-on processing and timer interrupt processing and other programs. A figure showing an example of ball output specifications across advantageous zones. A figure showing an example of ball output specifications across advantageous zones. A figure showing an example of ball output specifications across advantageous zones. A flowchart showing the favorable zone clear counter management process corresponding to the favorable zone difference counter. A flowchart showing the favorable zone clear counter management process corresponding to the favorable zone difference counter. 10 is a flowchart showing a stoppage monitoring process. 10 is a flowchart showing a stoppage monitoring process. 10 is a flowchart showing a stoppage monitoring process. 10 is a flowchart showing a stoppage monitoring process. 10 is a flowchart showing a stoppage monitoring process. A figure showing an example of the presentation of the operation advance notification state and the end notification state. A diagram showing an example of the configuration of the bet number display lamp 25 and the payout number display. A diagram showing an example of the configuration of the bet number display lamp 25 and the payout number display. A diagram showing an example of the configuration of the bet number display lamp 25 and the payout number display. This figure shows the positional relationship when the medal selector 34, chute member, and return member are attached to the back surface of the front panel PS2. A diagram explaining the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member. A diagram explaining the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member. This figure shows the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member, and the positional relationship with the hopper 44 when the front panel PS2 is closed. This figure shows the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member, and the positional relationship with the hopper 44 when the front panel PS2 is closed. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating the position and dimensions of the fastening parts (screws) that fasten the chute member when the fastening parts of the chute member are fastened to the front panel PS2 by the fastening parts. A figure showing another aspect of the positional relationship when the medal selector 34, chute member, and return member are attached to the back surface of the front panel PS2. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of an error history screen. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the error history screen when the front door is opened or closed while the error history screen is displayed. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of a time setting screen. This is a list of display patterns of error history when multiple errors occur. A figure showing an example of a presentation when the notification state related to the limit is the "normal state." This is a diagram showing an example of a presentation when the notification state related to the limit is the "activation notice state." A figure showing an example of a presentation when the notification state related to the limit is the "operation notification state." FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating the transition of notification states related to termination. 10 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit in the bonus game state and the temporary limit flag. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an advance notification image in a bonus game state. This figure explains the notification state related to termination when the power is cut off and then restored while the notification state related to termination is in the operation preview state. This figure explains the notification state related to termination when the power is cut off and then restored while the notification state related to termination is in the operation preview state. This figure explains the notification state related to termination when the power is cut off and then restored while the notification state related to termination is in the operation preview state. This figure explains the notification state related to termination when the power is cut off and then restored while the notification state related to termination is in the operation preview state. This figure explains the notification state related to termination when the power is cut off and then restored while the notification state related to termination is in the operation preview state. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an error image that appears when an error occurs during automatic settlement. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an error image that appears when an error occurs during automatic settlement. A figure showing an example of ball output specifications across advantageous zones. A figure showing an example of ball output specifications across advantageous zones. 10A and 10B are diagrams showing the progress of the game and the lighting state of the bet lamp. 10A and 10B are diagrams showing the progress of the game and the lighting state of the bet lamp. 10A and 10B are diagrams showing the progress of the game and the lighting state of the bet lamp. 10A and 10B are diagrams showing the progress of the game and the lighting state of the bet lamp. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the effect volume in each situation. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a dangerous installation situation of the gaming machine. 10A and 10B are diagrams showing the movement of the selector when the gaming machine is in a normal installation state and a dangerous installation state. This is a view of the gaming machine with the left side facing downwards, seen from behind the front door. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing the gaming machine as seen from the front, illustrating the configuration around the speaker. 10 is a diagram illustrating the selector and the return member when the front door is viewed from the back side. FIG. FIG. 10 is a view of the selector as seen from the right side. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a roulette effect. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating display contents in a roulette effect. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating the display timing of the effect switch effect in the roulette effect. A diagram explaining the types of setting confirmation effects. A diagram showing a selection table for setting confirmation effects. A figure showing a selection table for setting confirmation effects with different winning probabilities depending on the number of times the game is played. A diagram showing internal lottery data during non-RT when the setting value L is provided. A diagram showing internal lottery data during RT1 when the setting value L is provided. This is an overall front view of the front door as seen from the back side.

<Terminology>
"Medals (number of medals),""game media (number of game media)," and "game value" are synonymous. "Bet,""BET," and "input" regarding game media are synonymous, and all refer to the act of betting (placing a bet) on game media. Hexadecimal numbers are written as "0x00" or "00h," and binary numbers are written as "00000000b" or "00000000B." Unless otherwise specified before or after the number, it is expressed in decimal. "Reels" are sometimes called "machines," and all are synonymous. "Storage means" are sometimes called "RWM,""RAM," or "storage area," and all are synonymous. "Awarding," as used in "awarding game media" or "awarding points," etc., can also be called "payout" or "acquisition," and all are synonymous. The "setting/reset switch" may be referred to as a "setting change switch" or a "reset switch" depending on its function, but in both cases, they refer to the same switch. The "setting change switch" and the "reset switch" may be provided as different switches. When a small combination with a high payout or a small combination with a low payout stops depending on the operation mode, the small combination with a high payout may be called a high combination (high combination bell and high combination small combination are also synonymous), and the small combination with a low payout may be called a low combination (low combination bell and low combination small combination are also synonymous). When a symbol combination with no payout stops at this time, it may be called a drop combination (drop combination is also synonymous).

An embodiment of the present invention (hereinafter referred to as the present embodiment) will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings.

<Explanation of the slot machine PS1>
The components of the slot machine PS1 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

The slot machine PS1 can be broadly divided into two sections, with the necessary components and circuit boards mounted on the front panel PS2 side and the cabinet PS3 side. The sides of the front panel PS2 and cabinet PS3 of the slot machine PS1 are joined by a hinge device and a locking device, and the locking device side can be opened by inserting a lock key into the locking device provided on the front panel PS2 and rotating it in a specific direction. In other words, the front panel PS2 functions as a door to the cabinet PS3.

<Front panel PS2>
The front panel PS2 (also referred to as the front door PS2, front surface door PS2, or front door PS2, or simply the front door) is a plate-like member with a design, and on the front side (player side) there are provided a middle panel (including a display window 4, an operation indicator lamp 24, etc.), an operation panel 11 (including a bet number display lamp 25, a credit number display 26, a number of coins won display 27, etc.), a lower panel 5 (also referred to as the lower panel 5), an upper lamp (also referred to as a top lamp) or side effect lamps (also referred to as a side lamp), etc., and on the back side there are provided a medal selector 34 (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as the "selector"), a display device 32, a sub-control board 1000, various boards, etc., a setting display LED (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a setting value display LED, setting display device, setting value display device, setting value display device).

<Display window 4>
The display window 4 is an area provided in the front panel PS2, and when the front panel PS2 is closed, the symbols drawn on the reels are visible. The symbols printed on the outer periphery of each reel tape fixed to the reel rim of each of the left reel 8a, center reel 8b, and right reel 8c are configured to be visible from the front (player side) through the display window 4. When the reels are stopped, three consecutive symbols out of 21 symbols (which may be freely designed as 20, 16, or other symbols depending on the specifications) are visible. In other words, a total of nine symbols (3 symbols x 3 reels) are visible through the display window 4. Here, of the stop positions where the left reel 8a, center reel 8b, and right reel 8c each stop three symbols, the uppermost stop position is referred to as the upper row, the center stop position is referred to as the middle row, and the lowermost stop position is referred to as the lower row.

<Valid line>
The activated line is a symbol combination line that is the target of a win determination process (described later) when the left reel 8a, the center reel 8b, and the right reel 8c come to a stop. In this embodiment, the activated line is visible through the display window 4 and is composed of a symbol combination line (middle horizontal line) that passes through the middle of each reel. When the winning determination process determines that a symbol combination that has come to a stop on the activated line corresponds to one of the winning combinations, processing is performed according to the stopped symbol combination. For example, when it is determined that a symbol combination corresponding to a minor winning combination such as a bell has come to a stop, a payout process for game medals (hereinafter sometimes referred to as medals, game media, or game value) and a credit addition process are performed, and when it is determined that a symbol combination corresponding to a replay has come to a stop, an automatic bet process is performed.

Depending on the slot machine PS1, five pay lines may be set: an upper horizontal line, a middle horizontal line, a lower horizontal line, an upward-right line, and a downward-right line. Alternatively, six or more pay lines may be set, including non-straight, roughly mountain-shaped lines (lower left reel 8a, upper middle reel 8b, lower right reel 8c), roughly valley-shaped lines (upper left reel 8a, lower middle reel 8b, upper right reel 8c), and roughly L-shaped lines (upper left reel 8a, lower middle reel 8b, lower right reel 8c). Pay lines may also be set to change depending on the number of coins bet, and can be freely designed according to the specifications of the slot machine PS1. Straight lines other than pay lines may also be called inactive lines.

<Operation indicator lamp 24>
The operation indicator lamps 24 are provided around the display window 4 and instruct the player on the order of operating the stop switches 13 (described later) while the left reel 8a, center reel 8b, and right reel 8c are spinning. That is, when the left operation indicator lamp 24a is lit (the center operation indicator lamp 24b and the right operation indicator lamp 24c are off), it indicates that the left stop switch 13a should be operated, when the center operation indicator lamp 24b is lit (the left operation indicator lamp 24a and the right operation indicator lamp 24c are off), it indicates that the center stop switch 13b should be operated, and when the right operation indicator lamp 24c is lit (the left operation indicator lamp 24a and the center operation indicator lamp 24b are off), it indicates that the right stop switch 13c should be operated.

<Bet number display lamp 25>
The bet number indicator lamps 25 (also referred to as bet number indicator lamps 25, bet number indicator lamps 25, bet number indicator lamps 25, bet number indicator lamps 25, or bet number indicator lamps 25) are provided on the operation panel 11 and have the function of displaying the number of coins bet by the player. They are also comprised of a 1 bet lamp 25a (not shown), a 2 bet lamp 25b (not shown), and a 3 bet lamp 25c (not shown). When one medal is bet, the 1 bet lamp 25a lights up. When a total of two medals are bet, the 1 bet lamp 25a and the 2 bet lamp 25b light up. When a total of three medals are bet, the 1 bet lamp 25a, the 2 bet lamp 25b, and the 3 bet lamp 25c light up. Furthermore, although not shown, after a symbol combination related to a replay is displayed, when the automatic bet process is executed, the bet number indicator lamp 25 corresponding to the number of bets used in the game in which the replay won is illuminated, and the replay lamp is also illuminated. The timing of lighting the bet number display lamp 25 and the timing of lighting the replay lamp may be simultaneous, or one of them may be configured to light up first.

<Credit number display 26>
The credit number display 26 (also referred to as a credit, medal number display, medal number display device, gaming media number display device, or gaming media number display device) is provided on the operation panel 11 and comprises a segment display 26a (not shown) consisting of a total of eight segments, including seven segments and decimal points (DP), which mainly displays the upper digits of the credit number, and a segment display 26b (not shown) consisting of a total of eight segments, including seven segments and decimal points (DP), which mainly displays the lower digits of the credit number. The credit number refers to the number of medals credited (electrically stored) in the slot machine PS1, and up to 50 can be stored. Furthermore, when an error is detected and normal gameplay cannot proceed, a message regarding the error may be displayed.

<Acquired coin count indicator 27>
The earned coin count indicator 27 (also referred to as earned coin count indicator, earned number indicator, payout coin count indicator, or payout number indicator) is provided on the operation panel 11 and comprises a segment indicator 27a (not shown), which is comprised of a total of eight segments, seven segments and decimal points (DP), and mainly displays the upper digits of the earned coin count, and a segment indicator 27b (not shown), which is comprised of a total of eight segments, seven segments and decimal points (DP), and mainly displays the lower digits of the earned coin count. The earned coin count refers to the number of medals paid out to the player (including those stored in the credit number indicator 26) based on the results of the game on the slot machine PS1. Furthermore, when an error is detected and normal gameplay cannot proceed, a message indicating the error may be displayed.

In addition to displaying their respective information using segment displays 26a, 26b, 27a, and 27b, the credit number display 26 and the acquired coin number display 27 may also display information other than the credit number or acquired coin number depending on whether the DP is lit or not. For example, information indicating that the player is in a favorable zone (described below) or that a specified external signal is being output may be notified by lighting the DP of one of the segment displays. The acquired coin number display 27 may also have the ability to notify the player of the order in which to press buttons using the display for the upper and lower digits. When the acquired coin number display 27 is used to notify the player of the order in which to press buttons, the acquired coin number display 27 is sometimes referred to as an instruction monitor.

<Operation panel 11>
The operation panel 11 is provided in approximately the center of the front panel PS2. The operation panel 11 is provided in a stepped configuration with a substantially horizontal section and a vertical section extending substantially vertically downward from the tip of the horizontal section, with a start switch 12 and a stop switch 13 (described later) provided on the vertical section, and a medal insertion slot 17 (described later), multiple bet switches (MAX bet switch 18, 1 bet switch 19), a sub-switch 20, a sub-cross key switch 21, an eject switch 22, a settlement switch (not shown), and a performance switch (not shown) provided on the horizontal section.

<Start switch 12>
The start switch (also referred to as a start lever) 12 is located on the vertical portion of the operation panel 11. It is a lever-shaped operation unit. The start switch sensor is ON when the switch is not operated, and when the start switch sensor is operated, the start switch is determined to have been operated when the start switch sensor is OFF. The start switch 12 is activated when the number of coins bet reaches a predetermined number. When the start switch 12 is operated, it executes an internal lottery process (also referred to as an internal lottery process), a process related to the instruction function, a reel rotation process, or the like. In this embodiment, the input signal is low active. Therefore, when the start switch sensor is ON when the start switch sensor is not operated, the start switch input signal is OFF. When the start switch sensor changes from ON to OFF when the start switch sensor is operated, the start switch input signal is ON. However, the start switch input signal may be ON when the start switch sensor is ON. In other words, the predetermined number refers to the number of bets required to start a game.

Hereinafter, when we simply say "the start switch is ON" or "the start switch is operated," it means that the start switch sensor has changed from ON to OFF, and the start switch input signal has changed from OFF to ON.

<Stop switch 13>
The stop switch 13 is provided on the operation panel 11. In this embodiment, the left stop switch 13a corresponds to the left reel 8a, the middle stop switch 13b corresponds to the middle reel 8b, and the right stop switch 13c corresponds to the right reel 8c. When the stop switch 13 can be operated, the color of the lamp provided on the main body of the stop switch 13 or the lamps around it changes, indicating that the stop switch 13 is active. For example, the light may be blue when the stop switch 13 can be operated, and red when the stop switch 13 cannot be operated. Another example is that the light may be on when the stop switch 13 can be operated, and off when the stop switch 13 cannot be operated.

<Medal slot 17>
The medal slot 17 is provided on the operation panel 11. It has an opening for inserting medals into the medal slot, and restricts the insertion of medals larger than the standard size. Multiple types of medal slots 17 are manufactured to correspond to the standard sizes of multiple types of medals, but the installation standards for the various medal slots 17 are the same so that they can be installed on the operation panel 11 in a common manner.

Regarding the insertion of gaming media, the gaming media is not limited to the medals mentioned above, but may also be, for example, gaming balls (known as Parrots) used in pachinko gaming machines, or gaming media information stored on an electrical storage medium such as a magnetic card or flash memory, which is input into the gaming machine, and the number of bets set and the amount added when a prize is won are based on the input gaming media information.

<Bet Switch (MAX BET Switch 18, 1 BET Switch 19)>
The bet switch is provided on the operation panel 11. When the bet switch is operated when there are medals stored in the credits, a bet process is executed and the bet number is set as if medals were inserted into the medal insertion slot 17. However, even if the bet switch is operated when there are no medals stored in the credits, the bet process is invalid (the operation of the bet switch is not accepted). The MAX bet switch 18 is composed of a push-down part operated by the player, a detection part that detects the operation of the push-down part, and a light-emitting part (also called a MAX bet lamp) that illuminates the push-down part, and the 1 bet switch 19 is composed of a push-down part operated by the player and a detection part that detects the operation of the push-down part (the 1 bet switch 19 does not have a light-emitting part).

The MAX BET lamp notifies the player that a bet can be made when the MAX BET switch is operated, and various notification methods are possible, such as lighting the MAX BET lamp in a specified color or flashing the MAX BET lamp at a specified interval. Conversely, if the MAX BET switch is operated but a bet cannot be made, the MAX BET lamp may light in a specific color or not light at all.

The slot machine PS1 is also equipped with a MAX BET switch 18 that allows the user to bet the maximum number of coins set for each slot machine PS1 (three coins in this embodiment), and a 1 BET switch 19 that allows the user to bet one coin. The MAX BET process is executed when the MAX BET switch 18 is operated, and the 1 BET process is executed when the 1 BET switch 19 is operated. The MAX BET process is executable when the sum of the number of credits and the number of bets currently placed is three or more, and the number of bets currently placed is less than three. The MAX BET process cannot be executed when the sum of the number of credits and the number of bets currently placed is less than three (in other words, when the MAX BET switch 18 is operated, the number of bets is less than three), or when three bets have already been placed. The 1 BET process is executable when the number of credits is one or more, and the number of bets currently placed is less than three, but cannot be executed when three bets have already been placed.

Furthermore, each time the 1 bet switch 19 is operated, one bet is processed; if the 1 bet switch 19 is operated three times from a state where no bets have been placed, three bets will be placed; three operations of the 1 bet switch 19 are equivalent to one operation of the MAX bet switch 18.

Furthermore, while an embodiment has been described in which the 1 bet switch 19 is disabled when 3 bets have been made, the switch may be configured so that when 3 bets have been made and the 1 bet switch 19 is operated once, the switch will enter the 1 bet state and 2 credits will be returned.

Furthermore, while an embodiment has been described in which the max bet process, which is executed when the max bet switch 18 is operated, is not executed when the number of bets is less than three, a process in which the maximum number of bets that can currently be made is also conceivable. In other words, a process in which two credits are bet when the max bet switch 18 is operated when no bets have been made and the number of credits is two is also conceivable.

The maximum number of coins that can be bet may be configured to differ depending on the gaming state, such that the maximum number of coins that can be bet during non-bonus periods is 3, and the maximum number of coins that can be bet during bonus periods is 2.

<Sub switch 20>
The sub-switch 20 is located on the operation panel 11 and consists of a push-button made of a translucent material for direct operation by the player, a detector for detecting when the push-button is operated, and a sub-switch lamp for illuminating the push-button of the sub-switch. The sub-switch 20 is primarily used to display a menu screen (sometimes referred to as a user menu screen) on the display device 32 (described later). In addition to the sub-switch 20, the sub-control board 1000 also provides input devices such as a sub-cross key switch 21 (up switch, down switch, left switch, right switch) and a presentation switch (a switch operated by instructions during gameplay). The sub-switch 20 can also function as a trigger for activating a linkage system with a mobile device (hereinafter also referred to as a mobile-device linkage system), described later. While the sub-switch 20 is shown as a menu display function and the presentation switch is for operation during gameplay, they may be combined into a single switch.

The menu screen displays winning combination items, reel arrangement items, volume adjustment items, light intensity adjustment items, and items related to the mobile linkage system, and the cursor selecting an item is controlled to move up or down by operating the up or down switch of the sub-cross key switch 21. Furthermore, when the sub-switch 20 is operated while the cursor is positioned on one of the items, details of that item are displayed. For example, when the sub-switch 20 is operated while the cursor is positioned on the volume adjustment item, the volume adjustment screen is displayed, and the player volume can be adjusted by operating the left or right switch of the sub-cross key switch 21.

Note that the volume adjustment item on the menu screen can only change the volume of game sounds; it cannot change the volume of system sounds. Game sounds are sounds that can be output during gameplay or while waiting to play, such as bet sounds, wait sounds, reel start sounds, and other sounds related to effects. System sounds are mainly sounds that can be output when gameplay is not possible, such as error sounds, complete function activation sounds, and other system-related sounds. Each game sound has a set effect volume, so even if the player volume is the same, not all game sounds are output at the same volume. For example, when the player volume is set to level 5 out of 10, the volume of the bet sounds is 30 decibels, and the volume of the wait sounds is 20 decibels.

The menu screen can also be displayed by operating the sub-switch 20 after a game has finished and no bets have been placed. The menu screen is displayed by operating the sub-switch 20 regardless of whether the presentation state at that time is normal presentation, continuous presentation, automatic time display, or demo screen (a screen that appears 60 seconds after a game has finished, displaying the manufacturer's name and an introduction to the presentation as a moving image). However, this is not limiting to the present embodiment, and the menu screen may not be displayed even if the sub-switch 20 is operated during continuous presentation or automatic time display.

The volume may be changed using a rotary switch located inside the cabinet. Because the rotary switch is located inside the cabinet, it cannot be operated by the player. The rotary switch is a switch operated by an administrator, who can set the standard value for the volume that can be set by the player. For example, if there are eight volume levels that can be set by the player, the volume that can be set using the rotary switch also has eight levels, and if the volume setting on the rotary switch is "2," the initial volume for the volume adjustment item on the menu screen where the player volume can be adjusted will be "2." Alternatively, the rotary switch may be configured in a way that allows the player to set the volume within the range of volume levels set by the rotary switch.

<Show switch>
The effect switch is provided on the operation panel 11 and is composed of a push-down section made of a translucent material for direct operation by the player, a detection section that detects that the push-down section has been operated, and an effect switch lamp that illuminates the push-down section of the effect switch. When the effect switch is operated in a situation in which operation of the effect switch is valid, an effect based on the operation is executed. For example, when a series of effects is being executed on the display device (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "LCD") 32, one possible mode is to display "success" (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "successful effect"), which means that a bonus will be awarded in the final game of the series of effects, or "failure" (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "failed effect"), which means that a bonus will not be awarded.

In addition, when the operation of the effect switch is valid, the effect switch lamp lights up, thereby notifying the player that the operation of the effect switch is valid. The lighting mode of the effect switch can be set to be unlit when the operation of the effect switch is invalid, and lit when the operation of the effect switch is valid. Another lighting mode when the operation of the effect switch is valid may be set to alternately turn on and off at regular intervals.

In addition, when operation of the effect switch is valid, a display simulating the effect switch is displayed on the LCD to notify the user that operation of the effect switch is valid. When displaying the effect switch on the LCD, it is displayed based on a command received from the main control means 100. For example, it is possible to display the effect switch simulating the effect switch based on a start switch reception command, or to display the effect switch simulating the effect switch based on a command to stop all reels.

In addition, by pressing the performance switch, the detectable piece attached to the performance switch can be moved to a detection position (ON position) where it is detected by a sensor attached to the performance switch, and by releasing the performance switch while the sensor is detecting the detectable piece (an operation that uses the expanding force of the spring attached to the performance switch to return the spring to its natural length), the detectable piece can be moved to a non-detection position (OFF position) where it is not detected by the sensor.

Note that while the effect switch has been described as a push-button switch, it is not limited to this and may also be a jog dial switch. Other structures may also be used as long as they can detect the on and off positions.

<Settlement switch>
The settlement switch is provided on the operation panel 11. When operated after a game is completed, the settlement switch executes a process (settlement process) of paying out to the player the number of gaming media bet and the number of gaming media accumulated in the credit. Note that in this embodiment, when the settlement switch is operated under conditions in which a bet has been made and gaming media are accumulated in the credit, the bet gaming media are paid out first, followed by the gaming media accumulated in the credit. However, this is not limited to this, and a process of paying out the gaming media accumulated in the credit only when the number of gaming media bet is 0 may be executed. In other words, when the settlement switch is operated under conditions in which a bet has been made, only the bet gaming media are paid out, and then when the settlement switch is operated again, the gaming media accumulated in the credit may be paid out.

<Lower panel 5>
The lower panel 5 is provided below the front panel PS2. It is made of two sheets of transparent resin joined together, with a design sheet sandwiched between the two sheets of resin, and the design sheet is printed with a design that represents the characteristics of each slot machine PS1.

<Medal payout outlet 45>
The medal payout outlet 45 is provided below the lower panel 5. It is an outlet for discharging medals paid out from a hopper 44 (described later) to the outside of the slot machine PS1 (to the tray 28). It also serves as a return port for discharging medals rejected by a medal selector 34 (described later) to the outside of the slot machine PS1.

<Tray 28>
The tray 28 (also called the "lower tray") is provided below the lower panel 5. It has a generally concave structure so that it can receive and store medals released from the medal payout opening 45, and it protrudes toward the player so that the player can check the stored medals.

Other functions of the tray 28 include a cigarette ashtray 29 and a seal storage section 30 with an opening that can store a resin sheet with a license seal, patent seal, and model seal attached, and display them to the player.

<Speaker S>
The speakers S are provided at the top and bottom of the front panel PS2. They are connected to the sub-control board 1000 by a harness (not shown), and output sound effects that match the performance, as well as error sounds and warning sounds that notify users that an error has occurred.

<Display device 32>
The display device 32 is located above the front panel PS2. It is a device capable of displaying images, and various devices, such as a liquid crystal display, plasma display, organic electroluminescence display, or projector, can be used. It is electrically connected to the sub-control board 1000 and displays various visual effects, as well as game instruction images that indicate the order and key positions for pressing the stop switch 13 during play (when only the key positions are displayed, this may be referred to as a key position navigation image (also referred to as a key position image, or key position image)). When only the key positions are displayed, this may be referred to as a key position navigation image (also referred to as a key position navigation image (also referred to as a key position image)). When both the key positions and the key positions are displayed, this may be referred to as an operation mode navigation image (also referred to as an operation mode image) as a broader concept than the key positions and key positions), error images when an error occurs, etc. Some slot machines PS1 models do not include a display device 32. Some slot machines PS1 models include multiple display devices 32. Even if multiple display devices 32 are provided, unless otherwise specified, the term "display device 32" refers to any one of the multiple display devices 32, or multiple display devices 32.

<Other performance devices such as dot displays and movable props>
Other effect devices, such as dot displays and movable gadgets, are located at any position on the front panel PS2, such as around the display window 4, on the middle panel, or on the lower panel 5. The other effect devices are electrically connected to the sub-control board 1000 and display various effect images and actions, as well as game instruction images and actions that indicate the order and timing of pressing the stop switch 13 during play, and error images and actions when an error occurs. Other effect devices are optionally installed depending on the model of the slot machine PS1. Various devices, such as LCD displays, plasma displays, organic EL displays, and projectors, can also be used as other effect devices. In particular, in gaming machines equipped with an auxiliary LCD as an additional effect device, the display device 32 is sometimes referred to as the main display device, and the LCD as the other effect device is sometimes referred to as the sub-display device. In this case, the main display device has a larger display area than the sub-display device.

<Medal Selector 34>
The medal selector 34 is located inside the gaming machine on the back side of the front panel PS2 and is provided in the flow path below the medal insertion slot 17. The medal selector 34 has a medal counting function that counts the number of medals inserted by the player using a sensor provided on the flow path, a medal removal function that guides inserted non-standard medals to a tray 28, an ejection function that removes medals that have become stuck in the medal selector 34 when an eject switch provided on the front of the front panel PS2 is operated, and a blocker function that removes medals inserted at times other than when medals are being accepted from the flow path using an electrically driven blocking member (also referred to as a blocker). Furthermore, if a medal inserted when accepting medals is a regular medal, the medal selector 34 discharges the medal into a hopper 44 located downstream.

The various sensors within the medal selector consist of a passage sensor, insertion sensor 1, insertion sensor 2, and chute sensor. The passage sensor is the first sensor to detect medals inserted through the medal insertion slot, and is provided to count the number of inserted and ejected medals. Insert sensor 1 and insertion sensor 2 are located downstream of the passage sensor and blocker, and are provided to determine the passage time of medals passing insertion sensor 1 and insertion sensor 2, and to determine whether they pass normally or abnormally. Insert sensor 2 is located downstream of insertion sensor 1. The chute sensor is located downstream of insertion sensor 2, and is provided to count the number of inserted and ejected medals. The passage sensor and chute sensor have overlapping functions, so only one of them may be provided.

Furthermore, the passage sensor, insertion sensor 1, insertion sensor 2, or chute sensor may directly detect medals, etc. (medals or illegal devices) using an optical sensor, or a physical movable piece may move when it comes into contact with a medal, etc., and the moved movable piece may be detected by a proximity sensor.

When the blocker in the medal selector is ON, it allows game medals to pass through, and when it is OFF, it does not allow game medals to pass through. Allowing game medals to pass means that game medals inserted through the medal insertion slot are guided to the hopper 44, and not allowing game medals to pass through means that game medals inserted through the medal insertion slot are not guided to the hopper 44.

The following describes the components of the cabinet PS3 side of the slot machine PS1.

<PS3 Cabinet>
Cabinet PS3 is configured in the shape of a rectangular box with an opening on one side, and is provided inside with a reel unit 6, a hopper 44, an auxiliary tank 46, a setting key switch 37, a reset/setting switch 38 (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as the "reset switch" or "setting switch"), a power supply 39, a main control board 100, an external output terminal board 47, etc. It is also composed of a bottom plate, side plates (right side plate, left side plate), a top plate, and a back plate.

<Main control board 100>
The main control board 100 is housed in the internal space created when the main control board case body and the main control board case cover are fitted together, and the main control board case body and the main control board case cover are caulked together to prevent them from being easily opened or closed (sealed). The main control board 100 is fixed to a main control board case bracket inside the cabinet PS3.

<Reel unit 6>
The reel unit 6 is mainly composed of a reel frame, a left reel 8a, a center reel 8b, and a right reel 8c. The reel unit 6 is attached to a reel base 7 inside the center of the cabinet PS3 and fixed with locking members (screws or rivets).

The reels (left reel 8a, center reel 8b, right reel 8c) consist of a reel base, a reel tape with multiple designs attached to the outer periphery of the reel base, a stepping motor axially supported by the reel base, and a motor fixing base that fixes the stepping motor and is considered a reel unit. A different pattern arrangement is drawn on the reel tape for each reel.

When the start switch 12 is operated by the player, the reels are accelerated, and after reaching a constant speed (approximately 80 rotations per minute), the stepping motor moves one step each time a timer interrupt process (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as interrupt process) is executed, maintaining a constant rotation speed (constant rotation). Then, in response to the player's operation of the stop switch 13, the corresponding reel is moved at a constant rotation speed to a stop position determined for each stop operation acceptance position. After the reel has reached the stop position, the brake is applied (a four-phase excitation signal is output), stopping the reel's rotation and terminating the excitation output.

In addition, an index is provided on the spokes at the reel base of each reel, and an index sensor attached to the motor fixing base of each reel detects the index to determine the position of the reference pattern (also referred to as the initial pattern) during each rotation. In this embodiment, the stepping motor that drives the reels has 336 steps, and one rotation takes 336 timer interrupt processes during constant speed rotation. During constant speed rotation, a rotation failure detection counter is incremented every time the timer interrupt process is executed twice, and a rotation failure is determined when the counter value of the rotation failure detection counter reaches 180. In other words, a rotation failure is determined when the reel does not complete one rotation even after 360 timer interrupt processes have been executed. The rotation failure detection counter is set to 0 when an index is detected, and if the constant speed rotation process is normal, the rotation failure detection counter will reach 0 before reaching 180.

In this embodiment, a determination is made as to whether an index has been detected during constant speed processing, but a determination is not made as to whether an index has been detected during acceleration processing. However, this is not limited to this, and a determination may be made as to whether an index has been detected during constant speed processing and acceleration processing. This configuration makes it possible to more quickly bring a player into a state where a stop can be accepted.

In addition, a back lamp unit is provided on the motor fixing base of each reel, which lights up to highlight the stopped symbol after the reel has stopped, and also lights up to improve the visibility of the symbol while the reel is spinning.

<Hopper 44>
The hopper 44 is a device that mainly stores medals inserted by players. The hopper 44 is placed by engaging with rails attached to the bottom plate of the cabinet PS3 and can slide back and forth along the rails. The hopper 44 is composed of a storage tank section that receives and stores medals guided from the medal selector 34 into the gaming machine, a hopper motor that is driven by a drive signal input from the hopper drive means, a turntable that is journaled by the hopper motor and aligns the medals in the storage tank section, a medal payout section that has a discharge mechanism that rotates the turntable to discharge medals one by one into the tray 28, a medal discharge port from which medals are discharged by the medal payout section, and a payout sensor that detects medals discharged from the medal discharge port.

<Auxiliary tank 46>
The auxiliary tank 46 is configured to store medals, and medals stored in excess of the capacity of the storage tank of the hopper 44 are stored in the auxiliary tank 46 via a downwardly sloping rail provided in the storage tank. The auxiliary tank 46 has a rectangular box-like structure. When installed in the cabinet PS3, two full tank detection electrodes attached to the cabinet PS3 are exposed to the interior of the auxiliary tank 46 through through holes provided in at least one side. When a certain amount of medals inserted through the medal insertion slot are stored, the two full tank detection electrodes become electrically conductive via the medals, and it is determined that the hopper 44 and auxiliary tank 46 are full. Note that the number of full tank detection electrodes is not limited to two; the number may be changed, such as three. Furthermore, the method of full tank detection is not limited to using full tank detection electrodes; full tank detection may also be possible by a sensor provided at a predetermined position detecting medals.

<Setting key switch 37>
The setting key switch 37 is provided on a setting key switch unit with a door on the front side inside the slot machine PS1. After opening the front panel PS2, access is gained by opening the door on the setting key switch unit. To turn on the setting key switch 37, insert the setting key and rotate it 90 degrees clockwise. When the setting key switch 37 is turned on while medals can be accepted, the current setting value can be confirmed, and if the setting key switch 37 is determined to be on during the power-on recovery process (also referred to as the power-on process) when the power is turned on, the setting change process is executed.

<Power supply device 39>
The power supply unit 39 is located at the lower left of the cabinet PS3 when viewed from the front. The power supply unit 39 has a rectangular box-like structure, an external power switch 40, and an internal power supply board for generating voltage. The power supply unit 39 is individually connected to the reel device board and the sub-control board 1000 via harnesses (not shown), and is further connected from the reel device board to the main control board 100 via a harness to supply power to the main control board 100.

When the power switch 40 is turned on, the power supply device 39 takes in power from outside the slot machine PS1, then generates a predetermined voltage and causes the main control board 100 and the sub-control board 1000 to take in the predetermined voltage.When the power switch 40 is turned off, the power supply device 39 is configured not to take in power from outside the slot machine PS1.

<External output terminal board 47>
The external output terminal board 47 (also referred to as the external centralized terminal board 47) is generally installed inside the cabinet PS3 of the slot machine PS1, and converts signals related to game results output from the main control board 100 into signals in a predetermined format and transmits them to the outside of the slot machine PS1. Game results include the number of coins inserted, the number of coins paid out, the number of bonuses (number of big bonuses, number of regular bonuses), a door opening signal, etc. Other conditions for transmitting signals to the outside can be set based on predetermined information controlled by the main control board 100, such as when the automatic timer is activated, when a specific symbol combination is displayed, or when the value of a game-related counter reaches a predetermined value.

<Function block diagram>
A functional block diagram of the slot machine PS1 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

<Main control board 100>
In the slot machine PS1 of this embodiment, a main control board 100 (also referred to as main control means 100, main control board 100, or main control means 100) that controls the general flow of a game is electrically connected to a sub-control board 1000 (also referred to as sub-control means 1000, sub-control board 1000, or sub-control means 1000), a door relay board (also referred to as central display board), a reel device board, a reset/setting switch 38, a setting key switch, etc., thereby enabling data communication. However, two-way communication is not possible between the main control board 100 and the sub-control board 1000, and data communication is possible via one-way communication from the main control board 100 to the sub-control board 1000.

The main control board 100 is equipped with a main control chip. The main control chip allows data communication between the main control CPU, main control ROM, main control RAM, etc. via a bus. The main control chip also has a main control built-in register, and the main control built-in register and the main control CPU can communicate data with each other via a bus. The main control chip also has general-purpose registers (e.g., A register, B register, C register, D register, E register, H register, L register) that the main control CPU can use for calculations, etc., a PC register that stores the program (return address) after a return command (e.g., RET command) after executing a program in response to a call command (e.g., CALL command), and interrupt registers (e.g., IFF1 register, IFF2 register) that manage the enable/disable status of maskable interrupts.

The main control chip controls the role drawing (also referred to as internal drawing), reel drive control (also referred to as reel control), payout control, etc., and transmits data to various boards as appropriate. Furthermore, when a selected role (also referred to as AT role, AT target role, push order role, eye-pressing role, or operation procedure role including both push order role and eye-pressing role) is won as a result of the internal drawing, and information regarding the display of the selected role (push order, operation timing) is notified on the main control means 100 side, the sub-control means also notifies the sub-control means by transmitting selected role information (selected role group information, information regarding the display of the selected role). This enables the sub-control means to also notify the sub-control means of information regarding the display of the selected role. Note that all processing related to the AT, such as transitioning to the AT, extending the number of AT plays, and notifying the push order, is sometimes referred to as processing related to the instruction function. Note that a push order role is a conditional device in which the stopping symbol combination and the game medals awarded to the player differ depending on the order in which the reels are stopped (push order), and a press timing role is a conditional device in which the stopping symbol combination and the game medals awarded to the player differ depending on the timing at which the stop button is operated.

The main control ROM mounted on the main control board 100 has a storage capacity of "16 KB or less," and includes a usage area (also referred to as the first program area) of "7.5 KB or less," and an area outside the usage area (also referred to as the second program area). The usage area includes a control area (also referred to as the first control area) of "4.5 KB or less" in which programs executed by the main control board 100 are stored, and a data area (also referred to as the first data area) of "3.0 KB or less" in which only information other than programs (e.g., internal lottery table information) is stored, or will be stored. Similar to the usage area, the area outside the usage area also includes a control area (also referred to as the second control area) and a data area (also referred to as the second data area). The usage area stores programs related to the progress of the game, while the area outside the usage area stores programs related to anti-fraud measures and programs used for gaming machine testing.

The main control RAM mounted on the main control board 100 has a memory capacity of "1024B or less," and has a usable area of "512B or less" (also referred to as the first working area) and an area outside the usable area (also referred to as the second working area). The first working area is a memory area that can be rewritten as the game progresses, and the second working area is a memory area that can be rewritten when programs for anti-fraud measures and gaming machine testing are executed.

The main control RAM built into the main control chip has storage areas for switch status flags indicating the on/off status of the play stop switch and the automatic settlement switch, a storage area for setting value information indicating which of several RT states is set (1-6), a storage area for RT state information indicating which of multiple RT states the current state is in, a storage area for specific condition devices indicating the winning status of specific condition devices such as bonuses, a storage area for game information storing other information necessary to progress the game, unused storage areas, a storage area for the stack area where data saved from registers is stored, and a storage area for the temporary stack area set when the power is turned on.

The main control RAM is initialized when the setting change process is performed by the setting change means (sometimes referred to as "when the setting change device is activated" or "when the setting change mode is entered"), when the power is restored after a power outage, and at the start of each game; the range of the main control RAM's memory area that is initialized differs depending on the case.

If power recovery cannot be performed normally during the setting change process, or if an unrecoverable state occurs (an unrecoverable error occurs), data 0 is set (initialized) to the RAM area excluding the storage area for the switch status flag. In other words, only the switch status flag carries over the state before the setting change; for example, the RT status and condition device flags are cleared and not carried over. However, this is not limited to this, and all RWM areas including the switch status flag may be initialized.

In addition, during the setting change process, if recovery from a power outage can be performed normally or if the state is not one in which recovery is impossible, that is, if the setting change process is performed normally, data 0 is set in the RAM area excluding the areas storing the switch status flag, setting value information, RT status information, and specific condition device. In other words, the RT status, setting value data, and condition device flag are inherited so that the game state before the setting change is maintained and play becomes possible with the setting values after the setting change. The setting value data inherits the information before the setting change, and new setting values are set in the subsequent setting change process, so it is used in the sub-control board 1000 to determine whether a setting change has been made.

In addition, during power-off recovery processing, and at the start of each game, data 0 is set to unused memory areas in the RAM area, and during power-off recovery processing, data 0 is set to memory areas in the stack area excluding the most used area when RAM is initialized after power-off recovery.

The main control internal registers built into the main control chip are used to set the operation of each peripheral circuit (e.g., timer circuits) built into the main control chip and control their functions.

For example, by writing (also called setting or storing) data to a specified memory area in the main control built-in register using a program stored in the main control ROM, it is possible to make settings (timer circuit settings) for maskable interrupt processing (e.g., timer interrupt processing), which is one of the programs stored in the main control ROM.

<Sub-control board 1000>
The sub-control board 1000 is equipped with a sub-control chip. The sub-control chip has a sub-control CPU, sub-control ROM, sub-control RAM, etc. that can communicate data with each other via a bus. The sub-control board 1000 is capable of two-way communication with the performance control board, and transmits data specifying the performance to be output to the speaker S, LED lamp, sub-switch 20, performance switch, etc. Information to the display device 32 is transmitted as data to the image control board. The sub-control board 1000 is also supplied with power directly from the power supply board.

<Reel device board>
The reel device board is a relay board that communicates data between the reel motor, reel sensor, door switch, payout sensor, external output terminal board 47 (also referred to as external central terminal board 47), etc. and the main control board 100. The reel motor controls the drive of the reels. The reel sensor is a sensor that determines whether the reels are operating normally and transmits data to the reel device board when a protruding piece (also referred to as an index) passes the sensor. The door switch is a sensor that determines whether the front door PS2 is open or not. The payout sensor is a sensor that determines whether medals pass through properly when being paid out from the hopper 44. The external central terminal board is a relay board that transmits data to a hall computer outside the gaming machine. In addition, the reel device board is supplied with power directly from the power supply board.

<Door relay board>
The door relay board receives input information from various sensors in the selector (insertion sensor 1, insertion sensor 2, passage sensor, chute sensor), bet switch information, stop switch information, and settlement switch information, and outputs information from the selector, credit number information, bet number information, replay symbol combination display information, and payout number information. The door relay board is electrically connected to the selector, bet switch, stop switch, settlement switch, credit number display 26, payout number display, replay lamp, 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, 3 bet lamp, start lamp, medal insertion possible lamp, and advantageous zone lamp.

<Performance control board>
The performance control board (also called the performance control means) is electrically connected to the sub-switch 20, the sub-cross key switch 21, the performance switch, the movable parts, the speaker S, the back lamp, the LED lamp provided on the front panel PS2, and the image control board that controls the display content of the display device 32.

The performance control means is configured to be capable of two-way communication with the sub-control means 1000, and controls the performance output to the performance device based on the performance commands received from the sub-control means 1000.

The effect control means selects the effect content based on the results of the lottery for the winning combination performed by the internal lottery means. In this embodiment, multiple types of effect content are prepared in advance, and the effect control means selects the effect content by lottery using software random numbers after the lottery for the winning combination performed by the internal lottery means has been performed, such as at the start of a game.

In addition, there are multiple types of presentation effects depending not only on the results of the winning combination lottery but also on the results of the freeze combination lottery and the game state (RT state, freeze state), etc. Specifically, there are multiple types of presentation effects corresponding to when a bonus combination is won, when a small combination is won, when a replay is won, when a non-win is won, etc.

The presentation content determines what kind of presentation will be output (how the lamp will light, flash, or go out, what kind of sound will be output from the speaker S, what kind of image will be displayed on the display device 32, etc.) and at what timing (when the start switch 12 or each stop switch 13 is operated, etc.) as the game progresses.

It is also possible to generate effects output by the effect control means in response to player operation. For example, effects could be generated by the effect control means of the sub-control board 1000 based on sub-control commands sent from the main control board 100 in response to operation signals from the start switch 12, stop switch 13, medal slot 17, bet switches (MAX bet switch 18, 1 bet switch 19), settlement switch, etc., whose operation signals are input to the main control board 100. Effects could also be generated directly from the sub-control board 1000 in response to sub-input switch operation means, such as the sub-switch 20, sub-cross key switch 21, and effect switches, whose operation signals are input to the sub-control board 1000. Furthermore, although the sub-control board 1000 and the effect control board are separate boards, they may also be configured as a single board. In this case, the sub-control board 1000 may have the functions and processing of the performance control board, and the sub-switch 20, sub-cross key switch 21, performance switch, movable props, speaker S, back lamp, LED lamps provided on the front panel PS2, and image control board that controls the display content of the display device 32 may be electrically connected to the sub-control board 1000.

<Image control board>
The image control board (also referred to as image control means) is provided with an image control ROM, a sound ROM, a cooling fan, etc. for specifically displaying the performance content on the display device 32.

<Additional information on board configuration>
The sub-control board and the performance control board may be configured on one (single) board, or the sub-control board, performance control board, and image control board may be configured on one board. When the sub-control board and the performance control board are configured on one board, two sub-control CPUs and two performance control CPUs may be provided, or one CPU may be used. The same applies when the sub-control board, the performance control board, and the image control board are configured on one board.

<Power supply board>
In the slot machine PS1 of this embodiment, power is supplied from the power supply board to the reel device board and the sub-control board based on the operation of the power switch 40. The power supplied to the reel device board is then supplied to the main control board 100 and the door relay board. The supplied power is then supplied to each component, thereby electrically connecting them. The power supplied to the sub-control board 1000 is then supplied to the performance control board, and then to the image control board. The supplied power is then supplied to each component, thereby electrically connecting them.

Next, we will explain the control of the main control board 100, which controls the gameplay of the gaming machine.

<Error type>
Errors are broadly divided into recoverable errors and unrecoverable errors.

<Recoverable error>
Recoverable errors are errors that indicate selector-related errors (medal retention errors, medal backflow errors, medal passing time errors), hopper 44-related errors (hopper retention errors, hopper empty errors, abnormality detection errors), door open errors, harness disconnection errors, etc. When a recoverable error is set, if the cause of the various recoverable errors is removed and the reset switch is operated, it is possible to return to play without having to turn the power back on. During a recoverable error, information about the error that has occurred is displayed on the display device 32, payout number indicator, and various lamps to inform the player of what error has occurred.

If a recoverable error is detected during play, the game may be stopped at the time of detection, or may be stopped after the game in which the recoverable error was detected has ended. By stopping game progress during a recoverable error, damage to the amusement facility manager can be minimized even if the recoverable error occurred due to fraud. The condition for recovering from a recoverable error state may be configured to automatically recover once the cause of the error has been removed; an error that can be recovered from without cycling the power is called a recoverable error.

<Unrecoverable error>
In the slot machine PS1 of this embodiment, when an irrecoverable error occurs, interrupts are prohibited, the output of the output port is cleared, and other measures are taken to restrict the progress of the game, and the fact that an irrecoverable state has occurred is notified by displaying a message on the credit number display 26 according to the type of error.

Furthermore, when a recoverable error is set, the recoverable error is cleared when a reset switch (not shown) is operated; however, once an unrecoverable error is set, the unrecoverable error cannot be cleared by simply operating the reset switch or by cycling the power. In this case, the unrecoverable error is cleared by performing a setting change process. When the power is cycled during an unrecoverable error, part of the power-off recovery process is executed, and then the unrecoverable error display is repeatedly displayed, preventing further game processing from being executed.

Irrecoverable errors include when the number of coins bet during the draw is outside the specified number, when a value is not within the normal range during a setting value error check, when it is determined that the power outage processing was not performed correctly when power is restored (sometimes called an "RWM (RAM) abnormality" or "RWM (RAM) error"), when a random number abnormality is detected, such as when an abnormality in the crystal oscillator frequency is detected, or when a symbol combination corresponding to a role that is not on a winning line is stopped during the winning determination process.

In addition, if an unrecoverable error occurs, game progress will be halted regardless of whether the game is in progress or in standby mode (from the end of one game until the start of the next).

<How to play, game flow>
To play the slot machine PS1, first, a predetermined number of medals to bet (also called a prescribed number) is set by inserting medals into the medal insertion slot 17 or by operating the MAX BET switch 18 or 1 BET switch 19 to bet medals stored in advance. In this embodiment, the prescribed number is set to three medals. By setting the number of medals to bet, the pay line is set to be valid, and the game becomes available.

If a new medal is inserted through the medal insertion slot when the number of medals bet is set to the upper limit, the number of game medals stored in the credits will increase. The maximum number of medals that can be stored in the credits is 50. If medals that exceed the upper limit of the number of medals bet (3 medals) and the upper limit of the number of medals stored (50 medals) are inserted through the medal insertion slot (the 54th medal), the medal selector's blocker is turned off (a state that prevents medals from being inserted into the gaming machine) and the medals are returned to the tray. In other words, when the upper limit of the number of medals bet and the upper limit of the number of stored credits are reached, the blocker is turned off (no path to the hopper 44 in the selector is formed).

When medals are inserted, the bet amount is added when the bet amount is less than three (less than the maximum bet amount in the game state when the medals are inserted). Furthermore, when medals are inserted, they can be saved as credits when the bet amount is three (the maximum bet amount in the game state when the medals are inserted) and the credits are less than 50 (less than the maximum number of credits that can be saved). In other words, when the sum of the bet amount and the saved credits is less than 53, the medals will enter the gaming machine when inserted through the medal slot. Note that another condition for medals to enter the gaming machine when inserted is that they are in standby mode (the period from the end of a game to the start of the next game). For example, if a symbol combination related to a replay is displayed and the game is in standby mode after the automatic bet process has been executed, the medal insertion requirement is met. In this case, three medals have been bet in the automatic bet, so if the saved credits are less than 50, the medal insertion requirement is met.

Next, when operation of the start switch 12 is accepted, an internal lottery process is executed, and after determining the result of the internal lottery process (also referred to as the role lottery result or condition device number), it is determined whether the minimum play time (also referred to as the wait time (period) or 4.1 second timer) has elapsed. If the wait time has elapsed, the reels begin to spin, but if the wait time has not elapsed, the reels wait without spinning until the wait time has elapsed.

Next, when operation (stop operation) of any of the stop switches 13 (left stop switch 13a, middle stop switch 13b, right stop switch 13c) is accepted, the reel corresponding to the operated stop switch 13 will stop according to the result of the role lottery and the timing when the stop operation was accepted. When all reels stop (also called a full stop), a determination is made as to whether or not the stopped symbols determined when each reel was stopped are abnormal. If no abnormalities are found, a search is made to determine which symbol combination has stopped. Depending on the symbol combination that corresponds to the search results, processing such as medal payout (including addition to credits), replay setting (automatic betting), bonus state setting, bonus state termination, RT state setting, and RT state termination is carried out, and one game is completed.

<Freeze processing>
The freeze process (also called freeze effect) that temporarily stops the progress of the game for a predetermined period of time may, for example, temporarily stop functions related to the progress of the game, such as accepting game media, accepting the operation of a bet switch to determine the number of pre-credited game media to be bet, accepting the operation of the start switch 12 to start the game, or accepting the operation to stop the reels. The freeze process (freeze effect) is a process controlled by the main control board 100.

The freeze effect may temporarily halt all of the aforementioned functions related to the progress of the game, or it may temporarily halt only some of the functions.

Examples of ways to temporarily suspend game progress include not performing control processes based on player operation (processing to form a path for guiding medals to the hopper 44 using blocker control, processing to set the number of coins to bet based on operation of the bet switch, processing to spin the reels or perform an internal lottery based on operation of the start switch 12, and processing to stop the reels based on operation of the stop switch 13).

When an input signal based on a player's operation is issued while game progress is paused by a freeze effect, the game will not perform control processing based on the input signal, will not accept the input signal, or will delay sending the input signal until a specified period has passed, thereby delaying the timing of the end of a single game compared to when the freeze effect is not performed.

Regarding freeze effects that are performed based on the operation of the start switch 12, examples include cases where, when the start switch 12 is operated, the reels do not rotate for a predetermined period of time, but then rotate the reels after the predetermined period has passed; cases where, when the start switch 12 is operated, an internal drawing and reel rotation are not performed for a predetermined period of time, but then an internal drawing and reel rotation are performed after the predetermined period has passed; cases where, when the start switch 12 is operated, an internal drawing is performed but the reels do not rotate for a predetermined period of time, but then the reels rotate after the predetermined period has passed; cases where, after the start switch 12 is operated and an internal drawing is performed, a predetermined period is set during which the reels rotate and stop during the predetermined period; cases where, after the start switch 12 is operated and an internal drawing is performed and the reels are rotated, a predetermined period is set during which the stop switch 13 is disabled for the predetermined period of time.

Regarding the freeze effect that is performed based on the operation of the stop switch 13, the control process for the freeze effect differs between the freeze effect that is performed based on the acceptance of the operation of the stop switch 13 and the freeze effect that is performed based on the stop display of a specific symbol on the reel as a result of the operation of the stop switch 13.

One example of control processing for freeze effects based on acceptance of stop switch 13 operation is when the left stop switch 13a is operated to freeze while all reels are spinning. After the left reel corresponding to the left stop switch 13a stops, the middle stop switch 13b and right stop switch 13c are disabled for stop operation. This prevents the player from stopping the spinning middle and right reels for a specified period of time, but after the specified period has elapsed, the middle stop switch 13b and right stop switch 13c are enabled for stop operation, delaying the timing until the end of a single game.

Control processing for freeze effects that is performed when a specific symbol is displayed frozen on a reel as a result of accepting the operation of a stop switch 13 may include disabling the acceptance of the stop of the last stop switch 13 when a specific symbol is displayed frozen on each reel due to the acceptance of the operation of a stop switch 13 other than the last stop switch 13, or not performing control processing such as setting the number of coins to be bet based on the operation of a bet switch to start the next game, detecting the insertion of gaming media using a passage sensor, or automatic betting when a replay stops on an active line, based on the acceptance of the operation of the last stop switch 13 when a specific symbol is displayed frozen on each reel due to the acceptance of the operation of the last stop switch 13.

During the specified period during which the freeze effect is performed, game progress control based on player operation is temporarily suspended, but gaming machine operations unrelated to game progress can still be performed. For example, even if stop control processing based on operation of the stop switch 13 is not performed, the reel rotation pattern can be set as desired, such as rotating in the normal rotation pattern, or rotating at a slower or faster speed than normal.

The reel rotation patterns during a specified period of time may include rotating the reels in the opposite direction to normal rotation (so-called reverse rotation), rotating the reels a specified number of times and then stopping a specific symbol combination, stopping a specified reel among multiple reels while the other reels start spinning, changing the reel rotation speed, or changing the reel operation due to player operation.

The specified period for which the freeze effect is performed can be changed according to specified conditions. Here, specified conditions include the detection of a signal based on the operation status of various switches by the player (operation status of the start switch 12, bet switch, stop switch 13, or settlement switch, etc.), and the results of a freeze lottery. Examples of changing the period include shortening or lengthening the specified period for which the freeze effect is performed, during which game progress is temporarily stopped, or switching the reel rotation pattern.

Control processes for shortening the pause period include forcibly terminating the pause period or rewriting it to a period shorter than the pause period. Control processes for lengthening the pause period include adding another period after the pause period or rewriting the pause period to a longer period. Furthermore, the pause period based on the freeze effect does not need to have an upper limit, and may continue until a certain result is reached based on the result of accepting an operation.

The pause period during which the freeze effect is performed may be set after the wait period has elapsed, or it may be set to include the wait period. If the wait period is included, the wait period is compared with the freeze effect period, and if the freeze effect ends during the wait period, the freeze effect is executed during the wait period. If the freeze effect does not end during the wait period, the freeze effect period may be set after the wait period, or the remaining wait period may be resumed after the freeze effect ends. Furthermore, if the freeze effect period is longer than the wait period, it is possible to omit the process of comparing the wait period with the freeze effect period and start the freeze effect after the start switch 12 is operated (after the internal lottery process).

A freeze effect (also called a pseudo game) can be performed during acceleration processing, making it appear as if normal play is in progress. In pseudo play, the start switch 12 is operated, and a pseudo game period is determined during the reel acceleration process after an internal lottery is performed. During the pseudo game period, reel rotation is controlled as in normal play (reel rotation is controlled based on operation of the start switch upon the start of pseudo play), and reel stop control is performed based on operation of the stop switch 13. The reels may also be configured to rotate again when the start switch 12 is operated during the pseudo game period. However, internal lottery processing based on operation of the start switch 12, and winning determination processing or payout control processing based on operation of the stop switch 13 are not performed.

In addition, in simulated games, when the reels stop due to the operation of the stop switch 13, or when the reels stop automatically as part of a reel effect, the stopped reels are caused to oscillate up and down (so-called oscillating fluctuations). This allows the player to determine whether they are playing a normal game or a simulated game when they operate the stop switch 13.

Furthermore, when an acceleration process is executed to start the real game (sometimes referred to as the "main game") after the pseudo game has ended, a random delay process is executed to randomize the timing at which each reel starts to spin. For example, if a seven-symbol combination stops during the pseudo game and the main game starts with the same symbol position, it would be easier to line up all seven symbols in the main game (a so-called aid to eye-pressing). To prevent this from happening, the timing at which each reel starts to spin is randomized using the random delay process to spread out the symbol combinations that stop during the pseudo game.

Random delay processing sets a timer for each reel to wait for the start of rotation, updates the set timer value with each timer update process in the interrupt processing, and starts rotation from the reel whose set timer value reaches 0. If, as a result of the random delay processing, the timer values for all reels reach 0 and it is determined that all reels are rotating at a constant speed, it becomes possible to accept stop switches for the reels.

In addition, if random delay processing is not incorporated, the symbol combination before the start of the pseudo game may be stored, and the symbol positions may be returned to that symbol combination before the start of the actual game, and then the reels may begin to spin.

<Pattern combinations that do not require technical intervention>
A symbol combination that does not require technical intervention means a symbol combination that can always stop and display the winning symbol combination on an active line, no matter when the stop switch 13 is operated while the reels are spinning. For example, when bell symbols are arranged every three symbols on all reels, bell-bell-bell always stops (a 100% draw rate), so this symbol combination can be said to not require technical intervention. Hereinafter, a 100% draw rate will be referred to as PB=1, and a winning symbol combination with a 100% draw rate on all reels will sometimes be referred to as a PB=1 role.

On the other hand, PB≠1 means that the winning symbol combination will not stop depending on the timing of when the stop switch 13 stops while the reels are spinning. For example, if there is a location within the pull-in range where there are no symbols related to a winning symbol (e.g., 5 symbols apart), then PB≠1, and this winning symbol may be referred to as a PB≠1 symbol.

<Small win priority control, bonus priority control>
Small win priority control means that when a small win and a bonus are won at the same time, or when a small win is won within a bonus, if both a symbol related to a small win and a symbol related to a bonus can be drawn in, the symbol related to the small win is drawn in.

Bonus priority control means that when a small win and a bonus are both won, or when a small win within a bonus is won, if both a small win symbol and a bonus symbol can be drawn, the bonus symbol will be drawn.

Also, since replays have the highest priority and cannot be missed, when the condition device flags for replay and small win, or replay and bonus, are turned on at the same time, the replay symbol will always be drawn.

<Normal section>
The normal interval is an interval in which processing related to the instruction function cannot be performed. When a push order role is won in the normal interval, a process is executed to send masked information (effect group number) indicating which push order was won to the sub-control means 1000. Also, when a push order role is won in the normal interval, the notification of the push order (both correct and incorrect push orders) is not displayed on the instruction monitor. As a result, in the normal interval, both the main control means 100 and the sub-control means 1000 do not notify the push order even if the push order role is won, so even if the push order role is won in the normal interval, it is always unclear whether it is correct or incorrect. In other words, this is a game interval in which the AT state does not occur.

<Advantageous Zone>
The advantageous zone is a zone in which processing related to the instruction function can be executed, and is set up to prevent excessive medal acquisition by the AT. If you win the advantageous zone transition lottery held in the normal zone, you can transition to the advantageous zone. In the advantageous zone, a transition lottery to the AT can be held, or the AT state can occur, but in order to prevent excessive medal acquisition as mentioned above, the advantageous zone is designed to end based on certain conditions and transition to the normal zone.
in particular,
Examples of such conditions include: 1) when 1,500 games have been played since the next game after the transition to one advantageous zone; 2) when more than 2,400 medals have been won since the next game after the transition to one advantageous zone; and 3) when any given condition is met. These conditions can prevent excessive medal acquisition. Note that the 1,500 games in 1) may be 4,000 games, or 65,535 games, which is the maximum number that can be stored in a 2-byte memory area. Alternatively, the advantageous zone may be configured not to end after a predetermined number of games. Examples of the given condition in 3) include when one automatic timer ends or when a specific symbol combination is displayed.

If it is a favorable zone, information indicating that it is a favorable zone (also called the favorable zone type) is stored in a specified RAM area. If the value stored in that RAM area is 0 (if the favorable zone type is 0), it indicates that it is a normal zone, and if the value stored in that RAM area is 1 (if the favorable zone type is 1), it indicates that it is a favorable zone.

<Advantageous Zone Lamp>
A favorable zone lamp is provided as information on the main side indicating that the player is in a favorable zone. This allows the player to easily determine whether or not the player is in a favorable zone by checking whether the favorable zone lamp is lit. Specifically, a lit DP on the credit number display 26 indicates that the player is in a favorable zone, while an unlit DP on the credit number display 26 indicates that the player is not in a favorable zone. The favorable zone lamp may be lit after all reels have stopped, after a bet switch operation is accepted, upon detection of the first medal inserted during servicing, upon detection of the second medal inserted during servicing, upon detection of the third medal inserted during servicing, after acceptance of a start switch, or after a winning combination is selected by an internal lottery. The lamp is always lit when the player is in a favorable zone, operation procedure information for a winning combination is announced, and the payout rate (maximum payout rate) for the game being announced exceeds 1 (increases).

In addition, the machine is designed so that the advantageous zone lamp will light up even when it is notified of the push order sequence to transition to RT, which has a high replay probability but does not have a payout rate of more than 1 due to the machine's specifications not being equipped with a push order minor feature. This is to inform the player that the advantageous zone lamp is in an advantageous state, and to prevent players from suffering losses due to not understanding the machine's specifications.

However, if the conditions for lighting the advantageous zone lamp as described above are not met, it is acceptable to choose the timing for lighting the advantageous zone lamp after moving into a new advantageous zone.

In addition, once the advantageous zone lamp is lit, it will remain lit until the advantageous zone ends, and will be turned off before the start switch operation for the next game after the advantageous zone ends (after all reels have stopped, after the bet switch operation is accepted, when the first medal inserted for maintenance is detected, when the second medal inserted for maintenance is detected, or when the third medal inserted for maintenance is detected).

By configuring it in this way, it is possible for a player to be in a favorable zone even when the favorable zone lamp is not lit, and it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation that processing related to the instruction function will be executed even when the favorable zone lamp is not lit. As a result, while in the past, if the player was in a normal zone, the game consisted of simply waiting to move to the favorable zone, with the gaming machine of this embodiment, even if the favorable zone lamp is not lit, there is a possibility that an AT transition lottery or the like is being held, making it possible to maintain motivation to play.

Furthermore, when the advantageous zone type is 1, it does not necessarily mean that the zone is advantageous. This is because in a game where the zone is in the normal zone (advantageous zone type is 0) and the advantageous zone transition lottery is won, causing the advantageous zone type to become 1, the advantageous zone type is 1, but the zone has not yet transitioned to the advantageous zone, so the game state is still in the normal zone. When executing the process to send a test signal to determine whether the zone is advantageous or normal, referencing the advantageous zone type will result in sending a signal for the advantageous zone even though the zone is normal, and so a signal different from the intended state will be sent.

To prevent this situation, when a test signal indicating whether the zone is advantageous or normal is sent, the value of the advantageous zone clear counter is referenced. When the value of the advantageous zone clear counter is 0, processing is executed to output a test signal indicating that the zone is normal, and when the value of the advantageous zone clear counter is not 0 (the value of the advantageous zone clear counter is 1 to 1500), processing is executed to output a test signal indicating that the zone is advantageous. By configuring it in this way, the processing for outputting the test signal can accurately identify the state simply by determining whether the value of the advantageous zone clear counter is 0, thereby eliminating pressure on program capacity and improving program execution speed. Furthermore, as mentioned above, when the advantageous zone is terminated under any termination condition, the value of the advantageous zone clear counter is set to 1, so the processing for outputting the test signal can accurately output that the zone is advantageous even in games where the advantageous zone ends.

<Main game mode>
The main gaming state is a gaming state managed by the main control means, and is not necessarily the same as the RT state. For example, the main gaming state is determined in accordance with the AT, sub-bonus, CZ, normal interval, etc., which will be described later. When only the main gaming state transitions, the probability of determining the internal lottery result by the internal lottery means does not change. The main gaming state is used by the main control means to manage the gaming state, and the performance related to the instruction function such as the AT winning probability, the freeze winning probability, or the trigger for output to the external terminal is determined for each main gaming state.

<AT>
AT is an abbreviation for assist time, and is also called the notification period, which is a period for making it easier for a player to win a role that has been selected by lottery (hereinafter referred to as notification). Generally, means for notifying during AT include the operation timing of the stop switch, the operation order of the stop switch, and the operation timing and operation order of the stop switch, and are also called operation procedures or operation modes.

<Sub-bonus>
A sub-bonus is a type of AT, and is different from the bonuses that can be won by internal lottery (Type 1 BB, Type 2 BB, RB, CB, and SB, which will be described later). It is basically the same as an AT, but is characterized by the fact that when a sub-bonus starts, the sub-bonus starting symbol combination is stopped by reel effects, simulated play, or push order, etc. It should be noted that even when simply referred to as "AT," the concept includes sub-bonuses.

<Grouping of choice roles>
When a selected role is won during a non-AT game, the main control means 100 transmits to the sub-control means 1000 an effect group number indicating that the selected role has been won, and when a selected role is won during an AT game, the main control means 100 transmits the effect group number and operation procedure information to the sub-control means 1000. In other words, because operation procedure information is not transmitted to the sub-control means 1000 during a non-AT game, the sub-control means 1000 is unable to notify the operation procedure. As a result, it is unclear from the sub-control means 1000 side which operation procedure will display a symbol combination advantageous to the player during a non-AT game, but because operation procedure information that will display a symbol combination advantageous to the player is transmitted during an AT game, the operation procedure can be notified by the liquid crystal display device and operation indicator lamp on the sub-control means 1000 side. This allows the player to easily recognize the operation procedure and also prevents the operation procedure information from being illegally obtained during a non-AT game.

<Processing related to instruction function>
The processing related to the instruction function is a concept that includes not only AT-related lotteries such as AT transition lotteries, AT additional lotteries, updating of AT termination conditions (addition/subtraction of the AT game count, addition/subtraction of the AT execution notification count), and AT execution (notifying the operation mode), but also processing related to AT state management. The processing related to this instruction function can be executed for a predetermined number of bets for each game state, and if multiple bet numbers are set as specified numbers in a certain game state, the processing is configured to be executed only for one of the bet numbers. For example, if two-coin bets and three-coin bets are possible in the bonus internal state, the processing related to the instruction function can be executed only when playing with a three-coin bet, and the processing related to the instruction function cannot be executed when playing with a two-coin bet. In other words, when playing with a two-coin bet, even if a winning combination for the AT lottery is selected, the AT lottery is not executed, and the AT game count is not updated as the game progresses. Furthermore, if a single bonus (SB) or bonus bonus (CB) that ends after one game is exclusively for two-coin bet play, and the game after the SB or CB ends with a two-coin bet or a three-coin bet, if a replay is won on the SB or CB and the number of coins automatically bet is two, the processing related to the instruction function becomes impossible in the game after the SB or CB ends (processing related to the instruction function can be executed with a three-coin bet). Therefore, the number of coins automatically bet when a replay is won on the SB or CB is set to three. This allows the processing related to the instruction function to be executed even in the game after the replay is won on the SB or CB, eliminating a game that is disadvantageous to the player. Note that, as mentioned above, the processing related to the advantageous zone is configured to be executed regardless of the number of coins bet.

<Instruction monitor>
During AT, when reporting information about the operation procedure of the push order role, the operation procedure information may be reported using the number of coins acquired display. Specifically, in the case of push order role A (left, center, right correct), "1" is displayed on the instruction monitor, in the case of push order role B (left, right, center correct), "2" is displayed on the instruction monitor, in the case of push order role C (center, left, right correct), "3" is displayed on the instruction monitor, in the case of push order role D (center, right, left correct), "4" is displayed on the instruction monitor, in the case of push order role E (right, left, center correct), "5" is displayed on the instruction monitor, and in the case of push order role F (right, center, left correct), "6" is displayed on the instruction monitor.

With this configuration, players can know the correct button press order by checking the instruction monitor. Furthermore, because the instruction monitor is controlled by the main control board, it can accurately notify players of the correct button press order even if the sub-control board is tampered with.

Also, if the indicator monitor also doubles as the number of coins won display, the lower digits may display the numbers (1-6) mentioned above, and the upper digits may display an identifier "=". In this case, the identifier can be used to determine whether the number of coins won display is displaying the number of coins won or the push order, so the player's recognition can be unobstructed.

Also, if the instruction monitor is configured as a dedicated display, a three-digit seven-segment display may be used. The reason for using three digits is that it corresponds to the number of reels. Then, for push order A (left, center, right correct), "123" is displayed on the instruction monitor; for push order B (left, right, center correct), "132" is displayed on the instruction monitor; for push order C (center, left, right correct), "213" is displayed on the instruction monitor; for push order D (center, right, left correct), "312" is displayed on the instruction monitor; for push order E (right, left, center correct), "231" is displayed on the instruction monitor; and for push order F (right, center, left correct), "321" is displayed on the instruction monitor. This configuration makes it easier for players to intuitively grasp the push order on the instruction monitor, allowing them to easily grasp the correspondence between the push order and the display on the instruction monitor.

The timing for displaying the push order on the instruction monitor is preferably within a favorable zone, and any time after the push order role is selected through an internal lottery executed based on the operation of the start switch, and before the stop switch can be operated. With this configuration, the push order can be notified to the player before they operate the stop switch, preventing them from operating the stop switch with an incorrect push order.

<Status display monitor (role ratio monitor)>
The role ratio monitor is a display device that switches between displaying the cumulative advantageous zone ratio or cumulative instruction-included role ratio (selectable depending on the specifications of the gaming machine; also called instruction-included role ratio), consecutive role ratio for the most recent 6,000 games, role ratio for the most recent 6,000 games, cumulative consecutive role ratio, cumulative role ratio, and cumulative role etc. status ratio every 4,800 ms, and is capable of displaying a four-digit number by using four 7-segment LEDs (with DP). Of the four-digit number displayed by the four 7-segment LEDs, the top two digits are called the identification segment, and the bottom two digits are called the ratio segment.

In terms of the reel ratio, "reel" refers to Type 1 special reels (known as RB), Type 2 special reels (known as CB), and standard reels (known as SB). The "reel ratio" is calculated as the payout during reel operation divided by the total payout multiplied by 100. Payouts during operation of Type 1 special reel continuous operation devices (known as BB) and Type 2 special reel continuous operation devices (known as MB) are also included in "payouts during reel operation," but payouts during regular play during BB and regular play during MB are not included in "payouts during reel operation." Note that "payout" is a term that does not subtract the number of coins inserted, and when the number of coins inserted is calculated, it is referred to as the difference in the number of coins (difference). The combined concept of Type 1 special reel continuous operation devices and Type 2 special reel continuous operation devices is sometimes simply referred to as the reel continuous operation device.

In the continuous feature ratio, "continuous feature" refers to a Type 1 special feature (known as RB), and the "continuous feature ratio" is a ratio calculated by: payout during activation of a Type 1 special feature ÷ total payout × 100. Note that payouts during activation of a Type 1 special feature continuous activation device (known as BB) are also included in "payouts during feature activation," but payouts during regular play during BB are not included in "payouts during feature activation."

In the command-inclusive device ratio, "command-inclusive devices" include payouts from games in which the command function is activated (so-called automatic transmission). The "command-inclusive device ratio" is a ratio calculated by (payouts while the command function is activated, or payouts while the device is activated) ÷ total payouts × 100. Here, (payouts while the command function is activated, or payouts while the device is activated) does not refer to payouts from games in which the command function is activated and the device is activated, but rather refers to the sum of payouts from games in which the command function is activated and the device is activated. If the game in which the command function is activated is also a game in which the device is activated, the payout for that game is (payouts while the command function is activated, or payouts while the device is activated), rather than the sum of the two payouts. Note that if a player operates the stop switch incorrectly during a game in which the automatic transmission is activated, they may not receive the maximum payout; in this case, the calculation is based on the actual payout.

The information displayed in the identification segment on the winning combination monitor is information for identifying which of the following ratios is being displayed: cumulative advantageous zone ratio, cumulative instructed combination ratio, consecutive combination ratio for the most recent 6,000 games, combination ratio for the most recent 6,000 games, cumulative consecutive combination ratio, cumulative combination ratio, or cumulative combination status ratio. These are displayed as "7U.", "7P.", "6Y.", "7Y.", "6A.", "7A.", or "5H.", respectively. For example, when "7U." is displayed in the identification segment, it indicates the cumulative advantageous zone ratio, and when "6Y." is displayed in the identification segment, it indicates the consecutive combination ratio for the most recent 6,000 games. The "." displayed on the winning combination monitor refers to decimal points.

Of the information displayed on the winning ratio monitor, the information displayed in the ratio segment allows the calculation results of various ratios to be visually confirmed, and is displayed as a two-digit number using two 7-segment LEDs. For example, if the calculation result is 70, "70" will be displayed in the ratio segment. The calculated result will be rounded down to the nearest integer. If the calculation result is 100, "99" will be displayed. If the cumulative number of games played is less than 400, the ratio segment will display "00".

The identification segment flashes if the cumulative number of games played is less than the reference number of games. The reference number of games is determined according to various ratios, and is 175,000 games for the cumulative advantageous zone ratio, 175,000 games for the cumulative instructed role ratio, 6,000 games for the consecutive role ratio over the most recent 6,000 games, 6,000 games for the role ratio over the most recent 6,000 games, 17,500 games for the cumulative consecutive role ratio, 17,500 games for the cumulative role ratio, and 175,000 games for the cumulative role and other status ratio.

The ratio segment blinks when the displayed value is equal to or greater than the threshold. The threshold is determined according to the various ratios, and is 70 for the cumulative advantageous zone ratio, 70 for the cumulative indicated feature ratio, 60 for the consecutive feature ratio over the most recent 6000 games, 70 for the feature ratio over the most recent 6000 games, 60 for the cumulative consecutive feature ratio, 70 for the cumulative feature ratio, and 50 for the cumulative feature state ratio. Note that if the cumulative number of games is less than 400 and the calculation result is equal to or greater than the threshold but the ratio segment displays "00", the ratio segment will light up.

To check whether the role ratio monitor is operating normally, a test pattern is displayed in the identification segment and ratio segment for 4800 ms after the power is turned on and the timer interrupt process is started. The test pattern is displayed by flashing all segments (including DP) of the four 7-segment LEDs that make up the role ratio monitor. For example, "8.8.8.8." may be displayed in flashing mode. In addition to being displayed immediately after power is turned on, the test pattern may also be displayed during setting changes, setting confirmation, or an RWM (RAM) abnormal error.

In the identification segment, when the cumulative number of games played is less than the reference number of games played, when the displayed value in the ratio segment is equal to or greater than the threshold, and when a test pattern is displayed in the identification segment and ratio segment, the segment is displayed in a flashing mode. Specifically, the flashing mode is displayed by alternating between lighting and off every 300 ms, such as lighting 300 ms → lighting 300 ms → lighting 300 ms → off 300 ms → .... In addition, when various ratio information is switched, it starts with lighting, so that the display period of various ratio information does not become longer or shorter depending on the timing of lighting and flashing.

As described above, the cumulative advantageous zone ratio or cumulative indicated role ratio, consecutive role ratio for the most recent 6000 games, role ratio for the most recent 6000 games, cumulative consecutive role ratio, cumulative role ratio, and cumulative role status ratio displayed on the role ratio monitor are configured to switch display contents every 4800 ms, but by setting this 4800 ms to a multiple of 600 ms, which is one set of lighting and blinking, it is possible to configure the display so that one of the 7-segment LEDs is always lit, even if the various ratios displayed on the role ratio monitor are displayed in blinking mode when they are switched.

By configuring it in this way, the display starts with lighting even when various ratio information switches, so it is possible to continuously display the display without any sense of incongruity due to a shift in the blinking cycle.

In addition, the display period for the test pattern after power-on as mentioned above is also set to 4800 ms, so once the test pattern has finished displaying for 4800 ms, the 7-segment LED will turn off, and the next timer interrupt process will turn it on and display information regarding the cumulative advantageous zone ratio or cumulative instructed role ratio.

Next, we will explain how to control the blinking display on the ratio monitor.

In order to flash the display mode of the role ratio monitor, a memory area (_TM_CHG_FLS) is provided for managing the time for switching the light on and off. The memory area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time for switching the light on and off is a 2-byte memory area, and a process of adding 1 is executed for each timer interrupt process. The memory area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time for switching the light on and off is initialized (0 is stored) when the power is turned on, and thereafter cycles through the values 0 to 299 each time a timer interrupt process is executed. In other words, the value following 299 is 0.

Example 1) When the memory area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time to switch the light on and off is "0" and an update process is performed, the memory area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time to switch the light on and off becomes "1." In this case, the carry flag becomes 1 (the carry flag becomes 1 because a borrow occurs as a result of calculating "0-299").)

Example 2) When the memory area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time to switch the light on and off is "298" and an update process is performed, the memory area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time to switch the light on and off becomes "299." In this case, the carry flag becomes 1 (the result of calculating "298 - 299" is a borrow, so the carry flag becomes 1).

Example 3) When the memory area (_TM_CHG_FLS) used to manage the time for switching the light on and off is "299" and an update process is performed, the memory area (_TM_CHG_FLS) used to manage the time for switching the light on and off becomes "0". In this case, the carry flag becomes 0 (the result of calculating "299 - 299" is that no borrow occurs, so the carry flag becomes 0).

As mentioned above, if the memory area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time to switch the light on and off is a value between 0 and 298, the carry flag will be 1; if the memory area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time to switch the light on and off is 299, the carry flag will be 0. In other words, the carry flag will be 0 every 300 ms.

When the carry flag = 0, the blinking switch flag (_FL_CHG_FLS) is configured to be updated. The blinking switch flag (_FL_CHG_FLS) is initialized (stores 0) when the power is turned on, and when 0 is stored in the blinking switch flag (_FL_CHG_FLS), the role ratio monitor is turned on, and when 1 is stored in the blinking switch flag (_FL_CHG_FLS), the role ratio monitor is turned off. In other words, since the carry flag = 0 every 300 ms, by repeatedly storing 0 and 1 in the blinking switch flag (_FL_CHG_FLS) every 300 ms, it is possible to have the display mode of the role ratio monitor alternate between a lit state and an off state every 300 ms (blinking display).

The winning ratio monitor is displayed in a blinking mode when the cumulative number of games played in the identification segment is less than the reference number of games, when the displayed value in the ratio segment is equal to or greater than the threshold, or when a test pattern is displayed in the identification segment and ratio segment. In all other cases, the monitor is displayed in a lit mode without referencing the blinking switch flag (_FL_CHG_FLS). However, since the memory area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time for switching between on and off is updated for each timer interrupt process regardless of whether the blinking switch flag (_FL_CHG_FLS) is referenced, the blinking switch flag (_FL_CHG_FLS) is also updated as needed, and even when switching from not referencing the blinking switch flag (_FL_CHG_FLS) to referencing it, the timing of the light turning on and off and the timing of the various ratio displays can be displayed without any discrepancy.

<Program start processing flow>
The program start process executed by the main control board 100 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

When the power is turned on, the main control board 100 performs initial settings related to the operation of the gaming machine. Specifically, it sets the interrupt mode, sets the main CPU functions, and performs a RAM check process to create power-off recovery data. The RAM check process determines whether the checksums of all RAM are normal; if the conditions are met, the power-off recovery data is determined to be normal; if the conditions are not met, the power-off recovery data is determined to be abnormal.

Next, the status of the setting key switch signal and door open detection switch signal is checked to determine whether the setting key switch 37 and door open detection switch are on.

If the setting key switch 37 and door open detection switch are on, it is determined whether the power failure recovery data is normal or in a recoverable state. If the power failure recovery data is normal or in a recoverable state, a first initialization range is set to be initialized in the initialization process of the setting change process, and the process proceeds to the setting change process of Figure 10. If the power failure recovery data is not normal or in a recoverable state, a second initialization range is set to be initialized in the initialization process of the setting change process, and the process proceeds to the setting change process of Figure 10. After the setting change process, the process proceeds to the game progress main of Figure 9.

If the setting key switch 37 and door open detection switch are not on, it is determined whether the power failure recovery data created in the RAM check process is normal. If the power failure recovery data is abnormal or in an unrecoverable state, an unrecoverable error is notified and the process transitions to unrecoverable error processing, which stops game progress on the slot machine PS1. On the other hand, if the power failure recovery data is not abnormal or in an unrecoverable state, the process transitions to the power failure recovery processing of Figure 8. After the power failure recovery processing, the process transitions to the main game progress of Figure 9. Note that after the power failure recovery processing, the state saved when the power failure was detected is restored, so the process does not necessarily start from the beginning of the main game progress.

In addition, when handling an unrecoverable error, interrupts are prohibited and output from the output port (output of sub-control commands, output of excitation signals to the stepping motor, etc.) is cleared. Then, the acquired coin count display 27 repeatedly displays (announces) the error.

<Power off processing>
The power-off process executed by the main control board 100 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In this embodiment, when the power switch 40 is turned off or a power outage occurs, causing a power outage or other interruption in the power supply (also referred to as a power outage), the operating voltage required to operate the slot machine PS1 drops. If the operating voltage falls below a threshold, the voltage monitoring circuit detects the power outage and generates a power outage detection signal, which is input to the input port of the main control chip. Then, if it is determined that the power outage detection signal has been input during the timer interrupt process, the power outage process is executed. Note that the determination of whether the power outage detection signal has been input during the timer interrupt process may be made in a single timer interrupt process, or in multiple timer interrupt processes (two or more times). In other words, when determining whether a power outage has occurred during multiple timer interrupt processes, if it is determined that the power outage detection signal has been input during the first interrupt but not during the second interrupt, the power outage process is not executed. This is to prevent the power outage process from being executed in the event of noise or a momentary interruption (when the voltage momentarily drops below the threshold but immediately rises above the threshold).

During power-off processing, output ports are cleared, periodically executed interrupts are prohibited from occurring, and the interrupt prohibit/enable status at the time of power-off is saved. Next, used registers are saved and the stack pointer is saved. After saving, the power-off processing completed flag, which indicates that power-off processing has been performed, is turned on and checksum data for all RAM areas is calculated and saved. RAM writing is then prohibited and the system waits for a reset. The address range of the saved stack pointer, whether the power-off processing completed flag is set, and whether the checksums for all RAM areas are normal are determined during power-off recovery processing.

<Timer interrupt processing>
The timer interrupt process executed by the main control board 100 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In this embodiment, timer interrupt processing is configured to occur periodically every 2.235 ms (milliseconds).

When timer interrupt processing begins, the necessary data stored in the registers is compared.

Next, it determines whether a power outage has been detected by whether a power outage detection signal has been received, and if it determines that a power outage has been detected, it executes power outage processing.

Next, the input ports that determine input from various sensors and operation switches are read, and the input port data generation process is executed.

Next, reel drive control is performed. Reel drive control involves controlling and updating the drive state of each reel depending on whether it is accelerating, rotating at a constant speed, starting to decelerate, decelerating, or stopped.

Next, data to be output for each output port (such as excitation signals for the stepping motor and drive signals for the hopper 44) is created and port output processing is performed to output various signals.

Next, a check is made to see if any abnormalities have occurred. These abnormalities include whether the current setting is normal, and whether the operation pattern of the dispenser and dispenser sensors is normal.

Next, external signals such as bonus signals, ART signals, and security signals, as well as medal insertion signals and medal payout signals, are set (controlled on/off) and external signal output is performed to send them to an external terminal board to be output to an external system such as a hall computer.

Next, the control command transmission process is executed. If a sub-control command has been set during the control command transmission process, the sub-control command is output to the sub-control board 1000.

Next, control is performed regarding the lighting of various LEDs. To control the lighting of various LEDs, the RWM memory area indicating whether the various LEDs are lit or not is checked, and if a value indicating a lit state ("1" in this embodiment) is stored, a lighting signal for that LED is output, and if a value indicating an off state ("0" in this embodiment) is stored, a lighting signal for that LED is not output (or an off signal is output).

Various LEDs are used to control lamps such as the 1-3 bet lamp, replay lamp, start lamp, medal insertion lamp, credit number indicator, winning number indicator, stop switch lamp, and MAX bet lamp.

Next, it outputs notification data to be sent to the sub-control board, such as the sound of the stop switch being operated or the sound of a medal being inserted.

Next, a signal related to the performance test is output.

Next, restore the registers.

Next, the interrupt enable flag is set to on and the timer interrupt processing ends.

The types of sub-control commands include a start command issued when the start switch is operated, a winning information command indicating the results of the internal lottery, a start reel rotation command issued when the reels start accelerating, a left reel stop command, a middle reel stop command, a right reel stop command, and an all reel stop command issued when the stop switches for stopping the reels are operated.

Furthermore, the timer measurement process may be performed within the timer interrupt process.
In timer measurement, a control process is performed to update information about the timer (time) stored in the RWM (RAM). For example, a process is performed to update (e.g., subtract 1) the value stored in the RWM memory area (hereinafter also referred to as timer area A) that monitors (manages) the minimum game time (4.1 seconds) for one game. In addition to the RWM memory area that monitors the minimum game time, the RWM may have memory areas related to multiple timers, such as a memory area (hereinafter also referred to as timer area B) that monitors (manages) the insertion of game medals using the insertion button, and a memory area (hereinafter also referred to as timer area C) that monitors (manages) the output time of an external signal.
In this case, the timer measurement executes a process of subtracting 1 from the value stored in a storage area of the RWM that stores information about the timer (hereinafter also referred to as a timer area), such as a process of subtracting 1 from the value stored in timer area A, a process of subtracting 1 from the value stored in timer area B, or a process of subtracting 1 from the value stored in timer area C. Furthermore, if a timer measurement is performed when the value stored in a certain timer area is "0", the value stored in the certain timer area is set to "0".

Note that while the control process for updating the information about the timer stored in the RWM was described as subtracting 1 from the value stored in the timer area, it may also be a process of adding 1 to the value stored in the timer area.

Here, the monitoring (management) of the insertion of game medals using the insertion button will be explained.
Monitoring (management) of the insertion of game medals using the insertion button is a timer that starts counting from the time the bet process is executed based on the operation of the 1 bet switch 19, and is a timer that prevents the process of determining whether the next 1 bet switch 19 has been operated from being executed until the value of the timer reaches "0".

For example, under certain circumstances where the number of credits is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (e.g., when the number of bets is 0, the number of credits is 3, and a bet can be made by operating the 1-bet switch 19), a bet process is executed based on the operation of the 1-bet switch 19, and then "20" is stored in timer area B. Thereafter, the timer measurement of the timer interrupt process subtracts "1." Then, when the timer interrupt process has been executed 20 times, the value stored in timer area B becomes "0." Note that if the value stored in timer area B is not "0" (when the value stored in timer area B is any value between "1" and "20"), the game progress main process does not determine whether the 1-bet switch 19 has been operated. In other words, even if the 1-bet switch 19 is operated when the value stored in timer area B is not "0," the bet process is not executed. After that, once the value stored in timer area B becomes "0," the bet process can be executed when the 1-bet switch 19 is operated.

This configuration prevents multiple bet processes from being executed due to a malfunction despite a single operation of the 1 bet switch 19. It also prevents a malicious player from repeatedly pressing the 1 bet switch 19, which would result in multiple bet processes being executed based on the operation of the 1 bet switch 19 and commands based on the execution of bet processes being sent consecutively to the sub-control means 1000.

<Power off recovery process>
The power-off recovery process executed by the main control board 100 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In this embodiment, when the power switch 40 is turned on to turn on the power, the main control board 100 executes a power-off recovery process to restore various data to the state it was in before the power was turned off.

The power failure recovery process restores the stack pointer and restores output data related to the sub-control command sent to the sub-control board 1000. It then determines whether the set setting value data is within the normal range. If the determination reveals an abnormality (the value is outside the specified range), it moves on to unrecoverable error processing. On the other hand, if the value is normal (the value is within the specified range), it initializes unused RAM areas, activates a periodically executed interrupt, and reads the input port. It then clears the power failure processing completion flag, restores used registers, and restores the interrupt disable/enable state that was in place at the time of the power failure, and terminates the power failure recovery process. Note that when the power failure recovery process is completed, the system returns to the state before the power failure occurred; if it does not return to the normal state (when settings are changed), the main game progress control process is restarted.

In this embodiment, the interrupt is activated at a predetermined timing within the power-off recovery process, but the interrupt may also be activated after the power-off recovery process of the program start process.

<Main explanation of game progress>
The main control process for game progress executed by the main control board 100 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

The main control board 100 executes the game value insertion process. In the game value insertion process, automatic insertion processing is executed when a game is replayed (if a game is not replayed, medal insertion via the automatic insertion processing is not executed). The game then enters a medal insertion waiting state. In the game value insertion process, the game waits for the insertion of a medal through the medal insertion slot 17 or the operation of the bet switch. When a medal is inserted or the bet switch is operated, the game board determines whether a bet is possible (whether the amount of the bet is stored in the credits, or whether the number of bets is at the upper limit), and if a bet is possible, updates the number of bets or the number of credits. The game board then determines whether the number of bets that allows a game to be played has been placed, and if it determines that a bet has been placed, determines whether the start switch 12 has been operated. If it determines that no bet has been placed, the game board waits for the insertion of a medal, or, if the amount of medals is stored in the credits, for the operation of the bet switch (if the amount of medals is stored in the credits). If the number of bets required to allow a game to be played has been placed and the start switch 12 has been operated (the start switch signal is determined to be on), an internal lottery process is carried out; if the start switch 12 has not been operated (the start switch signal is not determined to be on), the system waits for the start switch 12 to be operated.

In the internal lottery process, a random number for internal lottery is generated and a predetermined calculation process is performed using the obtained internal lottery random number value to determine the winning combination (condition device number). After the winning combination is determined, a stop control table corresponding to the stop timing of each stop switch is created in advance, and preparations are made so that stop control can be executed even if stop switch operation is accepted immediately after stop switch operation acceptance after reel rotation is permitted.

The types of winning combinations available on the PS1 slot machine can be broadly divided into bonuses, small combinations, and replays.

A bonus is a device that activates in predetermined circumstances. Generally, it activates when the symbol combinations "7-7-7" or "7-7-bar" are displayed frozen on the active line in the display window 4. The activation of bonus-related devices changes the number of symbol combinations that result in a winning combination for each set number, and changes the probability of activating the condition device for each winning symbol combination for each set number. Bonuses are divided into RB, BB, CB, MB, and SB.

RB is an abbreviation for regular bonus, and is also known as a first-class special bonus. RB is generally set to end when eight small wins or 12 game results are achieved, and during RB, the winning combination is drawn using an RB medium combination drawing table, which sets the winning probability of a small win higher than the normal combination drawing table.

BB is an abbreviation for Big Bonus, and is also referred to as a continuous operation device for Type 1 special roles. The end condition for BB is set to the payout of more than a predetermined number of game medals (for example, 269 medals) related to winning a small role, and during BB, a role is drawn using a BB role drawing table, which sets the probability of winning a small role (described below) higher than the normal role drawing table. Note that a BB role drawing table does not need to be set during BB. For example, a BB role drawing table that continuously operates the RB role drawing table described below until the BB end condition is met may be referred to as a BB role drawing table.

CB is an abbreviation for Challenge Bonus, and is also known as a Type 2 special feature. CB can be set to a state in which at least all minor features are won, regardless of the results of the feature lottery. Furthermore, during CB, stop control that differs from normal stop control is performed on predetermined reels. For example, it is possible to control the left reel 8a to stop within 75 milliseconds of 190 milliseconds.

As described above, the CB may be configured so that at least all minor winning combinations are achieved, preventing the display of symbol combinations that would be displayed according to the operating procedure (also known as missed combinations). For example, during the CB, the left reel 8a may be controlled to stop within 75 milliseconds of 190 milliseconds, so that if it stops within 190 milliseconds, a specific symbol can be displayed on the pay line with any operating timing, but if it stops within 75 milliseconds, a specific symbol cannot be displayed with a specific operating timing.

MB is an abbreviation for middle bonus, and is also called a continuous operation device for second-class special features. MB is set to end when, for example, more than 153 medals are paid out for a small prize, when RB is won, or when SB, which will be described later, is won.

SB is an abbreviation for single bonus, and is also called a regular bonus. The end condition for SB is set to be the result of one game. During SB, the bonus is drawn using the SB medium bonus lottery table, which sets the probability of winning a small bonus higher than the regular bonus lottery table.

In this embodiment, BB uses a BB mid-role lottery table to draw the winning combination, but this is not limited to this. During BB, the game may be played using a BB general role lottery table in which the winning probability of a small role is set to the same probability as the normal role lottery table and the winning probability of an RB is increased, or an RB mid-role lottery table in which the winning probability of a small role is set higher than the normal role lottery table. Even in this case, the end condition for BB is still set to a payout exceeding a predetermined number of medals for winning a small role. Furthermore, the means that control these bonuses are collectively referred to as special game control means.

A minor win is a win in which a symbol combination based on a winning minor win is displayed on a winning line, and when the winning determination process (described below) determines that a win has been achieved, medals are paid out based on the symbol combination that is displayed on the winning line.

A replay (also known as a replay role) is a role that grants a replay (a game in which the next game can be played by automatic betting without inserting new medals) when a symbol combination based on a winning replay is displayed stopped on an active line and determined to be a winning prize by the winning determination process. A replay cannot be missed in a winning game, so the next game after a winning replay is always a replay.

If the result of the lottery is that the player does not win any of the bonus, small win, or replay roles, it is a loss and the winning process described below will not be carried out. When it is a loss, a symbol combination that does not relate to any role will be displayed on the active line.

Of the roles selected by the role lottery, for BB, RB, and MB, if the symbol combination does not stop and display on an active line in a winning play, the winning flag can be carried over to the next play or later (special role carry-over means). While the winning flag is carried over, the role lottery may be performed using the role lottery table before the winning flag was carried over, or the role lottery may be performed using a carry-over role lottery table corresponding to the winning flag (also referred to as an internal-internal lottery table or internal-internal role lottery table). When using the carry-over role lottery table, if a symbol combination based on the winning BB, RB, or MB stops and displays on an active line, it is determined that the transition conditions for the role lottery table are met, and a transition is made from the carry-over role lottery table to the role lottery table corresponding to the winning flag.

The winning probability for multiple types of roles is set in the role selection table, and multiple types of role selection tables are provided depending on the game state. For example, there is a BB role selection table used during BB, and an MB role selection table used during MB, etc.

The winning combination table sets single winning combinations, where one type of symbol combination can be displayed stop on an active line, and multiple winning combinations, where multiple symbol combinations can be displayed stop on one or more active lines, according to the results of the winning combination lottery.

For multiple symbol combinations set as overlapping winning roles, all symbol combinations may be set to be able to display one winning role depending on the operation mode, or some symbol combinations may be set to be unable to display a winning role. Among these overlapping winning roles, roles corresponding to some symbol combinations that cannot be displayed are sometimes referred to as control roles.

The role of the control utility is to control the effective line on which the symbols are displayed to differ depending on the type of control utility set as the overlapping winning role, even if the same symbol combination can be displayed on the effective line as a result of multiple role draws.

The winning flag control means turns on the flag corresponding to the winning role when any role is selected as a winning role in the role lottery results. Then, when the player operates all stop switches 13 and the prize-winning process for the winning role is completed, the means turns off the flag corresponding to the winning role.

Furthermore, for the above-mentioned BB, RB, and MB, a flag is turned on in a winning game, but if the winning BB, RB, or MB symbol combination is not displayed stopped on the active line when all stop switches 13 are operated, the flag is carried over to the next game or later in the on state, the above-mentioned carryover role lottery table is set, and the winning BB, RB, or MB symbol combination is displayed stopped, completing the winning processing for the winning role, and the flag corresponding to BB, RB, or MB is turned off.

The role selection table also includes an RT role selection table. RT is an abbreviation for replay time, and refers to a gaming state in which the probability of winning a replay in the role selection is different from that of the normal role selection table.

As a specific example of the use of RT, the losing area of the normal role lottery table may be replaced with a replay to increase the probability of winning a replay, or the replay area of the normal role lottery table may be replaced with a losing area to decrease the probability of winning a replay.
Furthermore, the normal role lottery table and the replay area may be the same, but the type of replay that is won within the replay area may be different.
The slot machine PS1 is provided with a plurality of RT role lottery tables, and is configured to transition to another RT state when a predetermined transition condition is met for each.

The transition conditions for the RT role lottery table are as follows: Transition condition 1 is when a specific symbol combination (symbol combination related to a bonus, RT transition symbol combination) is displayed as a stop symbol; transition condition 2 is when a bonus is won; transition condition 3 is when BB, RB, or MB of the bonus ends; transition condition 4 is when a specified number of plays have been played since a specific symbol combination (RT transition symbol combination) is displayed as a stop symbol; and transition condition 5 is when a specified number of plays have been played since BB, RB, or MB ends. These transition conditions for the RT role lottery table can be set appropriately depending on the gameplay.

The number of entries refers to the number of winning entries for each lottery result as determined in the internal lottery table by the internal lottery means. For example, if the total number of entries is 65,536, the winning probability is calculated by dividing each entry by 65,536. For example, the winning probability for a given lottery result with a number of entries of 4 is 1/16,384.

In addition, the number of replays can be changed when any of transition conditions 1 to 5 in the RT role lottery table described above is met. For example, if the replay probability for RT1 is 1/7.3 and the replay probability for RT2 is changed to 1/1.5 when transitioning from RT1 to RT2, the replay probability for RT2 can be changed to 1/1.5. This reduces the loss of medals by transitioning to a state with a high replay probability, making the game more interesting.

Freezing may be performed after the start lever is operated, depending on the results of the internal lottery performed by the internal lottery means and whether or not freeze numbers from previous or subsequent games have been stored. If freezing is performed using the start lever, reel spinning start processing may be performed at the end of freezing without performing processing to determine whether the next minimum play time has elapsed.

Next, it checks whether the minimum play time (equivalent to 4.1 seconds) set during the previous game has elapsed. If it is determined that the minimum play time has elapsed (if the minimum play time timer value is determined to be 0), a new minimum play time is set. If it is not determined that the minimum play time has elapsed (if the minimum play time timer value is not determined to be 0), the value of the minimum play time timer is decremented and then a check is made to see if the minimum play time has elapsed. This minimum play time check process is executed until it is determined that the minimum play time has elapsed, and the main game progress process is configured so that no other processing is executed between the processing to determine the minimum play time and the processing to set the new minimum play time. This prevents the minimum play time from being extended by other processing, allowing gameplay to begin as soon as possible. In other words, it is possible to prevent gameplay from being prolonged without making the player wait.

However, this is not limiting, and the system may be configured to execute other processing as the main game progress processing between the processing for determining the minimum play time and the processing for setting a new minimum play time. In this case, the other processing may be processing for clearing the RWM address, processing for storing other data in the RWM, or other commands with short processing times. These processing times are extremely short, so the user will not notice an extension to the minimum play time. After the new minimum play time is set, processing to prepare for the start of reel spinning is executed.

The reel spin start preparation process initializes the data related to reel stops saved in the previous game, sets the stop table to be used in the current game, requests the output of the start of rotation of all reels, and sets a sub-control command (reel spin start command) that indicates the start of rotation of the reels.

The stop table is set up to correspond to the symbol control number determined by the results of the role lottery conducted by the internal lottery means, and predetermines the reel stop positions corresponding to the operation timing of the stop switch 13.

After the reel spin preparation process is complete, processing related to the freeze effect (for example, the reel effect before the reels start spinning) is executed. The freeze effect involves slightly moving the reels or spinning them in reverse, primarily to indicate the likelihood of a winning combination.

If a freeze effect is not executed, or after a freeze effect has been executed and the execution of that freeze effect has finished, a process to spin the reels (also called reel rotation process, reel rotation start process, or reel rotation start process) is executed. There are four reel rotation states: acceleration state, constant speed rotation state, stop preparation state, and stop state, and the acceleration state is set when the reels are to be rotated. In the acceleration state, a process is executed to gradually rotate the stepping motor using timer interrupt processing.

The acceleration process performed in the acceleration state is the process performed from a state in which the reels are stopped until constant-speed rotation processing is performed. In constant-speed rotation processing, the stepping motor is moved one step for each timer interrupt processing. However, if constant-speed rotation processing is suddenly performed while the reels are stopped, the torque will be insufficient and there is a high possibility of step-out. For this reason, acceleration processing is necessary to gradually rotate the reels. Note that in this embodiment, the acceleration process first moves the stepping motor one step after 50 timer interrupt processing, then moves the stepping motor one step after 30 timer interrupt processing, then moves the stepping motor one step after 10 timer interrupt processing, then moves the stepping motor one step after five timer interrupt processing, then moves the stepping motor one step after two timer interrupt processing, and then moves the stepping motor one step after one timer interrupt processing. This then leads to constant-speed rotation processing, in which the stepping motor is moved one step for each timer interrupt processing.

When constant speed rotation processing is being performed, the value of the rotation failure detection counter described above is incremented for each timer interrupt processing to detect rotation failure. Note that the rotation failure detection counter's initial value is set to 0, so it is incremented for each timer interrupt processing. However, if the initial value of the rotation failure detection counter is set to 180, the rotation failure detection counter's value can be decremented for each timer interrupt processing, and it can be determined that a rotation failure has been detected when it reaches 0.

In addition, when in a constant speed rotation state, the stop switch is permitted to be operated and a wait is made for the stop switch to be operated. When the stop switch is permitted to be operated, the stop switch lamp lights up blue to notify the player that the stop switch is active (when the stop switch is not permitted to be operated, the lamp lights up red). Control of the stop switch lamp illumination may be performed by the main control means 100 or the sub-control means 1000. Furthermore, when executing push order navigation, the stop switch lamp illumination control may be configured to flash, for example, to make it easier for the player to recognize which stop switch to operate.

A command indicating that the reels have started to spin is sent to the sub-control means 1000, and when the sub-control means 1000 receives this command, it sets a reel spinning time timer that measures the reel spinning time and starts counting. When the value of the reel spinning time timer reaches a predetermined value (equivalent to 3 minutes), it displays "Please stop the reels" (a reel stop warning image) on the LCD screen to prompt the player to continue spinning the reels. The reel spinning time timer is initialized when the stop switch is operated (when the stop switch operation is accepted), and counts again if there are any reels that are still spinning. In this way, the reel spinning time timer continues to be updated until all reels have stopped.

If the reel stop warning image is displayed at the same time as the push order navigation, it will be displayed in front of the push order navigation. This ensures visibility of the reel stop warning image even when the display areas of the reel stop warning image and the push order navigation overlap, clearly prompting the player to operate the stop switch. Also, since there is a risk that the push order navigation may become difficult to see at this time and players may not know which reel to stop, the reel stop warning image may be hidden (or made smaller or moved) by operating a sub-switch or special switch, etc., so that the push order navigation can be recognized.

After enabling acceptance of stop switch operation in the game progress main processing, the process of determining whether or not a stop switch operation has been accepted (reel stop acceptance check process) is repeated until the stop switch is operated. If it is determined that any stop switch has been operated, stop control (also known as slip control) is executed for the reel corresponding to the operated stop switch. At this time, the reel corresponding to the operated stop switch transitions from a constant speed rotation state to a stop preparation state. In the stop preparation state, the reel continues to rotate at a constant speed until it reaches the desired stop position. Then, when it reaches the desired stop position, it transitions to a stop state, and all four-phase excitation is turned ON to apply the brakes. Note that slip control is performed within 190 milliseconds of operating the stop switch 13. In this embodiment, when operation of the stop switch 13 is accepted, it is possible to pull in symbols up to four symbols ahead.

The target stop position is determined by whether the currently passing symbol number matches the symbol number saved as the stop position, and if they match, all four-phase excitation is turned ON to indicate the target stop position. The currently passing symbol number is determined by the initial symbol number being set the moment the index sensor described above detects the index (when the index signal rises), and then the symbol number following the initial symbol number being set when the timer interrupt process moves one symbol from there.

After executing the reel stop acceptance check process, it checks whether all reels are stopped. If all reels are stopped, it executes the prize determination process and then the prize winning process. If all reels are not stopped, it executes the process of waiting for acceptance of the stop operation of the stop switch corresponding to the spinning reel. After all reels have stopped, it updates the display contents of the status display monitor and moves on to the advantageous zone clear counter management process. It then executes the game end check process, which updates the RT status, etc., and ends the main series of game progression flows. Note that it is also possible to perform a software random number update process between the start of reel rotation and the acceptance of the stop operation.

The winning determination process is a process that determines whether a symbol combination that constitutes a winning combination has stopped and displayed on a valid line. It determines whether the stopped symbols determined when the stop switch operation is accepted are abnormal, so it does not determine whether the symbol combination that actually stopped on the valid line has been used. After the winning determination process determines that a symbol combination that constitutes a winning combination has stopped and displayed on a valid line, winning processing is performed. If the winning determination process does not determine that a symbol combination that constitutes a winning combination has stopped on a valid line, processing based on a loss is performed.

Winning processing is the process of awarding a bonus to a player based on the symbol combination that stops on an active line. When a symbol combination based on a minor win is stopped, the winning processing involves paying out medals based on the stopped symbol combination and changing the game state based on the stopped symbol combination. When a symbol combination based on a replay is stopped, the winning processing involves granting the right to replay and changing the game state based on the stopped symbol combination. When a symbol combination based on a bonus is stopped, the winning processing involves changing the game state based on the stopped symbol combination. Note that no winning processing is performed in the case of a loss.

However, this is not limited to this. When the result of the winning determination process is a loss, winning processing based on the loss may be performed, and processing may be performed in which no bonus is awarded to the player as a result of the winning processing. Furthermore, winning processing based on a loss may involve transitioning the game state depending on the operation mode at the time of the loss. For example, if all stop switches 13 are operated in a predetermined operation sequence when a loss occurs, the game state may transition to one with a different probability of winning a freeze. Even in the case of an apparent loss due to a missed minor combination, winning processing may be performed by controlling the transition of the game state, such as transitioning to an RT state, without making a payout. Furthermore, bonus-based winning processing may include the payout of medals based on the combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed, or the granting of the right to a replay.

The process of transitioning game states involves setting a role selection table according to the game state to be transitioned to, setting reel control according to the game state to be transitioned to, setting the freeze winning probability according to the game state to be transitioned to, or a combination of these.

During the winning determination process, once a winning symbol combination is determined, winning symbol combination information (stopped number information) displayed on the active line and role lottery result information are sent to the sub-control board 1000. Meanwhile, upon receiving this information, the sub-control board 1000 can output effects corresponding to the winning symbol combination information and role lottery result information using the display device 32, lamp, or speaker S.

The winning determination process determines whether a win has occurred on all active lines, and if the result of the determination is that multiple symbol combinations based on overlapping winning combinations are displayed on multiple active lines, winning processing is performed for each of the multiple symbol combinations that are displayed.

For example, when a minor winning combination with a payout of 2 coins and a minor winning combination with a payout of 10 coins are displayed stopped on multiple active lines, the winning process will pay out 12 coins by adding together the payout number based on the minor winning combination set to 2 coins and the payout number based on the minor winning combination set to 10 coins.

An upper limit is set for the number of coins that can be paid out at one time, and if a symbol combination based on multiple minor winning combinations is displayed stopped on an active line and the number of coins that can be paid out exceeds the upper limit, the upper limit will be paid out.

For example, if the upper limit for the number of coins to be paid out is set to 15, and a small win with a payout of 12 coins and a small win with a payout of 10 coins are displayed stopped on multiple active lines, the winning process will be as follows: if the combined value of the small win with 12 coins and the small win with 10 coins exceeds the upper limit, the upper limit of 15 coins will be paid out.

In this embodiment, medals are set to be paid out only for small winning combinations, but medals equal to the number of medals bet may be paid out as part of a winning process based on a replay, or a preset number of medals may be paid out as part of a winning process based on a bonus.

<Processing for ending the advantageous zone with the difference in the number of gaming media>
In the past, there were gaming machines that had a normal zone and a favorable zone as game zones, and the favorable zone ended when the MY in the favorable zone exceeded 2,400. (Prior art: JP 2020-010896 A)

Here, in conventional gaming machines (prior art documents), the MY of the advantageous zone is defined as the point at which the player's ball output is lowest since the advantageous zone began (0), and the advantageous zone ends when the difference from that point exceeds 2400. Note that the point at which the player's ball output is lowest is synonymous with the point at which the difference in gaming media is lowest.

As a result, conventional gaming machines (prior art documents) could only award players a maximum profit of a difference of 2414 in a single advantageous zone. As a result, if a player spent a large amount of gaming media while playing in an advantageous zone, they were unable to recover the gaming media they had spent in that advantageous zone, which made conventional gaming machines unattractive to players.

For example, in conventional gaming machines, even if a game where the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone is -3000 reaches a specified game state (e.g., AT state), the game ends if the MY in the advantageous zone exceeds 2400. As a result, at most, only about 2400 gaming media could be obtained in a single advantageous zone (the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone would end at about -600).

Therefore, rather than ending the advantageous zone when MY in the advantageous zone exceeds 2400, the system is configured so that the start of the advantageous zone is used as the starting point (0) and the difference in the number of gaming media obtained in one advantageous zone (the difference between the total number of gaming media awarded in the advantageous zone and the total number of gaming media bet in the advantageous zone) exceeds a predetermined number (e.g., 2400). Specifically, the total number of gaming media INs in the advantageous zone (also referred to as the total number of inputs or total bets) and the total number of gaming media OUTs in the advantageous zone (also referred to as the total number of payouts or total number of awardeds) are taken into consideration. In other words, the advantageous zone is configured to end when the difference between the number of gaming media OUTs in the advantageous zone and the number of gaming media INs in the advantageous zone (hereinafter referred to as the difference in gaming media in the advantageous zone) exceeds 2400. This configuration makes it possible to provide a gaming machine with improved playability compared to conventional machines while keeping gambling within a certain range.

For example, with a gaming machine according to the present invention, if a certain game state (e.g., AT state) is reached from a certain game in which the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone is -3000, the advantageous zone can end when the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone exceeds 2400, starting from the start of the advantageous zone. Therefore, it becomes possible to obtain a maximum of approximately 5400 gaming media from a game in which the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone is -3000 (the advantageous zone ends when the difference in the number of gaming media in one advantageous zone reaches +2400).

In addition, if the system is configured to end when the difference in the number of gaming media obtained in one advantageous zone (the difference between the total number of gaming media awarded in the advantageous zone and the total number of gaming media bet in the advantageous zone) exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 2,400), it is acceptable to end the advantageous zone at a value less than this predetermined number. In other words, when the start of the advantageous zone is taken as the starting point (0), the maximum difference in the number of gaming media obtained in one advantageous zone will be a predetermined number (to be precise, the predetermined number + α (α is the maximum difference in the number of gaming media in one game)).

Furthermore, even if the advantageous zone is configured to end when the difference in the number of gaming media obtained in one advantageous zone exceeds a predetermined number, the advantageous zone can also be ended if any termination condition is met before the difference in the number of gaming media obtained in one advantageous zone exceeds the predetermined number.

In this way, in order to terminate the game when the difference in the number of gaming media obtained in one advantageous zone exceeds a predetermined value, it is necessary to be able to store the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone even if it is a negative value.

Below, we will use diagrams to explain the specific process for ending the advantageous zone with the difference in the number of gaming media.

<<Processing to end the advantageous zone with the difference in the number of gaming media (addition version)>>
Figure 53 shows an example of a process for ending the advantageous zone with the difference in the number of gaming media.

In Figure 53, there is a favorable zone difference number counter. The favorable zone difference number counter is one of the RWM areas of the main control board, and is a memory area that can store a value corresponding to the (total) difference number of gaming media in the favorable zone.

The value stored in the advantageous zone difference counter is not cleared when the power is turned on or off. The value stored in the advantageous zone difference counter is cleared when the RWM is cleared following the end of an advantageous zone. The value stored in the advantageous zone difference counter is cleared when the power is turned on following a setting change (RWM is cleared following a setting change). Information indicating that the stop condition has been met is stored in the stop flag area, and is not cleared when the stop state is reached.

Note that turning on the power with a setting change specifically refers to turning on the power switch while the setting key switch is on. In other words, turning on the power with a setting change will cause the machine to enter setting change mode, and once the conditions for ending setting change mode are met (for example, the setting key switch being turned off after the start switch being turned on), the machine will end setting change mode and become playable.

The value stored in the advantageous zone difference counter can be updated by playing in the advantageous zone.

Note that while the explanation will be given using an example in which the advantageous zone difference counter is composed of two bytes, the advantageous zone difference counter may also be composed of three bytes or four bytes.

First, "Favorable Zone Clear Counter -1" subtracts 1 from the value stored in the favorable zone clear counter. If subtracting 1 from the value stored in the favorable zone clear counter results in a value below 0 (if there is a borrow), the carry flag becomes 1. Also, if subtracting 1 from the value stored in the favorable zone clear counter does not result in a value below 0 (if there is no borrow), the carry flag becomes 0. Also, if subtracting 1 from the value stored in the favorable zone clear counter results in a value of 0, the zero flag becomes 1.

The advantageous zone clear counter is one of the RWM areas of the main control board, and is a memory area that can store a value corresponding to the number of plays in the advantageous zone.

The question "Is the advantageous zone clear counter before subtraction = 0?" returns NO if the result of subtracting 1 from the value stored in the advantageous zone clear counter does not fall below 0. Specifically, the question "Is the advantageous zone clear counter before subtraction = 0?" returns NO if the value stored in the advantageous zone clear counter for this game is 1 or greater. In other words, this means that this game is in an advantageous zone.

On the other hand, if the answer to "Is the advantageous zone clear counter before subtraction = 0?" is YES, it means that the current game is in the normal zone.

The question "Is the next game in an advantageous zone?" is determined based on the information in the RWM area stored in the main control board. For example, a transition to an advantageous zone may be decided in the current game (a game in the normal zone), and the determination may be made based on the information in the RWM area that stores information indicating a transition to an advantageous zone. Also, for example, if a transition to an advantageous zone is decided in the current game (a game in the normal zone) and the game state at the transition destination is also determined, the determination may be made based on the information in the RWM area that stores the game state at the transition destination. In any case, it is possible to determine whether the next game will be in an advantageous zone based on information that can determine whether the next game will be in an advantageous zone. If the next game is in an advantageous zone, the answer is YES, and if the next game is not in an advantageous zone, the answer is NO.

In "Save advantageous zone clear counter initial value," the initial value is stored in the RWM area that can store the value of the advantageous zone clear counter. For example, if the initial value is 1500, 1500 is stored in the RWM area that can store the value of the advantageous zone clear counter. Also, for example, if the initial value is 4000, 4000 is stored in the RWM area that can store the value of the advantageous zone clear counter. Note that this initial value corresponds to the maximum number of plays that can be played in one advantageous zone. Therefore, the initial value is not limited to 1500 or 4000, and can be any predetermined value. For example, it may be set to a number of plays that cannot be completed in one day (e.g., 65,535).

The "Set initial value of the advantageous zone difference counter" function sets the initial value to be stored in the advantageous zone difference counter in a register. In other words, when the advantageous zone begins (when the current game is a normal zone game and the next game is a advantageous zone game), the initial value to be stored in the advantageous zone difference counter is set in a register. Specifically, the initial value is set to 63135 (65535 - 2400) and stored in the HL register.

Here, the initial value of 63135 is the value obtained by subtracting the value "2400", which corresponds to the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone that ends the advantageous zone, from the maximum value "65535" that can be stored in a 2-byte memory area (corresponding to the size of the memory area for the advantageous zone difference number counter). Note that in this example, the condition for ending the advantageous zone is that the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone exceeds 2400, but the condition for ending the advantageous zone is not limited to the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone exceeding 2400. For example, the condition for ending the advantageous zone can be set to a predetermined value, such as the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone exceeding 4800. If the condition for ending the advantageous zone is that the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone exceeds 4800, the initial value would be 60735 (65535 - 4800).

In addition, in this example, the advantageous zone difference counter is 2 bytes, but it can also be 3 bytes. If the advantageous zone difference counter is 3 bytes and the condition for ending the advantageous zone is when the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone exceeds 2400, the initial value should be 16774815 (16777215 - 2400).

The effect of setting the initial value to "a value corresponding to the size of the memory area of the advantageous zone difference number counter" minus "a value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone set as the end condition of the advantageous zone" will be discussed later.

In addition, without being limited to this, the initial value of the advantageous zone difference counter may be set to 63120 (65535 - 2415) when the size of the memory area for the advantageous zone difference counter is 2 bytes. In this case, the advantageous zone termination process will be executed when the value of the advantageous zone difference counter becomes 65521 or greater.

When configured in this way, the value of the favorable zone difference counter will not exceed the upper limit when the favorable zone ends (the favorable zone ends when the difference in the favorable zone exceeds 2400, so the maximum value of the favorable zone difference counter is 65534, since the initial value can only be increased up to 2414, which is 2400 - 1 (1 coin bet) + 15 (15 coins paid out)), so the carry flag and zero flag will not be raised when the difference in the favorable zone exceeds 2400 and the favorable zone ends.

For this reason, in the update process of the advantageous zone difference number counter, the zero flag is set only when the value of the advantageous zone difference number counter changes from 1 to 0, and the carry flag is set only when the value falls below the lower limit of the advantageous zone difference number counter (when the result of subtracting the difference number of the game in question from the value of the advantageous zone difference number counter is less than 0). Therefore, it is possible to determine whether the value has fallen below the lower limit of the advantageous zone difference number counter simply by checking the carry flag, and so when the carry flag = 1 in the update process of the advantageous zone difference number counter, a specific value (for example, "0", "1", etc.) can be stored in the advantageous zone difference number counter.

This allows for more accurate decision-making using the carry flag, thereby reducing program size and improving program readability.

"Before subtracting advantageous zone clear counter = 1?" determines whether the advantageous zone clear counter was 1 before "advantageous zone clear counter -1" was performed. For example, if "advantageous zone clear counter -1" subtracts 1 from the value stored in the advantageous zone clear counter, and the result is 0 (specifically, if the zero flag is 1), the answer is YES. On the other hand, if "advantageous zone clear counter -1" subtracts 1 from the value stored in the advantageous zone clear counter, and the result is not 0 (specifically, if the zero flag is 0), the answer is NO.

In addition, after "Before subtraction of advantageous zone clear counter = 1?" and before "When replay is activated?", the value stored in the advantageous zone difference counter is stored in a specified register (e.g., HL register).

For "Replay Activated?", if the result of the current game is that a symbol combination corresponding to the replay is displayed (on an active line) (if the next game is a replay game), the answer is YES. On the other hand, if the result of the current game is that a symbol combination corresponding to the replay is not displayed (on an active line) (if the next game is not a replay game), the answer is NO.

"IN number < OUT number?" determines whether the OUT number is greater than the IN number.

For example, as a result of this game,
a) If the number of inputs is 3 and the number of outputs is 0, the result is determined to be NO.
a) If the number of inputs is 3 and the number of outputs is 1, the answer is NO.
c) If the number of inputs is 3 and the number of outputs is 3, the answer is determined to be NO.
d) If the number of inputs is 3 and the number of outputs is 10, the answer is YES.

Specifically, the IN number minus the OUT number is calculated, and the result of this calculation is stored in a specified register (for example, register A). Furthermore, if there is a borrow as a result of the IN number minus OUT number calculation (if the carry flag is 1), the result is judged as YES; if there is no borrow (if the carry flag is 0), the result is judged as NO. In other words, if the difference in the number of gaming media for the current game is greater than the OUT number, the carry flag is 0 and the result is judged as YES. Furthermore, if the difference in the number of gaming media for the current game is less than the OUT number, the carry flag is 1 and the result is judged as NO.

To give a specific example, the results of this game:
a) If the IN number is 3 and the OUT number is 0, the A register will be 3 and the carry flag will be 0.
a) When the IN number is 3 and the OUT number is 1, the A register is 2 and the carry flag is 0.
c) When the IN number is 3 and the OUT number is 3, the A register is 0 and the carry flag is 0.
d) If the IN number is 3 and the OUT number is 10, the A register will be 249 and the carry flag will be 1.

Here, if a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed (on an active line) as a result of the previous game, the bet number for the current game is automatically bet (for example, "3" is set by the automatic bet), and a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is not displayed (on an active line) as a result of the current game, then even if the bet number was set by the automatic bet, it will be treated as the IN number for the current game.

On the other hand, if the result of the current game is that a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed (on an active line) (if the next game is a game using a replay), the IN number and OUT number will not be judged as "IN number < OUT number?" In other words, if the result of the current game is that a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed (on an active line) (if the next game is a game using a replay), the number of bets for the current game will not be treated as the IN number. Similarly, if the result of the current game is that a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed (on an active line) (if the next game is a game using a replay), the number of awards (or automatic bets) for the current game will not be treated as the OUT number.

Note that in the "IN number < OUT number?" test, we calculated the IN number - OUT number, but it is also possible to make a determination by calculating the OUT number - IN number. In other words, it is sufficient to be able to calculate the difference in the number of gaming media for the current game using the IN number and OUT number.

In "advantageous section difference number counter subtraction", the value of the calculation result (IN number - OUT number) of "IN number < OUT number?" is subtracted from the value of the advantageous section difference number counter stored in a specified register (for example, HL register). Note that if a carry is caused by "advantageous section difference number counter subtraction", the carry flag becomes 1.
For example, in a situation where the value stored in the advantageous section difference counter (value of the HL register) is 2,
A) When the IN number is 3 and the OUT number is 0, the HL register is 65535 and the carry flag is 1. Note that 2-3 = -1, but registers cannot store negative values. Therefore, a carry occurs, resulting in 65535.
a) When the number of INs is 3 and the number of OUTs is 1, the HL register is 0 and the carry flag is 0.
c) When the number of INs is 3 and the number of OUTs is 3, the HL register is 2 and the carry flag is 0.

When "favorable zone difference number counter < 0", "favorable zone difference number counter subtraction" determines whether a borrow has occurred. If a borrow has occurred, a YES result is determined, and if a borrow has not occurred, a NO result is determined. In the above example, when the value stored in the favorable zone difference number counter is 2, a) a YES result is determined if IN number = 3 and OUT number = 0. Also in the above example, when the value stored in the favorable zone difference number counter is 2, b) a NO result is determined if IN number = 3 and OUT number = 1. Similarly, in the above example, when the value stored in the favorable zone difference number counter is 2, a NO result is determined if IN number = 3 and OUT number = 3.

If the "favourable section difference counter < 0" returns YES, the carry flag is set to 1, so a specified calculation is performed to set the carry flag to 0. For example, the specified calculation is to perform an exclusive OR on the value of the A register and the value of the A register. As a result of this exclusive OR, the carry flag becomes 0. Note that although the specified calculation is an exclusive OR on the value of the A register and the value of the A register, any calculation can be used as long as it sets the carry flag to 0.

When a borrow occurs due to "advantageous interval difference counter subtraction," "Set lower limit value of favorable interval difference counter" stores a predetermined lower limit value (0) in the register that stores the calculation result (HL register in this embodiment). In the above example, when the value stored in the advantageous interval difference counter is 2, if a) the IN number = 3 and the OUT number = 0, "Advantageous interval difference counter subtraction" causes the HL register to equal 65535. In such a case, "Set lower limit value of favorable interval difference counter" stores 0 in the HL register.

In other words, if a carryover occurs in the value stored in the HL register and an abnormal value is stored, storing the lower limit value of 0 in the HL register makes it possible to calculate the difference number of gaming media in the advantageous zone as accurately as possible. Even when "Set advantageous zone difference number counter lower limit value" is executed, the advantageous zone continues, and it is possible to provide the player with play in the advantageous zone. In other words, even in play after "Set advantageous zone difference number counter lower limit value" is executed, the processing in FIG. 53 is executed as long as the advantageous zone continues.

Note that while Figure 53 includes a "Set Lower Limit Value of Favorable Zone Difference Counter" process, it is not necessary to include this process. Specifically, if a YES determination is made based on "Favorable Zone Difference Counter < 0," the value stored in the favorable zone difference counter for the previous game may be used. For example, if the value stored in the favorable zone difference counter is 2 and the IN number and OUT number for the game are a) IN number = 3 and OUT number = 0, the value stored in the favorable zone difference counter may be 2 (the same value as the value of the favorable zone difference counter for the previous game). This configuration prevents abnormal values (values with borrowed digits) from being stored in the "Favorable Zone Difference Counter." Furthermore, because the process equivalent to "Set Lower Limit Value of Favorable Zone Difference Counter" is eliminated, the program capacity can be reduced.

In other words, if a downgrade occurs due to "advantageous zone difference number counter subtraction," the advantageous zone difference number counter is not updated using the value at the time of the downgrade, thereby preventing abnormal values from being entered as the value of the advantageous zone difference number counter. In other words, even if the difference number of gaming media in the advantageous zone becomes a negative value, the advantageous zone can be ended as accurately as possible using the difference number of gaming media in the advantageous zone.

In "Advantageous Zone Difference Counter Addition," the complement of the result of the calculation "IN Number < OUT Number?" (IN Number - OUT Number) (the value stored in the A register) is calculated and stored in the A register. The calculated complement (the value stored in the A register) is then added to the HL register.

Note that the complement in "advantageous section difference counter addition" refers to the smallest number that carries beyond one byte (255). For example, it can be derived using the value of the 0-A register, or by using a single instruction (NEG instruction) to derive the complement.

For example, in a situation where the value stored in the advantageous section difference counter (value of the HL register) is 2,
d) When the IN number is 3 and the OUT number is 10, the A register is 249, but the "advantageous section difference counter addition" first derives 7, which is the complement of 249. Then, by calculating 2 + 7, 9 is stored in the HL register. Note that since 2 + 7 does not exceed 65535 (there is no carry), the carry flag is 0.

Also, for example, in a situation where the value stored in the advantageous section difference counter (value of the HL register) is 65530,
D) When the IN number is 3 and the OUT number is 10, the A register is 249, but the "advantageous section difference counter addition" first derives 7, the complement of 249. Next, by calculating 65530 + 7, 2 is stored in the HL register. Note that 65530 + 7 is 65537, but since this is greater than 65535 (because there is a carry), 2 is stored in the HL register. Also, because there is a carry, the carry flag is set to 1.

"Save advantageous zone difference counter" stores the value stored in the HL register in the advantageous zone difference counter. In other words, this is a process that updates the advantageous zone difference counter.

For example, if 63135 is stored in the HL register by "Set favorable zone difference counter initial value," then 63135 is stored in the favorable zone difference counter by "Save favorable zone difference counter."

For example, if "Replay Activated" returns YES, the value of the advantageous zone difference counter from the previous play is stored in the HL register, so "Save Advantageous Zone Difference Counter" stores the same value as the advantageous zone difference counter from the previous play in the advantageous zone difference counter.

For example, if the answer to "Advantageous Zone Difference Counter < 0?" is NO, the value obtained by subtracting the difference in the number of gaming media for the current game (IN number - OUT number) from the value of the advantageous zone difference counter for the previous game is stored in the HL register, so "Save Advantageous Zone Difference Counter" stores the value obtained by subtracting the difference in the number of gaming media for the current game from the value of the advantageous zone difference counter for the previous game in the advantageous zone difference counter.

For example, if the answer to "Is favorable zone difference counter < 0?" is YES, the lower limit value (0) is stored in the HL register, so the lower limit value (0) is stored in the favorable zone difference counter by "Save favorable zone difference counter."

For example, after "adding the advantageous zone difference number counter," the value obtained by adding the difference in the number of media for the current game (OUT number - IN number) from the value of the advantageous zone difference number counter for the previous game is stored in the HL register, so by "saving the advantageous zone difference number counter," the value obtained by adding the difference in the number of gaming media for the current game from the value of the advantageous zone difference number counter for the previous game is stored in the advantageous zone difference number counter.

"Advantageous Zone Difference Number > 2400?" determines whether the difference in the gaming media in the advantageous zone exceeds 2400. Specifically, it determines whether the carry flag is 1. If the carry flag is 1, it determines YES, and if the carry flag is not 1 (if the carry flag is 0), it determines NO. Note that a carry flag of 1 occurs when a carry occurs due to "advantageous zone difference number counter addition." On the other hand, if a carry occurs due to "advantageous zone difference number counter subtraction," the carry flag will temporarily become 1, but then a specified calculation is performed to set the carry flag to 0, so "Advantageous Zone Difference Number > 2400?" can be determined as NO.

In other words, "Advantageous Zone Difference Number > 2400?" determines whether the difference number of gaming media in the advantageous zone exceeds 2400 depending on whether the carry flag is 1. This allows for a smaller program capacity compared to directly comparing the difference number of gaming media in the advantageous zone with a constant (2400).

In this way, "Advantageous Zone Difference Number > 2400?" determines whether the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone exceeds 2400 depending on whether the carry flag is 1, so the "Advantageous Zone Difference Number Counter Initial Value Set" stores 63135 as the initial value.

As mentioned above, this 63135 is the value obtained by subtracting the value "2400", which corresponds to the difference in the number of gaming media in the favorable zone that ends the favorable zone, from the maximum value "65535" that can be stored in a 2-byte memory area (corresponding to the size of the memory area for the favorable zone difference number counter). In other words, if the difference in the number of gaming media in the favorable zone that ends the favorable zone exceeds 2400, it will exceed 65535, and the carry flag will be set to 1. In other words, "Favorable Zone Difference Number > 2400?" is a process that determines whether the value of the favorable zone difference number counter exceeds 65535.

Also, as mentioned above, if the initial value of the advantageous zone difference counter is "63120", then "Advantageous zone difference number > 2400?" is a process that determines whether the value of the advantageous zone difference counter exceeds 65520 (whether it is 65521 or greater).

Furthermore, by storing 63135 as the initial value, it is possible to store a value equivalent to -63135 as the difference in gaming media, with the start of the advantageous period as the starting point (0). For example, when the initial value is 63135, a situation in which the value of the advantageous period difference counter is 13135 means that the difference is -50000, with the start of the advantageous period as the starting point (0).

As described above, by storing 63135 as the initial value, which is "a value corresponding to the size of the memory area of the advantageous zone difference number counter" minus "a value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone set as the end condition of the advantageous zone," it is possible to reduce the program capacity required to determine whether the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone has exceeded 2,400. Furthermore, by storing 63135 as the initial value, it is possible to store values up to -63135 as the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone. While an example is given of storing 63135 as the initial value, values other than 63135 can also be used as the initial value as long as they have the same effect.

"RWM initialization" updates all parameters that affect the performance of the instruction function to 0 and ends the advantageous zone clear counter management process. Parameters that affect the performance of the instruction function include the number of AT games, the game status related to the AT, the advantageous zone clear counter, the advantageous zone difference counter, etc. By updating the advantageous zone type to 0, the next game will be played in a normal zone that is not an advantageous zone. When playing in an advantageous zone, if "RWM initialization" is not executed, the next game will be played in an advantageous zone (the advantageous zone will not end).

In other words, if an abnormal value is stored in the HL register due to borrowing, storing the lower limit value of 0 in the HL register makes it possible to calculate the difference number of the advantageous zone as accurately as possible. Even when "Set Lower Limit Value of Advantageous Zone Difference Number Counter" is executed, the advantageous zone continues, and it is possible to provide the player with play in the advantageous zone. In other words, even in play after "Set Lower Limit Value of Advantageous Zone Difference Number Counter" is executed, the processing in FIG. 53 is executed as long as the advantageous zone continues.

Note that in "Is IN number < OUT number?", the OUT number is subtracted from the IN number, but it may also be configured to subtract the IN number from the OUT number. If configured to subtract the IN number from the OUT number, when "Is IN number < OUT number?" returns NO (when a borrow occurs in the A register), the "favourable zone difference number counter subtraction" calculates the complement using a predetermined calculation and stores it in the A register (the difference number of the gaming medium for the current game), and then subtracts the value stored in the A register (the difference number of the gaming medium for the current game) from the value stored in the HL register (the value stored in the favourable zone difference number counter). In other words, when "Is IN number < OUT number?" returns NO, it is sufficient to configure the system to subtract the absolute value of the difference number of the gaming medium for the current game from the value stored in the favourable zone difference number counter.

Similarly, if the IN number is subtracted from the OUT number when "IN number < OUT number?" is configured, then when "IN number < OUT number?" is judged as YES (when no borrowing occurs in the A register), the "advantageous interval difference number counter addition" simply adds the value stored in the A register (the difference number of gaming media for the current game) from the value stored in the HL register (the value stored in the advantageous interval difference number counter) without calculating the complement. In other words, when "IN number < OUT number?" is judged as NO, the absolute value of the difference number of gaming media for the current game is added from the value stored in the advantageous interval difference number counter.

<Processing to end the advantageous zone with the difference in the number of gaming media (subtraction version)>
Figure 54 shows an example of a process for ending the advantageous zone with the difference in the number of gaming media.

In Figure 54, there is a favorable zone difference number counter. The favorable zone difference number counter is one of the RWM areas of the main control board, and is a memory area that can store a value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media in the favorable zone.

The value stored in the advantageous zone difference counter is not cleared when the power is turned on or off. The value stored in the advantageous zone difference counter is cleared when the RWM is cleared following the end of an advantageous zone. The value stored in the advantageous zone difference counter is cleared when the power is turned on following a setting change (RWM is cleared following a setting change). Information indicating that the stop condition has been met is stored in the stop flag area, and is not cleared when the stop state is reached.

Note that while the explanation will be given using an example in which the advantageous zone difference counter is composed of two bytes, the advantageous zone difference counter may also be composed of three bytes or four bytes.

First, "Favorable Zone Clear Counter -1" subtracts 1 from the value stored in the favorable zone clear counter. If subtracting 1 from the value stored in the favorable zone clear counter results in a value below 0 (if there is a borrow), the carry flag becomes 1. Also, if subtracting 1 from the value stored in the favorable zone clear counter does not result in a value below 0 (if there is no borrow), the carry flag becomes 0. Also, if subtracting 1 from the value stored in the favorable zone clear counter results in a value of 0, the zero flag becomes 1.

The advantageous zone clear counter is one of the RWM areas of the main control board, and is a memory area that can store a value corresponding to the number of plays in the advantageous zone.

The question "Is the advantageous zone clear counter before subtraction = 0?" returns NO if the result of subtracting 1 from the value stored in the advantageous zone clear counter does not fall below 0. Specifically, the question "Is the advantageous zone clear counter before subtraction = 0?" returns NO if the value stored in the advantageous zone clear counter for this game is 1 or greater. In other words, this means that this game is in an advantageous zone.

On the other hand, if the answer to "Is the advantageous zone clear counter before subtraction = 0?" is YES, it means that the current game is in the normal zone.

The question "Is the next game in an advantageous zone?" is determined based on the information in the RWM area stored in the main control board. For example, a transition to an advantageous zone may be decided in the current game (a game in the normal zone), and the determination may be made based on the information in the RWM area that stores information indicating a transition to an advantageous zone. Also, for example, if a transition to an advantageous zone is decided in the current game (a game in the normal zone) and the game state at the transition destination is also determined, the determination may be made based on the information in the RWM area that stores the game state at the transition destination. In any case, it is possible to determine whether the next game will be in an advantageous zone based on information that can determine whether the next game will be in an advantageous zone. If the next game is in an advantageous zone, the answer is YES, and if the next game is not in an advantageous zone, the answer is NO.

In "Save advantageous zone clear counter initial value," the initial value is stored in the RWM area that can store the value of the advantageous zone clear counter. For example, if the initial value is 1500, 1500 is stored in the RWM area that can store the value of the advantageous zone clear counter. Also, for example, if the initial value is 4000, 4000 is stored in the RWM area that can store the value of the advantageous zone clear counter. Note that this initial value corresponds to the maximum number of plays that can be played in one advantageous zone. Therefore, the initial value is not limited to 1500 or 4000, and can be any predetermined value. For example, it may be set to a number of plays that cannot be completed in one day (e.g., 65,535).

The "Set initial value of the advantageous zone difference counter" function sets the initial value to be stored in the advantageous zone difference counter in a register. In other words, when the advantageous zone begins (when the current game is a normal zone game and the next game is a advantageous zone game), the initial value to be stored in the advantageous zone difference counter is set in a register. Specifically, the initial value is set to 2400 and stored in the HL register.

Here, the initial value of 2400 is the value "2400" that corresponds to the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone that ends the advantageous zone. Note that in this example, the condition for ending the advantageous zone is that the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone exceeds 2400, but the condition for ending the advantageous zone is not limited to the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone exceeding 2400. For example, the condition for ending the advantageous zone can be set to a predetermined value, such as the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone exceeding 4800. If the condition for ending the advantageous zone is that the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone exceeds 4800, then the initial value would be 4800.

In addition, in this example, the advantageous zone difference number counter is 2 bytes, but it can also be 3 bytes. If the advantageous zone difference number counter is 3 bytes and the condition for ending the advantageous zone is when the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone exceeds 2400, the initial value will be 2400.

The effect of setting the initial value to "a value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone, which is set as the end condition for the advantageous zone," will be discussed later.

In addition, the initial value of the advantageous zone difference counter may be set to 2415 when the memory area size of the advantageous zone difference counter is 2 bytes. In this case, the advantageous zone termination process will be executed when the value of the advantageous zone difference counter becomes less than 15.

When configured in this way, the value of the favorable zone difference counter will not exceed the lower limit when the favorable zone ends (the favorable zone ends when the difference in the favorable zone exceeds 2400, so the minimum value of the favorable zone difference counter is 1, as the maximum deductible from the initial value is 2400 - 1 (1 coin bet) + 15 (15 coins paid out), which is 2414), so the carry flag and zero flag will not be raised when the difference in the favorable zone exceeds 2400 and the favorable zone ends.

For this reason, in the update process of the advantageous zone difference number counter, the zero flag is raised only when the value of the advantageous zone difference number counter changes from 65535 to 0, and the carry flag is raised only when the upper limit of the advantageous zone difference number counter is exceeded (when the result of adding the difference number of the game in question to the value of the advantageous zone difference number counter exceeds 65535). Therefore, it is possible to determine whether the upper limit of the advantageous zone difference number counter has been exceeded simply by checking the carry flag, and so when the carry flag = 1 in the update process of the advantageous zone difference number counter, a specific value (for example, "65535", "65534", etc.) can be stored in the advantageous zone difference number counter.

This allows for more accurate decision-making using the carry flag, thereby reducing program size and improving program readability.

"Before subtracting advantageous zone clear counter = 1?" determines whether the advantageous zone clear counter was 1 before "advantageous zone clear counter -1" was performed. For example, if "advantageous zone clear counter -1" subtracts 1 from the value stored in the advantageous zone clear counter, and the result is 0 (specifically, if the zero flag is 1), the answer is YES. On the other hand, if "advantageous zone clear counter -1" subtracts 1 from the value stored in the advantageous zone clear counter, and the result is not 0 (specifically, if the zero flag is 0), the answer is NO.

In addition, after "Before subtraction of advantageous zone clear counter = 1?" and before "When replay is activated?", the value stored in the advantageous zone difference counter is stored in a specified register (e.g., HL register).

For "Replay Activated?", if the result of the current game is that a symbol combination corresponding to the replay is displayed (on an active line) (if the next game is a replay game), the answer is YES. On the other hand, if the result of the current game is that a symbol combination corresponding to the replay is not displayed (on an active line) (if the next game is not a replay game), the answer is NO.

"IN number < OUT number?" determines whether the OUT number is greater than the IN number.

For example, as a result of this game,
a) If the number of inputs is 3 and the number of outputs is 0, the result is determined to be NO.
a) If the number of inputs is 3 and the number of outputs is 1, the answer is NO.
c) If the number of inputs is 3 and the number of outputs is 3, the answer is determined to be NO.
d) If the number of inputs is 3 and the number of outputs is 10, the answer is YES.

Specifically, the IN number minus the OUT number is calculated, and the result of this calculation is stored in a specified register (for example, register A). Furthermore, if there is a borrow as a result of the IN number minus OUT number calculation (if the carry flag is 1), the result is judged as YES; if there is no borrow (if the carry flag is 0), the result is judged as NO. In other words, if the difference in the number of gaming media for the current game is greater than the OUT number, the carry flag is 0 and the result is judged as YES. Furthermore, if the difference in the number of gaming media for the current game is less than the OUT number, the carry flag is 1 and the result is judged as NO.

To give a specific example, the results of this game:
a) If the IN number is 3 and the OUT number is 0, the A register will be 3 and the carry flag will be 0.
a) When the IN number is 3 and the OUT number is 1, the A register is 2 and the carry flag is 0.
c) When the IN number is 3 and the OUT number is 3, the A register is 0 and the carry flag is 0.
d) If the IN number is 3 and the OUT number is 10, the A register will be 249 and the carry flag will be 1.

Here, if a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed (on an active line) as a result of the previous game, the bet number for the current game is automatically bet (for example, "3" is set by the automatic bet), and a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is not displayed (on an active line) as a result of the current game, then even if the bet number was set by the automatic bet, it will be treated as the IN number for the current game.

On the other hand, if the result of the current game is that a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed (on an active line) (if the next game is a game using a replay), the IN number and OUT number will not be judged as "IN number < OUT number?" In other words, if the result of the current game is that a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed (on an active line) (if the next game is a game using a replay), the number of bets for the current game will not be treated as the IN number. Similarly, if the result of the current game is that a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed (on an active line) (if the next game is a game using a replay), the number of awards (or automatic bets) for the current game will not be treated as the OUT number.

Note that in the "IN number < OUT number?" test, we calculated the IN number - OUT number, but it is also possible to make a determination by calculating the OUT number - IN number. In other words, it is sufficient to be able to calculate the difference in the number of gaming media for the current game using the IN number and OUT number.

In "advantageous section difference number counter addition", the value of the advantageous section difference number counter stored in a specified register (for example, the HL register) is added to the value of the calculation result (IN number - OUT number) of "IN number < OUT number?". Note that if a carry occurs as a result of "advantageous section difference number counter addition", the carry flag becomes 1.
For example, in a situation where the value stored in the advantageous zone difference counter (value of the HL register) is 65534,
A) When the IN number is 3 and the OUT number is 0, the HL register is 1 and the carry flag is 1. Note that 65534 + 3 = 65537, but a 2-byte pair register (HL register) cannot store values greater than 65535. Therefore, a carry occurs, resulting in a value of 1.
a) When the IN number is 3 and the OUT number is 1, the HL register is 0 and the carry flag is 1. Note that 65534 + 2 = 65536, but a 2-byte pair register (HL register) cannot store a value greater than 65535. Therefore, a carry occurs, resulting in 0.
c) When the number of INs is 3 and the number of OUTs is 3, the HL register value is 65534 and the carry flag is 0.

In "Favorable Zone Difference Counter > Upper Limit?", "Favorable Zone Difference Counter Addition" determines whether a carry has occurred. If a carry has occurred, it judges as YES, and if a carry has not occurred, it judges as NO. In the above example, when the value stored in the favorable zone difference counter is 65534, a) if the IN number = 3 and the OUT number = 0, it judges as YES. Also in the above example, when the value stored in the favorable zone difference counter is 65534, b) if the IN number = 3 and the OUT number = 1, it judges as YES. Similarly, in the above example, when the value stored in the favorable zone difference counter is 65534, c) if the IN number = 3 and the OUT number = 3, it judges as NO.

If the answer to "Is the advantageous section difference counter > upper limit?" is YES, the carry flag is set to 1, so a specified calculation is performed to set the carry flag to 0. For example, the specified calculation is to perform an exclusive OR on the value of the A register and the value of the A register. As a result of this exclusive OR, the carry flag becomes 0. Note that although the specified calculation is an exclusive OR on the value of the A register and the value of the A register, any calculation can be used as long as it sets the carry flag to 0.

When a carry occurs due to "advantageous zone difference number counter upper limit value set," a predetermined upper limit value (65535) is stored in the register that stores the calculation result (in this embodiment, the HL register). In the above example, when the value stored in the advantageous zone difference number counter is 65534, if a) the IN number = 3 and the OUT number = 0, the HL register = 1 due to "advantageous zone difference number counter subtraction." In such a case, 65535 is stored in the HL register by "advantageous zone difference number counter upper limit value set."

In other words, if a carry occurs in the value stored in the HL register and an abnormal value is stored, storing the upper limit value of 65535 in the HL register makes it possible to calculate the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone as accurately as possible. Even when "Set upper limit value of advantageous zone difference counter" is executed, the advantageous zone continues, and it is possible to provide the player with play in the advantageous zone. In other words, even in play after "Set upper limit value of advantageous zone difference counter" is executed, the processing in FIG. 54 is executed as long as the advantageous zone continues.

Note that while Figure 54 includes the "Set upper limit value of favorable zone difference counter" process, it is not necessary to include the "Set upper limit value of favorable zone difference counter." Specifically, if a YES determination is made because "Favourable zone difference counter > upper limit value," the value stored in the favourable zone difference counter for the previous game may be used. For example, if the value stored in the favourable zone difference counter is 65534 and the IN number and OUT number for the game are a) IN number = 3 and OUT number = 0, the value stored in the favourable zone difference counter may be 65534 (the same value as the value of the favourable zone difference counter for the previous game). This configuration prevents abnormal values (values with borrowed digits) from being stored in the "Favourable zone difference counter." Furthermore, because the process equivalent to "Set upper limit value of favorable zone difference counter" is eliminated, the program capacity can be reduced.

In other words, if a carry occurs due to the "advantageous zone difference number counter addition," the value at the time of the carry is not used to update the advantageous zone difference number counter, thereby preventing abnormal values from being entered as the value of the advantageous zone difference number counter. In other words, even if the difference number of gaming media in the advantageous zone becomes a negative value, the advantageous zone can be ended as accurately as possible using the difference number of gaming media in the advantageous zone.

Furthermore, while 65,535 (the maximum value that can be stored by the advantageous zone difference number counter) has been used as an example of the upper limit, this is not limited to this. For example, it may be a value such as 12,400, which is a number less than the maximum value that can be stored by the advantageous zone difference number counter. If 12,400 is used as the upper limit, the advantageous zone difference number counter can store a value up to -10,000 as the difference in gaming media in the advantageous zone.

In "Advantageous Zone Difference Counter Subtraction," the complement of the result of the calculation "IN Number < OUT Number?" (IN Number - OUT Number) (the value stored in the A register) is calculated and stored in the A register. The calculated complement (the value stored in the A register) is then subtracted from the HL register.

Note that the complement in "advantageous interval difference counter subtraction" refers to the smallest number that carries beyond one byte (255). For example, it can be derived by subtracting the value of the 0-A register, or by using a single instruction (NEG instruction) to derive the complement.

For example, in a situation where the value stored in the advantageous section difference counter (value of the HL register) is 2,
d) When the IN number is 3 and the OUT number is 10, the A register is 249, but the "advantageous section difference counter subtraction" first derives 7, the complement of 249. Next, by calculating 2-7, 65531 is stored in the HL register. Note that since 2-7 is less than 0 (because there is a carryover), the carry flag is set to 1.

Also, for example, in a situation where the value stored in the advantageous section difference counter (value of the HL register) is 10,
d) When the IN number is 3 and the OUT number is 10, the A register will be 249, but the "advantageous section difference counter addition" first derives 7, which is the complement of 249. Then, by calculating 10-7, 3 is stored in the HL register. Note that since 10-7 does not go below 0 (there is no borrowing), the carry flag will be 0.

"Save advantageous zone difference counter" stores the value stored in the HL register in the advantageous zone difference counter. In other words, this is a process that updates the advantageous zone difference counter.

For example, if 2400 is stored in the HL register by "Set favorable zone difference counter initial value," then 2400 is stored in the favorable zone difference counter by "Save favorable zone difference counter."

For example, if "Replay Activated" returns YES, the value of the advantageous zone difference counter from the previous play is stored in the HL register, so "Save Advantageous Zone Difference Counter" stores the same value as the advantageous zone difference counter from the previous play in the advantageous zone difference counter.

For example, if the answer to "Is advantageous zone difference counter > upper limit?" is NO, the value obtained by adding the difference in the number of gaming media for the current game (IN number - OUT number) from the value of the advantageous zone difference counter for the previous game is stored in the HL register, so "Save advantageous zone difference counter" stores the value obtained by adding the difference in the number of gaming media for the current game from the value of the advantageous zone difference counter for the previous game in the advantageous zone difference counter.

For example, if the answer to "Is the advantageous zone difference counter > upper limit?" is YES, the upper limit (65535) is stored in the HL register, so the "Save advantageous zone difference counter" command stores the upper limit (65535) in the advantageous zone difference counter.

For example, after "subtracting the advantageous zone difference counter," the value obtained by subtracting the difference in the number of gaming media for the current game (OUT number - IN number) from the value of the advantageous zone difference counter for the previous game is stored in the HL register, so by "saving the advantageous zone difference counter," the value obtained by subtracting the difference in the number of gaming media for the current game from the value of the advantageous zone difference counter for the previous game is stored in the advantageous zone difference counter.

"Advantageous Zone Difference Number > 2400?" determines whether the difference in the gaming media in the advantageous zone exceeds 2400. Specifically, it determines whether the carry flag is 1. If the carry flag is 1, it determines YES, and if the carry flag is not 1 (if the carry flag is 0), it determines NO. Note that a carry flag of 1 occurs when a carry is made by "advantageous zone difference number counter subtraction." On the other hand, if a carry is made by "advantageous zone difference number counter addition," the carry flag will temporarily become 1, but then a specified calculation is performed to set the carry flag to 0, so "Advantageous Zone Difference Number > 2400?" can be determined as NO.

In other words, "Advantageous Zone Difference Number > 2400?" determines whether the difference number of gaming media in the advantageous zone exceeds 2400 depending on whether the carry flag is 1. This allows for a smaller program capacity compared to directly comparing the difference number of gaming media in the advantageous zone with a constant (2400).

In this way, "Advantageous Zone Difference Number > 2400?" determines whether the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone exceeds 2400 depending on whether the carry flag is 1, so the "Advantageous Zone Difference Number Counter Initial Value Set" stores 2400 as the initial value.

As mentioned above, this 2400 is a value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone that ends the advantageous zone. In other words, if the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone that ends the advantageous zone exceeds 2400, it will fall below 0, and the carry flag will become 1. In other words, "Advantageous zone difference number > 2400?" is a process that determines whether the value of the advantageous zone difference number counter is less than 0.

Also, as mentioned above, if the initial value of the advantageous zone difference counter is "2415", then "Advantageous zone difference number > 2400?" is a process that determines whether the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is less than 15.

Furthermore, by storing 2400 as the initial value, it is possible to store a value equivalent to -63135 as the difference in gaming media, with the start of the advantageous period as the starting point (0). For example, when the initial value is 2400, a situation in which the value of the advantageous period difference counter is 30,000 means that the difference is -27,600, with the start of the advantageous period as the starting point (0).

As described above, by storing 2400 as the initial value, which is "a value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone defined as the end condition of the advantageous zone," it is possible to reduce the program capacity required to determine whether the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone has exceeded 2400. Furthermore, by storing 2400 as the initial value, it is possible to store values up to the equivalent of -63135 as the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone. While an example is given of storing 2400 as the initial value, any value other than 2400 (for example, 2401) can be used as the initial value as long as it has the same effect.

"RWM initialization" updates all parameters that affect the performance of the instruction function to 0 and ends the advantageous zone clear counter management process. Parameters that affect the performance of the instruction function include the number of AT games, the game status related to the AT, the advantageous zone clear counter, the advantageous zone difference counter, etc. By updating the advantageous zone type to 0, the next game will be played in a normal zone that is not an advantageous zone. When playing in an advantageous zone, if "RWM initialization" is not executed, the next game will be played in an advantageous zone (the advantageous zone will not end).

Note that while "IN number < OUT number?" subtracts the OUT number from the IN number, it may also be configured to subtract the IN number from the OUT number. If configured to subtract the IN number from the OUT number, when "IN number < OUT number?" returns NO (when a borrow occurs in the A register), "advantageous zone difference number counter addition" calculates the complement using a predetermined calculation and stores it in the A register (the difference number of the gaming medium for the current game), and then adds the value stored in the A register (the difference number of the gaming medium for the current game) to the value stored in the HL register (the value stored in the advantageous zone difference number counter). In other words, when "IN number < OUT number?" returns YES, it is sufficient to configure the absolute value of the difference number of the gaming medium for the current game to be added to the value stored in the advantageous zone difference number counter.

Similarly, if the IN number is configured to be subtracted from the OUT number when "IN number < OUT number?" is answered with YES (no borrowing has occurred in the A register), then the "favourable zone difference number counter subtraction" can simply subtract the value stored in the A register (the difference number of gaming media for the current game) from the value stored in the HL register (the value stored in the favourable zone difference number counter) without calculating the complement. In other words, if "IN number < OUT number?" is answered with NO, the absolute value of the difference number of gaming media for the current game can be subtracted from the value stored in the favourable zone difference number counter.

As mentioned above, specific processing for ending the advantageous period with the difference in the number of gaming media has been explained using Figures 53 and 54, but this is not limited to these. In other words, it is sufficient if the advantageous period can be ended with the difference in the number of gaming media.

In addition, in Figures 53 and 54, one of the conditions for ending an advantageous zone is that the number of plays in the advantageous zone reaches a predetermined number, but the condition for ending an advantageous zone does not have to be that the number of plays in the advantageous zone reaches a predetermined number. In that case, the advantageous zone clear counter in Figures 53 and 54 does not need to be provided.

If a favorable zone clear counter is not provided, the process corresponding to "favorable zone clear counter -1" in Figures 53 and 54, the process corresponding to "favorable zone clear counter before subtraction = 0?" and the process corresponding to "save favorable zone clear counter initial value" do not need to be provided.

<Regarding the relationship between the initialization process accompanying the operation of the setting change device and the advantageous zone difference counter>
In the advantageous zone difference number counter described above, the value stored in the advantageous zone difference number counter is configured to be cleared by RWM clearing at the end of the advantageous zone or by powering on with a setting change (RWM clearing at the end of the setting change), but it may also be configured to be cleared only by RWM clearing at the end of the advantageous zone (not by powering on with a setting change). Note that setting changes include not only changing to a different setting value (for example, changing from setting value 1 to setting value 6), but also changing to the same setting value (for example, changing from setting value 1 to setting value 1).

When configured in this way, if the power is turned on with a setting change while the advantageous zone difference counter is set to a predetermined value in the advantageous zone, play will begin in the normal zone. After that, the advantageous zone difference counter is not updated in the normal zone, so when the advantageous zone difference counter is switched to, it will be set to the predetermined value before the setting change.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that keeps gambling within a certain range while improving playability compared to when the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is cleared by clearing the RWM, which involves turning on the power and changing the settings.

For example, if a game parlor closes and the difference in the number of gaming media in a specified advantageous zone is -3000, even if the settings are changed the next day, the game can be resumed in the advantageous zone after the setting change with the difference in the number of gaming media at -3000. Therefore, starting from the start of the advantageous zone after the setting change, a maximum of approximately 5400 gaming media can be obtained in one advantageous zone.

In addition, by clearing the value of the advantageous zone difference counter at the gaming facility, it is possible to prevent the user from suffering significant losses if the performance of the instruction function changes based on the advantageous zone difference counter.

For example, if the performance of the instruction function is improved when the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is below the initial value, such as the probability of winning the AT or the rate of granting bonuses such as an AT extension, compared to when the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is above the initial value, and business hours are closed when the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is below the initial value, and the settings are then changed, the value of the advantageous zone difference counter will not be cleared even when business hours begin the next day, so play can begin in a state where the performance of the instruction function has been improved.

The following explains the relationship between the initialization process associated with the operation of the setting change device and the advantageous zone difference counter.

<<Case 1>>
When the initialization process is performed due to a setting change, the advantageous zone difference counter is not initialized, but the advantageous zone type is initialized.

When the game is in a favorable zone (favorable zone type = 1) and the value of the favorable zone difference counter is a predetermined value (predetermined value ≠ 0), the power is cut off, the setting change key is turned ON when no power is being supplied, and when the power is turned on, the setting change device is activated and an initialization process is executed in conjunction with the operation of the setting change device. During this initialization process, the value of the favorable zone difference counter is not initialized, but the favorable zone is initialized (favorable zone type = 0). In other words, when the initialization process is executed and the operation of the setting change device is then terminated, the game state is in a normal zone and the value of the favorable zone difference counter is the predetermined value.

The first game after the setting change device has finished operating will be played in the normal zone, and if a predetermined number of bets (for example, 3) is placed at the start of that first game, and the advantageous zone transition process determines that the next game will not transition to the advantageous zone, and no payout results from that first game, then the next game will also be played in the normal zone, and the value of the advantageous zone difference counter will also be the predetermined value (the value of the advantageous zone difference counter will not be updated).

Furthermore, the first game after the setting change device has finished operating will be played in the normal zone, and if a predetermined number of bets is placed at the start of that first game, and the advantageous zone transition process determines that the next game will not transition to the advantageous zone, and a specific number (for example, 10) is paid out as a result of that first game, the next game will be played in the normal zone, and the value of the advantageous zone difference counter will be the predetermined value.

Furthermore, the first game after the setting change device has finished operating will be played in the normal zone, and if a predetermined number of bets are placed at the start of that first game, and the advantageous zone transition process determines that the next game will be played in the advantageous zone, and if no payout results from that first game, the next game will be played in the advantageous zone, and the value of the advantageous zone difference counter will be a predetermined value.

Furthermore, the first game after the setting change device has finished operating will be played in the normal zone, and if a predetermined number of bets is placed at the start of that first game, the advantageous zone transition process determines that the next game will transition to the advantageous zone, and if a specific number of payouts is made as a result of that first game, the next game will be in the advantageous zone, and the value of the advantageous zone difference counter will be a predetermined value.

In other words, the process of updating the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is not performed during play in the normal zone.

Then, if the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is a predetermined value, the game is in an advantageous zone, a predetermined number of bets were placed at the start of the game, and no payout was made as a result of the game, the advantageous zone clear counter management process at the end of the game can update the value of the advantageous zone difference counter (value of the advantageous zone difference counter = predetermined value - 3).

In addition, if the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is a predetermined value, the game is in an advantageous zone, a predetermined number of bets are made at the start of the game, and a specific number of payouts is made as a result of the game, the advantageous zone clear counter management process at the end of the game can update the value of the advantageous zone difference counter (value of the advantageous zone difference counter = predetermined value + 10 - 3).

In other words, when playing after transitioning to the advantageous zone, the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is updated.

In case 1, when the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is a predetermined value, the zone is advantageous, and the main gaming state is AT, and the initialization process is executed in conjunction with the operation of the setting change device, the value of the advantageous zone difference counter will be a predetermined value, the zone is normal, and the main gaming state will be a state corresponding to the normal zone (a state that is not AT) after initialization. The RT state may be initialized (transitioned to non-RT) or maintained. This is because whether the RT state is initialized or maintained by changing the settings can be determined according to the specifications of each gaming machine.

With this configuration, even if the gaming parlor closes for the day during the AT and the settings are changed the next day, the AT state can be initialized, preventing the user from being in a significantly advantageous state when the parlor reopens.

Furthermore, in case 1, initialization of the value of the favorable zone difference counter is performed by initialization processing due to an RWM abnormality and initialization processing by favorable zone clear counter management processing at the end of the favorable zone. Initialization processing due to an RWM abnormality refers to initialization processing executed when an irreversible error occurs and the setting change device is then activated. Note that the initialization ranges of the initialization processing associated with the operation of the setting change device when an irreversible error occurs are different from those of the initialization processing associated with the operation of the setting change device when no irreversible error has occurred. Initialization processing by favorable zone clear counter management processing refers to initialization processing when the value of the favorable zone difference counter reaches the upper limit value (so-called ending) or initialization processing when any favorable zone end condition is met.

In addition, if the initialization conditions for the value of the favorable zone difference number counter in Case 1 are limited to initialization processing due to an RWM abnormality and initialization processing due to the favorable zone clear counter management processing at the end of the favorable zone, it will not be possible to initialize the value of the favorable zone difference number counter under any other conditions.For example, since the value of the favorable zone difference number counter cannot be initialized arbitrarily in a situation where the value of the favorable zone difference number counter is below the initial value (a situation where the user's difference number is negative), it is possible to prevent the user from suffering significant losses.

In addition, as another optional condition for initializing the value of the advantageous zone difference counter, the advantageous zone difference counter may be initialized by operating the advantageous zone difference counter clear switch.

In this case, operating the advantageous zone difference counter clear switch means turning on the power while pressing the advantageous zone difference counter clear switch when the power is off, or pressing the advantageous zone difference counter clear switch once or holding it down when the power source is shared. Note that the initialization scope of the initialization process based on the advantageous zone difference counter clear switch may be either the advantageous zone difference counter only, or the advantageous zone difference counter and advantageous zone type.

If the value of the advantageous zone difference counter can be initialized under any other conditions, even if there is a malfunction based on the advantageous zone difference counter, the gaming facility will be able to easily resolve the malfunction.

In addition, the operation of the advantageous zone difference counter clear switch can be disabled or enabled when the opening of the front door is detected.

Furthermore, when the advantageous zone difference counter clear switch is pressed during play, operation of other main switches (start switch, stop switch, bet switch, settlement switch, reset switch, etc.) may be enabled or disabled.

Furthermore, if the operation of the advantageous section difference counter clear switch is specified as turning on the power while pressing the advantageous section difference counter clear switch when the power is off, there is a possibility that the advantageous section difference counter clear switch may be pressed and the setting key switch may be ON when the power is off.

In this case, if the advantageous zone difference counter and advantageous zone type are initialized and the setting change mode is activated, if the advantageous zone difference counter and advantageous zone type are initialized and the setting change mode is not activated, the advantageous zone difference counter will be initialized but the advantageous zone type will not be initialized, if the setting change mode is activated, the advantageous zone difference counter will be initialized but the advantageous zone type will not be initialized, if the setting change mode is not activated, the advantageous zone difference counter will not be initialized but the advantageous zone type will be initialized, if the setting change mode is activated, the advantageous zone difference counter will not be initialized but the advantageous zone type will be initialized, and the setting change mode will not be activated.

Furthermore, in case 1, since the gaming facility will not be able to grasp the value of the advantageous zone difference counter, the value of the advantageous zone difference counter may be indicated by a lamp or the like in a location that is not normally visible to the user (for example, behind the front door or inside the cabinet).

For example, when the red LED is off, the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is equal to or greater than the initial value; when the red LED is flashing at 5-second intervals, the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is less than the initial value but greater than or equal to -5000; when the red LED is flashing at 3-second intervals, the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is less than the initial value -5000 but greater than or equal to -30000; and when the red LED is lit, the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is at the lower limit (or the upper limit if the advantageous zone difference counter is a system that adds the amount of the bet).

Also, for example, the value of the advantageous zone difference counter may be displayed on a five-digit display (such as a display with five adjacent seven-segment displays).

In addition, as a method for allowing the gaming facility to know the value of the advantageous zone difference counter, the value of the advantageous zone difference counter, or the number of inputs (number of bets) and number of payouts per game in the advantageous zone may be output to an external terminal so that they can be checked on the hall computer.

In addition, in case 1, since the value of the advantageous zone difference counter can easily reach the lower limit, the value of the advantageous zone difference counter for the previous game and the value of the advantageous zone difference counter for the current game are stored for each game to determine whether the lower limit was reached through the normal route or due to fraudulent activity.The value of the advantageous zone difference counter for the previous game is compared with the value of the advantageous zone difference counter for the current game, and if the difference is within a certain value (for example, 14), it is determined to be normal and the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is updated, and the value of the advantageous zone difference counter for the current game is saved as the value of the advantageous zone difference counter for the previous game.If the difference is not within a certain value (for example, 14) when the value of the advantageous zone difference counter for the previous game is compared with the value of the advantageous zone difference counter for the current game, it is determined to be abnormal and the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is not updated, and game play is stopped through error processing, or the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is updated but an error command is sent to the sub-control means, and the sub-control means issues an error notification.

With this configuration, even if the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is fraudulently set to the lower limit, the gaming facility can be notified.

In addition, in Case 1, the advantageous zone difference counter was not updated during the normal interval, but it may also be updated during the normal interval. In such a case, the advantageous zone clear counter management process is made possible to update during the normal interval, and the number of bets is subtracted and the number of payouts is added to the value of the advantageous zone difference counter as play progresses during the normal interval. In this variant, it is possible for the upper limit of the advantageous zone difference counter to be reached during the normal interval. If the upper limit of the advantageous zone difference counter is reached during the normal interval, an initialization process may be performed to initialize the advantageous zone difference counter and advantageous zone type, or the advantageous zone difference counter may be initialized but the advantageous zone type may not be initialized (because the advantageous zone type is the initial value during the normal interval). In other words, the initialization process (initialization range) when the upper limit of the advantageous zone difference counter is reached during the advantageous interval and the initialization process (initialization range) when the upper limit of the advantageous zone difference counter is reached during the normal interval may be the same process or different processes.

<<Case 2>>
When neither the advantageous zone difference counter nor the advantageous zone type is initialized during the initialization process due to a setting change.

When the game is in an advantageous zone (advantageous zone type = 1) and the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is a predetermined value (predetermined value ≠ 0), the power is cut off, the setting change key is turned ON when no power is being supplied, and when the power is turned on, the setting change device is activated and an initialization process is executed in conjunction with the operation of the setting change device. During this initialization process, the value of the advantageous zone difference counter and the advantageous zone type are not initialized (advantageous zone type = 1 remains). In other words, when the initialization process is executed and the operation of the setting change device is then terminated, the game state is in an advantageous zone, and the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is the predetermined value.

The first game after the setting change device has finished operating will be played in the advantageous zone, and if a predetermined number (for example, 3) is bet at the start of that first game, and no payout results from that first game, and the advantageous zone clear counter supervision process determines that the next game will not transition to the normal zone, then the next game will also be in the advantageous zone, and the value of the advantageous zone difference counter can be updated (predetermined value - 3).

Furthermore, the first game after the setting change device has finished operating will be played in the advantageous zone, and if a predetermined number of bets is placed at the start of that first game, and a specific number (for example, 10) is paid out as a result of that first game, even if the advantageous zone clear counter supervision process determines not to transition to the normal zone for the next game, the next game will be in the advantageous zone, and the value of the advantageous zone difference counter can be updated (predetermined value + 10 - 3).

Furthermore, the first game after the setting change device has finished operating will be played in the advantageous zone, and if a predetermined number of bets are placed at the start of that first game, and no payout results from that first game, and the advantageous zone clear counter supervision process determines that the next game will be played in the normal zone (initialization processing is executed in the advantageous zone clear counter supervision process), then the next game will be played in the normal zone, and the value of the advantageous zone difference counter will be set to its initial value.

Furthermore, the first game after the setting change device has finished operating will be played in the advantageous zone, and if a predetermined number of bets is placed at the start of that first game, and a specific number of payouts is made as a result of that first game, and the advantageous zone clear counter supervision process determines that the next game will be played in the normal zone (initialization processing is executed in the advantageous zone clear counter supervision process), then the next game will be played in the normal zone, and the value of the advantageous zone difference counter will be set to its initial value.

In other words, even after the initialization process when a setting change is performed in a favorable zone, the zone remains favorable, and the process of updating the value of the favorable zone difference counter is executed.

If the setting change device is activated and the initialization process is executed in a normal zone, the first game after the setting change device has finished operating will be a game in the normal zone. If a predetermined number of bets are placed at the start of that first game, the advantageous zone transition process determines that there will be no transition to the advantageous zone for the next game, and no payout results from that first game, the next game will also be in the normal zone, and the value of the advantageous zone difference counter will be set to its initial value (the value of the advantageous zone difference counter will not be updated).

In addition, if the setting change device is activated and initialization processing is performed in a normal zone, the first game after the setting change device has finished operating will be a game in the normal zone, and if a predetermined number of bets is placed at the start of that first game, the advantageous zone transition processing determines that the next game will not transition to the advantageous zone, and a specific number of payouts is made as a result of that first game, the next game will also be in the normal zone, and the value of the advantageous zone difference counter will be set to its initial value (the value of the advantageous zone difference counter will not be updated).

In addition, if the setting change device is activated and initialization processing is performed in a normal zone, the first game after the setting change device has finished operating will be a game in the normal zone, and if a predetermined number of bets are placed at the start of that first game, and the advantageous zone transition processing determines that the next game will transition to an advantageous zone, and no payout results from that first game, the next game will be in an advantageous zone, and the value of the advantageous zone difference counter will be set to its initial value (the value of the advantageous zone difference counter will not be updated).

In addition, if the setting change device is activated and initialization processing is performed in a normal zone, the first game after the setting change device has finished operating will be a game in the normal zone, and if a predetermined number of bets is placed at the start of that first game, and the advantageous zone transition processing determines that the next game will transition to the advantageous zone, and a specific number of payouts is made as a result of that first game, the next game will be in the advantageous zone, and the value of the advantageous zone difference counter will be set to its initial value (the value of the advantageous zone difference counter will not be updated).

In other words, if the setting change device is activated and initialization processing is performed during the normal section, gameplay will begin from the normal section.

In case 2, when the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is a predetermined value, the advantageous zone is in place, and the main gaming state is AT, and initialization processing is performed in conjunction with the operation of the setting change device, the post-initialization state will be one in which the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is a predetermined value, the advantageous zone is in place, and the main gaming state is another gaming state different from AT. For example, the other gaming state could be a gaming state with a high design stay rate (such as a normal advantageous zone state). Note that the RT state may be initialized (transitioned to non-RT) or maintained. This is because whether the RT state is initialized or maintained by a setting change can be determined by the specifications of each gaming machine.

In addition, if the main gaming state before the setting change was during AT, the main gaming state after the setting change may be a predetermined main gaming state (for example, a normal advantageous zone state).

Also, even if the main gaming state before the setting change was a gaming state different from the AT state, the main gaming state after the setting change may be a predetermined main gaming state.

With this configuration, even if the gaming parlor closes for the day during the AT and the settings are changed the next day, the AT state can be initialized, preventing the user from being in a significantly advantageous state when the parlor reopens.

Furthermore, in case 2, when the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is a predetermined value, the advantageous zone is in effect, and the main gaming state is in AT, and the initialization process is executed in conjunction with the operation of the setting change device, the state after initialization may be such that the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is a predetermined value, the advantageous zone is in effect, and the main gaming state is in AT.

This configuration eliminates the need to change the main game state during the initialization process associated with the operation of the setting change device, thereby reducing program size and improving program readability.

In addition, to allow gaming establishments to initialize the main gaming state, a separate main gaming state initialization switch may be provided to allow initialization of the main gaming state. Examples of the main gaming state initialization switch include turning on the power while pressing the advantageous zone difference number counter clear switch when the power is off, or pressing the advantageous zone difference number counter clear switch once or holding it down when the power source is shared. Initialization of the main gaming state may be the main gaming state selected immediately after transitioning to the normal zone or advantageous zone, or a predetermined gaming state.

Furthermore, in case 2, initialization of the value of the favorable zone difference counter is performed by initialization processing due to an RWM abnormality, and initialization processing by favorable zone clear counter management processing at the end of the favorable zone. Initialization processing by favorable zone clear counter management processing refers to initialization processing when the value of the favorable zone difference counter reaches the upper limit value (so-called ending), or initialization processing when any favorable zone end condition is met.

In addition, if the initialization conditions for the value of the favorable zone difference number counter in case 2 are limited to the initialization process due to an RWM abnormality and the initialization process due to the favorable zone clear counter management process at the end of the favorable zone, the value of the favorable zone difference number counter cannot be initialized under any other conditions.For example, if the value of the favorable zone difference number counter is below the initial value (a situation in which the user's difference number is negative), the value of the favorable zone difference number counter cannot be initialized arbitrarily, thereby preventing the user from suffering significant losses.

In addition, as another optional condition for initializing the value of the advantageous zone difference counter, the advantageous zone difference counter may be initialized by operating the advantageous zone difference counter clear switch.

In this case, operating the advantageous zone difference counter clear switch means turning on the power while pressing the advantageous zone difference counter clear switch when the power is off, or pressing the advantageous zone difference counter clear switch once or holding it down when the power source is shared. Note that the initialization scope of the initialization process based on the advantageous zone difference counter clear switch may be either the advantageous zone difference counter only, or the advantageous zone difference counter and advantageous zone type.

If the value of the advantageous zone difference counter can be initialized under any other conditions, even if there is a malfunction based on the advantageous zone difference counter, the gaming facility will be able to easily resolve the malfunction.

In addition, the operation of the advantageous zone difference counter clear switch can be disabled or enabled when the opening of the front door is detected.

Furthermore, when the advantageous zone difference counter clear switch is pressed during play, operation of other main switches (start switch, stop switch, bet switch, settlement switch, reset switch, etc.) may be enabled or disabled.

Furthermore, if the operation of the advantageous section difference counter clear switch is specified as turning on the power while pressing the advantageous section difference counter clear switch when the power is off, there is a possibility that the advantageous section difference counter clear switch may be pressed and the setting key switch may be ON when the power is off.

In this case, if the advantageous zone difference counter and advantageous zone type are initialized and the setting change mode is activated, if the advantageous zone difference counter and advantageous zone type are initialized and the setting change mode is not activated, the advantageous zone difference counter will be initialized but the advantageous zone type will not be initialized, if the setting change mode is activated, the advantageous zone difference counter will be initialized but the advantageous zone type will not be initialized, if the setting change mode is not activated, the advantageous zone difference counter will not be initialized but the advantageous zone type will be initialized, if the setting change mode is activated, the advantageous zone difference counter will not be initialized but the advantageous zone type will be initialized, and the setting change mode will not be activated.

Furthermore, in case 2, since the gaming facility will not be able to grasp the value of the advantageous zone difference counter, the value of the advantageous zone difference counter may be indicated by a lamp or the like in a location that is not normally visible to the user (for example, behind the front door or inside the cabinet).

For example, when the red LED is off, the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is equal to or greater than the initial value; when the red LED is flashing at 5-second intervals, the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is less than the initial value but greater than or equal to -5000; when the red LED is flashing at 3-second intervals, the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is less than the initial value -5000 but greater than or equal to -30000; and when the red LED is lit, the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is at the lower limit (or the upper limit if the advantageous zone difference counter is a system that adds the amount of the bet).

Also, for example, the value of the advantageous zone difference counter may be displayed on a five-digit display (such as a display with five adjacent seven-segment displays).

In addition, as a method for allowing the gaming facility to know the value of the advantageous zone difference counter, the value of the advantageous zone difference counter, or the number of inputs (number of bets) and number of payouts per game in the advantageous zone may be output to an external terminal so that they can be checked on the hall computer.

In addition, in case 2, since the value of the advantageous zone difference counter can easily reach the lower limit, the value of the advantageous zone difference counter for the previous game and the value of the advantageous zone difference counter for the current game are stored for each game to determine whether the lower limit was reached through the normal route or due to fraudulent activity.The value of the advantageous zone difference counter for the previous game is compared with the value of the advantageous zone difference counter for the current game, and if the difference is within a certain value (for example, 14), it is determined to be normal and the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is updated, and the value of the advantageous zone difference counter for the current game is saved as the value of the advantageous zone difference counter for the previous game.If the difference is not within a certain value (for example, 14) when the value of the advantageous zone difference counter for the previous game is compared with the value of the advantageous zone difference counter for the current game, it is determined to be abnormal and the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is not updated, and game is stopped by error processing, or the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is updated but an error command is sent to the sub-control means, and the sub-control means issues an error notification.

With this configuration, even if the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is fraudulently set to the lower limit, the gaming facility can be notified.

In addition, in Case 2, even if the initialization process is performed due to a setting change, the advantageous zone type does not change. Therefore, even if the setting is changed while the zone is advantageous, play immediately after the setting change will be in the advantageous zone, and processing related to the instruction function can be executed based on the results of the internal lottery performed by the internal lottery means.

This allows processing related to the instruction function to be executed from the game immediately after the setting change, minimizing the number of games (games in the normal area) in which processing related to the instruction function cannot be executed, increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, in Case 2, the advantageous zone difference number counter is not updated during the normal zone, but as a variation of Case 2, the advantageous zone difference number counter may be updated during the normal zone.

In such cases, the advantageous zone clear counter management process can be updated even during normal zones, and the number of bets is subtracted and the number of payouts is added to the value of the advantageous zone difference counter as play progresses during normal zones.

Specifically, when in the normal zone, the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is a predetermined value, a predetermined number of bets are placed at the start of play, the advantageous zone transition process determines that the next play will not transition to the advantageous zone, and no payout is made as a result of that play, the next play will also be in the normal zone, and the value of the advantageous zone difference counter can be updated (predetermined value - 3).

Also, when in a normal zone, the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is a predetermined value, a predetermined number of bets are placed at the start of play, the advantageous zone transition process determines that the next play will not transition to the advantageous zone, and a specific number of payouts is made as a result of that play, the next play will also be in the normal zone, and the value of the advantageous zone difference counter can be updated (predetermined value + 10 - 3).

Also, when in a normal zone, the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is a predetermined value, a predetermined number of bets are placed at the start of play, the advantageous zone transition process determines that the next play will transition to the advantageous zone, and if no payout results from that play, the next play will be in the advantageous zone, and the value of the advantageous zone difference counter can be updated (predetermined value - 3).

Also, when in a normal zone, the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is a predetermined value, a predetermined number of bets are placed at the start of play, the advantageous zone transition process determines that the next play will transition to the advantageous zone, and if a specific number of payouts is made as a result of that play, the next play will be in the advantageous zone, and the value of the advantageous zone difference counter can be updated (predetermined value + 10 - 3).

With this configuration, the value of the advantageous zone difference counter can be updated regardless of whether it is in a normal zone or an advantageous zone, improving playability in normal zones. Furthermore, since the advantageous zone difference counter update process can be performed in a common module without determining the play zone, it is possible to compress the program size and improve program readability.

In addition, in a modified version of Case 2, the initialization conditions for the favorable zone difference counter may include initialization processing due to an RWM abnormality, initialization processing by favorable zone clear counter management processing at the end of a favorable zone, and also initialization processing when a favorable zone transitions.

The initialization process when transitioning to a favorable zone is a process that can be executed when it is decided to transition to a favorable zone for the next game during the favorable zone transition process in the normal zone, and is executed before the start of the next game.

This means that even if the value of the advantageous zone difference counter exceeds the initial value during the normal zone, the value of the advantageous zone difference counter can be initialized when transitioning to an advantageous zone, preventing the advantageous zone from ending when the user wins less than 2,400 coins if the AT is won immediately after the advantageous zone begins. Note that the initialization process when transitioning to an advantageous zone does not necessarily have to be performed when transitioning to an advantageous zone; the initialization process can be performed and the value of the advantageous zone difference counter set to the initial value only if the value of the advantageous zone difference counter exceeds the initial value when transitioning to an advantageous zone.

In addition, whether or not to execute initialization processing for any termination condition (a favorable zone termination condition other than reaching the favorable zone difference counter upper limit value) among the initialization conditions for the favorable zone difference counter by the favorable zone clear counter management processing at the end of the favorable zone may be determined depending on the status of the favorable zone.

For example, if an advantageous zone ends when an arbitrary end condition in the advantageous zone is met, and the value of the advantageous zone difference counter exceeds the initial value, initialization processing will be executed at the end of the advantageous zone, and if the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is equal to or less than the initial value, initialization processing will not be executed at the end of the advantageous zone.

In this case, it is advantageous for the user if the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is equal to or less than the initial value, so even if the user is unable to obtain any balls in the advantageous zone, they will be able to recover the balls at the next opportunity, preventing their interest in the game from declining when the advantageous zone ends.

For example, if an advantageous zone is terminated by satisfying an arbitrary termination condition within the advantageous zone, and the value of the advantageous zone difference counter exceeds the initial value, initialization processing may not be performed at the end of the advantageous zone, but if the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is equal to or less than the initial value, initialization processing may be performed at the end of the advantageous zone.

In this case, the possibility of the gaming establishment winning more balls than expected can be reduced, allowing for stable operation of the gaming establishment.

In a modified version of Case 2, it is possible that the upper limit of the advantageous zone difference counter may be reached during the normal zone. If the upper limit of the advantageous zone difference counter is reached during the normal zone, an initialization process may be executed to initialize the advantageous zone difference counter and advantageous zone type, or the advantageous zone difference counter may be initialized but the advantageous zone type may not be initialized (as the advantageous zone type is at its initial value during the normal zone). In other words, the initialization process (initialization range) when the upper limit of the advantageous zone difference counter during the advantageous zone is reached and the initialization process (initialization range) when the upper limit of the advantageous zone difference counter during the normal zone is reached may be the same process, or they may be different processes.

The modified version of Case 2 can be combined with other configurations in Case 2 without any problems, and is a modified version of Case 2 with a configuration that allows the advantageous zone difference number counter to be updated in the normal zone. It goes without saying that for changes, a configuration based on the modified version of Case 2 can be adopted, and for other common points (for example, the configuration of the advantageous zone difference number counter clear switch, etc.), the configuration of Case 2 can be adopted.

<<Common to Cases 1 and 2>>
A common configuration between the above-mentioned cases 1 and 2 (including the modified examples) will be described.

The advantageous zone clear counter management process is executed at the end of play (processing after all reels have stopped). For this reason, in a play zone where the advantageous zone difference counter can be updated, the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is a predetermined value, and the number of bets is a predetermined number, power-off processing is executed during the period from the start of play (start switch ON) to the end of play (all reels have stopped and before the advantageous zone clear counter management process is executed) (so-called "during play"), and then, when the power supply is stopped, the setting key is turned ON, power supply is resumed, and initialization processing is executed by operating the setting change device, the number of bets is initialized, the number of credits is initialized, the reels do not spin, and the state before bets was placed is restored, and the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is set to the predetermined value.

In other words, the timing for subtracting a predetermined number (the number of bets) from the advantageous zone difference counter is during the advantageous zone clear counter management process at the end of play, so if an initialization process is executed due to a setting change during play, the number of bets used in that game will not be updated.

This prevents gaming establishments from repeatedly placing bets and changing settings to intentionally set the value of the advantageous zone difference counter below its initial value, thereby preventing excessive gambling.

It is also possible to execute the advantageous zone clear counter management process at the start of play. In this case, the advantageous zone clear counter management process is executed at the start of play (start switch ON) and the end of play (processing after all reels have stopped). For this reason, in a play zone where the advantageous zone difference counter can be updated, the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is a predetermined value, and the number of bets is a predetermined number, power-off processing is executed during the period from the start of play (start switch ON) to the end of play (when all reels have stopped and before the advantageous zone clear counter management process is executed) (so-called "during play"). If the power supply is then stopped, the setting key is turned ON, power supply is resumed, and initialization processing is executed by operating the setting change device, the number of bets will be initialized, the number of credits will be initialized, the reels will not spin, and the state will return to before the bet was placed, and the value of the advantageous zone difference counter will be the predetermined value -3.

This allows the actual medals used to be subtracted from the value of the advantageous zone difference counter, even if the settings are changed during play, enabling accurate updating of the advantageous zone difference counter.

Furthermore, when the advantageous zone clear counter management process is executed at the end of play, it is executed after medal payout has finished. For this reason, if a game is started in a play zone where the advantageous zone difference counter can be updated, the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is a predetermined value, and the number of bets is a predetermined number, a small winning symbol combination that pays out a specific number is displayed frozen when all reels are stopped, and power-off processing is executed while a specific number of medals are being paid out (including while the number of payouts is being added to the credits), and then the setting key is turned ON when the power supply is stopped, and power is supplied again, and initialization processing is executed by operating the setting change device, the number of bets will be initialized, the number of credits will be initialized, the reels will not spin and will return to the state before the bet was made, medal payout will not resume, and the value of the advantageous zone difference counter will be the predetermined value.

This means that even if an initialization process is performed due to a setting change while medals are being paid out, the value of the advantageous zone difference counter for the amount already paid out will not be updated, preventing the medal payout process from becoming complicated.

<<Case 3>>
When both the advantageous zone difference counter and advantageous zone type are initialized during the initialization process due to a setting change.

In Case 3, both the advantageous zone difference counter and advantageous zone type are initialized by the initialization process caused by a setting change, just as in the past, but the difference is that the advantageous zone difference counter can also be updated in normal zones.

Specifically, when in the normal zone, the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is a predetermined value, a predetermined number of bets are placed at the start of play, the advantageous zone transition process determines that there will be no transition to the advantageous zone for the next play, and no payout results from that play, then the next play will also be in the normal zone, and the value of the advantageous zone difference counter can be updated (value of advantageous zone difference counter = predetermined value - 3).

Also, when in a normal zone, the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is a predetermined value, a predetermined number of bets are placed at the start of play, the advantageous zone transition process determines that the next play will not transition to the advantageous zone, and a specific number of payouts is made as a result of that play, then the next play will also be in the normal zone, and the value of the advantageous zone difference counter can be updated (value of advantageous zone difference counter = predetermined value + 10 - 3).

Also, when in a normal zone, the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is a predetermined value, a predetermined number of bets are placed at the start of play, the advantageous zone transition process determines that the next play will transition to an advantageous zone, and if no payout results from that play, the next play will be in an advantageous zone, and the value of the advantageous zone difference counter can be updated (value of advantageous zone difference counter = predetermined value - 3).

Also, when in a normal zone, the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is a predetermined value, a predetermined number of bets are placed at the start of play, the advantageous zone transition process determines that the next play will transition to the advantageous zone, and if a specific number of payouts is made as a result of that play, the next play will be in the advantageous zone, and the value of the advantageous zone difference counter can be updated (value of advantageous zone difference counter = predetermined value + 10 - 3).

With this configuration, the value of the advantageous zone difference counter can be updated regardless of whether it is in a normal zone or an advantageous zone, improving playability in normal zones. Furthermore, since the advantageous zone difference counter update process can be performed in a common module without determining the play zone, it is possible to compress the program size and improve program readability.

In addition, when the advantageous zone difference counter value is a predetermined value in a situation where the game is in an advantageous zone, a predetermined number of bets have been placed at the start of play, and no payout has been made as a result of the game, the advantageous zone clear counter management process at the end of play allows the value of the advantageous zone difference counter to be updated (value of advantageous zone difference counter = predetermined value - 3).

Furthermore, in a situation where the advantageous zone difference counter value is a predetermined value, a predetermined number of bets are made at the start of play, and a specific number of payouts is made as a result of the play, the advantageous zone clear counter management process at the end of play allows the value of the advantageous zone difference counter to be updated (value of advantageous zone difference counter = predetermined value + 10 - 3).

In other words, when playing after transitioning to the advantageous zone, the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is updated.

In case 3, when the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is a predetermined value, the advantageous zone is in a favorable zone, and the main gaming state is in AT, and the initialization process is executed in conjunction with the operation of the setting change device, the value of the advantageous zone difference counter will be its initial value, the zone will be in a normal zone, and the main gaming state will be in a state corresponding to the normal zone (a state that is not AT) as the initialization state. The RT state may be initialized (transitioned to non-RT) or maintained. This is because whether the RT state is initialized or maintained by changing the settings can be determined according to the specifications of each gaming machine.

With this configuration, even if the gaming parlor closes for the day during the AT and the settings are changed the next day, the AT state can be initialized, preventing the user from being in a significantly advantageous state when the parlor reopens.

In addition, in case 3, in order to initialize the value of the advantageous zone difference counter, in addition to the initialization process associated with the operation of the setting change device, initialization process is performed due to an RWM abnormality and initialization process by the advantageous zone clear counter management process at the end of the advantageous zone. Initialization process by the advantageous zone clear counter management process refers to the initialization process when the value of the advantageous zone difference counter reaches the upper limit value (so-called ending) or when any advantageous zone end condition is met.

In addition, as another optional condition for initializing the value of the advantageous zone difference counter, the advantageous zone difference counter may be initialized by operating the advantageous zone difference counter clear switch.

In this case, operating the advantageous zone difference counter clear switch means turning on the power while pressing the advantageous zone difference counter clear switch when the power is off, or pressing the advantageous zone difference counter clear switch once or holding it down when the power source is shared. Note that the initialization scope of the initialization process based on the advantageous zone difference counter clear switch may be either the advantageous zone difference counter only, or the advantageous zone difference counter and advantageous zone type.

If the value of the advantageous zone difference counter can be initialized under any other conditions, even if there is a malfunction based on the advantageous zone difference counter, the gaming facility will be able to easily resolve the malfunction.

In addition, the operation of the advantageous zone difference counter clear switch can be disabled or enabled when the opening of the front door is detected.

Furthermore, when the advantageous zone difference counter clear switch is pressed during play, operation of other main switches (start switch, stop switch, bet switch, settlement switch, reset switch, etc.) may be enabled or disabled.

Furthermore, if the operation of the advantageous section difference counter clear switch is specified as turning on the power while pressing the advantageous section difference counter clear switch when the power is off, there is a possibility that the advantageous section difference counter clear switch may be pressed and the setting key switch may be ON when the power is off.

In this case, if the advantageous zone difference counter and advantageous zone type are initialized and the setting change mode is activated, it is possible that the advantageous zone difference counter and advantageous zone type are initialized and the setting change mode is not activated.

<<Regarding the common configuration of cases 1, 2, and 3 regarding the relationship between the initialization process accompanying the operation of the setting change device and the advantageous zone difference counter>>
A common configuration for the above-mentioned cases 1, 2 (including the modified examples), and 3 will be described.

In either case, the hit difference counter for the complete function is initialized (set to an initial value) when the power is turned off or on.

In either case, the value of the advantageous zone difference counter can be sent to the sub-control means.

For this reason, when the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is a certain number lower than the initial value, a suggestive effect can be given to the user with a set probability, or the value of the advantageous zone difference counter can be displayed on a screen that can only be viewed by the gaming facility while the settings are being checked or changed.

This is expected to improve the presentation effect for users and the effectiveness of maintenance for gaming facilities.

During the initialization process associated with the operation of the setting change device, whether the advantageous zone difference counter is initialized or not, the initialization process associated with the operation of the setting change device can initialize unrecoverable errors, recoverable errors, number of bets, number of credits, and the stop status.

<Settings change process>
The setting change process executed by the main control board 100 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

When setting change mode is activated (setting change processing is executed), it determines whether the current setting value is within the normal range, and if it is within the normal range, it acquires the current setting value. If it is outside the normal range, it saves "1" as the setting value and acquires the setting value "1".

After obtaining the setting value, the setting value display data is saved. After saving the setting value display data, the lighting is controlled by dynamic lighting control, which is a timer interrupt process, referencing the setting value display data every five interrupts.

Then, it is determined whether the start switch 12 has changed from off to on. If it is determined that the start switch 12 has not changed from off to on, it is determined whether the setting switch has changed from off to on.

If it is determined that the setting switch has not changed from off to on, it again determines whether the start switch 12 has changed from off to on. If it is determined that the setting switch has changed from off to on, it determines whether the setting value is equal to or greater than the maximum setting value (setting 6).

If the set value is not greater than or equal to the maximum value, the current set value is incremented; if the set value is greater than or equal to the maximum value, the current set value is set to the initial value (0) and then incremented again. After the set value has been incremented, the updated set value is displayed and processing returns to the step of determining whether the start switch 12 has changed from off to on.

After that, when the start switch sensor is detected and it is determined that the start switch 12 has changed from off to on, the setting value is confirmed and the system waits until it determines that the setting key switch has changed from on to off. When it determines that the setting key switch has changed from on to off, the system saves the determined setting value in the main control RAM, turns off the setting display LED, and turns on the blocker provided in the medal selector 34 (forming a path for medals to flow down to the hopper 44), thereby ending the setting change mode.

Here, the setting change mode is a means for determining one of the setting values from 1 to 6 (displayed as 1 to 6 setting values). After a setting value is determined, the internal lottery table (also called the role selection table) corresponding to the determined setting value continues to be set until the next time the setting value is changed by the setting change means. Note that a role selection table is provided for each setting value, with different probabilities of determining the result of the internal lottery (probability of winning the role).

When the setting key used to change the settings is rotated by the gaming parlor manager while the slot machine PS1 is powered off, and the slot machine PS1 is powered on with the setting key held in the rotational position where the setting key switch signal is turned on, the setting change means turns on the setting key switch signal in response to the power-on of the slot machine PS1. In this embodiment, the setting key switch signal being turned on refers to a rising edge on (OFF → ON). If the setting key was on before a power outage occurred, the rising edge on is not detected after power-on, so the system is configured not to transition to setting change mode. However, the setting key switch signal being turned on may also be a level on, and the system may be configured to transition to setting change mode if the setting key is on when the power is turned back on, even if it was on before a power outage occurred.

When the setting change means determines that the setting key switch signal is on, the door open signal is on, and the setting change enable flag is on, it activates a setting change mode in which the setting values of the slot machine PS1 can be changed.

The setting change possible flag is switched on and off depending on the game status. For example, one possible configuration is to keep the setting change possible flag off from the time the start switch 12 is operated until the game ends, and to keep the setting change possible flag on at other times. However, this is not the only configuration, and the setting change possible flag may be turned off only when a specific bonus game begins or when a specific bonus is in progress, or the setting may be changed in any state by not providing a setting change possible flag.

When the setting change mode is activated, the blocker provided in the medal selector 34 is turned off, preventing the start of play by inserting a medal. The setting value data that can be changed in the setting change mode has six levels: "1," "2," "3," "4," "5," and "6." The higher the setting value, the higher the winning combination table with a higher payout rate.

After the setting change mode is activated, the setting display LED on the back of the front panel PS2 is lit to indicate that the setting change mode is active. Then, setting value display data for displaying the set setting value data is set, and the credit number display 26 located on the front of the front panel PS2 of the slot machine PS1 and the setting display LED (not shown) located on the back of the front panel PS2 of the slot machine PS1 are lit to display the setting value. When the setting value data is "1," the setting value display shows "1." When the setting value data is "2," the setting value display shows "2." When the setting value data is "3," the setting value display shows "3." When the setting value data is "4," the setting value display shows "4." When the setting value data is "5," the setting value display shows "5." When the setting value data is "6," the setting value display shows "6."

When the setting value data stored in the setting value data storage area is stored in six levels from "0" to "5," if the setting value data is "0," the setting value display will show "1," if the setting value data is "1," if the setting value data is "2," if the setting value data is "2," if the setting value data is "3," if the setting value data is "3," if the setting value data is "4," if the setting value data is "4," and if the setting value data is "5," the setting value display will show "6."

After starting the setting change mode, the system continues to determine whether the sensor signal from the start switch 12 is on. If it determines that the start switch 12 has been operated and the sensor signal from the start switch 12 has turned on, the setting value is determined and the current setting value is displayed on the setting display LED. In other words, if it determines that the sensor signal from the start switch 12 has turned on during the setting change mode, the setting value will not change even if the setting switch is operated.

On the other hand, when the sensor signal from the start switch 12 is not determined to be on but the setting switch signal is determined to be on, the setting switch rising edge data is cleared, and a determination is made as to whether the current setting is equal to or greater than the maximum setting (setting value data "6"). If it is determined that the current setting is equal to or greater than the maximum setting (setting value data "6"), the setting value data is cleared (setting value data to "1"); if it is determined that the current setting is less than the maximum setting (setting value "1" to "5"), the setting value is incremented to the current setting. Note that when the setting value data has six levels (0 to 5), the setting change mode processing is as follows: a determination is made as to whether the current setting is equal to or greater than the maximum setting (setting value data "5"); if it is determined that the current setting is greater than the maximum setting (setting value data "5"), the setting value data is cleared (setting value data to "0"); if it is determined that the current setting is less than the maximum setting (setting value "0" to "4"), the setting value is incremented to the current setting.

In addition, when the sensor signal of the start switch 12 is determined to be on after the setting change mode is activated, the setting display LED may display the setting value in a manner different from that in which the setting can be changed, such as displaying "0" on the setting display LED to indicate that the setting value cannot be changed, or displaying "_X" on the setting display LED (where "X" is the set value after confirmation).

<Gameability using advantageous zones applicable to this embodiment>
In this embodiment, the specified number of coins required to start a game is only 3. In other words, a game cannot be started with anything other than 3 coins, and even when a bonus is activated, a game can only be started with 3 coins.

In this embodiment, the active line consists of one line spanning the bottom left reel, the middle of the middle reel, and the bottom right reel. Hereinafter, when a symbol combination stops on an active line, it will be simply referred to as "the symbol combination stopping."

In this embodiment, there are 10 types of symbols. They are called Red Seven, Blue Seven, Bar, Gold Bar, Blank, Cherry, Watermelon, Bell A, Bell B, and Replay. Please note that the names and types of symbols are merely examples and may be changed without any problems.

The reel arrangement of this embodiment will be explained using Figure 11. As shown in Figure 11, each reel has 20 symbols, and is equipped with a first reel (left reel), a second reel (middle reel), and a third reel (right reel).

The symbol combinations in this embodiment are shown in Figures 12 to 17. The "Winning Symbol, Activation Symbol, and Pattern Symbol Name" items in the figures indicate the names of the condition devices corresponding to the symbol combinations. Additionally, the "Specified Number and Game Status" items indicate the bonus awarded when a symbol combination stops for each specified number. If "Type 1 BB" is written in the "Specified Number and Game Status" item, this indicates that a Type 1 BB will be awarded when the symbol combination stops; if "Replay" is written, this indicates that a replay will be awarded when the symbol combination stops; if a number is written, this indicates the number of coins to be paid out when the symbol combination stops; and if "-" is written, this indicates that the symbol combination will not stop in the corresponding game status.

In this embodiment, the bonus is equipped with a Type 1 BB, and the end condition is the payout of more than 11 game medals. This Type 1 BB is also of the type in which RB operates continuously, and RB ends when either two wins or two games are met. Once the end condition of RB is met, RB will automatically operate until the end condition of Type 1 BB (payout of more than 11 game medals) is met.

As shown in Figure 12, there are eight possible combinations of Type 1 BB symbols, and the draw rate (probability of symbols related to the symbol combination stopping) for Type 1 BB symbol combinations on each reel is not 100%, so eye-pressing on each reel is required to display Type 1 BB symbol combinations.

In this embodiment, the RT transition begins in non-RT (also referred to as "not inside Type 1 BB"). If a Type 1 BB is won during non-RT and the Type 1 BB symbol combination does not stop, the next game (which may be the end of that game) transitions to RT1 (also referred to as "inside Type 1 BB"). If a Type 1 BB symbol combination stops during RT1, RT1 ends and Type 1 BB is activated (also referred to as "in Type 1 BB") from the next game. When Type 1 BB activation ends, the next game transitions to non-RT. Furthermore, since the setting change starts from non-RT, if the setting change device is activated during RT1 or Type 1 BB activation, non-RT is set when the setting change device's operation ends. Note that in the event of a power outage in which the setting change device is not activated (sometimes referred to as a normal power outage), the RT state and Type 1 BB activation state are not cleared, and therefore, when power is restored, the state before the power outage is resumed. Specifically, if a power outage occurs during Type 1 BB and then power is restored, the Type 1 BB operating state will be Type 1 BB and RT1, and if a power outage occurs while the power is restored, the RT state will be RT1.

The conditional devices in this embodiment are explained in Figure 18. In Figure 18, the "Winning Replay" item lists numbers corresponding to the winning numbers. The "Conditional Device" item lists the conditional devices that will be activated. The "Common Name" item lists the simple names of the conditional devices that will be activated. For example, the common name corresponding to the Replay-H conditional device is "Right Push: Strong-Battle Eye," indicating that the Strong Battle Eye will stop when the right reel is stopped for the first time. The common name corresponding to the Winning-A1 conditional device is "Push Order Bell Group A 123," indicating that the operation mode of the left reel stopping for the first time, the center reel stopping for the second time, and the right reel stopping for the third time is the correct operation mode (in this case, the operation mode that stops the symbol combination of Winning 52 (a prize with a higher payout number than Winnings 01-02, 09, and 29-31)). The "Components" item lists the symbol combinations corresponding to the conditional devices. For example, if the Replay-A condition device is activated (a win), it is possible to display Replay 01 or Replay 02. Note that a "0" in the "Winning Replay" section corresponds to a loss.

The internal lottery results that can be determined by the internal lottery means during a non-Type BB in this embodiment will be explained using Figures 19 to 21. The internal lottery results that can be determined by the internal lottery means during a non-Type BB in this embodiment are: Type BB, Replay -A, Replay -B, Replay -C (+Type 1 BB), Replay -D (+Type 1 BB), Replay -E (+Type 1 BB), Replay -F (+Type 1 BB), Replay -G (+Type 1 BB), Replay -H (+Type 1 BB), Replay -I (+Type 1 BB), Replay -J (+Type 1 BB), Winning -A1, Winning -A2, Winning -A3, Winning -A4, Winning -A5, Winning The prizes are either -A6, Winner -B1, Winner -B2, Winner -B3, Winner -B4, Winner -B5, Winner -B6, Winner -C1, Winner -C2, Winner -C3, Winner -C4, Winner -C5, Winner -C6, Winner -D (+1 type BB), Winner -E (+1 type BB), Winner -F (+1 type BB), Winner -G (+1 type BB), Winner -H (+1 type BB), Winner -I (+1 type BB), Winner -J (+1 type BB), Winner -K (+1 type BB), and there are no losing prizes.

The above-mentioned "Replay -C (+Type 1 BB)" indicates that Replay -C and Type 1 BB are won simultaneously, which corresponds to the fact that the names "Bonus Condition Device" and "Winning Replay" are both listed in Figures 19, 20, and 21. The "Internal Lottery" item in Figures 19, 20, and 21 indicates whether or not an internal lottery is applicable for each game state, with "○" indicating that an internal lottery is applicable and "×" indicating that an internal lottery is not applicable. The "Advantageous Zone Transition" item in Figures 19, 20, and 21 indicates whether or not an advantageous zone transition lottery is executed for each game state, with "○" indicating that an advantageous zone transition lottery is executed and "×" indicating that an advantageous zone transition lottery is not executed. In this embodiment, if an advantageous zone transition lottery is executed, there is a 100% chance of winning and transitioning to the advantageous zone. Additionally, the items "R1" to "R6" in Figures 19, 20, and 21 indicate the number of winning positions for the internal lottery corresponding to the set value, with 65,536 positions allocated for each gaming state. Note that "R1" corresponds to a set value of "1," "R2" corresponds to a set value of "2," "R3" corresponds to a set value of "3," "R4" corresponds to a set value of "4," "R5" corresponds to a set value of "5," and "R6" corresponds to a set value of "6."

In this embodiment, the internal lottery results that can be determined by the internal lottery means within Type 1 BB are either Replay-A, Replay-B, Replay-C, Replay-D, Replay-E, Replay-F, Replay-G, Replay-H, Replay-I, Replay-J, Winning-A1, Winning-A2, Winning-A3, Winning-A4, Winning-A5, Winning-A6, Winning-B1, Winning-B2, Winning-B3, Winning-B4, Winning-B5, Winning-B6, Winning-C1, Winning-C2, Winning-C3, Winning-C4, Winning-C5, Winning-C6, Winning-D, Winning-E, Winning-F, Winning-G, Winning-H, Winning-I, Winning-J, or Winning-K; there are no losing results.

In this embodiment, the internal lottery results that can be determined by the internal lottery means during Type 1 BB are either Win -K, Win -L, or Loss.

In this embodiment, the conditions for transitioning from the normal zone to the advantageous zone are winning any of the following: Replay-C, Replay-D, Replay-E, Replay-F, Replay-G, Replay-H, Replay-I, Replay-J, Winning-A1, Winning-A2, Winning-A3, Winning-A4, Winning-A5, Winning-A6, Winning-B1, Winning-B2, Winning-B3, Winning-B4, Winning-B5, Winning-B6, Winning-C1, Winning-C2, Winning-C3, Winning-C4, Winning-C5, Winning-C6, Winning-D, Winning-E, Winning-F, Winning-G, Winning-H, Winning-I, Winning-J, or Winning-K; winning Replay-A or Replay-B will not result in transition to the advantageous zone. That is, if you win any of the following in the normal zone: Replay-C, Replay-D, Replay-E, Replay-F, Replay-G, Replay-H, Replay-I, Replay-J, Win-A1, Win-A2, Win-A3, Win-A4, Win-A5, Win-A6, Win-B1, Win-B2, Win-B3, Win-B4, Win-B5, Win-B6, Win-C1, Win-C2, Win-C3, Win-C4, Win-C5, Win-C6, Win-D, Win-E, Win-F, Win-G, Win-H, Win-I, Win-J, or Win-K, you will be in the advantageous zone from the next play.

In this embodiment, if any of the following is won during the normal zone: Replay-C, Replay-D, Replay-E, Replay-F, Replay-G, Replay-H, Replay-I, Replay-J, Winning-A1, Winning-A2, Winning-A3, Winning-A4, Winning-A5, Winning-A6, Winning-B1, Winning-B2, Winning-B3, Winning-B4, Winning-B5, Winning-B6, Winning-C1, Winning-C2, Winning-C3, Winning-C4, Winning-C5, Winning-C6, Winning-D, Winning-E, Winning-F, Winning-G, Winning-H, Winning-I, Winning-J, or Winning-K, the player will always move to the advantageous zone. That is, if you win any of the following in the normal zone: Replay-C, Replay-D, Replay-E, Replay-F, Replay-G, Replay-H, Replay-I, Replay-J, Win-A1, Win-A2, Win-A3, Win-A4, Win-A5, Win-A6, Win-B1, Win-B2, Win-B3, Win-B4, Win-B5, Win-B6, Win-C1, Win-C2, Win-C3, Win-C4, Win-C5, Win-C6, Win-D, Win-E, Win-F, Win-G, Win-H, Win-I, Win-J, or Win-K, you will be in the advantageous zone from the next play.

In this embodiment, since there are no misses in RT1 (within Type 1 BB), (either a replay role or a winning role is guaranteed to be a winning combination), once you transition to RT1, it is possible to stop the BB symbol combination with some of the operation modes when the push order bell group C (winning role - C1 to C6) is won. The part when the push order bell group C is won is, for example, the middle reel when winning role - C1 is won, or some of the eye-pressing positions of the first stop on the right reel. Furthermore, when WINNING-C1 is won in the advantageous zone, the correct button press sequence (in this case, "1, 2, 3" is displayed on the LCD) is notified, and WINNING 38 stops, and the BB symbol combination does not stop. With this configuration, the user can maintain RT1 by being notified of an operation mode in which the BB symbol combination does not stop. Also, the number of losing buttons during RT1 can be set to 4 (as the minimum winning probability by design is 1/17500 or more), and the BB symbol combination can be configured not to stop for other replay roles or winning roles, so that the BB symbol combination stops only in the event of a loss.

In this embodiment, the game states managed by the main control means in the advantageous zone include the general advantageous zone state, chance zone (also referred to as CZ), and AT, with transitions occurring from the general advantageous zone state to CZ, from CZ to AT, and from AT to the general advantageous zone state or CZ. Furthermore, the game state managed by the main control means in the normal zone is the general normal zone state only, and the game state does not transition until the advantageous zone is entered. Furthermore, the game state flags managed by the main control means in the general advantageous zone state and the general normal zone state may be the same or different.

The normal state is when the internal lottery results in one of the winning numbers - A1 to - C6, and the advantageous winning button sequence is not announced.

CZ is a state that is entered when the internal lottery result under normal circumstances is either WIN-D through WIN-H, and during the CZ, the transition to AT is determined by the results of the internal lottery during the CZ or the lottery at the start of the CZ.

The AT is the state you enter when you win the AT lottery during the CZ, and notifies you of the advantageous operation mode (winning button sequence) when you win any of WIN-A1 to WIN-C6.

In this embodiment, the conditions for transitioning from the advantageous zone to the normal zone are when the number of plays in the advantageous zone reaches a predetermined number (for example, 1500 plays), when MY in the advantageous zone exceeds 2400, when initialization processing is performed based on a setting change, or when the RAM clear switch is enabled, and the AT termination conditions and the advantageous zone termination conditions do not match. However, some of the AT termination conditions (such as when the ending is reached or when the number of winning coins exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 2300 coins)) may also be used as the advantageous zone termination conditions. Also, a transition to the normal zone may occur when a CZ is won in the advantageous zone. In this case, the decision on whether to end the advantageous zone is made depending on the situation in the advantageous zone when a CZ is won in the advantageous zone.

The CZ is determined by lottery when one of the winning combinations, Win-D through Win-H (hereinafter also referred to as a rare combination), is won, and generally, the less likely the internal lottery result is to win, the more likely it is that a CZ will be won. In this embodiment, the order of likelihood of winning a CZ is Win-G > Win-E > Win-H > Win-F > Win-D.

In this embodiment, the CZ does not occur immediately after a win. Rather, it starts when the player wins the CZ, transitions from the advantageous zone to the normal zone, and then transitions back to the advantageous zone (the CZ always starts when transitioning to the advantageous zone in RT1). This eliminates the problem of not being able to dispense balls when winning from the CZ to the AT due to a small number of remaining plays in the advantageous zone. This is particularly effective when the net increase in coins (expected number of coins to be won per play, also known as the gradient value) is small. For example, with a net increase of two coins, the maximum number of coins to be won in the advantageous zone is approximately 2,400, so 1,200 plays are required to win 2,400 coins. However, the AT is not always performed in the advantageous zone. Because various play states, such as the normal state and the CZ, transition between these states, the remaining number of plays in the advantageous zone at the start of the AT is often small (e.g., 500 plays). In this case, even after 500 plays, the net increase is only two coins, resulting in the player winning only around 1,000 coins, which makes it difficult to meet the user's expectations. Therefore, by ending the advantageous zone once when a CZ win is made, and then starting the CZ when moving to a new advantageous zone, even if the CZ has 100 plays, there are still 1,400 plays remaining in the advantageous zone, creating a sense of anticipation for the user to win 2,400 coins.

The probability of winning the CZ from the second time onwards within the same advantageous zone may also be varied depending on the number of coins won since the advantageous zone began (cumulative number of coins paid out - cumulative number of coins inserted). For example, if a CZ is started when the advantageous zone is entered and the AT is won, one possible mode is to vary the probability of winning the CZ within the remaining advantageous zone after the AT ends depending on whether 50 coins are won in the AT or 1000 coins are won. In this case, the probability of winning the CZ after winning 50 coins may be higher or lower than the probability of winning the CZ after winning 1000 coins.

If the probability of winning a CZ after winning 50 coins is made higher than the probability of winning a CZ after winning 1,000 coins, it will be easier to award the next CZ to users who did not win much in the AT, allowing them to play while maintaining a sense of anticipation.

If the probability of winning the CZ after winning 50 coins is made lower than the probability of winning the CZ after winning 1000 coins, since there is little remaining advantageous period after winning 1000 coins (because it is close to the condition for the advantageous period to end, which is 1500 plays or winning 2400 coins), even if the CZ probability is made high, the payout design will not significantly increase gambling spirit, and it can also create a new sense of expectation for the user.

If a player wins the CZ, a congratulatory display such as "Success" or "Victory" is displayed during the game in which the CZ was won, or after a predetermined number of games (which can be set arbitrarily depending on the gaming machine's specifications). This allows the user to understand that some kind of special benefit has been awarded, allowing them to intuitively understand the progress of the game. From the next game onward, a "CZ Preparation" message is displayed on the LCD or a lamp, creating a sense of anticipation for the CZ. When a CZ winning game is in a favorable zone, the "CZ Preparation" state corresponds to the period from the end of the favorable zone until the transition back to the favorable zone in the subsequent normal zone. Because "CZ Preparation" is internally a normal zone, it is a disadvantageous state for users who do not perform AT draws or AT top-ups. However, by lowering the payout rate during CZ Preparation compared to the AT state, balls can be allocated to the AT, creating a wave of payouts. Furthermore, because the CZ Preparation state creates a sense of anticipation for the CZ, lowering the payout rate makes it less likely for users to feel like they have lost out.

In addition, while the advantageous zone ends with the next play after the CZ is won, a predetermined number of plays may be played from the play in which the CZ is won until the advantageous zone ends. In this case, the CZ win is not announced in the play in which the CZ is won, and whether or not the CZ has been won may be determined by effects played a predetermined number of times (so-called premonition effects or consecutive effects). A congratulatory effect is then played when the predetermined number of plays have been played, and the CZ is in preparation from the next play. This is because the advantageous zone lamp is lit during the advantageous zone and turns off when the advantageous zone ends, so whether or not the CZ has been won is not apparent from the lighting state of the advantageous zone lamp between the play in which the CZ is won and the announcement that the CZ has been won. Note that the advantageous zone may transition from the normal zone during CZ preparation; in this case, since the fact that the CZ is being prepared has already been announced, the result is not revealed in advance by the lighting state of the advantageous zone lamp during CZ preparation.

Furthermore, CZ preparation does not necessarily have to be a normal interval, and may be set to a favorable interval. Even in this case, the rate at which CZ preparation is executed in a normal interval is relatively higher than the rate at which CZ preparation is executed in a favorable interval, and the condition for executing CZ preparation in a favorable interval is that the number of remaining plays in the favorable interval is a predetermined number (for example, 1,000 plays). By configuring it in this way, CZ preparation is executed when there is sufficient remaining play in the favorable interval, so even if the CZ is executed after CZ preparation and the AT is executed as a result, a sufficient feeling of winning can be created. Furthermore, since the normal interval is not used during CZ preparation, it is possible to create a surprise by starting the AT immediately after CZ preparation (information related to the AT is initialized at the end of the favorable interval, so if the normal interval is used during CZ preparation, the CZ will be executed at the start of the favorable interval and the AT cannot start).

Also, when executing the CZ preparation during the advantageous zone described above, whether or not to award an AT may be determined by lottery when one of WIN-D through WIN-H is won during CZ preparation. In this case, the order of rare combinations that are likely to win the AT through the AT lottery may be the same as the order that is likely to win the CZ, or may be slightly different, such as WIN-E > WIN-G > WIN-F > WIN-H > WIN-D. By configuring it in this way, users can expect to win a rare combination even during CZ preparation.

Furthermore, to prevent users who win a rare role but do not win the AT from losing their motivation to play, a bonus different from the AT may be awarded. Such a bonus may, for example, be displayed as a two-dimensional code that can be read by the user's terminal, or as a setting suggestion effect that allows the setting value to be determined. The bonus may be more likely to be awarded the closer the number of plays in the advantageous zone is to the aforementioned predetermined number (e.g., 1,500 plays), or when the number of CZ plays is a specific number (e.g., a multiple of 5).

This section explains the process for changing settings in this embodiment.

When the setting change device is started, the RAM initialization process described above is performed at the timing when the setting change device is started or when the setting values are confirmed. If the game state immediately before this RAM initialization process is performed is RT1, the RT1 information is initialized when the RAM initialization process is performed, and the game state after the RAM initialization process becomes non-RT. Also, if the game state immediately before the RAM initialization process is performed is in Type 1 BB, the information in Type 1 BB is initialized when the RAM initialization process is performed, and the game state after the RAM initialization process becomes non-RT.

Furthermore, if the game state immediately before the RAM initialization process is performed is in a favorable zone, the information for the favorable zone will be initialized when the RAM initialization process is performed, and the game state after the RAM initialization process will become the normal zone. In other words, the game state during the favorable zone can be the normal state, CZ, or AT, but regardless of the state, when the RAM initialization process is performed, it will transition to the normal zone.

When the RAM initialization process is performed, play will begin in a non-RT, normal zone, but in this embodiment, the CZ will start when transitioning from the normal zone to the advantageous zone, so after the setting change, the game will be in an advantageous state (a state in which the CZ can be started by transitioning to the advantageous zone without playing to win the CZ).

By configuring it in this way, the setting will be in an advantageous state after the change, which will motivate customers to visit the store in the morning and increase the number of customers attracted.

Furthermore, if an overly advantageous state (a state in which the machine transitions to the CZ after just a few plays) can be established after changing the settings, there is a risk that this could significantly stimulate gambling instincts (the so-called morning mode). For this reason, it is possible to change the contents of the CZ depending on the situation when the machine transitions to the advantageous zone.

In this case, if the RT state of the next game after it has been determined that the game will move to the advantageous zone is RT1, the CZ will be started as this is the basic game flow, and if the RT state of the next game after it has been determined that the game will move to the advantageous zone is non-RT, the CZ will not be started as this is after a setting change. Games that have been determined to move into the advantageous zone include those that win any of the following: Replay-C, Replay-D, Replay-E, Replay-F, Replay-G, Replay-H, Replay-I, Replay-J, Winning-A1, Winning-A2, Winning-A3, Winning-A4, Winning-A5, Winning-A6, Winning-B1, Winning-B2, Winning-B3, Winning-B4, Winning-B5, Winning-B6, Winning-C1, Winning-C2, Winning-C3, Winning-C4, Winning-C5, Winning-C6, Winning-D, Winning-E, Winning-F, Winning-G, Winning-H, Winning-I, Winning-J, and Winning-K.

In addition, Replay-C, Replay-D, Replay-E, Replay-F, Replay-G, Replay-H, Replay-I, Replay-J, Winning-D, Winning-E, Winning-F, Winning-G, Winning-H, Winning-I, Winning-J, and Winning-K overlap with Type 1 BB, so the RT state for the next play after the win will be RT1 and CZ will start, but Winning-A1, Winner - A2, Winner - A3, Winner - A4, Winner - A5, Winner - A6, Winner - B1, Winner - B2, Winner - B3, Winner - B4, Winner - B5, Winner - B6, Winner - C1, Winner - C2, Winner - C3, Winner - C4, Winner - C5, Winner - C6 do not overlap with Type 1 BB, so the next play after winning is non-RT and CZ will not start.

This configuration allows for the possibility of transitioning to a favorable zone even during non-RT, which can curb morning-related specifications such as transitioning to a CZ after just a few plays after changing the settings, thereby reducing the tendency for gambling.

It is also possible to reduce gambling by using a specification that changes the game state managed by the main control means in the advantageous zone by referring to the RT state of the next game when a transition to the advantageous zone has been decided. In this case, an AT may not be performed in an advantageous zone that has transitioned to a non-RT (not inside a Type 1 BB), and an advantageous zone that has transitioned to an RT1 (inside a Type 1 BB) may have the possibility of an AT being performed. With this configuration, if a transition to an advantageous zone occurs in a non-RT after a setting change, no balls can be earned because an AT is not performed, thereby reducing gambling. The condition for ending the advantageous zone in this case may be until the above-mentioned CZ is won, or may be when a predetermined number of games have been played (for example, 1,500 games).

In addition, the transition of the CZ is controlled by referencing the RT state of the next game after the lottery for transitioning to the advantageous zone is won, but this is not limited to this; the transition of the CZ may also be controlled by referencing the condition device in operation for the game after the lottery for transitioning to the advantageous zone is won. In this case, when the prize-winning A1 is won while inside a Type 1 BB in the normal zone, the CZ is controlled to start at the start of the advantageous zone based on the fact that the condition devices for the Type 1 BB and the prize-winning A1 are in operation. In addition, when the prize-winning A1 is won while not inside a Type 1 BB in the normal zone, the CZ is controlled not to start at the start of the advantageous zone based on the fact that the condition device for the prize-winning A1 is in operation.

In this embodiment, only Type 1 BB was the subject of the lottery, but instead, RB or MB may also be the subject of the lottery, or two or all of Type 1 BB, RB, and MB may also be the subject of the lottery.

<Gameplay that increases the expected value of game value gained at the start of the advantageous zone>
We will explain the gameplay that can be applied to this embodiment, which increases the expected value of game value gained at the start of the advantageous zone.
In this case, in order to increase the expected value of the game value at the start of the advantageous period, the advantageous period is configured not to end when a predetermined number of games are played. In other words, the advantageous period is configured not to end depending on the number of games played in the advantageous period.

After one advantageous zone has started, if a predetermined number of premonition games have been played in the general advantageous zone state, the next game will transition to a predetermined AT (also referred to as AT1), a predetermined lottery will be held in the AT1, and if the predetermined lottery is won, the AT1 will continue until the number of wins in the advantageous zone exceeds 2400 (until the value of the MY counter exceeds the upper limit), and once the conditions for ending the advantageous zone are met, the advantageous zone will end and the normal zone will start from the next game.Then, after passing through the normal zone and starting a new advantageous zone, if a predetermined number of premonition games have been played in the general advantageous zone state, the game will transition to AT1, and if the predetermined lottery is won in the AT1, the AT1 will continue until the number of wins in the advantageous zone exceeds 2400, and once the conditions for ending the advantageous zone are met, the advantageous zone will end and the normal zone will start from the next game.
That is, the acquisition of approximately 2,400 gaming value is looped until a predetermined lottery is not won in AT1. The probability of winning in the predetermined lottery can be set as appropriate, but it is preferable to configure it so that the probability of winning is as high as 50% or more but less than 80%. Furthermore, a minimum guarantee (e.g., 50 AT games or 100 wins) is provided during the execution period of AT1, and even if a predetermined lottery is not won in AT1, AT1 is not immediately terminated but continues until the minimum guaranteed AT is executed. The predetermined lottery may be configured to be executed at the start of AT1, or may be configured to be executed after the minimum guaranteed AT is executed in AT1.

In addition, if a predetermined lottery result is not won in AT1, the game will transition to the general advantageous zone state after the end of AT1 without ending the advantageous zone. If a predetermined role (such as Replay-A, Replay-J, Win-J, etc.) that has a low probability of being won in the role lottery while in the general advantageous zone state (for example, 1/8192, the lowest probability in the role lottery) is won, the advantageous zone will end and the normal zone will begin from the next play. After passing through the normal zone and starting a new advantageous zone, the game will transition to AT1 once a predetermined number of premonition plays have been performed in the general advantageous zone state.

In addition, the general advantageous zone state to which you enter after not winning in a specified lottery in AT1 is configured to have a lower expectation level for the AT than the general advantageous zone state at the start of one advantageous zone.

In addition, the advantageous zone is configured to end when a predetermined role is won in the general advantageous zone state, which is entered after a predetermined lottery is not won in AT1, but it is not limited to this; it may also be configured to execute a predetermined CZ to end the advantageous zone, and end the advantageous zone when a lottery is won during that predetermined CZ.

In addition, the advantageous zone is configured not to end even if a predetermined role is won during AT1 or during the predetermined number of premonition plays immediately after the start of the advantageous zone. This configuration improves the tempo of play when the winning number of 2,400 is looping. Even if a predetermined role is won when a predetermined lottery is won in AT1 and it is confirmed that approximately 2,400 game value will be won, AT1 will not end midway, preventing the player from being disadvantaged. Even if a predetermined role is won when a predetermined effect is being executed in the AT, indicating that a predetermined lottery is won and approximately 2,400 game value will be won, the predetermined effect will not end midway, preventing the player from feeling distrustful. If a predetermined role is won during AT2, which will be described later, the advantageous zone may be configured to end with the play that won the predetermined role, or the advantageous zone may be configured to end after AT2 ends.

In this way, by increasing the expected gain in game value at the start of an advantageous zone, a new type of gameplay can be created, in which the player aims to end the advantageous zone. Furthermore, by requiring a predetermined number of premonition plays from the start of an advantageous zone until the transition to AT1, even if a predetermined lottery is won in AT1, the AT will not continue beyond 2,400 wins, preventing excessive gambling.

In addition, even in the general advantageous zone state to which a player transitions after failing to win a predetermined lottery in AT1, an AT lottery may be held, or a ceiling may be set so that a transition to the AT occurs every time the ceiling number of games (e.g., 1,000 games) has been played (these ATs other than AT1 are collectively referred to as AT2), but it is preferable to configure AT2 so that the predetermined lottery is not held. In this way, by not holding the predetermined lottery in ATs other than AT1, it is possible to prevent excessive gambling and increase anticipation for the predetermined lottery in AT1.

Furthermore, even when the expected gain in gaming value at the start of an advantageous zone is configured to be high in this way, if a transition to an advantageous zone is determined during RT1 (within Type 1 BB) using the method described above, the game will transition to AT1 after a predetermined number of premonition plays have been played since the advantageous zone began, but if a transition to an advantageous zone is determined during a non-RT, the AT will not be executed even after a predetermined number of plays have been played since the advantageous zone began. In other words, it is preferable to configure the game so that the AT will not be executed after a predetermined number of plays have been played since the advantageous zone began in the first advantageous zone after a setting change. In this way, by configuring the game so that a transition to an advantageous zone during RT1 is relatively more advantageous than a transition to an advantageous zone during a non-RT, it is possible to suppress morning-related specifications.

Furthermore, if a specific number of games (e.g., 5,000 games) have been played without one advantageous period ending, the system may be configured to transition to a specific state in which the design value of the payout rate is a specific value (a value greater than 100% but not greater than 115%) from the next game until the end of that advantageous period. Note that the specific number of games can be set as appropriate, but it is preferable to set it to the number of games that can be played within the gaming facility's business hours in one day.

Furthermore, in order to set the design value of the payout rate in a predetermined state to a predetermined value, 1) it may be configured to transition to AT2 every time a predetermined number of games (e.g., 100 games) are played in the general advantageous zone state, and to always end AT2 after a specific number of games (e.g., 50 games); or 2) it may be configured to provide multiple scenarios in which the number of games to transition to AT2 and the number of balls won in AT2 after the transition are predetermined so that the payout rate becomes a predetermined value, and to have the game proceed according to one of the scenarios.

By configuring it in this way, players can be motivated to continue playing even in unfavorable situations, such as when one advantageous period continues for a long period of time.

In addition, in a specified state where the design value of the payout rate is a predetermined value, the advantageous zone may be configured not to end even if a predetermined role is won. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent a specified state where the design value of the payout rate is a predetermined value from being excessively advantageous to the player.

In addition, even in a predetermined state where the design value of the payout rate is a predetermined value, the advantageous zone may be configured to end if a predetermined combination is won. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to increase the sense of anticipation when a predetermined combination is won.

In addition, the design value of the payout rate in a given state where the design value of the payout rate is a predetermined value may be designed to be the same regardless of the set value. By doing this, in a given state where the design value of the payout rate is a predetermined value, stable gameplay can be provided where there is no advantage or disadvantage depending on the set value.

In addition, the design value of the payout rate in a predetermined state where the design value of the payout rate is a predetermined value may be configured so that the higher the set value, the higher the value becomes, such as set value 1 < set value 2 < ... < set value 6. By doing this, the higher the set value, the sooner the advantageous zone can end when transitioning to a predetermined state where the design value of the payout rate is a predetermined value in one advantageous zone, thereby hastening the transition to a state where the expected value of game value obtained is high.

In addition, the design value of the payout rate in a predetermined state where the design value of the payout rate is a predetermined value may be configured to be higher than the lowest setting value (setting value 1 in this embodiment) and lower than the highest setting value (setting value 6 in this embodiment). By configuring it in this way, even if a predetermined lottery is not won during AT1 in one advantageous zone, it is possible to continue playing, thereby increasing the significance of aiming for a predetermined state where the design value of the payout rate is a predetermined value, while also not losing the significance of playing at the highest setting value.

<Control for dealing with power interruption while various switches are pressed according to this embodiment>
When the front panel PS2 is closed, the game has finished, no three bets have been made (including situations where no automatic bet has been made), and the number of credits stored is equal to or greater than the number that allows for a three-bet (for example, the number of credits is three or more when no bets have been made, or the number of credits is two or more when one bet has been made) (hereinafter referred to as the MAX bet possible state), when the MAX bet switch 18 is operated (pressed), the MAX bet process is executed, the number of bets is stored as three, and the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp are lit (before the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed, the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp are off).

In addition, not only when the front panel PS2 is closed, but also when the front panel PS2 is open, if a game has ended, no three bets have been made (including when no automatic bets have been made), and the number of credits stored is equal to or greater than the number that allows for a three-bet (for example, the number of credits is three or more when no bets have been made, or the number of credits is two or more when one bet has been made), when the MAX BET switch 18 is operated (pressed), the MAX BET process is executed, three is stored as the number of bets, and the 1 BET lamp, 2 BET lamp, and 3 BET lamp are illuminated (before the MAX BET switch 18 is pressed, the 1 BET lamp, 2 BET lamp, and 3 BET lamp are off). Unless otherwise specified below, the front panel PS2 is closed when the power is turned on, but the device may be configured to behave similarly even when the front panel PS2 is open.

The MAX bet available state includes a state where no bets have been made, a state where 1 bet has been made, and a state where 2 bets have been made. When the MAX bet switch 18 is operated and the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamps are newly lit, this is the MAX bet available state where no bets have been made. In the MAX bet available state where 1 bet has been made, the 2 bet lamp and 3 bet lamps are newly lit when the 1 bet lamp is already lit, and in the MAX bet available state where 2 bets have been made, the 1 bet lamp and 2 bet lamps are already lit and the 3 bet lamp is newly lit.

In addition, when a MAX bet is possible, the MAX bet lamp is lit, notifying the player that operation of the MAX bet switch 18 is valid. When the MAX bet lamp is lit in the MAX bet possible state, if the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed (the sensor that detects the MAX bet switch 18 changes from OFF to ON), the MAX bet lamp goes out. In other words, the MAX bet lamp goes out even while the MAX bet switch 18 is being pressed (the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed and not released, and the sensor for the MAX bet switch 18 remains ON).

Furthermore, if a power outage occurs while the MAX BET switch 18 is in a MAX BET enabled state, causing the operating voltage to fall below the threshold and rendering the gaming machine inoperable, and the MAX BET switch 18 is pressed, and the power is turned on while the MAX BET switch 18 is pressed (when the power outage recovery process is executed), the MAX BET lamp will light up and the MAX BET process will not be executed. Also, because the MAX BET switch 18 is pressed, it is not possible to perform a MAX BET process by pressing the MAX BET switch 18 again. In other words, because the MAX BET switch 18 is pressed (the sensor signal of the MAX BET switch is on), the MAX BET switch 18 cannot be pressed and the MAX BET process cannot be executed.

This makes it possible to prevent a bet from being placed even if the MAX BET switch 18 is unintentionally operated (such as by placing a hand on the MAX BET switch 18) when power is turned on after a power outage, and even in such cases, the MAX BET lamp can accurately indicate that the operation of the MAX BET switch 18 is valid by lighting it in a certain manner. Therefore, a player who recognizes that the operation of the MAX BET switch 18 is valid can place a MAX BET (perform MAX BET processing) by temporarily releasing the MAX BET switch 18 that they had pressed (after the sensor for the MAX BET switch 18 changes from ON to OFF) and then pressing the MAX BET switch 18 again (the sensor for the MAX BET switch 18 changes from OFF to ON).

Furthermore, for example, if a malfunction occurs in the return spring or sensor of the MAX BET switch 18 before or after a power outage, causing the MAX BET switch 18 to remain depressed, the MAX BET lamp can be turned on to notify the administrator that even if the MAX BET process cannot be performed, it is not a software malfunction.

In addition, when a power outage occurs while the MAX bet is enabled, causing the operating voltage to fall below the threshold and rendering the gaming machine inoperable, if the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed and the power is turned on while the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed (the power outage recovery process is executed), the MAX bet lamp will light up and the MAX bet process will not be executed. However, if the 1 bet switch 19 is operated (pressed) again (the sensor that detects the 1 bet switch 19 turns from OFF to ON), the 1 bet process can be executed.

As a result, even if the MAX BET switch 18 is unintentionally operated (such as by placing a hand on the MAX BET switch 18) when the power is turned on after a power outage, the lighting state of the MAX BET lamp will indicate that betting is possible and suggest that the 1 BET switch 19 can be operated. Even in such a case, the operation of the 1 BET switch 19 is valid, so the game can continue.

Also, in a situation where a power outage occurs in the MAX BET enabled state, causing the operating voltage to fall below the threshold and rendering the gaming machine inoperable, the MAX BET switch 18 may be pressed, and if the power is turned on while the MAX BET switch 18 is pressed (the power outage recovery process is executed), the MAX BET process may be executed. In this case, the MAX BET lamp may be on or off after power is turned on. If the MAX BET lamp is on after power is turned on, this indicates that the 1 BET switch 19 is operable, and operating the 1 BET switch 19 changes the state from 3 BET to 1 BET and returns the difference of "2" to the credits. (If the difference cannot be returned to credits in a 3 BET state and the number of credits is 50, operating the 1 BET switch 19 does not change the state to 1 BET, and the 3 BET state remains, so the MAX BET lamp does not light up (it is off) after power is turned on.) If the MAX BET lamp is off after power is turned on, this can indicate that the MAX BET process has been executed. Additionally, whether the MAX BET lamp is on or off after power-on, three bet sounds (three one-bet sounds) are output when power is turned on, making it possible to notify the user that the MAX BET process has been executed.

Next, when the MAX BET switch 19 is operated (pressed) while the MAX BET is enabled (no bets have been placed), 1 is stored as the bet number and the 1 BET lamp lights up. Also, since operation of the MAX BET switch 18 is still valid, the MAX BET lamp also lights up.

In addition, when a power outage occurs in a state where a MAX BET is possible (no bets have been placed), causing the operating voltage to fall below the threshold and rendering the gaming machine inoperable, if the 1 BET switch 19 is pressed and the power is turned on while the 1 BET switch 19 is pressed (if the power outage recovery process is executed while the sensor for the 1 BET switch 19 remains ON), the MAX BET lamp will light up and the 1 BET process will not be executed. Also, because the 1 BET switch 19 is pressed, it is not possible to perform a 1 BET process by pressing the 1 BET switch 19 again.

This makes it possible to prevent a bet from being placed even if the 1 bet switch 19 is unintentionally operated (such as by placing a hand on the 1 bet switch 19) when the power is turned on after a power outage, and even in such cases, the lighting state of the MAX BET lamp indicates that bet processing is possible, suggesting that the 1 bet switch 19 is operable. Therefore, a player who recognizes that operation of the MAX BET switch 18 or 1 bet switch 19 is valid can perform a 1 bet or MAX bet processing by releasing the 1 bet switch 19 that they had pressed (after the sensor for the 1 bet switch 19 changes from ON to OFF) and then pressing the MAX BET switch 18 again (when the sensor for the 1 bet switch 19 remains ON) without releasing the 1 bet switch 19 that they had pressed, thereby performing a 1 bet or MAX bet processing.

In addition, when a power outage occurs in a state where a MAX bet is possible (no bets have been placed), causing the operating voltage to fall below the threshold and rendering the gaming machine inoperable, if the 1 bet switch 19 is pressed and the power is turned on while the 1 bet switch 19 is pressed (the power outage recovery process is executed), the MAX bet lamp will light up and the 1 bet process will not be executed, but if the MAX bet switch 18 is operated (pressed) again, the MAX bet process can be executed.

As a result, even if the 1 bet switch 19 is unintentionally operated (such as by placing a hand on the 1 bet switch 19) when the power is turned on after a power outage, the lighting state of the MAX BET lamp will indicate that betting is possible, suggesting that the MAX BET switch 18 is operable. Even in such a case, the operation of the MAX BET switch 18 is valid, so the game can continue.

Also, in a situation where a power outage occurs in the MAX BET enabled state, causing the operating voltage to fall below the threshold and rendering the gaming machine inoperable, if the 1 BET switch 19 is pressed and the power is turned on while the 1 BET switch 19 is pressed (when the power outage recovery process is executed), the 1 BET process may be executed. In this case, the MAX BET lamp lights up after power is turned on, indicating that the MAX BET switch 18 is operable, and when the MAX BET switch 18 is operated, the 1 BET state changes from the 1 BET state to the 3 BET state. Also, by outputting a 1 BET sound when power is turned on, it is possible to notify that the 1 BET process has been executed.

In addition, when a MAX bet is possible (no bet has been placed), if a power outage occurs, the operating voltage drops below the threshold, and the gaming machine becomes inoperable, the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed (this may be the case whether the front panel PS2 is not open or is already open), and if the power is turned on while the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed while the front panel PS2 is open (when the power outage recovery process is executed), the MAX bet lamp will light up and the MAX bet process will not be executed, but if the 1 bet switch 19 is operated (pressed) again while the MAX bet switch 18 continues to be pressed, the 1 bet process can be executed. Furthermore, when the gaming machine is in a state where a MAX bet is possible (no bet has been placed), if a power outage occurs and the operating voltage drops below the threshold, making it unable to operate, and the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed (this may be the case when the front panel PS2 is not open or when it is already open), if the power is turned on while the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed while the front panel PS2 is open (when the power outage recovery process is executed), the MAX bet lamp will light up and the MAX bet process will not be executed, but the MAX bet process can be executed by releasing the MAX bet switch 18 and operating (pressing) the MAX bet switch 18 again. In this case, even if the 1 bet switch 19 or the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed again and the 1 bet process or the MAX bet process is executed, the 1 bet sound or the 3 bet sound may not be output. Alternatively, when the 1 bet switch 19 or the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed again and the 1 bet process or the MAX bet process is executed, 3 bets are made and the front panel PS2 is open, when the start switch 12 is operated (pressed) the reel rotation process is executed and each reel spins, but the start sound may not be output.

This makes it possible to prevent a bet from being placed even if the MAX BET switch 18 is unintentionally operated (such as by placing a hand on the MAX BET switch 18) when power is turned on after a power outage, and even in such cases, the MAX BET lamp can accurately indicate that the operation of the MAX BET switch 18 was valid.

Furthermore, for example, if a malfunction occurs in the return spring or sensor of the MAX BET switch 18 before or after a power outage, causing the MAX BET switch 18 to remain depressed, the MAX BET lamp can be turned on to notify the administrator that even if the MAX BET process cannot be performed, it is not a software malfunction.

In addition, by enabling 1 bet processing using the 1 bet switch 19 even when the front panel PS2 is open, it becomes possible to check whether 1 bet processing is possible normally in conjunction with the work performed by the administrator when the front panel PS2 is open (for example, checking settings or setting the administrator menu). Furthermore, since playing at an arcade is not normal when the front panel PS2 is open, deliberately not outputting the 1 bet sound makes it possible to let the player know that something is not normal.

Also, in a situation where a power outage occurs when the maximum bet is possible (no bets have been placed), causing the operating voltage to fall below the threshold and rendering the gaming machine inoperable, the maximum bet switch 18 is pressed (this may be when the front panel PS2 is not open or when it is already open), and if the power is turned on while the front panel PS2 is open and the maximum bet switch 18 is pressed (this may be when the power outage recovery process is executed), the maximum bet lamp will not light up, the maximum bet process will not be executed, and even if the one bet switch 19 is operated (pressed) again, the one bet process will not be executed; and thereafter, if the front panel PS2 is closed (the closure is detected) while the maximum bet switch 18 is still being operated (pressed), the maximum bet lamp will light up, and when the one bet switch 19 is operated (pressed) again, the one bet process will become possible.

This makes it possible to prevent bets from being placed even if the MAX BET switch 18 is unintentionally operated (such as by placing a hand on the MAX BET switch 18) when the power is turned on after a power outage, and by not lighting the MAX BET lamp, it is possible to make the player aware that they cannot continue playing. Furthermore, when the front panel PS2 is closed, even if the MAX BET switch 18 continues to be operated (pressed), bet operation with the 1 BET switch 19 is enabled, making it possible to minimize disruption to game progress.

In addition, when a power outage occurs while the MAX bet is enabled, causing the operating voltage to fall below the threshold and rendering the gaming machine inoperable, if the MAX bet switch 18 and 1 bet switch 19 are pressed and the power is turned on while the MAX bet switch 18 and 1 bet switch 19 are still pressed (when the power outage recovery process is executed), the MAX bet lamp will light up and the MAX bet process and 1 bet process will not be executed. In this case, if the MAX bet switch 18 is released while the 1 bet switch 19 is still being pressed and the MAX bet switch 18 is operated (pressed) again, the MAX bet process can be executed. Similarly, when a power outage occurs in the MAX bet enabled state, causing the operating voltage to fall below the threshold and rendering the gaming machine inoperable, if the MAX bet switch 18 and 1 bet switch 19 are pressed and the power is turned on while the MAX bet switch 18 and 1 bet switch 19 are pressed (the power outage recovery process is executed), the MAX bet lamp will light up and the MAX bet process and 1 bet process will not be executed. However, if the 1 bet switch 19 is released while the MAX bet switch 18 is still pressed and the 1 bet switch 19 is operated (pressed) again, the 1 bet process will be executed.

This makes it possible to prevent bets from being placed even if the MAX BET switch 18 and 1 BET switch 19 are unintentionally operated (such as by placing a hand on the MAX BET switch 18 and 1 BET switch 19) when the power is turned on after a power outage, and even in such cases, the MAX BET lamp can accurately indicate that the operation of the MAX BET switch 18 is valid. Even in such cases, the operation of the MAX BET switch 18 and 1 BET switch 19 is valid, so the game can continue.

When the front panel PS2 is closed, the game has finished, no bets have been made (replay has not been activated), and a normal effect is being displayed (an effect other than continuous effects or AT effects) or a demo screen is being displayed (hereinafter referred to as the menu screen displayable state), if the sub switch 20 is operated (pressed) (the sensor that detects the sub switch 20 changes from OFF to ON), the menu screen display process is executed and the menu screen is displayed on the display device 32.

In addition, if a power outage occurs while the menu screen is displayable, causing the operating voltage to fall below the threshold and rendering the gaming machine inoperable, and the sub switch 20 is pressed and the power is turned on while the sub switch 20 is pressed (if the power outage recovery process is executed while the sensor of the sub switch 20 remains ON), the sub switch lamp will light up and the menu screen will not be displayed.

As a result, even if the sub switch 20 is unintentionally operated (such as by placing a hand on the sub switch 20) when the power is turned on after a power outage, the unintentional menu screen will not be displayed, and the lighting of the sub switch lamp will indicate that the menu screen can be displayed, suggesting that the sub switch 20 is operable. Therefore, a player who recognizes that the operation of the sub switch 20 is valid can release the sub switch 20 that they had pressed (after the sensor for the sub switch 20 changes from ON to OFF), and then press the sub switch 20 again (the sensor for the sub switch 20 changes from OFF to ON), thereby displaying the menu screen.

Also, in a state where the menu screen can be displayed, if a power outage occurs, causing the operating voltage to fall below a threshold and rendering the gaming machine inoperable, and the sub switch 20 is pressed and the power is turned on while the sub switch 20 is pressed (when the power outage recovery process is executed), the sub switch lamp may light up and the menu screen may be displayed. In this case, the menu screen can be displayed immediately after power is turned on, reflecting the intention to press the sub switch 20, and further, by lighting the sub switch lamp, it can be indicated that the confirmation operations for each item on the menu screen were valid.

Furthermore, when a power outage occurs while the gaming machine is in a MAX BET enabled state and the menu screen can be displayed, causing the operating voltage to fall below the threshold and rendering the gaming machine inoperable, if the MAX BET switch 18 and sub switch 20 are pressed and the power is turned on while the MAX BET switch 18 and sub switch 20 are pressed (when the power outage recovery process is executed), the MAX BET lamp will light up, the MAX BET process will not be executed, the sub switch lamp will light up, and the menu screen will not be displayed. Furthermore, because the MAX BET switch 18 is pressed, it is not possible to perform a new MAX BET process by pressing the MAX BET switch 18. In other words, because the MAX BET switch 18 is pressed (the sensor signal of the MAX BET switch is on), the MAX BET switch 18 cannot be pressed and the MAX BET process cannot be performed.

This makes it possible to prevent unintentional bets from being made and the menu screen from being displayed, even if the MAX BET switch 18 and sub switch 20 are unintentionally operated (such as by placing a hand on the MAX BET switch 18 and sub switch 20) when the power is turned on after a power outage. Even in such cases, the MAX BET lamp's illumination mode accurately indicates that the MAX BET switch 18 has been operated, and the sub switch lamp's illumination mode indicates that the menu screen can be displayed, suggesting that the sub switch 20 can be operated.

Furthermore, for example, if a malfunction occurs in the return spring or sensor of the MAX BET switch 18 before or after a power outage, causing the MAX BET switch 18 to remain depressed, the MAX BET lamp can be turned on to notify the administrator that even if the MAX BET process cannot be performed, it is not a software malfunction.

Also, when a power outage occurs while the gaming machine is in a MAX BET enabled state and the menu screen can be displayed, causing the operating voltage to fall below the threshold and rendering the gaming machine inoperable, if the MAX BET switch 18 and sub switch 20 are pressed and the power is turned on while the MAX BET switch 18 and sub switch 20 are pressed (when the power outage recovery process is executed), the MAX BET lamp may light up, the MAX BET process may not be executed, the sub switch lamp may light up, and the menu screen may be displayed. In this case, the menu screen may be displayed immediately after power is turned on, reflecting the intention to press the sub switch 20, and the sub switch lamp may light up, indicating that the confirmation operation for each item on the menu screen was valid. In this case, the MAX BET lamp may remain lit even after the menu screen is displayed, indicating that the MAX BET process may be executed.

When the front panel PS2 is closed, a game has finished, no bets have been made (replay has not been activated), and the number of credits is one or more (hereinafter referred to as the settlement-enabled state), operating (pressing) the settlement switch executes the settlement process and the medals stored in the credits are paid out to the tray 28.

In addition, if a power outage occurs while the settlement is possible, causing the operating voltage to fall below the threshold and the gaming machine to become inoperable, and the settlement switch is pressed (the sensor that detects the settlement switch turns from OFF to ON), and the power is turned on while the settlement switch is being pressed (the settlement switch sensor is ON and the power outage recovery process is executed), the MAX BET lamp will light up and the settlement process will not be executed. Furthermore, even if the MAX BET switch 18 is pressed while the settlement switch is being pressed, the MAX BET process will not be executed.

This means that even if the settlement switch is unintentionally operated (such as by placing a hand on the settlement switch) when the power is turned on after a power outage, the unintentional settlement process will not be executed, and the lighting of the MAX BET lamp will notify the player that medals remain in the credits, preventing the player from leaving the seat with credits remaining.

Also, in a situation where a power outage occurs while the settlement is possible, causing the operating voltage to fall below the threshold and rendering the gaming machine inoperable, if the settlement switch is pressed and the power is turned on while the settlement switch is pressed (when the power outage recovery process is executed), the MAX BET lamp will light up and the settlement process will not be executed, but if the MAX BET switch 18 is pressed while the settlement switch is pressed, the MAX BET process will be executed.

This means that even if the settlement switch is unintentionally operated (such as by placing a hand on the settlement switch) when the power is turned on after a power outage, the unintentional settlement process will not be executed, and since operation of the MAX BET switch is valid, the progress of the game will not be hindered as much as possible, so the enjoyment of the game will not be diminished.

Also, in a situation where a power outage occurs while the settlement is possible, causing the operating voltage to fall below the threshold and making the gaming machine inoperable, if the settlement switch is pressed and the power is turned on while the settlement switch is pressed (when the power outage recovery process is executed), the MAX BET lamp may light up and the settlement process may be executed.

This means that, for example, if the power is turned on before an amusement center opens, if the power is turned on while the settlement switch is being operated (such as with a hand on the settlement switch), the settlement process can be carried out immediately after the power is turned on, simplifying the power-on process before opening and the settlement process for any remaining medals on the credit.

In addition, when a power outage occurs in a settlement-enabled state, causing the operating voltage to fall below the threshold and rendering the gaming machine inoperable, if the settlement switch is pressed and the power is turned on while the settlement switch is pressed (the power outage recovery process is executed), the lamp on the sub-switch 20 will light up and operation of the sub-switch 20 will be valid, regardless of whether the settlement process is being executed or not (the menu screen can be displayed by accepting operation of the sub-switch 20).

This means that even if the settlement switch is unintentionally operated when the power is turned on after a power outage, for example, the menu screen can be displayed by operating sub-switch 20. On the menu screen, information useful for playing, such as checking game history and adjusting volume, can be viewed or changed. Furthermore, by enabling all operations related to game progress at this time, all gameplay operations other than settlement can be performed. The settlement process is only used at the end of play, and since the player will not be at a disadvantage even if the settlement process is not performed, the number of inserted medals can be adjusted, making it possible to carry out the process without interfering with game progress as much as possible.

In addition, when a power outage occurs while the machine is in a MAX BET enabled state and settlement is enabled, causing the operating voltage to fall below the threshold and rendering the gaming machine inoperable, if the MAX BET switch 18 and settlement switch are pressed, and the power is turned on while the MAX BET switch 18 and settlement switch are still pressed (the power outage recovery process is executed), the MAX BET lamp will light up and the MAX BET process and settlement process will not be executed. In this case, if the MAX BET switch 18 is released while the settlement switch is still being pressed and the MAX BET switch 18 is operated (pressed) again, the MAX BET process can be executed; and if the settlement switch is released while the MAX BET switch 18 is still being pressed and the settlement switch is still being operated (pressed) again, the settlement process can be executed.

This makes it possible to prevent bets from being placed and settlement processing even if the MAX BET switch 18 and settlement switch are unintentionally operated (such as by placing a hand on the MAX BET switch 18 and settlement switch) when power is turned on after a power outage. Furthermore, the lighting state of the MAX BET lamp accurately indicates that medals remain in the credits and that the operation of the MAX BET switch 18 is valid.

When the front panel PS2 is closed, play has ended, and three bets have been made (including when replay is activated) (hereinafter referred to as the reel rotation enabled state), operating (pressing) the start switch 12 executes the reel rotation process, causing each reel to spin. Note that the reel rotation process is executed after the minimum play time has elapsed.

Furthermore, if a power outage occurs while the reels are spinning, causing the operating voltage to fall below the threshold and rendering the gaming machine inoperable, and the start switch 12 is pressed and then power is turned on while the start switch 12 is still pressed (when the power outage recovery process is executed), the start lamp will light up, but none of the reels will spin.

As a result, even if the start switch 12 is unintentionally operated (such as by placing a hand on the start switch 12) when the power is turned on after a power outage, the reels will not spin unintentionally, preventing the player from unintentionally using the gaming media that have been bet. Furthermore, even in such cases, the start lamp's lighting pattern can accurately indicate that the operation of the start switch 12 was valid.

Furthermore, in a situation where a power outage occurs while the reels are spinning, causing the operating voltage to fall below the threshold and rendering the gaming machine inoperable, if the start switch 12 is pressed and the power is turned on while the start switch 12 is still pressed (the power outage recovery process is executed), the start lamp may not light up and none of the reels may spin. In such a case, it is preferable that the start lamp light up when the operation of the start switch 12 is terminated (when the sensor signal of the start switch 12 turns off).

As a result, even if the start switch 12 is unintentionally operated (such as by placing a hand on the start switch 12) when the power is turned on after a power outage, the reels will not spin unintentionally, preventing the player from unintentionally using the gaming media that have been bet.Furthermore, by not lighting the start lamp in such a case, the player can be made aware that the reels will not spin until they have finished operating the start switch 12, and once the operation of the start switch 12 is finished, the start lamp will light up, accurately notifying the player that the operation of the start switch 12 was valid.

Also, in a situation where a power outage occurs while the reels are rotatable, causing the operating voltage to fall below a threshold and rendering the gaming machine inoperable, if the start switch 12 is pressed and the power is turned on while the start switch 12 is still pressed (when the power outage recovery process is executed), all of the reels may rotate.

As a result, if a power outage occurs while the reels are spinning, causing the operating voltage to momentarily fall below the threshold, and the start switch 12 is operated before the operating voltage rises above the threshold and the power is automatically turned on, and the power is automatically turned on while the start switch 12 is operated (when the power outage recovery process is executed), all reels will spin after the power is turned on. This means that the game can proceed (all reels will spin) regardless of when the player operates the start switch 12, reducing the player's effort and improving the tempo of the game.

When the front panel PS2 is closed, all reels are spinning, and the stop switch 13 is enabled to accept operation (hereinafter referred to as the reel stoppable state), when a stop switch 13 is operated (pressed) (when any of the sensors detecting the left stop switch 13a, middle stop switch 13b, or right stop switch 13c changes from OFF to ON), a stop control process is executed for the reel corresponding to the operated stop switch 13, and the reel corresponding to the operated stop switch 13 stops. Note that the reel stoppable state is not limited to a state in which all reels are spinning; it can also be referred to as the reel stoppable state even when only one reel is spinning.

When the reels can be stopped, the LED that makes up the stop switch 13 lights up to indicate that it is enabled. When the reels cannot be stopped even when the stop switch 13 is operated, the LED that makes up the stop switch 13 lights up to indicate that it is disabled.

Here, the state in which the reels cannot be stopped may be a state in which the stop switch 13 is not accepted even though the reels are rotating (such as when a rotation failure is being detected or when another switch managed by the main control means 100 is operated), or a state in which the reels are not rotating (such as when all reels are stopped or when the left stop switch 13a is operated when the left reel is stopped).

Furthermore, the lighting mode indicating that the LED constituting the stop switch 13 is enabled is when it lights up in white or red, etc., and the lighting mode indicating that the LED constituting the stop switch 13 is disabled is when it is unlit (off) or when it lights up in a color (e.g., blue) different from the lighting color indicating that it is enabled.

Furthermore, when the reels are in a stoppable state and a power outage occurs, causing the operating voltage to fall below the threshold and rendering the gaming machine inoperable, if the left stop switch 13a is pressed and the power is turned on while the left stop switch 13a is pressed (if the power outage recovery process is executed while the sensor for the left stop switch 13a remains ON), the stop control process will not be executed for the left reel. Furthermore, if the power is turned on while the left stop switch 13a is pressed, the LED that makes up the stop switch 13 will light up, indicating that it is disabled.

This means that, for example, if the left stop switch 13a is the stop switch that corresponds to the final stop operation, and a power outage occurs while the left reel is in a stoppable state, and the left stop switch 13a is unintentionally operated when the power is turned on, the left reel will not be stopped by the operation of the left stop switch 13a, preventing players from suffering disadvantages such as missing out on minor winning combinations that require careful timing. It also makes it possible to prevent the stop switch 13 from accepting operations in a different order from the correct order when an internal lottery result (the so-called "push order role") is won, in which the order in which the buttons are pressed stops to produce a symbol combination advantageous to the player.

Also, in a situation where the reels are in a stoppable state and a power outage occurs, causing the operating voltage to fall below the threshold and rendering the gaming machine inoperable, if the left stop switch 13a is pressed and power is turned on while the left stop switch 13a is pressed (when the power outage recovery process is executed), a stop control process may be executed for the left reel. Even in this case, if power is turned on while the left stop switch 13a is pressed, the LED that constitutes the stop switch 13 will light up, indicating that it is disabled.

As a result, for example, if a power outage occurs during gameplay, causing the operating voltage to momentarily fall below the threshold, and the left stop switch 13a is pressed between then exceeding the threshold and the power being automatically turned on, and the power is then automatically turned on while the left stop switch 13a is pressed (the power outage recovery process is executed), the left reel will stop after the power is turned on. This means that the game can continue (the corresponding reel will stop) regardless of when the player presses the stop switch 13, reducing the player's effort and improving the game tempo. Furthermore, by configuring the reel corresponding to the stop switch 13 that was pressed after power was turned on to stop even if the reel was accelerating, it is possible to stop it closer to the timing that the player originally intended. However, if multiple stop switches 13 are pressed after power was turned on, none of the reels will stop.

<Control for Responding to Power Outage During Slip Control According to This Embodiment>
When the start switch 12 is operated and the reel is rotating, if the operation of the stop switch 13 is accepted, the reel rotates from the acceptance position of the stop switch 13 to the stop position (so-called slip control), and the reel stops when it reaches the stop position. If the power is cut off during this slip control, the slip control cannot be executed, and the reel cannot be stopped at the stop position.

In addition, the stop position is determined when the stop switch 13 is received, and the winning determination process is performed based on the determined stop position. Therefore, regardless of whether the reels are actually stopped or not, if it is determined that a small win has been won based on the stop position, medals will be paid out based on the small win.

For this reason, in a game in which a small win is won through the internal lottery process, power-off processing is executed during slip control when operation of the stop switch 13 is accepted at a timing when the symbol corresponding to the small win can be stopped, and even if the symbol corresponding to the small win does not stop on an active line after power is restored, the winning determination processing after all reels have stopped determines that the symbol combination corresponding to the small win has stopped, and medals are paid out according to the symbol combination that stopped.

This is for the following reason. While this has the effect of preventing situations where a player is unable to receive a medal payout even when they perform a stop operation at the timing when they should receive a medal payout, it also creates the problem of not being able to recognize which symbol combination the medal payout is based on. To solve this problem, in a game in which a small winning combination is won through internal lottery processing, power-off processing is executed during slip control (from the time the stop switch 13 is operated until the end of slip control) when operation is received at a timing when the symbol corresponding to the small winning combination can be stopped. After power is restored, the reels are rotated to detect the index, and based on the detected index information, the reels are rotated to the stop position and then controlled to stop at the stop position, after which the medals are paid out.

By configuring it in this way, even if a power outage occurs during slip control, the reels will rotate to the intended stop position again after power is restored, allowing the player to visually see which symbol combination has stopped, thereby increasing the player's interest.

In addition, if a power cutoff process is performed during slippage control, and an index is detected during the re-spin process after power is restored, the reel will move to the planned stopping position even if the same symbol is present during the movement to the planned stopping position. If the reel stops on the same symbol just before the planned stopping position, it may display a stop prohibition signal that will prevent the reel from stopping during play. Therefore, a process is required to determine whether or not a stop is prohibited, but the reel is designed to move to the planned position to reduce the processing load during the re-spin process.

In addition, power-off processing is executed during slip control, and when the power is restored and the re-spin processing is performed, acceleration processing and constant speed processing are executed in the same way as the normal reel spin start processing. However, this is not limited to this, and acceleration processing and constant speed processing that differ from the normal processing may also be executed. For example, possible modes include a shorter acceleration time, a longer acceleration time, a slower constant speed spinning speed, or a faster constant speed spinning speed. By changing the acceleration mode or constant speed mode from the normal mode in this way, the player can be made aware that the spinning is different from the normal mode.

Also, if the reel rotates to the same position as the stop acceptance position while rotating at a constant speed during re-spinning, the stop operation is accepted as in normal rotation processing, and slip control is initiated. Once the reel rotates to the planned stop position, a full-phase excitation signal is output to the stepping motor driving the reel (a four-phase excitation signal is output in the case of a four-phase stepping motor), stopping the re-spinning reel.

In addition, if power is cut off during slip control and the re-spin process is underway after power is restored, one possible method would be to let the player know that the re-spin is in progress by displaying "Re-spinning" on the LCD screen, outputting a voice message saying "Re-spinning," or displaying an error message on the error indicator. This would allow the player to recognize that the re-spin is not normal.

In addition, when power-off processing is executed during slip control, a flag indicating that slip control has not been completed is stored in a specified memory area, and when power is turned on, the specified memory area is checked, and if the flag is set, re-spin processing is executed. This flag is initialized when the re-spin processing is executed and the machine stops, so that re-spin processing is not executed when power is turned on normally. The flag indicating that slip control has not been completed may be an error flag or a game status flag.

Furthermore, if a power cutoff process is performed during slip control, the re-rotation process may be performed automatically after power is restored, or an error may occur after power is restored and the error is released using a reset switch before the re-rotation process is performed. Either mode is applicable to the re-rotation process in the following embodiments.

In addition, if power-off processing is performed during slip control, and during re-rotation processing after power is restored, the rotation failure detection counter may be updated during acceleration and constant speed, or during constant speed. Then, when the rotation failure detection counter reaches a predetermined value (for example, the above-mentioned 180), acceleration processing is performed again. Possible causes of rotation failure in this case include holding the reel by hand, loss of synchronism due to a motor malfunction, or deterioration of components over time.

In this case, the rotation failure detection counter is initialized during the initialization process when the power is turned on, and begins updating (counting) as the re-spin process is executed. Then, after the first index is detected after power is turned on, the value of the rotation failure detection counter is updated to 0 and updating of the rotation failure detection counter begins again, and the reel control means rotates the reel to the stop position and stops it. By clearing the rotation failure detection counter after the first index is detected in this way, the reel can be stopped to the stop position without detecting a rotation failure, even if the position where it stops due to the power-off process is the position immediately after the index has passed, and the stop position is the position immediately before the index has passed. In other words, the reel rotates approximately two revolutions from when power is turned on until it stops, but this is not determined to be a rotation failure.

Note that while the rotation failure detection counter is initialized when the power is turned on, it is not limited to this timing. The rotation failure detection counter may also be initialized when the stop switch 13 is received, or when the reel enters a constant speed state.

In this way, power-off processing is performed during slip control, and rotation failure is detected during the re-rotation processing after power is restored. This prevents the stop position from shifting due to step-out or the like even during re-rotation, making it possible to stop the motor at the planned stop position. Furthermore, because rotation failure is not detected during normal slip control, re-acceleration processing is not performed if step-out or the like occurs during normal slip control.

Next, if a power-off process is executed during slip control and an error (recoverable error) is detected during the re-spin process after power is restored, an error notification will be issued after the re-spin process is completed. The errors detected at this time include medal retention errors, medal backflow errors, medal passage time errors, hopper retention errors, hopper empty errors, abnormality detection errors, door open errors, and harness disconnection errors. In addition to error codes displayed on the number of acquired coins display 27, error notifications can also be issued via an LCD screen, a speaker, or by lighting up the top or side performance lamps or performance switch lamps in a predetermined color (for example, a highly visible, eye-catching color such as red or blue). Error notifications can be issued using only one error notification, or a combination of multiple error notifications.

In this way, by issuing an error notification after the re-spin process has finished, it becomes easier for players and amusement facility personnel to recognize whether the notification is about a re-spin or an error. If a re-spin notification is issued during a re-spin, the notification is terminated after the re-spin has finished and switched to an error notification. Note that no error notifications are issued during a re-spin, and no notifications related to a re-spin that are not error notifications are issued.

The error modes during the re-spin process described above are not limited to these, and only some errors may be detected (for example, hopper accumulation errors may be detected but medal accumulation errors may not be detected). The error notification mode may be such that after an error is detected, the error is notified on the number of coins acquired display 27, and when the re-spin process is completed and the reels have stopped, the error is notified on the LCD or speaker, or the error is notified on the number of coins acquired display 27, LCD or speaker after an error is detected.

Next, power-off processing is executed during slip control, and during the re-spin processing after power is restored, the lamp on the stop switch 13 is disabled, so that the corresponding reel will not stop even if the stop switch 13 is operated.

When the power is turned on, the reels will rotate not only when power is restored after a power outage during slip control, but also when power is restored after a power outage during normal reel rotation. When power is restored after a power outage during normal reel rotation, the reels can be stopped, and the illumination status of the lamp on the stop switch 13 is valid. Therefore, when the reels rotate when power is turned on, it is possible to determine whether the reel restart process is in progress or normal reel rotation by checking the illumination status of the lamp on the stop switch 13.

Another possible situation in which the reels may spin when the power is turned on is when the power is restored after being turned off while the reels are frozen. There are two types of freezes in which the reels spin: a pseudo-game in which temporary stopping is performed by operating the stop switch 13, and a reel effect in which the reels do not stop spinning even when the stop switch 13 is operated.

During simulated play, the light on the stop switch 13 is in the active state, and when power is restored after a power outage during simulated play, the light on the stop switch 13 is in the active state. Therefore, when the reels start to spin after the power is turned on, it is possible to determine whether the reels are in the process of re-spinning or are spinning normally by checking the light on the stop switch 13.

During reel performance, the illumination mode of the stop switch 13 lamp is disabled, and when power is restored after a power outage during reel performance, the illumination mode of the stop switch 13 lamp is disabled. Therefore, when the reels are rotating after power is turned on, it is not possible to determine whether reel performance is in progress or the re-spin process is in progress based on the illumination mode of the stop switch 13 lamp. In this case, however, it is possible to determine this by checking a display device such as an LCD or error display. Note that even if the illumination mode of the stop switch lamp is disabled during reel performance, if the operation of other main system switches (switches managed by the main control means 100) is enabled, the illumination mode of the lamps of the other main system switches is enabled. Therefore, by checking the illumination mode of the lamps of the other main system switches, it is possible to determine whether reel performance is in progress or the re-spin process is in progress.

Furthermore, when power is restored after a power outage during simulated play or reel presentation, the reels may not be rotated. In this case, the reels will not spin when power is restored, so it is easy to determine whether or not a re-spin process is in progress by the way the reels are spinning.

Next, if power-off processing is executed during slip control and then executed again during the restart processing after power is restored, the motor will rotate until the index is detected after power is restored, and then move to the scheduled stop position again and stop. Note that if power-off processing is executed just before the index is detected, and the index is not detected during acceleration after power is restored, the motor will rotate again until the index is detected, which can also be said to be rotation until the index is detected.

In this way, the re-spin process can be executed even if power is restored after a power outage during the re-spin process, making it possible to display the stopped symbols to the player even in unstable situations where multiple power outages may occur.

Here, the timing at which power-off processing is executed during slip control and then executed again during re-rotation processing after power is restored can be either before the index is detected during the re-rotation processing or after the index is detected during the re-rotation processing.

<Pattern 1>
If power-off processing is executed during slip control, and the timing for executing power-off processing again during re-rotation processing after power is restored is before the index is detected during the re-rotation processing, one possible mode is to rotate the motor until the index is detected during the second re-rotation processing after power is restored, and then rotate it to the planned stop position and stop it.

In this case, the index is not detected during the first re-spin process and the reference pattern position is not stored, so the second re-spin process determines that the reference pattern position has not been stored and performs another rotation to detect the index, allowing the reel to stop at the planned stopping position.

<Pattern 2-1>
In addition, if the power-off process is executed during slip control, and the power-off process is executed again during the re-rotation process after the power is restored, the timing is after the index is detected during the re-rotation process (as long as the sensor detects the index, and this also includes the timing of the moment the sensor detects the index; the same applies hereinafter), it is possible to consider a mode in which the rotation is rotated to the planned stopping position based on the reference pattern position of the index detected before the power was cut off after the power is restored and then stopped.

In this case, since the index is detected during the first re-spin process, the reel can stop at the planned stopping position based on the stored reference symbol position, thereby shortening the time until gameplay can be resumed by the time it takes to detect the index.

In the above-mentioned pattern 2-1, if a power-off process is executed between the detection of the index during the first re-spin process and the rotation to the planned stop position and the application of the brake (until the output of four-phase excitation), even if the rotation has not yet reached the stop acceptance position when the power-off process is executed, or even if the rotation has reached the stop acceptance position, the index will not be detected again after power is restored and the re-spin process or stop control will be executed based on the stored reference symbol position.

In this way, regardless of the stop acceptance position accepted immediately before the first power-off process, the same restart process or stop control can be executed after the second power recovery, which allows for faster programming without complicating the process.

<Pattern 2-2>
Furthermore, if power-off processing is executed during slip control, and the timing for executing power-off processing again during the re-rotation processing after power is restored is after an index is detected during the re-rotation processing, it is possible to detect the index again after power is restored, and then rotate to the planned stop position and stop.

In this case, taking into account the possibility that the reel may have moved between the second power outage and power restoration, the reel will be rotated again until the index is detected again, allowing it to be rotated more accurately to the intended stopping position.

In the above-mentioned pattern 2-2, if a power-off process is executed between the time the index is detected during the first re-rotation process and the time the symbol rotates to the planned stop position and the brake is applied (until four-phase excitation is output), then even if the symbol has not yet rotated to the stop acceptance position when the power-off process is executed, or has rotated to the stop acceptance position, the re-rotation process will be executed to detect the index again after power is restored, and the symbol will move to the planned stop position and stop there.

In this way, regardless of the stop acceptance position accepted immediately before the first power-off process, the same restart process or stop control can be executed after the second power recovery, which allows for faster programming without complicating the process.

<Pattern 2-3>
In addition, if the power-off process is executed during slippage control, and the timing at which the power-off process is executed again during the re-rotation process after the power is restored is after the index has been detected during the re-rotation process but the pattern has not rotated to the stop acceptance position, then the re-rotation process or stop control is executed based on the stored reference pattern position without detecting the index again after the power is restored, and if the power-off process is executed during slippage control, and the timing at which the power-off process is executed again during the re-rotation process after the power is restored is after the index has been detected during the re-rotation process but the pattern has rotated to the stop acceptance position, then the re-rotation process to detect the index again after the power is restored is executed, and the pattern is moved to the planned stop position and stopped.

In this way, the stop acceptance position accepted immediately before the initial power-off process can be precisely controlled after the reference power supply is restored, making it possible to execute appropriate processing according to the circumstances under which the power-off process was executed.

<Explanation of winning effects, settlement effects, and deposit effects applicable to this embodiment>
Next, the relationship between the winning effect, the settlement effect and the insertion effect that can be applied to this embodiment will be described.

The effects applicable to this embodiment, described below, are capable of simultaneously outputting both winning effects associated with the payout process of gaming medals based on minor winning combinations such as push order combinations, settlement effects associated with the settlement process, and deposit effects associated with bet operations. This aims to prevent the player from mistakenly thinking that the settlement or deposit was not performed properly, and to let the player know that the gaming machine is functioning normally.

The following describes the configuration related to the winning effects, settlement effects, and deposit effects that can be applied to this embodiment.

<Main Control Means>
The main processing of the main control means is as described in the present embodiment, but details of the processing omitted in the description of the present embodiment will be explained below.

<Processing when gaming medals are inserted>
If game medals are ready to be inserted, when game medals are inserted, if the bet number is not set to the upper limit, a bet is set (also called a bet) for the number of inserted medals, or if the upper limit is set, the number of inserted medals is added to the credits. Also, if the bet number is not set to the upper limit and the number of medals available for betting is stored in the credits, a bet is set in response to the operation of the bet switch (MAX bet switch 18, 1 bet switch 19). Here, "inserting game medals" is equivalent to game medals inserted into the medal insertion slot 17 passing through the medal selector 34 normally.
In addition, if game medals have been set for betting or have been saved in credits and before the game begins (after the required number of medals to be bet has been set and before the start lever has been operated), settlement processing can be performed by operating the settlement switch.
Furthermore, the main control means (main control board 100) transmits a medal insertion command to the sub-control means (sub-control board 1000, also referred to as the presentation control means) when a gaming medal is inserted, and transmits a reserve insertion command corresponding to the number of medals set for betting to the sub-control means when the bet switch is operated. When credits are accumulated (added) to the credits, the main control means transmits a reserve number command indicating the current number of accumulated medals to the sub-control means. Based on these commands, the sub-control means can execute insertion presentations such as outputting the sound of a gaming medal being inserted.

<Winning process (payout process)>
The winning process (hereinafter also referred to as the payout process) is a process for paying out predetermined game medals according to the winning minor combination (the symbol combination that has stopped and been displayed) when the winning determination process determines that a minor combination has been won. Paying out game medals here means adding credits if the accumulated credits have not reached their upper limit, or paying out game medals from the hopper 44 if the accumulated credits have reached their upper limit. The main control means transmits a payout start command to the sub-control means when starting a payout based on a winning (whether by adding credits or by paying out from the hopper 44), and transmits a payout end command to the sub-control means when ending the payout based on a winning. Based on the payout start command and payout end command, the sub-control means can execute winning effects such as outputting a game medal payout sound and executing a backlight effect (also referred to as a BL effect). The payout start command includes information on the number of game medals to be paid out, and the payout start command and payout end command are sent even when there is no payout (when there is a loss or when a replay wins).When there is a loss or when a replay wins, the number of game medals to be paid out is sent as 0, followed by the payout end command.

<Settlement processing>
When the settlement switch is operated while no game is being played, a process of paying out (settlement) game medals to the player from the hopper 44 in a number corresponding to the set bet number and the accumulated credits is executed. When the settlement process is started, the main control means sends a settlement start command to the sub-control means, and when the settlement process is completed, the main control means sends a settlement end command to the sub-control means. Based on the settlement start command and the settlement end command, the sub-control means can execute settlement effects such as outputting a settlement sound.

<Secondary control means>
Various effects can be executed according to the progress of the game, and effects are executed based on the lottery results of the winning combination (internal lottery results), push order navigation effects are executed during the AT, and throw-in effects, winning effects, settlement effects, etc. are executed.

<Introduction>
This effect is executed when a gaming medal is inserted or a bet switch is operated, and an insertion sound is output based on a medal insertion command or a reserve insertion command transmitted from the main control means. The main control means sets the reserve insertion command as either a reserve insertion command (1 medal), a reserve insertion command (2 medals), or a reserve insertion command (3 medals) depending on the number of medals set to be bet, and transmits the set reserve insertion command to the sub-control means. When the reserve insertion command (1 medal) is received, insertion sound A indicating that one medal has been bet is output once (e.g., a "da" sound is output), notifying the player that one medal has been bet. When the reserve insertion command (3 medals) is received, insertion sound A is output three times, notifying the player that three medals have been bet. When a medal insertion command is received, if the inserted gaming medal is set to be bet, insertion sound A is output once, and if it is stored, insertion sound B indicating that one medal has been stored is output once (e.g., a "ji" sound is output), notifying the player that a bet or storage has been made.
When a reserve deposit command (3 coins) is received, the deposit sound C indicating that 3 coins have been bet may be output instead of the deposit sound A being output three times, or the same sound may be output when a bet is set and when the coins are stored (for example, the deposit sound A may be output in all states). Also, a different sound (deposit sound D) may be output during normal times (non-AT) and during AT.

<Winning performance>
This is an effect that is executed when game medals are paid out, and is executed based on a payout start command and a payout end command, and a payout sound indicating that game medals are being paid out and a back lamp effect are executed.

<Dispensing sound output>
There are two distinct payout sounds for game medals that are output during the execution of the game medal payout process: payout sound A and payout sound B. Payout sound A is a payout sound that is output during normal play (non-AT) when a push-order combination is won, and the correct symbol combination is stopped as a result of operating the buttons in the correct order, resulting in a favorable payout. Payout sound B is a payout sound that is output during AT when a push-order combination is won, and the correct symbol combination is stopped as a result of operating the buttons in the correct order, resulting in a favorable payout. If the correct order is not followed, an incorrect symbol combination may be stopped and an unfavorable payout may occur; in such cases, no payout sound is output. Payout sound A is a payout sound that starts when a payout start command is received, repeatedly outputs a first sound (e.g., a "zu" sound) until a payout end command is received, and then repeatedly outputs the first sound for a first specific time (e.g., 1 second) after the payout end command is received, and then ends. By outputting the payout sound A for a first payout sound period (a period obtained by adding the first specific time to the period during which a payout is actually being made) that is longer than the period during which a payout is actually being made (the period during which a payout process is being made), it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that a payout is being made. Also, by outputting the payout sound for a first payout sound period that is longer than the period during which a payout is being made, it is possible to make the player recognize that a payout is being made during the period during which the payout sound is being output, and it is expected that the start of the next game will be delayed, and as a result, when an effect based on the result of an internal lottery is being performed over a certain period of time, it will be easier for the effect to be executed without being canceled midway.

Payout sound B starts when a payout start command is received, repeats a second sound (e.g., a "de" sound) until a payout end command is received, and then repeats the second sound for a second specific time (e.g., 2 seconds) after the payout end command is received, and then ends. That is, payout sound B is output for a second payout sound period (the period obtained by adding the second specific time to the actual payout period) that is longer than the period during which the actual payout is being performed, and this second payout sound period is longer than the first payout sound period of payout sound A. Thus, by outputting payout sound B for a longer period than payout sound A, it is possible to make the player perceive that more game medals have been awarded. Furthermore, by outputting payout sound B, which is different from payout sound A, during the AT, it is possible to more easily recognize that a player is in a favorable state that is different from normal.
Although the payout sound is output for the first or second specific time after the payout end command is received, when the payout start command is received, the payout sound may be output for the time taken from the start of payout to the end of payout (whichever is longer between adding credits or paying out game medals) plus the first or second specific time, without being triggered by the payout end command. Also, although the payout sound A during normal play and the payout sound B during AT are different in the above embodiment, the same payout sound may be output.

<Back lamp effect>
The back lamp effects include back lamp effect A and back lamp effect B, which are different from each other. Back lamp effect A is a back lamp effect that is output when a push order role is won during normal play (non-AT), and the correct symbol combination is stopped and a favorable payout is made as a result of operating the buttons in the correct button order. Back lamp effect B is a back lamp effect that is executed when a push order role is won during AT, and the correct symbol combination is stopped and a favorable payout is made as a result of operating the buttons in the correct button order. If the correct button order is not used, an incorrect symbol combination may stop, in which case the back lamp effect is not executed. Back lamp effect A starts when a payout start command is received, and repeatedly turns on and off the back lamp in a first pattern until a payout end command is received. After the payout end command is received, the back lamp repeatedly turns on and off in the first pattern for a first specific time (e.g., 1 second) and then ends. By executing the back lamp effect A for a first back lamp effect period (the period obtained by adding the first specific time to the period during which the actual payout is being made) that is longer than the period during which the actual payout is being made, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that a payout is being made. Also, by executing (outputting) the back lamp effect A for a first back lamp effect period that is longer than the period during which the payout is being made, it is possible to make the player recognize that a payout is being made during the period during which the back lamp effect A is being made, and it is expected that the start of the next game will be delayed. Furthermore, when an effect based on the result of an internal lottery is being made over a certain period of time, it is more likely to be executed without being canceled midway.

Back lamp effect B begins when a payout start command is received, and repeatedly turns on and off the back lamp in a second pattern until a payout end command is received. Once the payout end command is received, the back lamp repeatedly turns on and off in the second pattern for a second specific time (e.g., 2 seconds) before ending. In other words, back lamp effect B repeatedly turns on and off for a second back lamp effect period (the period during which actual payouts are made plus the second specific time) that is longer than the period during which actual payouts are made, and this second back lamp effect period is longer than the first back lamp effect period. In this way, by executing back lamp effect B for a longer period than back lamp effect A, it is possible to make the player perceive that more game medals have been awarded. Furthermore, by executing back lamp effect B, which is different from back lamp effect A, during AT, it is easier to recognize that a player is in an advantageous state that is different from normal.

While the backlight effect was executed from the time the payout end command was received until the first or second specific time had elapsed, when the payout start command was received, the backlight effect could be executed for the time taken from the start of payout to the end of payout (whichever is longer: credit addition or medal payout) plus the first or second specific time, without being triggered by the payout end command. While the backlight effect is different during normal play and during AT, the same backlight effect could also be executed. While the backlight is repeatedly turned on and off in a fixed pattern, a series of on/off patterns could be determined and output from the start to the end of the backlight effect. The "first backlight effect period" of backlight effect A and the "first payout sound period" of payout sound A are both the time during which actual payouts are being performed plus the first specific time, and are therefore the same period. However, these "first backlight effect period" and "first payout sound period" may be different periods. The same applies to the relationship between the "second back lamp effect period" of back lamp effect B and the "second dispensing sound period" of dispensing sound B. In short, the "first dispensing sound period" and "second dispensing sound period" of dispensing sounds A and B, and the "first dispensing sound period" and "second back lamp effect period" of back lamp effect A and B are each longer than the period during which actual dispensing is occurring, and as long as the relationship is "first dispensing sound period" < "second dispensing sound period" and "first back lamp effect period" < "second back lamp effect period," these periods can be set appropriately.

<Settlement performance>
This effect is executed when the game medals are settled, and is executed based on a settlement start command and a settlement end command. It outputs a settlement sound (settlement effect) indicating that the game medals are being paid out, and a voice indicating that the settlement has been completed is output. The settlement sound starts when the settlement start command is received, and repeatedly outputs a sound different from the payout sound (e.g., a "do" sound) until the payout end command is received. After the payout end command is received, the sound ends with the output of a voice indicating that the settlement has been completed, such as "Settlement has been completed," over a third specified period (e.g., 5 seconds). In other words, the settlement effect outputs a sound over a predetermined settlement effect period (the period obtained by adding the third specified time to the period during which the actual payout is being performed) that is longer than the period during which the actual payout is being performed (the period during which the settlement process is being performed).

The various effects executed depending on the progress of the game will be explained below with reference to Figures 22 to 26. Figure 22 is a time chart when no insertion operation is performed using the MAX BET switch after the payout process is completed. Figure 23 is a time chart when an insertion operation is performed using the MAX BET switch after the payout process is completed. Figure 24 is a time chart when a settlement operation is performed using the settlement switch after the payout process is completed. Figure 25 is a time chart when no gaming medals are inserted after the settlement process is completed. Figure 26 is a time chart when gaming medals are inserted after the settlement process is completed. Note that for convenience of explanation, Figures 22 to 26 use ON and OFF to indicate the status of the corresponding process or effect, but the status of the corresponding process or effect is indicated in parentheses. Specifically, for the payout process/settling process/BL effect/settling effect, ON indicates an executing state, OFF indicates an not executing state, and when it changes from OFF to ON, the process etc. starts, and when it changes from ON to OFF, it ends. For the payout sound/insertion sound, ON indicates that an output is being made, and OFF indicates that an output is not being made. For the MAX BET lamp/medal insertion possible lamp, ON indicates that the lamp is lit, and OFF indicates that the lamp is not lit. For the MAX BET switch operation/settlement switch operation, ON indicates that the switch has been operated, and OFF indicates that the switch has not been operated. For medal insertion, ON indicates that the inserted game medal has passed through the medal selector 34 (the insertion sensor provided on the medal selector 34 has detected the game medal), and OFF indicates that the game medal has not been inserted.

<If you do not insert the MAX BET switch after the payout process is completed>
As shown in FIG. 22, the main control means starts the payout process at time t0, and the sub-control means starts outputting a payout sound A (referred to as a payout sound in the figure, the same applies below) and a backlight effect A (referred to as a BL effect in the figure, the same applies below) based on the received payout start command. At time t1, the main control means ends the payout process and sends a payout end command to the sub-control means. Based on the payout end command, the sub-control means continues outputting the payout sound A and the backlight effect A as a winning effect for the T1 period (first specific time). After the payout process ends at time t1, the main control means performs processing such as updating the RT status (game end check processing) and turns on the blocker to enable the insertion of gaming medals. At time t2, the main control means turns on the MAX BET lamp based on the status that allows the insertion of gaming medals. The MAX BET lamp remains lit because the MAX BET switch was not operated. At time t5, since the period T1 has elapsed since time t1, the sub-control means terminates the output of payout sound A and the back lamp effect A. In other words, the period from time t0 to t5 can be said to be the first payout sound period and the first back lamp effect period. As described above, smooth control is possible even when various situations are combined, such as continuing the output of payout sound A and the back lamp effect A while turning on the MAX BET lamp from time t1 onwards. By continuing to output payout sound A, the player is made aware that a payout has been made, and is also made aware that a bet can be set by the MAX BET operation, thereby improving the performance of the gaming machine.

<When inserting a bet using the MAX BET switch after the payout process has been completed>
As shown in Figure 23, up until time t2, the operation is the same as if the MAX BET switch had not been operated after the payout process had ended, and at time t3, the MAX BET switch is operated. When the MAX BET switch is operated, the main control means turns off the MAX BET lamp, the sub-control means ends the backlight effect A, and outputs a payout sound A (referred to as a payout sound in the figure; the same applies below) three times as a payout effect from time t3 to time t4 (during the T2 period). Even when various situations occur in which payout sound A is output while payout sound A is output, smooth control is possible. This allows the player to recognize that a payout has been made, as well as that the MAX BET switch has been operated and a bet has been set, thereby improving the performance of the gaming machine. Furthermore, at time t3, the output of payout sound A continues, but by ending back lamp effect A, the player is made to recognize by sound that a payout has been made, and is also made to recognize by sight that a bet has been set. Note that although Fig. 23 has been explained using the MAX BET switch for insertion operation, the insertion sound is also output when inserting a coin using the 1 BET switch or inserting a medal.

<When settlement operation is performed using the settlement button after the dispensing process is completed>
As shown in FIG. 24, up to time t2, the process is the same as when the MAX BET switch is inserted after the payout process is completed, and at time t3, the settlement button is operated instead of the MAX BET switch. At time t3, the main control means starts the settlement process based on the operation of the settlement button, and turns off (turns off) the MAX BET lamp. Then, the sub-control means ends the output of payout sound A and back lamp effect A at time t3 without waiting for the passage of period T1. Thereafter, based on the settlement start command, it starts outputting a settlement sound as a settlement effect. At time t6, the main control means ends the settlement process and sends a settlement completion command to the sub-control means. Upon receiving the settlement completion command, the sub-control means replaces the output of the settlement sound with the output of a sound indicating that the settlement has been completed, and continues for period T3 (third specific time). When the settlement process is started, if the payout sound A and the settlement sound are output simultaneously, it will confuse the player, so by ending the output of the payout sound A and the back lamp effect A, which were scheduled to continue for the T1 period, when the settlement process is started, the player can be made to accurately recognize that a settlement process different from the payout process is being carried out.

<If you do not insert a medal after the settlement process is complete>
As shown in FIG. 25, at time t8, the main control means starts the settlement process, and the sub-control means starts outputting a settlement sound as a settlement effect based on the received settlement start command. Here, the backlight effect is not executed (output) during settlement, allowing the payout process and the settlement process to be visually distinct processes. At time t9, the main control means ends the settlement process and sends a settlement completion command to the sub-control means. Upon receiving the settlement completion command, the sub-control means replaces the output of the settlement sound with the output of a sound indicating that settlement has been completed for a period T3. After the settlement process is completed at time t9, the main control means turns on the blocker to enable the insertion of gaming medals. At time t10, the main control means turns on the medal insertion possible lamp based on the fact that gaming medals can be inserted. Since no medals were inserted thereafter, the lamp remains lit. At time T13, the T3 period has elapsed since time t9, so the sub-control means stops outputting the sound indicating that the settlement has been completed. As described above, the settlement effect is being executed from time t10 onwards, but it is still possible to insert medals.

<If you insert a medal after the settlement process is complete>
26, up until time t10, the situation is the same as when no gaming medals are inserted after the settlement process is completed, and at time t11, the main control means inserts a gaming medal, sets a bet on one medal, and transmits a medal insertion command to the sub-control means. Upon receiving the medal insertion command, the sub-control means outputs insertion sound A once as an insertion effect, and this output continues from time t11 to time t12. Even when various situations are combined, such as outputting a sound indicating that settlement is complete and outputting insertion sound A from time t11 onward, smooth control is possible. This allows the player to recognize that the settlement process is complete, as well as that a medal has been inserted and a bet has been set, thereby improving the performance of the gaming machine. 22 to 26 have been described using an example in which the payout sound is payout sound A and the BL effect is backlight effect A, but in these Figures 22 to 26, the payout sound may be payout sound B and the BL effect may be backlight effect B (in this case, it goes without saying that the T1 period in Figures 22 and 38 should be read as the second specific time). Even in this case, the same effects as those described above are achieved.

<Change of form>
We have explained a configuration in which the same sound is repeatedly output while the dispensing process or settlement process is being carried out until it is completed, but in addition to the commands mentioned above, the main control means may send a command to the sub-control means each time a coin is dispensed, indicating that one coin has been dispensed, or a command that can identify the number of coins remaining to be dispensed, and the sub-control means may output a dispensing sound or settlement sound each time one coin is dispensed based on receiving these commands sent from the main control means.
Furthermore, although the settlement sound is different from the payout sound, it may be the same as the payout sound. By using the same sound, the amount of sound data can be reduced, leading to a reduction in data capacity. If the sounds are the same, the payout process and the settlement process can be distinguished by the presence or absence of a backlight effect, allowing the player to recognize that the settlement process is being carried out properly, even if the settlement process is carried out immediately after the payout process.
The settlement sound may be the same as the error sound, which also reduces the amount of sound data, thereby reducing the data capacity.
Also, during the AT, payout sound B is output, but in addition to outputting payout sound B from the start of the payout process, a sound such as "Get" or "Yesssss" indicating the correct button press sequence may be output from the start of the payout process to the time when the payout process ends and the second specific time (2 seconds) has elapsed. By outputting the sound indicating the correct button press sequence, the player can recognize that the stop switch has been operated correctly, and by outputting the payout sound for a longer time than the sound indicating the correct button press sequence, the player can recognize that the game medals have also been properly paid out.
In addition, although the MAX bed lamp is turned on and off by the main control means, the main control means may also transmit information to the sub-control means as to whether the MAX bed switch is in an operable state, thereby turning the lamp on and off at the sub-control means.

Furthermore, although it has been explained that a throw-in sound is output as part of the throw-in effect, in addition to outputting the throw-in sound, an image indicating the throw-in may be displayed on the display device 32, or an LED lamp for the effect may be used to notify the user that the throw-in has been made.
In addition, although the winning effect is described as being a payout sound output and a back lamp effect, an image indicating that a prize has been won (for example, displaying "GET") may be displayed on the display device 32, or an LED lamp for the effect may be used to notify the player that a prize has been won. In this case, when the throw-in effect is executed, the display on the display device 32 as the winning effect or the notification by the LED lamp may be terminated, or the display on the display device 32 and the notification by the LED lamp as the throw-in effect may not be executed.
In addition, although the settlement effect includes the output of a settlement sound and a voice indicating that the settlement has been completed, an image indicating that the settlement process is in progress (for example, a message indicating that settlement is in progress) may be displayed on the display device 32, or an LED lamp for the effect may be used to notify that the settlement is in progress. In this case, when the coin insertion effect is executed, the display on the display device 32 or the notification by the LED lamp may be terminated as the settlement effect, or the display on the display device 32 or the notification by the LED lamp as the coin insertion effect may not be executed.
In addition, although the winning effect is executed for the push order combination, it may also be executed for other minor combinations (such as the watermelon combination, the bell combination that does not matter in the push order, or the cherry combination). For other minor combinations, a payout sound different from the push order combination is output, or a back lamp effect different from the push order combination is executed, so that it is easy to recognize that a combination different from the push order combination has won.
Furthermore, the times and lengths of the periods in this embodiment are merely examples and can be changed in various ways.

<Description of Errors and Winning Effects Related to the Hopper 44 Applicable to the Present Embodiment>
Next, the relationship between errors related to the hopper 44 and winning effects applicable to this embodiment will be described.

The effects applicable to this embodiment, described below, are intended to allow the player to recognize the results of the game or the effects before a hopper empty error occurs when a winning effect occurs upon the start of the payout process or an effect occurs after the reels have stopped.

The following describes the configuration related to hopper 44 errors and winning effects that can be applied to this embodiment.

<Main Control Means>
The main processing of the main control means is as described in this embodiment and in the explanations of the winning effects, settlement effects and deposit effects applicable to this embodiment, but details of the processing omitted in the description of this embodiment will be explained below.

<Winning process (payout process)>
The payout process is a process of paying out predetermined game medals according to the winning minor winning combination (the symbol combination that has stopped and been displayed) when the winning determination process determines that a minor winning combination has been achieved. Paying out game medals here means adding credits if the accumulated credits have not reached the upper limit, and paying out game medals from the hopper 44 if the accumulated credits have reached the upper limit. To pay out game medals from the hopper 44, the main control means (main control board 100) drives the hopper motor by inputting a drive signal (ON state) to the hopper motor, and then rotates the turntable to eject game medals one by one. When the payout sensor detects a game medal for a predetermined period of time (the time from the start of passage to the end of passage is between 3 ms and 200 ms), it determines that one game medal has been paid out. Furthermore, the main control means transmits a payout start command to the sub-control means (sub-control board 1000) when starting a payout based on a win (whether by adding credits or by paying out from the hopper 44), and transmits a payout end command to the sub-control means when ending the payout. Based on the payout start command, the sub-control means can execute winning effects such as displaying the number of payouts and the cumulative difference in the number of medals. The payout start command includes information on the number of medals to be paid out, and the payout start command and payout end command are also transmitted when there is no payout (when there is a loss or when there is a win in a replay). When there is a loss or when there is a win in a replay, information on the number of medals to be paid out is transmitted as 0, followed by the payout end command.

<Errors related to hopper 44>
A hopper accumulation error, a hopper empty error, and an abnormality detection error can be detected as errors related to the hopper 44. A hopper accumulation error is an error that occurs when it is determined that a payout outlet of the hopper 44 is clogged with game medals when game medals are paid out, a hopper empty error is an error that occurs when it is determined that the hopper is empty of game medals, and an abnormality detection error is an error that occurs when it is determined that an abnormal input has been made to the payout sensor of the hopper 44.
When the main control means detects an error and issues an error notification, it sends an error notification start command including information on the type of error to the sub-control means, and when the error is resolved, it sends an error recovery command. Based on the error notification start command, the sub-control means displays error information corresponding to the type of error detected (an error screen) on the display device 32, and based on the error recovery command, it ends the error screen display and returns to the display before the error occurred.
In addition, the main control means transmits an error detection command indicating that an error has been detected at the timing when the abnormality detection error is detected, and the sub-control means displays that an abnormality has been detected based on the error detection command.

<Hopper accumulation error>
When game medals are dispensed from the hopper 44, a drive signal is input to the hopper motor, which rotates the turntable to dispense the game medals, and if the dispense sensor continues to detect a game medal for a certain period of time (201 ms) or more, it is determined that the game medals have become clogged, and a hopper retention error is set.
<Hopper empty error>
When game medals are dispensed from the hopper 44, even if a drive signal is input to the hopper motor and the game medal dispensing operation to rotate the turntable is performed, if no game medals are detected by the dispensing sensor for a certain period of time (3.5 seconds), it is determined that the game medals in the hopper 44 are empty, and a hopper empty error is set.
<Abnormality detection error>
When the payout sensor detects an abnormal input for a certain period of time (3 ms) or more when the machine is not in a state where a game medal should be paid out, it is determined that an abnormal input has been made to the payout sensor, and an abnormality detection error is set. The error display is displayed when no game is being played (when waiting for the insertion of a game medal or when waiting for the start lever to be operated).

<Secondary control means>
Various effects can be executed depending on the progress of the game, and effects can be executed based on the results of the role lottery (internal lottery results), error notifications can be executed, push order navigation effects can be executed during AT, winning effects can be executed, result screens can be displayed, result announcement effects can be executed, etc.

<Winning performance>
This effect is executed when game medals are paid out, and includes an acquisition display effect that indicates that a predetermined number of game medals will be paid out, and an accumulation display effect that indicates that the game medals acquired by the player have accumulated to a predetermined number. The acquisition display effect and the accumulation display effect are executed based on the sub-control means receiving a payout start command.

<Acquisition display performance>
The win display effect is an effect that is executed when a push order role is won during the AT, and as a result of operating the buttons in the correct push order, the correct symbol combination stops and an advantageous payout is made. The win display effect may be displayed as "GET" without specifying the number of game medals to be paid out, or as "GET 12" so that it is specifically specified that 12 game medals will be paid out. If a push order role is won during the AT and the buttons are not operated in the correct push order, an incorrect symbol combination may stop and an unfavorable payout may be made (such as the payout of one medal, which is a payout of fewer game medals than the correct symbol combination), but in that case the win display effect is not executed.
The winning display effect begins when a payout start command is received and runs for a predetermined winning display effect period (1 second), which is shorter than the period during which actual payouts are being performed (the period during which payout processing is being performed). Therefore, it runs even if all of the game medals that are actually to be paid out to the player have not been paid out. This is to prevent the winning display effect from being canceled when the next game begins or being confused with the result of the next game if it were to run after all of the game medals have been paid out. Furthermore, by running the winning display effect even if all of the game medals have not been paid out, it is possible to make the player aware of the result of the game (that they will receive a payout) in advance.

<Cumulative display effect>
The cumulative display effect is an effect that is executed when the cumulative number of game medals won by a player during an AT (also referred to as the total number of game medals) exceeds a specified number for the first time (500, 1000, 1500, 2000). Specifically, the cumulative number of medals won is counted from the start of an AT during one AT, and when it is determined that the cumulative number will exceed 500 due to the payout of game medals, the cumulative display effect is executed (started). Thereafter, even if the cumulative number falls below 500 and exceeds 500 again, the cumulative display effect is not executed. The cumulative display effect is displayed in the form of "GET 500 medals" or the like depending on the specified number.
The cumulative display effect is initiated when a payout start command is received and it is determined that the cumulative number will exceed the specified number due to the payout. It is executed for a predetermined cumulative display effect period (1 second) that is shorter than the period during which actual payouts are being performed (the period during which the payout process is being performed). Like the acquisition display effect, it is executed even if the number of game medals actually paid out to the player does not exceed the specified number. This is to prevent variations in the timing of the cumulative display effect if it is executed when the specified number is actually exceeded, which could result in the effect being canceled by the start of the next game or being confused with the result of the next game. Furthermore, by executing the cumulative display effect even if the specified number has not been exceeded, it is possible to make the player aware of the result of the game (exceeding the specified number) in advance.
It should be noted that although the conditions for executing both the acquisition display effect and the cumulative display effect may be satisfied in one game, in this embodiment, in a game in which the cumulative display effect can be executed, in principle, only the cumulative display effect is executed without executing the acquisition display effect. However, cases in which the acquisition display effect is executed in a manner different from the principle will be described later.

<Results screen display>
In this embodiment, the result screen is displayed when the AT ends, displaying the total number of game medals acquired during the AT, the number of games during the AT execution period, and the like. When the result screen is displayed, a warning display (a display to prevent addiction) is also displayed. When the final game of the AT ends (when the command to stop all reels is received), the result screen begins to be displayed and continues to be displayed until the next game begins. Note that while the result screen is displayed in the final game, only the acquisition display effect can be executed; even if any specified number is exceeded in the final game, the cumulative display effect is not executed. For example, if a push order combination is won and the correct push order is performed, the correct symbol combination stops, a favorable payout is made, and the specified number of 500 coins is exceeded, the cumulative display effect is executed if it is not the final game. However, if it is the final game, the result screen is displayed, and the acquisition display effect is executed without the cumulative display effect. This is because the result screen displays the total number of game medals won during the AT, and if the cumulative display effect is also executed, similar information will be displayed on top of each other, confusing the player.

<Result announcement performance>
The result notification effect is an effect for notifying the player that an advantageous result has been obtained, and is an effect executed in the final game of a series of consecutive effects. Specifically, it is an effect for notifying the player whether an advantageous result has been obtained, such as winning a bonus, winning an additional bonus such as the number of games remaining in the AT, or winning a specialized zone that increases the chances of additional bonuses. As an example, whether an advantageous result has been obtained is notified based on the outcome of a battle effect or the like. If an advantageous result is obtained, an image indicating success or victory is displayed, and if an advantageous result is not obtained, an image indicating failure or defeat is displayed. In the battle effect, a lever operation is triggered to display a screen in which an ally character and an enemy character face off against each other, and after all reels have stopped (due to receipt of a command to stop all reels), the ally character and the enemy character compete, and after a certain amount of time has passed and the effect branches, an image indicating success or victory, or an image indicating failure or defeat, is displayed. The timing for branching the effects occurs 2.7 seconds after the start of the payout process, and the result notification effect ends when an image indicating success or victory or an image indicating failure or defeat is displayed, which occurs 3 seconds after the start of the payout process. This allows the result notification effect to end before a hopper empty error occurs (is detected) and an error screen is displayed, allowing the player to confirm whether or not they have achieved a favorable result regardless of the occurrence of an error. Note that the all-reel stop command and the payout start command are sent at approximately the same time, so the start of the payout process may be replaced with after all reels have stopped.

Various effects that are executed according to the progress of the game will be explained below with reference to Figures 27 to 32. Figure 27 is a time chart when payout is performed normally, Figure 28 is a time chart when payout is not performed normally (when a hopper empty error occurs), Figure 29 is a time chart when payout is not performed normally (when a hopper retention error occurs), Figure 30 is an example of a display screen when payout is performed normally, Figure 31 is an example of a display screen when payout is not performed normally (when a hopper empty error occurs), and Figure 32 is an example of a display screen when payout is not performed normally (when a hopper retention error occurs).
27 to 29, ON and OFF are used for ease of explanation, but the status of the corresponding process or effect is written in parentheses. Specifically, ON for the payout process indicates a running state, OFF indicates a not running state, and changing from OFF to ON means that the process has started, and changing from ON to OFF means that it has ended. ON for payout indicates that one game medal has been paid out, and OFF indicates that no game medal has been paid out. ON for the acquisition display effect and the accumulation display effect indicates that the effect is being executed (displayed), and OFF indicates that it is not being executed (not displayed). ON for the result notification effect indicates that it is being executed (the effect is progressing), and OFF indicates that it is not being executed (the effect has ended and the display has stopped on the screen announcing the result). ON for error (empty hopper) and error (hopper stuck) indicates that an error has occurred (an error has been detected and set), and OFF indicates that no error has occurred. The error display ON indicates that an error has occurred and an error code is displayed by the main control means or an error screen is displayed by the sub-control means, while OFF indicates that neither an error code nor an error screen is displayed.

Figures 30 to 32 show cases where the acquisition display effect is executed. When the cumulative display effect is executed, the notation "GET 12 coins" displayed in the acquisition display effect in the figures changes to the notation "GET 500 coins" displayed in the cumulative display effect.

The previously explained winning effects, settlement effects, and deposit effects can be combined, and times t0 and t1 in Figures 22 to 24 are the same as times t0 and t1 in Figure 27. Time t5 in Figures 22 and 23 is later than time t1 in Figure 27 and earlier than time t15.

<If the payment is successful>
As shown in FIG. 27 , the main control means starts the payout process at time t0, and the sub-control means starts the acquisition display effect or the accumulation display effect based on the received payout start command. One second later, at time t14, the sub-control means ends the acquisition display effect or the accumulation display effect. Thereafter, at time t1, the main control means ends the payout process and sends a payout end command to the sub-control means. The time required for the payout process is 1.5 seconds if the payout process is executed normally (in this example, 12 game medals are paid out normally). The acquisition display effect starts when the payout process starts and ends before the payout process ends. This allows the player to recognize that they will acquire game medals and that the cumulative number of acquired game medals will exceed a predetermined number before the payout process is completed. The result announcement effect is executed from the start of the game, and is therefore already in progress when the payout process begins. At time t15, the result notification effect branches off, and the display from this point onwards differs between displaying an image indicating success or victory and displaying an image indicating failure or defeat. At time t16, the result notification effect that was being executed ends. Time t15 is 2.7 seconds after the start of the payout process, and time t16 is 3 seconds after the start of the payout process.

<When normal dispensing is not performed (hopper empty error occurs)>
As shown in FIG. 28 , the main control means starts the payout process at time t0, and the sub-control means starts the win display effect or the cumulative display effect based on the received payout start command. After time t0, the payout process is executed, but because there are no game medals in the hopper 44, no game medals are paid out and the spinning wheel continues to rotate. Then, at time t17, the main control means determines that the hopper 44 is empty of game medals, terminates the payout process, and sets a hopper empty error. Based on the occurrence of the hopper empty error, the main control means displays an error code, and the sub-control means displays an error screen. At other times t14, t15, and t16, as in FIG. 27 , the win display effect or the cumulative display effect ends at time t14, the effect branching occurs at time t15, and the result announcement effect ends at time t16. The period for executing the acquisition display effect and the cumulative display effect and the period for ending the result notification effect are set shorter than the period from the start of payout processing until a hopper empty error occurs, so that it is possible to check the contents of the acquisition display effect, the cumulative display effect and the result notification effect before the hopper empty error occurs and an error screen is displayed.
Note that the same figure shows a case where a hopper empty error occurs after not a single medal has been paid out since the start of the payout process; if a hopper empty error occurs after multiple game medals have been paid out, the timing at which the hopper empty error occurs will be later than time t17 by the time it takes for multiple game medals to be paid out.

<When delivery is not performed normally (when a hopper congestion error occurs)>
As shown in Figure 29, the main control means starts the payout process at time t0, and the sub-control means starts the acquisition display effect or the accumulation display effect based on the received payout start command. After time t0, the payout process is executed, but the payout of game medals is not executed because the discharge outlet of the hopper 44 is clogged with game medals. Then, at time t18, the payout sensor of the hopper 44 continues to detect game medals for more than 201 ms after the start of the payout process, so the main control means determines that game medals are clogged, terminates the payout process, and sets a hopper retention error. Also at time t18, the main control means displays an error code based on the occurrence of a hopper retention error, and the sub-control means cancels (ends the display of) the acquisition display effect or the accumulation display effect that was being executed, as well as the result notification effect that was also being executed, and displays an error screen. The acquisition display effect or the cumulative display effect is executed from the timing when the payout process starts, and is executed before the payout process starts and a hopper congestion error occurs, so it is possible to check the contents of the acquisition display effect or the cumulative display effect before the error screen is displayed.
Note that the same figure shows a case where a hopper retention error occurs after not a single medal has been paid out since the start of the payout process; if a hopper retention error occurs after multiple game medals have been paid out, the timing at which the hopper retention error occurs will be later than time t18 by the amount of time it takes for multiple game medals to be paid out, and the period during which the acquisition display effect, cumulative display effect, and result announcement effect are executed will be longer.

Although it was stated above that the execution of the winning display effect, cumulative display effect, and result announcement effect will not be displayed if the effect itself is canceled, the effect itself can be executed while an error screen is displayed superimposed on the effect, making the effect invisible. In this case, if the error is cleared while an effect is being executed, the effect being executed will become visible from the moment the error is cleared. However, clearing the error requires operating the reset switch, and since the reset switch is located inside the cabinet, it is necessary to unlock the locking device and open the front panel PS2. Since it usually takes more than three seconds from the start of the payout process to the end of the result announcement effect before the error can be cleared, even if a hopper congestion error occurs and the hopper congestion error is cleared in the shortest time possible, the winning display effect, cumulative display effect, and result announcement effect will not be restored while they are being executed, but will be restored on the screen after all effects have finished.

<Display screen when payment is successful>
Figure 30 shows an example of a display screen when a payout has been made normally. Figure 30 shows a scene in which a game has been played with 11 games remaining in the AT and a total of 230 game medals won, and a battle effect (result announcement effect) is being executed. The number of games remaining is displayed in the upper left of the screen (since the game was played with 11 games remaining, one is subtracted and it is displayed as 10G (games)). The total number of game medals won in the AT is displayed as 230 in the upper right of the screen. Ally characters (characters indicated by round heads) are displayed on the left side of the center of the screen, and enemy characters (characters indicated by star-shaped heads) are displayed on the right side.

Figure 27 (a) shows the screen when all reels have stopped during the battle effect (when the command to stop all reels is received); from this point on, the effect progresses to announce the results. Figure 27 (b) shows the screen at time t0 in Figure 27, when the payout process has begun. One medal is paid out, increasing the total number of medals from 230 to 231, and the "GET 12" display moves from the right side of the screen toward the center, indicating that 12 medals will be paid out as an acquisition display effect. In the center of the screen, a competition between ally and enemy characters has begun. Figure 27 (c) shows the screen when three medals have been paid out; the "GET 12" display appears in large letters in the center of the screen, indicating that 12 medals will be paid out as an acquisition display effect. The competition between ally and enemy characters continues.

Figure 27 (d) shows the timing when eight medals have been paid out, and the large "Get 12 medals" display in the center of the screen moves toward the left side of the screen as the acquisition display effect ends. Figure 27 (e) shows the timing at time t15 in Figure 27, when the payout of medals has ended and the effect branching occurs. Because the payout of medals has ended, the total number of medals displayed is 242. In the center of the screen, the competition between the ally character and enemy character continues. Figure 27 (f) shows the timing after the effect branching occurs, and the process of displaying an image indicating success is displayed. The ally character is enlarged from the competition between the ally character and enemy character, making it clear that the result is a success. Figure 27 (g) shows the timing at time t16 in Figure 27, when the battle effect ends. The word "Success" is displayed in the lower right corner of the screen, clearly indicating that the effect was a success. Although the image displayed in Figure 27 (g) ends as an effect, it will continue to be displayed until the next game begins. Figure 27 (h) shows the timing after the branching effect, displaying the process of displaying an image indicating failure. The enemy character is enlarged as he competes with his ally character, making it clear that he has failed. Figure 27 (i) shows time t16 in Figure 27, when the battle effect ends. "Failure" is displayed in the bottom right of the screen, clearly indicating that the effect indicated failure. The image displayed in Figure 27 (i) has ended as an effect, but will continue to be displayed until the next play begins.

<Display screen when dispensing is not performed normally (hopper empty error occurs)>
Figure 31 shows an example of a display screen when payout is not performed normally (when a hopper empty error occurs). Figures (a) through (i) show the same flow of the acquisition display effect, cumulative display effect, and result notification effect as Figure 30. However, because no game medals have been paid out since the payout process began, the total number of game medals in the upper right corner of the screen remains at 230 and has not been updated. Figure 31 (j) shows the timing at time t17 in Figure 28, when no game medals were detected for 3.5 seconds after the payout process began, causing the main control means to set a hopper empty error and the sub-control means to display an error screen indicating the hopper empty error. The same image is displayed whether an image indicating success or failure was displayed before the hopper empty error occurred.

<Display screen when dispensing is not performed normally (hopper retention error)>
Figure 32 shows an example of a display screen when payout is not performed normally (when a hopper jam error occurs). Figures 32 (a) through 32 (c) show the same flow of the acquisition display, cumulative display, and result notification display as Figure 30. However, because no game medals have been paid out since the payout process began, the total number of game medals in the upper right corner of the screen remains at 230 and is not updated. Figure 32 (k) shows the timing at time t18 in Figure 29, when a hopper jam error is set in the main control means and a screen indicating the hopper jam error is displayed in the sub-control means. If the payout sensor of the hopper 44 continues to detect jamming for 201 ms or more after the start of the payout process, the main control means determines that game medals have jammed and sets a hopper jam error. After setting the hopper jam error, the main control means sends a command indicating the occurrence of a hopper jam error to the sub-control means. Upon receiving the command indicating the occurrence of a hopper jam error, the sub-control means displays a screen indicating the hopper jam error on the display device 32.

<Change of form>
The period for which the winning display effect and the cumulative display effect are displayed is set to 1 second, which is shorter than the period (1.5 seconds) required for a normal payout process, but it may be set to a longer period. Specifically, it may be set to a period longer than 1.5 seconds and shorter than the period (3.5 seconds) required for detecting a hopper empty error. By setting the period longer than the period required for a payout process, the winning display effect and the cumulative display effect can be more easily viewed by the player.
In addition, the time required for a payout process to be executed normally is set to 1.5 seconds, but the required time may vary depending on the number of medals to be paid out and whether the payout process involves only adding credits or includes paying out game medals from a hopper.
In addition, although only one of the acquisition display effect and the accumulation display effect is executed in the above description, if the conditions for executing both effects are met, the accumulation display effect may be executed after the acquisition display effect is executed. The acquisition display effect ends one second after the start of the payout process, and the accumulation display effect is executed for one second thereafter, so the player can recognize the content of the accumulation display effect even if a hopper empty error occurs.
In addition, the winning display effect is an effect that is executed when a push order role is won during AT, and as a result of operating in the correct push order, the correct symbol combination stops and an advantageous payout (payout of 12 coins) is made, but it may also be executed when a role other than the push order role is won. Specifically, it may be executed when a push order irrelevant role (so-called shared bell) that executes an advantageous payout (payout of 12 coins) regardless of the push order is won and the symbol combination (correct symbol combination) corresponding to the push order irrelevant role stops.

The winning display effect may have multiple variations when a favorable payout (payout of 12 coins) is executed. Specifically, the color and font of the message "GET 12 coins" may be varied depending on the state. More specifically, the color and font may be varied depending on whether the state is favorable for winning an AT bonus, or during a precursory event for a consecutive bonus or a transition to a bonus-specialized zone. By varying the mode of the winning display effect, the player is notified that gaming medals will be acquired and can be made to anticipate that a favorable situation may occur in the next game or later. Furthermore, the color and font of the message "GET 12 coins" may be varied depending on the setting value set in the gaming machine. Information for estimating the setting value set in the gaming machine can be provided each time the winning display effect is executed.
Furthermore, the cumulative display effect may have a display mode that can be displayed only when a specific setting value is set, in addition to for each specified number. Specifically, when the setting value is set to "2,""4," or "6," if the cumulative number of gaming medals exceeds 246 for the first time, "GET 246" is displayed. This may be displayed always when the number exceeds 246, or may be displayed only when a lottery is held and the player wins. By suggesting the setting through the content displayed in the cumulative display effect, not only can the player be notified of the cumulative number, but information for estimating the setting value set in the gaming machine can also be provided. Only when the setting value is set to "6,""GET666" may be displayed when the cumulative number of gaming medals exceeds 666 for the first time. Furthermore, multiple display modes with different colors, fonts, etc. for each specified number may be provided, and the setting value set in the gaming machine or its status may be suggested depending on the displayed display mode.

The acquisition display effect and cumulative display effect can be executed during the AT, and are executed without executing the cumulative display effect only when the result screen is displayed, even if the cumulative number of game medals exceeds the specified number. However, there may be other situations in which the acquisition display effect and cumulative display effect are not executed. Specifically, in a so-called pseudo-bonus situation, the acquisition display effect and cumulative display effect do not need to be executed. Also, in a pseudo-bonus situation executed during the AT, the acquisition display effect may not be executed, and only the cumulative display effect may be executed. Furthermore, the acquisition display effect and cumulative display effect do not need to be executed during the preparation period before the AT starts, on the AT start screen, during consecutive effects executed during the AT, or during signs of consecutive effects. The acquisition display effect and cumulative display effect do not need to be executed in an ending state that can be executed before the end of the advantageous zone. By providing for cases in which they are executed or not executed depending on the game state managed by the main control means and the effect state managed by the sub-control means, the necessary information can be appropriately notified to the player.

While the execution of the cumulative display effect was previously determined based on the cumulative number of game medals acquired by the player during the AT and the number of game medals paid out by the payout process, it may also be determined using the value of the MY counter. Specifically, the MY counter value is determined by sending a command indicating the MY counter value from the main control means to the sub-control means after checking the end of the game and when the lever is operated. The MY counter value after checking the end of the game indicates the value after the payout process, and the MY counter value when the lever is operated indicates the value obtained by subtracting the number of bets. When a payout start command is received as a result of the game, the number of game medals included in the payout start command is added to the MY counter value when the lever is operated, and it is determined whether the total value exceeds a specified number. By displaying a value based on the MY counter value as the cumulative number during the AT, the player can grasp the number of game medals that can be acquired before the advantageous period ends.
Although the result announcement effect is a battle effect executed in the final game of a series of effects, it may be an effect executed in one game instead of a series of effects. Also, it is not limited to a battle effect in which a friendly character competes against an enemy character, but may be another effect that associates the result of the effect with an advantageous result for the player, such as whether or not the player wins first prize in a lottery or whether or not the player wins in a maze lottery.

Although the result announcement effect is explained as displaying the result at the effect branching timing as time passes after all reels have stopped, the result may also be displayed by operating an effect switch. Specifically, at the effect branching timing (time t15), an image of a switch simulating an effect switch (also referred to as an operation prompt image or operation prompt effect) is displayed, and when the player operates the effect switch, an image indicating success or failure is displayed. By displaying the operation prompt image at the effect branching timing, even in a situation where a hopper empty error occurs and an error screen is displayed, the player can recognize that the operation prompt image will be displayed before the error screen is displayed.
Furthermore, after all reels have stopped (after all reels have stopped), a push button effect may be executed to change the stage of the effect or to announce the number of additional games remaining in the AT. Specifically, after all reels have stopped but before time t17 before the hopper empty error occurs, an image of a switch simulating the effect switch is displayed, and the player can operate it to change the stage of the effect or announce the number of additional games. It is possible to recognize that the image of the switch simulating the effect switch is displayed (the push button effect is executed) before the hopper empty error occurs (the error screen is displayed). Furthermore, before the image of the switch simulating the effect switch is displayed, an image of the switch simulating the effect switch may be displayed or teased, and it is possible to recognize that the image of the switch simulating the effect switch is displayed as a result of the teasing before the error screen is displayed.

In addition to the result announcement effect and the PUSH button effect, effects such as comment effects may be executed when the stop switch of the final reel is operated or when all reels are stopped. By executing these effects before time t17 before the hopper empty error occurs (for example, at time t15 or time t1), the content of the effect can be recognized before the hopper empty error occurs.
In addition, this effect is executed when the push order role is won, and as a result of operating in the correct push order, the correct symbol combination stops and an advantageous payout (payout of 12 coins) is made, but it may also be executed when a role other than the push order role is won. Specifically, it may be executed when a push order irrelevant role (so-called shared bell) in which an advantageous payout (payout of 12 coins) is made regardless of the push order is won and the symbol combination (correct symbol combination) corresponding to the push order irrelevant role stops.
Furthermore, the times and lengths of the periods described in the above embodiments are merely examples and can be changed as appropriate.

<Navigation image>
Next, the navigation image in this embodiment will be described. Here, the push order navigation image (sometimes referred to as stop operation information) will be described, but it is not limited to the push order navigation image, and it may also be applied to the above-mentioned timing navigation image and operation mode navigation image.

In this embodiment, for example, during an AT, in a game where the push order bell is selected as a result of an internal lottery, information suggesting advantageous operation of the stop switch (such as awarding the maximum amount of gaming media that can be won in that game) can be displayed on the LCD as a push order navigation image. Specifically, the numbers "1," "2," and "3" can be used to indicate six different push orders, with "1" indicating the stop switch to be operated as the first stop operation, "2" indicating the stop button to be operated as the second stop operation, and "3" indicating the stop button to be operated as the third stop.

The first stop operation or the third stop operation may be configured as two-choice push-buttons (whether to operate the stop switch at reel positions 1-10 or 11-20, for example, is indicated along with a push-button navigation image showing either a blue 7 or a red 7), and combined with the six push-button options, 12 different operation modes may be indicated. The push-button navigation image displayed on the left side of the LCD screen corresponds to the left reel 8a, the push-button navigation image displayed near the center of the LCD screen corresponds to the middle reel 8b, and the push-button navigation image displayed on the right side of the LCD screen corresponds to the right reel 8c. For example, if the push-button navigation image reads "123," it indicates the push-button sequence for operating the stop switches corresponding to the left reel 8a, middle reel 8b, and right reel 8c, in that order. In this embodiment, the "push-button navigation image" may refer to a portion of the push-button navigation image, such as "1," or the entire push-button navigation image, such as "123."

<Press order navigation image>
33 is a diagram showing an example of the push order navigation image in this embodiment. In FIG. 33, the push order navigation image for the first stop operation is explained as an example, but the second stop operation and the third stop operation are configured in the same way.

The push order navigation image is composed of a "navigation number image" and a "navigation background image," and is configured to have at least four display modes for the push order navigation image: "normal mode," "highlighted mode," "failed mode," and "success mode."

The navigation number image is an image of numbers that indicate the order in which buttons should be pressed. The navigation background image is a decorative image around the numbers that indicate the order in which buttons should be pressed, or an image that shows an effect around the numbers that indicate the order in which buttons should be pressed.

First, <1> in Figure 33 is the normal mode push order navigation image, and the push order navigation image corresponding to the stop switch that should not currently be operated is displayed in the normal mode. Note that audio corresponding to the push order navigation image displayed in the normal mode is not output. Furthermore, even among the normal mode push order navigation images, push order navigation images corresponding to the stop switch that should be operated next and push order navigation images corresponding to the stop switch that should be operated last may be displayed separately. In this case, it is possible to conceive of a mode in which the push order navigation image corresponding to the stop switch that should be operated next is displayed larger than the push order navigation image corresponding to the stop switch that should be operated last, and smaller than the push order navigation image corresponding to the stop switch that should currently be operated.

Next, <2> in Figure 33 is a push order navigation image in an highlighted state, in which the push order navigation image corresponding to the stop switch that should currently be operated is displayed in an highlighted state. The push order navigation image displayed in an highlighted state is configured to output a sound corresponding to the push order navigation image from speaker S. For example, when it is time to operate the stop switch corresponding to left reel 8a, the sound "left" will be output. The push order navigation image in an highlighted state has at least one of the "navigation number image" and "navigation background image" larger than the push order navigation image in the normal state, and is configured to visually notify the player of the stop switch that should currently be operated. Furthermore, in addition to size, the push order navigation image in an highlighted state may be displayed brighter than the push order navigation image in the normal state, or in a different color or font from the normal state, to visually notify the player of the stop switch that should currently be operated in an easily understandable manner.

Next, <3> in Figure 33 is a push order navigation image in a successful mode. When the stop switch that should currently be operated is operated (when the stop switch corresponding to the push order navigation image currently displayed in an highlighted mode is operated), the push order navigation image that was displayed in an highlighted mode is displayed in a successful mode. In other words, when the stop switch that should currently be operated is operated in the correct operating mode, the push order navigation image that is displayed in an highlighted mode changes to a successful mode. When the stop switch that should currently be operated is operated and the push order navigation image is displayed in a successful mode, a sound corresponding to the next push order is output (for example, if the stop switch corresponding to the middle reel 8b should be operated next, a sound saying "It's middle" is output from speaker S), and the push order navigation image corresponding to the stop switch that should next be operated is displayed in an highlighted mode. The push order navigation image in a successful mode is configured to cease display after being displayed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds).

Furthermore, when the stop switch is operated in the correct manner, a sound effect or voice (sometimes called a success sound) indicating that the pressing order is correct may be output from the speaker S. By configuring it in this way, the player can recognize that the stop switch has been operated in the correct manner not only visually but also audibly.

In addition, the push order navigation image for the successful mode is configured so that at least one of the "navigation number image" and "navigation background image" is larger than the push order navigation image for the normal mode. The push order navigation image for the emphasized mode and the push order navigation image for the successful mode are configured so that both the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" are approximately the same size.

Next, <4> in Figure 33 is a push order navigation image in a failed state. When a stop switch that should not be currently operated is operated (when the stop switch corresponding to the push order navigation image displayed in the normal state is operated), all currently displayed push order navigation images are displayed in a failed state. In other words, when the stop switch is operated in an incorrect operation state, all currently displayed push order navigation images change to a failed state. Note that when a stop switch that should not currently be operated is operated and the push order navigation images are displayed in a failed state, a sound indicating that the push order has been made incorrectly (for example, a sound such as "What are you doing?", sometimes referred to as a "failure sound") may be output from speaker S, or no sound indicating that the push order has been made incorrectly may be output. Note that the push order navigation image in a failed state is configured to cease display after being displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds). Also, when a stop switch that should not currently be operated is operated, the push order navigation image in a failed state may not be displayed, and the display of all push order navigation images may immediately cease (within a time shorter than the predetermined time).

In addition, when a stop switch that should not currently be operated is operated and all currently displayed push order navigation images are displayed in a failed state, the size of the push order navigation images is configured to remain the same as it was before the stop operation. In other words, push order navigation images that were displayed in an highlighted state before the stop operation are displayed as failed push order navigation images in the highlighted state size, and push order navigation images that were displayed in a normal state before the stop operation are displayed as failed push order navigation images in the normal state size.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the time from when the stop switch 13 is operated to when the display of the push order navigation image for a successful mode ends is configured to be longer than the time from when the stop switch 13 is operated to when the display of the push order navigation image for a failed mode ends.

This configuration gives players a sense of superiority when they succeed, and when they fail, it makes it harder for other players to realize that they pressed the buttons in the wrong order, increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, the push order navigation image for all modes, including the normal mode, highlight mode, success mode, and failure mode, may be configured to be displayed with effects, or the push order navigation image for at least one mode may be configured to be displayed with effects.

Furthermore, the push order navigation images for all modes, including the normal mode, highlight mode, success mode, and failure mode, may be configured to be displayed as moving images, or the push order navigation images for all modes may be configured to be displayed as still images, or the push order navigation images for at least one mode may be configured to be displayed as moving images and the push order navigation images for the other modes may be configured to be displayed as still images.

Also, when the start switch 12 is operated to start a game, all push order navigation images may be displayed in a normal manner, and then, when the operation of the stop switch becomes effective, the push order navigation image corresponding to the stop switch that should be operated first (first stop operation) may be displayed in an emphasized manner.Also, when the start switch is operated to start a game, the push order navigation image corresponding to the stop switch that should be operated first may be displayed in an emphasized manner, and the other push order navigation images may be displayed in a normal manner, but from the time the display starts until the operation of the stop switch becomes effective, all push order navigation images may be displayed as still images, and when the operation of the stop switch becomes effective, all push order navigation images may be displayed as moving images with some kind of movement.

This configuration makes it easier for players to visually recognize that the stop switch operation has been validated, preventing them from pressing the wrong button in the wrong order. When the stop switch operation is validated in this way, the button press order navigation image corresponding to the first stop operation is displayed in an emphasized manner, or the button press order navigation image changes from a still image to a moving image; this is sometimes referred to as a stop acceptance effect.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the start switch 12 is operated to start a game and the push order navigation image is displayed, a predetermined sound effect (sometimes referred to as a navigation display sound) is output from the speaker S.

The timing for outputting the sound corresponding to the stop switch that should be operated first (e.g., "Left") from speaker S may be immediately after the start switch 12 is operated, when the reels begin to spin, or when the operation of the stop switch becomes effective. In other words, the speaker S may be configured to output the sound at any time between when the start switch 12 is operated and when the operation of the stop switch becomes effective.

By configuring it this way, even if the display of the push order navigation image is delayed due to a malfunction in the LCD display, the player can still audibly identify the stop switch that should be operated first, which will not hinder the progress of the game and will prevent mistakes in the push order.

Figure 34 is an example of a push order navigation image displayed on the LCD in this embodiment, and by displaying "123" on the LCD, it indicates that the correct push order is to operate the stop switches in the following order: stop switch corresponding to left reel 8a → stop switch corresponding to middle reel 8b → stop switch corresponding to right reel 8c. In Figure 34, since the stop switch corresponding to left reel 8a should be operated first, "1" is displayed in an emphasized mode in the push order navigation image, and "2" and "3" are displayed in the normal mode in the push order navigation image.

<Configuration for displaying the push order navigation image and power off>
Next, the display of the push order navigation image when a power outage occurs while the push order navigation image is being displayed and then the power is restored without changing the settings will be described using an example in which the winning-A1 condition device is selected during the AT and the push order navigation image "123" corresponding to the correct push order of "left, center, right" is displayed on the LCD. Note that the configuration regarding the display of the push order navigation image and the power outage described below can be appropriately combined and applied even when the timing of the power outage and the appearance of the push order navigation image are different (such as the push order navigation image "213" corresponding to the correct push order of "center, left, right"). It can also be appropriately combined and applied with the <Configuration regarding the display of the push order navigation image and specified errors> described below.

(1) When the power is turned off before the first stop operation First, when the start switch 12 is operated, the push order navigation image "123" is displayed on the LCD. Here, the push order navigation image "1" corresponds to the stop switch that should be operated first (first stop operation), so it is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the push order navigation images "2" and "3" are displayed in a normal manner. Also, since the stop switch corresponding to the left reel 8a should be operated as the first stop operation, the voice "Go left" is output from the speaker S. Note that the voice such as "Go left" that corresponds to the stop switch that should currently be operated is sometimes simply referred to as the navigation voice.

After that, before the first stop operation has been performed, a power outage occurs and all LCD displays cease (power is not applied). After that, at a timing (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "predetermined navigation timing") such as when drive voltage is supplied to the sub-control board after power is restored and the drawing process can be executed, or when drive voltage is supplied to the main control board and a command regarding the press order is sent to the sub-control board, the "123" press order navigation image is displayed again on the LCD. Note that the "1" press order navigation image is displayed in an emphasized mode, while the "2" and "3" press order navigation images are displayed in a normal mode. Furthermore, the navigation audio is not output again at this time. The navigation display sound may be configured not to be output again at this time, or it may be configured to be output.

In this way, if the power is turned off after the push sequence navigation image is displayed but before the first stop operation, and then the power is restored, the push sequence navigation image will return but the navigation audio will not. By not outputting the navigation audio when the power is restored, the processing on the sub-control board when the power is restored is reduced, and the push sequence navigation image can be displayed more quickly.

The navigation voice may also be configured to be output again when the power is restored. This configuration allows players to play without feeling any discomfort between before and after the power is restored.

Furthermore, if the game is configured to execute the aforementioned operation acceptance effect when the operation of the stop switch becomes valid, the game may also be configured to display the push order navigation image along with the stop acceptance effect when the power is restored after a power outage. By configuring the game in this way, it is possible to play without any sense of incongruity between before the power outage and after the power is restored.

In addition, when power is restored after a power outage, the push order navigation image can be configured to be displayed without the stop acceptance effect. This configuration reduces the processing time on the sub-control board when power is restored after a power outage, and allows the push order navigation image to be displayed more quickly.

In addition, when the push order navigation image is displayed again after power is restored, the push order navigation image corresponding to the first stop operation may be configured to display both the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image," while the other push order navigation images may be configured to display only the "navigation number image." This configuration reduces the processing load on the sub-control board when power is restored, allowing the push order navigation image to be displayed more quickly.

In addition, when the push order navigation images are displayed again after power recovery, both the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" can be displayed for all push order navigation images displayed when power is recovered. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to play without any sense of incongruity between before the power loss and after power recovery.

(2) When the first stop operation is performed correctly and then a power outage occurs before the second stop operation: First, when the start switch 12 is operated, the push order navigation image "123" is displayed on the LCD. Here, the push order navigation image "1" corresponds to the stop switch (first stop operation) that should be operated first, so it is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the push order navigation images "2" and "3" are displayed in a normal manner. In addition, a navigation voice "Turn left" corresponding to the first stop operation is output. Note that, since the push order navigation image "1" is displayed in an emphasized manner at this time, at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the push order navigation images "2" and "3" that are displayed in a normal manner.

After that, when the first stop operation is performed in the correct mode (i.e., the stop switch corresponding to the left reel 8a is operated), the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in the successful mode, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in an emphasized mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in the normal mode. In addition, the navigation voice "It's in the middle" corresponding to the second stop operation is output from speaker S. At this time, the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in the successful mode, and the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in an emphasized mode, so at least one of the "navigation number image" and "navigation background image" will be displayed larger than the push order navigation image for "3" which is displayed in the normal mode.

After that, before the second stop operation has been performed, a power outage occurs and all LCD displays cease (a state in which the power is not turned on). Then, at the specified navigation timing after the power is restored, the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in a successful mode, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in an emphasized mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in a normal mode. In other words, the same images are displayed after the stop is accepted if the push order for the first stop on the stop switch was the correct push order.

In addition, at this time, the system may be configured to output at least one of the navigation display sound, success sound, and navigation voice corresponding to the second stop operation again, or none of them may be output.

Also, at this time, just as before the power was cut off, the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in a successful mode, and the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in an highlighted mode, so at least one of the "navigation number image" and "navigation background image" will be displayed larger than the push order navigation image for "3" which is displayed in a normal mode. Also, at this time, the push order navigation image for the successful mode of "1" is configured to be displayed again when the power is restored after the power is cut off, even if it had been turned off because a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) had passed since its display began before the power was cut off. Note that when the push order navigation image for the successful mode of "1" is displayed again after the power is cut off, it may be configured to be turned off after a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) has passed since it was displayed again, or it may be configured to be turned off immediately even before the predetermined time has passed since it was displayed again.

In this way, if the first stop operation is performed in the correct mode and then a power outage occurs before the second stop operation, at the specified navigation timing after power is restored, the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in the successful mode, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in an highlighted mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in the normal mode. By configuring it in this way, even if power is restored during an AT, the operation mode of the stop switch before the power outage can be accurately displayed, preventing the player from making a mistake in the push order. Furthermore, because the push order navigation image for the successful mode is also displayed again, the player can be made to recognize that the operation mode of the stop switch before the power outage was the correct mode.

Furthermore, if the first stop operation is performed in the correct mode and then a power outage occurs before the second stop operation, at a predetermined navigation timing after the power is restored, the push order navigation image for "1" will not be displayed, the push order navigation image for "2" will be displayed in an emphasized mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" will be displayed in the normal mode.

This configuration allows players to concentrate on the stopping operations they currently need to perform.

(3) When the first stop operation is performed incorrectly and the power is subsequently turned off before the second stop operation: First, when the start switch 12 is operated, the push order navigation image "123" is displayed on the LCD. Here, the push order navigation image "1" corresponds to the stop switch (first stop operation) that should be operated first, so it is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the push order navigation images "2" and "3" are displayed in a normal manner. In addition, a navigation voice "Turn left" corresponding to the first stop operation is output. Note that, since the push order navigation image "1" is displayed in an emphasized manner at this time, at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the push order navigation images "2" and "3" that are displayed in a normal manner.

If the first stop operation is then performed in an incorrect manner (for example, the stop switch corresponding to center reel 8b is operated), all push order navigation images will be displayed in a failed manner, and after a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since they were displayed in the failed manner, the display of all push order navigation images will cease. Additionally, a voice message saying "What are you doing?" will be output from speaker S to indicate that the push order was incorrect.

After that, before the second stop operation has been performed, a power outage occurs and all LCD displays cease (a state in which the power is not turned on). After that, even when the drawing process can be executed after the power is restored, the button press sequence navigation image is not displayed. Furthermore, no failure sound is output at this time to indicate that the button presses were made incorrectly.

In this way, if the stop operation was performed in an incorrect manner before the power was cut off, the push order navigation image will not be displayed again after the power is restored, allowing the player to return to play without lowering their expectations (and without inadvertently raising their expectations).

Furthermore, as described above, if the stop switch is operated in the correct manner as the first stop operation and then a power outage occurs before the second stop operation, at a predetermined navigation timing after power is restored, the push order navigation image corresponding to the first stop operation is displayed in a successful manner, the push order navigation image corresponding to the second stop operation is displayed in an highlighted manner, and the push order navigation image corresponding to the third stop operation is displayed in a normal manner. On the other hand, if the stop switch is operated in an incorrect manner as the first stop operation and then a power outage occurs before the second stop operation, the push order navigation image is not displayed at a predetermined navigation timing after power is restored (referred to as navigation timing even if navigation is not actually performed).

This configuration allows the display after power is restored to be appropriate based on the game status before the power was lost, allowing the player to smoothly understand the game status. In particular, if the stop switch was operated in an incorrect mode before the power was lost, the player can return to play without lowering their expectations (and without inadvertently raising their expectations).

If the first stop operation is performed in an incorrect mode and then a power outage occurs before the second stop operation, all push order navigation images may be configured to be displayed again in a failed mode at a specified navigation timing after power is restored. Even in this case, no failure sound or navigation voice indicating that the push order was incorrect is output after power is restored. Furthermore, if the push order navigation image in a failed mode is displayed again after power is restored, it may be configured to cease displaying after a specified time (e.g., 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since it was displayed again, or it may be configured to cease displaying immediately even before the specified time has elapsed since it was displayed again.

When configured in this manner, if the stop switch is operated in the correct mode as the first stop operation and then a power outage occurs before the second stop operation, at the specified navigation timing after power is restored, the push order navigation image corresponding to the first stop operation will be displayed in the successful mode, the push order navigation image corresponding to the second stop operation will be displayed in the highlighted mode, and the push order navigation image corresponding to the third stop operation will be displayed in the normal mode. On the other hand, if the stop switch is operated in the incorrect mode as the first stop operation and then a power outage occurs before the second stop operation, all push order navigation images will be displayed in the failed mode at the specified navigation timing after power is restored.

This configuration allows players to smoothly understand the game situation. In particular, if the stop switch was operated in an incorrect mode before the power was cut off, even if it takes several minutes for the power to be restored after the power is cut off, the push order navigation image for the incorrect mode will be displayed after the power is restored. This prevents players from mistakenly believing that the gaming machine is malfunctioning because no payout or only one coin has been paid out despite the AT being in progress.

(4) When the first two stop operations are performed correctly and then the power is turned off before the third stop operation: First, when the start switch 12 is operated, the push order navigation image "123" is displayed on the LCD. Here, the push order navigation image "1" corresponds to the stop switch (first stop operation) that should be operated first, so it is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the push order navigation images "2" and "3" are displayed in a normal manner. In addition, a navigation voice saying "Turn left" corresponding to the first stop operation is output. Note that, because the push order navigation image "1" is displayed in an emphasized manner at this time, at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the push order navigation images "2" and "3" that are displayed in a normal manner.

After that, when the first stop operation is performed in the correct mode (i.e., the stop switch corresponding to the left reel 8a is operated), the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in the successful mode, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in an emphasized mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in the normal mode. In addition, the navigation voice "It's in the middle" corresponding to the second stop operation is output from speaker S. At this time, the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in the successful mode, and the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in an emphasized mode, so at least one of the "navigation number image" and "navigation background image" will be displayed larger than the push order navigation image for "3" which is displayed in the normal mode.

After that, when the second stop operation is performed in the correct mode (i.e., the stop switch corresponding to center reel 8b is operated), the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in a successful mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in an emphasized mode. In addition, the navigation voice "Go right" corresponding to the third stop is output from speaker S. At this time, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in a successful mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in an emphasized mode, so the "navigation number images" and "navigation background images" for both are displayed at approximately the same size.

After that, a power outage occurs while the third stop operation has not yet been performed, and all LCD displays cease (a state in which the power is not turned on). Then, at a predetermined navigation timing after the power is restored, the "1" push order navigation image is not displayed, the "2" push order navigation image is displayed in a successful mode, and the "3" push order navigation image is displayed in an emphasized mode. Note that at this time, at least one of the navigation display sound, success sound, and navigation voice corresponding to the third stop operation may be output again, or none may be output. Also, at this time, just as before the power was lost, the "2" push order navigation image is displayed in a successful mode, and the "3" push order navigation image is displayed in an emphasized mode, so the "navigation number images" and "navigation background images" for both are displayed at approximately the same size. Also, at this time, the push order navigation image for the "2" successful mode is configured to be displayed again when the power is restored, even if its display ceased due to a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) having elapsed since its display began before the power was lost. Furthermore, when the push order navigation image for the successful mode of "2" is displayed again after power is restored from a power outage, it may be configured to disappear after a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has passed since it was displayed again, or it may be configured to disappear immediately even before the predetermined time has passed since it was displayed again.

In this way, if the first and second stop operations are performed correctly and then a power outage occurs before the third stop operation, at the specified navigation timing after power is restored, the push order navigation image for "1" will not be displayed, the push order navigation image for "2" will be displayed in a successful manner, and the push order navigation image for "3" will be displayed in an highlighted manner.

By configuring it this way, even if the power is interrupted and restored during AT, the operation state of the stop switch before the power was interrupted can be accurately displayed, preventing players from making mistakes in the order in which they press buttons. In particular, since the press order navigation image corresponding to the first stop operation is not reproduced, players can focus on the third stop.

Furthermore, if the first and second stop operations are performed correctly and then a power outage occurs before the third stop operation, the push order navigation image for "1" may be displayed in a successful mode, the push order navigation image for "2" may be displayed in a successful mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" may be displayed in an emphasized mode at a predetermined navigation timing after the power is restored. Note that, even in this case, at least one of the navigation display sound, success sound, and navigation voice corresponding to the third stop operation may be output again, or none of them may be output. Furthermore, since the push order navigation images for "1" and "2" are displayed in a successful mode and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in an emphasized mode, the "navigation number image" and "navigation background image" are all displayed at approximately the same size. Furthermore, even if the push order navigation images for "1" and "2" in the successful mode had ceased display because a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) had elapsed since their display began before the power was lost, they are configured to be displayed again when the power is restored. Furthermore, when the push order navigation images for the successful modes of "1" and "2" are displayed again after power is restored from a power outage, they may be configured to cease display after a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since they were displayed again, or they may be configured to cease display immediately even before the predetermined time has elapsed since they were displayed again. In other words, before a power outage, the display mode of the push order navigation images for the successful modes of "1" and "2" would cease displaying at different times because each stop operation would switch the display mode, but after a power outage, the push order navigation images for the successful modes of "1" and "2" would cease displaying at the same time.

By configuring it in this way, even if power is interrupted and restored during AT, the operation state of the stop switch before the power was interrupted can be accurately displayed, preventing players from making mistakes in the press order. In particular, by displaying the press order navigation images corresponding to the first and second stops in a successful manner, it becomes clear that only the third stop remains and that the correct press order was followed.

Furthermore, if the first and second stop operations are performed correctly and then a power outage occurs before the third stop operation, at a predetermined navigation timing after the power is restored, the push order navigation image for "1" will not be displayed, the push order navigation image for "2" will not be displayed, and the push order navigation image for "3" will be displayed in an emphasized manner. Note that even in this case, the navigation display sound, success sound, and/or navigation voice corresponding to the third stop operation may be configured to be output again, or none of them may be output.

This configuration allows players to concentrate on the stopping operations they currently need to perform.

(5) When the first stop operation is performed correctly, the second stop operation is performed incorrectly, and then the power is turned off before the third stop operation: First, when the start switch 12 is operated, the push order navigation image "123" is displayed on the LCD. Here, the push order navigation image "1" corresponds to the stop switch that should be operated first (first stop operation), so it is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the push order navigation images "2" and "3" are displayed in a normal manner. In addition, a navigation voice "Turn left" corresponding to the first stop operation is output. Note that, because the push order navigation image "1" is displayed in an emphasized manner at this time, at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the push order navigation images "2" and "3" that are displayed in a normal manner.

After that, when the first stop operation is performed in the correct mode (i.e., the stop switch corresponding to the left reel 8a is operated), the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in the successful mode, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in an emphasized mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in the normal mode. In addition, the navigation voice "It's in the middle" corresponding to the second stop operation is output from speaker S. At this time, the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in the successful mode, and the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in an emphasized mode, so at least one of the "navigation number image" and "navigation background image" will be displayed larger than the push order navigation image for "3" which is displayed in the normal mode.

If the second stop operation is then performed in an incorrect manner (for example, the stop switch corresponding to right reel 8c is operated), the push order navigation images for "2" and "3" are displayed in a failed manner, and after a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since they were displayed in the failed manner, the display of the push order navigation images for "2" and "3" ceases. Additionally, a voice message saying "What are you doing?" is output from speaker S to indicate that the push order was incorrect.

After that, before the third stop operation has been performed, a power outage occurs and all LCD displays cease (a state in which the power is not turned on). Even when the specified navigation timing arrives after the power is restored, the button press sequence navigation image will not be displayed. Furthermore, no sound indicating that the button presses were incorrect will be output.

In this way, if the stop operation was performed in an incorrect manner before the power was cut off, the push order navigation image will not be displayed again when the power is restored, allowing the player to return to play without lowering their expectations (and without inadvertently raising their expectations).

Furthermore, if the first stop operation is performed correctly, then the second stop operation is performed incorrectly, and then a power outage occurs before the third stop operation, the push order navigation image for "1" may be displayed in a successful mode at a predetermined navigation timing after power is restored, and the push order navigation images for "2" and "3" may be displayed in a failed mode. Also, in this case, no failure sound is output after power is restored to indicate that the push order was incorrect. Note that if the push order navigation image in a failed mode is displayed again after power is restored, it may be configured to cease displaying after a predetermined time (e.g., 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since it was displayed again, or it may be configured to cease displaying immediately even before the predetermined time has elapsed since it was displayed again.

This configuration allows players to easily understand the game situation. In particular, by re-displaying the push order navigation image corresponding to the stop operation in the correct mode, players can understand which stop operation they performed incorrectly.

Also, if the first stop operation is performed in the correct mode, then the second stop operation is performed in the incorrect mode, and then a power outage occurs before the third stop operation, all push order navigation images may be configured to be displayed in the failed mode at a predetermined navigation timing after power is restored. Also, in this case, no failure sound indicating that the push order was incorrect is output after power is restored. Note that if the failed mode push order navigation image is displayed again after power is restored, it may be configured to cease displaying after a predetermined time (e.g., 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since it was redisplayed, or it may be configured to cease displaying immediately even before the predetermined time has elapsed since it was redisplayed. By configuring it in this way, even if it takes several minutes from the power outage to power restoration, the failed mode push order navigation image will be displayed after power is restored, preventing a player from mistaking a gaming machine malfunction for no payout or a small payout (e.g., one coin) despite the AT being in progress.

(6) When the first and second stop operations are performed correctly, the power is turned off before the third stop operation, the third stop operation is performed after the power is restored, and then the power is turned off again: First, when the start switch 12 is operated, the push order navigation image "123" is displayed on the LCD. Here, the push order navigation image "1" corresponds to the stop switch that should be operated first (first stop operation), so it is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the push order navigation images "2" and "3" are displayed in a normal manner. In addition, a navigation voice "Turn left" corresponding to the first stop operation is output. Note that, because the push order navigation image "1" is displayed in an emphasized manner, at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the push order navigation images "2" and "3" that are displayed in a normal manner.

After that, when the first stop operation is performed in the correct mode (i.e., the stop switch corresponding to the left reel 8a is operated), the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in the successful mode, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in an emphasized mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in the normal mode. In addition, the navigation voice "It's in the middle" corresponding to the second stop operation is output from speaker S. At this time, the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in the successful mode, and the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in an emphasized mode, so at least one of the "navigation number image" and "navigation background image" will be displayed larger than the push order navigation image for "3" which is displayed in the normal mode.

After that, when the second stop operation is performed in the correct mode (i.e., the stop switch corresponding to center reel 8b is operated), the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in a successful mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in an emphasized mode. In addition, the navigation voice "Go right" corresponding to the third stop is output from speaker S. At this time, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in a successful mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in an emphasized mode, so the "navigation number images" and "navigation background images" for both are displayed at approximately the same size.

After that, before the third stop operation has been performed, a power outage occurs and all LCD displays cease (a state in which the power is not turned on). Then, at a predetermined navigation timing after the power is restored, the push order navigation image for "1" is not displayed or is displayed in a successful state, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in a successful state, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in an emphasized state. At this time, at least one of the navigation display sound, success sound, and navigation voice corresponding to the third stop operation may be output again, or none of them may be output. When the push order navigation image for the successful state of "2" (or the push order navigation images for the successful states of "1" and "2" if the push order navigation for the successful state of "1" is also configured to be displayed) is displayed again after the power is restored, it may be configured to cease displaying a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) after it was displayed again, or it may be configured to cease displaying immediately, even before the predetermined time has elapsed since it was displayed again.

Then, the display of the push order navigation image for the successful mode of "2" is terminated (if the push order navigation for the successful mode of "1" is also configured to be displayed, the display of the push order navigation image for the successful mode of "1" is also terminated), and while the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in an emphasized mode, if the third stop operation is performed in the correct mode, the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in the successful mode. Also, at this time, a specified image (sometimes referred to as a GET image) is configured to be displayed indicating that all stop operations have been performed in the correct mode.

After that, if the stop operation is performed up to the third stop, the power will be cut off again and all LCD displays will cease. Even after the power is restored, the push order navigation image and GET image will not be displayed. Furthermore, at this time, the navigation display sound, success sound, and navigation voice corresponding to the third stop operation will not be output.

This configuration allows the player to smoothly understand the game situation. In particular, since no new stop operations are required after the third stop, by not reproducing the push order navigation image, the player can effectively understand that no new stop operations are required.

Furthermore, if the operation is performed correctly up to the third stop operation and then a power outage occurs again, the push order navigation images for "1" through "3" may be configured to be displayed again in the correct mode at a predetermined navigation timing after the power is restored. At this time, at least one of the navigation display sound, success sound, and navigation voice corresponding to the third stop operation may be output again, or none of them may be output.

This configuration makes it clear that all stop operations were performed correctly.

If the second power outage occurs before the payout process is executed, the push order navigation image for "1" will not be displayed or will be displayed in a successful manner at the specified navigation timing after power is restored, the push order navigation image for "2" will be displayed in a successful manner, and the push order navigation image for "3" will be displayed in an highlighted manner. If the second power outage occurs after the payout process is executed, the push order navigation image will not be displayed at the specified navigation timing after power is restored. In other words, the display content after power is restored may be configured to differ depending on whether the situation before the power outage was before or after the payout process was executed.

<Explanation about rare role navigation images>
Furthermore, in this embodiment, in a game in which a so-called rare role, such as a cherry role or a watermelon role, is won, a navigation image (sometimes referred to as a rare role navigation image) indicating the possibility of winning the rare role is configured to display "!!!". The navigation background image of the rare role navigation image and the navigation background image of the push order navigation image are displayed in the same or substantially the same manner. That is, the push order navigation image and the rare role navigation image are configured to be similar images, although the "numbers" and "!" are different. Furthermore, the rare role navigation image may be configured to be displayed only when any rare role is won, or may be configured to be displayed even in a game in which the result of the internal lottery is a loss or a replay, as an effect suggesting the possibility of the predetermined benefit being awarded when it has been determined that a predetermined benefit (e.g., first win of the AT, addition of the AT, transition to a chance zone, etc.) will be awarded.

In addition, since there is no advantage or disadvantage to the rare role navigation image depending on the button press order, it is designed to always be displayed at the same size during a single game (the size does not differ between the normal and highlighted modes, as is the case with button press order navigation images).

In addition, during play when the rare role navigation image is displayed, a power outage occurs at any time before the third stop operation is performed (when the start switch 12 is operated, when the first stop operation is performed, when the second stop operation is performed, when the third stop operation is performed, etc.), and all LCD displays cease (a state in which power is not turned on). The rare role navigation image is then configured to be displayed again at a specified navigation timing after power is restored. Note that regardless of when the power outage occurs, the rare role navigation image that is displayed again when power is restored will be displayed in the same display format as after the start switch 12 is operated, such as "!!!".

This configuration allows players to easily understand the game situation. In particular, it helps maintain a sense of anticipation that they may have won a rare combination. It also prevents players from missing out on a rare combination.

Furthermore, in a game in which a rare role navigation image is displayed, if a power outage occurs at any time before the third stop operation is performed (when the start switch 12 is operated, when the first stop operation is performed, when the second stop operation is performed, when the third stop operation is performed, etc.), the rare role navigation image may be configured not to be displayed again after power is restored.

By configuring it in this way, players can avoid confusing the push order navigation image with the rare role navigation image.

The rare role navigation images may be configured to cease displaying one by one in response to a stop operation, or may be configured to display all rare role navigation images at the timing when the first stop operation is performed. Furthermore, when the display of rare role navigation images is configured to cease displaying one by one for each stop operation, the display may be configured to cease displaying the rare role navigation image on the left, the rare role navigation image in the middle, and the rare role navigation image on the right in response to the initial stop operation in that order, regardless of which stop switch 13 was operated, or the display of the rare role navigation image at the position corresponding to the stop switch 13 that was operated in response to the initial stop operation may be configured to cease displaying the rare role navigation image in response to the initial stop operation.

<Configuration regarding display of push order navigation image and errors>
Next, regarding the display of the push order navigation image after a predetermined error (such as a medal retention error, medal backflow error, or hopper empty error) occurs during the display of the push order navigation image and the predetermined error is subsequently cleared, an example will be described in which the winning-A1 condition device is selected during the AT, the push order navigation image "123" corresponding to the correct push order of "left, center, right" is displayed on the LCD, and a hopper empty error occurs as a predetermined error. Note that the configurations regarding the display of the push order navigation image and the predetermined error described below can be applied in appropriate combinations even when the timing of the occurrence of the predetermined error or the appearance of the push order navigation image are different. Furthermore, they can be applied in appropriate combinations with the above-mentioned <Configurations regarding the display of the push order navigation image and power cut>.

(1) When the first stop operation is performed correctly and a predetermined error occurs before the second stop operation: First, as shown in FIG. 35, when the start switch 12 is operated, the push order navigation image "123" is displayed on the LCD. Here, the push order navigation image "1" corresponds to the stop switch (first stop operation) that should be operated first, so it is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the push order navigation images "2" and "3" are displayed in a normal manner. In addition, a navigation voice "Turn left" corresponding to the first stop operation is output. Note that, since the push order navigation image "1" is displayed in an emphasized manner at this time, at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the push order navigation images "2" and "3" that are displayed in a normal manner.

After that, when the first stop operation is performed in the correct mode (i.e., the stop switch corresponding to the left reel 8a is operated), the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in the successful mode, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in an emphasized mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in the normal mode. In addition, the navigation voice "It's in the middle" corresponding to the second stop operation is output from speaker S. At this time, the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in the successful mode, and the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in an emphasized mode, so at least one of the "navigation number image" and "navigation background image" will be displayed larger than the push order navigation image for "3" which is displayed in the normal mode.

After that, if the second stop operation has not yet been performed, a hopper empty error occurs, the push order navigation image becomes invisible (this can be made invisible by ending the display, or by displaying an image related to the error on the front of the LCD screen), and an image related to the hopper empty error is displayed.

After that, at a specified navigation timing after the hopper empty error is cleared, the display of the image related to the hopper empty error ends, and the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in a successful mode, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in an emphasized mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in a normal mode. At this time, at least one of the navigation display sound, success sound, and navigation voice corresponding to the second stop operation may be configured to be output again, or none of them may be output. Also, at this time, just as before the hopper empty error occurred, the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in a successful mode, and the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in an emphasized mode, so at least one of the "navigation number image" and "navigation background image" will be displayed larger than the push order navigation image for "3" which is displayed in a normal mode. Also, at this time, the push order navigation image for "1" in a successful mode is configured to be displayed again when power is restored after a power outage, even if it had ceased display because a specified time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) had elapsed since its display began before the hopper empty error occurred.

Then, the push order navigation image for the successful "1" mode may be configured to disappear after a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since it was last displayed, or it may be configured to disappear immediately even before the predetermined time has elapsed since it was last displayed.

In this way, if the first stop operation is performed in the correct mode and then a specified error occurs before the second stop operation, at the specified navigation timing after the specified error is cleared, the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in the successful mode, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in an highlighted mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in the normal mode. By configuring it in this way, even if a specified error occurs during AT, the operation mode of the stop switch before the specified error occurred can be accurately displayed, preventing the player from making a mistake in the push order. Furthermore, because the push order navigation image for the successful mode is also displayed again, the player can be made to recognize that the operation mode of the stop switch before the specified error occurred was the correct mode.

Also, if the first stop operation is performed correctly and then a hopper empty error occurs before the second stop operation, the display of the image related to the hopper empty error may be terminated at a predetermined navigation timing after the hopper empty error is cleared, the push order navigation image for "1" is not displayed, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in an highlighted manner, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in a normal manner.

This configuration allows players to concentrate on the stopping operation they currently need to perform.

The display mode of the "navigation number image" and "navigation background image" of the push order navigation image shown in Figure 35 and the "navigation number image" and "navigation background image" of the push order navigation image shown in Figures 33 and 34 are configured to have different designs (picture, number font, color, etc.). In this way, the design of the push order navigation image may be configured to be changed appropriately depending on the game situation. For example, when the expectation level for adding to the AT is in a normal state, the push order navigation image may be displayed with the design shown in Figures 33 and 34, and when it is in a high probability state, the push order navigation may be displayed with the design shown in Figure 35. In addition, it may be possible to select a presentation mode related to the presentation tendency during the AT, and when a predetermined presentation mode is set, the push order navigation image may be displayed with the design shown in Figures 33 and 34, and when a specific presentation mode is set, the push order navigation may be displayed with the design shown in Figure 35.

By configuring it in this way, players can visually grasp the current game situation through the design of the push order navigation image.

(2) When the first two stop operations are performed correctly, and then a predetermined error occurs before the third stop operation: First, when the start switch 12 is operated, the push order navigation image "123" is displayed on the LCD. Here, the push order navigation image "1" corresponds to the stop switch (first stop operation) that should be operated first, so it is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the push order navigation images "2" and "3" are displayed in a normal manner. In addition, a navigation voice "Turn left" corresponding to the first stop operation is output. Note that, since the push order navigation image "1" is displayed in an emphasized manner at this time, at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the push order navigation images "2" and "3" that are displayed in a normal manner.

After that, when the first stop operation is performed in the correct mode (i.e., the stop switch corresponding to the left reel 8a is operated), the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in the successful mode, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in an emphasized mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in the normal mode. In addition, the navigation voice "It's in the middle" corresponding to the second stop operation is output from speaker S. At this time, the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in the successful mode, and the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in an emphasized mode, so at least one of the "navigation number image" and "navigation background image" will be displayed larger than the push order navigation image for "3" which is displayed in the normal mode.

After that, when the second stop operation is performed in the correct mode (i.e., the stop switch corresponding to center reel 8b is operated), the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in a successful mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in an emphasized mode. In addition, the navigation voice "Go right" corresponding to the third stop is output from speaker S. At this time, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in a successful mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in an emphasized mode, so the "navigation number images" and "navigation background images" for both are displayed at approximately the same size.

After that, before the third stop operation has been performed, a hopper empty error occurs, and the push order navigation image becomes invisible (this can be made invisible by terminating the display, or by displaying an image related to the error on the front of the LCD screen), and an image related to the hopper empty error is displayed. Then, at a predetermined navigation timing after the hopper empty error is cleared, the display of the image related to the hopper empty error ends, the push order navigation image for "1" is not displayed, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in a successful state, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in an emphasized state. At this time, at least one of the navigation display sound, success sound, and navigation voice corresponding to the third stop operation may be output again, or none may be output. At this time, just as before the hopper empty error occurred, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in a successful state, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in an emphasized state, so the "navigation number images" and "navigation background images" for both are displayed at approximately the same size. Furthermore, at this time, the push order navigation image for the successful mode of "2" is configured to be displayed again when the power is restored, even if it had ceased display because a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) had elapsed since its display began before the power was cut off.

Then, the push order navigation image for the successful "2" mode may be configured to disappear after a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since it was last displayed, or it may be configured to disappear immediately even before the predetermined time has elapsed since it was last displayed.

In this way, if the first and second stop operations are performed correctly and then a specified error occurs before the third stop operation, at the specified navigation timing after the specified error is cleared, the push order navigation image for "1" will not be displayed, the push order navigation image for "2" will be displayed in a successful mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" will be displayed in an emphasized mode. By configuring it in this way, even if a specified error occurs during AT, the operation mode of the stop switch before the specified error occurred can be accurately displayed, preventing the player from making a push order mistake. In particular, because the push order navigation image corresponding to the first stop operation is not reproduced, the player can focus on the third stop.

Furthermore, if the first stop operation and the second stop operation are performed in the correct mode, and then a hopper empty error occurs before the third stop operation, the display of the image related to the hopper empty error may be terminated at a predetermined navigation timing after the hopper empty error is cleared, and the push order navigation image for "1" may be displayed in a successful mode, the push order navigation image for "2" may be displayed in a successful mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" may be displayed in an highlighted mode.

In this case, the system may be configured to output at least one of the navigation display sound, success sound, and navigation voice corresponding to the third stop operation again, or none of them may be output.

In addition, at this time, the push order navigation images for "1" and "2" are displayed in a successful mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in an highlighted mode, so the "navigation number images" and "navigation background images" are all displayed at approximately the same size. In addition, even if the push order navigation images for the successful modes of "1" and "2" have ceased display because a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since their display began before the hopper empty error occurred, they are configured to be displayed again when the hopper empty error is cleared. Note that the push order navigation images for the successful modes of "1" and "2" may be configured to cease display after a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since their re-display, or they may be configured to cease display immediately even before the predetermined time has elapsed since their re-display. In other words, before the hopper empty error occurs, the display mode of the push order navigation image changes with each stop operation, so the push order navigation images for the successful modes of "1" and "2" cease to display at different times, but after the hopper empty error is cleared, the push order navigation images for the successful modes of "1" and "2" cease to display at the same time.

By configuring it in this way, even if a specified error occurs during AT, the operation mode of the stop switch before the specified error occurred can be accurately displayed, preventing the player from pressing the wrong button in the wrong order. In particular, by displaying the push order navigation images corresponding to the first and second stops in a successful mode, it becomes clear that only the third stop remains and that the correct button press order has been followed.

Furthermore, if the first stop operation and the second stop operation are performed correctly and then a hopper empty error occurs before the third stop operation, the display of the image related to the hopper empty error may be terminated at a predetermined navigation timing after the hopper empty error is released, the push order navigation image for "1" is not displayed, the push order navigation image for "2" is not displayed, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in the normal mode. Note that even in this case, at least one of the navigation display sound, success sound, and navigation voice corresponding to the third stop operation may be output again, or none of them may be output.
By configuring it in this way, the player can concentrate on the stopping operation that he or she should currently perform.

(3) When the first three stop operations are performed correctly and a predetermined error occurs afterwards: First, when the start switch 12 is operated, the push order navigation image "123" is displayed on the LCD. Here, the push order navigation image "1" corresponds to the stop switch (first stop operation) that should be operated first, so it is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the push order navigation images "2" and "3" are displayed in a normal manner. In addition, a navigation voice "Go left" corresponding to the first stop operation is output. Note that, since the push order navigation image "1" is displayed in an emphasized manner at this time, at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the push order navigation images "2" and "3" that are displayed in a normal manner.

After that, when the first stop operation is performed in the correct mode (i.e., the stop switch corresponding to the left reel 8a is operated), the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in the successful mode, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in an emphasized mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in the normal mode. In addition, the navigation voice "It's in the middle" corresponding to the second stop operation is output from speaker S. At this time, the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in the successful mode, and the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in an emphasized mode, so at least one of the "navigation number image" and "navigation background image" will be displayed larger than the push order navigation image for "3" which is displayed in the normal mode.

After that, when the second stop operation is performed in the correct mode (i.e., the stop switch corresponding to center reel 8b is operated), the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in a successful mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in an emphasized mode. In addition, the navigation voice "Go right" corresponding to the third stop is output from speaker S. At this time, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in a successful mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in an emphasized mode, so the "navigation number images" and "navigation background images" for both are displayed at approximately the same size.

After that, when the third stop operation is performed (i.e., the stop switch corresponding to the right reel 8c, which was the final stop operation, is operated), the push order navigation image "3" is displayed in a successful mode. Also, since all stop operations have now been performed in the correct mode, the GET image is displayed.

After that, a hopper empty error occurs and an image related to the hopper empty error is displayed. Then, at a specified navigation timing after the hopper empty error is cleared, the display of the image related to the hopper empty error ends, and the push order navigation image for "1," "2," and "3" is displayed again in a successful mode. At this time, at least one of the navigation display sound, success sound, and navigation voice corresponding to the third stop operation may be output again, or none of them may be output. At this time, the push order navigation images for the successful mode of "1," "2," and "3" are configured to be displayed again after the hopper empty error is cleared, even if their display had ended because a specified time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) had elapsed since their respective display began before the hopper empty error occurred. At this time, the GET image may be displayed again, or it may not be displayed.

Then, the push order navigation image for the successful modes of "1," "2," and "3" may be configured to disappear after a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since it was last displayed, or it may be configured to disappear immediately even before the predetermined time has elapsed since it was last displayed.

This configuration allows players to easily understand the game situation. In particular, after a specified error is resolved, all push order navigation images are reproduced in a successful manner, making it clear that all stop operations were performed in the correct manner.

Furthermore, if the third stop operation (final stop operation) is performed correctly and a hopper empty error occurs afterwards, the display of the image related to the hopper empty error may be terminated at a predetermined navigation timing after the hopper empty error is cleared, the push order navigation images for "1" and "2" may not be displayed, and the push order navigation image for "3" may be displayed in a successful mode. Note that, even in this case, at least one of the navigation display sound, the success sound, and the navigation voice corresponding to the third stop operation may be output again, or none of them may be output. Furthermore, even if the push order navigation image for the successful mode of "3" had been terminated because a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) had elapsed since its display began before the hopper empty error occurred, it may be configured to be displayed again after the hopper empty error is cleared, and the display may be terminated after a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) had elapsed since its re-display, or it may be configured to be terminated immediately even before the predetermined time had elapsed since its re-display.
By configuring in this manner, it is possible to clearly show that the third stop operation was performed as the stop operation immediately before the occurrence of the specified error, and that the third stop operation was performed in the correct manner.

Furthermore, if the operation is performed correctly up to the third stop operation (final stop operation) and then a hopper empty error occurs, the display of the image relating to the hopper empty error may be terminated at a predetermined navigation timing after the hopper empty error is cleared, and none of the push order navigation images "1" to "3" may be displayed. Note that even in this case, at least one of the navigation display sound, success sound, and navigation voice corresponding to the third stop operation may be output again, or none of them may be output.
By configuring it in this way, the player can recognize that he has already completed the final stop operation.

In addition, if the specified error occurs before the payout process is executed, the push order navigation images "1" to "3" may be configured to be displayed in a successful manner at a specified navigation timing after the specified error is cleared, and if the specified error occurs after the payout process is executed, none of the push order navigation images "1" to "3" may be displayed at a specified navigation timing after the specified error is cleared. In other words, the display content after the specified error is cleared may be configured to differ depending on whether the situation before the specified error occurred was before or after the payout process was executed.

(4) When the first stop operation is performed incorrectly and a predetermined error occurs before the second stop operation: First, when the start switch 12 is operated, the push order navigation image "123" is displayed on the LCD. Here, the push order navigation image "1" corresponds to the stop switch (first stop operation) that should be operated first, so it is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the push order navigation images "2" and "3" are displayed in a normal manner. In addition, a navigation voice "Turn left" corresponding to the first stop operation is output. Note that, since the push order navigation image "1" is displayed in an emphasized manner at this time, at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the push order navigation images "2" and "3" that are displayed in a normal manner.

If the first stop operation is then performed in an incorrect manner (for example, the stop switch corresponding to center reel 8b is operated), all push order navigation images will be displayed in a failed manner, and after a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since they were displayed in the failed manner, the display of all push order navigation images will cease. Additionally, a voice message saying "What are you doing?" will be output from speaker S to indicate that the push order was incorrect.

After that, before the second stop operation has been performed, a hopper empty error occurs and an image related to the hopper empty error is displayed. Then, at a specified navigation timing after the hopper empty error is cleared, the display of the image related to the hopper empty error ends, and all push order navigation images are displayed in a failed state. At this time, no failure sound is output to indicate that the push order was incorrect. When the failed push order navigation image is displayed again after power is restored, it may be configured to end its display after a specified time (e.g., 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since it was displayed again, or it may be configured to end its display immediately even before the specified time has elapsed since it was displayed again.

In this way, if the stop operation was performed in an incorrect mode before the hopper empty error occurred, the push order navigation image will be displayed again in a failed mode after the hopper empty error is cleared, allowing the player to smoothly understand the game situation. In particular, even if it takes several minutes from the occurrence of the hopper empty error to the clearing of the hopper empty error, the push order navigation image in a failed mode will be displayed after the hopper empty error is cleared, preventing the player from mistakenly believing that the gaming machine is malfunctioning because no payout or only a small payout (such as one coin) has been made despite the AT being in progress.

Also, at a specified navigation timing after the hopper empty error is cleared, the display of images related to the hopper empty error may be terminated, and all push order navigation images may not be displayed. In this way, by not displaying the push order navigation image for a failed mode again after the hopper empty error is cleared, the player can return to play without losing their sense of anticipation.

(5) When the first stop operation is performed correctly, the second stop operation is performed incorrectly, and then a predetermined error occurs before the third stop operation: First, when the start switch 12 is operated, the push order navigation image "123" is displayed on the LCD. Here, the push order navigation image "1" corresponds to the stop switch that should be operated first (first stop operation), so it is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the push order navigation images "2" and "3" are displayed in a normal manner. In addition, a navigation voice "Turn left" corresponding to the first stop operation is output. Note that, since the push order navigation image "1" is displayed in an emphasized manner at this time, at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the push order navigation images "2" and "3" that are displayed in a normal manner.

After that, when the first stop operation is performed in the correct mode (i.e., the stop switch corresponding to the left reel 8a is operated), the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in the successful mode, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in an emphasized mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in the normal mode. In addition, the navigation voice "It's in the middle" corresponding to the second stop operation is output from speaker S. At this time, the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in the successful mode, and the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in an emphasized mode, so at least one of the "navigation number image" and "navigation background image" will be displayed larger than the push order navigation image for "3" which is displayed in the normal mode.

If the second stop operation is then performed in an incorrect manner (for example, the stop switch corresponding to right reel 8c is operated), the push order navigation images for "2" and "3" will be displayed in a failed manner, and after a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since they were displayed in the failed manner, the display of all push order navigation images will cease. Additionally, a voice message saying "What are you doing?" will be output from speaker S, indicating that the push order was incorrect.

After that, before the third stop operation has been performed, a hopper empty error occurs and an image related to the hopper empty error is displayed. Then, at a specified navigation timing after the hopper empty error is cleared, the display of the image related to the hopper empty error ends, and all push order navigation images are displayed in a failed state. At this time, no failure sound is output to indicate that the push order was incorrect. When the failed push order navigation image is displayed again after power is restored, it may be configured to end its display after a specified time (e.g., 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since it was displayed again, or it may be configured to end its display immediately even before the specified time has elapsed since it was displayed again.

In this way, if the stop operation was performed in an incorrect mode before the hopper empty error occurred, the push order navigation image will be displayed again in a failed mode after the hopper empty error is cleared, allowing the player to smoothly understand the game situation. In particular, even if it takes several minutes from the occurrence of the hopper empty error to the clearing of the hopper empty error, the push order navigation image in a failed mode will be displayed after the hopper empty error is cleared, preventing the player from mistakenly believing that the gaming machine is malfunctioning because no payout or only a small payout (such as one coin) has been made despite the AT being in progress.

Also, at a specified navigation timing after the hopper empty error is cleared, the display of the image related to the hopper empty error may be terminated, and the push order navigation image for "1" may be displayed in a successful manner, while the push order navigation images for "2" and "3" may be displayed in a failed manner. This configuration allows the player to smoothly understand the game situation. In particular, it makes it clear which stop operation resulted in a push order error.

Also, at a specified navigation timing after the hopper empty error is cleared, the display of the image related to the hopper empty error may be terminated, and the push order navigation images for "2" and "3" may be displayed in a failed state. This configuration allows the player to smoothly understand the game situation. In particular, it makes it clear which stop operation resulted in a push order error.

Also, at a specified navigation timing after the hopper empty error is cleared, the display of images related to the hopper empty error may be terminated, and all push order navigation images may not be displayed. In this way, by not displaying the push order navigation image for a failed mode again after the hopper empty error is cleared, the player can return to play without losing their sense of anticipation.

(6) When the first or second stop operation is performed incorrectly and a predetermined error occurs after the third stop operation: First, when the start switch 12 is operated, the push order navigation image "123" is displayed on the LCD. Here, the push order navigation image "1" corresponds to the stop switch (first stop operation) that should be operated first, so it is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the push order navigation images "2" and "3" are displayed in a normal manner. In addition, a navigation voice "Turn left" corresponding to the first stop operation is output. Note that, since the push order navigation image "1" is displayed in an emphasized manner at this time, at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the push order navigation images "2" and "3" that are displayed in a normal manner.

If the first or second stop operation is then performed in an incorrect manner, the push order navigation image that is displayed at the time the push order is incorrectly entered will be displayed in a failed manner, and once a predetermined time (e.g., 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the image was displayed in the failed manner, the display of the push order navigation image will cease. Additionally, a voice message saying "What are you doing?" will be output from speaker S to indicate that the push order has been incorrect.

Then, after the third stop operation is performed, a hopper empty error occurs and an image related to the hopper empty error is displayed. Then, at a specified navigation timing after the hopper empty error is cleared, the display of the image related to the hopper empty error ends, and all push order navigation images are displayed in a failed state. At this time, no failure sound is output to indicate that the push order was incorrect. When the failed push order navigation image is displayed again after power is restored, it may be configured to end its display after a specified time (e.g., 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since it was displayed again, or it may be configured to end its display immediately even before the specified time has elapsed since it was displayed again.

In this way, if the stop operation was performed in an incorrect mode before the hopper empty error occurred, the push order navigation image will be displayed again in a failed mode after the hopper empty error is cleared, allowing the player to smoothly understand the game situation. In particular, even if it takes several minutes from the occurrence of the hopper empty error to the clearing of the hopper empty error, the push order navigation image in a failed mode will be displayed after the hopper empty error is cleared, preventing the player from mistakenly believing that the gaming machine is malfunctioning because no payout or only a small payout (such as one coin) has been made despite the AT being in progress.

Also, at a specified navigation timing after the hopper empty error is cleared, the display of images related to the hopper empty error may be terminated, and all push order navigation images may not be displayed. In this way, by not displaying the push order navigation image for a failed mode again after the hopper empty error is cleared, the player can return to play without losing their sense of anticipation.

<Configuration of push order navigation image display and reel stop warning image>
Furthermore, in a game in which the push order bell is selected as a result of an internal lottery and a push order navigation image is displayed, if a predetermined time (3 minutes) passes without a stop operation being performed after the reels start spinning (or the first or second stop operation), the aforementioned reel stop warning image (also referred to as a stop prompt image) is displayed. Then, in a situation in which the reel stop warning image and the push order navigation image are displayed simultaneously, if a power outage occurs, the push order navigation image is displayed again at a predetermined navigation timing after the power is restored, but the reel stop warning image is not displayed again. This configuration allows the player to concentrate on the push order navigation image even in the unlikely event of a power outage during play, preventing mistakes in the push order. The aforementioned configuration for displaying the push order navigation image and power outage can be applied as appropriate to the display mode of the push order navigation image at this time.

<Description of Errors Related to the Hopper 44 and Winning Lamp Effects Applicable to the Present Embodiment>
Next, the relationship between errors related to the hopper 44 and winning effects applicable to this embodiment will be described.

The effects applicable to this embodiment described below aim to allow the player to properly recognize that they have won by executing winning lamp effects based on winning small roles such as push order roles, or winning lamp effects based on winning replay roles such as replay roles.
Another object of the present invention is to allow the player to recognize the result of the game before a hopper empty error occurs after winning a prize.

The following describes the configuration related to hopper 44 errors and winning lamp effects that are applicable to this embodiment.

<Award winning LED lamp>
This is a part (not shown) of the effect lamps (LED lamps) provided on the front panel PS2, and is a lamp that lights up, flashes, etc. when a prize is won. It is also a lamp that lights up, flashes, etc. when an error such as a door open error or a hopper empty error occurs.

<Main Control Means>
The main processing of the main control means is as described in this embodiment, the explanation of the winning effects, settlement effects and deposit effects applicable to this embodiment, and the errors and winning effects related to the hopper 44 applicable to this embodiment, but details of the processing omitted in the description of this embodiment will be explained below.

<Push order role>
This is a role that can be won in the role lottery (internal lottery), and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning push order role is displayed frozen on the active line. When the winning determination process determines that a prize has been won, medals are paid out based on the symbol combination that is frozen. The symbol combinations that can be frozen for the push order role include correct symbol combinations that are displayed frozen when the correct push order is followed, and incorrect symbol combinations that are displayed frozen when the correct push order is not followed. A correct symbol combination is a symbol combination that displays a mainly yellow bell symbol, such as bell-bell-bell, frozen on the active line, and 12 coins are paid out. An incorrect symbol combination is a symbol combination that displays a blank-replay-watermelon or other symbol combination frozen on the active line, and 1 coin is paid out.

<Role of Cherry>
This is a winning combination that can be won in the winning combination lottery (internal lottery), and when the symbol combination corresponding to the winning cherry combination is stopped and displayed on the active line, and it is determined that a win has been made by the winning determination process, medals are paid out based on the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed. The symbol combination corresponding to the cherry combination is a symbol combination that displays cherry symbols, mainly composed of red, such as cherry-cherry-cherry, on the active line, and one medal is paid out.

<Replay role>
This is a winning combination that can be won in the winning combination lottery (internal lottery), and when the symbol combination corresponding to the winning replay symbol is stopped and displayed on the active line, and when it is determined to be a winning combination by the winning determination process, a replay is awarded based on the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed. The symbol combination corresponding to the replay symbol is a symbol combination that displays replay symbols, mainly composed of blue, such as replay-replay-replay, on the active line.

<Winning process (payout process)>
The winning process is a process of paying out predetermined game medals according to the winning minor combination (the symbol combination that has stopped and been displayed) when the winning determination process determines that a minor combination has been won. Here, paying out game medals means adding credits if the accumulated credits have not reached the upper limit, or paying out game medals from the hopper 44 if the accumulated credits have reached the upper limit. The main control means transmits a payout start command to the sub-control means when starting a payout based on a win (whether by adding credits or by paying out from the hopper 44), and transmits a payout end command to the sub-control means when ending the payout based on a win. Based on the payout start command and payout end command, the sub-control means can execute winning effects such as outputting a game medal payout sound, a backlight effect (also referred to as a BL effect), and a winning lamp effect. The payout start command is configured to include information on the number of game medals to be paid out, and the payout start command and payout end command are sent even when there is no payout (when there is a loss or when a replay wins). When there is a loss or when a replay wins, the number of game medals to be paid out is sent as 0, followed by a payout end command. When a replay wins, the sub-control means can also execute winning effects such as outputting the winning sound of the replay and a back lamp effect based on the payout start command and payout end command.

<Automatic input processing>
The automatic insertion process (automatic bet process) is a process that is executed when the winning determination process determines that a replay role has won. In the automatic insertion process, a bet is automatically set (the number of inserted medals is stored) for the same number of medals as the number of medals bet on the game in which the replay role won, without inserting game medals. When the automatic insertion process is executed, the main control means (main control board 100) transmits an automatic insertion command to the sub-control means according to the number of medals bet (inserted). Note that in this embodiment, the sub-control means does not execute an insertion effect (output of an insertion sound) based on the automatic insertion command, but may execute an insertion effect such as outputting an insertion sound in the same way as when a medal insertion command or a reserve insertion command is received.

In addition, during the automatic insertion process, the bet number is incremented by one. For example, if a replay role is won in a game with a bet number of three and the automatic insertion process is then executed, the process of incrementing the bet number by one is executed three times. However, because the increment process is executed in an extremely short time, it appears to the human eye that the 1 to 3 bet lamps are lit simultaneously. Note that if the 1 to 3 bet lamps are to be lit in sequence, a timer is set after the bet number is incremented, and the next bet number is not added until the timer value reaches 0.

In addition, even after the automatic insertion process, if the settlement switch is operated and game medals have been bet or stored in the credits, settlement processing can be performed in the same way as before starting play (after the required bet number has been set and before the start lever has been operated). However, in the settlement processing after the automatic insertion process, the bet number set for the bet is not paid out, but instead a number of game medals corresponding to the stored credits is paid out to the player from the hopper 44 (settlement processing).

<Secondary control means>
Various effects can be executed depending on the progress of the game, and effects such as those described in the explanation of the winning effect, settlement effect, and deposit effect applicable to this embodiment, and the error and winning effect related to the hopper 44 applicable to this embodiment are executed. In this embodiment, a winning lamp effect is also executed.

<Winning performance>
This is an effect that is executed when a game medal is paid out, or when a symbol corresponding to a replay role is won (displayed), and is executed based on a payout start command, a payout end command, etc. When a game medal is paid out, a payout sound indicating that a game medal is being paid out, a backlight effect, and a winning lamp effect are executed. When a symbol corresponding to a replay role is won, a winning sound indicating that a replay has won, a backlight effect, and a winning lamp effect are executed. Note that if a push order role is won in the role lottery (internal lottery) and an incorrect symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the active line, the winning effect can be prevented from being executed.

<Dispensing sound output>
There are two different payout sounds for game medals that are output during the execution of the payout process for game medals: payout sound A and payout sound C. Payout sound A is the payout sound that is output when a push order role is won during normal play (non-AT), and as a result of operating the correct push order, the correct symbol combination stops, and an advantageous payout (payout of 12 game medals) is made. Payout sound C is the payout sound that is output during normal play (non-AT), when a cherry role is won during normal play (non-AT), the symbol combination corresponding to the cherry role stops, and a payout (payout of 1 game medal) is made.

Payout sound A begins when a payout start command is received, repeats a first sound (e.g., a "zu" sound) until a payout end command is received, and then ends after the payout end command is received by repeating the output of the first sound for a first specific time (e.g., 1 second). Payout sound A is output for a first payout sound period (the period during which the actual payout is being performed plus the first specific time) that is longer than the period during which the actual payout is being performed (the period during which the payout process is performed, e.g., approximately 1.2 seconds), making it easier for the player to recognize that a payout is being performed. Furthermore, outputting the payout sound for a predetermined payout sound period that is longer than the period during which the payout is being performed makes the player recognize that a payout is being performed during the period during which the payout sound is being output, which is expected to delay the start of the next game. As a result, it is easier for effects based on the results of an internal lottery, etc., that are being performed over a certain period of time, to be executed without being canceled midway.

Payout sound C starts when a payout start command is received, repeatedly outputs a third sound (e.g., a buzzing sound) until a payout end command is received, and then repeatedly outputs a predetermined sound for a fourth specific time (e.g., 1.5 seconds) after the payout end command is received, and then ends. That is, payout sound C outputs a sound for a third payout sound period (a period obtained by adding the fourth specific time to the actual payout period) that is longer than the period during which actual payouts are being performed (e.g., approximately 0.2 seconds). This third payout sound period is shorter than the first payout sound period of payout sound A because the number of game medals paid out is smaller. Thus, payout sound C has a shorter period than payout sound A, but by outputting the payout sound for a longer period than the payout period, the player can be sure to hear the payouts, even though the number of game medals is small, and can recognize that game medals have been awarded.
The output of the payout sound is not canceled (ended) by betting setting (receiving a medal insertion command or a reserve insertion command), but is canceled (ended) by a game start operation (receiving a start switch acceptance command).

Note that the payout sound starts to be output after the payout start command is received, and continues to be output until a predetermined time has elapsed after the payout end command is received. However, once the payout start command is received, the payout sound may be output for a predetermined time that is the sum of the time taken from the start of payout to the end of payout (whichever is longer between adding credits and paying out game medals) plus a first specific time or a fourth specific time, without being triggered by the payout end command.
Furthermore, although the dispensing sounds A and C are different dispensing sounds, they may be the same dispensing sound.

<Winning sound output>
A winning sound A is output when a replay combination is won. The winning sound A starts when a payout start command is received, and is a winning sound that outputs a fourth sound (e.g., a "ji" sound) until a fifth specific time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) has elapsed. By outputting the winning sound for a certain period of time, the player can be sure not to miss it and can recognize that a replay combination has been won.
The output of the winning sound is not canceled (ended) by a payout end command or bet setting (receiving an automatic insertion command), but is canceled (ended) by a game start operation (receiving a start switch acceptance command). Note that the output time of the winning sound A may be configured to end before automatic insertion is performed, or may be configured to end by the time the game start operation becomes possible.

<Back lamp effect>
There are three different back lamp effects: Back Lamp Effect A, Back Lamp Effect C, and Back Lamp Effect D. Back Lamp Effect A is a back lamp effect that is output (executed) when a push order role is won during normal play (non-AT), and as a result of operating the correct push order, the correct symbol combination stops and 12 coins are paid out. Back Lamp Effect C is a back lamp effect that is output (executed) when a cherry role is won during normal play (non-AT), the symbol combination corresponding to the cherry role stops and 1 coin is paid out. Back Lamp Effect D is a back lamp effect that is output (executed) when a replay role is won during normal play (non-AT), and the symbol combination corresponding to the replay role stops.

Backlight effect A begins when a payout start command is received, and repeatedly turns on and off the backlight in a first pattern until a payout end command is received. After the payout end command is received, the backlight repeatedly turns on and off in a first pattern for a first specific time (e.g., 1 second) before ending. Backlight effect A is executed for a first backlight effect period (the period obtained by adding the first specific time to the actual payout period) that is longer than the period during which the actual payout is being performed (e.g., approximately 1.2 seconds), making it easier for the player to recognize that a payout is being performed. Furthermore, by executing (outputting) backlight effect A for a first backlight effect period that is longer than the period during which the payout is being performed, the player is made to recognize that a payout is being performed during the period during which backlight effect A is being performed, which is expected to delay the start of the next game. Furthermore, it is easier for effects based on the results of an internal lottery, etc., to be executed without being canceled midway through, for example, when they are being performed over a certain period of time. Note that backlight effect A is canceled (ended) upon bet setting (receiving a medal insertion command or a reserve insertion command).

Backlight effect C begins when a payout start command is received, and repeatedly turns on and off the backlight in a third pattern until a payout end command is received. After the payout end command is received, the backlight repeatedly turns on and off in a third pattern for a first specific time (e.g., 1 second) before ending. Backlight effect C is executed for a third backlight effect period (the period obtained by adding the first specific time to the actual payout period) that is longer than the period during which a payout is actually being made (e.g., approximately 0.2 seconds), making it easier for the player to recognize that a payout is being made. Furthermore, by executing (outputting) backlight effect C for a third backlight effect period that is longer than the period during which a payout is being made, the player is made to recognize that a payout is being made during the period during which backlight effect C is being executed, which is expected to delay the start of the next game. Furthermore, it is easier for effects based on the results of an internal lottery, etc., to be executed without being canceled midway through, for example, when they are being executed over a certain period of time. Note that, like Back Lamp Effect A, Back Lamp Effect C is canceled (ended) when a bet is set (a medal insertion command or a reserve insertion command is received).

Back lamp effect D begins when a payout start command is received and ends after repeatedly turning on and off the back lamp in a fourth pattern for a first specific time (e.g., 1 second). By executing back lamp effect D for the fourth back lamp effect period (the same period as the first specific time), it becomes easier for the player to recognize that a replay role has been won. Furthermore, by executing (outputting) back lamp effect D for the fourth back lamp effect period, the player is made to recognize that processing based on a replay role is being performed during the period in which back lamp effect D is being executed, which is expected to delay the start of the next game. Furthermore, this makes it easier for effects based on the results of an internal lottery, etc., to be executed without being canceled midway through, for example, when they are being executed over a certain period of time. Note that back lamp effect D is not canceled (ended) by betting (automatic deposit command), but is canceled (ended) by a game start operation (receiving a start switch acceptance command).

<Prize winning lamp effect>
There are three different winning lamp effects: winning lamp effect A, winning lamp effect C, and winning lamp effect D. Winning lamp effect A is a winning lamp effect that is output (executed) when a push order role is won during normal play (non-AT), and as a result of operating the correct push order, the correct symbol combination stops and 12 coins are paid out. Winning lamp effect C is a winning lamp effect that is output (executed) when a cherry role is won during normal play (non-AT), a symbol combination corresponding to the cherry role stops, and 1 coin is paid out. Winning lamp effect D is a winning lamp effect that is output (executed) when a replay role is won during normal play (non-AT), and a symbol combination corresponding to the replay role stops.

Winning Lamp Effect A begins when a payout start command is received. The winning LED lamp repeatedly lights up and off in yellow (fifth pattern) until a payout end command is received. After the payout end command is received, the winning LED lamp repeatedly lights up and off in the fifth pattern for a first specific time (e.g., 1 second) before ending. Winning Lamp Effect A is executed for a first winning lamp effect period (the period obtained by adding the first specific time to the actual payout period) that is longer than the period during which the actual payout is being made (e.g., approximately 1.5 seconds), making it easier for the player to recognize that a payout is being made. Furthermore, by executing (outputting) Winning Lamp Effect A for a first winning lamp effect period that is longer than the period during which the payout is being made, the player is made to recognize that a payout is being made during the period during which Winning Lamp Effect A is being made, which is expected to delay the start of the next game. Furthermore, it is easier for effects based on the results of an internal lottery, such as those that are being performed over a certain period of time, to be executed without being canceled midway. Note that winning lamp effect A is not canceled (ended) by betting (receiving a medal insertion command or a reserve insertion command), but is canceled (ended) by operating to start play (receiving a start switch acceptance command).

Winning lamp effect C begins when a payout start command is received, and the winning LED lamp repeatedly lights up and off in red (sixth pattern) until a payout end command is received. Once the payout end command is received, the winning LED lamp repeatedly lights up and off in the sixth pattern for a sixth specific time (e.g., 2.3 seconds) before ending. Winning lamp effect C is executed for a third winning lamp effect period (the period during which the actual payout is made plus the sixth specific time, and is the same length as the first winning lamp effect period), which is longer than the period during which the actual payout is made (e.g., approximately 0.2 seconds), making it easier for the player to recognize that a payout is being made. Furthermore, by executing (outputting) the winning lamp effect C for a third winning lamp effect period that is longer than the period during which payouts are being made, the player will be made to perceive the period during which the winning lamp effect C is being made as if a payout is being made, which is expected to delay the start of the next game.Furthermore, this makes it easier for effects based on the results of an internal lottery to be executed over a certain period of time without being canceled midway.Note that the winning lamp effect C is not canceled (ended) by betting settings (receiving a medal insertion command or a reserve insertion command), but is canceled (ended) by a game start operation (receiving a start switch acceptance command).

Winning lamp effect D begins when a payout start command is received and ends with the winning LED lamp repeatedly turning on and off in blue for a seventh specific time (e.g., 2.5 seconds) (seventh pattern). Winning lamp effect D is executed for the fourth winning lamp effect period (the same period as the seventh specific time and the same length as the first winning lamp effect period), making it easier for the player to recognize that a replay has been won. Furthermore, by executing (outputting) winning lamp effect D for the fourth winning lamp effect period, the player is made to recognize that processing based on a replay is being performed during the period in which winning lamp effect D is being executed, which is expected to delay the start of the next game. Furthermore, this makes it easier for effects based on the results of an internal lottery, such as those taking a certain amount of time, to be executed without being canceled midway. Note that winning lamp effect D is not canceled (ended) by betting (automatic deposit command), but is canceled (ended) by a game start operation (receiving a start switch acceptance command).

Winning lamp effects A, C, and D are configured so that the color of the winning LED lamp when it lights up is different, but the lighting and flashing pattern and the length of the execution period are the same. By making the color different only, it becomes easier to recognize that the winning lamp effect is an effect caused by a winning combination. Also, by making the execution period the same as the length of winning lamp effect A, when a cherry or replay combination is won, the next game can start earlier than when the correct pattern combination for the push order combination is displayed. However, because the winning lamp effect is being executed, it is expected that the start of the next game will be delayed until the winning lamp effect ends.

Note that the winning lamp effects A and C are executed from the time the payout end command is received until the first specific time or the sixth specific time has elapsed, but once the payout start command is received, the winning lamp effect may be executed for a predetermined time that is the sum of the first specific time or the sixth specific time and the time taken from the start of payout to the end of payout (whichever is longer between adding credits and paying out game medals), without being triggered by the payout end command.
Furthermore, the "first winning lamp presentation period,""third winning lamp presentation period," and "fourth winning lamp presentation period" of winning lamp presentations A, C, and D are set to the same period as the "first payout sound period" of payout sound A, but the "first winning lamp presentation period,""third winning lamp presentation period," and "fourth winning lamp presentation period" may be set to different periods from the "first payout sound period." It is preferable that the "first winning lamp presentation period,""third winning lamp presentation period," and "fourth winning lamp presentation period" be set to the same period, and they may also be set to be longer than the time required to pay out the maximum number of game medals that can be paid out in one game.

<Error notification>
When an error such as an error related to the hopper 44 or a door open error occurs, the main control means displays an error code on the winning number display 27, and the sub-control means notifies the user of the error using the LCD (display device), speaker S, and winning LED lamp. The winning LED lamp lights up in red while an error is being notified. The winning LED lamp also lights up in red when a cherry wins, but by continuing to light up in red during an error notification, the pattern differs from when a cherry wins, making it possible to distinguish whether the notification is for an error or a win.

<Settlement performance>
This is an effect that is executed when the game medals are settled, and a settlement sound (settlement effect) is output to indicate that the game medals are being paid out, and a sound is output to indicate that the settlement has been completed. In the settlement effect, effects using the winning LED lamp and back lamp are not executed, so even if a payout is made, it can be easily recognized that this is different from effects based on the winning of a small role or a replay role.

Hereinafter, various effects that are executed depending on the progress of the game will be explained with reference to Figures 36 to 45. Figure 36 is a time chart when no insertion operation is performed using the MAX BET switch after the payout process based on the winning of a push order role is completed, Figure 37 is a time chart when an insertion operation is performed using the MAX BET switch after the payout process based on the winning of a push order role is completed, Figure 38 is a time chart when no insertion operation is performed using the MAX BET switch after the payout process based on the winning of a cherry role is completed, Figure 39 is a time chart when an insertion operation is performed using the MAX BET switch after the payout process based on the winning of a cherry role is completed, and Figure 40 is a time chart when no game medals are inserted after the automatic insertion process based on the winning of a replay role is completed. FIG. 41 is a time chart when a gaming medal is inserted after the automatic insertion process based on the winning of a replay role is completed, FIG. 42 is a time chart when a settlement operation is performed using the settlement switch after the payout process based on the winning of a push order role is completed, FIG. 43 is a time chart when a settlement operation is performed using the settlement switch after the automatic insertion process based on the winning of a replay role is completed, FIG. 44 is a time chart when a payout is not performed normally after the winning of a cherry role (when a hopper empty error occurs), and FIG. 45 is a time chart when a payout is not performed normally after the winning of a cherry role (when a hopper retention error occurs).

Note that for ease of explanation, Figures 36 to 45 use ON and OFF to describe the various processes and effects, but the status of the corresponding processes and effects is shown in parentheses. Specifically, for the payout process/settlement process/winning lamp effect (winning LED lamp)/BL effect/settlement effect/error notification (winning LED lamp), ON indicates that the process is being executed, and OFF indicates that the process is not being executed. When it changes from OFF to ON, the process etc. starts, and when it changes from ON to OFF, the process ends. For payout, ON indicates that one medal has been paid out, and OFF indicates that no medal has been paid out. For payout sound/insertion sound/winning sound, ON indicates that the sound is being output, and OFF indicates that the sound is not being output. For the MAX BET lamp/medal insertion possible lamp, ON indicates that the light is on, and OFF indicates that the light is off. For the MAX BET switch operation/settlement switch operation, ON indicates that the switch has been operated, and OFF indicates that the switch has not been operated. For medal insertion, ON indicates that the inserted game medal has passed through the medal selector 34 normally (the insertion sensor provided on the medal selector 34 has detected the game medal), and OFF indicates that no game medal has been inserted. For error (hopper empty) and error (hopper stuck), ON indicates that an error has occurred (an error has been detected and set), and OFF indicates that no error has occurred. For error display, ON indicates that an error code has been displayed by the main control means or an error screen has been displayed by the sub-control means based on the occurrence of an error, and OFF indicates that no error code or error screen is being displayed.

It can also be combined with the previously explained acquisition display effects, cumulative display effects, result announcement effects, PUSH effects, and comment effects, and times t0 to t5, t17, and t18 in Figures 22 to 32 are the same as times t0 to t5, t17, and t18 in Figures 36 to 45.

<If you do not insert the MAX BET switch after the payout process based on the winning of the push order role is completed>
Figure 36 shows a case where the correct button presses are performed in the correct order, resulting in the correct symbol combination being displayed and winning. At time t0, the main control means begins the payout process, and the sub-control means, based on the received payout start command, starts outputting a payout sound A (referred to as "payout sound" in the figure, the same applies below), a winning LED lamp effect A (referred to as "winning lamp effect" in the figure, the same applies below), and a back lamp effect A (referred to as "BL effect" in the figure, the same applies below). The payout process takes 1.5 seconds if the payout process is performed normally (in this example, 12 game medals are paid out normally). At time t1, the main control means ends the payout process and sends a payout end command to the sub-control means. Based on the payout end command, the sub-control means continues outputting the payout sound A, the winning lamp effect A, and the back lamp effect A as winning effects for the T1 period (first specific time).

After the payout process is completed at time t1, the main control means performs processes such as updating the RT status (game completion check process) and turns on the blocker to make it possible to insert game medals. At time t2, the main control means turns on the MAX BET lamp based on the fact that it is possible to insert game medals. The MAX BET lamp remains lit because the MAX BET switch was not operated. At time t5, since the T1 period has passed since time t1, the sub-control means ends the output of payout sound A, win lamp effect A, and back lamp effect A. In other words, the period from time t0 to t5 can be said to be the first payout sound period, the first back lamp effect period, and the first win lamp effect period. As described above, from time t1 onwards, smooth control is possible even when various situations are combined, such as continuing to output payout sound A, continuing to display the winning lamp A and back lamp A, and turning on the MAX BET lamp. By continuing to output payout sound A, continuing to display the winning lamp A and back lamp A, the player is made aware that a payout has been made, and is also made aware that a bet can be set by operating the MAX BET operation, thereby improving the performance of the gaming machine.

<When the MAX BET switch is used to insert a bet after the payout process based on the winning push order is completed>
Figure 37 shows a case where the correct button presses are pressed in the correct order, the correct symbol combination is displayed, and a win is achieved. Up until time t2, the situation is the same as if the MAX BET switch was not inserted after the payout process based on the press order win was completed. At time t3, the MAX BET switch is inserted. When the MAX BET switch is operated, the main control means turns off the MAX BET lamp, and the sub-control means ends the backlight effect A. From time t3 to time t4 (during the T2 period), the insertion sound A (referred to as the insertion sound in the figure; the same applies below) is output three times as an insertion effect. From time t3 onward, smooth control is possible even when various situations, such as the output of the payout sound A and the winning lamp effect A, are combined, and the insertion sound A is output. This allows the player to recognize that a payout has been made, while also recognizing that the MAX BET switch has been operated and a bet has been set, thereby improving the performance of the gaming machine. At time t3, the payout sound A is output and the winning lamp effect A continues, but by ending the back lamp effect A, it is possible to visually recognize that a bet has been set. Note that although the explanation has been given for the insertion operation using the MAX BET switch, the back lamp effect A is also ended and the insertion sound A is output when an insertion operation using the 1 BET switch or a medal is inserted.

<If you do not insert the MAX BET switch after the payout process based on the Cherry winning combination is completed>
Figure 38 shows a case where a symbol combination corresponding to the cherry combination is displayed stopped on an active line and a prize is won. At time t0, the main control means starts the payout process, and the sub-control means, based on the received payout start command, outputs a payout sound C (referred to as "payout sound" in the figure, the same applies below), and starts a winning lamp effect C (referred to as "winning lamp effect" in the figure, the same applies below) on the winning LED lamp, and a back lamp effect C (referred to as "BL effect" in the figure, the same applies below) on the back lamp. The time required for the payout process is 0.2 seconds if the process is executed normally (in this example, one game medal is paid out normally). At time t19, the main control means ends the payout process and sends a payout end command to the sub-control means. Based on the payout end command, the sub-control means continues to output the payout sound C as a winning effect for a T4 period (fourth specific time) until time t24, to execute the winning lamp effect C for a T6 period (sixth specific time) until time t5, and to execute the back lamp effect C for a T1 period (first specific time) until time t23.

After the payout process is completed at time t19, the main control means performs processes such as updating the RT status (game completion check process) and turns on the blocker, making it possible to insert gaming medals. At time t20, the main control means turns on the MAX BET lamp, indicating that gaming medals can be inserted. The MAX BET lamp remains lit because the MAX BET switch was not operated. (Note that this diagram assumes that enough credits have been accumulated to allow a bet to be set by operating the MAX BET switch. If a bet cannot be set by operating the MAX BET switch, the machine will be able to insert gaming medals at time t20, but the MAX BET lamp will not be lit.)

At time t23, the T1 period has passed since time t19, so the sub-control means ends back lamp effect A. In other words, the period from time t0 to t23 can be considered the third back lamp effect period. At time t24, the T4 period has passed since time t19, so the sub-control means ends the output of payout sound C. In other words, the period from time t0 to t24 can be considered the third payout sound period. At time t5, the T6 period has passed since time t19, so the sub-control means ends winning lamp effect C. In other words, the period from time t0 to t5 can be considered the third winning lamp effect period. As described above, from time t19 onwards, smooth control is possible even when various situations are combined, such as continuing to output payout sound C, and continuing to display the winning lamp C and back lamp C, while also turning on the MAX BET lamp. By continuing to output payout sound C, and continuing to display the winning lamp C and back lamp C, the player is made aware that a payout has been made, and is also made aware that a bet can be set by operating the MAX BET operation, thereby improving the performance of the gaming machine.

<When the MAX BET switch is used to insert a bet after the payout process based on the Cherry winning combination has been completed>
Figure 39 shows a case where a symbol combination corresponding to the Cherry combination is displayed stopped on a pay line and a win is achieved. Up until time t20, the situation is the same as if no insertion operation was performed using the MAX BET switch after the payout process based on the Cherry combination was completed, and at time t21, an insertion operation is performed using the MAX BET switch. When the MAX BET switch is operated, the main control means turns off (turns off) the MAX BET lamp, and the sub-control means ends the back lamp effect C. From time t21 to time t22 (during the T2 period), three coins are bet by inserting the MAX BET switch as an insertion effect, and therefore insertion sound A (referred to as insertion sound in the figure; the same applies below) is output three times. From time t21 onwards, smooth control is possible even when various situations are combined, such as the output of payout sound C, the winning lamp effect C, and the output of insertion sound A, and this allows the player to recognize that a payout has been made, while also recognizing that the MAX BET switch has been operated and a bet has been set, thereby improving the performance of the gaming machine. Also, at time t21, the output of payout sound C and the winning lamp effect C continue, but by ending the back lamp effect C, the player can visually recognize that a bet has been set.

Note that Figure 39 assumes that enough credits have been accumulated to allow a bet to be set by operating the MAX BET switch. If a bet cannot be set by operating the MAX BET switch, then at time t20 it will be possible to insert a gaming medal, but the MAX BET lamp will not light up. Also, while the explanation was given for inserting a medal using the MAX BET switch, inserting a medal using the 1 BET switch will also end the back lamp effect C and output insertion sound A.

<If no medals are inserted after the automatic insertion process based on the winning of a replay role is completed>
As shown in FIG. 40 , at time t0, the main control means transmits a payout start command to the sub-control means indicating that the number of game medals to be paid out is 0. Based on the received payout start command, the sub-control means initiates the output of a winning sound A (referred to as the winning sound in the figure, the same applies below), a winning LED lamp effect D (referred to as the winning LED effect in the figure, the same applies below), and a back lamp effect D (referred to as the BL effect in the figure, the same applies below). Based on the payout start command, the sub-control means continues the output of the winning sound A as the winning effect for a T5 period (fifth specific time), the winning LED effect D for a T7 period (seventh specific time), and the back lamp effect D for a T1 period (first specific time). At time t25, the main control means initiates the automatic insertion process and transmits an automatic insertion command to the sub-control means. After the automatic insertion process is completed at time t26, the main control means turns on the blocker, thereby enabling the insertion of game medals.

At time t26, the main control means turns on the medal insertion lamp based on the fact that it is now possible to insert a gaming medal. Since no medals are inserted thereafter, the lamp remains lit. At time T29, the T1 period has passed since time t09, so the sub-control means ends the back lamp effect D. In other words, the period from time t0 to t29 can be considered the fourth back lamp effect period. At time t5, the T7 period has passed since time t0, so the sub-control means ends the winning lamp effect D. In other words, the period from time t0 to t5 can be considered the fourth winning lamp effect period. As described above, from time t26 onwards, smooth control is possible even when various situations are combined, such as continuing the winning lamp effect D and back lamp effect D while turning on the medal insertion possible lamp. By continuing the winning lamp effect D and back lamp effect D, the player is made to recognize that a payout has been made and is also made to recognize that medal insertion is possible, thereby improving the performance of the gaming machine. Note that this diagram assumes that the credit accumulation has not reached the upper limit after the automatic insertion process, and if it is not possible to insert gaming medals, the medal insertion possible lamp will not be turned on at time t26 (the blocker will not be turned ON).

<When a gaming medal is inserted after the automatic insertion process based on the winning of a replay role has finished>
As shown in Figure 41, up until time t26, the situation is the same as when no gaming medal is inserted after the automatic insertion process based on the winning of a replay role is completed. At time t27, a gaming medal is inserted, causing the main control means to store one gaming medal in the credits and send a storage number command to the sub-control means. Upon receiving the storage number command, the sub-control means terminates the backlight effect D and outputs a insertion sound B (referred to as an insertion sound in the figure; the same applies below) once as the insertion effect, which is output from time t27 to time t28. Even when various situations are combined, such as the output of the insertion sound B while the winning lamp effect D is being performed from time t27 onward, smooth control is possible. This allows the player to recognize that a replay role has been won, as well as the fact that a valuable insertion has been made and one medal has been stored, thereby improving the performance of the gaming machine. Furthermore, at time t27, the winning lamp effect D continues, but by ending the back lamp effect D, it is possible to visually recognize that the points have been saved in the credits.
In this diagram, it is assumed that the accumulated credits have not reached the upper limit after the automatic insertion process (the accumulated number is 48 or less), and even if one game medal is inserted, the state in which game medals can be inserted continues.

<When settlement operation is performed using the settlement switch after the payout process based on the winning of the push order role is completed>
As shown in Figure 42, up until time t2, the operation is the same as when the MAX bet switch is operated after the payout process based on the winning push order role is completed, and at time t3, the settlement switch is operated instead of the MAX bet switch.
At time t3, the main control means initiates the settlement process based on the operation of the settlement button and terminates (turns off) the illumination of the MAX BET lamp. The sub-control means then terminates the output of the payout sound A, the winning lamp effect A, and the back lamp effect A at time t3, without waiting for the lapse of the T1 period. Thereafter, based on the settlement start command, the output of the settlement sound is initiated as a settlement effect. Note that the settlement sound is output as a settlement effect, but effects using the back lamp and winning LED lamp are not performed. To avoid player confusion due to the simultaneous output of the payout sound A and the settlement sound when the settlement process is initiated, the output of the payout sound A, the winning lamp effect A, and the back lamp effect A, which were scheduled to continue for the T1 period, are terminated upon the start of the settlement process, and effects using the back lamp and winning LED lamp are not performed. This allows the player to clearly recognize that a settlement process other than the payout process is being performed.

<When settlement operation is performed using the settlement switch after the automatic insertion process based on the winning of a replay role has finished>
As shown in Figure 43, up until time t26, the process is the same as when a gaming medal is inserted after the automatic insertion process based on the winning of a replay role is completed, and at time t30 the settlement switch is operated.
At time t30, the main control means initiates the settlement process based on the operation of the settlement button and terminates (turns off) the illumination of the medal insertion possible lamp. The sub-control means then terminates the winning lamp effect D at time t30 without waiting for the T7 period to elapse and the back lamp effect D at time t1 to elapse. Thereafter, based on the settlement start command, it begins outputting a settlement sound as a settlement effect. Note that while the settlement sound is output, effects using the back lamp and winning LED lamp are not performed. The start of the settlement process terminates the winning lamp effect D and back lamp effect D, which were scheduled to continue for the T7 and T1 periods, and effects using the back lamp and winning LED lamp are not performed, thereby allowing the player to recognize that the settlement process is in progress. Note that this diagram assumes that the accumulated credits have not reached the upper limit after the automatic insertion process and that 19 or more credits have been accumulated.

<If payout is not performed normally after a cherry win (hopper empty error)>
As shown in FIG. 44 , the main control means starts the payout process at time t0, and the sub-control means starts outputting the payout sound C, the winning lamp effect C, and the back lamp effect C based on the received payout start command. After time t0, the payout process is executed, but because there are no game medals in the hopper 44, no game medals are paid out and the spinning wheel continues to rotate. Then, at time t17, the main control means determines that the hopper 44 is empty of game medals, terminates the payout process, and sets a hopper empty error. Upon the occurrence of a hopper empty error, the main control means displays an error code, and the sub-control means cancels (ends the display of) the payout sound C, the winning lamp effect C, and the back lamp effect C that were being executed, displays an error screen, and issues an error notification using the winning LED lamp. Note that the output of the payout sound C, the winning lamp effect C, and the back lamp effect C continue to be executed until time t17. Until time t17, the winning LED lamp lights up in red as a winning lamp effect and flashes repeatedly, but at time t17 the winning LED lamp lights up in red as an error notification, and although the red color is the same, the lighting pattern is different, so it is possible to recognize that the winning lamp effect has switched to an error notification. Note that this figure shows a case in which a hopper empty error occurs without a single medal being paid out after the start of the payout process; if a hopper empty error occurs after multiple medals have been paid out, the timing at which the hopper empty error occurs will be later than time t17 by the time multiple medals have been paid out.

<If payout is not performed normally after winning the Cherry role (when a hopper congestion error occurs)>
As shown in Figure 45, at time t0, the main control means starts the payout process, and the sub-control means starts outputting a payout sound C, a winning lamp effect C, and a back lamp effect C based on the received payout start command. After time t0, the payout process is executed, but the payout of game medals is not executed because the discharge outlet of the hopper 44 is clogged with game medals. Then, at time t18, the payout sensor of the hopper 44 continues to detect game medals for more than 201 ms after the start of the payout process, so the main control means determines that game medals are clogged, terminates the payout process, and sets a hopper retention error. Also at time t18, based on the occurrence of a hopper retention error, the main control means displays an error code, and the sub-control means cancels (ends the display of) the output of the payout sound C, the winning lamp effect C, and the back lamp effect C that were being executed, and displays an error screen.

The output of payout sound C, the winning lamp effect C, and the back lamp effect C are executed from the start of the payout process, and are executed before the payout process starts and a hopper retention error occurs. Therefore, it is possible to confirm the winning effects, such as the output of payout sound C, the winning lamp effect C, and the back lamp effect C, before the error screen is displayed. Note that the same diagram shows a case where no medals have been paid out since the start of the payout process and a hopper retention error occurs. In a situation where multiple medals are being paid out, if a hopper retention error occurs after some of the medals have been paid out, the timing of the hopper retention error will be later than time t18 by the time some of the medals have been paid out, and the period during which the output of payout sound C, the winning lamp effect C, and the back lamp effect C are executed will be longer.

<Change of form>
Although the time required to normally pay out 12 game medals is set to 1.5 seconds and the time required to normally pay out one game medal is set to 0.2 seconds, the payout time may be varied depending on the number of medals to be paid out and whether the payout process only adds credits or includes paying out game medals from the hopper 44. In this case, the time required to pay out one game medal from the hopper 44 may be set to be longer than the time required to add one game medal to credits. Conversely, the time required to add one game medal to credits may be set to be longer than the time required to pay out one game medal from the hopper 44.

In the winning lamp effect, the color corresponding to the type of winning combination is illuminated (yellow when the push order combination is won and the correct symbol combination is won, red when the cherry combination is won, and blue when the replay combination is won), but the color of illumination may be a common color (for example, white) regardless of the type of winning combination. By using a common color, it is possible to simply notify that a certain combination has been won regardless of the symbol combination (outcome) that stops on the reels. Furthermore, the winning lamp effect can be executed regardless of the color of the symbol corresponding to the winning combination that stops on the active line, preventing misidentification.
Furthermore, the common color regardless of the type of role may be the same white for all roles, or may be divided into several groups depending on the type of role (white for bell roles and replay roles, purple for cherry roles and watermelon roles).

The winning lamp effect is executed for a time determined by the winning combination after receiving the payout end command, but it may be executed for a time determined by the winning combination after receiving the payout start command. For example, it may be executed for 2.5 seconds when the correct symbol combination, the symbol combination corresponding to the cherry symbol, or the symbol combination corresponding to the replay symbol stops.
The execution period of the winning lamp effect is set to the same as the output period of the payout sound, but it may be a different period. Also, the execution period of the winning lamp effect is set to the same as the output period of the back lamp effect, but it may be a different period. The execution period of the winning lamp effect can be set to a time longer than the time required for the payout process (1.5 seconds) and shorter than the time required for the hopper empty error to be set (3.5 seconds).

Although the winning lamp effect A is executed during normal play (non-AT), it may also be executed during AT. Also, the color may be the same, but the lighting and extinguishing patterns and execution times may be different. Also, it may not be executed during AT. By not executing it during AT, the winning lamp effect is executed each time a correct symbol combination for a push order role with an increased winning frequency is matched, thereby preventing the player from being bothered.
Similarly, other roles (cherry role, replay role) may be configured to be executed during the AT, or may not be executed during the AT.

Although it has been stated that the winning lamp effect does not end with the insertion operation of the MAX bet switch (receiving the reserve insertion command) or the insertion of a gaming medal (receiving the reserve number command), it may also end with the insertion operation of the MAX bet switch (receiving the reserve insertion command) or the insertion of a gaming medal (receiving the reserve number command). After a replay combination is won, the automatic bet process may not end the winning lamp effect, but may end when a gaming medal is inserted thereafter.
Although the back lamp effect is said to end when the MAX bet switch is inserted (received the reserve insertion command) or when a game medal is inserted (received the reserve number command), it may be configured not to end.

Although it was stated that the winning LED lamp will not be used as the settlement effect, it may be used instead. This may be the same as the error notification that is performed when an error occurs, or it may be a different effect from the winning lamp effect that is performed when an error is notified or when a winning combination is achieved. In a different effect, it is desirable that one of the light color, flashing pattern, or time of the winning LED lamp be different, so that it can be recognized as being different from the error notification or winning lamp effect.

When an error occurs, an error notification is issued using the winning LED lamp. However, when the power is turned on or a door open error occurs, the winning LED lamp may also be used to notify an error in the same manner as when a hopper empty error occurs. When the power is turned on, the notification continues for a certain period of time after power is turned on, and in the case of a door open error, the notification continues until the door is closed or until a certain period of time has passed since the door was closed. In these situations, gameplay can continue, and the execution of the error notification and the execution of the winning lamp effect may overlap. If they overlap, the error notification may be given priority over the winning lamp effect. By prioritizing the error notification, it is possible to configure the system so that the winning lamp effect is not executed while the error notification is being executed, even if the trigger for executing it is met. Furthermore, if an error notification is executed while a winning lamp effect is being executed, the system may be configured to end the winning lamp effect and execute the error notification.

Also, prioritizing error notifications means that the winning LED lamp will light up in a way that corresponds to the error notification while an error notification is being executed. Specifically, when the trigger for executing the winning lamp effect is met, the winning lamp effect will be executed, but when it is the period in which the error notification is being executed, the winning LED lamp will only emit light that corresponds to the error notification; and when the period in which the error notification is executed has ended, if the period in which the winning lamp effect is being executed is still ongoing, the winning LED lamp will emit light that corresponds to the winning lamp effect.

The winning lamp effect is executed when the correct symbol combination stops in a game in which the push order role is won, when the symbol combination corresponding to the cherry role stops, or when the symbol combination corresponding to the replay role stops, but it may be configured to be executed when a push order irrelevant role (so-called shared bell) in which an advantageous payout (payout of 12 coins) is executed regardless of the push order is won and the symbol combination corresponding to the push order irrelevant role (correct symbol combination) stops. It may also be configured to be executed when other roles such as the watermelon role or chance role are won.
Furthermore, the times and lengths of the periods described in the above embodiments are merely examples and can be changed as appropriate.

<Explanation regarding ball output specifications across advantageous zones>
When a favorable zone ends and the machine transitions to a normal zone, the RAM initialization process (also called RAM initialization process at the end of the favorable zone) updates all parameters that affect the performance of the instruction functions to 0. Therefore, in conventional gaming machines, when a favorable zone ends, the machine transitions to a new favorable zone via a normal zone, and no information about the instruction functions from the previous favorable zone can be carried over. For this reason, even if there are 500 AT games remaining in a favorable zone, if the upper limit of the favorable zone is reached, the AT will end and the number of remaining AT games will be initialized, which often makes the player feel like they have lost out.
In light of this issue, we will explain a method of indirectly carrying over certain parameters (for example, certain modes related to winning the AT, certain points related to winning the AT, etc., also called carryover parameters) that affect the performance of the instruction function to the next advantageous period by winning a bonus before the end of the advantageous period.

Note that the reel arrangement, symbol combination, condition device, and number of internal lottery placements are basically the same as those in Figures 11 to 21, but the replay probability is configured not to change (maintain non-RT) even if the Type 1 BB symbol combination does not stop in a game in which a Type 1 BB is won. In other words, it is configured not to have an RT1 (RT within a Type 1 BB). It is also configured to have an RT2 which is transitioned to after the Type 1 BB ends and ends after a predetermined number of games (for example, five games). It is also configured so that transition to the advantageous zone is determined even in games in which Replay-A or Replay-B is won, so that transition to the advantageous zone is determined at approximately 1 in 1 (65532/65536) in the normal zone. Also, for ease of explanation, non-RT and not inside Type 1 BB will be referred to as non-RT1, and non-RT and inside Type 1 BB will be referred to as non-RT2, but non-RT1 and non-RT2 are the same RT, and the internal lottery numbers are also the same, except that a single Type 1 BB win with a number of 4 placed in non-RT1 will be a loss in non-RT2.

The RT transition starts from non-RT1, and if a Type 1 BB is won during non-RT1 and the Type 1 BB pattern combination does not stop, the next game will be non-RT2 (which may be the end of that game); if a Type 1 BB pattern combination stops during non-RT2, non-RT2 will end and Type 1 BB will be activated from the next game (also referred to as during Type 1 BB); once the activation of Type 1 BB has finished, the next game will transition to RT2 (a finite RT after the end of Type 1 BB); once a predetermined number of games have been played in RT2, RT2 will end and the next game will transition to non-RT1. Furthermore, when a Type 1 BB is won during RT2, if the Type 1 BB symbol combination stops, RT2 ends and Type 1 BB activates from the next play; if the Type 1 BB symbol combination does not stop, RT2 does not end, and after five plays have been played in RT2, RT2 ends and the next play transitions to non-RT2. Furthermore, since the game starts from non-RT (non-RT1) when the setting is changed, if the setting change device is activated while the Type 1 BB condition device is operating (during non-RT2) or while Type 1 BB is operating, non-RT (non-RT1) is set when the setting change device is deactivated. Furthermore, since the RT state and Type 1 BB operating state are not cleared in the event of a power outage in which the setting change device is not activated (sometimes referred to as a normal power outage), the game will start from the state before the power outage when power is restored.

In addition, in games where a Type 1 BB is won during non-RT1, games where a loss occurs during non-RT2, or games where one of the push order bell group C (winning - C1 to C6) is won during non-RT2, the Type 1 BB symbol combination can be stopped depending on the operation mode of the stop switch. Furthermore, in games where one of the push order bell group C is won during an advantageous zone, the operation mode of the stop switch that will not stop the Type 1 BB symbol combination will be notified except in certain circumstances, and the user can maintain non-RT2 by playing according to the notified operation mode.

In this embodiment, in order to indirectly carry over carryover parameters (also referred to as the degree of expectation regarding the AT, the degree of expectation regarding the notified game state, and specified information regarding the notified game state) in one advantageous zone (hereinafter also referred to as advantageous zone 1) to the next advantageous zone (hereinafter also referred to as advantageous zone 2), if a specific condition is met during the AT in advantageous zone 1 (for example, the number of coins won during the AT exceeds 2,000, the number of games played during the AT reaches a specified number, or the number of games played in one advantageous zone reaches a specified number, also referred to as an ending condition), the AT is configured to continue until the specified condition is met (for example, until the value of the MY counter exceeds a specified value (for example, a value less than the upper limit of the MY counter, such as 2,350)), regardless of the remaining period of the AT at the time the specific condition is met (for example, the number of games remaining in the AT, the remaining difference in the number of coins that can be won during the AT, etc.). Furthermore, if the upper limit of the advantageous zone is not set when MY exceeds 2400, but when the difference in the number of gaming media obtained in one advantageous zone described above exceeds 2400, the term "MY counter value" will be replaced with "difference in the number of gaming media in one advantageous zone."

After that, in games in which the value of the MY counter exceeds a predetermined value and in which the Type 1 BB symbol combination can be stopped, a predetermined effect is executed to prompt the player to stop the Type 1 BB symbol combination. Note that when the predetermined effect to prompt the player to stop the Type 1 BB symbol combination is executed, the system is configured to notify the player of the operation mode of the stop switch that can stop the Type 1 BB symbol combination, rather than the operation mode of the stop switch that does not stop the Type 1 BB symbol combination even if one of the push order bell group C is won. Also, if the Type 1 BB symbol combination does not stop in a game in which a predetermined effect to prompt the player to stop the Type 1 BB symbol combination is executed, the system is configured to again execute a predetermined effect to prompt the player to stop the Type 1 BB symbol combination in a subsequent game in which the Type 1 BB symbol combination can be stopped.

After that, when the activation of the Type 1 BB ends, the next game will transition to RT2, and advantageous zone 1 will end in either the game where the activation of the Type 1 BB ends or in any game during RT2, and all parameters will be updated to 0, and the next game will transition to the normal zone and non-RT1. Note that which game, either the game where the activation of the Type 1 BB ends or any game during RT2, will end advantageous zone 1 in can be determined at the end of the game in which the ending conditions were satisfied in advantageous zone 1, depending on the value of the carryover parameter at the end of the game in which the ending conditions were satisfied.

After that, the game moves through the normal zone and into advantageous zone 2, and the carryover parameter value can be newly determined based on the number of games played in RT2.

Specifically, if the value of the carryover parameter at the end of a game that satisfies the ending conditions in advantageous zone 1 is a first value, advantageous zone 1 ends with the game in which the operation of Type 1 BB ends, and it is determined that the game will transition from the normal zone to advantageous zone 2 in the first game of RT2, so that four games will be played in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2. Then, based on the fact that four games have been played in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2, the value of the carryover parameter is set to the first value.
Furthermore, if the value of the carryover parameter at the end of a game that has satisfied the ending conditions in advantageous zone 1 is the second value, after the operation of Type 1 BB has finished, it is determined that advantageous zone 1 will end in the first game of RT2 and that the game will transition from the normal zone to advantageous zone 2 in the second game of RT2, so that three games will be played in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2. Then, based on the fact that three games have been played in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2, the value of the carryover parameter is set to the second value.
In this way, the value of the carryover parameter at the time of transition to non-RT in advantageous zone 2 is configured to differ depending on the value of the carryover parameter at the end of the game when the ending conditions are met in advantageous zone 1.

In this way, by changing the number of times RT2 is played at the start of the next advantageous period depending on the value of the carryover parameter in one advantageous period, it is possible to roughly determine the value of the carryover parameter at the end of the previous advantageous period based on the number of times RT2 is played at the start of the advantageous period, and the value of the carryover parameter can be indirectly carried over to the next advantageous period.

In this embodiment, the timing for determining whether the advantageous zone 1 ends in the game where the operation of the Type 1 BB ends or in any of the games during RT2 is the end of the game where the ending conditions are met in the advantageous zone 1, but it is not limited to this. It may also be the end of the game where a predetermined condition is met in the advantageous zone 1 (for example, the value of the MY counter exceeds a predetermined value (for example, a value less than the upper limit of the MY counter, such as 2350)), or the end of the game where the Type 1 BB symbol combination stops after the predetermined condition is met in the advantageous zone 1.

In addition, even if the ending conditions are not met during the AT but the advantageous zone ends after the AT ends, the carryover parameter value may be configured to be indirectly carried over to the next advantageous zone using a similar method. In this case, it is preferable to configure the system to execute a predetermined effect that encourages the stopping of a Type 1 BB symbol combination in a game in which the Type 1 BB symbol combination can be stopped after the AT ends. In this case, the system may be configured to determine which game will end the advantageous zone at the end of the final game of the AT, either the game in which the Type 1 BB operation ends or any game during RT2, depending on the value of the carryover parameter at the end of the final game of the AT.

In addition, if a player accidentally stops a Type 1 BB symbol combination when the specified effect encouraging the stop of the Type 1 BB symbol combination is not being executed, the advantageous zone will continue without ending even after the Type 1 BB operation has ended. This configuration makes it possible to prevent the advantageous zone from ending at an unintended timing. This configuration also makes it possible to prevent players from using strategies such as intentionally ending the advantageous zone depending on the game situation.

<<Example 1 of ball output specifications across advantageous zones>>
Next, using Figure 50, we will explain the case where certain points related to winning the AT are carried over to the next advantageous period as carryover parameters.

The specified points related to winning the AT are managed by a specified counter, the details of which will be omitted, and are accumulated when an event unfavorable to the player occurs during gameplay, such as when a consecutive performance fails or a CZ fails. When the points reach 100, specified benefits such as winning the AT or adding to the remaining AT period are awarded.

Pattern A in Figure 50 shows the case where the specified points for winning the AT are 0 to 30 points at the end of a game in which the ending conditions are met in advantageous zone 1.

In pattern A of Figure 50, advantageous zone 1 ends with the game in which the activation of Type 1 BB is completed, and the first game of RT2 determines the transition from the normal zone to advantageous zone 2, so four games are played in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2. Then, based on the fact that four games have been played in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2, the specified points related to winning the AT are set to 30.

Pattern B in Figure 50 shows the case where the predetermined points for winning the AT are 31 to 50 points at the end of a game in which the ending conditions are met in advantageous zone 1.

In pattern B in Figure 50, after the activation of Type 1 BB has finished, the first play of RT2 ends advantageous zone 1, and the second play of RT2 determines the transition from the normal zone to advantageous zone 2, so three plays are executed in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2. Then, based on the fact that three plays have been executed in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2, the specified points related to winning the AT are set to 50.

Pattern C in Figure 50 shows a case where the predetermined points for winning the AT are 51 to 70 points at the end of a game in which the ending conditions are met in advantageous zone 1.

In pattern C of Figure 50, after the activation of Type 1 BB has finished, the second play of RT2 ends advantageous zone 1, and the third play of RT2 determines the transition from the normal zone to advantageous zone 2, so two plays are executed in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2. Then, based on the fact that two plays have been executed in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2, the specified points related to winning the AT are set to 70.

Pattern D in Figure 50 shows a case where the predetermined points for winning the AT are 71 to 100 points at the end of a game in which the ending conditions are met in advantageous zone 1.

In pattern D of Figure 50, after the activation of Type 1 BB has finished, advantageous zone 1 ends on the third play of RT2, and it is determined that the transition from the normal zone to advantageous zone 2 will occur on the fourth play of RT2, so one play is executed in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2. Then, based on the fact that one play has been executed in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2, the specified points related to winning the AT are set to 100.

<<Example 2 of ball output specifications across advantageous zones>>
Next, using Figure 51, we will explain the case where a specified mode related to winning the AT is carried over to the next advantageous period as a carryover parameter.

Details of the predetermined modes for winning the AT are omitted, but there are four modes: Normal A, Normal B, Heaven Preparation, and Heaven, and the expected probability of winning the AT in the general advantageous zone state differs depending on which mode you are in.

Pattern A in Figure 51 shows the case where the player is in normal A at the end of a game in which the ending conditions are met in advantageous zone 1.

In pattern A in Figure 51, advantageous zone 1 ends with the game in which the activation of Type 1 BB ends, and the first game of RT2 determines the transition from the normal zone to advantageous zone 2, so four games are played in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2. Then, based on the fact that four games have been played in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2, normal A is set as the predetermined mode for winning the AT.

Pattern B in Figure 51 shows the case where the player is in normal B at the end of a game in which the ending conditions are met in advantageous zone 1.

In pattern B in Figure 51, after the activation of Type 1 BB has finished, the first play of RT2 ends advantageous zone 1, and the second play of RT2 determines the transition from the normal zone to advantageous zone 2, so three plays are executed in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2. Then, based on the fact that three plays have been executed in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2, normal B is set as the predetermined mode for winning the AT.

Pattern C in Figure 51 shows the case where the player is in Heaven Preparation at the end of a game in which the ending conditions are met in Advantageous Zone 1.

In pattern C of Figure 51, after the activation of Type 1 BB has finished, advantageous zone 1 ends with the second play of RT2, and it is determined that the transition from the normal zone to advantageous zone 2 will occur with the third play of RT2, so two plays will be executed in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2. Then, based on the fact that two plays have been executed in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2, heaven preparation is set as a predetermined mode related to winning the AT.

Pattern D in Figure 51 shows the case where the player is in heaven at the end of a game in which the ending conditions are met.

In pattern D in Figure 51, after the activation of Type 1 BB has finished, advantageous zone 1 ends on the third play of RT2, and it is determined that the transition from the normal zone to advantageous zone 2 will occur on the fourth play of RT2, so one play is executed in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2. Then, based on the fact that one play has been executed in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2, heaven is set as the predetermined mode for winning the AT.

<<Example 3 of ball output specifications across advantageous zones>>
Next, using Figure 52, we will explain the case where specified information regarding the AT execution period is carried over to the next advantageous period as a carryover parameter.

Here, the RT2 play that will end the advantageous zone is determined based on the number of remaining stocks in the AT at the end of the advantageous zone, but if the remaining stocks in the AT are configured to be cleared when the ending conditions are met, the RT2 play that will end the advantageous zone can also be determined based on the number of remaining stocks in the AT when the ending conditions are met. Also, rather than the number of remaining stocks in the AT, the carryover parameter for a game number-managed AT can be the number of remaining games in the AT, or the carryover parameter for a difference-number-managed AT can be the number of remaining wins that can be won in the AT.

The number of remaining stocks in an AT is information regarding the remaining period of the AT in a so-called set-managed AT; details will be omitted, but for example, in the case of an AT that lasts for 50 games per set, if there are remaining stocks after 50 games of the AT, the AT will move on to the next set, and if there are no remaining stocks, a lottery to continue the AT is held and if there is no winner, the AT will end.

Pattern A in Figure 52 shows the case where the remaining stock number in the AT is 0 at the end of a game in which the ending conditions are met in advantageous zone 1.

In pattern A of Figure 52, it is decided that advantageous zone 1 will end in the game in which the activation of Type 1 BB has ended, and it is decided to transition from the normal zone to advantageous zone 2 in the first game of RT2, so four games will be played in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2. Then, based on the fact that four games have been played in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2, the remaining stock number in the AT is set to 0 as predetermined information regarding the execution period of the AT.

Pattern B in Figure 52 shows the case where the remaining stock in the AT is 1 at the end of a game in which the ending conditions are met in advantageous zone 1.

In pattern B of Figure 52, after the activation of Type 1 BB has finished, it is decided to end advantageous zone 1 in the first play of RT2, and it is decided to transition from the normal zone to advantageous zone 2 in the second play of RT2, so three plays will be executed in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2. Then, based on the fact that three plays have been executed in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2, the remaining stock number in the AT is set to 1 as predetermined information regarding the execution period of the AT.

Pattern C in Figure 52 shows the case where the remaining stock number in the AT is 2 at the end of a game in which the ending conditions are met in advantageous zone 1.

In pattern C of Figure 52, after the activation of Type 1 BB has finished, it is decided to end advantageous zone 1 in the second play of RT2, and it is decided to transition from the normal zone to advantageous zone 2 in the third play of RT2, so two plays are executed in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2. Then, based on the fact that two plays have been executed in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2, the remaining stock number of the AT is set to 2 as predetermined information regarding the execution period of the AT.

Pattern D in Figure 52 shows the case where the remaining stock number in the AT is 3 or more at the end of a game in which the ending conditions are met in advantageous zone 1.

In pattern D of Figure 52, after the activation of Type 1 BB has finished, it is decided to end advantageous zone 1 on the third play of RT2, and it is decided to transition from the normal zone to advantageous zone 2 on the fourth play of RT2, so one play is executed in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2. Then, based on the fact that one play is executed in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2, the remaining stock number of the AT is set to 3 as predetermined information regarding the execution period of the AT.

By configuring the above specific examples 1 to 3, the values of the carried-over parameters in one advantageous zone can be indirectly carried over to the next advantageous zone, preventing the carried-over parameters in one advantageous zone from being initialized by the initialization process at the end of the advantageous zone, which would result in the player suffering a loss. Furthermore, it is possible to create an incentive to continue playing even when one advantageous zone ends and the game moves on to the next advantageous zone.

As shown in Figures 50 to 52, the timing at which the advantageous period ends is delayed the larger the carryover parameter value, but this is because there is a 4/65536 probability that the normal period will continue. For example, in pattern B in Figure 50, the specified point related to winning the AT is set to 50 at the start of advantageous period 2, but if the normal period continues for two plays, two plays will be executed in RT2 at the start of advantageous period 2, so the specified point related to winning the AT is set to 70. In this way, by configuring the timing at which the advantageous period ends to be delayed the larger the carryover parameter value, it is possible to prevent the player from losing money even if the normal period happens to continue for more than two plays.

The system may also be configured so that the timing of ending the advantageous period is earlier the larger the carryover parameter value. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent the gaming facility from incurring losses even if the normal period happens to continue for two games.

Note that while RT2 is configured to end after five plays, the number of plays after which RT2 ends can be set appropriately depending on the carryover parameters you wish to indirectly carry over to the next advantageous period.

In addition, by increasing the number of games that will end RT2, it is also possible to indirectly carry over multiple carryover parameters to the next advantageous period.
For example, any one of the specified points related to winning the AT, the specified mode related to winning the AT, and the specified information related to the remaining period of the AT may be used as a carryover parameter, any two of them may be used as carryover parameters, or all three may be used as carryover parameters.
It should be noted that carry-over parameters may be set to four or more in addition to the three described above.

As described above, we have explained a method of indirectly carrying over a specified parameter that affects the performance of the instruction function in one advantageous zone to the next advantageous zone using RT2 (a finite RT after the end of Type 1 BB), but by using RT2 to connect multiple advantageous zones, it is also possible to award a player gaming media that exceeds the upper limit value of the advantageous zone.
This will be explained below with reference to Figures 88 and 89.

<<Example 4 of ball output specifications across advantageous zones>>
Here, using Figure 88, we will explain an example of granting a player gaming media exceeding the upper limit of the difference in the number of gaming media (gaming value) in one advantageous zone when a specific flag is won in the first advantageous zone after the setting is changed (for example, this refers to a game in which a 4/65536 role is won or a game in which a 4/65536 role is won and a specified ball payout lottery is won; winning a specific flag can be referred to as a case in which specific conditions are met).

In the example shown in Figure 88, it is configured so that it can determine which game will end the advantageous period: the game at which the operation of Type 1 BB ends, or any game during RT2, based on the value stored in a specified storage means (also called an RT2 counter) that can store the number of games played in RT2 at the start of one advantageous period.

The RT2 counter value may be configured to count the number of plays performed in RT2 at the start of one advantageous period, or to store the remaining number of plays in RT2 at the start of one advantageous period. The RT2 counter value is configured to be initialized at the end of the advantageous period.

In addition, RT2 is configured to end after five games have been played.

Furthermore, during play in the normal zone, if the player is in an RT state (non-RT1, non-RT2, RT2) in which a transition to an advantageous zone can be determined, the transition to the advantageous zone is determined with approximately a 1/1 chance based on the results of the internal lottery (not based on the RT state). Note that in this embodiment, as shown in Figure 21, a transition to the advantageous zone is not determined during a Type 1 BB, but the configuration is not limited to this and a transition to the advantageous zone may be determined with approximately a 1/1 chance based on the results of the internal lottery even during a Type 1 BB, or a transition to the advantageous zone may be determined with a probability lower than approximately 1/1 (such as 1/10) based on the results of the internal lottery.

In the example shown in FIG. 88, first, in advantageous zone 1 (the first advantageous zone after the setting change), if a specific flag is hit (a specific condition is met), the AT is executed until the difference in the number of gaming media in advantageous zone 1 exceeds a predetermined value (e.g., 2350). After the difference in the number of gaming media exceeds the predetermined value, in a game in which a Type 1 BB symbol combination can be stopped, a predetermined effect is executed to prompt the player to stop the Type 1 BB symbol combination. Here, the predetermined effect prompting the player to stop the Type 1 BB symbol combination can be any effect that the player can determine is appropriate to stop the Type 1 BB symbol combination, such as displaying an image such as "Aim for 7!". If the player operates the stop switch in a predetermined manner in accordance with the predetermined effect prompting the player to stop the Type 1 BB symbol combination, the player can stop the Type 1 BB symbol combination (win). Note that advantageous zone 1 is the first advantageous zone after the setting change, and since the game starts in a non-RT and non-Type 1 BB state after the setting change, the value of the RT2 counter in advantageous zone 1 is 0. Furthermore, even if a predetermined effect is executed to prompt the stopping of a Type 1 BB symbol combination, if the stop switch is operated in a specific manner different from the predetermined manner without following the predetermined effect to prompt the stopping of a Type 1 BB symbol combination, the Type 1 BB symbol combination cannot be stopped (a prize will be awarded). In such a case, the predetermined effect to prompt the stopping of a Type 1 BB symbol combination will be executed again in a subsequent game in which the Type 1 BB symbol combination can be stopped.

After that, if the player operates the stop switch in a predetermined manner in accordance with a predetermined effect that prompts the player to stop the Type 1 BB symbol combination, the Type 1 BB symbol combination will stop (a win) and the Type 1 BB operation will begin.

After that, advantageous zone 1 ends with a game that meets the end conditions for Type 1 BB (a game in which the operation of Type 1 BB ends) based on the RT2 counter value being 0. Then, transition to advantageous zone 2 is determined with the game following the game that ended advantageous zone 1 (the first game of RT2 (a game in the normal zone)). After that, four games are played in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2, so the value of the RT2 counter in advantageous zone 2 becomes 4.

In advantageous zone 2, when transitioning to non-RT, AT is executed until the difference in the number of gaming media in advantageous zone 2 exceeds a predetermined value based on the RT2 counter value being 4, and in a game in which the Type 1 BB symbol combination can be stopped after the difference in the number of gaming media exceeds the predetermined value, a predetermined effect is executed to prompt the stopping of the Type 1 BB symbol combination. When the player operates the stop switch in a predetermined manner in accordance with the predetermined effect to prompt the stopping of the Type 1 BB symbol combination, the Type 1 BB symbol combination is stopped (a win) and the Type 1 BB operation begins.

After that, based on the RT2 counter value being 4, advantageous zone 2 ends with the first play of RT2. Then, the transition to advantageous zone 3 is determined with the play following the play that ended advantageous zone 2 (the second play of RT2). After that, three plays are executed in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 3, so the RT2 counter value in advantageous zone 3 becomes 3.

In advantageous zone 3, when transitioning to non-RT, AT is executed until the difference in the number of gaming media in advantageous zone 3 exceeds a predetermined value based on the RT2 counter value being 3, and in a game in which the Type 1 BB symbol combination can be stopped after the difference in the number of gaming media exceeds the predetermined value, a predetermined effect is executed to prompt the stopping of the Type 1 BB symbol combination. When the player operates the stop switch in a predetermined manner in accordance with the predetermined effect to prompt the stopping of the Type 1 BB symbol combination, the Type 1 BB symbol combination is stopped (a win) and the Type 1 BB operation begins.

After that, based on the RT2 counter value being 3, advantageous zone 3 ends with the second play of RT2. Then, the transition to advantageous zone 4 is determined with the play following the play that ends advantageous zone 3 (the third play of RT2). After that, two plays are executed in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 4, so the RT2 counter value in advantageous zone 4 becomes 2.

In advantageous zone 4, when a transition to non-RT occurs, the AT is executed based on the RT2 counter value being 2 until the difference in the number of gaming media in advantageous zone 4 exceeds a predetermined value. After the difference in the number of gaming media exceeds the predetermined value, a game in which a Type 1 BB symbol combination can be stopped is played, and a predetermined effect is executed to prompt the stopping of the Type 1 BB symbol combination. When the player operates the stop switch in a predetermined manner in accordance with the predetermined effect prompting the stopping of the Type 1 BB symbol combination, the Type 1 BB symbol combination is stopped (a prize is won) and the Type 1 BB operation is initiated. A Type 1 BB is then won.

After that, based on the RT2 counter value being 2, advantageous zone 4 ends with the third play of RT2. Then, the transition to advantageous zone 5 is determined with the play following the play that ends advantageous zone 4 (the fourth play of RT2). After that, one play is executed in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 5, so the RT2 counter value in advantageous zone 5 becomes 1.

In advantageous zone 5, the lottery state for the AT is set to a predetermined suppressed state based on the RT2 counter value being 1. The predetermined suppressed state may be configured to allow a win in the AT, but is configured so that the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone does not exceed a predetermined value. In other words, the predetermined suppressed state is controlled so that the advantageous zone does not end when the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone exceeds an upper limit (e.g., 2400). Note that, in order to maintain the predetermined suppressed state so as to prevent excessive gambling, it is preferable to configure the advantageous zone not to end when a predetermined number of plays have been played, but it is also possible to configure the predetermined suppressed state to end by setting an upper limit (e.g., 4000) based on the number of plays in the advantageous zone.

In this way, the system is configured to be able to determine, based on the value of the RT2 counter, whether the advantageous zone will end in the game where the operation of Type 1 BB ends or in the game during RT2. Furthermore, the system is configured to be able to determine, based on the value of the RT2 counter, whether to run the AT until the difference in the number of gaming media exceeds a predetermined value, or to place the lottery state related to the AT in a predetermined suppressed state. In other words, the system is configured to be able to determine the expectation level related to the AT (the degree of benefit to be awarded to the player) based on the value of the RT2 counter. Specifically, when the value of the RT2 counter is 1, the system is configured to enter a predetermined suppressed state, and when the value of the RT2 counter is other than 1, the system is configured not to enter the predetermined suppressed state, and to run the AT until the difference in the number of gaming media exceeds a predetermined value. It should be noted that, regardless of whether the predetermined suppressed state is entered, the expectation levels related to the AT, such as the expectation level of winning the AT, the expectation level of additional winnings during the AT, and the expectation level of continuing the AT, may also be configured to be able to be determined based on the value of the RT2 counter.

This configuration makes it possible to award gaming media across multiple advantageous zones based on winning a specific flag, and allows players to be awarded gaming media that exceed the upper limit of gaming media that can be awarded in a single advantageous zone, thereby eliminating the negative image of gaming machines equipped with advantageous zones that only allow a maximum of 2,400 coins to be won in a single win. Furthermore, a predetermined suppression state is imposed in the final advantageous zone (corresponding to advantageous zone 5 described above) to which players move based on winning a specific flag, preventing excessive gambling.

In addition, it may be configured so that the advantageous zone does not occur in the game in which the operation of the Type 1 BB ends, and the advantageous zone ends only in the game during RT2, and it may be configured so that it is possible to determine in which game during RT2 the advantageous zone ends based on the value of the RT2 counter. In this case, if a specific flag is hit in advantageous zone 1, advantageous zone 1 ends in the first game of RT2, advantageous zone 2 ends in the second game of RT2, advantageous zone 3 ends in the third game of RT2, and the value of the RT2 counter for advantageous zone 4 becomes 1, so that advantageous zone 4 enters a predetermined suppressed state.
By configuring it in this way, the RT state when the advantageous period ends will be one of RT2, so processing does not become complicated.

Furthermore, in a situation where a predetermined effect that prompts the stopping of a Type 1 BB symbol combination is not being executed, if a player mistakenly wins a Type 1 BB, predetermined information indicating that a Type 1 BB has been mistakenly won is stored in a predetermined RWM, and when predetermined information indicating that a Type 1 BB has been mistakenly won is stored, the advantageous zone is configured not to end even after the operation of the Type 1 BB has ended regardless of the value of the RT2 counter, and the value of the RT2 counter is configured not to be updated in RT2 after the operation of the mistakenly won Type 1 BB has ended. Note that the predetermined information indicating that a Type 1 BB has been mistakenly won is configured to be initialized when a game transitions from RT2 to non-RT.
By configuring in this way, even if the player accidentally wins the first type BB, the player will not suffer any loss.

In addition, RT2 is configured to end after five plays, but the number of plays after which RT2 ends can be set as appropriate.

In addition, in the example of Figure 88, after a specific flag is won, the AT is configured to start immediately upon transition from RT2 to non-RT, but this is not limited to this, and the AT may also be configured to start after a predetermined number of premonition games (non-AT games) have passed.

<<Example 5 of ball output specifications across advantageous zones>>
Here, using Figure 89, we will explain an example of granting a player gaming media exceeding the upper limit of the difference in the number of gaming media (gaming value) in one advantageous zone when a specific flag is won in the first advantageous zone after the setting is changed (for example, this refers to a game in which a 4/65536 role is won or a game in which a 4/65536 role is won and a specified ball payout lottery is won; winning a specific flag can be referred to as a case in which specific conditions are met).

In the example shown in Figure 89, the AT lottery state can be determined based on the RT state in which the player remains, with reference to the RT state. When the RT state is RT2 (a finite RT after the end of Type 1 BB operation), the AT lottery state is configured to be a predetermined preferential state (also referred to as an ultra-preferential state). In the ultra-preferential state, if the player is not in the AT, the AT will be won regardless of the winning combination, or the player will have a higher probability of winning the AT compared to a predetermined gaming state (for example, a specific gaming state different from the ultra-preferential state). Also, if the player is in the AT, the AT is configured to continue until the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone exceeds the upper limit (2400). The AT lottery state refers to a state that affects the results of the AT lottery, such as the AT transition lottery (also referred to as the AT initial win lottery), AT additional lottery, updating the AT termination conditions (adding/subtracting the number of AT plays, adding/subtracting the number of AT execution notifications), and AT execution (notifying the operation mode).

RT2 is configured to end after 2000 plays have been played.

In addition, the advantageous period does not end after a predetermined number of plays have been played, but rather ends when the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous period exceeds an upper limit (2400) or when an arbitrary termination condition is met.

In addition, regardless of the lottery status regarding the AT, the AT is configured to be executed as soon as an advantageous zone other than advantageous zone 1 begins. The AT may also be configured to be executed after a predetermined number of premonition games (e.g., 32 games) have been played.

Furthermore, advantageous zone 1 is an advantageous zone that is determined to be entered during play in the normal zone and not during RT1 (not during RT and not inside Type 1 BB). Specifically, it is the first advantageous zone after the setting is changed. Furthermore, advantageous zones 2 to 5 are advantageous zones other than the first after the setting is changed. A flag (referred to as the advantageous zone 1 flag) for distinguishing advantageous zone 1 from advantageous zones other than advantageous zone 1 is configured to be storable in a specified memory area, and advantageous zone 1 is configured to be distinguished from advantageous zones other than advantageous zone 1 based on the advantageous zone 1 flag. Furthermore, the advantageous zone 1 flag is configured to be initialized when the advantageous zone ends.

Here, we will explain the specific method for distinguishing between advantageous zone 1 and advantageous zones other than advantageous zone 1. Note that the example shown in Figure 89 is configured so that a transition to an advantageous zone can be determined even in the event of a single win on Type 1 BB.

In the example shown in Figure 89, a single win of Type 1 BB occurs in the normal section, followed by Replay -C (+Type 1 BB), Replay -D (+Type 1 BB), Replay -E (+Type 1 BB), Replay -F (+Type 1 BB), Replay -G (+Type 1 BB), Replay -H (+Type 1 BB), Replay -I (+Type 1 BB), Replay -J (+Type 1 BB), Winning -D (+Type 1 BB), Winning -E (+Type 1 BB), Winning -F (+Type 1 If the player wins any of the following prizes, it is configured so that if the RT state of the game is non-RT1, it will decide to move to the advantageous zone, and if the RT state of the game is non-RT2 or RT2, it will not decide to move to the advantageous zone. Additionally, if you win any of the following in the normal zone: WIN-A1, WIN-A2, WIN-A3, WIN-A4, WIN-A5, WIN-A6, WIN-B1, WIN-B2, WIN-B3, WIN-B4, WIN-B5, WIN-B6, WIN-C1, WIN-C2, WIN-C3, WIN-C4, WIN-C5, WIN-C6, the system is configured to determine a transition to the advantageous zone regardless of the RT status of that game.

Therefore, the following will be awarded: a single win of Type 1 BB, replay -C (+Type 1 BB), replay -D (+Type 1 BB), replay -E (+Type 1 BB), replay -F (+Type 1 BB), replay -G (+Type 1 BB), replay -H (+Type 1 BB), replay -I (+Type 1 BB), replay -J (+Type 1 BB), winning -D (+Type 1 BB), winning -E (+Type 1 BB), winning -F (+Type 1 BB), winning -G (+Type 1 BB), winning - If a transition to a favorable zone is determined in a game in which either H (+1 type BB), winning -I (+1 type BB), winning -J (+1 type BB), or winning -K (+1 type BB) is won (a game in which a type 1 BB is won), the favorable zone is determined to be a favorable zone to which a transition was determined during non-RT1, so it is determined to be favorable zone 1, and the favorable zone 1 flag is turned on in the game in which a transition to a favorable zone is determined.
In addition, there are cases where the game where RT2 ends and the game where the advantageous zone ends overlap, and in this case, the next game may be in the normal zone and non-RT1, so there is a risk that the transition to the advantageous zone will be decided during non-RT1 other than immediately after the setting change, but there are also cases where the single win of 1 type BB, re-play -C (+1 type BB), re-play -D (+1 type BB), re-play -E (+1 type BB), re-play -F (+1 type BB), re-play -G (+1 type BB), re-play -H (+1 type BB), re-play -I (+1 type BB), Replay -J (+1 type BB), Prize -D (+1 type BB), Prize -E (+1 type BB), Prize -F (+1 type BB), Prize -G (+1 type BB), Prize -H (+1 type BB), Prize -I (+1 type BB), Prize -J (+1 type BB), Prize -K (+1 type BB) are designed to be 21,918/65,536 (approximately 1/3) as shown in Figure 19, so the probability of remaining in non-RT1 even after 2,000 games have been played and RT2 has ended is close to zero. Therefore, the advantageous zone to which a transition is decided during non-RT1 is considered to be the first advantageous zone after the setting change.

Furthermore, if a transition to a favorable zone is determined in a game in which the player wins any of the following: Win-A1, Win-A2, Win-A3, Win-A4, Win-A5, Win-A6, Win-B1, Win-B2, Win-B3, Win-B4, Win-B5, Win-B6, Win-C1, Win-C2, Win-C3, Win-C4, Win-C5, or Win-C6, it is not possible to determine whether the favorable zone in question is favorable zone 1 or a favorable zone other than favorable zone 1 in the game in which a transition to the favorable zone is determined. Therefore, the system is configured to refer to the RT state and the operating state of the Type 1 BB condition device in the first game of the favorable zone. Then, if the first game of the favorable zone is non-RT1 (non-RT and not inside Type 1 BB), it is confirmed that the favorable zone is an favorable zone to which a transition was determined during a non-RT1, so it is determined to be favorable zone 1 and the favorable zone 1 flag is turned on. Furthermore, if the first play in the advantageous zone is non-RT2 (non-RT and within Type 1 BB) or RT2, it is determined that the advantageous zone is not an advantageous zone to which a transition was determined during non-RT1, so it is determined to be an advantageous zone other than advantageous zone 1, and the advantageous zone 1 flag is not turned on.

In addition, the system is configured so that the advantageous zone does not end while Type 1 BB is in operation, and the transition to the advantageous zone is not determined while Type 1 BB is in operation, so the transition to the advantageous zone is determined when playing non-RT1, non-RT2, or RT2.

By controlling the advantageous zone 1 flag in this way, advantageous zone 1 is distinguished from advantageous zones other than advantageous zone 1.

In the example shown in Figure 89, first, during the AT in advantageous zone 1 (the first advantageous zone after the setting change), if a specific flag is hit (specific conditions are met), a predetermined effect is executed to prompt the stopping of the Type 1 BB symbol combination in a game in which the Type 1 BB symbol combination can be stopped. When the player operates the stop switch in a predetermined manner in accordance with the predetermined effect to prompt the stopping of the Type 1 BB symbol combination, the Type 1 BB symbol combination is stopped (a win is made) and the Type 1 BB operation begins.

Next, when the Type 1 BB operation ends, the next game will transition to RT2. In RT2, the lottery state for the AT will become a super-favorable state, and the AT will continue until the difference in the number of gaming media in advantageous zone 1 exceeds the upper limit (2400), and when the difference in the number of gaming media in advantageous zone 1 exceeds the upper limit, advantageous zone 1 will end.

Next, once the conditions for starting the advantageous zone are met after passing through the normal zone (when a decision is made to move to the advantageous zone), advantageous zone 2 begins. Since the RT state is still RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2, the lottery state for the AT becomes a super preferential state, and the AT continues until the difference in the number of gaming media in advantageous zone 2 exceeds the upper limit, and once the difference in the number of gaming media in advantageous zone 2 exceeds the upper limit, advantageous zone 2 ends.

Next, once the conditions for starting the advantageous zone are met after passing through the normal zone (when a decision is made to move to the advantageous zone), advantageous zone 3 begins. Since the RT state is still RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 3, the lottery state for the AT becomes a super preferential state, and the AT continues until the difference in the number of gaming media in advantageous zone 3 exceeds the upper limit, and once the difference in the number of gaming media in advantageous zone 3 exceeds the upper limit, advantageous zone 3 ends.

Next, once the conditions for starting the advantageous zone are met after passing through the normal zone (when a decision is made to move to the advantageous zone), advantageous zone 4 begins. Since the RT state is still RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 4, the lottery state for the AT becomes a super preferential state, and the AT continues until the difference in the number of gaming media in advantageous zone 4 exceeds the upper limit, and once the difference in the number of gaming media in advantageous zone 4 exceeds the upper limit, advantageous zone 4 ends.

Next, once the conditions for starting the advantageous zone are met after passing through the normal zone (when a decision is made to transition to the advantageous zone), advantageous zone 5 begins. Even at the start of advantageous zone 5, the RT state is still RT2, so the lottery state for the AT is in the super-favorable state and the AT is executed, but RT2 ends during a certain game within advantageous zone 5 and the system transitions to non-RT. When transitioning from RT2 to non-RT, the state related to the AT is controlled to a predetermined suppression state. In the predetermined suppression state, the system may be configured to allow a win in the AT, but is configured so that the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone does not exceed a predetermined value. In other words, in the predetermined suppression state, the system is controlled so that the advantageous zone does not end when the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone exceeds the upper limit. Furthermore, in the predetermined suppression state, a specific flag is not drawn, or a lottery for a specific flag is executed but no winning is made.

After that, in a specified suppression state, the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone is controlled so that it does not exceed the upper limit value, so if the AT termination condition is met in a certain game in advantageous zone 5, it becomes non-AT, and advantageous zone 5 is controlled not to end thereafter.

In this way, the example shown in Figure 89 is configured so that the lottery state for AT can be determined based on the RT state in which the player remains by referencing the RT state, and when the RT state is RT2 (finite RT after the end of Type 1 BB operation), the lottery state for AT is configured to be a super preferential state. Also, if there is no RT in advantageous zone 1 (the first advantageous zone after the setting change), the lottery state for AT is configured to be a normal state, and if there is no RT in an advantageous zone other than advantageous zone 1, the lottery state for AT is configured to be a specified suppressed state.

By configuring it in this way, a Type 1 BB is awarded based on a win on a specific flag, and by controlling the RT2 transition to an ultra-preferential state after the Type 1 BB ends, it becomes possible to award gaming media across multiple advantageous zones. This allows the player to be awarded gaming media that exceed the upper limit of gaming media that can be awarded in a single advantageous zone, thereby eradicating the negative image of gaming machines equipped with advantageous zones that can only earn a maximum of 2,400 coins per win. Furthermore, when RT2 ends and the transition to non-RT occurs, a predetermined suppression state is entered, preventing excessive gambling.

It is also possible to configure the advantageous zone 1 so that the difference in the number of game media in the advantageous zone 1 exceeds the upper limit value and the advantageous zone 1 ends without winning a specific flag in the advantageous zone 1. In this case, the advantageous zone next to the advantageous zone 1 starts with an AT (or the AT is executed after a predetermined number of premonition games), but since the RT state remains non-RT, it does not become a super preferential state, and when the AT ends, it is controlled to a predetermined suppression state so that the advantageous zone does not end.
By reducing the expected value of game media to be acquired when a specific flag is not won in this way, the gambling nature of the entire gaming machine can be reduced while increasing the expected value of game media to be acquired when a specific flag is won.

In addition, during RT2 after winning a specific flag, approximately one game of normal game (non-AT game) is played each time an advantageous zone ends, but the presentation on the LCD is configured to allow the AT presentation to continue.In addition, the display of the number of wins during the AT displayed on the LCD at this time is not cleared each time an advantageous zone ends, but is configured to display the cumulative number of wins awarded across multiple advantageous zones.
By configuring in this manner, seamless presentation can be achieved even when gaming media can be awarded across multiple advantageous zones.

In addition, the system is configured so that a specific flag can be won in the advantageous zone 1, but so that a specific flag cannot be won in advantageous zones other than the advantageous zone 1.
By configuring in this way, if a specific flag is won again in the super preferential state and RT2 is reset after the end of the first type BB, the super preferential state is not substantially extended, so that excessive gambling can be prevented.

Furthermore, if a player mistakenly wins a Type 1 BB in the advantageous zone 1 without winning a specific flag, the lottery status for the AT is configured not to become an ultra-favorable state even when the game moves to RT2, and the advantageous zone is configured not to end if the difference in the number of game media in the advantageous zone exceeds the upper limit value without winning a specific flag during RT2.
Furthermore, if a player accidentally wins a Type 1 BB in a super-favorable state in a favorable zone other than favorable zone 1, RT2 is reset, but the system is configured so that the super-favorable state does not occur during the reset RT2, and so that the difference in the number of game media in the favorable zone does not exceed the upper limit value during the reset RT2, causing the favorable zone to end.
In addition, if a player accidentally wins a Type 1 BB while in a predetermined inhibited state in a favorable zone other than favorable zone 1, the predetermined inhibited state is maintained even when transitioning to RT2.
By configuring in this way, a player who unintentionally wins the first type BB by mistake will suffer a loss, but it is possible to prevent a game strategy such as intentionally winning the first type BB to acquire many game media.

Also, in a game in which a type 1 BB symbol combination can be stopped after a specific flag is hit in advantageous zone 1, a predetermined effect is executed to encourage the stopping of the type 1 BB symbol combination, but the player fails to stop the type 1 BB symbol combination, the predetermined effect is not executed again in the subsequent game, but an effect similar to that in the case where a type 1 BB symbol combination is stopped in the game in which the predetermined effect is executed is executed, the AT is continued until the difference in the number of gaming media in advantageous zone 1 exceeds the upper limit value and the termination condition of advantageous zone 1 is met, the AT is terminated when the termination condition of the AT executed at the start of the next advantageous zone is met, and thereafter the lottery state related to the AT may be set to a predetermined suppressed state. In other words, the expected acquisition value of the game value in the case where a type 1 BB is not won in a game in which the predetermined effect is executed may be configured to be smaller than the expected acquisition value of the game value in the case where a type 1 BB is won in a game in which the predetermined effect is executed.
In this way, by reducing the expected value of the game value to be acquired when the timing is unsuccessful, it is possible to increase the expected value when the timing is successful. Also, even if the timing is unsuccessful, the same effect as when the timing is successful is executed, so the effect can be progressed without making the player feel uncomfortable.

Furthermore, while the system is configured so that a specific flag is drawn during play in the AT in the advantageous zone 1, it is not limited to this; the system may also be configured so that a specific flag is drawn during play in the non-AT in the advantageous zone 1, and if the specific flag is won, a Type 1 BB is won, and when the system moves to RT2 after the Type 1 BB ends, the lottery status for the AT is changed to a super-favorable status and the AT begins.

In this embodiment, only Type 1 BB was the subject of the lottery, but instead, RB or MB may also be the subject of the lottery, or two or all of Type 1 BB, RB, and MB may also be the subject of the lottery.

<About the strike-stop difference counter that stores the difference number from when the power was turned on>
In this embodiment of the gaming machine, the number of medals inserted (sometimes referred to as the number of inserted medals, the number of bets, the number of bets, the number of bets, the number of bets, the number of inserted points, the bet points, or the number of INs) is subtracted from the number of medals paid out (sometimes referred to as the number of paid out medals, the number of awarded medals, the number of awarded medals, the number of awarded game media, the number of acquired medals, the number of acquired game media, the number of paid out points, the number of awarded points, the number of acquired game media, the number of acquired points, the number of acquired points, the number of OUTs, or the number of OUTs) to calculate a difference (a difference) for each game. A stop difference counter capable of storing the cumulative value of this difference (total difference) is provided in a predetermined RWM area. If the value of the stop difference counter exceeds a predetermined value (e.g., 19,000), a process is executed to stop the game (hereinafter also referred to as "stop processing"). The process of determining whether the value of the stop difference counter exceeds the predetermined value is referred to as the stop difference counter determination process. Furthermore, the process of updating the stop difference counter before the stop process is executed and the process related to the judgment are collectively referred to as the stop monitoring process.

Note that the following explanation mainly focuses on an example in which the stop processing is executed when the difference in the number of gaming media exceeds a predetermined value, with the start point (0) being the time when the power is turned on, but this is not limited to this. For example, the point at which the player's ball output is lowest after the power is turned on may be set as the reference point (0), and the stop processing may be executed when the difference in the number of gaming media from that reference point exceeds a predetermined value. In other words, the stop processing may be executed by MY.

For example, if, after power is turned on, the point at which the player's ball output is at its lowest is set as the reference (0) and the stop processing is executed when the difference in the number of gaming media from that reference exceeds a predetermined value, the stop difference counter can store the difference in the number of gaming media from the reference when the point at which the player's ball output is at its lowest (0), or a value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media from the reference when the point at which the player's ball output is at its lowest (0) (a value that allows the difference in the number of gaming media from the reference when the point at which the player's ball output is at its lowest (0) to be determined).

This end-of-game monitoring process is performed not only in advantageous zones but also in normal zones (it is performed regardless of the play zone).

For example, in a certain game in which the total number of medals paid out since power-on is 50,001 and the total number of medals inserted since power-on is 31,000, the value of the stop difference counter exceeds 19,000, so information indicating that the stop condition has been met for that game is stored in the stop flag memory area, making it possible to execute the stop process.

The limit flag storage area is an area within the RWM area of the main control board. For example, if the difference in the number of gaming media since power-on exceeds 19,000, a predetermined value (e.g., a predetermined number such as "1" or "255") is stored in the limit flag storage area as information indicating that the limit condition has been met.

Then, if information indicating that the halt condition has been met is stored in the halt flag storage area, the halt process can be executed.

The information stored in the limit flag storage area is not initialized by simply turning the power on without changing the settings (normal power on) or turning the power off normally (turning the power switch off). Furthermore, the information stored in the limit flag storage area is not initialized by clearing the RWM at the end of the favorable period. An example of turning the power on without changing the settings would be turning the power switch on when the setting key switch is off.

In other words, if the power is turned off (the power switch is turned off) while the stop process is being executed, and then the power is turned on again without changing the settings, the stop process will not be canceled and the stop process will be executed. Also, even if the game at the end of the advantageous zone is a game that meets the stop conditions, clearing the RWM at the end of the advantageous zone will not initialize the value of the stop difference counter related to the stop conditions, nor will it clear the information stored in the stop flag memory area, and the stop process will be executed.

The information stored in the stop flag memory area can be initialized by powering on with a setting change (RWM clear process with setting change) (information indicating that the stop conditions have been met can be cleared).

Alternatively, an RWM clear switch separate from the setting key switch may be provided, and the information stored in the stop flag storage area may be cleared even when the power is turned on while the RWM clear switch is operated (when the RWM clear switch is on). If the power is turned on while the RWM clear switch is operated, the device will not enter setting change mode, but the RWM clear process associated with the RWM clear switch will be performed.

The RWM clear switch may also serve as the reset switch. In other words, if the power is turned on while the reset switch is being operated (while the reset switch is on), the information stored in the termination flag storage area may be cleared.

As described above, if the power is turned off while the game limit process is being executed and then turned on again with a setting change, the game will enter setting change mode. After that, once the conditions for terminating setting change mode are met and the setting change mode is terminated, the game limit process will not be executed and the game will become playable (a situation in which betting is possible).

In addition, the information stored in the stop flag storage area is not initialized by operating a reset switch that can clear certain error conditions (door open error, medal retention error, etc.), and the stop processing is executed.

In other words, even if the reset switch is operated while the stop process is being executed, the stop process will not be canceled and will continue to be executed.

Note that while the conditions for clearing and not clearing the information stored in the cap flag storage area have been explained here, the conditions for clearing and not clearing the information stored in the temporary cap flag storage area, described below, are similar to the conditions for clearing and not clearing the information stored in the cap flag storage area.

The stop processing may be any or all of the following: not adding bets or credits when medals are inserted; turning off the blocker so that bets or credits are not added even when medals are inserted; not executing bet processing even when operation of the MAX BET switch or 1 BET switch is accepted; not accepting operation of the MAX BET switch or 1 BET switch; not executing reel spin start processing even when operation of the START switch is accepted; not accepting operation of the START switch; not executing reel stop processing even when operation of the STOP switch is accepted; or not accepting operation of the STOP switch.

In other words, the stop processing prevents operations to start the next game (this is also referred to as stopping the progress of the game). In this way, the state in which the stop processing is being executed is sometimes referred to as the stop state or the activation of the complete function.

Even when game progress is halted by the game termination process, the operation of the settlement switch remains valid, and the settlement process can be executed. In gaming machines that do not use physical medals (so-called medal-less gaming machines), the operation of the settlement switch to move betted medals (electronic medals) to the medal count display device (a device that can store up to 16,383 medals, similar to the tray 28 of conventional gaming machines) and the operation of the counting switch to move the number of medals stored in the medal count display device to the lending unit are valid, and the process based on the operation of each switch can be executed.

When game progress is stopped by the stop processing, it cannot be released by turning the power on. Instead, the stopped game progress (stopped state) can be released by turning the power on and changing the settings, which executes the RWM initialization process. In other words, if a gaming machine enters a stopped state during the opening hours of the gaming center, that gaming machine will not be able to operate during the opening hours of that day.

In this way, if the value of the stop difference counter exceeds a predetermined value, it may cause the player to become overly gambling-minded. Therefore, by stopping the game when the value of the stop difference counter exceeds the predetermined value, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming addicted to the game.

The stop difference counter may also be referred to as a difference number counter, difference number storage means, difference number storage means, difference number storage area, difference number storage area, number of gaming media storage means, number of gaming media storage area, number of gaming medals storage means, number of gaming medals storage area, power-on MY counter, power-on MY storage means, power-on MY storage area, stop counter, stop difference number counter for stop, difference number number counter for stop, MY counter for stop, MY storage means for stop, MY storage area for stop, complete difference number counter, complete MY counter.

The value stored in the stop difference counter is configured to be initialized when the power is turned on, whether the game is in a stop state or not. In this embodiment, the initial value of the stop difference counter is 0 and it increments from that initial value, so initialization at power-on means setting the value of the stop difference counter to 0. However, if the initial value of the stop difference counter is 19,000 and it is a counter that decrements, initialization at power-on means setting the value of the stop difference counter to 19,000. Note that power-on includes not only normal power-on, but also power-on with a setting change and power-on with an RWM abnormality. Furthermore, the value stored in the stop difference counter is not initialized by the RWM initialization process executed when the conditions for ending the advantageous period (for example, MY during an advantageous period exceeding 2,400, or the number of plays during an advantageous period reaching a predetermined number) are met.

In addition, since the hit difference counter is susceptible to fraudulent initialization if it is initialized simply by turning on the power, the machine may be configured to clear the hit difference counter by turning on the power while pressing a specific switch that cannot be operated by the player, such as a settings change switch, reset switch, or RAM clear switch, when power is not being supplied.

Furthermore, if a power outage occurs when the value of the stop difference counter exceeds a predetermined value and game progress has stopped, and the power is turned on with the setting key switch 37 in the OFF position and the machine starts up normally (normal power-on), the value of the stop difference counter will be initialized, but game progress will remain stopped. This is because a stop process is executed when the value of the stop difference counter exceeds a predetermined value, and this stop process is configured to repeat the same process indefinitely using jump commands, etc., so even if a power outage occurs during the stop process and the power is turned on again, the stop process will start. Note that when the stop process is executed, an interrupt process is executed as usual, but the process will not return to the normal main loop process from the interrupt process and will instead loop through the stop process.

In addition, because interrupt processing is executed normally while the termination process is being executed, the power-off process described above can be executed normally even if an event that shuts down the power supply (for example, turning off the power switch) occurs during the termination process.

This configuration prevents unauthorized power-off and power-on operations that would allow gameplay to continue after gameplay has been halted by the game-stopping process.

The stop difference counter stores the value obtained by subtracting the number of medals inserted from the number of medals paid out for each game, and a specific example of updating the value of the stop difference counter is described below. Note that the process of updating the value of the stop difference counter is performed at a predetermined timing between after all reels have stopped and when medals for the next game can be inserted (bet for the next game can be placed). Because the process of updating the value of the stop difference counter is performed when one game has ended, the predetermined timing is sometimes referred to as when one game has ended. Also, the stop difference counter will be described as 2-byte data. Note that the "/" indicating 2-byte data separates each byte, and the number in parentheses after the binary value represents the binary value in decimal.

<When the difference between the number of medals that can be won and the number of medals that can be paid out = 00000000/01100100b (100), the number of medals that can be paid out = 00001010b (10), and the number of medals that can be inserted = 00000011b (3)>
If the value of the stop difference counter is 00000000/01100100b (100), the register calculates 00001010b (10 (number of medals paid out)) - 00000011b (3 (number of medals inserted)) = 00000111b (7) to obtain the value of the stop difference counter, and stores (updates) the result of adding the calculation result and the value of the stop difference counter. In this case, the value stored in the stop difference counter is 00000000/01101011b (107).

<When the hit/stop difference counter = 00000000/01100100b (100), the number of medals paid out = 00000000b (0), and the number of medals inserted = 00000011b (3)>
If the value of the stop difference counter is 00000000/01100100b (100), the register calculates 00000000b (0 (number of medals paid out)) - 00000011b (3 (number of medals inserted)) = -00000011b (-3), obtains the value of the stop difference counter, and stores (updates) the result of adding the calculation result and the value of the stop difference counter. In this case, the value stored in the stop difference counter is 00000000/01100001b (97).

<When the hit difference counter = 00000000/00000000b (0), the number of medals paid out = 00001010b (10), and the number of medals inserted = 00000011b (3)>
If the value of the stop difference counter is 00000000/00000000b (0), the register calculates 00001010b (10 (number of medals paid out)) - 00000011b (3 (number of medals inserted)) = 00000111b (7) to obtain the value of the stop difference counter, and stores (updates) the result of adding the calculation result and the value of the stop difference counter. In this case, the value stored in the stop difference counter is 00000000/00000111b (7).

<When the hit difference counter = 00000000/00000000b (0), the number of medals paid out = 00000000b (0), and the number of medals inserted = 00000011b (3)>
If the value of the stop difference counter is 00000000/00000000b (0), the register calculates 00000000b (0 (number of medals paid out)) - 00000011b (3 (number of medals inserted)) = -00000011b (-3), obtains the value of the stop difference counter, and stores (updates) the result of adding the calculation result and the value of the stop difference counter. In this case, the value stored in the stop difference counter is 10000000/00000011b (32771).

The calculation result explained in <When the shot difference counter = 00000000b (0), number of medals paid out = 00000000b (0), number of medals inserted = 00000011b (3)> is -00000011b (-3), but the value stored in the shot difference counter is 10000000/00000011b (32771) because a 0 in the most significant bit indicates a positive value, and a 1 in the most significant bit indicates a negative value. With a 2-byte counter, values up to 01111111/11111111 (32767) in the shot difference counter can be stored correctly without using the most significant bit. In other words, if the value of the hit/stop difference counter is 11111111/11111111b, it indicates -32767, so if it indicates -3 in the example above, it would be 10000000/00000011b.

Note that some parts of the above calculation examples have been omitted. In more detail, the current value of the stop difference counter is obtained, and a determination is made as to whether the most significant bit of the obtained stop difference counter value is 0. If the most significant bit of the obtained stop difference counter value is 0, the number of medals inserted is subtracted from the number of medals paid out, and the subtracted value is added to the obtained stop difference counter value, and the added value is updated as the value of the stop difference counter. Furthermore, if the most significant bit of the obtained stop difference counter value is 1, the number of medals inserted is subtracted from the number of medals paid out, and the subtracted value is calculated by subtracting a fixed value of 10000000/00000000b (32768) from the obtained stop difference counter value, and the subtracted value is updated as the value of the stop difference counter.

Also, if the result of calculating the value to be updated as the value of the stop difference counter is a negative value, the most significant bit of the absolute value of the result of calculating the value to be updated as the value of the stop difference counter is set to 1, and the value is updated as the value of the stop difference counter.

In addition, in each of the above calculation examples, the result of subtracting the number of inserted medals from the number of paid out medals in the register was added to the value of the acquired stop difference counter, but the order of calculations may be such that first the number of paid out medals is added to the acquired stop difference counter value, and then the number of inserted medals is subtracted from the result of that addition, or the number of inserted medals is subtracted from the acquired stop difference counter value first, and then the number of paid out medals is added from the result of that subtraction.

Furthermore, when the number of medals paid out is not 0, it means that a small role has been won and the symbol combination corresponding to the small role has stopped. Note that when a replay role has been won and the symbol combination corresponding to the replay role has stopped, the number of medals paid out may be 3 or 0. If the number of medals paid out when a replay role has been won and the symbol combination corresponding to the replay role has stopped is 3, the number of medals inserted should be 3, and if the number of medals paid out when a replay role has been won and the symbol combination corresponding to the replay role has stopped is 0, the number of medals inserted should be 0.

In addition, when a replay role is won, the update process of the stop difference number counter may be executed, or the update process of the stop difference number counter may not be executed.
Also, when a replay role is won, the stop difference number counter determination process may be executed, or the stop difference number counter determination process may not be executed.

The play difference counter does not need to be 2 bytes; it can be 3 or 4 bytes. If the play difference counter is 3 bytes, the fixed value is 10,000,000/00000000/00000000b (8388608). If the play difference counter is 4 bytes, the fixed value is 10,000,000/00000000/00000000/00000000b (2147483648). The play difference counter is initialized when the power is turned on. Therefore, even if the number of medals paid out is 0 after 10,000 plays, which corresponds to approximately one day during the arcade's business hours, the counter will only store up to -30,000 (10,000 (number of plays possible in a day) x 3 (number of medals inserted)). Therefore, 2 bytes of storage capacity for the play difference counter is sufficient.

<Another aspect of updating the stop difference counter>
The gaming machine may be equipped with a payout medal count memory area that stores the total number of payout medals since the gaming machine was powered on, a medal count memory area that stores the total number of medals inserted since the gaming machine was powered on, and a stop difference counter that stores the difference since the gaming machine was powered on, wherein the payout medal count memory area, the medal count memory area, and the stop difference counter are configured to be initialized when the power is turned on, and when updating the stop difference counter in a stop difference counter update process that is executed after one game is completed, if the result of subtracting the value stored in the medal count memory area from the value stored in the payout medal count memory area is a positive value, the result of subtracting the value stored in the medal count memory area from the value stored in the payout medal count memory area is stored in the stop difference counter, and if the result of subtracting the value stored in the medal count memory area from the value stored in the payout medal count memory area is a negative value, the stop difference counter is configured to store 0.

With this configuration, it is desirable that the payout medal count storage area, the inserted medal count storage area, and the winning/ending difference counter be 2-byte storage areas, but the payout medal count storage area may be a storage area of 2 bytes or more, the inserted medal count storage area may be a storage area of 2 bytes or more, and the winning/ending difference counter may be a storage area of 2 bytes or more.

The medal payout count storage area, medal insertion count storage area, and medal win/loss difference counter are initialized when the power is turned on, and the initialization process involves storing 0 in each storage area. This includes setting changes and RWM abnormalities when the power is turned on, as described above.

The payout medal count memory area is a memory area that stores the cumulative number of payout medals for each game, and is updated regardless of the game status or the specified number (sometimes referred to as the payout medal count memory area update process). For example, if 100 is stored in the payout medal count memory area and the Nth game is played and 10 medals are paid out, 110 will be stored in the payout medal count memory area after the Nth game is completed; if the N+1th game is played and 0 medals are paid out (no medals were paid out), 110 will be stored in the payout medal count memory area after the N+1th game is completed.

The number of inserted medals memory area is a memory area that stores the cumulative number of inserted medals for each game, and is updated regardless of the game status or the specified number (sometimes referred to as the number of inserted medals memory area update process). For example, if 50 is stored in the number of inserted medals memory area and the Nth game is played and three medals are inserted, 53 will be stored in the number of inserted medals memory area after the Nth game is completed; if the N+1th game is played and two medals are inserted, 55 will be stored in the number of paid out medals memory area after the N+1th game is completed.

The stop difference counter stores the value obtained by subtracting the value stored in the number of inserted medals memory area updated for each game from the value stored in the number of paid out medals memory area updated for each game. If the value obtained by subtracting the value stored in the number of inserted medals memory area updated for each game from the value stored in the number of paid out medals memory area updated for each game is a positive value, the value obtained by subtracting the value stored in the number of inserted medals memory area updated for each game from the value stored in the number of paid out medals memory area updated for each game is updated as the value of the stop difference counter. However, if the value obtained by subtracting the value stored in the number of inserted medals memory area updated for each game from the value stored in the number of paid out medals memory area updated for each game is a negative value, the value obtained by subtracting the value stored in the number of inserted medals memory area updated for each game is updated as the value of the stop difference counter. Therefore, the value of the stop difference counter is not necessarily the number of paid out medals minus the number of inserted medals for each game, but this is not a problem because the stop difference counter is a counter used to determine whether the stop difference counter has exceeded 19,000.

In addition, while the embodiment has been described in which 0 is stored in the stop difference counter if the value obtained by subtracting the value stored in the inserted medal count memory area updated for each game from the value stored in the paid out medal count memory area updated for each game is negative, this is not limiting. Alternatively, if the value obtained by subtracting the value stored in the inserted medal count memory area updated for each game from the value stored in the paid out medal count memory area updated for each game is negative, the stop difference counter may not be updated, a fixed value greater than 0 and less than 19,000 may be stored in the stop difference counter, a fixed value greater than 19,000 may be stored in the stop difference counter, or the value obtained by subtracting the value stored in the inserted medal count memory area updated for each game from the value stored in the paid out medal count memory area updated for each game may be stored as is.

If the value obtained by subtracting the value stored in the number of inserted medals memory area updated for each game from the value stored in the number of paid out medals memory area updated for each game is negative, the stop difference counter is not updated, or a fixed value greater than 0 and less than 19,000 is stored in the stop difference counter, the value of the stop difference counter will never exceed 19,000, even if the process of determining whether the value of the stop difference counter exceeds 19,000 is executed for each game, so the game will not be halted. Furthermore, if the value obtained by subtracting the value stored in the number of inserted medals memory area updated for each game from the value stored in the number of paid out medals memory area updated for each game is positive, the correct value is stored in the stop difference counter, so there is no problem. Alternatively, if the value obtained by subtracting the value stored in the number of inserted medals memory area updated for each game from the value stored in the number of paid out medals memory area updated for each game is negative, the process of determining whether the value of the stop difference counter exceeds 19,000 may not be executed.

If the value obtained by subtracting the value stored in the number of inserted medals memory area updated for each game from the value stored in the number of paid out medals memory area updated for each game is negative, the stop difference counter stores a fixed value of 19,000 or more, or if the value obtained by subtracting the value stored in the number of inserted medals memory area updated for each game from the value stored in the number of paid out medals memory area updated for each game is stored as is, there is a possibility that the value of the stop difference counter will exceed 19,000 if the process for determining whether the value exceeds 19,000 is performed every game. Therefore, if the value obtained by subtracting the value stored in the number of inserted medals memory area updated for each game from the value stored in the number of paid out medals memory area updated for each game is negative, there is no problem in not performing the process for determining whether the value of the stop difference counter exceeds 19,000.

The stop difference counter update process is similar to the process described above, and is executed at a predetermined timing between when all reels have stopped and when medals for the next game can be inserted (bet for the next game can be placed). The stop difference counter update process may also include the medal payout memory area update process and the medal insertion memory area update process.

<Hit-stop difference counter judgment process when a special device is continuously operating or a first-class special device is operating>
Before executing the process for determining whether the value of the hit difference counter has exceeded 19,000 as the hit difference counter judgment process, it may be possible to determine whether the reel continuous operation device is operating, whether the first type special reel is operating, or whether the reel continuous operation device or the first type special reel is operating, and if it is determined that they are operating in either case, the hit difference counter judgment process may not be executed.

This is because if play stops while the continuous device operation device or the first-class special device is operating (during a bonus), it is highly likely that the player's motivation to play will be significantly diminished. Therefore, by allowing play to continue during a bonus even if the value of the stop difference counter exceeds 19,000, and by stopping play after the bonus ends, it is possible to give the player a sense of accomplishment without diminishing their motivation to play. It can also increase the player's motivation to play and increase the number of balls won during a bonus.

Even in this configuration, the process of updating the hit difference counter is performed even when the consecutive operation device for special reels is operating or when a first-class special reels is operating. Therefore, it is preferable that the program be configured in the following order of processing: "update process for the hit difference counter" → "processing to determine whether the consecutive operation device for special reels is operating, whether a first-class special reels is operating, or whether a consecutive operation device for special reels or a first-class special reels is operating" → "stop difference counter determination process."

Also, if the value of the stop difference counter exceeds 19,000 during a bonus, and the value of the stop difference counter falls below 19,000 when the bonus ends, the game may be stopped after the bonus ends.

In this case, even during a bonus, a determination is made as to whether the value of the stop difference counter has exceeded 19,000, and if it is determined that the value of the stop difference counter has exceeded 19,000, a predetermined value (for example, any value such as "1" or "255") is stored in the temporary stop flag (temporary stop flag storage area), and at the end of the bonus, a determination is made as to whether the value of the temporary stop flag is the predetermined value, and if it is, the progress of the game is stopped. Note that if it is determined that the value of the temporary stop flag is not the predetermined value when it is determined at the end of the bonus that it is not the predetermined value, the progress of the game is not stopped. Furthermore, if the configuration is such that a predetermined value is stored in the temporary stop flag even when it is determined that the value of the stop difference counter has exceeded 19,000 when not in a bonus, one possible configuration is to determine whether the temporary stop flag is at a predetermined value after each game has ended, whether or not there is a bonus, and stop the game depending on the value of the temporary stop flag.If the configuration is such that a predetermined value is not stored in the temporary stop flag when it is determined that the value of the stop difference counter has exceeded 19,000 when not in a bonus, one possible configuration is to stop the game depending on whether the value of the stop difference counter has exceeded 19,000 after each game has ended when there is not a bonus, without determining whether or not there is a predetermined value.

The temporary stop flag is not initialized by the initialization of the RWM at power-on, but is cleared by the initialization of the RWM at power-on that involves a setting change.

In the above-described embodiment, an example was described in which game progress is not stopped even if the value of the stop difference counter exceeds 19,000 during a bonus, but this is not limiting and game progress may not be stopped even if the value of the stop difference counter exceeds 19,000 during an AT. However, as mentioned above, the AT's termination conditions can be extended (changed), so game progress is not stopped only in ATs in which the termination conditions are not extended.

Note that when there are multiple prescribed numbers for starting play, there are cases where the processing related to the instruction function cannot be executed with one of the prescribed numbers, and when the processing related to the instruction function cannot be executed with one of the prescribed numbers, it cannot be said that the termination condition has changed, so game progress will not be stopped even if the value of the stop difference counter exceeds 19,000. Specifically, when the prescribed numbers for starting play can be either 3 or 2, the AT termination condition can be updated with 3 (the number of games and the difference number at which the AT ends can be updated), but the AT termination condition cannot be updated with 2 (the number of games and the difference number at which the AT ends cannot be updated), and when the stop difference counter reaches 19,000 during the AT, game progress will not be stopped until the AT termination condition is met.

This means that even if the AT is designed to look like a bonus, it will operate in the same way as a bonus, preventing a decline in the player's interest in the game. It also increases the player's motivation to play and increase the number of balls won during the bonus.

In addition, if the progress of play is not stopped even when the value of the stop difference counter exceeds 19,000 during a bonus or AT, lotteries advantageous to the player, such as AT lotteries or CZ lotteries, will not be executed during the bonus or AT play after the value of the stop difference counter exceeds 19,000.

This will prevent players from becoming overly gambling-minded when it is certain that the game will stop.

Note that the above describes an embodiment in which a determination is made as to whether the value of the stop difference counter exceeds 19,000 during a bonus, and if it is determined that the value of the stop difference counter exceeds 19,000, a predetermined value (e.g., any value such as "1" or "255") is stored in the temporary stop flag (temporary stop flag storage area), and when the bonus ends, a determination is made as to whether the value of the temporary stop flag is the predetermined value, and if so, the game progress is stopped; however, it is not necessary to provide a temporary stop flag.

Specifically, if the value of the stop difference counter exceeds 19,000 during a bonus, the value of the stop difference counter may be configured not to be updated during subsequent bonus play, and the stop process may be executed by the stop difference counter judgment process after the bonus ends. For example, if the value of the stop difference counter exceeds 19,000 during a bonus (e.g., 19001), the stop difference counter may not be updated during subsequent play, and the value of the difference number counter at the end of the bonus may be configured to exceed 19,000.

<Initializing the hit/stop difference counter>
In the above-described embodiment, when the value of the stop difference counter is initialized at power-on, the initial value is set to 0 if it is an additive type and 19000 if it is a subtractive type, but this is not limitative and any value may be used as the initial value.

For example, if the stop difference counter is a two-byte counter, it can count from 0 to 65,535. If gameplay is to be stopped when the difference since power-on exceeds 19,000 coins, the stop difference counter needs to be able to count up to 19,000, so its initial value is set to 46,535 (65,535 - 19,000). In this case, gameplay will be stopped when the value of the stop difference counter exceeds 65,535, so it is easy to determine whether the difference since power-on has exceeded 19,000 coins based on whether the carry flag stores a value of 1 or 0. The carry flag also stores a value of 1 even when it falls below 0. However, as mentioned above, the theoretical maximum number of coins inserted per day is around 30,000, so there is a sufficient margin of 16,535 coins (46,535 - 30,000). In reality, since small wins and replay wins mean that the number of coins rarely decreases by 30,000 in a single day, the probability of the count falling below 0 is extremely low.

By configuring it in this way, the process of updating the hit/stop difference counter can be simplified and the program size can be reduced.

Also, for example, as mentioned above, if the difference exceeds 19,000 coins during a bonus, game progress may be stopped at the end of the bonus. In such a case, if the stop difference counter can only count up to 19,000, the increase during the bonus cannot be counted. Therefore, if the stop difference counter is a 2-byte counter, the initial value may be set to a value smaller than 46,535. A value smaller than 46,535 could be considered, for example, 40,000. In this case, there is room to win up to a maximum of 6,535 coins after the difference exceeds 19,000 coins, so even if the difference exceeds 19,000 coins during the bonus, the difference can continue to be counted until the bonus ends. Furthermore, even if the difference exceeds 19,000 coins during the AT, the AT can only win up to a maximum of 2,414 coins due to the advantageous zone. Therefore, even if the difference exceeds 19,000 coins during the AT, the difference can continue to be counted until the AT ends. When the initial value of the stop difference counter is 40,000, determining whether the difference exceeds 19,000 can be determined by whether the value of the stop difference counter exceeds 59,000. Additionally, if the value of the hit difference counter exceeds 59,000, it will determine whether the game is currently in a bonus mode, and if so, the game will continue until the bonus mode ends.

Although we have given an example in which the initial value of the stop difference counter is a value smaller than 46,535, it is preferable to set the initial value to a value (32,767 or greater) greater than half the maximum value (65,535) that can be counted using two bytes. This is because when gaming machines are set to a value that indicates the smallest payout rate (for example, set value 1), the payout rate is often designed to be below 100%, making it more likely that the difference will decrease rather than increase. For this reason, by setting the initial value of the stop difference counter to a value greater than half the maximum value that can be counted, the possibility of the stop difference counter value becoming 0 can be reduced, making it easier to achieve normal operation in the market.

It is also possible that the difference is not counted correctly when the stop difference counter exceeds 19,000. In this case, even if the initial value of the stop difference counter is 46,535, gameplay will not be stopped even if the difference exceeds 19,000 during a bonus. In this case, when the stop difference counter exceeds 65,535 (when it is determined that it has exceeded 65,535, or when it is determined that 1 has been stored in the carry flag), a predetermined value is stored in the temporary stop flag, and whether or not to stop gameplay is determined based on whether the temporary stop flag is set to the predetermined value. In this way, if the difference exceeds 19,000 during a bonus, the stop difference counter will exceed 65,535 and start counting from 0. However, because the decision to stop gameplay is made based on the temporary stop flag, normal operation can be achieved overall, even though the value of the stop difference counter is not normal.

Although the shot difference counter has been explained as subtracting the number of medals inserted and adding the number of medals paid out, it may also be configured to add the number of medals inserted and subtract the number of medals paid out. In this case, the initial value of the shot difference counter may be set to 19,000, or a value between 19,000 and 32,766 inclusive.

The stop difference counter was explained as a 2-byte counter, but it can also be a 3-byte or 4-byte counter. If the stop difference counter is a 3-byte counter, the initial value can be set to 16758215 so that the carry flag will be set to 1 when the difference exceeds 19,000 coins. Furthermore, by making it 3 bytes or more, there are gaming parlors that do not turn off the power to their gaming machines, and even if the payout rate is always set to below 100%, and 10,000 games are played every day, the stop difference counter will not fall below 0 for several years, further reducing the possibility of malfunctions in the market.

<Test signals related to the termination of the test>
As described above, when the stop processing is executed, game progress stops (a stop state occurs). If game progress suddenly stops during testing by a testing institution, it is impossible to accurately determine whether game progress stopped due to a malfunction or due to the activation of the stop processing. Therefore, when the stop processing is executed, a process for outputting a test signal related to the stop processing that enables the user to determine that game progress has stopped due to the execution of the stop processing may be executed. By configuring in this way, when game progress stops due to the stop processing, the testing institution can determine that the stop of game progress was due to the execution of the stop processing, rather than due to a malfunction, and the testing institution can conclude that the test results are correct.

In this case, the process for outputting the test signal related to the termination may be executed continuously during the termination state, or may be executed for a predetermined period (e.g., 1 second), or may be executed a predetermined number of times (e.g., once or multiple times (5 times)).

Furthermore, when a game-stopping process is executed, it is possible to execute a process for outputting a test signal related to the stoppage, which allows the player to know that the game has stopped due to the execution of the stoppage process. However, it is also possible to execute a process for outputting a test signal related to the stoppage from a game before the stoppage process occurs. In other words, it is also possible to execute a process for outputting a test signal related to the stoppage in advance. For example, in a specification that executes a game-stopping process when the difference in the number of units since the time of power-on exceeds 19,000, it is also possible to execute a process for outputting a test signal related to the stoppage from when the difference in the number of units since the time of power-on reaches 18,500. Note that in this configuration, game play can continue even when a test signal related to the stoppage is being output, because the difference in the number of units since the time of power-on has not yet reached 19,000. This configuration allows the testing organization to be notified in advance that a game-stopping process may be executed, making testing by the testing organization smoother.

In this case, the process for outputting the test signal related to the cutoff may be executed for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 10 seconds), or may be executed a predetermined number of times (e.g., once or multiple times (5 times)). Furthermore, it may be executed when the difference in the number of times since power-on is equal to or greater than 18,500 (the process for outputting the test signal related to the cutoff may not be executed if the difference in the number of times since power-on is less than 18,500).

Note that the timing for executing the process to output the test signal related to advance termination was set to when the difference in number from the time the power was turned on reaches 18,500, but this can be set to any value, such as 18,000 or 18,985.

Furthermore, the timing for executing the process to output a test signal related to the game being stopped in advance can be set to the point where the player's ball output is at its lowest as the reference (0), and if the game is to be stopped when the difference in the number of gaming media from that reference exceeds 19,000, the timing can be set to any value, such as when the difference in the number of gaming media reaches 18,500, 18,000, or 18,985.

In addition to the test signal, processing may also be performed to output an external signal. In this case, the output mode and output timing of the test signal related to the stoppage described above can be applied to the external signal (e.g., a security signal). By outputting an external signal in this way, it is possible to notify waiting staff in advance that the stoppage process may be executed.

The security signal may also be configured to be output under certain conditions, such as when a specified error occurs (when a specified error occurs and until the specified error is resolved).

For example, the specified error that outputs a security signal may be any or all of the following: errors related to the selector (medal retention error, medal backflow error, medal passage time error) and errors related to the hopper 44 (hopper retention error, abnormality detection error). Furthermore, other errors may also be used, not just the errors mentioned above.

The security signal may also be configured to be output not only when a specific error occurs, but also during setting change mode or setting confirmation mode. For example, the security signal may be configured to be output when the setting key switch is on.

In other words, the security signal may be configured to be output when any of the following conditions are met: a) when a halt state is reached, b) when a specified error occurs, c) when the device transitions to setting change mode, or d) when the device transitions to setting confirmation mode.

By configuring it in this way, the gaming facility can prevent not only certain errors but also fraudulent turning on of the setting key switch (for example, fraudulent changes to setting values or fraudulent confirmation of setting values) by outputting a security signal.

Note that the conditions for outputting a security signal are not limited to adopting all of the above conditions A) to D), but may adopt any part of the conditions, or may include other conditions.

<External signals related to cut-off>
A security signal is output as an external signal related to the stoppage. For example, it can be configured to start outputting the security signal at a certain timing when the stoppage state is reached and to end outputting the security signal when a predetermined period (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed. In other words, when the stoppage state is reached, the security signal is output for the predetermined period. Then, after the stoppage state is reached and the security signal is output for the predetermined period, output of the security signal is ended even in the stoppage state.

Specifically, when starting to output a security signal, a timer value corresponding to the predetermined period is stored as a timer value (one of the values stored in the RWM) for outputting the security signal for the predetermined period. Then, at every predetermined cycle (for example, every time a timer interrupt process is executed), an update process for the timer value for outputting the security signal for the predetermined period (for example, a process of subtracting 1 from the timer value stored in the RWM) is executed.

For example, the timer value corresponding to the predetermined period can be "13429", and the predetermined cycle can be "2.234 ms (the cycle of the timer interrupt process)". Then, by updating the timer value to output a security signal for the predetermined period, the security signal is output for the period until the timer value reaches "0". In this case, the security signal can be output for approximately 30 seconds.

By configuring it in this way, a security signal can be output to the hall computer (also called a hall computer) for a predetermined period of time, allowing gaming parlor staff to know that some kind of event has occurred with a gaming machine that has been discontinued.

In addition, after the security signal has been output for a predetermined period of time, the output of the security signal is terminated, so it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not output a security signal without turning off the power (power switch) of the gaming machine that has reached a halted state.

In some cases, gaming establishments (store staff) may wish to appeal to players about gaming machines that have reached a stoppage state by showing them a notification (corresponding to the stoppage notification described below) that is issued when a gaming machine reaches a stoppage state, without turning off the power to the machine (without turning off the power switch).

In this way, even if the gaming machine is left in a stopped state, the security signal output will end a predetermined period after it starts, so the hall computer will not continue to receive the security signal. In other words, gaming establishments (and gaming establishment staff) will not be bothered by the security signal.

In addition, if a specified error (a specified error is an error that is a condition for outputting a security signal) occurs after a specified period of time has elapsed since the output of the security signal was stopped, the security signal may be output again.

In other words, the security signal is output from the timing (Timing A) when the security signal output begins until a predetermined time later (Timing B). After that, if a predetermined error occurs (a predetermined error is detected) under predetermined circumstances when the security signal is not being output, the security signal output will begin from the timing (Timing C) when the predetermined error occurs (a predetermined error is detected). Note that when the predetermined error is resolved, the security signal output will end.

By configuring it in this way, if a specific error occurs on a gaming machine that has been left in a stopped state, the security signal will be output again, alerting the gaming establishment (or gaming establishment staff) that some kind of fraud may have been committed on the stopped gaming machine.

Also, if the device enters a halted state and switches to setting confirmation mode after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the security signal output began, the security signal may be configured to be output again.

In other words, the security signal is output from the time when the security signal output begins (timing A) until a predetermined time later (timing B). After that, if the setting confirmation mode is entered under a predetermined situation where the security signal is not being output, the security signal will start to be output from the time when the setting confirmation mode is entered (timing C) when the setting key switch is turned on. Note that when the setting confirmation mode ends, the security signal output will end.

By configuring it in this way, if a gaming machine that has been left in a stopped state goes into setting confirmation mode, the security signal will be output again, alerting the gaming establishment (or gaming establishment staff) that some kind of fraud may have been committed on the stopped gaming machine.

<(1) When a specified error occurs while the security signal is being output due to a halt>
If a stop state is reached and a specified error (the specified error is an error that is a condition for outputting the security signal) occurs before a specified period has elapsed since the output of the security signal began, and the specified error is cleared after the specified period has elapsed since the output of the security signal began, the security signal may be configured to be output beyond the specified period.

In other words, suppose a specified error occurs (a specified error is detected) at a timing (timing B) before a specified period (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed since the security signal output started (timing A). Then, suppose the specified error is resolved at a timing (timing C) after the specified period has elapsed since timing A (e.g., 40 seconds after timing A).

In this case, the security signal is output from timing A to timing C. In other words, the security signal can continue to be output until the specified error is resolved (the security signal is not output when power is not supplied).

By configuring it in this way, even if the machine is designed to output a security signal for a specified period of time when play is stopped, if a specified error occurs before the specified period has elapsed and the specified error is resolved after the specified period has elapsed, the security signal will continue to be output until the specified error is resolved, thereby properly notifying the gaming facility (or gaming facility staff) that some kind of event has occurred on the gaming machine that has entered a play-stop state.

In addition, the system is configured to update the timer value for outputting a security signal for a specified period even during periods when a specified error occurs.

Furthermore, the configuration is not limited to the one described above, and other configurations may also be adopted.

For example, if a halted state occurs, a specified error (a specified error is an error that is a condition for the output of a security signal) occurs before a specified period of time has elapsed since the output of a security signal began, and the specified error is cleared after the specified period of time has elapsed since the output of the security signal began, the security signal may be output until the specified period of time has elapsed since the specified error was cleared.

If the device is configured to output a security signal until a specified period of time has elapsed after a specified error is resolved, it is possible to reset the timer value corresponding to the specified period once the specified error is resolved, in order to output the security signal for the specified period of time.

By configuring it in this way, the security signal will be output until a specified period of time has passed since the specified error was resolved, so even if a specified error occurs, the gaming facility (and gaming facility staff) can accurately understand that play has been stopped.

Also, for example, if a halted state occurs and a specified error (a specified error is an error that is a condition for outputting a security signal) occurs before a specified period has elapsed since the output of a security signal began, and the specified error is cleared after the specified period has elapsed since the output of the security signal began, the security signal may be output until the remaining period of the specified period has elapsed since the specified error was cleared.

For example, if the timing when the security signal output starts is defined as timing A, the timing when a specified error occurs (when a specified error is detected) is defined as timing B, the timing when the specified error is resolved is defined as timing C, and the timing when the security signal output ends is defined as timing D, then the specified period may be defined as (the period from timing A to timing B) + (the period from timing C to timing D).

In this case, the timer value update process for outputting a security signal for a predetermined period may not be executed during the period from timing B to timing C. Note that even in this configuration, timer interrupt processing may still be executed.

By configuring it this way, even if a specified error occurs midway, a security signal can be output for a specified period (in total) to notify the gaming establishment (or gaming establishment staff) that play has been halted.

<(2) When a specified error occurs while the security signal is being output due to a halt>
If a halted state occurs, a specified error (the specified error is an error that is a condition for outputting the security signal) occurs before a specified period of time has elapsed since the output of the security signal began, and the specified error is cleared before the specified period of time has elapsed since the output of the security signal began, the output of the security signal may be configured to be terminated when the specified period of time has elapsed since the output of the security signal began.

In other words, suppose a specified error occurs (a specified error is detected) at timing B before a specified period of time (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed since the time when the security signal started to be output (timing A). Then, suppose that the specified error is resolved at timing C before the specified period of time has elapsed since timing A (e.g., 10 seconds after timing A). Furthermore, suppose that the output of the security signal is terminated at timing D after timing C, when the specified period of time has elapsed since timing A.

In this case, a security signal is output from timing A to timing D (a specified period from timing A). In other words, even if a specified error occurs, the timer value update process is executed to output a security signal for the specified period. Furthermore, even if a specified error occurs, the timer value corresponding to the specified period is not reset. Furthermore, even after the specified error is resolved, the security signal can continue to be output from timing A until the specified period (a security signal is not output when power is not supplied).

By configuring it in this way, in a system where a security signal is output for a predetermined period of time when play is stopped, if a predetermined error occurs and the predetermined error is cleared within the predetermined period of time after the start of security signal output, the output time of the security signal will not be extended due to the occurrence of the predetermined error (because the security signal output time is the predetermined period), thereby preventing gaming establishments (and gaming establishment staff) from feeling annoyed by the security signal.

Note that the configuration is not limited to the one described above, and other configurations may also be used.

For example, if a halted state occurs, a specified error (a specified error is an error that is a condition for the output of a security signal) occurs before a specified period of time has elapsed since the output of a security signal began, and the specified error is resolved before the specified period of time has elapsed since the output of the security signal began, the security signal may be output until the specified period of time has elapsed since the specified error was resolved.

If the device is configured to output a security signal until a specified period of time has elapsed after a specified error is resolved, it is possible to reset the timer value corresponding to the specified period once the specified error is resolved as the timer value for outputting the security signal for the specified period.

By configuring it in this way, the security signal will be output until a specified period of time has passed since the specified error was resolved, allowing the gaming facility (and gaming facility staff) to accurately understand that play has been stopped.

<When the system is stopped and transitions to setting confirmation mode while a security signal is being output (1)>
If the device is in a stopped state and transitions to (starts) setting confirmation mode before a predetermined period has elapsed since the output of the security signal began, and if the setting confirmation mode ends after a predetermined period has elapsed since the output of the security signal began, the security signal may be configured to be output beyond the predetermined period.

In other words, let's say that the setting key switch is turned on and the device transitions to setting confirmation mode at timing B, a predetermined period (e.g., 30 seconds) before the security signal starts to be output (timing A). Then, let's say that the setting key switch is turned off and the device ends setting confirmation mode at timing C, a predetermined period (e.g., 40 seconds) after timing A.

In this case, the security signal is output from timing A to timing C. In other words, the security signal can continue to be output until the setting confirmation mode is canceled (the security signal is not output when power is not supplied).

In addition, even in setting confirmation mode, the timer value update process for outputting a security signal for a specified period is performed.

By configuring it this way, even if the machine is designed to output a security signal for a specified period of time when play is stopped, if the machine transitions to setting confirmation mode before the specified period has elapsed and setting confirmation mode ends after the specified period has elapsed, the security signal will continue to be output until setting confirmation mode ends, making it possible to notify the gaming facility (gaming facility staff) that some kind of event has occurred with the gaming machine that has entered a play-stop state.

In addition, since the security signal output time is not extended when the device enters setting confirmation mode, gaming establishments (and gaming establishment staff) are not bothered by the security signal.

Note that the configuration is not limited to the one described above, and other configurations may also be used.

For example, if the device enters a halted state and transitions to setting confirmation mode before a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the security signal output began, and the setting confirmation mode ends after the predetermined period of time has elapsed since the security signal output began, the security signal may be configured to be output until the predetermined period of time has elapsed since the setting confirmation mode ended.

If the device is configured to output a security signal until a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the setting confirmation mode ends, it is possible to reset the timer value corresponding to the predetermined period of time once the setting confirmation mode ends, in order to output the security signal for that period of time.

By configuring it in this way, the security signal will be output until a specified period of time has passed since the setting confirmation mode ended, allowing the gaming facility (and gaming facility staff) to accurately understand that play has been stopped.

Also, for example, if the device enters a halted state and transitions to setting confirmation mode before a predetermined period has elapsed since the security signal output began, and the setting confirmation mode ends after the predetermined period has elapsed since the security signal output began, the device may be configured to output the security signal until the remaining predetermined period has elapsed since the setting confirmation mode ended.

For example, if the timing when security signal output begins is defined as timing A, the timing when the setting confirmation mode is entered is defined as timing B, the timing when the setting confirmation mode ends is defined as timing C, and the timing when security signal output ends is defined as timing D, the specified period may be defined as (the period from timing A to timing B) + (the period from timing C to timing D).

In this case, the timer value update process for outputting a security signal for a predetermined period may not be executed during the period from timing B to timing C. Note that even in this configuration, timer interrupt processing may still be executed.

By configuring it this way, even if a specified error occurs midway, a security signal can be output for a specified period (in total) to notify the gaming establishment (or gaming establishment staff) that play has been stopped.

<When the system is stopped and transitions to setting confirmation mode while a security signal is being output (2)>
If the system is in a stopped state and transitions to (starts) setting confirmation mode before a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the output of the security signal began, and if the setting confirmation mode is ended before the predetermined period of time has elapsed since the output of the security signal began, the output of the security signal may be configured to end when the predetermined period of time has elapsed since the output of the security signal began.

In other words, suppose the setting key switch is turned on and the device transitions to setting confirmation mode at timing B before a predetermined period of time (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed since the security signal output started (timing A). Then, suppose the setting key switch is turned off and the device ends setting confirmation mode at timing C, which is before the predetermined period of time has elapsed since timing A (e.g., 10 seconds after timing A).

In this case, a security signal is output for a predetermined period from timing A. In other words, even in setting check mode, the timer value is updated to output a security signal for a predetermined period. Furthermore, even after setting check mode ends, the security signal can continue to be output for a predetermined period from timing A (a security signal is not output when power is not supplied).

By configuring it in this way, in a specification where a security signal is output for a predetermined period when a game is stopped, if the device transitions to setting confirmation mode and ends setting confirmation mode within the predetermined period after the start of security signal output, the output time of the security signal will not be extended in response to the transition to setting confirmation mode (because the security signal output time is the predetermined period), thereby preventing gaming establishments (and gaming establishment staff) from feeling annoyed by the security signal.

<When the power is turned off while the security signal is being output due to a halt, and then the power is turned on again with a setting change>
If the power switch is turned off before a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of security signal output, the power supply will be cut off. If the power switch is then turned on while the setting key switch is on (also referred to as powering on with setting change), the device will transition to setting change mode after power is restored. In this case, the device may be configured to output a security signal in setting change mode. Note that the device may be configured to end security signal output when setting change mode ends.

In other words, the power switch is turned off before a predetermined period of time (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed since the security signal output began (timing A), and the power-off process is executed at timing B (e.g., 10 seconds after timing A). Then, with no power being supplied, the device is turned on with a setting change, causing it to transition to setting change mode at timing C. The conditions for terminating setting change mode are then met, and setting change mode ends at timing D.

For example, suppose the time from timing A to timing B is 10 seconds, and the time from timing C to timing D is 8 seconds (the setting change mode period is 8 seconds). In this case, the total time (18 seconds) of the security signal output time from timing A to timing B and the security signal output time from timing C to timing D may be shorter than the specified period (30 seconds).

When configured in this way, the timer value corresponding to the specified period may be initialized when the power is turned on with a setting change (by the RWM initialization process executed when the power is turned on with a setting change).

For example, if the RWM initialization process, which is executed when the power is turned on with a setting change, occurs at the start of setting change mode, the timer value update process for outputting a security signal for a predetermined period during setting change mode will not update the timer value (the timer value will remain at 0). However, the security signal will still be output.

For example, if the RWM initialization process executed upon power-on with a setting change is at the end of setting change mode, the timer value update process for outputting a security signal for a predetermined period will be executed even if the setting confirmation mode is in effect. In this case, upon power-on with a setting change, the timer value update process for outputting a security signal for a predetermined period may be executed using a value reset to the timer value corresponding to the predetermined period, or the timer value update process for outputting a security signal for a predetermined period may be executed using the remaining period obtained by subtracting (the period from timing A to timing B) from the predetermined period. However, the security signal will be output regardless of the timer value (even if it is set to the initial value (0)).

In either case, when the setting change mode ends, the security signal output can be terminated.

Also, for example, suppose the period from timing A to timing B is 10 seconds, and the period from timing C to timing D is 50 seconds (the setting change mode period is 50 seconds). In this case, the total time (60 seconds) of the security signal output time from timing A to timing B and the security signal output time from timing C to timing D may be longer than the specified period (30 seconds).

In other words, if a power outage occurs while the device is in a halted state and a security signal is being output, and then the device is powered on again with a setting change, the security signal will be output from the start of setting change mode until the end of setting change mode.

In other words, the total output time of the security signal does not necessarily correspond to the specified period.

However, depending on the combination of the period from timing A to timing B and the period from timing C to timing D, the total output time of the security signal may be equal to the specified period.

For example, if the period from timing A to timing B is 10 seconds, and the period from timing C to timing D is 20 seconds (the setting change mode period is 20 seconds), the total output time of the security signal may be the specified period (30 seconds).

By configuring it in this way, even if the device is designed to output a security signal for a predetermined period of time when the device enters a halted state, the power is cut off before the predetermined period has elapsed since the security signal output began, and the halted state is then released when the power is turned on with a setting change (by the RWM initialization process executed when the power is turned on with a setting change), so the security signal output time after power is restored can be set to a time that corresponds to the duration of the setting change mode.

In addition, powering on with a setting change not only releases the suspended state (due to the RWM initialization process executed by powering on with a setting change), but may also clear the timer value (one of the values stored in the RWM) for outputting a security signal for a specified period of time.

For example, if the RWM initialization process, which is executed when the power is turned on with a setting change, occurs at the start of setting change mode, the timer value update process for outputting a security signal for a predetermined period of time during setting change mode will not update the timer value (the timer value will remain at 0). However, the security signal will still be output.

For example, if the RWM initialization process executed upon power-on with a setting change is at the end of setting change mode, the timer value update process for outputting a security signal for a predetermined period will be executed even if the setting confirmation mode is in effect. In this case, upon power-on with a setting change, the timer value update process for outputting a security signal for a predetermined period may be executed using a value reset to the timer value corresponding to the predetermined period, or the timer value update process for outputting a security signal for a predetermined period may be executed using the remaining period obtained by subtracting (the period from timing A to timing B) from the predetermined period. However, the security signal will be output regardless of the timer value (even if it is set to the initial value (0)).

Also, for example, if the period from timing A to timing B is 10 seconds and the period from timing C to timing D is 50 seconds (the setting change mode period is 50 seconds), a security signal may be output from timing A to timing B, and then from timing C to 20 seconds. In other words, the security signal output period may be kept constant even when transitioning to setting change mode (setting change mode may end midway).

<When the power is turned off while the device is outputting a security signal due to a halt, and then the power is turned on again without changing any settings>
If the power switch is turned off before a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of security signal output, the power supply will be cut off. If the power switch is then turned on while the setting key switch is off (also called powering on without changing settings), the power supply will be in the stopped state after power is restored.

In other words, the power switch is turned off before a predetermined period of time (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed since the security signal output began (timing A), and the power-off process is executed at timing B (e.g., 10 seconds after timing A). Then, with no power being supplied, the device transitions to a stopped state at timing C when the power is turned on without any changes to settings.

Furthermore, a certain timing after timing C is referred to as timing D. Timing D is the timing when the sum of the period from timing A to timing B and the period from timing C to timing D corresponds to the specified period. For example, if the specified period is 30 seconds and the period from timing A to timing B is 10 seconds, then the period from timing C to timing D is 20 seconds.

Furthermore, a certain timing after timing D is referred to as timing E. Timing E is a timing when the period from timing C to timing E corresponds to the predetermined period. For example, if the predetermined period is 30 seconds, the period from timing C to timing E is 30 seconds.

Note that the period from timing C to timing E is considered to be a halt.

When configured in this way, the security signal output can be one of the following (Pattern 1) to (Pattern 3).

(Pattern 1) After power-on, the security signal is not output.
For example, a security signal is output during the period from timing A to timing B. However, no security signal is output during the period from timing C to timing D. Similarly, no security signal is output during the period from timing D to timing E.

For example, by executing a process to clear the timer value (one of the values stored in the RWM) for outputting a security signal for a predetermined period when power is restored (setting the timer value to 0), it is possible to prevent the security signal from being output during the period from timing C to timing E.

By configuring it in this way, when power is restored after a power outage, the security signal will not be output even if the power is cut off.

In other words, the security signal is not output again when the power is restored, reducing the annoyance caused by the security signal.

If a specified error that is a condition for outputting a security signal occurs between timing C and timing D, the security signal may be output from the time the specified error occurs until the specified error is cleared. Similarly, if a specified error that is a condition for outputting a security signal occurs between timing D and timing E, the security signal may be output from the time the specified error occurs until the specified error is cleared.

Furthermore, if the setting confirmation mode is entered between timing C and timing D, a security signal may be output from the start of the setting confirmation mode until the end of the setting confirmation mode. Similarly, if the setting confirmation mode is entered between timing D and timing E, a security signal may be output from the start of the setting confirmation mode until the end of the setting confirmation mode.

By configuring it in this way, the gaming parlor (or gaming parlor staff) can become aware that some kind of event has occurred on the gaming machine when the hall computer receives the security signal.

(Pattern 2) After power-on, the security signal is output for the remaining period.
For example, a security signal is output from timing A to timing B. A security signal is output from timing C to timing D. However, a security signal is not output from timing D to timing E.

For example, by not executing the process of clearing the timer value (one of the values stored in the RWM) for outputting a security signal for a predetermined period when power is restored (continuing to use the timer value stored before power was cut off), it is possible to output a security signal from timing C to D, and not output a security signal from timing D to timing E.

By configuring it in this way, when power is restored after a power outage, a security signal can be output for the time period corresponding to the remainder of the specified period, providing a gaming machine that is resistant to fraud. Furthermore, if the process of clearing the timer value (one of the values stored in the RWM) for outputting the security signal for the specified period is not executed when power is restored, the control process can be simplified.

In addition, if a specified error that is a condition for outputting a security signal occurs between timing C and timing D, and the specified error is resolved at a timing before timing D, the security signal may be output from timing C to timing D.

Similarly, if the setting confirmation mode is entered (started) during the period from timing C to timing D, and the setting confirmation mode ends at a certain time before timing D, a security signal may be output from timing C to timing D.

Also, if a specified error that is a condition for outputting a security signal occurs between timing C and timing D, and the specified error is resolved at a certain timing (timing F) after timing D, the security signal may be output from timing C to timing F.

Similarly, if the setting confirmation mode is entered (started) during the period from timing C to timing D, and the setting confirmation mode ends at a certain timing (timing F) after timing D, a security signal may be output from timing C to timing F.

By configuring it in this way, the gaming parlor (or gaming parlor staff) can become aware that some kind of event has occurred with the gaming machine when the hall computer receives the security signal.

(Pattern 3) After power is turned on, the security signal is output for a predetermined period of time.
For example, a security signal is output during the period from timing A to timing B. A security signal is also output during the period from timing C to timing E.

For example, by executing a process to set (store) a value corresponding to a predetermined period again as the timer value (one of the values stored in the RWM) for outputting a security signal for a predetermined period when power is restored, it is possible to output a security signal for the period from timing C to timing E.

By configuring it in this way, when power is restored after a power outage, a security signal can be output for a predetermined continuous period of time, providing a gaming machine that is resistant to fraud.

In addition, if a specified error that is a condition for outputting a security signal occurs between timing C and timing E, and the specified error is resolved at a timing before timing E, the security signal may be output from timing C to timing E.

Similarly, if the setting confirmation mode is entered (started) during the period from timing C to timing E, and the setting confirmation mode ends at a certain time before timing E, a security signal may be output from timing C to timing E.

Also, if a specified error that is a condition for outputting a security signal occurs between timing C and timing E, and the specified error is resolved at a certain timing (timing G) after timing E, the security signal may be output from timing C to timing G.

Similarly, if the setting confirmation mode is entered (started) during the period from timing C to timing E, and the setting confirmation mode ends at a certain timing (timing G) after timing E, a security signal may be output from timing C to timing G.

By configuring it in this way, the gaming parlor (or gaming parlor staff) can become aware that some kind of event has occurred with the gaming machine when the hall computer receives the security signal.

<Regarding the processing of the sub-control means based on the strike-stop difference counter>
The main control means is configured to be able to transmit information regarding the value of the hit difference counter to the sub-control means, thereby making it possible to notify the player before the progress of the game is stopped.

For example, if the remaining difference of 100 coins exceeds 19,000, the LCD display could display an ending message saying "100 coins remaining" or play a sound. Then, as the difference is updated and gets smaller, the ending message could be updated to say "90 coins remaining" or "85 coins remaining," etc. If the difference exceeds 19,000 coins, a congratulatory message such as "Complete" or "Congratulations" could be displayed or a sound could be played, giving the player a sense of accomplishment.

By doing this, the game goal can be set to stop when the difference exceeds 19,000 coins, increasing the excitement of the game.

For example, if the remaining difference of 100 coins exceeds 19,000 coins and an ending display of "100 coins remaining" is displayed on the LCD display, if the remaining difference increases and exceeds 100 coins, the ending display of the remaining difference can be erased (made non-display). When the remaining difference again reaches 100 coins, the LCD display will display the ending display of "100 coins remaining".

By doing this, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation to play from decreasing due to the difference remaining below the number and the ending display not disappearing.

For example, if the difference exceeds 19,000 coins during a bonus and game progress is not stopped until the bonus ends, once the difference exceeds 19,000 coins during the bonus and a congratulatory display is displayed, the congratulatory display will not be erased even if the difference falls below 19,000 coins. Furthermore, the congratulatory display will continue to be displayed until the bonus ends.

By doing this, the player's sense of accomplishment will not be hindered by the disappearance of the congratulatory display, and a decrease in interest in the game will be prevented.

In the example above, the remaining difference was displayed as the ending display, but this is not limited to this; a story-like presentation may also be displayed. Even in this case, the ending display can be terminated when the remaining difference falls below the threshold that triggers the execution of the ending display, thereby preventing the ending display from being displayed more than necessary.

In addition, if a celebratory effect is suddenly displayed and play stops when the difference reaches 19,000 coins, this may discourage players who are unaware of the existence of the stop process, which could reduce their motivation to continue playing. Therefore, a notification regarding the stop process (for example, a display or audio such as "Aim for 19,000 coins!" or "The game will end at 19,000 coins") may be made when the power is turned on or during play, or a notification regarding the stop process (for example, a display or audio such as "Aim for 19,000 coins!" or "The game will end at 19,000 coins") may be made on a demo screen or menu screen.

<Regarding external signal output based on the value of the stop difference counter>
When the main control means or monitoring process updates the value of the stop difference counter during the stop process and the result reaches a specific value (18,900 in this embodiment) that is just before the predetermined value (19,000 in this embodiment) at which the stop process is executed, a process is executed to output a test interrupt request signal to the test IF board.

This allows the testing to be interrupted before the gaming machine reaches a stoppage state during testing and game progress comes to a halt. When testing is interrupted, the tester can turn the power off and then back on to the gaming machine, which will initialize the value of the stoppage difference counter and allow the gaming machine testing to continue until the value of the stoppage difference counter exceeds 19,000 again. In other words, by turning the power off and back on when the value of the stoppage difference counter is 18,900, it is possible to prevent game progress from being halted until the value of the stoppage difference counter effectively exceeds 37,900, allowing for stable testing.

Note that the specific value just before the predetermined value at which the stop processing is executed (19,000 in this embodiment) is set to 18,900, but this is not limiting and any value between 9,500, which is half the predetermined value at which the stop processing is executed, and 18,985, which is the value at which the stop processing is not executed even if the maximum payout number is reached, can be used as the specific value.

In addition, in this embodiment, processing was performed to output a test interruption request signal to interrupt the test, but any signal may be output as long as it is conveyed to the tester. As a result, the signal output to the test IF board when a specific value is reached just before the predetermined value at which the stop processing is executed may be referred to as a predetermined signal (predetermined test signal), and the processing for outputting to the test IF board may be referred to as processing for outputting a predetermined signal (predetermined test signal).

<Regarding processing by the sub-control means based on the value of the stop difference counter>
When the main control means executes the stop processing, information based on the value of the stop difference counter can be transmitted to the sub-control means, so that the player can be notified before the notification that the game has stopped (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as the "stop notification").

For example, if the remaining number of coins exceeds 19,000 with a difference of 100 coins, the LCD display may display "100 coins remaining," and an ending effect or sound may be played. Then, as the difference is updated and decreases, the remaining difference display may be updated to "90 coins remaining," "85 coins remaining," etc. When the difference exceeds 19,000 coins, a congratulatory display such as "Complete" or "Congratulations" may be played, or sound may be played, giving the player a sense of accomplishment. A state in which such a sub-control means displays the remaining number of coins until the end of the game, plays an ending effect, or sounds, or a state in which the remaining number of coins until the end of the game is not displayed but an ending effect or sound related to the end of the game is played, is referred to as an operation advance notification state (related to the end of the game). Note that the operation advance notification state is a state related to the sub-control means.

By doing this, the game goal can be set to stop when the difference exceeds 19,000 coins, increasing the excitement of the game.

For example, if the remaining difference is 100 and exceeds 19,000, and the LCD display shows "100 remaining," if the remaining difference increases and exceeds 100, the remaining difference display can be erased (hide). When the remaining difference again reaches 100, the LCD display will show "100 remaining."

By doing this, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation to play from decreasing due to the difference continuing to fall below the target and the remaining difference display not disappearing.

For example, if the difference exceeds 19,000 coins during a bonus and game progress is not stopped until the bonus ends, once the difference exceeds 19,000 coins during the bonus and a congratulatory display is displayed, the congratulatory display will not be erased even if the difference falls below 19,000 coins. Furthermore, the congratulatory display will continue to be displayed until the bonus ends.

By doing this, the player's sense of accomplishment will not be hindered by the disappearance of the congratulatory display, and a decrease in interest in the game will be prevented.

The ending performance or sound may be a continuous performance with a storyline, or a still image. Even in this case, the ending performance or sound can be terminated when the remaining difference falls below the threshold that triggers the execution of the ending performance or sound, so that the ending performance or sound is not executed more than necessary.

In addition, if a celebratory effect is suddenly displayed and play stops when the difference reaches 19,000 coins, this may discourage players who are unaware of the existence of the stop process, which could reduce their motivation to continue playing. Therefore, a notification regarding the stop process (for example, a display or audio such as "Aim for 19,000 coins!" or "The game will end at 19,000 coins") may be made when the power is turned on or during play, or a notification regarding the stop process (for example, a display or audio such as "Aim for 19,000 coins!" or "The game will end at 19,000 coins") may be made on a demo screen or menu screen.

<Regarding processing of lamps managed by the main control means or sub-control means based on the value of the stop difference counter>
The lighting control of the lamps managed by the main control means or the sub-control means when the value of the stop difference counter exceeds 19,000, which satisfies the stop condition, will be described below.

The lamps managed by the main control means are the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, 3 bet lamp, replay lamp, start lamp, medal insertion possible lamp, advantageous zone lamp, credit number indicator, and number of coins won indicator, while the lamps managed by the sub control means are the stop switch lamp, lower panel lamp, and frame lamp.

The MAX bed lamp may be managed by the main control means or the sub-control means.

<<Lamp state at the end of a game when the complete function is not activated>>
Here, a game in which the complete function is not activated refers to a game in which the activation condition (stop condition) of the complete function is not met.

At the end of a game in which the complete function is not activated (when all the reels have stopped and bets are waiting to be made), the bet lamp corresponding to the number of bets made in the previous game will remain lit. For example, if a game in which 3 bets were made, the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp will remain lit at the end of the game, and the start lamp will be off.

In addition, the advantageous zone lamp will remain lit at the end of a game in which the complete function is not activated and the advantageous zone lamp is lit (while waiting to bet after all the reels have stopped), and the next game will also be in an advantageous zone.

In addition, when a game in which a replay is won ends without the complete function being activated (while waiting for the start switch to be operated or for a coin to be inserted after the symbol combination corresponding to the replay has stopped and displayed), the replay lamp and start lamp will be lit.

In addition, in a game in which the complete function is not activated, when a winning symbol combination corresponding to a minor winning combination is displayed at the end of a game in which a minor winning combination has been won (while waiting to bet after all reels have stopped), the corresponding segment of the number of coins acquired indicator will light up. For example, if the conditions for activating the complete function are not met in a game in which 10 gaming media have been awarded, the segment corresponding to "10" will light up (displaying 10) on the number of coins acquired indicator. Note that the number of gaming media displayed on the number of coins acquired indicator may be configured not to be displayed for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 60 seconds) after the awarding of gaming media has ended.

In addition, at the end of a game in which the complete function is not activated and a winning combination that is not a replay (for example, a small combination or a miss) is won (while waiting to bet after all the reels have stopped), and the credit number display shows a value equal to or greater than the number of bets required to start the next game, the MAX BET lamp will be lit. Note that the number of bets required to start the next game will be "3" if the game can be started by betting three gaming media (the same applies below).

Furthermore, at the end of a game in which the complete function is not activated and a winning combination (e.g., a small combination or a miss) that is not a replay win is achieved (while waiting for a bet after all reels have stopped), and the credit number indicator displays a value less than the bet number required to start the next game, the MAX BET lamp is off. Note that the MAX BET lamp may be lit when the credit number indicator displays a value of 1 or greater. In other words, the MAX BET lamp may be lit when the credit number indicator displays a value less than the bet number required to start the next game (e.g., 1 or 2). When the MAX BET lamp is lit, it may be possible to bet the number of gaming media corresponding to the value displayed on the credit number indicator by operating the MAX BET switch. For example, if the MAX BET lamp is lit when the number of credits is 1, operating the MAX BET switch allows a bet of 1. For example, if the MAX BET lamp is lit when the number of credits is 10, a bet of 3 (the bet number required to start the next game by operating the MAX BET switch) is allowed. On the other hand, when the MAX BET lamp is off, no gaming media can be bet even if the MAX BET switch is operated. In this way, the lighting state of the MAX BET lamp can notify the player whether or not the operation of the MAX BET switch is valid.

In addition, when the complete function is not activated and the replay is at the end of a winning game (when the start switch is waiting to be operated after all reels have stopped, or when a medal is waiting to be inserted), the MAX BET lamp will be off regardless of the number of credits displayed on the credit number indicator.

Also, at the end of a game where the complete function is not activated (when the start switch is waiting to be operated after all reels have stopped, or when waiting for medals to be inserted), if the credit number display shows a value less than the upper limit, the medal insertion permitted lamp will be lit.

Also, at the end of a game where the complete function is not activated (while waiting to bet after all the reels have stopped), if the credit number display shows a value of 1 or more, the corresponding segment of the credit number display will light up.

In addition, at the end of a game when the complete function is not activated (when bets are waiting after all reels have stopped), the stop switch lamp will light up in a manner that indicates that operation of the stop switch is invalid. For example, the stop switch lamp may light up in red or may be off.

In addition, at the end of a game when the complete function is not activated (when bets are waiting to be placed after all reels have stopped), the lower panel lamp is lit, and the frame lamp is lit in a manner corresponding to the waiting state during gameplay.

<<Lamp state at the end of a game when the complete function is activated>>
Here, a game in which the complete function is activated refers to a game in which the activation condition (stop condition) of the complete function is satisfied.

At the end of a game in which the complete function has been activated (while waiting to bet after all the reels have stopped), the bet lamps corresponding to the number of bets from the previous game are not lit and all bet lamps are off. For example, even at the end of a game in which 3 bets have been placed, the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp are off, and the start lamp is also off.

In addition, when the complete function is activated and the game ends in an advantageous zone where the advantageous zone lamp is lit (while waiting for bets after all reels have stopped), the advantageous zone lamp is turned off. In other words, the complete function is activated even if the conditions for the end of the advantageous zone are not met in a game in which the complete function is activated. In addition, the advantageous zone lamp is turned off even if the conditions for the end of the advantageous zone are not met in a game in which the complete function is activated.

In addition, when a game in which the complete function is activated and a replay is won ends (while waiting for the start switch to be operated after all reels have stopped, or while waiting for a coin to be inserted), the replay lamp and start lamp will be turned off.

In addition, in a game in which the complete function is activated, if the winning symbol combination corresponding to the minor winning combination is displayed at the end of the game in which a minor winning combination is won (while waiting for bets after all reels have stopped), the corresponding segment of the number of coins acquired indicator is extinguished. For example, if the conditions for activating the complete function are met in a game in which 10 gaming media are awarded, the segment corresponding to "10" is lit (10 is displayed) in the number of coins acquired indicator; thereafter, while the complete function is activated, the segment corresponding to "10" is not lit (10 is not displayed) in the number of coins acquired indicator. In other words, the segment corresponding to "10" is not lit in the number of coins acquired indicator before a predetermined period (e.g., 60 seconds) has elapsed since the awarding of gaming media ended.

In addition, when the complete function is activated and the winning symbol combination corresponding to the minor winning combination is displayed at the end of a game in which a minor winning combination has been won (while waiting to bet after all the reels have stopped), the MAX BET lamp will be turned off regardless of the number of credits displayed on the credit number indicator.

In addition, when a game in which the complete function is activated and a replay is won ends (when the start switch is waiting to be operated after all reels have stopped, or when a medal is waiting to be inserted), the MAX BET lamp will be turned off regardless of the number of credits displayed on the credit number indicator.

In addition, if the credit count display shows a value less than the upper limit at the end of a game in which the complete function has been activated (when the start switch is waiting to be operated after all reels have stopped, or when waiting for medals to be inserted), the medal insertion lamp will be turned off.

Also, at the end of a game in which the complete function has been activated (while waiting for bets after all reels have stopped), if the credit number indicator shows a value of 1 or more, the corresponding segment of the credit number indicator will light up.

Furthermore, at the end of a game in which the complete function has been activated (when all the reels have stopped and bets are waiting), the stop switch lamp lights up in a manner indicating that stop switch operation is invalid. Alternatively, at the end of a game in which the complete function has been activated (when all the reels have stopped and bets are waiting), the stop switch lamp lights up in a manner different from that indicating that stop switch operation is invalid (a manner different from that indicating that stop switch operation is valid). An example of the stop switch lamp lighting up in a manner different from that indicating that stop switch operation is invalid (a manner different from that indicating that stop switch operation is valid) would be when the stop switch lamp lights up in red to indicate that stop switch operation is invalid in a game in which the complete function has not been activated, and when the stop switch lamp is off to indicate that stop switch operation is invalid in a game in which the complete function has been activated.

In addition, at the end of a game in which the complete function has been activated (while waiting for bets after all the reels have stopped), the lower panel lamp will be lit and the frame lamp will be lit in a manner that corresponds to the activation of the complete function.

The above-mentioned <<Lamp state at the end of a game when the complete function is not activated>> and <<Lamp state at the end of a game when the complete function is activated>> configurations can be combined.

Also, as a variation different from the above-described embodiment, at the end of a game in which the complete function is not activated (while waiting for bets after all reels have stopped), the bet lamp corresponding to the number of bets made in the previous game may be turned off. For example, if a game in which three bets were made, at the end of the game the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp are turned off, and the start lamp is turned off.

Also, as a different aspect from the above-described embodiment, the advantageous zone lamp may be lit at the end of a game in which the complete function is activated and the advantageous zone lamp is lit (while waiting to bet after all the reels have stopped).

Also, as a variation different from the above-described embodiment, when a game in which the complete function is activated ends and a replay is won (while waiting for the start switch to be operated after all reels have stopped, or while waiting for a medal to be inserted), the replay lamp may be lit and the start lamp may be extinguished.

Also, as a variation different from the above-described embodiment, when a game in which the complete function is activated ends and a small winning combination is displayed at the end of the game (while waiting for bets after all the reels have stopped), the corresponding segment of the winning number indicator may light up.

Even in the different modes described above, the configurations of the <<lamp mode at the end of a game when the complete function is not activated>> and the <<lamp mode at the end of a game when the complete function is activated>> can be combined.

<Performance in the operation advance notice state>
A possible display mode on the display device in the activation notification state is as shown in Fig. 60. In Fig. 60, as the effect images in the normal state (which is neither an activation notification state nor a stop state and includes various game states such as CZ, AT, and non-AT as game states managed by the main control means), which is neither an activation notification state nor a stop state, a lion and girl character display, a heart effect display, a line display such as "Today was fun," and a total winning number display such as "TOTAL: 18,000 coins" are displayed. In addition to the effect images displayed in the normal state, as the effect images in the activation notification state (which is also included in various game states such as CZ, AT, and non-AT as game states managed by the main control means), a remaining difference display such as "The complete function will be activated soon. 100 coins remaining until activation" is displayed. Furthermore, as the effect image in the limit notification state (a state in which the progress of the game has stopped), the effect image displayed in the normal state and the activation notice state is not displayed, and instead, a black background and a limit notification (notification regarding the limit processing, limit notification) saying "The complete function has been activated" are displayed. Note that the total number of wins display in the normal state does not need to be displayed all the time, but is displayed when the total number of wins reaches or exceeds a predetermined threshold (for example, 18,000 shown in Figure 60, or 18,900, which is the value at which a test interrupt request signal is sent to the test IF board).

In the activation notification state, the remaining difference display obscures the entire display of the total number of wins, part of the girl character display, and all of the effect display. However, because the display area of the remaining difference display is smaller than 50% of the full screen display area, the player can generally see the effect image being executed. Note that in Figure 60, the transparency (transparency) of the remaining difference display is set to 0%, so the display of layers behind the remaining difference display cannot be seen, but the transparency of the remaining difference display can be set to any value between 10% and 90%. This makes it possible to see both the remaining difference display and the effect image.

In addition to the congratulatory display described above, the limit notification may also include the display of limit text such as "The limit has been reached" or "The game has ended" or a sound. The limit text may be displayed simultaneously with the congratulatory display, or the congratulatory display may be terminated after the limit text is displayed and the limit text or sound may be displayed. In addition, a warning display or sound such as "Please press the settlement switch" or "Please press the counting switch" may also be displayed together with the limit text.
Furthermore, while the remaining difference display in the operation advance notification state is displayed at the top of the display area of the display device, this is not limiting, and the remaining difference display may also be displayed at the bottom or center of the display area of the display device. However, if displayed at the bottom or center, there is a possibility that it will overlap with the display area of various information displays (number of game medals displayed, number of awarded medals displayed, or number of bets displayed) not shown, and most of the effect images, so by setting the transparency of the remaining difference display to any value between 20% and 90%, the player can view the various information displays and effect images.

In addition, when any of the AT termination conditions (for example, the number of AT plays, the difference in the AT, or the number of AT navigation plays) are met in the activation notification state, the addiction prevention display is displayed in priority over the remaining difference display. This allows the player to see the addiction prevention display before the remaining difference display, effectively preventing addiction to the game.

Also, contrary to the above-described embodiment, when any of the AT termination conditions (for example, the number of AT execution games, the difference in the AT, or the number of AT navigations) are met in the activation advance notification state, the remaining difference display may be displayed in priority over the addiction prevention display. This allows the player to quickly visually confirm the remaining difference until the game is stopped.

In addition, when any of the AT termination conditions (for example, the number of AT execution games, the difference during the AT, or the number of AT navigations) are met in the activation notification state, the remaining difference display and the anti-addiction display may be displayed in different display areas. This allows the player to view both pieces of information. In this case, if the display area for the remaining difference display and the anti-addiction display are configured to be displayed in overlapping display areas, the display area for the anti-addiction display may be changed, or the display area for the remaining difference display may be changed. Furthermore, the display areas for the remaining difference display and the anti-addiction display may be predetermined to be non-overlapping display areas even when displayed simultaneously.

In addition, when the total score threshold is reached or the total score upper limit is abnormal, a notification (counting switch prompt display) is displayed to encourage counting. Therefore, when the total score threshold is reached or the total score upper limit is abnormal during the operation advance notification state, both the remaining difference display and the counting switch prompt display are displayed. This allows the player to be aware of both the remaining difference display and the need to operate the counting switch.

Also, when the total score threshold is reached or the total score upper limit is abnormal during the activation notification state, the counting switch prompt display may be displayed in priority over the remaining difference display. In this case, if the counting switch is operated while the counting switch prompt display is displayed and the total score falls below the threshold (15,000 in this embodiment), the remaining difference display will be displayed. This allows the total score threshold reached state to be canceled by quickly operating the counting switch, and the player can then become aware of the remaining difference display.

Furthermore, when the total score threshold is reached or the total score upper limit is abnormal during the activation notification state, the remaining difference display may be displayed in priority over the count switch prompt display. This can provide a sense of satisfaction to players who want to prioritize knowing the remaining difference.

<Effects in the end notification state>
In the limit notification state, the lion and girl character displays, the effect display, the dialogue display, and the total number of wins display are all invisible. Also, a limit display is displayed instead of the remaining difference display. In Figure 60, the limit display is displayed in the center of the display area of the display device, but no effect image is displayed (the transparency of the limit display is 0%), so it may be displayed anywhere in the display area, including the top or bottom.

In addition, the limit display in the limit notification state may occupy 50% or more of the display area of the entire screen. However, when other information is displayed (such as a display indicating that the menu screen can be displayed by operating a sub-switch or a warning display), it is desirable that the limit display in the limit notification state be any value between 50% and 90% of the display area of the entire screen.

In the game end notification state in Figure 60, no congratulatory display is displayed, but a congratulatory display using a character may be displayed instead of a black background image. However, even when the congratulatory display is displayed, the in-game effect image is not displayed.

In addition, when a limit notification state is reached during an AT (when any of the AT end conditions (e.g., the number of AT plays, the difference in the AT, or the number of AT navigations) are not met but the limit conditions are met), and a limit display is displayed, an addiction prevention display may be displayed. This prevents the addiction prevention display that would normally be displayed on the AT end screen from not being displayed. The addiction prevention display at this time may be the same display format and display time as when it is displayed on the AT end screen, or it may be a different display format and display time than when it is displayed on the AT end screen. In addition, the display area of the addiction prevention display is displayed in a position that does not overlap with the display area of the limit display, but if the addiction prevention display is configured to be hidden (not made visible) after a predetermined time, the display area of the addiction prevention display and the display area of the limit display may overlap.

In addition, contrary to the above-described embodiment, when a stop notification state is reached during an AT (when any of the AT termination conditions (for example, the number of AT execution games, the difference in number during the AT, or the number of AT navigations) are not met but the stop condition is met), and the stop display is displayed, the addiction prevention display does not need to be displayed. This allows the player to quickly recognize that the stop display has been reached, without reducing the visibility of the stop display.

In addition, even if a stop notification state is reached during the AT (when any of the AT's termination conditions (for example, the number of AT execution games, the difference in number during the AT, or the number of AT navigations) are not met but the stop conditions are met), and the addiction prevention display is not displayed when the stop indication is displayed, if any of the AT's termination conditions are met and the stop conditions are also met (when any of the AT's termination conditions and the stop conditions are met simultaneously), the addiction prevention display may be displayed when the stop indication is displayed. This allows the player to recognize that the AT has ended even when the stop state is reached, giving them a sense of satisfaction.

In addition, when a stop notification state is reached during an AT (when any of the AT's termination conditions (for example, the number of AT execution games, the difference in number during the AT, or the number of AT navigations) are not met but the stop conditions are met), the addiction prevention display is not displayed when the stop indication is displayed. Even when any of the AT's termination conditions are met and the stop conditions are also met (when any of the AT's termination conditions and the stop conditions are met simultaneously), the addiction prevention display may not be displayed when the stop indication is displayed. This allows the player to quickly recognize that the stop state has been reached, without reducing the visibility of the stop indication.

<Regarding the processing of the main control means or sub-control means during the termination processing>
When the main control means executes the stop processing, the main control means and/or the sub-control means notifies the player that the progress of the game has stopped (hereinafter, this may be referred to as a "stop notification").

The main control means may notify the user that a stop has occurred by displaying a message on a specified display device controlled by the main control means.

Examples of specified indicators controlled by the main control means include an acquired coin count indicator and a credit count indicator.

For example, if a specific error (e.g., a door open error, a medal accumulation error, etc.) occurs while the number of coins acquired display is displaying a message indicating that the limit has been reached (e.g., EE), the number of coins acquired display may be configured to display a message indicating that the specific error has occurred (e.g., E1). Then, if the specific error is cleared by operating the reset switch, the number of coins acquired display may be configured to display again a message indicating that the limit has been reached.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to accurately notify the user that a stalled state has been reached even if there is an abnormality in the sub-control means. Furthermore, when a specified error occurs during a stalled state, it is possible to accurately notify the user that the specified error has occurred, even if there is an abnormality in the sub-control means. Furthermore, when the specified error is resolved, it is possible to notify the user that the specified error has been resolved and that the stalled state has been reached.

Furthermore, for example, if a specified error (e.g., a door open error, a medal accumulation error, etc.) occurs while the acquired coin count display is displaying a message indicating that the limit has been reached (e.g., EE), the acquired coin count display may not display a message indicating that the specified error has occurred (e.g., E1). In other words, even if a specified error occurs, the acquired coin count display may continue to display a message indicating that the limit has been reached.

By configuring it in this way, the player will no longer be confused as to whether a specific error has occurred or whether a play-stop state has occurred, and the player can be accurately notified that a play-stop state has occurred.

Note that while the number of coins acquired indicator was mentioned as an example of a predetermined indicator controlled by the main control means, as mentioned above, it may also be a credit number indicator.

For example, the credit number display displays the number of credits. However, if the limit condition is met (if information indicating that the limit condition has been met is stored in the limit flag storage area), automatic settlement, as described below, may be performed. In this configuration, once the limit condition is met and automatic settlement is performed, the number of credits becomes 0, and the credit number display can display (for example, EE) to indicate that a limit state has occurred.

In addition, in gaming machines that do not automatically settle accounts when a play-stop condition is met, after the player operates the settlement switch and the number of credits reaches 0, a display (e.g., EE) can be displayed on the credit number display to indicate that a play-stop condition has occurred.

If a specified error (e.g., a door open error, a medal accumulation error, etc.) occurs while the number of coins acquired is not displaying anything and the credit number display is displaying an indication that a play limit has occurred, the number of coins acquired may display an indication (e.g., E1) that the specified error has occurred, and the credit number display may display an indication that a play limit has occurred. Then, when the specified error is resolved by operating the reset switch, the display on the number of coins acquired indicating that the specified error has occurred may disappear (terminating the display process), and the credit number display may continue to display an indication that a play limit has occurred.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to accurately notify the user that a stalled state has been reached even if there is an abnormality in the sub-control means. Furthermore, when a specified error occurs during a stalled state, it is possible to accurately notify the user that the specified error has occurred, even if there is an abnormality in the sub-control means. Furthermore, when the specified error is resolved, it is possible to notify the user that the specified error has been resolved and that the stalled state has been reached.

Furthermore, for example, if a specified error (e.g., a door open error, a medal accumulation error, etc.) occurs while the credit number display is displaying a message indicating that the game has reached its limit (e.g., EE), the acquired coin count display may not display a message indicating that the specified error has occurred (e.g., E1). In other words, even if a specified error occurs, the credit number display may continue to display a message indicating that the game has reached its limit.

By configuring it in this way, the player will no longer be confused as to whether a specific error has occurred or whether a play-stop state has occurred, and the player can be accurately notified that a play-stop state has occurred.

In addition to the congratulatory display described above, the sub-control means may also issue a stoppage notification or sound such as "The complete function has been activated," "The stoppage state has been reached," or "The game has ended," as shown in FIG. 60. The stoppage notification may be displayed simultaneously with the congratulatory display, or the congratulatory display may be terminated after the stoppage notification or sound is issued. Furthermore, a warning display (various switch prompt displays) such as "Please press the settlement switch" or sound may also be issued together with the stoppage notification.

To notify the user of the limit, the limit process may be executed before the congratulatory display is executed, and the congratulatory display may be displayed during the limit process, or a freeze may be executed for a predetermined period before the limit process is executed, and the congratulatory display may be executed during the predetermined period, and the limit character may be displayed when the limit process is executed after the predetermined period.

In addition, when a stop character is displayed after a blessing display, the warning display will not be executed while the blessing display is being executed, and the warning display will be executed when the stop character is displayed.

This prevents players from forgetting to operate the settlement switch or counting switch, and does not hinder the sense of accomplishment that comes from displaying the celebration, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, during the limit notification, sounds such as background music other than the limit text audio such as "The limit has been reached" and the warning audio such as "Please press the settlement switch" and "Please press the counting switch" are not output, and silence remains. In addition, during the limit notification, sounds such as background music other than the limit text audio such as "The limit has been reached" and the warning audio such as "Please press the settlement switch" may be output at a volume lower than the volume during error notification.

By configuring it in this way, players are less likely to have a negative impression of a dead end, and are more likely to recognize it as something to aim for, thereby increasing their interest in the game.

In addition, the functions of the sub-switches managed by the sub-control means are enabled during the end notification. For this reason, even during the end processing (end notification), it is possible to open the menu screen or volume change screen by operating the sub-switch. Note that the volume that can be changed from the volume change screen does not include the volume related to the end notification, so it is not possible to change the volume during the end notification.

In addition, by opening a menu screen during the limit-play process and displaying a two-dimensional code including the game history, a service (a so-called "game machine linked service") can be provided to the player in which the game history is read by a mobile device and saved on a server. Note that since the limit-play display is displayed on the display device, when the two-dimensional code is displayed from the menu screen except during a limit-play notification, it is displayed in a specified area in the center of the display device's screen. However, since the specified area overlaps with the limit-play display during a limit-play notification, the display area for the two-dimensional code during a limit-play notification is displayed in an area different from the specified area that does not overlap with the limit-play display.

As an alternative method for displaying the limit indication and the two-dimensional code, even if the display areas of the limit indication and the two-dimensional code overlap, the limit indication and the two-dimensional code may be displayed alternately, allowing the limit notification to be issued while the two-dimensional code can be read.

In addition, when a play-stop process is executed, the gaming media may be automatically settled. For example, if a play-stop process is executed when the number of credits stored is "50," "50" gaming media will be automatically settled (dispensed into the lower tray) even if the settlement switch is not operated. By configuring it in this way, the gaming media electronically stored in the gaming machine can be returned to the player without the player having to operate the settlement switch. In other words, it is possible to avoid issuing warning audio such as "Please press the settlement switch" or warning displays such as "Please press the settlement switch" or "Please press the counting switch."

Furthermore, the stop notification will not end due to the passage of time during the stop processing. In other words, the stop notification will continue until the stop state is released (until a setting change process or RWM abnormality process is executed).

During the abort process, even if an event occurs that could result in one of the aforementioned recoverable errors, the system may be configured not to detect the error, or it may be configured to detect the error but not execute the specified error processing. In either case, the system is configured not to notify the user of the specified error.

As mentioned above, this is because the stop processing is looped during the stop processing, so even if a specified error is detected in the interrupt processing, the specified error processing within the main loop processing will not be executed. Note that if interrupt processing is prohibited during the stop processing, the specified error will not be detected.

This prevents the hassle of having to clear errors when gameplay cannot proceed by executing a game stop process, reducing the workload of game parlor staff.

Note that if the system is configured to execute a specified error process within an interrupt process, the specified error process will be executed even during a stop process. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the specified error process from being executed during a stop process by determining whether or not a stop process is in progress before executing the specified error process, and if so, not executing the specified error process. This can also be achieved by disabling interrupt processing during a stop process.

Furthermore, considering that fraud can be detected quickly by executing a specified error process even during the termination process, it may be possible to configure the system so that a specified error process can be executed during the termination process.

In this case, interrupt processing is permitted even during the termination processing, and when a specified error is detected during the interrupt processing, the specified error processing is executed within the interrupt processing and the specified error notification processing is performed, or when a specified error is detected during the termination processing, the specified error processing is executed during the specified error processing within the termination processing loop after the specified error is detected during the interrupt processing.

By doing this, fraudulent processing can be carried out even during the termination process, preventing fraudulent activity.

It is also possible to configure the system to output an external signal when the game-stopping process is executed. For example, an external signal could be output as a security signal for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 30 seconds). The security signal is a signal that is output due to a predetermined error. When the security signal is output, the gaming facility can determine that some kind of abnormality has occurred in the gaming machine on which the game-stopping process was executed, and therefore, even if an error notification is not issued during the game-stopping process, fraudulent behavior can be deterred.

The specified errors that cause a security signal to be output may be, for example, any or all of the following: errors related to the selector (medal retention error, medal backflow error, medal passage time error) and errors related to the hopper 44 (hopper retention error, abnormality detection error). Furthermore, other errors may also be used, not just the errors mentioned above.

The security signal may also be configured to be output not only when a specific error occurs, but also during setting change mode or setting confirmation mode. For example, the security signal may be configured to be output when the setting key switch is on.

By configuring it in this way, the gaming facility can prevent not only certain errors but also fraudulent turning on of the setting key switch (for example, fraudulent changes to setting values or fraudulent confirmation of setting values) by outputting a security signal.

<Other configurations related to stop monitoring processing or stop processing>
The limit monitoring process and the limit process are configured to be executed outside the use area. Alternatively, the limit monitoring process may be configured to be executed outside the use area and the limit process may be executed within the use area, or the limit monitoring process and the limit process may be configured to be executed within the use area.

In addition, in the case of medal-less gaming machines, the stoppage monitoring process and stoppage process may be performed outside the use area of the main control board, or the stoppage monitoring process and stoppage process may be performed outside the use area of the gaming medal count control board.

It is configured to continue executing the process to output an external signal while the termination process is in progress.

This configuration allows an external notification that the game is being stopped, allowing the gaming center manager to quickly grasp the status of the gaming machine.

The end of the game notification may be not only by the LCD display or sound output from the speaker, but also by the lighting of various LEDs such as the frame lamp, lower panel lamp, number of coins won indicator, or number of credits indicator.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to notify players that a game has stopped even on gaming machines that do not have LCD screens.

The following describes a specific example of the end-of-game monitoring process using the figures. Here, the end-of-game monitoring process is configured to be executed at a predetermined timing after the awarding of gaming media (the winning awarding process related to the displayed symbol combination in Figure 9) has ended. For example, the end-of-game monitoring process may be configured to be executed as one of the processes executed in the game end check in Figure 9.

The end-of-game monitoring process is also executed in all games. Specifically, it is executed regardless of the game zone (normal zone, advantageous zone). It is also executed regardless of the game state (non-AT state, AT state, during bonus (bonus game state), inside bonus state). It is also executed regardless of the number of gaming media betted (game with one bet, game with two bets, game with three bets).

<End monitoring process (version without end difference counter)>
In FIG. 55, there is a storage area for the number of inserted medals and a storage area for the number of paid out medals.

The inserted medal count memory area (also known as the total IN counter) is one of the RWM areas of the main control board, and is a memory area that can store a value corresponding to the total number of gaming media inserted (total number of bets). For example, the inserted medal count memory area can be a 2-byte memory area (a memory area that can store values from 0 to 65535).

The medal payout count memory area (also known as the total OUT counter) is one of the RWM areas of the main control board, and is a memory area that can store a value corresponding to the total number of gaming media paid out (total payouts). For example, the medal payout count memory area can be a 2-byte memory area (a memory area that can store values from 0 to 65535).

The value stored in the medal count memory area is set to the initial value (0) when the power is turned on. Similarly, the value stored in the medal count memory area is set to the initial value (0) when the power is turned on. In other words, if a power outage occurs when the value stored in the medal count memory area is 1000 and the value stored in the medal count memory area is 2000, and the power is then turned on, the initial value (0) will be stored in the medal count memory area and the initial value (0) will be stored in the medal count memory area.

Note that "power-on" includes both power-on without a setting change and power-on with a setting change. However, it is also possible for the initial values to not be stored when the power is turned on without a setting change, and for the initial values to be stored when the power is turned on with a setting change.

Furthermore, the values stored in the number of inserted medals memory area and the number of paid out medals memory area are not stored as their initial values (0) when the RWM is cleared following the end of the advantageous period. In other words, the advantageous period ends (the RWM is cleared following the end of the advantageous period) when the value stored in the number of inserted medals memory area is 1000 and the value stored in the number of paid out medals memory area is 2000, and the next game (game in the normal period) starts with 1000 stored in the number of inserted medals memory area and 2000 stored in the number of paid out medals memory area. Note that it is assumed that the power is not turned off between the end of the advantageous period and the start of the next game.

First, in "Replay activation symbol display?", it is determined whether or not a symbol combination corresponding to a replay has stopped and displayed as a result of this game. In other words, in a game in which a replay role is won through an internal lottery and a symbol combination corresponding to a replay has stopped and displayed, the result is YES. On the other hand, for example, in a game in which a push order bell role is won through an internal lottery (a game in which a symbol combination corresponding to a replay has not stopped and displayed), the result is NO. Note that a symbol combination corresponding to a replay can also be referred to as a symbol combination corresponding to a replay role (the same applies below).

In other words, if a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed in a stopped state during this game, "Replay activation symbol display?" will answer YES, and the game end monitoring process will end.

The "total OUT counter update process" updates the value stored in the payout medal count storage area. Specifically, the number of medals paid out in the current game is added to the value stored in the payout medal count storage area. The result of adding the number of medals paid out in the current game to the value stored in the payout medal count storage area is then stored in the payout medal count storage area. For example, if "1000" is stored in the payout medal count storage area and the payout number obtained as a result of the current game is "9," then "1009" is stored in the payout medal count storage area.

The "total IN counter update process" updates the value stored in the number of inserted medals storage area. Specifically, the number of inserted medals for the current game is added to the value stored in the number of inserted medals storage area. The result of adding the number of inserted medals for the current game to the value stored in the number of inserted medals storage area is then stored in the number of inserted medals storage area. For example, if "3000" is stored in the number of inserted medals storage area and the number of bets for the current game is "3," then "3003" is stored in the number of inserted medals storage area.

Note that even if the current game is bet on via automatic betting, the number of bets on that automatic bet will be considered the number of balls thrown in this game. For example, if a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed statically in the previous game and a "3" is bet on via automatic betting, the number of balls thrown in this game will be "3." However, for example, if a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed statically in both the previous game and the current game (two consecutive games), the answer to "Is a replay activation symbol displayed?" in the end-of-game monitoring process for this game will be YES, and the end-of-game monitoring process will end without executing the "total-in counter update process."

"Total OUT counter < total IN counter?" determines whether the total number of dispensed coins after being updated by the "total OUT counter update process" is less than the total number of inserted coins after being updated by the "total IN counter update process."

Specifically, a subtraction process is performed to subtract the "total number of coins inserted after being updated by the 'total in counter update process'" from the "total number of coins paid out after being updated by the 'total out counter update process'". If the carry flag is 1 as a result of this subtraction process, a YES judgment is made and the limit monitoring process is terminated. In other words, the next process, "difference number > 19000", is not executed. On the other hand, if the carry flag is not 1 as a result of this subtraction process (if it is 0), a NO judgment is made.

For example, if the total number of coins inserted after being updated by the "total IN counter update process" is "1000" and the total number of coins paid out after being updated by the "total OUT counter update process" is "2000", then "2000" - "1000" is executed. As a result of this subtraction process, no borrow occurs, so the carry flag becomes 0. In other words, the result is determined to be NO.

For example, if the total number of coins inserted after being updated by the "total IN counter update process" is "2000" and the total number of coins paid out after being updated by the "total OUT counter update process" is "1000", then "1000" - "2000" is executed. As a result of this subtraction process, a borrow occurs, so the carry flag becomes 1. In other words, the answer is YES.

For example, if the total number of coins inserted after being updated by the "total IN counter update process" is "2000" and the total number of coins paid out after being updated by the "total OUT counter update process" is "2000", then "2000" - "2000" is executed. As a result of this subtraction process, no borrow occurs, so the carry flag becomes 0. In other words, the result is determined to be NO.

"Difference > 19000?" determines whether the difference in the number of gaming media exceeds 19000, with the power-on time being the starting point (0). Specifically, the determination is made by comparing the result of the subtraction process performed in "Total OUT counter < Total IN counter?" with the "value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media that will result in a capped state." Here, the "value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media that will result in a capped state" is set to "19001," and the determination is made.

For example, if the total number of coins inserted after being updated by the "total IN counter update process" is "1000" and the total number of coins dispensed after being updated by the "total OUT counter update process" is "2000", the result of subtracting "2000" from "1000" is "1000". As a result of the comparison between "1000" and "19001" (1000 - 19001), the carry flag becomes 1, so the result is NO (the difference does not exceed 19000).

For example, if the total number of coins inserted after being updated by the "total IN counter update process" is "10,000" and the total number of coins dispensed after being updated by the "total OUT counter update process" is "29,000," the result of subtracting "29,000" from "10,000" is "19,000." As a result of the comparison between "19,000" and "19,001" (19,000 - 19,001), the carry flag becomes 1, so the result is determined to be NO (the difference does not exceed 19,000).

For example, if the total input number after updating by the "total IN counter update process" is "10,000" and the total output number after updating by the "total OUT counter update process" is "29,005," the result of subtracting "29,005" from "10,000" is "19,005." The result of the comparison between "19,005" and "19,001" (19,005 - 19,001) is that the carry flag is 0, so the answer is YES (the difference is greater than 19,000).

The "Save Shutdown Flag" function stores information indicating that the shutdown conditions have been met in the shutdown flag storage area within the RWM area of the main control board. For example, a predetermined value (e.g., "1") is stored in the shutdown flag storage area.

In addition, the information stored in the limit flag storage area is not initialized when the power is turned on without changing the settings, or when the power is turned off (power-off process). Furthermore, the information stored in the limit flag storage area is not initialized when the RWM is cleared at the end of the favorable period.

The information stored in the stop flag memory area can be initialized by powering on with a setting change (RWM clear process with setting change). (If information indicating that the stop conditions have been met is stored, the information indicating that the stop conditions have been met can be cleared.)

In other words, if the power is turned OFF after "Save Limit Flag" stores information indicating that the limit conditions have been met in the limit flag storage area, and then the power is turned ON (power ON without changing settings), the values stored in the number of inserted medals storage area and the number of paid out medals storage area will be reset to their initial values (0), but the information stored in the limit flag storage area (information indicating that the limit conditions have been met) will not be initialized.

For this reason, if the power is turned off and then turned on again without changing any settings while the power-on flag storage area stores information indicating that the power-on conditions have been met, the power-on state will be reached even though the difference between the value stored in the number of inserted medals storage area and the value stored in the number of paid-out medals storage area does not exceed 19,000 (the difference in the number of game media when the power is turned on is the starting point (0) does not exceed 19,000).

If information indicating that the stop condition has been met is stored in the stop flag storage area (if the stop state has been reached), betting operations for the next game cannot be performed. For example, bet button operations are disabled, or the blocker is (set) to a position that does not form a medal flow path (a position that allows inserted medals to be returned from the return slot).

Furthermore, in gaming machines that do not automatically settle gaming media after information indicating that the limit conditions have been met is stored in the limit flag storage area, the settlement switch may be made operable after information indicating that the limit conditions have been met is stored in the limit flag storage area. By configuring it in this way, the number of credits can be settled.

On the other hand, in gaming machines that automatically settle gaming media after information indicating that the settlement condition has been met is stored in the settlement flag storage area, the settlement switch may be made inoperable.

In other words, the stoppage monitoring process in Figure 55 performs a subtraction process to subtract the "total number of coins inserted after being updated by the 'total IN counter update process'" from the "total number of coins paid out after being updated by the 'total OUT counter update process'". If the "total number of coins paid out after being updated by the 'total OUT counter update process'" is greater than the "total number of coins inserted after being updated by the 'total IN counter update process'", it determines whether it is greater than the specified value (19,000). If it determines that the value is greater than the specified value (19,000), information indicating that the stoppage condition has been met is stored in the stoppage flag memory area. Therefore, the next game cannot be played unless the settings are changed.

In addition, the stoppage monitoring process in Figure 55 performs a subtraction process to subtract the "total number of coins inserted after being updated by the 'total IN counter update process'" from the "total number of coins paid out after being updated by the 'total OUT counter update process'". If the "total number of coins paid out after being updated by the 'total OUT counter update process'" is less than the "total number of coins inserted after being updated by the 'total IN counter update process'", no determination is made as to whether it is greater than the specified value (19,000). Therefore, information indicating that the stoppage condition has been met is not stored in the stoppage flag memory area, and the next game can be played.

In other words, if the total number of dispensed coins is greater than the total number of inserted coins, it is compared with the specified value, but if the total number of dispensed coins is less than the total number of inserted coins, it is not compared with the specified value.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to avoid performing unnecessary processing when the total payout number is smaller than the total input number. In other words, it is possible to shorten the processing time of the main control means and reduce the number of incorrect decisions made due to noise, etc.

Note that while the initial value stored in the inserted medal count storage area and the paid-out medal count storage area has been explained as "0" as an example, the initial value is not limited to "0." As long as the initial value stored in the inserted medal count storage area and the initial value stored in the paid-out medal count storage area are the same, any value can be used.

In addition, the inserted medal count storage area is a 2-byte storage area, and the paid-out medal count storage area is a 2-byte storage area, but the inserted medal count storage area may be a 3-byte storage area, and the paid-out medal count storage area may be a 3-byte storage area.

In addition, if the difference in the number of gaming media when the power is turned on is set as the starting point (0), the values stored in the inserted medal count storage area and the paid out medal count storage area may be configured not to be updated.

For example, if the lower limit is set to -10,000, and the difference in the number of gaming media when the power is turned on is set as the starting point (0) and the game is playing, the value stored in the number of inserted medals storage area will not be updated based on the number of bets in that game. Also, the value stored in the number of paid out medals storage area will not be updated based on the number of paid out medals in that game.

By setting a lower limit in this way, the game can be capped off when the difference in the number of gaming media exceeds a maximum of 29,000 (the absolute value of the lower limit, (10,000) + 19,000). In other words, compared to when a lower limit is not set, the number of gaming media that a player can potentially obtain before the game is capped can be reduced. In other words, the tendency to gamble can be prevented from becoming too high.

Although the lower limit has been described as -10000, the lower limit is not limited to -10000 and can be any value.
stomach

<Battle monitoring process (Battle difference counter increment version)>
56, a stop difference counter is provided. The explanation of the stop difference counter has been given above, so it will be omitted. The size of the storage area for the stop difference counter will be assumed to be 2 bytes.

Note that the initial value of the stop difference counter in Figure 56 is the value obtained by subtracting the "value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media to be stopped" from the "value corresponding to the memory area of the stop difference counter."

The "value corresponding to the memory area of the stop difference counter" is 65,535, which is the maximum value that can be stored in the memory area of the stop difference counter if the memory area of the stop difference counter is 2 bytes. Also, if the memory area of the stop difference counter is 3 bytes, it is 16,777,215, which is the maximum value that can be stored in the memory area of the stop difference counter.

The "value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media that will cause a stoppage" would be 19,000, for example, if the stoppage occurs when the difference in the number of gaming media exceeds 19,000, with the time when the power is turned on as the starting point (0). Also, for example, if the stoppage occurs when the difference in the number of gaming media exceeds 10,000, with the time when the power is turned on as the starting point (0), the value would be 10,000. Also, for example, if the point at which the player has the lowest number of balls dispensed is used as the base (0), and the stoppage occurs when the difference in the number of gaming media from that base exceeds 19,000, the value would be 19,000.

In Figure 56, the explanation will be given assuming that the "value corresponding to the memory area of the stop difference counter" is 65,535, the "value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media to be stopped" is 19,000, and the initial value is 46,535.

The initial value of the stop difference counter is stored in the stop difference counter when the power is turned on without changing the settings (not shown). Note that the initial value of the stop difference counter is also stored in the stop difference counter when the power is turned on with a setting change (not shown).

First, in "Replay Activation Symbol Display?", it determines whether the symbol combination corresponding to the replay was stopped and displayed as a result of this game. In other words, in a game in which a replay role was won through an internal lottery and a symbol combination corresponding to the replay was stopped and displayed, it determines YES. On the other hand, for example, in a game in which a push order bell role was won through an internal lottery (a game in which a symbol combination corresponding to the replay was not stopped and displayed), it determines NO.

In other words, if a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed in a static state during this game, "Replay activation symbol displayed?" will answer YES, and the game end monitoring process will end.

In "Setting the Hit Difference Counter," the value stored in the hit difference counter is stored in a specified register. For example, if the value stored in the hit difference counter is 10,000, 10,000 is stored in the HL register. Note that the value stored in the hit difference counter at this time is the value before the hit difference counter was updated using the absolute value of the difference in the number of gaming media in the current game.

"Is the number of coins inserted less than the number of coins paid out?" determines whether the number of coins paid out is greater than the number of coins inserted.

For example, as a result of this game,
a) If the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 0, the determination is NO.
a) If the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 1, the result is determined to be NO.
c) If the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 3, the answer is determined to be NO.
d) If the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 10, the answer is YES.

Specifically, the number of inserted games minus the number of paid-out games is calculated, and the result of this calculation is stored in a specified register (for example, register A). Furthermore, if there is a borrow as a result of the number of inserted games minus the number of paid-out games (if the carry flag is 1), the result is judged as YES, and if there is no borrow (if the carry flag is 0), the result is judged as NO. In other words, if the difference in the number of gaming media for the current game is greater than the number of paid-out games, the carry flag is 0 and the result is judged as YES. Furthermore, if the difference in the number of inserted games media for the current game is less than the number of paid-out games, the carry flag is 1 and the result is judged as NO.

To give a specific example, the results of this game:
a) If the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 0, the A register will be 3 and the carry flag will be 0.
a) If the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 1, the A register will be 2 and the carry flag will be 0.
c) If the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 3, the A register will be 0 and the carry flag will be 0.
d) If the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 10, the A register will be 249 and the carry flag will be 1.

Here, if a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed (on an active line) as a result of the previous game, the number of bets for the current game is automatically bet (for example, "3" is set by the automatic bet), and a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is not displayed (on an active line) as a result of the current game, then even if the number of bets was set by the automatic bet, it will be treated as the number of bets for the current game.

On the other hand, if the result of the current game is a symbol combination corresponding to a replay that has stopped (on an active line) (if the next game is a game based on a replay), the number of balls inserted and the number of balls paid out will not be considered as "number inserted < number paid out." In other words, if the result of the current game is a symbol combination corresponding to a replay that has stopped (on an active line) (if the next game is a game based on a replay), the number of balls bet on the current game will not be considered as the number of balls inserted. Similarly, if the result of the current game is a symbol combination corresponding to a replay that has stopped (on an active line) (if the next game is a game based on a replay), the number of balls awarded (or automatic bets) on the current game will not be considered as the number of balls paid out.

Note that in "Number of Inserts < Number of Payouts?", we calculated number of inserts - number of payouts, but it can also be determined by number of payouts - number of inserts. In other words, it is sufficient to be able to calculate the absolute value of the difference in the number of gaming media for the current game using the number of inserts and the number of payouts.

"Is the stop difference counter < 0?" determines whether the absolute value of the difference in the number of gaming media for the current game is subtracted from the value stored in the stop difference counter, resulting in a lower limit (0). Specifically, the value stored in the A register (number of coins inserted for the current game - number of coins paid out for the current game) is subtracted from the value stored in the HL register (value stored in the stop difference counter), and determines whether there is a borrowing result. If there is a borrowing result, the answer is YES; if there is no borrowing result, the answer is NO. If there is a borrowing result, the carry flag is set to 1, and if there is no borrowing result, the carry flag is set to 0. The result of this calculation is stored in the HL register.

For example, if the hit difference counter (HL register) is set to 2, the result of this game is:
A) When the input number is 3 and the output number is 0 (when the A register is 3), the HL register is 65535 and the carry flag is 1. Note that 2-3 = -1, but registers cannot store negative values. Therefore, a carry occurs, resulting in 65535.
a) When the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 1 (when the A register is 2), the HL register is 0 and the carry flag is 0.
c) When the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 3 (when the A register is 0), the HL register is 2 and the carry flag is 0.

In other words, in the above example, a) if the number of coins inserted = 3 and the number of coins out = 0, the answer is YES. Also, b) if the number of coins inserted = 3 and the number of coins paid out = 1, the answer is NO. Also, c) if the number of coins inserted = 3 and the number of coins paid out = 3, the answer is NO.

If the answer to "Is the carry difference counter < 0?" is YES, the carry flag is 1, so a specified calculation is performed to set the carry flag to 0. For example, the specified calculation is to perform an exclusive OR on the value of the A register and the value of the A register. As a result of this exclusive OR, the carry flag becomes 0. Note that although the specified calculation is an exclusive OR on the value of the A register and the value of the A register, any calculation can be used as long as it sets the carry flag to 0.

When "Set Lower Limit" causes a borrow due to "Stop Difference Counter < 0?", a predetermined lower limit (0) is stored in the register that stores the calculation result (in this case, the HL register). In the above example, when the value stored in the stop difference counter is 2, if a) the number of coins inserted = 3 and the number of coins paid out = 0, "Stop Difference Counter < 0?" causes the HL register to read 65535. In such a case, "Set Lower Limit" stores 0 in the HL register.

In other words, if a carryover occurs in the value stored in the HL register and an abnormal value is stored, storing the lower limit value of 0 in the HL register makes it possible to calculate the difference number of gaming media as accurately as possible. Note that even if "Lower Limit Value Set" is executed, the next game will still be possible. In other words, the processing in Figure 56 will be executed in games after "Lower Limit Value Set" is executed.

Note that while Figure 56 includes a "lower limit value set" process, this does not necessarily have to be included. Specifically, if "Is the stop difference counter < 0?" returns YES, the value stored in the stop difference counter for the previous game may be set. For example, if the value stored in the stop difference counter is 2 and the number of coins inserted and the number of coins paid out for that game are a) number of coins inserted = 3 and number of coins paid out = 0, the value stored in the stop difference counter may be set to 2 (the same value as the value of the stop difference counter for the previous game). This configuration prevents abnormal values (values with borrowed digits) from being stored in the "stop difference counter." Furthermore, since the process equivalent to "lower limit value set" is eliminated, the program size can be reduced.

In other words, when a downgrade occurs due to "Stop Difference Counter < 0?", the value at the time of the downgrade is used to prevent the stop difference counter from being updated, preventing abnormal values from being entered as the value of the stop difference counter. In other words, even if the difference in the number of gaming media becomes a negative value, the stop state can be triggered as accurately as possible using the difference in the gaming media. Furthermore, for values below the lower limit, the lower limit or the previous value is used as the value of the stop difference counter, so it is possible to prevent too many gaming media from being awarded before the stop state is reached. In other words, it is possible to prevent excessive gambling.

In "Difference Update," the complement of the value (value stored in Register A) of the calculation result (number of coins inserted - number of coins paid out) in "Is the difference counter for the stop game < 0?" is calculated and stored in Register A. The calculated complement (value stored in Register A) is then added to Register HL. In other words, the calculation is "value stored in the difference counter for the stop game" + "absolute value of the difference in the number of gaming media for the current game."

Note that the complement in "difference update" refers to the smallest number that carries beyond one byte (255). For example, it can be derived using the value of the 0-A register, or by using a single instruction for deriving a complement (NEG instruction).

For example, in a situation where the value stored in the hit/stop difference counter (value of the HL register) is 2,
d) When the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 10, the A register is 249, but in the "difference update" step, the complement of 249, 7, is first derived. Next, 2 + 7 is calculated, and 9 is stored in the HL register. Note that since 2 + 7 does not exceed 65535 (there is no carry), the carry flag is 0.

Also, for example, in a situation where the value stored in the hit/stop difference counter (value of the HL register) is 65530,
d) When the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 10, the A register will be 249, but in the "update bet difference counter", the complement of 249, 7, is first derived. Next, 65530 + 7 is calculated, and 2 is stored in the HL register. Note that 65530 + 7 is 65537, but since this is greater than 65535 (because there is a carry), 2 is stored in the HL register. Also, because there is a carry, the carry flag is set to 1.

"Update stop difference counter" stores the value stored in the HL register in the stop difference counter.

For example, if the answer to "Is stop difference counter < 0?" is NO, the value updated by the absolute value of the difference between the stop difference counter for the previous game and the number of gaming media for the current game (number of inserts - number of payouts, or number of payouts - number of inserts) is stored in the HL register, so "update stop difference counter" stores the value obtained by subtracting or adding the absolute value of the difference between the number of gaming media for the current game from the value of the stop difference counter for the previous game in the stop difference counter.

For example, if the answer to "Is the stop difference counter < 0?" is YES, the lower limit value (0) is stored in the HL register, so the lower limit value (0) is stored in the stop difference counter by "Update stop difference counter."

"Difference > 19000?" determines whether the difference in the number of gaming media, starting from the time the power was turned on (0), exceeds 19000. Specifically, it determines whether the carry flag is 1. If the carry flag is 1, it determines YES, and if the carry flag is not 1 (if the carry flag is 0), it determines NO. Note that a carry flag of 1 occurs when a carry is made due to "Difference Update." On the other hand, if a carry is made due to "Number Deposited < Number Paid Out?", the carry flag is temporarily set to 1, but then a specified calculation is performed to set the carry flag to 0, so "Difference > 19000?" can be determined as NO.

In other words, "Difference > 19,000?" determines whether the difference in the number of gaming media since power-on (starting point 0) has exceeded 19,000 depending on whether the carry flag is 1. This allows for a smaller program size compared to directly comparing the difference in the number of gaming media since power-on (starting point 0) with a constant (19,000).

In this way, "Difference > 19000?" determines whether the difference in the number of gaming media since the power-on starting point (0) has exceeded 19000 depending on whether the carry flag is 1, so 46535 is stored as the initial value.

As mentioned above, this 46535 is the value obtained by subtracting the value "19000", which corresponds to the difference in the number of gaming media at which the game is to be stopped, from "65535", the maximum value that can be stored in a 2-byte memory area (corresponding to the size of the memory area for the stop difference counter). In other words, if the difference in the number of gaming media from the starting point (0) at power-on exceeds 19000, it will exceed 65535, and the carry flag will be set to 1.

Furthermore, by storing 46535 as the initial value, it is possible to store a value equivalent to -46535 as the difference in gaming media, with the power-on time being the starting point (0). For example, when the initial value is 46535, a situation in which the value of the play-stop difference counter is 16535 means that the difference in gaming media, with the power-on time being the starting point (0), is -30000.

Furthermore, by storing 46535 as the initial value and setting the lower limit to 0, the maximum difference in the number of gaming media that a player can potentially obtain before reaching a limit can be limited to approximately 65535 (the absolute value of the difference between the initial value (46535) and the lower limit (0) (46535) + 19000).

As described above, by storing 46535 as the initial value, which is "a value corresponding to the size of the memory area of the stop difference counter" minus "a value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media at which the stop state is reached," it is possible to reduce the program capacity required to determine whether the difference in the number of gaming media since power-on has exceeded 19,000. Furthermore, by storing 46535 as the initial value, it is possible to store values up to -46535 as the difference in the number of gaming media since power-on. While this example shows the storage of 46535 as the initial value, values other than 46535 can also be used as the initial value as long as they have the same effect.

The "Save Shutdown Flag" function stores information indicating that the shutdown conditions have been met in the shutdown flag storage area within the RWM area of the main control board. For example, a predetermined value (e.g., "1") is stored in the shutdown flag storage area.

In addition, the information stored in the limit flag storage area is not initialized when the power is turned on without changing the settings, or when the power is turned off (power-off processing is executed). Furthermore, the information stored in the limit flag storage area is not initialized when the RWM is cleared at the end of the favorable period.

The information stored in the stop flag memory area can be initialized by powering on with a setting change (RWM clear process with setting change) (information indicating that the stop conditions have been met can be cleared).

In other words, if the power is turned OFF after "Save Stop Flag" stores information indicating that the stop conditions have been met in the stop flag storage area, and then the power is turned ON again (power ON without changing settings), the value stored in the stop difference counter will be reset to its initial value (46535), but the information stored in the stop flag storage area (information indicating that the stop conditions have been met) will not be initialized.

Therefore, if the power is turned off while the stop flag storage area stores information indicating that the stop conditions have been met, and the power is then turned on again without changing any settings, the stop difference counter will be reset to its initial value, but the device will remain in a stopped state.

If information indicating that the stop condition has been met is stored in the stop flag storage area (if the stop state has been reached), betting operations for the next game cannot be performed. For example, bet button operations are disabled, or the blocker is (set) to a position that does not form a medal flow path (a position that allows inserted medals to be returned from the return slot).

Furthermore, in gaming machines that do not automatically settle gaming media after information indicating that the limit conditions have been met is stored in the limit flag storage area, the settlement switch may be made operable after information indicating that the limit conditions have been met is stored in the limit flag storage area. By configuring it in this way, the number of credits can be settled.

On the other hand, in gaming machines that automatically settle gaming media after information indicating that the settlement condition has been met is stored in the settlement flag storage area, the settlement switch may be made inoperable.

In addition, "Is the stop difference counter < 0?" determines whether the absolute value of the difference in the number of gaming media currently played is subtracted from the value stored in the stop difference counter and the result is below the lower limit (0). However, taking into account the case where the lower limit is not 0, it can also be expressed as "Is the stop difference counter < lower limit?" instead of "Is the stop difference counter < 0?"

For example, if the lower limit is set to 36,535, "Stop Difference Counter < Lower Limit?" determines whether the result of subtracting the absolute value of the difference in the number of gaming media for the current game from the value stored in the stop difference counter is below the lower limit (36,535). If the result of subtracting the absolute value of the difference in the number of gaming media for the current game from the value stored in the stop difference counter is below the lower limit (36,535), "Set Lower Limit" may be used to store 36,535 in the HL register.

By setting the lower limit to 36,535 in this way, the game can be capped off when the maximum difference in the number of gaming media exceeds 29,000 (the absolute value of the difference between the initial value (46,535) and the lower limit (36,535) (10,000) + 19,000). In other words, compared to when the lower limit is set to 0, the number of gaming media that the player can potentially obtain before the game is capped can be reduced. In other words, the risk of gambling becoming too high can be prevented.

Also, even if the lower limit is set to 36535, if the answer to the question "Is the stop difference counter < lower limit?" is YES, the value stored in the stop difference counter from the previous game may be used.

Note that although the example above uses 36535 as the lower limit, the lower limit is not limited to 36535 and can be any value.

In addition, while the example described above uses the time when the power is turned on as the starting point (0) and the game is stopped when the difference in the number of game media exceeds 19,000, the system can also be applied to a case where the point at which the player has the lowest number of balls is used as the base (0) and the game is stopped when the difference in the number of game media from that base exceeds 19,000.

If the point where the player's ball output is at its lowest is set as the reference (0) and the game is stopped when the difference in the number of game media from that reference exceeds 19,000, it is possible to set the lower limit to the same as the initial value. For example, if the initial value is 46,535, which is the "value corresponding to the size of the storage area for the stop difference number counter" minus the "value corresponding to the difference in the number of game media that will cause the game to be stopped," the lower limit will also be 46,535. By doing this, if the difference in the number of game media becomes smaller than the initial value, the answer to "Is the stop difference number counter < lower limit?" (in the illustration, "Is the stop difference number counter < 0?") will be YES, and 46,535 will be stored as the lower limit. Therefore, the point where the player's ball output is at its lowest can be set as the reference (0), and the game is stopped when the difference in the number of game media from that reference exceeds 19,000.

Similarly, if the point at which the player has the lowest ball output is set as the reference (0) and the game is to be stopped when the difference in the number of game media from that reference exceeds 19,000, by setting the initial value to 0 and the lower limit to 0, when the difference in the number of game media becomes smaller than the initial value, "Stop difference number counter < lower limit?" (shown in the figure as "Stop difference number counter < 0?") will return YES, and 0 will be stored as the lower limit. Then, "Difference number > 19,000?" determines whether the value stored in the stop difference number counter updated by "Update stop difference number counter" is less than 19,001. By configuring it in this way, the point at which the player has the lowest ball output can be set as the reference (0) and the game can be stopped when the difference in the number of game media from that reference exceeds 19,000.

<End monitoring process (decrement version of end difference counter)>
57, a stop difference counter is provided. The explanation of the stop difference counter is omitted here, as it has been described above. The size of the storage area for the stop difference counter is assumed to be 2 bytes.

Note that the initial value of the stop difference counter in Figure 57 is "a value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media that will be in the stop state."

The "value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media that will cause the limit to be reached" would be 19,000, for example, if the limit to be reached is reached when the difference in the number of gaming media exceeds 19,000, with the start point (0) being when the power is turned on. Also, for example, if the limit to be reached is reached when the difference in the number of gaming media exceeds 10,000, with the start point (0) being when the power is turned on, the value would be 10,000.

In Figure 57, the "value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media at which the game is capped" is set to 19,000, and the explanation will be given assuming the initial value to be 19,000.

The initial value of the stop difference counter is stored in the stop difference counter when the power is turned on (not shown). Note that the initial value of the stop difference counter is also stored in the stop difference counter when the power is turned on with a setting change (not shown).

First, in "Replay Activation Symbol Display?", it determines whether the symbol combination corresponding to the replay was stopped and displayed as a result of this game. In other words, in a game in which a replay role was won through an internal lottery and a symbol combination corresponding to the replay was stopped and displayed, it determines YES. On the other hand, for example, in a game in which a push order bell role was won through an internal lottery (a game in which a symbol combination corresponding to the replay was not stopped and displayed), it determines NO.

In other words, if a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed in a static state during this game, "Replay activation symbol displayed?" will answer YES, and the game end monitoring process will end.

In "Setting the Hit Difference Counter," the value stored in the hit difference counter is stored in a specified register. For example, if the value stored in the hit difference counter is 10,000, 10,000 is stored in the HL register. Note that the value stored in the hit difference counter at this time is the value before the hit difference counter was updated using the absolute value of the difference in the number of gaming media in the current game.

"Is the number of coins inserted less than the number of coins paid out?" determines whether the number of coins paid out is greater than the number of coins inserted.

For example, as a result of this game,
a) If the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 0, the determination is NO.
a) If the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 1, the result is determined to be NO.
c) If the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 3, the answer is determined to be NO.
d) If the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 10, the answer is YES.

Specifically, the number of inserted games minus the number of paid-out games is calculated, and the result of this calculation is stored in a specified register (for example, register A). Furthermore, if there is a borrow as a result of the number of inserted games minus the number of paid-out games (if the carry flag is 1), the result is judged as YES, and if there is no borrow (if the carry flag is 0), the result is judged as NO. In other words, if the difference in the number of gaming media for the current game is greater than the number of paid-out games, the carry flag is 0 and the result is judged as YES. Furthermore, if the difference in the number of inserted games media for the current game is less than the number of paid-out games, the carry flag is 1 and the result is judged as NO.

To give a specific example, the results of this game:
a) If the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 0, the A register will be 3 and the carry flag will be 0.
a) If the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 1, the A register will be 2 and the carry flag will be 0.
c) If the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 3, the A register will be 0 and the carry flag will be 0.
d) If the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 10, the A register will be 249 and the carry flag will be 1.

Here, if a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed (on an active line) as a result of the previous game, the number of bets for the current game is automatically bet (for example, "3" is set by the automatic bet), and a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is not displayed (on an active line) as a result of the current game, then even if the number of bets was set by the automatic bet, it will be treated as the number of bets for the current game.

On the other hand, if the result of the current game is a symbol combination corresponding to a replay that has stopped (on an active line) (if the next game is a game based on a replay), the number of balls inserted and the number of balls paid out will not be considered as "number inserted < number paid out." In other words, if the result of the current game is a symbol combination corresponding to a replay that has stopped (on an active line) (if the next game is a game based on a replay), the number of balls bet on the current game will not be considered as the number of balls inserted. Similarly, if the result of the current game is a symbol combination corresponding to a replay that has stopped (on an active line) (if the next game is a game based on a replay), the number of balls awarded (or automatic bets) on the current game will not be considered as the number of balls paid out.

Note that in "Number of Inserts < Number of Payouts?", we calculated number of inserts - number of payouts, but we could also determine this by subtracting number of payouts from number of inserts. In other words, it is sufficient to be able to calculate the absolute value of the difference in the number of gaming media for the current game using the number of inserts and the number of payouts.

"Exceeding Upper Limit?" determines whether the absolute value of the difference in the number of gaming media for the current game added to the value stored in the stop difference counter exceeds the upper limit (e.g., 65,535). Specifically, it determines whether a carry occurs when the value stored in the A register (number of balls inserted for the current game - number of balls paid out for the current game) is added to the value stored in the HL register (value stored in the stop difference counter). If a carry occurs, the result is YES; if no carry occurs, the result is NO. If a carry occurs, the carry flag is set to 1; if no carry occurs, the carry flag is set to 0. The result of this calculation is stored in the HL register.

For example, in a situation where the value stored in the hit/stop difference counter (value of the HL register) is 65534,
A) If the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 0, the HL register will be 1 and the carry flag will be 1. Note that 65534 + 3 = 65537, but a 2-byte pair register (HL register) cannot store values greater than 65535. Therefore, a carry occurs, resulting in a value of 1.
a) If the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 1, the HL register will be 0 and the carry flag will be 1. Note that 65534 + 2 = 65536, but a 2-byte pair register (HL register) cannot store values greater than 65535. Therefore, a carry occurs, resulting in a 0.
c) If the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 3, the HL register will be 65534 and the carry flag will be 0.

In other words, in the above example, a) if the number of coins inserted = 3 and the number of coins out = 0, the answer is YES. Also, b) if the number of coins inserted = 3 and the number of coins paid out = 1, the answer is YES. Also, c) if the number of coins inserted = 3 and the number of coins paid out = 3, the answer is NO.

If "Exceeds upper limit?" returns YES, the carry flag is set to 1, so a specified calculation is performed to set the carry flag to 0. For example, the specified calculation is to perform an exclusive OR on the value of the A register and the value of the A register. As a result of this exclusive OR, the carry flag becomes 0. Note that although the specified calculation is an exclusive OR on the value of the A register and the value of the A register, any calculation can be used as long as it sets the carry flag to 0.

In "Set Upper Limit," if a carry occurs due to "Exceeds Upper Limit?", a predetermined upper limit (65535) is stored in the register that stores the calculation result (in this embodiment, the HL register). Note that in this embodiment, the upper limit is set to 65535, which is the maximum value that can be stored in 2 bytes, but the upper limit is not limited to 65535 and can be any predetermined value.

In the above example, when the value stored in the betting difference counter is 65534, if a) the number of coins inserted = 3 and the number of coins paid out = 0, the HL register = 2 due to "Exceeds upper limit?". In such a case, the HL register is set to 65535 by "Set upper limit."

Similarly, in the above example, when the value stored in the bet difference counter is 65534, if (i) the number of coins inserted = 3 and the number of coins paid out = 1, the HL register is set to 0 due to "Exceeds upper limit?". In such a case, the HL register is set to 65535 by "Set upper limit."

In other words, if a carry occurs in the value stored in the HL register and an abnormal value is stored, storing the upper limit value of 65535 in the HL register makes it possible to calculate the difference in the number of gaming media as accurately as possible. Note that even if "Set Upper Limit Value" is executed, the next game will still be possible. In other words, the processing in Figure 57 will be executed even in games after "Set Upper Limit Value" is executed.

Note that while Figure 57 includes a "set upper limit" process, this does not necessarily have to be included. Specifically, if "Exceeds upper limit?" returns YES, the value stored in the stop difference counter for the previous game may be set. For example, if the value stored in the stop difference counter is 65534 and the number of coins inserted and the number of coins paid out for that game are a) number of coins inserted = 3 and number of coins paid out = 0, the value stored in the stop difference counter may be set to 65534 (the same value as the value of the stop difference counter for the previous game). This configuration prevents abnormal values (values that have been carried over) from being stored in the "stop difference counter." Furthermore, because the process equivalent to "set upper limit" is eliminated, the program size can be reduced.

In other words, if a carry occurs due to "Exceeding Upper Limit?", the value at the time the carry occurred is not used to update the stop difference counter, preventing abnormal values from being entered as the value of the stop difference counter. In other words, even if the difference in the number of gaming media becomes a negative value, the stop state can be triggered as accurately as possible using the difference in the gaming media.

In addition, for values above the upper limit, the limit or the previous value is set as the value of the stop difference counter, so it is not possible to award a difference that greatly exceeds the value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media until the stop state is reached (for example, 19,000). Specifically, by storing 19,000 as the initial value and setting the upper limit to 65,535, the maximum difference in the number of gaming media that a player can potentially obtain before the stop state is reached can be limited to approximately 65,535 (the absolute value of the difference between the initial value (19,000) and the upper limit (65,535) (46,535) + 19,000). In other words, it is possible to prevent the tendency for gambling to become excessively high.

In "Difference Update," the complement of the result of the calculation in "Exceeds Upper Limit?" (Number of Inserts - Number of Payouts) (the value stored in the A register) is calculated and stored in the A register. The calculated complement (the value stored in the A register) is then subtracted from the HL register. In other words, the calculation is performed by subtracting the "Value stored in the Stop Difference Counter" from the "Value of the Difference in the Game Media for the Current Game."

Note that the complement in "difference update" refers to the smallest number that carries beyond one byte (255). For example, it can be derived using the value of the 0-A register, or by using a single instruction for deriving a complement (NEG instruction).

For example, in a situation where the value stored in the hit/stop difference counter (value of the HL register) is 65534,
d) When the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 10, the A register is 249, but in the "difference update" step, the complement of 249, 7, is first derived. Next, 65534-7 is calculated, and 65527 is stored in the HL register. Note that since the result of the calculation of 65534-7 is not less than 0 (there is no borrowing), the carry flag is 0.

Also, for example, in a situation where the value stored in the hit/stop difference counter (value of the HL register) is 2,
d) When the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 10, the A register will be 249, but the "update of the bet difference counter" first derives 7, the complement of 249. Next, by calculating 2-7, 65531 is stored in the HL register. Note that 2-7 is -5, but since this is less than 0 (because there is borrowing), 65531 is stored in the HL register. Also, because there is borrowing, the carry flag becomes 1.

"Update stop difference counter" stores the value stored in the HL register in the stop difference counter.

For example, if the answer to "Exceeds upper limit?" is NO, the value updated by the difference between the value of the stop difference counter for the previous game and the number of gaming media for the current game (number of inserts - number of payouts, or number of payouts - number of inserts) is stored in the HL register, and the "update stop difference counter" function updates (subtracts or adds) the value updated by the absolute value of the difference between the value of the stop difference counter for the previous game and the number of gaming media for the current game, and stores the updated value in the stop difference counter.

For example, if "Exceeds upper limit?" returns YES, the upper limit (65535) is stored in the HL register, so "Update stop difference counter" stores the upper limit (65535) in the stop difference counter.

"Difference > 19000?" determines whether the difference in the number of gaming media, starting from the time the power was turned on (0), exceeds 19000. Specifically, it determines whether the carry flag is 1. If the carry flag is 1, it determines YES, and if the carry flag is not 1 (if the carry flag is 0), it determines NO. Note that a carry flag of 1 occurs when a carry is downgraded due to "Difference Update." On the other hand, if a carry is upgraded due to "Number Deposited < Number Paid Out?", the carry flag is temporarily set to 1, but then a specified calculation is performed to set the carry flag to 0, so "Difference > 19000?" can be determined as NO.

In other words, "Difference > 19,000?" determines whether the difference in the number of gaming media since power-on (starting point 0) has exceeded 19,000 depending on whether the carry flag is 1. This allows for a smaller program size compared to directly comparing the difference in the number of gaming media since power-on (starting point 0) with a constant (19,000).

In this way, "Difference > 19000?" determines whether the difference in the number of gaming media since the power-on starting point (0) has exceeded 19000 depending on whether the carry flag is 1, so 19000 is stored as the initial value.

As mentioned above, this 19000 is the value "19000" that corresponds to the difference in the number of gaming media at which the game is capped. In other words, if the difference in the number of gaming media, starting from the point of power-on (0), exceeds 19000, it will fall below 0, and the carry flag will become 1.

Furthermore, by storing 19,000 as the initial value, it is possible to store a value equivalent to -46,535 as the difference in gaming media, with the power-on time being the starting point (0). For example, when the initial value is 19,000, a situation in which the value of the play-stop difference counter is 49,000 means that the difference in gaming media, with the power-on time being the starting point (0), is -30,000.

As described above, by storing 19,000 as the initial value, which is the "value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media at which the game is capped," it is possible to reduce the program capacity required to determine whether the difference in the number of gaming media from the time the power is turned on has exceeded 19,000. Furthermore, by storing 19,000 as the initial value, it is possible to store values up to the equivalent of -46,535 as the difference in the number of gaming media from the time the power is turned on. While this example shows the storage of 19,000 as the initial value, values other than 19,000 can also be used as the initial value as long as they have the same effect.

The "Save Shutdown Flag" function stores information indicating that the shutdown conditions have been met in the shutdown flag storage area within the RWM area of the main control board. For example, a predetermined value is stored in the shutdown flag storage area.

In addition, the information stored in the limit flag storage area is not initialized when the power is turned on without changing the settings, or when the power is turned off (power-off processing is executed). Furthermore, the information stored in the limit flag storage area is not initialized when the RWM is cleared at the end of the favorable period.

The information stored in the stop flag memory area can be initialized by powering on with a setting change (RWM clear process with setting change) (information indicating that the stop conditions have been met can be cleared).

In other words, if the power is turned OFF after "Save Stop Flag" stores information indicating that the stop conditions have been met in the stop flag storage area, and then the power is turned ON again (power ON without changing settings), the value stored in the stop difference counter will be reset to its initial value (19000), but the information stored in the stop flag storage area (information indicating that the stop conditions have been met) will not be initialized.

Therefore, if the power is turned off while the stop flag storage area stores information indicating that the stop conditions have been met, and the power is then turned on again without changing any settings, the stop difference counter will be reset to its initial value, but the device will remain in a stopped state.

If information indicating that the stop condition has been met is stored in the stop flag storage area (if the stop state has been reached), betting operations for the next game cannot be performed. For example, bet button operations are disabled, or the blocker is (set) to a position that does not form a medal flow path (a position that allows inserted medals to be returned from the return slot).

Furthermore, in gaming machines that do not automatically settle gaming media after information indicating that the limit conditions have been met is stored in the limit flag storage area, the settlement switch may be made operable after information indicating that the limit conditions have been met is stored in the limit flag storage area. By configuring it in this way, the number of credits can be settled.

On the other hand, in gaming machines that automatically settle gaming media after information indicating that the settlement condition has been met is stored in the settlement flag storage area, the settlement switch may be made inoperable.

In the above explanation, an upper limit of 65,535 was used as an example. However, if the upper limit were 29,000, "Exceeding Upper Limit?" would determine whether the value stored in the stop difference counter plus the absolute value of the difference in the number of gaming media currently being played exceeds the upper limit (29,000). If the value stored in the stop difference counter plus the absolute value of the difference in the number of gaming media currently being played exceeds the upper limit (29,000), "Set Upper Limit" could be used to store 29,000 in the HL register.

By setting the upper limit to 29,000 in this way, the game can be capped off when the maximum difference in the number of gaming media exceeds 29,000 (the absolute value of the difference between the initial value (19,000) and the upper limit (29,000) (10,000) + 19,000). In other words, compared to when the upper limit is set to 65,535, the number of gaming media that a player can potentially obtain before the game is capped can be reduced. In other words, the risk of gambling becoming too high can be prevented.

Also, even if the upper limit is set to 29,000, if the answer to "Exceeds upper limit?" is YES, the value stored in the stop difference counter from the previous game may be used.

Note that although the upper limit has been set to 29,000 in the above explanation, the upper limit is not limited to 29,000 and can be any value.

In addition, while the example described above uses the time when the power is turned on as the starting point (0) and the game is stopped when the difference in the number of game media exceeds 19,000, the system can also be applied to a case where the point at which the player has the lowest number of balls is used as the base (0) and the game is stopped when the difference in the number of game media from that base exceeds 19,000.

If the point at which a player has the lowest number of balls dispensed is set as the reference (0) and the game is to be stopped when the difference in the number of gaming media from that reference exceeds 19,000, it is possible to set the upper limit to the same as the initial value. For example, if the initial value is 19,000, which is the "value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media that will cause the game to be stopped," the upper limit will also be set to 19,000. By doing this, if the difference in the number of gaming media becomes smaller than the initial value, "Exceeded upper limit?" will answer YES, and 19,000 will be stored as the upper limit. Therefore, the point at which a player has the lowest number of balls dispensed can be set as the reference (0), and the game is to be stopped when the difference in the number of gaming media from that reference exceeds 19,000.

As described above, by performing the processing shown in Figures 55, 56, and 57, an example has been shown in which, starting from the time the power is turned on (0), when the number of gaming media exceeds 19,000, information (a predetermined value) indicating that the halt condition has been met can be stored in the halt flag memory area (the halt processing can be executed).

In addition, by performing the processing shown in Figures 56 and 57, the point at which the player has the lowest number of balls dispensed is set as the reference (0), and when the difference in the number of gaming media from that reference exceeds 19,000, information (predetermined value) indicating that the stop condition has been met can be stored in the stop flag memory area (the stop processing can be executed) as an example.

Note that the control processes shown in Figures 55, 56, and 57 are merely examples, and any order of control processes may be used as long as the same effect is achieved, even if the order of control processes is different.

Similarly, the control processes shown in Figures 55, 56, and 57 are merely examples, and any calculation process that produces a similar effect can be used, even if the control process involves different additions and subtractions (for example, when addition and subtraction are reversed). In other words, "adding" and "subtracting" can be expressed as "updating."

The stoppage monitoring process shown in Figures 55, 56, and 57 is also executed in the bonus gaming state. In other words, even in the middle of the bonus gaming state (play before the conditions for terminating the bonus gaming state are met), when the number of gaming media exceeds 19,000, starting from the time the power is turned on (0), information indicating that the stoppage conditions have been met (predetermined value) is stored in the stoppage flag memory area, so that the game is stopped even in the middle of the bonus gaming state.

Similarly, the stoppage monitoring process shown in Figures 56 and 57 uses the point where the player's ball output is at its lowest as the reference (0) even in the middle of a bonus game state (play before the conditions for terminating the bonus game state are met), and when the number of gaming media exceeds 19,000, stores information (predetermined value) in the stoppage flag memory area indicating that the stoppage conditions have been met, so that the game is stopped even in the middle of a bonus game state.

By configuring it in this way, even in bonus game mode, the game can be stopped when the number of gaming media exceeds 19,000, starting from the point of power-on (0), providing a gaming machine that does not excessively increase gambling.

However, stopping the bonus game midway through can be frustrating for players.

Therefore, in the middle of a bonus game state (play before the conditions for ending the bonus game state are met), even if the number of gaming media exceeds 19,000, starting from the time the power is turned on (0), the game is not immediately put into a halt state. Instead, when the conditions for ending the bonus game state are met, information (a predetermined value) indicating that the halt condition has been met is stored in the halt flag memory area, and an example of putting the game into a halt state is explained below.

<End monitoring process (subtraction version of end difference counter, end state after bonus game state ends due to temporary end flag)>
Fig. 58 is a modified example of Fig. 57. Fig. 58 has a temporary flag storage area.

The temporary limit flag memory area is one of the RWM areas on the main control board. Specifically, it is a memory area that stores information (for example, a predetermined value such as "1") indicating that the temporary limit condition is met when the number of gaming media exceeds 19,000, starting from the point of power-on (0).

The information stored in the temporary limit flag storage area is not initialized simply by turning the power on and off. Furthermore, the information stored in the temporary limit flag storage area is not initialized by clearing the RWM at the end of the favorable period.

In addition, the information stored in the temporary limit flag storage area can be initialized (e.g., to "0") by powering on with a setting change (RWM clear process with a setting change) (the information indicating that the temporary limit condition has been met can be cleared).

Note that if a game in which information indicating that the provisional conditions for stopping are met is stored in the provisional stop flag storage area and the game is in a bonus game state, information indicating that the stop condition has been met is not stored in the stop flag storage area. In other words, if a game in which information indicating that the provisional conditions for stopping are met is stored in the provisional stop flag storage area and the game is in a bonus game state, the game will not enter a stop state.

If a game in which information indicating that the provisional conditions for stopping are met is stored in the provisional stop flag storage area is in a bonus game state, information indicating that the stop condition has been met is stored in the stop flag storage area for the game in which the bonus game state has ended. In other words, if a game in which information indicating that the provisional conditions for stopping are stored in the provisional stop flag storage area is in a bonus game state, the game will enter a stop state after the game in which the bonus game state has ended has ended.

The following explanation will focus on the differences from Figure 57.

First, "Temporary stop flag ON?" determines whether information indicating that the temporary stop condition is met is stored in the temporary stop flag storage area.

If the answer to "Temporary stop flag ON?" is YES, the system determines whether the game is in bonus play mode.

If the answer to "Is the temporary stop flag ON?" is NO, the system checks whether "Replay activation symbol is displayed?"

"Replay activation symbol display?" is the same as "Replay activation symbol display?" in Figure 57, so explanation will be omitted.

The "Hit and Stop Difference Counter Set" is the same as the "Hit and Stop Difference Counter Set" in Figure 57, so explanation will be omitted.

"Number of coins inserted < number of coins paid out?" is the same as "Number of coins inserted < number of coins paid out?" in Figure 57, so explanation will be omitted.

"Upper limit exceeded?" is the same as "Upper limit exceeded?" in Figure 57, so explanation will be omitted.

The "Upper limit set" is the same as the "Upper limit set" in Figure 57, so explanation will be omitted.

Since "Difference Update" is the same as "Difference Update" in Figure 57, explanation will be omitted.

"Update shot difference counter" is the same as "Update shot difference counter" in Figure 57, so explanation will be omitted.

"Difference > 19000?" is the same as "Difference > 19000?" in Figure 57, so explanation will be omitted.

In "Save temporary limit flag," information indicating that the temporary limit condition is met is stored in the temporary limit flag storage area. For example, information indicating that the temporary limit condition is met corresponds to numerical information such as a predetermined value (e.g., "1").

"Bonus game state?" determines whether the next game will be a bonus game state game. Specifically, it checks the bonus activation flag to determine whether Type 1 BB, Type 2 BB, or RB is activated.

Here, the bonus activation flag is one of the RWM areas on the main control board. For example, in a game where a symbol combination corresponding to a Type 1 BB is displayed, the bit of the bonus activation flag corresponding to Type 1 BB turns on (1), and changes from on to off (0) when the Type 1 BB is completed. Similarly, in a game where a symbol combination corresponding to a Type 2 BB is displayed, the bit of the bonus activation flag corresponding to Type 2 BB turns on (1), and changes from on to off (0) when the Type 2 BB is completed. Similarly, in a game where a symbol combination corresponding to an RB is displayed, the bit of the bonus activation flag corresponding to RB turns on (1), and changes from on to off (0) when the RB is completed.

Note that the on/off status of the bonus activation flag is stored in a process that precedes the end-of-game monitoring process.

For example, even if the previous game was in a bonus game state (either Type 1 BB, Type 2 BB, or RB), if the current game ends in a bonus game state (either Type 1 BB, Type 2 BB, or RB), the "Bonus game state?" will be judged as NO.

For example, if the previous game was in a bonus game state (either Type 1 BB, Type 2 BB, or RB) and the current game did not end in a bonus game state (either Type 1 BB, Type 2 BB, or RB), the "Bonus game state?" question will be answered with YES.

For example, if the previous game was not in a bonus game state (either Type 1 BB, Type 2 BB, or RB) (it was in a non-bonus game state), and the current game is in a bonus game state (either Type 1 BB, Type 2 BB, or RB), then the answer to "Bonus game state?" will be YES.

Since "Save stop flag" is the same as "Save stop flag" in Figure 57, explanation will be omitted.

As described above, by providing a temporary limit flag storage area, even if the number of gaming media exceeds 19,000 during bonus game mode, with the power-on time being the starting point (0), information indicating that the limit condition is met is not stored in the limit flag area until the bonus ends. In other words, if the number of gaming media exceeds 19,000 during bonus game mode, with the power-on time being the starting point (0), the limit state will be reached after the bonus game mode ends.

Furthermore, once information indicating that the provisional stop condition is met is stored in the provisional stop flag storage area, the stop difference counter is not updated. By configuring it in this way, unnecessary processing can be avoided.

However, the stop difference counter may be updated even after information indicating that the stop condition is met has been stored in the stop flag storage area. This configuration allows for standardization of processing.

Furthermore, after information indicating that the provisional limit condition is met is stored in the provisional limit flag storage area, no determination is made as to whether the difference in the number of gaming media exceeds 19,000. By configuring it in this way, unnecessary processing can be avoided.

Furthermore, as is clear from Figure 58, after information indicating that the provisional limit condition is met is stored in the provisional limit flag storage area, the information stored in the provisional limit flag storage area is not updated (the information indicating that the provisional limit condition is met is not cleared) even if the difference in the number of gaming media falls below 19,000. By configuring it in this way, if the difference in the number of gaming media exceeds 19,000 even once during the bonus game state, the game can be put into a limit state even if the difference in the number of gaming media is below 19,000 in the game where the bonus game state ends.

<Relationship between the hours during which a gaming facility can operate and the difference in the number of gaming media until the facility is closed>
A gaming machine having a function that allows a player to reach a stop state (also called a complete function) may be designed so that the following formula holds true.

(Difference in number of gaming items until the game reaches a deadlock) / (Expected increase in gaming items per game in the most favorable game state for the player) x Minimum game time (s) / 3600 < Opening hours of an amusement parlor as defined by the Entertainment and Amusement Act (h)

The minimum game time (s) in the above formula is the minimum game time mentioned above, and is equivalent to 4.1 seconds. Specifically, it is the shortest time from the start of reel rotation for a certain game to the start of reel rotation for the game following that game (next game). 3600 is a constant used to convert seconds to hours (1 hour = 60 minutes x 60 seconds = 3600 seconds). The Entertainment and Amusement Act is a law concerning the regulation and proper conduct of entertainment and amusement businesses, etc.

Furthermore, the expected increase in gaming media per game in the most advantageous gaming state for the player is generally referred to as the net increase (net increase in number of coins) per game in the most advantageous gaming state for the player.

A simple example will be used to explain the expected increase in gaming media per game in the most advantageous gaming state for the player.

For example, let's say the most advantageous gaming state is the AT state (it is assumed that in the AT state, playing with a 3-coin bet is the most advantageous). Furthermore, let's assume that an internal lottery results in a 10-coin role (small role) with a 3/4 probability, and that a symbol combination corresponding to the 10-coin role can be displayed as a stopped symbol. Furthermore, let's assume that an internal lottery results in a loss with a 1/4 probability, and that a symbol combination corresponding to a loss (0 coins) can be displayed as a stopped symbol. In this AT state, in a game in which a small role is won by the internal lottery, the player operates the stop switch in an advantageous manner by following the notified advantageous stop switch operation manner. In other words, if a 10-coin role (small role) is won by the internal lottery, there is a 100% probability that a symbol combination corresponding to the 10-coin role can be displayed as a stopped symbol.

In this case, the expected increase per game in the most advantageous gaming state for the player is (3/4 x 10 + 1/4 x 0) / 3 = 2.5. Note that this example does not take into account games that result in a replay, but for games that result in a replay being won by internal lottery and the symbol combination corresponding to the replay being displayed, the calculation will be based on 0 coins bet and 0 coins out.

In addition, in gaming machines that have multiple gaming states, such as bonus gaming state A, bonus gaming state B, and AT state, which are considered to be advantageous to the player, the gaming state that offers the greatest expected increase in gaming media per game among these multiple gaming states will be considered to be the most advantageous gaming state for the player.

For example, if the expected increase in gaming media per game in bonus gaming state A is 3.5, the expected increase in gaming media per game in bonus gaming state B is 2.0, and the expected increase in gaming media per game in the AT state is 2.5, the most advantageous gaming state for the player is bonus gaming state A.

Note that the expected increase in gaming media per game in each of the above-mentioned game states is an example and may be other values.

Furthermore, the Entertainment and Amusement Business Act stipulates that the maximum number of hours (in hours) that an amusement establishment may operate is 18 hours. Specifically, Article 13 of the Act states, "Entertainment and Amusement Business Operators may not operate their business late at night (meaning the hours between midnight and 6:00 AM; the same applies hereinafter)." In other words, the hours that an amusement establishment may operate are 18 hours a day, excluding late at night.

In addition, the difference in the number of gaming media until the limit is reached is set at 19,000.

The conditions for reaching a stoppage state can be either a) when the difference in the number of gaming media from the point at which the player has the lowest number of balls after power-on exceeds 19,000, with the point at which the player has the lowest number of balls as the base (0), or b) when the difference in the number of gaming media from the point at which the power is turned on exceeds 19,000, with the starting point (0) being the time of power-on.

Therefore, when applying the numerical values to the above formula, we get 19,000 / (expected increase in gaming media per game in the most advantageous gaming state for the player) x 4.1 / 3,600 < 18.

In other words, by setting the difference in the number of gaming media until the limit is reached to 19,000, if the expected increase in the number of gaming media per game in the most advantageous gaming state for the player is greater than approximately 0.83, the limit will be reached before the gaming center closes, even if the most advantageous gaming state for the player begins immediately after the gaming center opens and continues (when the most advantageous gaming state for the player is played continuously).

In other words, even if a gaming machine designed for a significantly large expected increase in gaming media per play in the most advantageous gaming state (for example, a value greater than 2.5) is installed in an amusement facility, by setting the difference in the number of gaming media until the limit is reached to 19,000, the limit can be reached within the gaming facility's operating hours even if the most advantageous gaming state for the player continues (if the most advantageous gaming state for the player is played continuously), so it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not have an excessively high level of gambling tendency, even for a gaming machine with a significantly large expected increase in gaming media per play in the most advantageous gaming state.

Note that the shortest business hours set by prefectures are 13 hours, so the right-hand side of the above equation, 18 (h), can be replaced with 13 (h) to make the above equation valid.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the gambling element is significantly less likely to be high when the right-hand side of the above equation is set to 13(h) than when the right-hand side of the above equation is set to 18(h).

<Advantageous Zone Difference Counter and Stoppage Difference Counter>
We will now explain again the characteristics (main differences) of the advantageous zone difference counter and the stoppage difference counter.

<<Advantageous Zone Difference Counter>>
(1) Overview This is a storage area for storing the difference in the number of gaming media related to the end (forced termination) of a favorable period. For example, if the difference in the number of gaming media in a favorable period exceeds 2,400, the favorable period is controlled to end.
(2) When counting begins: The difference in the number of game media is calculated from the game in which the advantageous zone begins, and the updating of the advantageous zone difference counter begins. In other words, in the game in the normal zone, such as when the first game after the power is turned on is in the normal zone, the advantageous zone difference counter does not start counting based on the difference in the number of game media for the game in the normal zone.

In addition, if the conditions for transitioning to the advantageous zone are met during a certain game in the normal zone, it is acceptable to configure the advantageous zone difference counter to be set to an initial value (e.g., 46535) during that certain game.

(3) At the end of counting: The counting ends with the game in which the advantageous zone ends. In other words, the updating of the advantageous zone difference number counter starts from the game in which the advantageous zone starts, and then the advantageous zone difference number counter is updated until the game in which the advantageous zone ends. Note that for the game in which the advantageous zone ends, the advantageous zone difference number counter does not need to be updated, or the advantageous zone difference number counter may be updated.

(4) Example of initializing the favorable zone difference number counter a) The RWM clear process following the end of the favorable zone initializes the value stored in the favorable zone difference number counter (for example, stores 0).
(i) When the power is turned on with a setting change (the RWM clear process associated with the setting change mode that is entered by turning on the power switch while the setting key switch is on), the value stored in the advantageous zone difference counter is initialized (for example, 0 is stored).

In addition, the value stored in the advantageous zone difference counter by initializing the value stored in the advantageous zone difference counter (initialized value) and the value stored in the advantageous zone difference counter when the advantageous zone start conditions are met (initial value) may be configured to be different values.

For example, an example of the value (initialized value) stored in the advantageous zone difference counter by initializing the value stored in the advantageous zone difference counter is "0".

In addition, examples of the value (initial value) that is stored in the advantageous zone difference counter when the conditions for starting the advantageous zone are met include "a value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone defined as the end condition of the advantageous zone," or "a value corresponding to the size of the storage area of the advantageous zone difference counter" - "a value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone defined as the end condition of the advantageous zone."

Here, an example of "the value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone set as the end condition of the advantageous zone" is "2400," and an example of "the value corresponding to the size of the memory area of the advantageous zone difference counter" minus "the value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone set as the end condition of the advantageous zone" is "63135." Note that these numerical values are examples only and are not limited to these.

Furthermore, by initializing the value stored in the advantageous zone difference counter, the value stored in the advantageous zone difference counter (initialized value) may be configured to be the value (initial value) stored in the advantageous zone difference counter when the advantageous zone count start condition is satisfied.

Specifically, by initializing the value stored in the advantageous zone difference number counter, the value stored in the advantageous zone difference number counter (initialized value) may be "a value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone defined as the end condition of the advantageous zone," or "a value corresponding to the size of the storage area of the advantageous zone difference number counter" - "a value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone defined as the end condition of the advantageous zone."

(5) Examples of when the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is maintained: a) Even if a specified error (a recoverable error) occurs and the reset switch is operated to clear the specified error, the advantageous zone difference counter will not be reset to its initial value (the specified error will be recoverable).

For example, if a specified error occurs when the value stored in the advantageous zone difference counter is 100 and the specified error is cleared by operating the reset switch, the value stored in the advantageous zone difference counter will remain at 100. In other words, the value stored in the advantageous zone difference counter will not be updated. In this case, the advantageous zone will also be maintained.

a) If power is restored after power-off processing (also known as power-off processing) is performed and the power is then turned on without changing any settings (power switch is turned on with the setting key switch off), the difference counter for the advantageous zone will not be reset to its initial value.

For example, if the value stored in the favorable zone difference counter is 100, the power switch is turned off and the power-off process is executed, and then the power is restored by turning the power on without changing any settings, the value stored in the favorable zone difference counter will remain at 100. In other words, the value stored in the favorable zone difference counter will not be updated. In this case, the favorable zone will also be maintained.

The above-mentioned (4) example of initializing the advantageous section difference number counter and (5) example of maintaining the value of the advantageous section difference number counter are just examples. For example, some or all of the examples can be adopted. Furthermore, the value stored in the advantageous section difference number counter may be reset to its initial value or the value of the advantageous section difference number counter may be maintained when another event occurs.
<<Hit difference counter>>
(1) Overview This is a storage area for storing the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit. For example, when the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit exceeds 19,000, the limit state (also called the complete state) is entered.

In this embodiment, the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit refers to either (a) or (b) below.
(a) The current difference in game media, with the time when the power is turned on as the starting point (0) (b) The current difference in game media from the point where the player has the lowest number of balls after the power is turned on, with the point where the player has the lowest number of balls as the reference point (0) (2) When counting begins The difference in game media is calculated from the first game after the power is turned on (power on without changing the settings, and power on with changing the settings), and the update of the play difference counter begins. In other words, counting begins whether the first game after the power is turned on is a game in the normal zone or a game in the advantageous zone.

The counting of the difference in gaming media that will result in a limit is performed by providing a designated switch (a so-called limit switch) on the gaming machine, and the gaming parlor is configured so that it cannot choose whether or not to count by operating the designated switch (this differs from conventional limit functions). In other words, when playing on the same model of gaming machine (same type of gaming machine), there are cases where the limit is reached and cases where it is not reached, regardless of the gaming parlor. In other words, if the difference in gaming media that will result in a limit is exceeded, the limit will be reached across the board.

(3) At the end of counting: The counting ends when a game meets the stop condition. In other words, the stop difference counter starts updating from the time the power is turned on, and then continues to update until the stop condition is met. Note that for a game that meets the stop condition, the stop difference counter may not need to be updated, or may be updated.

(4) Example of initializing the stop difference counter a) When a power-off process is executed and then power is restored by turning on the power with a setting change (turning on the power switch while the setting key switch is on), the value stored in the stop difference counter is initialized (for example, 0 is stored).

For example, if the value stored in the stop difference counter is 200, the power switch is turned off to perform the power-off process, and then the power is restored by turning the power on with a setting change, the value stored in the stop difference counter will be 0 (the value after initialization).

a) If power is restored after a power-off process has been performed and the power is turned on without any settings changes (the power switch is turned on with the setting key switch off), the value stored in the stop difference counter will be initialized (for example, 0 will be stored).

For example, if the value stored in the stop difference counter is 200, the power switch is turned off to perform the power-off process, and then the power is restored by turning the power on without changing any settings, the value stored in the stop difference counter will be 0 (the value after initialization).

In addition, if an event occurs that requires the resetting of the stop difference counter, the value stored in the stop difference counter may be initialized so that the value stored in the stop difference counter becomes the initial value of the stop difference counter.

By configuring it in this way, the process of initializing the value stored in the strike difference counter can be the same as the process of storing (setting) an initial value in the strike difference counter. Therefore, there is no need to provide two processes: one for initializing the value stored in the strike difference counter, and one for storing (setting) an initial value in the strike difference counter, which reduces program size.

In addition, even if the value stored in the stop difference counter by initializing the value stored in the stop difference counter and the value stored (set) as the initial value in the stop difference counter are the same or different, two processes may be provided: a process for initializing the value stored in the stop difference counter, and a process for storing (setting) the initial value in the stop difference counter.

For example, when the value stored in the stop difference counter is initialized to 0, the stop difference counter may then be configured to store 0 by a process of storing (setting) an initial value.

Also, when the value stored in the stop difference counter is initialized, if the value stored in the stop difference counter is 0, the stop difference counter may then be configured to store 19,000 by a process of storing (setting) an initial value.

(5) Examples of when the value of the stop difference counter is maintained: a) Even if a specified error (a recoverable error) occurs and the reset switch is operated to clear the specified error, the stop difference counter is not reset to its initial value (the specified error becomes recoverable).

For example, if a specific error occurs when the value stored in the stop difference counter is 200 and the specific error is cleared by operating the reset switch, the value stored in the stop difference counter will remain at 200. In other words, the value stored in the stop difference counter will not be updated.

a) The value is not reset to its initial value by the RWM clearing process at the end of the favorable period. In other words, the hit difference counter is not subject to RWM clearing at the end of the favorable period.

For example, even if the advantageous period ends when the value stored in the shot difference counter is 200 and the RWM is cleared following the end of the advantageous period, the value stored in the shot difference counter after the RWM is cleared following the end of the advantageous period will remain at 200. In other words, the value stored in the shot difference counter will not be updated.

The above-mentioned examples (4) of initializing the shot difference counter and (5) of maintaining the value of the shot difference counter are merely examples. For example, some or all of the examples may be adopted. Furthermore, the value stored in the shot difference counter may be reset to its initial value or the value of the shot difference counter may be maintained when another event occurs.

<Notification status related to cut-off>
The notification states relating to the limit include a first state, a second state, and a third state. The notification states relating to the limit are states controlled by the sub-control means.

The first state is the state before the capping condition is met. It also refers to a state in which the difference between the number of gaming media required to cap off and the number of gaming media required to reach the capping state is greater than a specific value (e.g., 100).

For example, if the difference in the number of gaming media until the limit state is reached is 19,000 and the specific value is 100, the first state corresponds to a situation where the difference in the number of gaming media until the limit is reached is between 0 and less than 18,900. In this embodiment, the first state is also referred to as the "normal state," the "pre-operation notification state," and the "pre-limit operation notification state."

The second state is the state before the capping condition is met. It also refers to a state in which the difference between the difference in the number of gaming media required to cap the game and the difference in the number of gaming media required to reach the capping state is less than a specific value.

For example, if the difference in the number of gaming media until the limit state is reached is 19,000 and the specific value is 100, the second state corresponds to a situation where the difference in the number of gaming media until the limit is reached is between 18,900 and 19,000. In this embodiment, the second state is also referred to as the "activation advance notice state," "activation advance notice notification state," or "limit activation advance notice notification state."

The third state is a state in which the stop conditions are met. Specifically, it refers to a state in which the stop conditions are met and the stop process (stop state) is being executed.

For example, if the difference in the number of gaming media until the limit state is reached is 19,000, the situation in which the difference in the number of gaming media until the limit state is reached exceeds 19,000 (the limit state is reached) corresponds to the third state. In this embodiment, the third state is also referred to as the "operation state," "operation notification state," or "limit operation notification state."

In other words, the transition of the notification state related to the stoppage from when the power is turned on until the stoppage state is reached is as follows: state 1 followed by state 2, and then state 2 followed by state 3.

Note that the transition of notification states related to the cutoff does not necessarily go from state 1 to state 2 to state 3. Details will be given later, but it may also go, for example, from state 1 to state 2 to state 1 to state 2 to state 3.

<Notification mode according to notification state related to termination>
Next, the notification mode according to the notification state relating to the limit will be described with reference to the drawings.

<<Notification status related to cutoff: normal state>>
75 is a diagram showing an example of the effects when the notification state related to the limit is the “normal state.” Below, we will explain the effects (images) displayed on the display device 32 in the order of Figure 75(1), Figure 75(2), and Figure 75(3).

<<<Fig. 75 (1)>>>
This is an example of a presentation that occurs when the notification state regarding the end of the game is the "normal state" and the game is in progress (in this example, during the AT state).

PAYOUT and CREDIT are displayed on the lower left side of the display device 32. PAYOUT displays the number of gaming media obtained as a result of one game (number of gaming media awarded). Figure 75 (1) shows the state before one game has ended (for example, when all reels have spun), so "00" is displayed.

CREDIT also displays the current number of credits. Figure 75 (1) shows an example in which the player is playing with 50 credits, so "50" is displayed.

Total and G are displayed in the upper right corner of the display device 32. Total is displayed according to the number of gaming media acquired through the AT state. Figure 75 (1) shows an example in which the number of gaming media acquired through the AT state is 2000, so "Total 2000" is displayed.

G also displays the number of games played in AT mode. Figure 75 (1) shows an example in which the number of games played in AT mode is 1000, so "1000G" is displayed.

Images that enhance the enjoyment of the game, including character images, are displayed in the center of the display device 32. In the AT mode, an image indicating advantageous operation of the stop switch may be displayed in the center of the display device 32 (not shown).

When the notification state for the game limit is "normal state" and the power is turned off during play (in this example, during AT state), and then the power is turned on with the setting key switch off (power-on without changing settings), PAYOUT, CREDIT, Total, and G are configured to display the same information that was displayed when the power was turned off.

In addition, while the notification state for the game ending is "normal state" and information on PAYOUT, CREDIT, Total, and G is displayed during play (in this example, during AT state), this does not necessarily have to be displayed.

For example, the display may be configured so that information on Total and G is displayed, but information on PAYOUT and CREDIT is not. Also, while G was previously displayed corresponding to the number of games played in AT state, G may instead be displayed corresponding to the number of games remaining in AT state. In this way, the notification state related to the end of play is the "normal state," and the information displayed during play (in this example, during AT state) can be any information.

As described above, when the notification state related to the stoppage is "normal state" and gameplay is in progress (in this example, during the AT state), no advance notification will be given until the stoppage conditions are met, and no notification will be given indicating that the game is in a stoppage state. Note that although the AT state has been used as an example, no advance notification will be given until the stoppage conditions are met, and no notification will be given indicating that the game is in a stoppage state, regardless of the gameplay state (during bonus gameplay or normal gameplay (non-AT, non-bonus gameplay, not inside a bonus, inside a bonus)).

<<<Fig. 75 (2)>>>
This is an example of an effect (also called a demo effect or demo screen) that occurs when the notification state related to the end of the game is the "normal state" and the game is on standby. For example, the demo effect is executed when a predetermined time (e.g., 60 seconds) has passed without a new bet being made after a certain timing after the end of the game (after all reels have stopped or after a payout process).

In addition, when in a specific gaming state such as an automatic timer state or a bonus gaming state, the demo effect may not be executed even if a predetermined time (e.g., 60 seconds) has passed without a new bet being made from a certain point after the end of the game (after all reels have stopped or after a payout process has been performed).

In addition, when in menu mode (when a menu image is displayed), the demo effect may not be executed even if a predetermined time (e.g., 60 seconds) has passed without a new bet being made from a certain point after the end of play (after all reels have stopped or after a payout process has been performed).

In other words, even if the menu mode is switched to before a predetermined time has elapsed since a certain time after the end of play (for example, 30 seconds after the certain time), and the menu screen remains displayed, the demo effect may not be executed.

When switching to menu mode, the demo performance may be executed when a predetermined time (e.g., 60 seconds) has elapsed since the menu mode was started, or when a specific time (e.g., 120 seconds) different from the predetermined time has elapsed since the menu mode was started.

Also, when the game enters menu mode (when the menu image is displayed), the demo effect may not be executed.

As an example of a demo presentation, we will remember the example of displaying a character image, as well as company logo images and warning images (images to prevent players from becoming addicted to the game) displayed in sequence.

In addition to the demo effects described above, an image indicating that the machine is equipped with a stop function may also be displayed as a demo effect. For example, an image such as "This machine is equipped with a stop function" or "This machine is equipped with a complete function" may be displayed for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 3 seconds) to indicate that the machine is equipped with a stop function.

In this way, when an image indicating that a machine is equipped with a stop-play function is displayed as a demo effect, players can be made aware in advance that the machine is equipped with a stop-play function. In other words, players can select a machine to play based on whether or not the machine is equipped with a stop-play function. Furthermore, even if a machine reaches a stop-play state, it is possible to prevent any problems between the player and the gaming parlor (for example, a complaint from the player if the machine reaches a stop-play state in the middle of an automatic timer).

In addition, in cases where a warning image (an image to prevent players from becoming addicted to the game) and an image indicating that the game has a limit function are displayed as demo effects, if the display period of the warning image (an image to prevent players from becoming addicted to the game) is T1 and the display period of the image indicating that the game has a limit function is T2, T1 may be set to be equal to or less than T2. By configuring it in this way, the message that the game has a limit function can be more emphasized.

Also, if the display period of the warning image (an image to prevent gaming addiction) is T1 and the display period of the image indicating that the gaming machine has a play-stop function is T2, T1 > T2 may be set. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to further emphasize the message that reduces dependence (addiction) on the gaming machine.

As an alternative to displaying an image indicating that a game-stopping function is installed as a demo effect, it may be configured so that while a character image is displayed as a demo effect, a company logo image or a warning image (an image to prevent players from becoming addicted to the game) is displayed in sequence, images such as "This machine is equipped with a game-stopping function" or "This machine is equipped with a complete function" are also displayed simultaneously.

As described above, when the notification state related to the limit is "normal" and the demo effect is in progress, no advance notification will be given until the limit conditions are met, and no notification indicating that the limit state has been reached will be given. However, it is also possible to configure the game to display an image indicating that the limit function is installed during the demo effect.

<<<Fig. 75 (3)>>>
This is an example of a menu image that is displayed when the notification state regarding the game ending is the "normal state" and the sub-switch 20 is operated during game standby (also called "menu mode").

The menu image displays items that players can select and information about their game history.

The seven items that a player can select by operating a specified switch (for example, the sub-cross key switch 21) are "Member registration," "Password entry," "Quick My Slot," "QR display at end," "View interim record," "Data clear," and "Volume adjustment."

For example, by operating a specific switch to select the "Volume Adjustment" item and then operating a specific switch (e.g., sub-switch 20), an image that allows you to adjust the volume will be displayed.

For example, by operating a specific switch, you can select the "Member Registration" option, and then operating a specific switch will display a two-dimensional code containing the server's URL. (By reading the two-dimensional code with a mobile device, you can access the server managed by the gaming machine's manufacturer.)

For example, by operating a specific switch to select the "Enter Password" option and then operating a specific switch (e.g., sub-switch 20), an image will be displayed that allows the player to enter a password. After the password is entered, the game history will be stored according to the progress of the game.

For example, by operating a specific switch to select the "QR display at end" option and then operating a specific switch (e.g., sub-switch 20), a two-dimensional code corresponding to the game history based on the progress of the game since the player entered their password is displayed. Furthermore, if the conditions for ending the display of the two-dimensional code are met (e.g., selecting "End QR display" with a specific switch (e.g., sub-switch 20)), the game history based on the progress of the game since the player entered their password is erased.

For example, if the "View Interim Record" option is selected by operating a specific switch and then a specific switch (e.g., sub-switch 20) is operated, a two-dimensional code corresponding to the game history based on the progress of the game since the player entered their password will be displayed. Note that even if the conditions for ending the display of the two-dimensional code are met (e.g., selecting "End QR Display" with a specific switch (e.g., sub-switch 20)), the game history based on the progress of the game since the player entered their password will be retained. Unlike when the "Display QR at End" option is selected, this option is intended for players who intend to continue playing but would like to check their game history up to that point using a mobile device, etc.

For example, by selecting the "View Interim Record" option and checking the game history based on the progress of the game since the player entered their password using a mobile device, etc., the player can estimate the setting value, the current difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone, and the current difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit, and then continue playing without erasing the game history.

We will not go into detail about all the items, but when a menu image is displayed, the player can select an item and an image corresponding to the item selected by the player will be displayed.

Although seven items have been given as examples of items that the player can select, the number of items is not limited to these. For example, the player may select one item (such as volume adjustment), or the player may select two items (such as password entry and volume adjustment). Furthermore, the player may select items that are partially or entirely different from the seven items listed above.

Information about your game history will be displayed below the menu image.

Examples of information about game history displayed on the menu image include five items: "HBB," "BB," "RB," "AT Entry Count," and "Total Game Count."

"HBB" displays the cumulative number of times the Hyper Bonus has been executed (entered) since the settings were changed. A Hyper Bonus is the bonus that is most advantageous to the player among multiple bonuses. Figure 75 (3) displays information indicating that an HBB has been executed once.

"BB" displays the cumulative number of big bonuses that have been executed (entered) since the settings were changed. A big bonus is a bonus that is less advantageous to the player than a hyper big bonus. Figure 75 (3) displays information indicating that BB has been executed five times.

"RB" displays the cumulative number of regular bonuses executed (entered) since the setting was changed. Regular bonuses are bonuses that are less advantageous to players than big bonuses. Figure 75 (3) displays information indicating that RB has been executed once.

"AT Entry" displays the cumulative number of times the AT state has been entered since the setting was changed. The AT state corresponds to a game state in which advantageous operation of the stop switch can be notified. Figure 75 (3) displays information indicating that the AT has been entered five times.

"Total number of plays" displays the cumulative number of plays since the setting change. The total number of plays may be the number of plays in all play states, including the number of plays in states that are advantageous to the player (various bonuses, AT states, etc.), or it may be the number of plays in some play states excluding the number of plays in states that are advantageous to the player (various bonuses, AT states, etc.). Figure 75 (3) displays information indicating that the total number of plays is 2000.

In this way, on gaming machines that display information about gaming history, players can predict the difference in the number of gaming media remaining until the game reaches a stoppage.

For example, if the total number of plays is small but the number of times an advantageous game state such as "AT entry" is reached is large, the player can predict that the difference in the number of gaming media until the end of the game state is small. In other words, the player can predict that the end of the game state is likely to occur soon.

On the other hand, for example, if the total number of plays is high but the number of times an advantageous game state such as "AT entry" has been reached is low, the player can predict that there will be a large difference in the number of gaming media until the game reaches a limit. In other words, the player can predict that the game will not reach a limit yet.

The information about the game history displayed on the menu image is the cumulative number of times since a setting change was made. Therefore, even after the power is turned off and then turned on with the setting change key off (power-on without a setting change), the number of times each type of information was displayed before the power was turned off will be the same as the number of times each type of information was displayed after the power was turned on with the setting change key off. When a setting change is made, the various information is displayed with its initial value (e.g., 0). After a setting change is made (after the power is turned on with the setting change key on), the stop difference counter is set to its initial value. Similarly, after the power is turned on with the setting change key off, the stop difference counter is set to its initial value.

However, the information regarding the game history displayed on the menu image does not have to be the cumulative number of times since the setting was changed. For example, the information regarding the game history displayed on the menu image may be the cumulative number of times since the power was turned on. In this case, after the power is turned off and then turned on with the setting change key off (power-on without changing the setting), various information will be displayed with initial values (e.g., 0). Note that after a setting change is made (after the power is turned on with the setting change key on), the stop difference counter is set to its initial value. Similarly, after the power is turned on with the setting change key off, the stop difference counter is set to its initial value.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the information about the game history displayed on the menu image does not allow the player to distinguish between when a setting change has been made (including when the setting is set to the same value) and when no setting change has been made (when the power is restored without a setting change).

Furthermore, although five items - "HBB," "BB," "RB," "AT Entry Count," and "Total Play Count" - have been exemplified as information relating to game history displayed in the menu image, it is not limited to these five items. For example, the information relating to game history displayed in the menu image may display one item (e.g., total play count) or two items (e.g., AT entry and total play count). Furthermore, the information relating to game history displayed in the menu image may be information that is partially or entirely different from the above five items (e.g., a graph showing the progress of the difference in the number of gaming media (a so-called slump graph)). Furthermore, information relating to game history does not have to be displayed in the menu image.

As described above, when the notification state for limiting is "normal" and you are in menu mode, no advance notification will be given until the limiting conditions are met, and no notification will be given indicating that the limiting state has been reached.

<<Notification status related to termination: Operation notice status>>
Figure 76 is a diagram showing an example of the effects when the notification state related to the limit is the "activation notice state." The effects (images) displayed on the display device 32 will be explained below in the order of Figure 76 (1), Figure 76 (2), and Figure 76 (3). Note that explanations of parts that overlap with the explanation of Figure 75 will be omitted, and only the characteristic configuration will be explained.
<<<Fig. 76 (1)>>>
This is an example of a presentation that occurs when the notification state for the limit is the "activation notice state" and during play (in this example, during the AT state). This presentation example is an example of a presentation that notifies the display device 32 of the number of coins remaining until the complete function is activated.

Unlike Figure 75 (1), an image (also called a pre-warning image) showing "100 remaining until the complete function is activated" is displayed at the top of the display device 32. In other words, this notifies the player that the limit will be reached if the difference in the number of gaming media increases by 100 from the current difference in the number of gaming media. In other words, a pre-warning is given until the limit condition is met.

The content of the advance notification image changes each time the difference in the number of gaming media remaining until the capping state changes. For example, when the difference in the number of gaming media remaining until the capping state is 90, it will say "90 remaining until the complete function is activated," when the difference in the number of gaming media remaining until the capping state is 50, it will say "50 remaining until the complete function is activated," and when the difference in the number of gaming media remaining until the capping state is 10, it will say "10 remaining until the complete function is activated," etc. This is not limited to the example advance notification image in Figure 76 (1), but is similar for other examples of advance notification images.

Furthermore, the notation (message) "XX coins remaining until the complete function is activated" is just one example, and the content of the advance notification image may be other notations such as "XX coins remaining until the limit is reached."

Furthermore, in games in which an image (also called a navigation image) relating to advantageous operation modes of the stop switch is also displayed while the advance notification image is displayed, the image relating to advantageous operation modes of the stop switch is configured to be visible.

For example, the image relating to the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch and the advance warning image may be configured to be displayed in a position (area) where they do not overlap. Alternatively, the image relating to the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch and the advance warning image may be configured to be displayed in a position (area) where they partially overlap. Specifically, the position (area) where the advance warning image is displayed may be a position (area) where more than half of the image relating to the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch does not overlap. In any case, by configuring it in this way, the image relating to the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch is visible, making it possible to provide a gaming machine that does not disadvantage the player.

Furthermore, the position (area) where the advance warning image is displayed and the size of the advance warning image may be configured not to change between a game in which an image relating to an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch is displayed in the AT state and a game in which an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch is not displayed in the AT state. By configuring it in this way, the burden of the control process for displaying the advance warning image can be reduced.

Also, while an example of a pre-notification image showing the number of frames remaining until the limit is reached is shown, the number of frames remaining until the limit is reached does not have to be displayed.

For example, the advance warning image may be an image such as "You will soon reach the limit." In this case, the same advance warning image is displayed when the difference in the number of gaming media remaining until the limit is reached is 90 and when the difference in the number of gaming media remaining until the limit is reached is 10. Note that although the wording (message) of the advance warning image remains the same depending on the number of gaming media remaining until the limit is reached, it may also be displayed in a different format (for example, the color of the advance warning image changes depending on the number of gaming media remaining until the limit is reached).

In this way, by providing advance warning until the stop condition is met, problems between players and the gaming facility can be prevented before they occur, compared to when the stop process (stop state) occurs suddenly.

The advance notification image is also configured so as not to overlap with the display of PAYOUT, CREDIT, Total, and G. This configuration prevents the display of the advance notification image from reducing the visibility of the information relating to PAYOUT, CREDIT, Total, and G. Note that the display of the advance notification image may overlap with some of the information relating to PAYOUT, CREDIT, Total, and G.

In addition, when a game state advantageous to the player, such as an automatic timer or bonus game state, ends, a warning image (an image to prevent the player from becoming addicted to the game) is displayed for a predetermined period of time (for example, until three seconds have passed, or until a predetermined operation for the next game (such as a bet operation or operation of the start switch) is performed).

For example, when the advance warning image is being displayed, the AT state ends and the attention-calling image is displayed, and the image may be configured as one of the following a) to c).
A) At least a part of the display area of the advance warning image and the display area of the attention calling image overlap. In other words, there are cases where the advance warning image and the attention calling image are displayed simultaneously.

In this configuration, since the warning images overlap at least partially, the visibility of the advance warning image is lower when the warning image is displayed than when the warning image is not displayed. However, since the advance warning image is visible, it is possible to prevent trouble between the player and the gaming parlor.
A) The display area of the advance warning image and the display area of the attention calling image do not overlap. In other words, there are cases where the advance warning image and the attention calling image are displayed at the same time.

In this configuration, the display areas of the warning image and the advance warning image do not overlap, so it is possible to prevent the visibility of the advance warning image from changing between when the warning image is not displayed and when it is displayed (for example, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the advance warning image from decreasing when the warning image is displayed). In other words, because the advance warning image is visible, it is possible to prevent trouble between the player and the gaming facility.
c) The advance warning image is temporarily hidden before the warning image is displayed, and then the advance warning image is displayed after the warning image display has finished (the images are displayed in the following order: advance warning image → warning image → advance warning image). In other words, the advance warning image and the warning image are not displayed at the same time.

When configured in this way, the advance warning image is not displayed when the warning image is displayed, which increases the attention paid to the warning image. Furthermore, the advance warning image is displayed after the warning image display has finished, which helps prevent any potential problems between players and gaming parlors.

<<<Fig. 76 (2)>>>
This is an example of a case where the notification state relating to the end of the game is the "activation notice state" and a pre-notification image is displayed when a performance (also called a demo performance) is being executed while waiting to play.

Unlike Figure 75 (2), a pre-alert image is displayed on the upper side of the display device 32.

In addition, this advance notification image will continue to be displayed even if the images displayed as demo effects are switched sequentially.

In this way, by providing advance warning during the demo presentation until the stop condition is met, players who are considering playing can be notified that the gaming machine is about to enter a stop processing (stop state). This prevents potential problems between players and the gaming parlor, compared to when the stop processing (stop state) occurs suddenly.

The notification state for the limit is the "activation notification state," and the advance notification image displayed during play (in this example, during the AT state) is the same image (image of the same size) as the notification state for the limit is the "activation notification state," and the advance notification image displayed in the demo performance. By configuring it in this way, the amount of memory required to store the images can be reduced compared to when multiple advance notification images are provided.

On the other hand, the advance notification image displayed when the notification state related to the limit is the "activation notification state" and during play (in this example, during the AT state) and the advance notification image displayed when the notification state related to the limit is the "activation notification state" and during the demo performance may be configured to be different images (images of different sizes or images using different colors).

For example, the notification state related to the end of the game may be the "activation notification state," and the advance notification image displayed during play (in this example, during the AT state) may be larger (the display area of the advance notification image may be larger) than the advance notification image displayed in the demo performance, where the notification state related to the end of the game is the "activation notification state."

By configuring it in this way, the notification state related to the limit is the "activation notice state," and the difference in the number of gaming media until the limit condition is met can be emphasized during play (in this example, during the AT state). In other words, it is possible to clearly indicate to the player how much time is left until the limit is reached during play.

Also, for example, the notification state related to the end of the game may be the "activation notification state," and the advance notification image displayed during play (in this example, during the AT state) may be an image that is smaller (the display area of the advance notification image is smaller) than the advance notification image displayed in the demo performance, where the notification state related to the end of the game is the "activation notification state."

By configuring it this way, the notification state related to the limit is the "activation notice state," and the demo effect can emphasize the difference in the number of gaming media until the limit condition is reached. In other words, it is possible to clearly indicate to players who are considering playing that the gaming machine is about to enter a limit process (limit state).

In addition, as an example where the notification state related to the limit is the "activation notification state" and the advance notification image displayed during play (in this example, during the AT state) is different from the advance notification image displayed in the demo performance when the notification state related to the limit is the "activation notification state," an example was given in which the advance notification images are different in size, but this is not limited to the size of the advance notification image.

For example, the advance warning image may be configured to use different colors, have different shapes, display different notations (messages) on the advance warning image, or use different fonts for the notations (messages) on the advance warning image.

In other words, the degree of emphasis of the advance notification image should be different between the advance notification image displayed during play (in this example, during the AT state) when the notification state related to the limit is the "activation notification state" and the advance notification image displayed during the demo performance when the notification state related to the limit is the "activation notification state."

Note that while we have explained the case where a pre-notification image is displayed when the notification state related to the limit is the "activation notification state" and a demo effect is being executed, it is also possible to not display a pre-notification image when the notification state related to the limit is the "activation notification state" and a demo effect is being executed.

In this case, when a player places a bet, the demo presentation can be switched to the game screen, and when the game screen is displayed, a pre-notification image can be displayed (see Figure 76 (1)). In other words, the player is notified that the stopping conditions have been met before they begin playing (before they place the required number of bets and operate the start switch), preventing any potential problems between the player and the gaming parlor.

<<<Fig. 76 (3)>>>
This is an example of a menu image that is displayed when the notification state related to the game ending is the "activation notice state" and the sub-switch 20 is operated during game standby (also called "menu mode").

Unlike Figure 75 (3), a pre-warning image is displayed on the upper side of the display device 32.

In this way, by providing advance warning in menu mode until the stop condition is met, players who are planning to play on a gaming machine that has been left in menu mode for a long time can be notified that the gaming machine is about to enter a stop processing (stop state). Therefore, compared to when the stop processing (stop state) occurs suddenly, it is possible to prevent problems between players and gaming parlors.

The pre-notification image displayed when the notification state for the limit is the "activation notification state" and during play (in this example, during the AT state) and the pre-notification image displayed when the notification state for the limit is the "activation notification state" and in menu mode are configured to be the same image (image of the same size). By configuring it in this way, the amount of memory required to store the images can be reduced compared to when multiple pre-notification images are provided.

On the other hand, the advance notification image displayed when the notification state for the limit is the "activation notification state" and during play (in this example, during the AT state) and the advance notification image displayed when the notification state for the limit is the "activation notification state" and in menu mode may be configured to be different images (images of different sizes or images using different colors).

For example, the notification state related to the end of play may be the "activation notification state," and the advance notification image displayed during play (in this example, during the AT state) may be larger (the display area of the advance notification image may be larger) than the advance notification image displayed in menu mode, where the notification state related to the end of play is the "activation notification state."

By configuring it in this way, the notification state related to the limit is the "activation notice state," and the difference in the number of gaming media until the limit condition is met can be emphasized during play (in this example, during the AT state). In other words, it is possible to clearly indicate to the player how much time is left until the limit is reached during play.

Also, for example, the notification state related to the end of play may be the "activation notification state," and the advance notification image displayed during play (in this example, during the AT state) may be an image that is smaller (the display area of the advance notification image is smaller) than the advance notification image displayed in menu mode, where the notification state related to the end of play is the "activation notification state."

By configuring it this way, the notification state related to the limit is the "activation notice state," and the menu mode can emphasize the difference in the number of gaming media required to reach the limit condition. In other words, it is possible to clearly indicate to players who are considering playing that the gaming machine is about to enter a limit process (limit state).

In addition, as an example where the notification state related to the limit is the "activation notification state" and the advance notification image displayed during play (in this example, during the AT state) is different from the advance notification image displayed in menu mode when the notification state related to the limit is the "activation notification state," an example was given in which the advance notification images are different in size, but this is not limited to the size of the advance notification image.

For example, the advance warning image may be configured to use different colors, have different shapes, display different notations (messages) on the advance warning image, or use different fonts for the notations (messages) on the advance warning image.

In other words, the degree of emphasis of the advance notification image should be different between the advance notification image displayed during play (in this example, during the AT state) when the notification state related to the limit is the "activation notification state" and the advance notification image displayed in menu mode when the notification state related to the limit is the "activation notification state."

Furthermore, when the notification state related to the limit is the "activation notice state" and the menu mode is active, if a pre-warning image is displayed, the pre-warning image is configured so that it does not overlap with the display of each item selectable in menu mode. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the visibility of the display of each item selectable in menu mode due to the display of the pre-warning image.

The display of the advance notification image may reduce the visibility of the images of some of the items selectable in menu mode. Even in this case, the items may be configured to be identifiable to the player, even if their visibility is reduced. By configuring them in this way, each item can be selected by the player.

Note that while we have explained the case where a pre-warning image is displayed when the notification state related to the limit is the "activation pre-warning state" and the mode is menu mode, it is also possible to not display the pre-warning image when the notification state related to the limit is the "activation pre-warning state" and the mode is menu mode.

<<Notification status related to cutoff: Operation notification status>>
Figure 77 is a diagram showing an example of the effects when the notification state related to the limit is the "activation notification state." Below, the effects (images) displayed on the display device 32 will be explained in the order of Figure 77(1), Figure 77(2), Figure 77(3), Figure 77(4), Figure 77(5), and Figure 77(6). Note that explanations of parts that overlap with the explanations of Figures 75 and 76 will be omitted, and only the characteristic configuration will be explained.

The timing at which the notification state for limiting the number of games will change to the activation notification state is, for example, after the dispensing of game media for a game in which the difference in the number of game media for limiting the number of games exceeds 19,000 (for example, processing corresponding to the determined number of game media to be dispensed) has ended.

Here, "processing corresponding to the determined number of gaming media to be awarded" refers to processing that updates the information displayed on the payout number indicator (also called the number of coins won indicator), processing that updates the information displayed on the credit number indicator, processing that updates the information displayed on the indicator that can display the total points (also called the total points indicator), and processing that pays out gaming media from the hopper.

Note that "processing to update the information displayed on the display" refers to the process of sequentially updating the value displayed on the display, such as "0" → "1" → "2" → ... → "11" when paying out (awarding) 11 gaming media. For example, the time required to update the value by "1" is designed to be an average of 50 ms. Also, the time required to pay out one gaming medium from the hopper is designed to be an average of 50 ms.

When designed in this way, the notification state for when play is over will change to the activated notification state, for example, within 50 ms after the process of updating the information displayed on the display is completed, or after the process of dispensing gaming media from the hopper is completed. In other words, it is preferable that the image indicating play is over ("Complete function in operation, please call an attendant" in Figure 77) be displayed within 50 ms after the process of updating the information displayed on the display is completed, or after the process of dispensing gaming media from the hopper is completed.

Note that 50 ms is an example and is not limited to 50 ms. In other words, it is sufficient that the following formula is satisfied:
The time required to award one gaming medium > the time from the completion of awarding gaming media to the display of an image indicating that awarding has ended

By configuring it this way, an image indicating that play has ended is displayed immediately after the payout of game media has been completed, allowing the player to recognize that the payout of game media for that game has ended.

Note that the timing when the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit exceeds 19,000 and the notification state related to the limit becomes the activated notification state has been described as the timing after the granting of gaming media for games in which the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit becomes 19,000 (processing corresponding to the determined number of gaming media granted) has ended, but it may also be the timing before the granting of gaming media for games in which the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit exceeds 19,000 (processing corresponding to the determined number of gaming media paid out) has ended.

For example, the timing at which the notification state related to the limit changes to the activation notification state may be before the start of the granting of game media for a game in which the difference in the number of game media related to the limit exceeds 19,000, or at the start of the granting of game media for a game in which the difference in the number of game media related to the limit exceeds 19,000, or during the granting of game media for a game in which the difference in the number of game media related to the limit exceeds 19,000.

Furthermore, in gaming machines that perform automatic settlement (of the number of credits) after the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit exceeds 19,000, the notification state related to the limit may become an activated notification state after the automatic settlement is completed, or the notification state may become an activated notification state before the automatic settlement begins, or the notification state related to the limit may become an activated notification state when the automatic settlement begins, or the notification state related to the limit may become an activated notification state while the automatic settlement is in progress.

<<<Fig. 77 (1)>>>
The notification state relating to the end of play is an example of a presentation in the “operation notification state.” This presentation example is an example of a presentation in which a notification that the end of play has been reached is made on the display device 32 in a gaming machine that does not use physical medals as gaming media (also called a medalless gaming machine).

Here, we will provide a brief explanation of medalless gaming machines.

A medalless gaming machine is a gaming machine that does not use physical medals as gaming media, but instead uses electronic medals as gaming media.

The medalless gaming machine can communicate bidirectionally with a rental device (rental unit) that can rent gaming media.

For example, by operating a lending switch provided on the lending device once, a predetermined number of gaming media (e.g., 50) can be sent to the medal-less gaming machine, and the medal-less gaming machine can store the number of gaming media received. Furthermore, games (betting, etc.) can be executed using the stored gaming media.

Furthermore, by operating (pressing and holding) the counting switch on the medal-less gaming machine, the medal-less gaming machine can transmit a predetermined number (50) of gaming media stored therein to the lending device at predetermined intervals (e.g., every 300 ms). The lending device then stores the received gaming media, and by operating the return button on the lending device, it can eject a card that stores the number of gaming media.

As described above, in a medal-less gaming machine, operating the counting switch allows the number of gaming media stored in the medal-less gaming machine to be transmitted to the rental unit. Then, by ejecting the card with the number of gaming media stored, the game media can be exchanged for prizes at the gaming parlor.

Please note that unless otherwise specified, the gaming machines in this specification can also be applied to medalless gaming machines.

Refer back to Figure 77 (1) for explanation.

The information "Complete function in operation" and "Please call an attendant" will be displayed near the center of the display device 32.

In other words, the display device 32 displays a notification indicating that play has reached a limit and that an attendant (store staff member) should be called. This configuration allows the player to recognize that play has reached a limit. The player also recognizes that a store staff member needs to be called. Note that when a notification indicating that play has reached a limit is being displayed, the advance notification image is not displayed.

Incidentally, among the images displayed on the display device 32, the image corresponding to "Complete function in operation" in Figure 77 (1) may also be referred to as an operation notification image, a complete function operation notification image, or a stop state notification image.

Furthermore, among the images displayed on the display device 32, the entire image of Figure 77 (1) may be referred to as an operation notification image, a complete function operation notification image, or a stop state notification image.

In addition, the message "Please count" is displayed in the upper center of the display device 32.

In other words, the display device 32 notifies the player to operate the counting switch. By configuring it in this way, the player can recognize that they need to operate the counting switch to send the gaming media (number of gaming media) stored in the gaming machine to the lending device.

In addition, once the gaming media (number of gaming media) stored in the gaming machine reaches 0, the notification instructing the player to operate the counting switch may be terminated. By configuring it in this way, the player can recognize that the gaming media (number of gaming media) stored in the gaming machine has reached 0 (transmission to the rental device has finished) by operating the counting switch.

In addition, the information "Press 'PUSH' to display the menu screen" is displayed at the bottom of the display device 32.

In other words, the display device 32 notifies the player that the PUSH button (sub-switch 20) is active. It also notifies the player that when the PUSH button (sub-switch 20) is operated, the player will transition to menu mode. This configuration allows the player to recognize that, although play is currently at a standstill, it is possible to transition to menu mode by operating the PUSH button (sub-switch 20), and that a two-dimensional code containing game history and the like can be obtained.

In addition, when a notification indicating that play has stopped is displayed on the display device 32, information about the game (TOTAL, G, PAYOUT, CREDIT, etc.) is not displayed on the display device 32 (and cannot be seen by the player).

For example, the display device 32 is configured to display a single-color (e.g., black) image that notifies the player that play has stopped, that an attendant (store clerk) should be called, that the player should operate the counting switch, or that the player is enabled to press the PUSH button (sub-switch 20, also called the sub-button).

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to emphasize and notify the user that the shot has reached a stop.

In addition, the examples have been explained in which the "operation notification state" for the notification state related to the end of play includes a notification indicating that the game has reached a limit, a notification indicating that an attendant (store clerk) should be called, a notification indicating that the player should operate the counting switch, and a notification indicating that the PUSH button (sub-switch 20, also called the sub-button) is active, but the notification is not limited to these notifications.

For example, it may be possible to provide only some notifications, such as a notification indicating that play has stopped, a notification indicating that an attendant (store clerk) should be called, and a notification indicating that the player should operate the counting switch, but not a notification indicating that the PUSH button (sub-switch 20, also called the sub-button) is active.

In addition, when the notification state related to the end of the game is the "operation notification state," a notification different from the notification described above may be made.

<<<Fig. 77 (2)>>>
The notification state relating to the limit is an example of a presentation in the "operation notification state." This example of a presentation is an example of a case where a notification that the limit state has been reached is displayed on the display device 32 in a gaming machine that uses physical medals as gaming media and does not automatically settle the number of credits after the limit condition is met.

Note that we will omit explanations of points common to Figure 77 (1) and focus on distinctive features.

Unlike Figure 77 (1), the message "Please settle your bill" is displayed in the upper center of the display device 32.

In other words, the display device 32 notifies the player to operate the settlement switch. By configuring it in this way, the player can recognize that they need to operate the settlement switch to settle the gaming media (number of credits) stored in the gaming machine.

In addition, once the gaming medium (number of credits) stored in the gaming machine reaches zero, the notification instructing the player to operate the settlement switch may be terminated. By configuring it in this way, the player can recognize that the gaming medium (number of credits) stored in the gaming machine has reached zero by operating the settlement switch.

<<<Fig. 77 (3)>>>
The notification state relating to the limit is an example of a presentation in the "operation notification state." This example of a presentation is an example of a case where a notification that the limit has been reached is made on the display device 32 in a gaming machine that uses physical medals as gaming media and in which the number of credits is automatically settled after a limit condition is met.

Note that we will omit explanations of points common to Figure 77 (1) and focus on distinctive features.

Unlike Figure 77 (1), the information "Automatic settlement in progress" is displayed in the upper center of the display device 32.

In other words, the display device 32 notifies the player that the credits are being settled (notifying that automatic settlement is being performed). By configuring it in this way, the player can be aware that the credits are being settled even if he or she has not operated the settlement switch.

In addition, once the gaming media (number of credits) stored in the gaming machine reaches zero (after automatic settlement has finished), the notification to the player that the number of credits is being settled (notification that automatic settlement is being carried out) may be terminated. For example, in a gaming machine that displays the information "automatic settlement in progress" while automatic settlement is being carried out, the information "automatic settlement in progress" may not be displayed after automatic settlement has finished. By configuring it in this way, the player can recognize that the gaming media (number of credits) stored in the gaming machine has reached zero due to automatic settlement.

<<<Fig. 77 (4)>>>
The notification state relating to the end of play is an example of a presentation in the "activation notification state." This presentation example is an example in which a stop condition is met during a game (in this example, during the AT state) and the display device 32 notifies the user that the end of play has occurred.

We will omit explanations of points common to Figure 76 (1), Figure 77 (1), or Figure 77 (2), and will focus on distinctive features.

First, we will explain the distinctive features compared to Figure 76 (1).

Figure 76 (1) displays an image (pre-alert image) that says "100 frames remaining until the complete function is activated," while Figure 77 (4) displays an image (alert image) that says "The complete function is activated. Please call an attendant."

In other words, Figure 76 (1) notifies the player of the difference in the number of gaming media remaining until play reaches a limit, while Figure 77 (4) notifies the player that play has reached a limit. Furthermore, Figure 76 (1) does not notify the player about calling an attendant (store staff member).

It is preferable that the image (activation notification image) in Figure 77 (4) "Complete function in operation, please call an attendant" be displayed more emphatically than the image (pre-notification image) in Figure 76 (1) "100 frames remaining until complete function activation."

For example, the activation notification image may be emphasized by making the display area of the display device 32 larger than the display area of the advance notification image.

In this way, by highlighting the operation notification image more than the advance notification image, the player can be properly notified that the game has come to a halt (that the next game cannot be played).

In other words, the degree of emphasis of the advance notification image is less than the degree of emphasis of the operation notification image, so the advance notification image does not interfere with the progress of the game.

Note that, while the example given above of emphasizing the operation notification image over the advance notification image is by changing the size of the area it occupies in the display area, this is not limited to this.

For example, the thickness of the text in the advance warning image may be different from the thickness of the text in the operation warning image. Also, the color of the text in the advance warning image may be different from the color of the text in the operation warning image.

In addition, the degree of emphasis of the advance notification image and the operation notification image may be approximately the same (approximately the same includes the same).

Also, Figure 76 (1) does not display the image "Press PUSH to display the menu screen," while Figure 77 (4) displays the image "Press PUSH to display the menu screen."

In other words, Figure 76 (1) does not notify that operating the PUSH button (sub-switch 20) will transition to menu mode, while Figure 77 (4) does not notify that operating the PUSH button (sub-switch 20) will transition to menu mode.

By configuring it in this way, the player can be properly notified that a menu image can be displayed when the game is at its limit.

Next, we will explain the distinctive features compared to Figure 77 (1) or Figure 77 (2).

Figure 77 (1) or Figure 77 (2) differs in that information about the game (TOTAL, G, PAYOUT, CREDIT, etc.) is not displayed on the display device 32 (it cannot be seen by the player), whereas Figure 77 (4) differs in that information about the game (TOTAL, G, PAYOUT, CREDIT, etc.) is displayed on the display device 32 (it can be seen by the player).

In other words, Figure 77 (4) is configured to display both the effect (image) executed in a game that has reached a stoppage state and the image (activation notification image) that reads "Complete function in operation. Please call an attendant."

By configuring it in this way, the operation notification image is displayed when the specified information (TOTAL or G) is displayed when the game reaches a stop state, so that, for example, the player can use the camera function of his or her mobile terminal to take a commemorative image that includes the specified information when the game reaches a stop state.
<<<Fig. 77 (5)>>>
The notification state relating to the end of play is an example of a presentation in the "activation notification state." This example of a presentation is another example of a presentation in which, when a stop condition is met during a game (in this example, during the AT state), the display device 32 notifies that the end of play has been reached.

In this example, the same demo effect as the demo effect described in Figure 75 (2) is performed, but the demo effect may be different from that in Figure 75 (2).

We will omit the explanation of the points common to Figure 75 (2) and Figure 76 (2) and focus on the distinctive features.

Figures 75 (2) and 76 (2) are demo effects that are executed when a predetermined time (e.g., 60 seconds) has passed without a new bet being made from a certain point after the end of play (after all reels have stopped or after a payout process), while Figure 77 (5) is a demo effect that is executed when a stop-play condition is met. In other words, it is a demo effect that is executed when a predetermined time (e.g., 60 seconds) has passed from a certain point after the end of play (after all reels have stopped or after a payout process).

Note that Figure 77 (5) was described as a demo effect that is executed when a predetermined time (e.g., 60 seconds) has passed since a certain timing after the end of play (after all reels have stopped or after payout processing), but the demo effect may also be executed when the notification state related to the game ending becomes an activated notification state. In other words, the demo effect may be executed from a certain timing (before a predetermined time has passed) after the end of play (after all reels have stopped or after payout processing) of a game that satisfies the game ending conditions.

By configuring it in this way, the player can be notified that they will not be able to play the next game when the game screen switches to a demo presentation.

Figure 76 (2) displays an image (pre-alert image) that says "100 frames remaining until the complete function is activated," while Figure 77 (5) displays an image (alert image) that says "The complete function is activated. Please call an attendant."

In other words, Figure 76 (2) notifies the player about the difference in the number of gaming media remaining until play reaches a limit, while Figure 77 (5) notifies the player that play has reached a limit. Furthermore, Figure 76 (2) does not notify the player about calling an attendant (store staff member).

It is preferable that the image (activation notification image) in Figure 77 (5) "Complete function in operation, please call an attendant" be displayed more emphatically than the image (pre-notification image) in Figure 76 (2) "100 frames remaining until complete function activation."

For example, the activation notification image may be emphasized by making the display area of the display device 32 larger than the display area of the advance notification image.

In this way, by highlighting the operation notification image more than the advance notification image, the player can be properly notified that the game has come to a halt (that the next game cannot be played).

In other words, because the degree of emphasis of the advance notification image is less than the degree of emphasis of the operation notification image, the advance notification image can be prevented from interfering with the demonstration performance as much as possible.

Note that, while the example given above of emphasizing the operation notification image more than the advance notification image is by changing the size of the area it occupies in the display area, this is not limited to this.

For example, the thickness of the text in the advance warning image may be different from the thickness of the text in the operation warning image. Also, the color of the text in the advance warning image may be different from the color of the text in the operation warning image.

In addition, the degree of emphasis of the advance notification image and the operation notification image may be approximately the same (approximately the same includes the same).

Note that Figure 77 (5) was described as a demo effect that is executed when the stop condition is met, but the demo effect may be configured not to be executed when the stop condition is met.

<<<Fig. 77 (6)>>>
This is an example of a presentation in the "activation notification state" where the notification state relating to the end of play is an "operation notification state." This presentation example is an example of a presentation in which, after the end of play condition is met, the player operates the PUSH button (sub-switch 20) to transition to the menu mode.

In other words, this is an example of a situation where a player operates the PUSH button (sub-switch 20) to switch to menu mode while one of the images in Figure 77 (1), Figure 77 (2), Figure 77 (3), Figure 77 (4), or Figure 77 (5) is being displayed.

We will omit the explanation of the points common to Figure 75 (3) and Figure 76 (3) and focus on the distinctive features.

Figure 76 (3) displays an image (pre-alert image) that says "100 frames remaining until the complete function is activated," while Figure 77 (6) displays an image (alert image) that says "The complete function is activated. Please call an attendant."

In other words, Figure 76 (3) notifies the player of the difference in the number of gaming media remaining until the limit is reached, while Figure 77 (6) notifies the player that the limit has been reached. Also, Figure 76 (3) does not notify the player about calling an attendant (store staff member).

It is preferable that the image (activation notification image) in Figure 77 (6) "Complete function in operation, please call an attendant" be displayed more emphatically than the image (pre-notification image) in Figure 76 (3) "100 frames remaining until complete function activation."

For example, the activation notification image may be emphasized by making the display area of the display device 32 larger than the display area of the advance notification image.

In this way, by highlighting the operation notification image more than the advance notification image, the player can be properly notified that the game has come to a halt (that the next game cannot be played).

In other words, because the degree of emphasis of the advance warning image is less than the degree of emphasis of the operation warning image, the advance warning image can be made to interfere as little as possible with the visibility of the selection items instructed in the menu image.

Note that, while the example given above of emphasizing the operation notification image more than the advance notification image is by changing the size of the area it occupies in the display area, this is not limited to this.

For example, the thickness of the text in the advance warning image may be different from the thickness of the text in the operation warning image. Also, the color of the text in the advance warning image may be different from the color of the text in the operation warning image.

In addition, the degree of emphasis of the advance notification image and the operation notification image may be approximately the same (approximately the same includes the same).

Furthermore, the display of the activation notification image may reduce the visibility of the images of some of the items selectable in menu mode. Even in this case, although visibility may be reduced, the items should still be configured to be identifiable to the player. By configuring them in this way, each item can be selected by the player.

In addition, when the notification state related to the cutoff is the "operation notification state" and the device is in menu mode, the operation notification image may be hidden.

Furthermore, the items selectable on the menu screen in Figure 77 (6) are the same as the items selectable on the menu screens in Figures 75 (3) and 76 (3), but they may be different.

For example, when the notification state related to the termination is "operation notification state" and the menu mode is active, the "QR display at end" item can be selected, but the "volume adjustment" item cannot be selected (or the "volume adjustment" item may not be displayed).

By configuring it in this way, once the limit is reached, only the minimum number of items necessary can be selected (the number of selectable items is reduced), preventing the player from selecting items that are unnecessary to them.

Also, if the push button is operated when the notification state related to the game ending is the "activation notification state," a two-dimensional code containing the game history may be displayed without transitioning to menu mode (without displaying Figure 77 (6)). In other words, the two-dimensional code containing the game history may be displayed even if the "QR display at end" item is not selected.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to reduce the number of steps required to display information necessary for the player after the game has stopped.

If the notification state related to the cutoff is "normal state," "activation notice state," or "activation notification state," menu mode can be exited by meeting certain conditions (for example, selecting the "Exit menu mode" item (not shown) and operating a specific switch (push button)).

However, the sub-controller's control processing may be configured to differ between terminating menu mode when the notification state related to the limit is "operation notification state" and terminating menu mode when the notification state related to the limit is "normal state" or "operation notice state." The following explains the differences in the control processing of the sub-controller (differences when terminating menu mode) using examples.

(Example 1) Differences in conditions for ending menu mode When the notification state regarding the limit is the "normal state" or the "activation notification state," the menu mode can also be ended by a bet process (a bet process by operating the 1 bet button, a bet process by operating the MAX bet button, or a bet process by inserting a medal into the slot).

For example, if the menu mode is in the "normal state" or "activation notification state" and the number of bets is 0 and the number of credits is 50, and the 1 bet button or the MAX bet button is operated, or if a medal is inserted through the slot, the menu mode can be exited. Note that when the menu mode is exited under these conditions, the notification state regarding the limit will not change. For example, if the notification state regarding the limit is the "activation notification state," the notification state regarding the limit after exiting the menu mode will be the "activation notification state."

On the other hand, if you try to exit menu mode when the notification state related to the limit is the "operation notification state," you cannot exit menu mode by performing a bet process (a bet process by operating the 1 bet button, a bet process by operating the MAX bet button, or a bet process by inserting a medal into the slot). Specifically, when the notification state related to the limit is the "operation notification state," control is exercised to prevent bet processes from being executed, so you cannot exit menu mode.

For example, if you are in menu mode when the notification state for the limit is "activated notification state" and the number of bets is 0 and the number of credits is 50, and you operate the 1 bet button or the MAX bet button, or if a medal is inserted through the slot, you will not be able to exit menu mode.

(Example 2) Differences in Presentation After Exiting Menu Mode In principle, a demo screen is displayed after exiting menu mode when the notification state related to the game ending is in the "normal state" or the "activation notice state." However, if the menu mode is entered while a specific presentation is being executed (for example, during a game in the middle of a presentation spanning multiple games (continuous presentation)) or if the menu mode is entered during a specific game state (for example, during AT), the demo screen does not have to be displayed after exiting menu mode. For example, after exiting menu mode, a screen (image) related to the presentation being executed before entering menu mode may be displayed.

In other words, when the notification state related to the limit is in the "normal state" or the "activation notification state," a predetermined effect (for example, an effect that is completed in one play) is executed, followed by a transition to menu mode, and then, after satisfying a predetermined condition (for example, selecting the "Exit menu mode" item (not shown) and operating a specific switch (push button)), the menu mode is exited and a demo screen is displayed. Note that the notification state related to the limit does not change even after menu mode has ended. For example, if the notification state related to the limit is the "activation notification state," the notification state related to the limit after menu mode has ended will remain the "activation notification state."

On the other hand, after exiting menu mode when the notification state related to the end of the game is the "operation notification state," a screen (image) related to the effect that was being performed when the game entered menu mode will be displayed.

For example, when the image in Figure 77 (2) is displayed, the system switches to menu mode, and then, after satisfying a predetermined condition (for example, selecting the "Exit menu mode" item (not shown) and operating a specific switch (push button)), the system exits menu mode and displays the image in Figure 77 (2).

Similarly, for example, when the image in Figure 77 (4) is displayed, the system switches to menu mode, and then, after satisfying a predetermined condition (for example, selecting the "Exit menu mode" item (not shown) and operating a specific switch (push button)), the system exits menu mode and displays the image in Figure 77 (4).

However, it may also be configured so that a demo image is displayed after exiting menu mode. In that case, for example, when the image in Figure 77 (2) is displayed, the device may transition to menu mode, and then, after a predetermined condition is met (for example, selecting the "Exit menu mode" option (not shown) and operating a specific switch (push button)), the image in Figure 77 (5) may be displayed after exiting menu mode.

Similarly, for example, when the image in Figure 77 (4) is displayed, the system may transition to menu mode, and then, after satisfying a predetermined condition (for example, selecting the "Exit menu mode" item (not shown) and operating a specific switch (push button)), the system may exit menu mode and display the image in Figure 77 (5).

Note that Figure 77 (6) was described as an image displayed in the menu mode that is executed when the stop condition is met, but the system may be configured so that when the stop condition is met, the menu mode does not switch over even if the player operates the PUSH button (sub-switch 20).

<Recovery from power outage during operation notice state>
When the notification state relating to the cutoff is the operation notice state, the advance notification image can be displayed as shown in Fig. 76. In this way, when the power-off process (also called power-off process) is performed while the advance notification image is being displayed, if the power is then turned on without changing the settings (the power switch is turned on with the setting key switch off), the advance notification image is not displayed.

Specifically, if a power-off process is performed when the notification status related to the cutoff is in the operation notice state, and then the power is turned on without changing any settings, the sub-control means will return the notification status related to the cutoff to the normal state without receiving a command related to the cutoff difference counter from the main control means.

For example, if the power-off process is performed when the game state controlled by the main control means is in a specified game state (e.g., AT state), and the power is then turned on without changing the settings, game play can be resumed from the specified game state (e.g., AT state). However, the value stored in the stop difference counter will be the initial value (the difference in the game media related to the stop is 0).

For example, if the power is turned off while the image in Figure 76 (1) is displayed, and then the power is turned on without changing any settings, the message "100 sheets remaining until the complete function is activated" will not be displayed. Note that at this time, other information (TOTAL, G, etc.) is configured to be displayed in the same way as before the power was turned off.

Similarly, if the power is turned off while the image in Figure 76 (2) or the image in Figure 76 (3) is being displayed, and then the power is turned on without changing any settings, the message "100 frames remaining until the complete function is activated" will not be displayed.

By configuring it this way, the advance warning image can be hidden more immediately than when the advance warning image is hidden based on receiving a command containing the value of the play stop difference counter (the difference in the number of gaming media related to the play stop) after power is restored. This prevents the player from mistaking the image displayed after power is restored (mistaking that the difference between the difference in the number of gaming media related to the play stop and the difference in the number of gaming media related to the play stop is small).

Note that if the power-off process is performed when the game state controlled by the main control means is in a specified game state (for example, AT state), and then the power is turned on with a setting change (power switch turned on with the setting key switch on), the game state will return to a specific game state (for example, the normal section and normal state). Furthermore, the value stored in the stop difference counter will be the initial value (the difference in the game media related to the stop is 0).

Even in this case, after power is restored, the sub-control means is configured to return the notification state related to the cutoff to the normal state and not display the advance notification image.

<Checking settings when in operation warning state>
When the notification state relating to the limit is the operation notice state, the advance notification image can be displayed as shown in Fig. 76. In this way, when the advance notification image is displayed and in a predetermined situation where the number of bets is 0 (a situation where bets can be accepted), if the transition condition for the setting confirmation mode is met (for example, the setting key switch is turned on when the front door is open), the mode can be transitioned to the setting confirmation mode.

If the notification state related to the cutoff is in the activation notice state and the setting confirmation mode is entered, a notification will be sent that the setting confirmation mode is in effect. For example, an image indicating that the setting confirmation mode is in effect may be displayed, or a sound may be output indicating that the setting confirmation mode is in effect. Note that it may also be possible to display a pre-notification image during the setting confirmation mode.

First, an example of an image indicating that the device is in setting confirmation mode would be the display of an image that reads "Checking settings." An example of an audio notification indicating that the device is in setting confirmation mode would be the audio that reads "Checking settings" being output from a speaker.

In other words, if the notification state related to the limit is the activation notice state and the game transitions to the setting confirmation mode, both an image indicating that the game is in the setting confirmation mode and a pre-notification image may be displayed. By configuring it in this way, even during setting confirmation, it is possible to know that there is only a small number of gaming media remaining until the limit state is reached. In other words, the gaming store staff can know that the limit state will soon be reached.

In this case, the advance warning image displayed during the setting confirmation mode may be the same as the advance warning image displayed before switching to the setting confirmation mode. By configuring it in this way, there is no need to provide multiple types of advance warning images, which reduces the ROM capacity of the sub-control means. In addition, since there is no process for switching advance warning images, the program capacity of the sub-control means can be reduced.

However, the advance notification image may be displayed in a different format than before switching to setting confirmation mode. By configuring it in this way, you can immediately distinguish between playing and setting confirmation by checking the advance notification image.

Although an example has been described in which a pre-notification image is displayed during setting confirmation mode, it is not necessary to display a pre-notification image during setting confirmation mode. By configuring it in this way, gaming store staff can concentrate on checking the setting values.

In addition, even if a pre-warning image is displayed during setting confirmation mode, or even if a pre-warning image is not displayed during setting confirmation mode, the pre-warning image is also displayed when the front door is closed after the setting confirmation mode termination conditions (for example, turning off the setting key switch) are met, the door open error is cleared, and the game screen is displayed. In other words, the difference in the number of gaming media related to the play limit does not change before and after switching to setting confirmation mode (the value stored in the play limit difference counter is maintained).

<Power off and recovery in operation notification state>
When the notification state relating to the cutoff is the operation notification state, an operation notification image is displayed as shown in Fig. 77. In this way, when a power-off process (also called a power-off process) is performed while the operation notification image is displayed, if the power is then turned on without changing the settings (the power switch is turned on with the setting key switch off), the operation notification image is maintained.

Specifically, if a power-off process is performed when the notification status related to the limit is in the operation notification status, and then the power is turned on without changing the settings, the notification status related to the limit will return to the operation notification status without receiving a command related to the limit difference counter from the main control means.

When the notification state related to the stoppage is the operation notification state, the main control means is executing the stoppage process (the main control means is in the stoppage state). If a power-off process is performed while the main control means is in the stoppage state, and then the power is turned on without changing the settings (the power switch is turned on with the setting key switch off), the main control means will enter the stoppage state. However, the value stored in the stoppage difference counter will be the initial value (the difference number of gaming media related to the stoppage is 0).

For example, if the power is turned off while the image in Figure 77(1) is displayed, and then the power is turned on without changing any settings, the image in Figure 77(1) will be displayed. This is true not only for Figure 77(1), but also for Figures 77(2), 77(3), 77(4), 77(5), and 77(6).

When the notification state related to the game limit is the activation notification state, the main control means is executing the game limit process (the game limit state is in effect). If the power-off process is performed while the main control means is in the game limit state, and then the power is turned on without changing the settings (the power switch is turned on with the setting key switch off), the game will enter a specific gaming state (for example, the normal section and normal state). In addition, the value stored in the game limit difference counter will be the initial value (the difference number of gaming media related to the game limit is 0).

By configuring it in this way, even though the stop difference counter stores an initial value, it is possible to notify the player of appropriate information (information indicating that the stop state is in effect) corresponding to the state (stop state) controlled by the main control state. Therefore, the image displayed after power is restored can prevent the player from being misled (into thinking that the stop state is no longer in effect).

Note that if a power-off process is performed when the game state controlled by the main control means is in a stop state, and then the power is turned on with a setting change (power switch turned on with the setting key switch on), the game will transition to setting change mode, and after the conditions for terminating the setting change mode are met, the game will enter a specific game state (for example, the normal section and normal state). Furthermore, the value stored in the stop difference counter will be the initial value (the difference in the game media related to the stop state will be 0).

In this case, after the power is restored (during the setting change mode), the sub-control means is configured to set the notification state related to the limit to the normal state and not to notify information indicating that the limit has been reached. Similarly, after the setting change mode ends (before the first game starts), the notification state related to the limit is also configured to set the notification state related to the limit to the normal state and not to notify information indicating that the limit has been reached.

Although it has been stated that information indicating a play-stop state is not announced after power is restored (during setting change mode), information indicating a play-stop state may be announced after power is restored (during setting change mode). In this case, after setting change mode ends (before the first game starts), the play-stop notification state is set to the normal state, and information indicating a play-stop state is not announced.

<Checking settings when an alarm is activated>
When the notification state relating to the limit is the operation notification state (the limit state), an operation notification image can be displayed as shown in Fig. 77. In this way, in a specific situation where the operation notification image is displayed (a situation where no bets are being accepted), if the transition condition for the setting confirmation mode is met (for example, the setting key switch is turned on when the front door is open), the mode can be transitioned to the setting confirmation mode.

If the notification state related to the cutoff is an activation notification state and the device transitions to setting confirmation mode, the device will notify you that it is in setting confirmation mode. For example, an image indicating that it is in setting confirmation mode will be displayed, or a sound will be output indicating that it is in setting confirmation mode. Note that it may also be possible to display an activation notification image during setting confirmation mode.

First, an example of an image indicating that the device is in setting confirmation mode would be the display of an image that reads "Checking settings." An example of an audio notification indicating that the device is in setting confirmation mode would be the audio that reads "Checking settings" being output from a speaker.

In other words, if the notification state related to the limit is an activation notification state and the setting confirmation mode is entered, both an image indicating that the setting confirmation mode is in progress and an activation notification image may be displayed. By configuring it in this way, arcade staff can know that the limit has been reached even during setting confirmation. Furthermore, because it is possible to check the setting values at the time the limit was reached, it is possible to check whether any fraud has occurred (whether the setting values are different from those set by the arcade), etc.

In this case, the activation notification image displayed during the setting confirmation mode may be the same as the activation notification image displayed before switching to the setting confirmation mode. By configuring it in this way, there is no need to provide multiple types of activation notification images, which reduces the ROM capacity of the sub-control means. In addition, since there is no process for switching activation notification images, the program capacity of the sub-control means can be reduced.

However, the operation notification image may be displayed in a different format than before switching to setting confirmation mode. By configuring it in this way, you can immediately tell whether the device is in a stalled state or is currently being confirmed by checking the operation notification image.

Note that while an example has been described in which an operation notification image is displayed during setting confirmation mode, it is not necessary to display the operation notification image during setting confirmation mode. By configuring it in this way, gaming store staff can concentrate on checking the setting values.

In addition, even if the operation notification image is displayed during the setting check mode, or even if the operation notification image is not displayed during the setting check mode, the operation notification image is displayed after the conditions for terminating the setting check mode (for example, turning off the setting key switch) are met, the front door is closed, and the door open error is cleared.

In addition, an example has been described in which the setting confirmation mode can be entered when the transition conditions for the setting confirmation mode (for example, turning on the setting key switch when the front door is open) are met in a specific situation in which the operation notification image is displayed (a situation in which bets are not being accepted), but the setting confirmation mode may not be entered even if the transition conditions for the setting confirmation mode (for example, turning on the setting key switch when the front door is open) are met in a specific situation in which the operation notification image is displayed (a situation in which bets are not being accepted).

By configuring it in this way, there is no need to provide special processing to enable transition to setting confirmation mode even in a stalled state, which reduces the program capacity of the main control means.

<Transition of notification state related to termination>
Next, the transition of the notification state related to the termination in this embodiment will be explained using FIG.

The game zones (1) to (7) will be described as advantageous zones. Furthermore, (1) to (7) will be described as game states (e.g., AT states) that are advantageous to the player.

However, the game zones (1) to (7) are not limited to advantageous zones. The game zones (1) to (7) may be normal zones, or some of the game zones (1) to (7) may be normal zones and other parts may be advantageous zones. Furthermore, the game zones may be gaming machines that do not have normal zones and advantageous zones (so-called normal machines).

Refer back to Figure 78 for explanation.

As the game progresses, the status changes in the following order: (1) → (2) → (3) → (4) → (5) → (6) → (7). In other words, the horizontal axis corresponds to the number of games played since the power was turned on.

The vertical axis corresponds to the difference in the number of gaming media related to the stoppage (e.g., the value stored in the stoppage difference counter).

The dotted line indicates that the notification status regarding the cutoff is normal.

The lined area (non-dotted area) indicates that the notification state related to the cutoff is an activation notice state.

The first difference number corresponds to the difference number of gaming media related to the limit at which the display of the advance warning image is to be initiated. For example, the first difference number corresponds to a value such as 18,900. Note that 18,900 is an example and is not limited to 18,900. For example, the first difference number may be a numerical value such as 18,500. Furthermore, if the timing to start processing for outputting a test signal related to the limit is when the difference number of gaming media related to the limit exceeds 18,500, the timing to start displaying the advance warning image may also be when the difference number (first difference number) of gaming media related to the limit also exceeds 18,500.

In other words, the difference number of gaming media related to the limit that will start the process for outputting the test signal related to the limit and the difference number of gaming media related to the limit that will start the display of the advance warning image (first difference number) may be the same value. By configuring it in this way, the advance warning image is displayed when the process for outputting the test signal related to the limit is starting, so it is possible to confirm during the development stage of the gaming machine whether the difference number of gaming media related to the limit managed by the main control means is being accurately sent to the sub-control means.

The second difference number corresponds to the difference number of gaming media related to the cutoff point at which the display of the advance notification image will end. For example, if the first difference number is 18,900, the second difference number will be a value such as 18,850. Note that 18,850 is an example and is not limited to 18,850. For example, if the first difference number is 18,500, the second difference number may be a value such as 18,450.

<<Figure 78 (1)>>
In the AT state, the difference in the number of game media related to the limit increases as the game progresses, and this is the period until it reaches the second difference (less than the second difference). During this period, the notification state related to the limit is the normal state. Therefore, the advance notification image is not displayed on the display device 32.

During play during the period shown in Figure 78(1), for example, an image such as that shown in Figure 75(1) is displayed on the display device 32. The characteristics of the image displayed during play during the period shown in Figure 78(1) are as described in Figure 75(1).

During the game standby period (demo screen) shown in Figure 78 (1), an image such as that shown in Figure 75 (2) is displayed on the display device 32. The characteristics of the demo presentation during the period shown in Figure 78 (1) are as described in Figure 75 (2).

In menu mode during the period shown in Figure 78 (1), an image such as that shown in Figure 75 (3) is displayed on the display device 32. The characteristics of the image (menu image) in menu mode during the period shown in Figure 78 (1) are as described in Figure 75 (3).

<<Figure 78 (2)>>
In the AT state, the difference number of game media related to the limit increases as the game progresses, and this is the period from the second difference number to the first difference number (greater than or equal to the second difference number and less than the first difference number). During this period, the notification state related to the limit is the normal state. Therefore, the advance notification image is not displayed on the display device 32.

During play during the period shown in Figure 78 (2), for example, an image such as that shown in Figure 75 (1) is displayed on the display device 32. The characteristics of the image displayed during play during the period shown in Figure 77 (1) are as described in Figure 75 (1).

During the game standby period (demo screen) shown in Figure 78 (2), an image such as that shown in Figure 75 (2) is displayed on the display device 32. The characteristics of the demo presentation during the period shown in Figure 78 (2) are as described in Figure 75 (2).

In menu mode during the period shown in Figure 78 (2), an image such as that shown in Figure 75 (3) is displayed on the display device 32. The characteristics of the image (menu image) in menu mode during the period shown in Figure 78 (2) are as described in Figure 75 (3).

<<Figure 78 (3)>>
In the AT state, the difference in the number of game media related to the limit becomes equal to or greater than the first difference as the game progresses, and then the difference in the number of game media related to the limit again becomes the first difference. During this period, the notification state related to the limit is the activation notice state. Therefore, the advance notification image is displayed on the display device 32.

For example, the timing when the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit becomes equal to or greater than the first difference and the notification state related to the limit changes to the activation notification state is the timing after the granting of gaming media for the game in which the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit becomes the first difference has been completed (processing corresponding to the determined number of gaming media to be paid out).

Here, "processing corresponding to the determined number of gaming media to be paid out" refers to processing that updates the information displayed on the payout number display (also called the number of coins won display), processing that updates the information displayed on the credit number display, processing that updates the information displayed on a display that can display the total points (also called the total points display), and processing that pays out gaming media from a hopper.

Note that "processing to update the information displayed on the display" refers to the process of sequentially updating the value displayed on the display, such as "0" → "1" → "2" → ... → "11" when paying out (awarding) 11 gaming media. For example, the time required to update the value by "1" is designed to be an average of 50 ms. Also, the time required to pay out one gaming medium from the hopper is designed to be an average of 50 ms.

When designed in this way, the notification state related to the limit of play will become the activation notice state, for example, within 50 ms after the process of updating the information displayed on the display is completed, or after the process of dispensing gaming media from the hopper is completed. In other words, the advance notification image is configured to be displayed within 50 ms after the process of updating the information displayed on the display is completed, or after the process of dispensing gaming media from the hopper is completed.

Note that 50 ms is an example and is not limited to 50 ms. In other words, it is sufficient that the following formula is satisfied:
The time required to award one gaming medium > the time from the completion of awarding the gaming medium to the display of the advance notification image

By configuring it in this way, the advance notification image is displayed immediately after the payment of game media is completed, allowing the player to recognize that the payment of game media for that game has been completed. The player can also recognize that the game will soon come to an end.

Note that the timing at which the difference in the gaming media related to the limit becomes equal to or greater than the first difference and the notification state related to the limit becomes the activation notification state is after the granting of gaming media for the game in which the difference in the gaming media related to the limit becomes the first difference (processing corresponding to the determined number of gaming media to be paid out) has been completed, but it may also be before the granting of gaming media for the game in which the difference in the gaming media related to the limit becomes the first difference (processing corresponding to the determined number of gaming media to be paid out) has been completed.

For example, the timing at which the notification state related to the limit becomes the activation notice state may be before the start of the granting of game media for a game in which the difference in the number of game media related to the limit becomes the first difference number, or at the start of the granting of game media for a game in which the difference in the number of game media related to the limit becomes the first difference number, or during the granting of game media for a game in which the difference in the number of game media related to the limit becomes the first difference number.

In addition, even in AT mode, the difference in the number of gaming media related to the stoppage may be small if, for example, a minor role such as a push order role is won through an internal lottery, and even though the player is notified of an advantageous stop switch operation mode, the player operates the stop switch in a manner that does not comply with the notification.

During play during the period shown in Figure 78 (3), for example, an image such as that shown in Figure 76 (1) is displayed on the display device 32. The characteristics of the image displayed during play during the period shown in Figure 78 (3) are as described in Figure 76 (1).

During the game standby period (also called the demo effect) in the period shown in Figure 78 (3), an image such as that shown in Figure 76 (2) is displayed on the display device 32. The characteristics of the demo effect during the period shown in Figure 78 (3) are as explained in Figure 76 (2). Note that, as explained in the explanation of Figure 76 (2), the advance notification image does not have to be displayed when the demo effect is being performed.

In menu mode during the period shown in Figure 78 (3), for example, an image such as that shown in Figure 76 (3) is displayed on the display device 32. The characteristics of the image (menu image) in menu mode during the period shown in Figure 78 (3) are as explained in Figure 76 (3). Note that, as explained in the explanation of Figure 76 (3), in menu mode, the advance notification image does not have to be displayed.

Note that during the period shown in Figure 78 (3), if a specific error (for example, some or all of the recoverable errors) occurs and the display device 32 notifies the user that a specific error has occurred, the advance notification image may not be displayed.

For example, if the front door is opened while an image like that shown in Figure 76 (1) is displayed on the display device 32, a door open error will occur, and the advance warning image will not be displayed (will not be visible), but instead a warning image indicating that the front door is open will be displayed. After that, after the front door is closed and the door open error is cleared, an image like that shown in Figure 76 (1) will be displayed on the display device 32 again.

Note that while the explanation has been given using a door open error as the specified error, it is not limited to door open errors. As mentioned above, the same behavior can be applied to some or all recoverable errors.

By configuring it in this way, the gaming store staff can pay attention to the content of the error notification and quickly resolve the error that has occurred.

On the other hand, during the period shown in Figure 78 (3), when a specified error (for example, some or all of the recoverable errors) occurs and the display device 32 notifies the user that a specified error has occurred, the system may also be configured to display a pre-notification image.

For example, if the front door is opened while an image like that shown in Figure 76 (1) is displayed on the display device 32, a door open error occurs, and a pre-alarm image and an alarm image indicating that the front door is open are displayed. After that, after the front door is closed and the door open error is cleared, an image like that shown in Figure 76 (1) is displayed again on the display device 32.

Note that while the explanation has been given using a door open error as the specified error, it is not limited to door open errors. As mentioned above, the same behavior can be applied to some or all recoverable errors.

By configuring it in this way, the gaming store staff can not only be notified of the error that has occurred, but also understand that play will soon be stopped, allowing them to respond quickly if play is stopped.

<<Figure 78 (4)>>
In the AT state, the difference number of game media related to the limit becomes less than the first difference number as the game progresses, and then the difference number of game media related to the limit becomes not less than the second difference number (the difference number is equal to or greater than the second difference number). During this period, the notification state related to the limit is the activation notice state. Therefore, the advance notification image may be displayed on the display device 32.

Note that even in the AT state, the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit may decrease if, for example, a minor role such as a push order role is won through an internal lottery, and the player is notified of a stop switch operation mode that is advantageous to the player, but the player operates the stop switch in a manner that does not comply with the notification. This is also true in the situation in Figure 78 (5) described below, where the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit decreases as the game progresses.

During play during the period shown in Figure 78 (4), for example, an image such as that shown in Figure 76 (1) is displayed on the display device 32. The characteristics of the image displayed during play during the period shown in Figure 78 (4) are as described in Figure 76 (1).

During the game standby period shown in Figure 78 (4) (also called the demo effect), an image such as that shown in Figure 76 (2) is displayed on the display device 32. The characteristics of the demo effect during the period shown in Figure 78 (4) are as explained in Figure 76 (2). Note that, as explained in the explanation of Figure 76 (2), the advance notification image does not have to be displayed when the demo effect is being performed.

In menu mode during the period shown in Figure 78 (4), for example, an image such as that shown in Figure 76 (3) is displayed on the display device 32. The characteristics of the image (menu image) in menu mode during the period shown in Figure 78 (4) are as explained in Figure 76 (3). Note that, as explained in the explanation of Figure 76 (3), in menu mode, the advance notification image does not have to be displayed.

As described above, even if the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit falls below the first difference at which the advance warning image starts to be displayed, the advance warning image is configured to continue to be displayed until the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit reaches the second difference.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of situations in which the advance warning image stops being displayed immediately after the difference number of gaming media exceeds the first difference number and the display of the advance warning image begins. In other words, it is possible to reduce the frequency with which the advance warning image starts and ends, making it less annoying for the player.

It is preferable that the difference between the first difference number and the second difference number be greater than the maximum difference number of gaming media in one game.

Here, the maximum difference in the number of gaming media in one game is the value obtained by subtracting the number of bets from the maximum number of awards (payouts) on that gaming machine. For example, if a gaming machine can pay out 15 coins for a bet of 3 coins, the maximum difference in the number of gaming media in one game is 12, which is 15 minus 3.

By configuring it in this way, for example, if the difference between the gaming media related to the final round is the first difference and a minor role that will give the maximum number of awards is won through an internal lottery, but the player's operation of the stop switch prevents the predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the minor role that will give the maximum number of awards from being stopped and displayed, the advance notification image can continue to be displayed because the result of one game will not cause the difference to fall below the second difference.

Furthermore, it is more preferable that the difference between the first difference number and the second difference number be greater than 1 time and less than 20 times the maximum difference number of gaming media in a single game.

In this embodiment, the first difference number is 18,900 and the second difference number is 18,850. However, the first difference number and the second difference number are not limited to these values and can be designed as appropriate.

By configuring it in this way, for example, if the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit is the first difference, and a minor role that gives the maximum number of awards is won through an internal lottery over multiple plays (for example, approximately 20 plays), but the player is unable to stop and display the predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the minor role that gives the maximum number of awards by operating the stop switch, the difference between the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit and the difference in the number of gaming media until the limit is reached will be too large, so the advance notification image can be temporarily not displayed.

Note that during the period shown in Figure 78 (4), if a specific error (for example, some or all of the recoverable errors) occurs and the display device 32 notifies the user that a specific error has occurred, the advance notification image may not be displayed.

For example, if the front door is opened in a situation like that shown in Figure 76 (1) (a situation in which an advance warning image is displayed on the display device 32), a door open error will occur, and the advance warning image will not be displayed (will not be visible), but instead a warning image indicating that the front door is open will be displayed on the display device 32. After that, after the front door is closed and the door open error is cleared, the situation will again be like that shown in Figure 76 (1) (a situation in which an advance warning image is displayed on the display device 32).

Note that while the explanation has been given using a door open error as the specified error, it is not limited to door open errors. As mentioned above, the same behavior can be applied to some or all recoverable errors.

By configuring it in this way, the gaming store staff can pay attention to the content of the error notification and quickly resolve the error that has occurred.

On the other hand, during the period shown in Figure 78 (4), when a specified error (for example, some or all of the recoverable errors) occurs and the display device 32 notifies the user that a specified error has occurred, the display device 32 may also be configured to display a pre-notification image.

For example, if the front door is opened in a situation like that shown in Figure 76 (1) (a situation in which an advance warning image is displayed on the display device 32), a door open error occurs, and the advance warning image and a warning image indicating that the front door is open are displayed on the display device 32. After that, after the front door is closed and the door open error is cleared, the situation like that shown in Figure 76 (1) (a situation in which an advance warning image is displayed on the display device 32) occurs again.

Note that while the explanation has been given using a door open error as the specified error, it is not limited to door open errors. As mentioned above, the same behavior can be applied to some or all recoverable errors.

By configuring it in this way, the gaming store staff can not only be notified of the error that has occurred, but also understand that play will soon be stopped, allowing them to respond quickly if play is stopped.

<<Figure 78 (5)>>
The pre-notification image is not displayed on the display device 32.

During play during the period shown in Figure 78 (5), for example, an image such as that shown in Figure 75 (1) is displayed on the display device 32.

During the game standby period (demo screen) shown in Figure 78 (5), an image such as that shown in Figure 75 (2) is displayed on the display device 32.

In the menu mode during the period shown in FIG. 78(5), for example, an image such as that shown in FIG. 75(3) is displayed on the display device 32.
<<Figure 78 (6)>>
In the AT state, the difference number of game media related to the limit increases as the game progresses, and this is the period from when the difference number is equal to or greater than the second difference number until when the difference number is less than the first difference number. During this period, the notification state related to the limit is the normal state. Therefore, the advance notification image is not displayed on the display device 32.

During play during the period shown in Figure 78 (6), for example, an image such as that shown in Figure 75 (1) is displayed on the display device 32.

During the game standby period (demo screen) shown in Figure 78 (6), an image such as that shown in Figure 75 (2) is displayed on the display device 32.

In menu mode during the period shown in Figure 78 (6), for example, an image such as that shown in Figure 75 (3) is displayed on the display device 32.

<<Figure 78 (7)>>
This is a period during which the difference number of game media related to the limit becomes equal to or greater than the first difference number as the game progresses, and is less than the difference number of game media related to the limit state. During this period, the notification state related to the limit is the activation notice state. Therefore, the advance notification image is displayed on the display device 32.

During play during the period shown in Figure 78 (7), for example, an image such as that shown in Figure 76 (1) is displayed on the display device 32. The characteristics of the image displayed during play during the period shown in Figure 78 (7) are as described in Figure 76 (1).

During the game standby period (also called the demo effect) in the period shown in Figure 78 (7), an image such as that shown in Figure 76 (2) is displayed on the display device 32. The characteristics of the demo effect during the period shown in Figure 78 (7) are as explained in Figure 76 (2). Note that, as explained in the explanation of Figure 76 (2), the advance notification image does not have to be displayed when the demo effect is being performed.

In menu mode during the period shown in Figure 78 (7), for example, an image such as that shown in Figure 76 (3) is displayed on the display device 32. The characteristics of the image (menu image) in menu mode during the period shown in Figure 78 (7) are as explained in Figure 76 (3). Note that, as explained in the explanation of Figure 76 (3), in menu mode, the advance notification image does not have to be displayed.

Note that during the period shown in Figure 78 (7), when a specified error (for example, some or all of the recoverable errors) occurs and the display device 32 notifies the user that the specified error has occurred, the advance notification image may be configured not to be displayed on the display device 32.

For example, if the front door is opened in a situation like that shown in Figure 76 (1) (a situation in which an advance warning image is displayed on the display device 32), a door open error will occur, and the advance warning image will not be displayed (will not be visible), but instead a warning image indicating that the front door is open will be displayed on the display device 32. After that, after the front door is closed and the door open error is cleared, the situation will again be like that shown in Figure 76 (1) (a situation in which an advance warning image is displayed on the display device 32).

Note that while the explanation has been given using a door open error as the specified error, it is not limited to door open errors. As mentioned above, the same behavior can be applied to some or all recoverable errors.

By configuring it in this way, the gaming store staff can pay attention to the content of the error notification and quickly resolve the error that has occurred.

On the other hand, during the period shown in Figure 78 (7), when a specific error (for example, some or all of the recoverable errors) occurs and the display device 32 notifies the user that a specific error has occurred, the system may also be configured to display a pre-notification image.

For example, if the front door is opened in a situation like that shown in Figure 76 (1) (a situation in which an advance warning image is displayed on the display device 32), a door open error occurs, and the advance warning image and a warning image indicating that the front door is open are displayed on the display device 32. After that, after the front door is closed and the door open error is cleared, the situation like that shown in Figure 76 (1) (a situation in which an advance warning image is displayed on the display device 32) occurs again.

Note that while the explanation has been given using a door open error as the specified error, it is not limited to door open errors. As mentioned above, the same behavior can be applied to some or all recoverable errors.

By configuring it in this way, the gaming store staff can not only be notified of the error that has occurred, but also understand that play will soon be stopped, allowing them to respond quickly if play is stopped.

In other words, as explained in Figure 78 (4), if the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit becomes equal to or greater than the first difference, but then becomes less than the first difference, and the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit becomes equal to or greater than the second difference, the advance notification image can be displayed.

On the other hand, as explained in Figure 78 (6), the advance notification image is not displayed during the period when the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit is equal to or greater than the second difference but less than the first difference. However, as explained in Figure 78 (7), the advance notification image can be displayed if the difference again becomes equal to or greater than the first difference.

By configuring it in this way, the condition for starting to display an advance warning image when it is not currently being displayed can be set to when the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit exceeds the first difference, thereby reducing the burden on the control processing of the sub-control means.

In this embodiment, the first difference number is 18,900 and the second difference number is 18,850 (different values), but the first difference number and the second difference number may be the same value. In other words, the difference number of gaming media related to the limit at which the display of the advance warning image begins and the difference number of gaming media related to the limit at which the display of the advance warning image ends may be the same value.

In other words, if the first difference number = second difference number = 18,900, the advance notification image will be displayed in a game (a certain game) where the difference number of gaming media related to the limit is 18,901. However, if the difference number of gaming media for a certain game is -3, after the certain game ends, the difference number of gaming media related to the limit will be 18,898, and the advance notification image will no longer be displayed. In other words, the advance notification image will not be displayed in the next game of a certain game.

<Difference in number of gaming media related to limiting in bonus game state and temporary limiting flag>
FIG. 79 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit in the bonus game state and the temporary limit flag.

The temporary limit flag is as described above. To briefly explain the characteristics of the temporary limit flag, in a gaming machine equipped with a bonus (at least one of Type 1 BB, Type 2 BB, or RB), if the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit during the bonus game state exceeds 19,000, the temporary limit flag is turned on (a predetermined value is stored in the temporary limit flag storage area).

When the temporary limit flag is on, play can continue until the bonus game state ends, and when the bonus game state ends, the limit flag is turned on based on the temporary limit flag (a predetermined value is stored in the limit flag memory area).

Also, after the stop flag is turned on, the stop state will be entered based on the stop flag being turned on.

In this embodiment, for simplicity's sake, the situation in which a predetermined value is not stored in the temporary limit flag area is referred to as the temporary limit flag being off, and the situation in which a predetermined value is stored in the temporary limit flag area is referred to as the temporary limit flag being on.

Similarly, in this embodiment, to simplify the explanation, a situation in which a predetermined value is not stored in the stop flag area is referred to as the stop flag being off, and a situation in which a predetermined value is stored in the temporary stop flag area is referred to as the stop flag being on.

Refer back to Figure 79 for explanation.

First, we will explain an example in which the power was not interrupted during the bonus game mode (the power remained on).

<<If the power does not go out during the bonus game mode>>
First, the timing corresponding to (1) is a game in which a symbol combination corresponding to a bonus is stopped and displayed. In other words, a bonus game starts from the next game after the game of (1).

As a result of the game (1), the difference in the number of gaming media that will be capped is less than 19,000. For example, let's say the difference in the number of gaming media that will be capped is 18,990.

Furthermore, as a result of the game (1), the temporary stop flag is off (remains off).

Next, the timing corresponding to (2) is during the bonus game state (not the game where the bonus game state ends) and when the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit exceeds 19,000. For example, let's say the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit is 19,001.

As a result of the game (2), the difference in the number of gaming media subject to capping exceeds 19,000.

Furthermore, as a result of the game (2), the temporary stop flag is turned on (updated from off to on).

Next, the timing corresponding to (3) is the game in which the bonus game state ends. In other words, it is the game in which the conditions for ending the bonus game state (for example, the number of gaming media awarded in the bonus game state exceeds 200) are met.

In game (3), the difference in the number of gaming media that will be capped does not exceed 19,000. For example, the difference in the number of gaming media that will be capped is 18,991.

In addition, in game (3), the temporary stop flag is on (maintaining the information that was on in game (2)).

In other words, once the game (3) is completed (after the payout process for the gaming media is completed), the game will be stopped.

As described above, if the difference in the number of gaming media related to the capping exceeds 19,000 even once during a bonus gaming state, the state will be capped after the game that ends the bonus gaming state is completed (after the payout process for the gaming media is completed). At this time, it is not determined whether the difference in the number of gaming media related to the capping exceeds 19,000 in the game that ends the bonus gaming state.

In other words, regardless of whether the difference in the number of gaming media related to the cap is 19,000 in a game in which the bonus game state ends, if the difference in the number of gaming media related to the cap exceeds 19,000 even once in the bonus game state, the system will be configured to cap the game after the game in which the bonus game state ends is completed.

By configuring it in this way, if the difference in the number of gaming media related to the halt exceeds 19,000 even once during the bonus game state, there is no need to determine again after the bonus ends whether the difference in the number of gaming media related to the halt has exceeded 19,000, thereby shortening the processing time until the halt state is reached.

In addition, for gaming machines that automatically settle the number of credits when a game reaches a limit (including immediately before, when, and immediately after a game reaches a limit), automatic settlement will not be performed after the end of game (2), but will be performed after the end of game (3).

Next, we will explain what happens if a power outage occurs while the bonus game mode is in progress.

<<If a power outage occurs during the bonus (pattern 1)>>
When a power outage occurs during a bonus (pattern 1), this occurs during play between (1) and (2) in Figure 79, and then power is restored and the bonus game continues from where it left off.

First, the timing corresponding to (1) is the game in which the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus is displayed. In other words, the bonus game state begins from the next game after the game of (1).

As a result of the game (1), the difference in the number of gaming media that will be capped is less than 19,000. For example, let's say the difference in the number of gaming media that will be capped is 18,990.

Furthermore, as a result of the game (1), the temporary stop flag is off (remains off).

Next, a power outage occurs during the bonus game state. Note that a power outage here refers to a power outage event occurring (for example, the power switch being turned off) and power outage processing (also referred to as power outage processing) being executed.

Furthermore, the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit when a power outage occurs is assumed to be less than 19,000. For example, the value of the limit difference counter is assumed to be 18,998. In other words, a power outage occurs when the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit is 18,998.

Furthermore, the temporary limit flag is assumed to be off when a power outage occurs. In other words, after the power is turned on, there will be no games in which the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit exceeds 19,000.

Then, by turning the power on without changing the settings (for example, by turning the power on with the setting key switch off), the bonus game state will resume from where it left off. For example, if a power outage occurs after the first game has finished since the bonus game state began, and then the power is turned on without changing the settings, the bonus game state can be resumed from the second game.

However, if the power is turned on without changing the settings, the bonus game state will resume from where it left off after the stop difference counter is reset to its initial value (e.g., 0). In other words, the bonus game state will resume from where it left off when the difference in the gaming media related to the stop is 0.

In other words, if a power outage does not occur during the bonus game state (between (1) and (2) in Figure 79), the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit will exceed 19,000 as a result of game (2), the temporary limit flag will be turned on, and the game will enter a limit state after the bonus game state ends. However, if a power outage occurs during the bonus game state (between (1) and (2) in Figure 79), the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit will not exceed 19,000 as a result of game (2) (for example, the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit will be 3), the temporary limit flag will be turned off (remains off), and the game will not enter a limit state after the bonus game state ends.

By configuring it in this way, when the power is turned on without changing the settings, the initial value can be uniformly stored in the stop difference counter when the power is turned on (power-on processing) without having to determine whether or not the bonus game state is active, simplifying processing.

Furthermore, by configuring it in this way, the initial value is stored in the play stop difference counter (the difference in the number of gaming media related to the play stop is 0), which can prevent problems between players and gaming facility staff who mistakenly believe that the play stop state is due to a power outage.

<<If a power outage occurs during the bonus (pattern 2)>>
If a power outage occurs during a bonus (pattern 2), the power outage occurs during play between (2) and (3) in Figure 79, and then the power is restored and the bonus game continues from where it left off.

First, the timing corresponding to (1) is the game in which the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus is displayed. In other words, the bonus game state begins from the next game after the game of (1).

As a result of the game (1), the difference in the number of gaming media that will be capped is less than 19,000. For example, let's say the difference in the number of gaming media that will be capped is 18,990.

Furthermore, as a result of the game (1), the temporary stop flag is off (remains off).

Next, the timing corresponding to (2) is during the bonus game state (not the game where the bonus game state ends) and when the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit exceeds 19,000. For example, let's say the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit is 19,001.

As a result of the game (2), the difference in the number of gaming media subject to capping exceeds 19,000.

Furthermore, as a result of the game (2), the temporary stop flag is turned on (updated from off to on).

Next, a power outage occurs during the bonus game state. Note that a power outage here refers to a power outage event occurring (for example, the power switch being turned off) and power-off processing being executed.

Furthermore, assume that the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit when the power outage occurs does not exceed 19,000. For example, assume that the power outage occurs when the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit is 18,999.

Note that the temporary termination flag is on when a power outage occurs.

Then, by turning the power on without changing the settings (for example, by turning the power on with the setting key switch off), the bonus game state will resume from where it left off. For example, if a power outage occurs after the third game has finished since the start of the bonus game state, and the power is then turned on without changing the settings, the bonus game state can be resumed from the fourth game.

However, if the power is turned on without changing the settings, the value of the stop difference counter will be reset to its initial value (e.g., 0), and the bonus game state will resume from where it left off. In other words, the bonus game state will resume from where it left off when the difference in the gaming media related to the stop is 0.

On the other hand, if the power is turned on without any setting changes, the temporary stop flag will remain on. In other words, if the power is turned on without any setting changes, the temporary stop flag will not be cleared.

Therefore, if a power outage occurs during the bonus game state (between (2) and (3) in Figure 79), even if the stop difference counter returns to its initial value, the temporary stop flag will remain on (remain on), and the game can be stopped after the bonus game state ends.

Note that while it has been assumed that the difference in the number of gaming media that will be capped when a power outage occurs does not exceed 19,000, the same applies when the difference in the number of gaming media that will be capped when a power outage occurs exceeds 19,000. For example, even if a power outage occurs when the difference in the number of gaming media that will be capped is 19,005, the game can be capped after the end of play that meets the conditions to end the bonus game state.

In other words, if the conditions for a halt state are met once during the bonus game state (if the difference in the number of gaming media related to the halt state exceeds 19,000), the bonus game state can continue to be executed even if a power outage occurs and the power is then turned on without changing the settings, and the halt state can be entered after the end of the game when the conditions for ending the bonus game state are met.

In other words, once the conditions for a stop state are met during the bonus game state (when the difference in the number of gaming media related to the stop state exceeds 19,000), the stop state can be entered regardless of the value of the stop difference counter (the stop state can be entered using the temporary stop flag).

By configuring it in this way, we provide a gaming machine that cannot increase gambling interest by shutting off the power.

As mentioned above, Figure 79 has been used to explain the difference in the number of gaming media related to the stoppage in the bonus gaming state and the temporary stoppage flag, but a similar configuration may also be used in specific states other than the bonus gaming state, such as the AT state.

It may also be configured as follows:

(1) If a power outage occurs during bonus game play and the power is subsequently turned on without changing the settings, the stop difference counter does not need to be set to its initial value. On the other hand, in a predetermined game state other than the bonus game state (for example, a bonus internal state (a state in which bonus winning information is carried over)), the stop difference counter is set to its initial value.

In other words, the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit may be configured to be maintained during the bonus game state.

For example, if a power outage occurs when the difference in the gaming media related to the stoppage at the end of a certain game in the bonus game state is 18,900 (e.g., the value of the stoppage difference counter is 18,900), and the power is then turned on without changing the settings, game play in the bonus game state will be possible from the state of 18,900 (e.g., the value of the stoppage difference counter is 18,900).

By configuring it in this way, even if a power outage occurs during the bonus game state, if the power is turned on without changing the settings, the bonus game state can be resumed with the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit maintained, thereby providing a gaming machine that does not significantly increase the player's gambling tendencies.

(2) If the difference in the number of gaming media related to the termination during the bonus game state exceeds 19,000, the termination state may be established after the end of that game (after the payout process has ended).

In other words, if the difference in the number of gaming media related to termination exceeds 19,000 during the bonus gaming state, the termination may be applied even before the bonus gaming state ends.

For example, when a certain game in the bonus game state ends and the difference in the number of gaming media related to the stop is 18,999 (e.g., the value of the stop difference counter is 18,999), if the difference in the number of gaming media in the next game of the certain game (a game in the bonus game state) becomes 3 (e.g., the number of bets is 3 and the number of payouts is 6), the game will be stopped after the next game of the certain game ends.

Note that if configured in this way, the temporary stop flag does not need to be provided.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not significantly increase the player's tendency to gamble.

Furthermore, by configuring it in this way, the RWM capacity of the main control means can be reduced compared to when a temporary stop flag is provided.

Furthermore, by configuring it in this way, there is no need to determine whether the current gaming state is a bonus gaming state, which reduces the program capacity of the main control means.

<Pre-notification image in bonus game state>
Next, with reference to FIG. 80, the advance notification image displayed on the display device 32 in the bonus game state will be described.

In this explanation, we will omit the same points as in Figure 76 (1) and focus on the distinctive points.

<<When notifying the number of coins remaining until the complete function is activated on the game screen in bonus game mode>>
FIG. 80(1) is an example of a game screen in the bonus game state in which the number of coins remaining until the complete function is activated is notified.

Note that Figure 80 (1) is an example of a presentation when the temporary limit flag described above is off. In other words, it is an example of a presentation displayed on the display device 32 when, during a bonus game state, the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit never exceeds 19,000 (the game before the game shown as (2) in Figure 79).

The display device 32 displays PAYOUT, CREDIT, and Total, similar to Figure 76 (1). Note that Total may be the sum of the number of wins in the AT state and the number of wins in the bonus game state, or Total may display the number of wins in the bonus game state without taking into account the number of wins in the AT state.

An image (effect) corresponding to the bonus game state is displayed in the center of the display device 32.

A pre-notification image similar to that shown in Figure 76 (1) is displayed on the upper side of the display device 32. The pre-notification image shown in Figure 80 (1) is an example of when the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit is increased by +10 and the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit reaches 19,000.

For this reason, the advance notification image displays "10 frames remaining until the complete function is activated."

By configuring it in this way, players can recognize the difference in the number of gaming media remaining until the game is stopped, even during bonus play.

Note that the notification state regarding the end of play when Figure 80 (1) is displayed corresponds to the activation notice state. Therefore, when the sub-switch 20 is operated, the same state as Figure 76 (3) will occur. The characteristics of Figure 76 (3) are the same as those explained for Figure 76 (3), so explanation will be omitted. Note that the menu screen may be configured not to be displayed even if the sub-switch 20 is operated during a bonus.

Similarly, if a demo screen is displayed during a bonus, the format will be similar to that shown in Figure 76 (2). The features of Figure 76 (2) are the same as those explained for Figure 76 (2), so explanation will be omitted. Note that the demo screen may also be configured not to be displayed during a bonus.

<<Notifying that the complete function will be activated on the game screen in bonus game mode>>
FIG. 80(2) is an example of notifying that the difference in the number of gaming media related to the termination has exceeded 19,000 during the bonus game state.

In other words, this is an example of a presentation that is displayed on the display device 32 from when the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit exceeds 19,000 during the bonus game state (a predetermined timing after the end of the game, which is (2) in Figure 79), until the bonus game state ends.

For example, if the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit becomes 19001, the image display of Figure 80 (2) will begin at a predetermined timing after the temporary limit flag is turned on.

In this explanation, we will omit the same points as in Figure 80 (1) and focus on the distinctive points.

In Figure 80 (1), the advance notification image displays "10 coins remaining until the complete function is activated," while in Figure 80 (2), the advance notification image displays "Waiting for the complete function to be activated. The complete function will be activated when the bonus ends."

In other words, in Figure 80 (1), a notification is given that allows the player to recognize the difference between the difference in the number of gaming media required for the limit and the difference in the number of gaming media required for the limit state, whereas in Figure 80 (2), a notification is given that allows the player to recognize that the limit state will occur when the bonus game state ends.

By configuring it in this way, if the difference in the number of gaming media related to the termination during the bonus game state exceeds 19,000, it is possible to notify the player in advance of the timing at which the termination state will occur. This allows the player to play in the bonus game state with peace of mind.

Note that the notification state regarding the end of play when Figure 80 (2) is displayed corresponds to the activation notice state. Therefore, when the sub-switch 20 is operated, the same state as Figure 76 (3) will occur. The characteristics of Figure 76 (3) are the same as those explained for Figure 76 (3), so explanation will be omitted. Note that the menu screen may be configured not to be displayed even if the sub-switch 20 is operated during a bonus.

Similarly, if a demo screen is displayed during a bonus, the format will be similar to that shown in Figure 76 (2). The features of Figure 76 (2) are the same as those explained for Figure 76 (2), so explanation will be omitted. Note that the demo screen may also be configured not to be displayed during a bonus.

In addition, the notification state regarding the end of the bonus game state after the end of the bonus game state will be the end-of-game activation notification state.

For this reason, after the bonus game state ends, one of the images in Figure 77 (1), Figure 77 (2), Figure 77 (3), or Figure 77 (4) will be displayed. In other words, the image that notifies the capped state when the difference in the number of gaming media related to the capped state exceeds 19,000 during the bonus game state and the image that notifies the capped state when the difference in the number of gaming media related to the capped state exceeds 19,000 in other states (for example, the AT state) are configured to be the same image.

Note that the features of Figures 77(1), 77(2), 77(3), and 77(4) are the same as those explained for Figures 77(1), 77(2), 77(3), and 77(4), and therefore will be omitted here.

Furthermore, if the sub switch 20 is operated during the pause state, the same behavior as in Figure 77 (6) will occur. The features of Figure 77 (6) are the same as those explained for Figure 77 (6), so explanation will be omitted. Note that the sub switch 20 may be configured to be inoperable (the menu screen will not be displayed) during the pause state.

Similarly, if the specifications are such that a demo screen is displayed during a pause, the format will be similar to that shown in Figure 77 (5). The features of Figure 77 (5) are the same as those explained for Figure 77 (5), so explanation will be omitted. Note that the demo screen may also be configured not to be displayed during a pause.

<When power-off processing is executed in a game where the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit exceeds 19,000>
Figures 81, 82, 83, 84, and 85 each illustrate, using examples, the control processing that corresponds to the timing at which power-off processing (also referred to as power-off processing) is executed in a game in which the notification state regarding the end of play is in the activation notice state before the start of the game (before the specified number of bets is made and the start switch is operated), and in which the difference in the number of game media related to the end of play exceeds 19,000 as a result of playing the game.

Figures 81, 82, 83, 84, and 85 correspond to, for example, a predetermined gaming state that is not a bonus state, and where the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit before the start of the game (before the specified number of bets is made and the start switch is operated) is 18,999. Also, in this game, the number of bets is 3, a minor role in the push order role is won as a result of the internal lottery, the stop switch is operated in the correct push order, and a symbol combination with 11 awarded gaming media is displayed as a stop. Note that the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit, the result of the internal lottery, and the number of awarded gaming media are merely examples and are not limited to these.

Furthermore, the occurrence of a power outage in Figures 81, 82, 83, 84, and 85 refers to an event that causes the power to the gaming machine to be turned off (power outage), such as the power switch being turned off, the power being unplugged, or the power to the gaming facility going out.

Furthermore, the power interruption processing in Figures 81, 82, 83, 84, and 85 refers to the main control means detecting a power interruption and then executing power interruption processing. For example, the time required from the occurrence of a power interruption to power interruption processing is designed to take an average of 1 ms to 20 ms. Furthermore, the power interruption processing is designed to be completed in an average of 0.5 ms.

Furthermore, power-on in Figures 81, 82, 83, 84, and 85 refers to the occurrence of an event that turns the gaming machine's power on (power restoration), such as turning on the power switch, plugging an unplugged power supply back into the outlet, or turning on the power to an amusement parlor that has gone down.

Furthermore, the power-on processing in Figures 81, 82, 83, 84, and 85 refers to power-on without changing settings. Specifically, this refers to the processing that is executed when the power switch is turned on while the setting key switch is off.

Furthermore, the payout process in Figures 81, 82, 83, 84, and 85 refers to the period from when the number of gaming media to be awarded is determined to when the processing corresponding to the determined number of gaming media to be awarded is completed.

Note that "processing corresponding to the determined number of gaming media to be paid out" refers to processing that updates the information displayed on the payout number indicator (also called the number of coins won indicator), processing that updates the information displayed on the credit number indicator, processing that updates the information displayed on the indicator that can display the total points (also called the total points indicator), and processing that pays out gaming media from the hopper.

Note that "processing to update the information displayed on the display" refers to the process of sequentially updating the value displayed on the display, such as "0" → "1" → "2" → ... → "11" when paying out (awarding) 11 gaming media. For example, the time required to update the value by "1" is designed to be an average of 50 ms. Also, the time required to pay out one gaming medium from the hopper is designed to be an average of 50 ms.

So, for example, when paying out (awarding) 11 gaming media, the time required for "processing corresponding to the determined number of gaming media to be paid out" is designed to be an average of 550 ms (11 x 50 ms).

As a result, the time required for the payout process corresponds to the time from when the number of gaming media to be awarded is determined to when the processing corresponding to the determined number of gaming media to be awarded is completed.

Furthermore, in the case of an activation notice state as the notification state related to the end of the game in Figures 81, 82, 83, 84, and 85, it is assumed that the device is configured to be able to execute the effects corresponding to the activation notice state described above.

Similarly, in the notification state related to the end of the game in Figures 81, 82, 83, 84, and 85, when the state is normal, it is assumed that the effects corresponding to the normal state described above can be executed.

<<When a power-off process is executed after a payout process for a game in which the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit exceeds 19,000 has been completed>>
81 is a diagram showing an example of a case where a power-off process is executed after the payout process is completed for a game in which the difference in the number of game media related to the limit exceeds 19000. Here, "after the payout process is completed" refers to, for example, a timing after the payout process is completed, when a limit monitoring process is executed and the limit monitoring process is completed, but before the limit state is reached (before a limit notification is issued).

First, before the game begins (before the specified number of bets is made and the start switch is operated), the notification state regarding the end of play is the activation notice state. The difference in the number of gaming media related to the end of play at this time is assumed to be, for example, 18,999. The value stored in the end of play difference counter related to the end of play at this time is assumed to be, for example, 18,999.

Next, a bet of Y (Y is a numerical value) is placed, and as a result of the internal lottery, a predetermined lottery result (a so-called minor prize) is won. The stop switch is then operated in a manner that stops a symbol combination that can award a payout of X (X is a numerical value, satisfying Y<X) gaming media. For example, Y is 3 and X is 11. In other words, the difference in the number of gaming media for that game is 8.

Then, after the final stop switch (for example, the third stop switch) is released, the payout process begins, awarding X gaming media as the number of awards.

A power outage occurs during the payout process to award X gaming media.

After X gaming media have been awarded, power outage processing begins. Note that the limit monitoring processing is assumed to have ended before power outage processing begins. Also, the limit notification status is assumed to be the activated notification status.

After that, when the power is turned on and the power-on processing is executed, the notification state related to the stoppage becomes the operation notification state (remains in the operation notification state). Furthermore, the control by the main control means is controlled so that the stoppage state is entered after the power-on processing is executed.

When power-on processing is executed, the strike-stop difference counter is configured to be set to its initial value (e.g., 0).

As described above, even if a power outage occurs during the dispensing process, if the stop monitoring process has finished before the power outage process begins, the notification state for stoppage after power is turned back on can be the operating notification state.

By configuring it in this way, the notification status regarding game termination after power is restored and the control status of the main control means after power is restored can be made appropriate, reducing problems between players and gaming facility staff.

<<When a power-off process is executed during a payout process for a game in which the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit exceeds 19,000 (1)>>
82 is a diagram showing an example in which a power-off process is executed during the payout process for a game in which the difference in the number of game media related to the limit exceeds 19000. Here, the period during the payout process corresponds to a certain timing from when the number of game media to be awarded is determined until the processing corresponding to the determined number of game media to be awarded is completed.

First, let's explain Figure 82(a).

First, before the game begins (before the specified number of bets is made and the start switch is operated), the notification state regarding the end of play is the activation notice state. The difference in the number of gaming media related to the end of play at this time is assumed to be, for example, 18,999. The value stored in the end of play difference counter related to the end of play at this time is assumed to be, for example, 18,999.

Next, a bet of Y (Y is a numerical value) is placed, and as a result of the internal lottery, a predetermined lottery result (a so-called minor prize) is won. Then, the stop switch is operated in a manner that stops a symbol combination that can award X (X is a numerical value, satisfying Y<X) as the number of gaming media to be awarded. For example, Y is 3 and X is 11. In other words, the difference in the number of gaming media for that game is 8.

Then, after the final stop switch (for example, the third stop switch) is released, the payout process begins, awarding X gaming media as the number of awards.

A power outage occurs during the payout process to award X gaming media.

Furthermore, power outage processing is initiated during the payout process in which X gaming media is awarded. In other words, power outage processing is initiated before the payout process ends.

Then, when the power is turned on and the power-on processing is executed, the notification state related to the halt is the operation advance notification state (it remains in the operation advance notification state). Furthermore, after the power-on processing is executed, control by the main control means resumes from the middle of the payout processing (continuing from the payout processing that was being executed before the power-off processing was executed).

Note that "starting from the middle of the payout process (continuing from the payout process that was being carried out before the power outage process was executed)" means, for example, that if the power outage process is executed between command A and command B (command B is the next command after command A is executed) among the multiple commands that make up the payout process, execution will begin from command B.

In addition, when power-on processing is executed, the value stored in the stop difference counter is configured to be set to its initial value (e.g., 0).

Furthermore, when the payout process is completed and the stop monitoring process is executed, the value stored in the stop difference counter becomes the difference in the number of gaming media for that game. In other words, if the number of bets is Y and the number of payouts is X, a value corresponding to X-Y is stored in the stop difference counter.

As a result, the game will not be stopped after the current game ends. In other words, the next game can be played.

As described above, if a power outage occurs during a payout process and power-off processing occurs during the payout process, the payout process can be resumed from where it left off after the power is turned back on. Furthermore, after the payout process is completed, the next game can be played without entering a stop state. Furthermore, the notification state for stoppage after the payout process is completed can be the normal state, rather than the activation notification state.

This configuration reduces the chance of trouble occurring between players and gaming facility staff compared to gaming machines that experience a power outage during a payout process, and then end up in a stopped state when the power is turned back on. Specifically, it prevents trouble with players who think that a power outage during a payout process has caused the game to end.

Next, we will explain Figure 82(b). Note that explanations of parts that are the same as Figure 82(a) will be omitted.

In Figure 82(a), the notification state regarding termination after the power-on process is executed is the operation preview state, while in Figure 82(b), the notification state regarding termination after the power-on process is executed is the normal state.

In other words, in Figure 82(a), during the payout process that is executed after the power is turned on, a presentation corresponding to the activation notification state is executed, whereas in Figure 82(b), during the payout process that is executed after the power is turned on, a presentation corresponding to the normal state is executed.

By configuring it as shown in Figure 82 (b), the advance notification image is not displayed during the effects executed during the payout process, so after turning on the power, the player can immediately recognize that play will not end, and can continue playing without any doubts.

<<When a power-off process is executed during a payout process for a game in which the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit exceeds 19,000 (2)>>
83 is a diagram showing an example in which a power-off process is executed during the payout process for a game in which the difference in the number of game media related to the limit exceeds 19000. Here, the period during the payout process corresponds to a certain timing from when the number of game media to be awarded is determined until the processing corresponding to the determined number of game media to be awarded is completed.

First, let's explain Figure 83(a).

First, before the game begins (before the specified number of bets is made and the start switch is operated), the notification state regarding the end of play is the activation notice state. The difference in the number of gaming media related to the end of play at this time is assumed to be, for example, 18,999. The value stored in the end of play difference counter related to the end of play at this time is assumed to be, for example, 18,999.

Next, a bet of Y (Y is a numerical value) is placed, and as a result of the internal lottery, a predetermined lottery result (a so-called minor prize) is won. Then, the stop switch is operated in a manner that stops a symbol combination that can award X (X is a numerical value, satisfying Y<X) as the number of gaming media to be awarded. For example, Y is 3 and X is 11. In other words, the difference in the number of gaming media for that game is 8.

Then, a power outage occurs before the final stop switch (for example, the third stop switch) is released. For example, a power outage occurs after the final stop switch is operated, while that final stop switch continues to be operated. In other words, at the time the power outage occurs, the symbol combination that can award X as the number of gaming media to be awarded has stopped. However, the payout process has not yet begun.

After the final stop switch operation is released, the payout process will begin, awarding X gaming media.

In addition, power outage processing begins during the payout process in which X gaming media is awarded. In other words, power outage processing begins before the payout process ends.

Then, when the power is turned on and the power-on processing is executed, the notification state related to the halt is the operation advance notification state (it remains in the operation advance notification state). Furthermore, after the power-on processing is executed, control by the main control means resumes from the middle of the payout processing (continuing from the payout processing that was being executed before the power-off processing was executed).

Note that "starting from the middle of the payout process (continuing from the payout process that was being carried out before the power outage process was executed)" means, for example, that if the power outage process is executed between command A and command B (command B is the next command after command A is executed) among the multiple commands that make up the payout process, execution will begin from command B.

In addition, when power-on processing is executed, the value stored in the stop difference counter is configured to be set to its initial value (e.g., 0).

Furthermore, when the payout process is completed and the stoppage monitoring process is executed, the value stored in the stoppage difference counter will be the difference in the gaming media for that game. In other words, if the number of bets is Y and the number of awards is X, a value corresponding to X-Y will be stored in the stoppage difference counter related to the stoppage.

As a result, the game will not be stopped after the current game ends. In other words, the next game can be played.

As described above, if a power outage occurs while the payout process has not started but a symbol combination that can award X as the number of gaming media to be awarded has stopped, and power outage processing occurs during the payout process, the payout process can be resumed from where it left off after the power is turned back on. Furthermore, after the payout process has ended, the next game can be played without entering a stopped state. Furthermore, the notification state related to the stoppage after the payout process has ended can be the normal state rather than the activated notification state.

This configuration reduces the chance of trouble occurring between players and gaming facility staff compared to gaming machines in which a power outage occurs while the payout process has not yet started, but a symbol combination that can award X gaming media has stopped, and the power is turned off in the middle of the payout process, and then the machine is turned back on, resulting in a stalled state. Specifically, this prevents trouble from occurring between players who think that the stalled state occurred because the power outage occurred before the payout process.

Next, we will explain Figure 83(b). Note that explanations of parts that are the same as Figure 83(a) will be omitted.

In Figure 83(a), the notification state regarding termination after the power-on processing is executed is the operation advance notification state, while in Figure 83(b), the notification state regarding termination after the power-on processing is executed is the normal state.

In other words, in Figure 83(a), during the payout process that is executed after the power is turned on, a presentation corresponding to the operation advance notification state is executed, whereas in Figure 83(b), during the payout process that is executed after the power is turned on, a presentation corresponding to the normal state is executed.

By configuring it as shown in Figure 83(b), the advance notification image is not displayed during the effects executed during the payout process, so after turning on the power, the player can immediately recognize that play will not end, and can continue playing without any doubts.

<<When a power-off process is executed before a payout process for a game in which the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit exceeds 19,000 (1)>>
84 is a diagram showing an example in which power-off processing is executed before the payout processing of a game in which the difference in the number of game media related to the limit exceeds 19000. In FIG. 84, "before the payout processing" refers to a certain timing from when the symbol combination that awards game media stops until when the number of game media to be awarded is determined.

First, let's explain Figure 84(a).

First, before the start of play (before the specified number of bets is made and the start switch is operated), the notification state regarding the end of play is the activation notice state. The difference in the number of gaming media related to the end of play at this time is assumed to be, for example, 18,999. The value stored in the end of play difference counter at this time is assumed to be, for example, 18,999.

Next, a bet of Y (Y is a numerical value) is placed, and as a result of the internal lottery, a predetermined lottery result (a so-called minor prize) is won. Then, the stop switch is operated in a manner that can stop a symbol combination that awards X (X is a numerical value, satisfying Y<X) as the number of gaming media to be awarded. For example, Y is 3 and X is 11. In other words, the difference in the number of gaming media for that game is 8.

Then, a power outage occurs before the final stop switch (for example, the third stop switch) is released. For example, a power outage occurs after the final stop switch is operated, while that final stop switch continues to be operated. In other words, at the time the power outage occurs, the symbol combination that can award X as the number of gaming media to be awarded has stopped.

In addition, power failure processing will begin before the last stop switch is released (while the last stop switch is still being operated).

The final stop switch is released before the power is turned on (while the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off).

Then, the power is turned on, the power-on process is executed, and then the payout process is executed. Furthermore, the notification state regarding the termination of the payout process while it is being executed is the operation notification state (it remains in the operation notification state).

When the power-on process is executed, the value stored in the stop difference counter is configured to be set to its initial value (e.g., 0).

Furthermore, when the payout process is completed and the stop monitoring process is executed, the value stored in the stop difference counter will be the difference in the gaming media for that game. In other words, if the number of bets is Y and the number of awards is X, a value corresponding to X-Y will be stored in the stop difference counter related to the stop.

As a result, the game will not be stopped after the current game ends. In other words, the next game can be played.

As described above, if a power outage occurs while the payout process has not started but a symbol combination that can award X as the number of gaming media to be awarded has stopped, and power outage processing occurs before the payout process, the payout process can be started after the power is turned back on. Furthermore, after the payout process has ended, the next game can be played without entering a stop state. Furthermore, the notification state regarding the stoppage after the payout process has ended can be the normal state, rather than the operation advance notification state.

This configuration reduces the chance of trouble occurring between players and gaming facility staff compared to gaming machines that reach a halt state when a power outage occurs while the payout process has not yet begun but a symbol combination that could award X gaming media has stopped, the power outage process is performed before the payout process begins, and then the power is turned back on after the final stop switch operation is released. Specifically, this prevents trouble from occurring between players who believe that the game has reached a halt because the power outage occurred before the payout process.

Next, we will explain Figure 84(b). Note that explanations of parts that are the same as Figure 84(a) will be omitted.

In Figure 84(a), the notification state regarding termination after the power-on processing is executed is the operation advance notification state, while in Figure 84(b), the notification state regarding termination after the power-on processing is executed is the normal state.

In other words, in Figure 84(a), the payout process executed after power-on executes an effect corresponding to the operation advance notification state, whereas in Figure 84(b), the payout process executed after power-on executes an effect corresponding to the normal state.

By configuring it as shown in Figure 84 (b), the advance notification image is not displayed during the effects executed during the payout process, so after turning on the power, the player can immediately recognize that play will not end, and can continue playing without any doubts.

<<When a power-off process is executed before a payout process for a game in which the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit exceeds 19,000 (2)>>
85 is a diagram showing an example in which power-off processing is executed before the payout processing of a game in which the difference in the number of game media related to the limit exceeds 19000. In FIG. 85, "before the payout processing" refers to a certain timing from when the symbol combination that awards game media stops until when the number of game media to be awarded is determined.

First, let's explain Figure 85(a).

First, before the start of play (before the specified number of bets is made and the start switch is operated), the notification state regarding the end of play is the activation advance notification state. The difference in the number of gaming media related to the end of play at this time is assumed to be, for example, 18,999. The value stored in the end of play difference counter at this time is assumed to be, for example, 18,999.

Next, a bet of Y (Y is a numerical value) is placed, and as a result of the internal lottery, a predetermined lottery result (a so-called minor prize) is won. Then, the stop switch is operated in a manner that can stop a symbol combination that awards X (X is a numerical value, satisfying Y<X) as the number of gaming media to be awarded. For example, Y is 3 and X is 11. In other words, the difference in the number of gaming media for that game is 8.

Then, a power outage occurs before the final stop switch (for example, the third stop switch) is released. For example, a power outage occurs after the final stop switch is operated, while that final stop switch continues to be operated. In other words, at the time the power outage occurs, the symbol combination that can award X as the number of gaming media to be awarded has stopped.

In addition, power failure processing will begin before the last stop switch is released (while the last stop switch is still being operated).

Next, the power is turned on. At this point, the final stop switch is still being operated.

The final stop switch operation is released while the power-on process is in progress.

After the power-on process is executed, the payout process is executed. Furthermore, the notification state regarding the termination of the payout process while it is being executed is the operation advance notification state (it remains in the operation advance notification state).

When the power-on process is executed, the value stored in the stop difference counter is configured to be set to its initial value (e.g., 0).

Furthermore, when the payout process is completed and the stop monitoring process is executed, the value stored in the stop difference counter becomes the difference in the number of gaming media for that game. In other words, if the number of bets is Y and the number of payouts is X, a value corresponding to X-Y is stored in the stop difference counter.

As a result, the game will not be stopped after the current game ends. In other words, the next game can be played.

As described above, if a power outage occurs while the payout process has not started but a symbol combination that can award X as the number of gaming media to be awarded has stopped, and power outage processing occurs before the payout process, the payout process can be started after the power is turned back on. Furthermore, after the payout process has ended, the next game can be played without entering a stop state. Furthermore, the notification state regarding the stoppage after the payout process has ended can be the normal state, rather than the operation advance notification state.

This configuration reduces the chance of trouble occurring between players and gaming facility staff compared to gaming machines in which a power outage occurs when the payout process has not yet started but a symbol combination that can award X gaming media has stopped, the power outage process is carried out before the payout process begins, and the machine is then turned on and the final stop switch operation is released during the power-on process, resulting in a stopped state. Specifically, this prevents trouble from occurring between players who think that the stop state occurred because the power outage occurred before the payout process.

Next, we will explain Figure 85(b). Note that explanations of parts that are the same as Figure 85(a) will be omitted.

In Figure 85(a), the notification state regarding termination after the power-on process is executed is the operation advance notification state, while in Figure 85(b), the notification state regarding termination after the power-on process is executed is the normal state.

In other words, in Figure 85(a), the payout process executed after power-on executes an effect corresponding to the operation advance notification state, whereas in Figure 85(b), the payout process executed after power-on executes an effect corresponding to the normal state.

By configuring it as shown in Figure 85(b), the advance notification image is not displayed during the effects executed during the payout process, so after turning on the power, the player can immediately recognize that play will not end, and can continue playing without any doubts.

<Number of gaming media awarded to a player in a game that has reached a halt>
When a game is executed when the difference in the number of game media related to the limit is X, and the result of adding the difference in the number of game media (A) of the game to the difference in the number of game media related to the limit (X) exceeds the difference in the number of game media (Y) until the limit is reached, the number of game media to be awarded to the player will be explained. In other words, this is a game that satisfies X+A>Y.

In the following, we will use specific numerical values to make the technical details easier to understand.

For example, the difference in the number of gaming media required to reach the limit is 18,999 (corresponding to X in the above formula), the difference in the number of gaming media for the game in question is 8 (corresponding to A in the above formula. Note that the number of bets is 3 and the number of gaming media awarded is 11), and the difference in the number of gaming media required to reach the limit is 19,000 (corresponding to Y in the above formula). Note that these numerical values are examples only and are not limited to these.

<<Pattern 1: End of game after all determined game media have been awarded>>
Pattern 1 is a pattern in which, when the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit is 18,999, three coins are bet and the game is played, a predetermined pattern combination that can award 11 gaming media is displayed in a stopped state, and after 11 gaming media are awarded, the limit state is reached after the game ends.

In other words, in pattern 1, all of the determined number of gaming media to be awarded will be awarded to the player, even if the difference in the number of gaming media until the capping state is reached exceeds 19,000. Then, once the awarding of gaming media has finished, the capping state will be reached.

By configuring it as in Pattern 1, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not put players at an excessive disadvantage by reaching a dead end.

Note that when game media is being dispensed, a pre-notification image is displayed. However, when game media is being dispensed, an operation notification image may be displayed instead of the pre-notification image.

<<<<When a specified error occurs during the dispensing of gaming media in a game that results in a stopped state according to Pattern 1>>>
In pattern 1, if a specified error (e.g., a hopper empty error) occurs before the dispensing of game media exceeds 19,000, which is the difference in the number of game media from the start of the dispensing of game media to the end of the dispensed state (e.g., when the difference in the number of game media related to the end of dispensed state is 18,999), the main control means executes error processing corresponding to the specified error (e.g., processing to display an error code corresponding to the hopper empty error).

When the main control means is executing error processing corresponding to a predetermined error, the sub-control means displays an image corresponding to the predetermined error. Note that when the sub-control means is displaying an image corresponding to a predetermined error, it is not necessary to display a pre-warning image. This configuration allows the sub-control means to notify the user that a predetermined error has occurred without requiring complex control processing.

On the other hand, when the sub-control means is displaying an image corresponding to a specified error, the sub-control means may also display a pre-warning image. By configuring it in this way, the gaming facility staff can understand that the game is approaching a limit-of-play state, and also that a specified error has occurred.

Furthermore, in pattern 1, if a specified error (e.g., a hopper empty error) occurs after more than 19,000 gaming media have been dispensed, which is the difference in the number of gaming media from the start of dispensing until the dispensing state is reached (e.g., the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit is 19,001), the main control means will execute error processing corresponding to the specified error (e.g., processing to display an error code corresponding to the hopper empty error).

When the main control means is executing error processing corresponding to a predetermined error, the sub-control means displays an image corresponding to the predetermined error. Note that when the sub-control means is displaying an image corresponding to a predetermined error, it is not necessary to display a pre-warning image. This configuration allows the sub-control means to notify the user that a predetermined error has occurred without requiring complex control processing.

On the other hand, when the sub-control means is displaying an image corresponding to a specified error, the sub-control means may also display a pre-warning image. By configuring it in this way, the gaming facility staff can know that the game is approaching a limit-of-play state, and also that a specified error has occurred.

In addition, when the sub-control means is displaying an image corresponding to a specified error, the sub-control means may display an operation notification image instead of the advance notification image. By configuring it in this way, the gaming facility staff can understand that play will be stopped and also that a specified error has occurred.

Note that while a hopper empty error has been used as an example of a specified error, the specified error is not limited to a hopper empty error and may be a recoverable error such as a door open error.

<<Pattern 2-1: A state in which a portion of the determined number of gaming media to be awarded is awarded and then the award is stopped>>
Pattern 2-1 is a pattern in which, when the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit is 18,999, three coins are bet and the game is played, a predetermined pattern combination that can award 11 gaming media is displayed in a stopped state, and after five gaming media are awarded, the limit is reached.

In other words, in pattern 2-1, the limit is reached when the number of gaming media reaches 19,001, exceeding the 19,000 difference in the number of gaming media required to reach the limit. In other words, not all of the determined number of gaming media to be awarded has been awarded to the player.

By configuring it as in pattern 2-1, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can make the difference in the number of gaming media until the limit is reached uniform.

When game media is being dispensed, a pre-notification image is displayed. However, when game media is being dispensed, an operation notification image may be displayed instead of the pre-notification image.

<<Pattern 2-2: A state in which a portion of the determined number of gaming media to be awarded is awarded and then the award is stopped>>
Pattern 2-2 is a pattern in which, when the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit is 18,999, three coins are bet and the game is played, a predetermined pattern combination that can award 11 gaming media is displayed in a stopped state, and the limit is reached after four gaming media are awarded.

In other words, in pattern 2-2, the limit is reached when the difference in the number of gaming media until the limit is reached reaches 19,000. In other words, not all of the determined number of gaming media to be awarded has been awarded to the player.

By configuring it as in pattern 2-2, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can make the difference in the number of gaming media until the limit is reached uniform.

When game media is being dispensed, a pre-notification image is displayed. However, when game media is being dispensed, an operation notification image may be displayed instead of the pre-notification image.

<<<<When a specified error occurs during the awarding of gaming media in a game that results in a termination state of Pattern 2-1 or Pattern 2-2>>>
In pattern 2-1 or pattern 2-2, if a specified error (e.g., a hopper empty error) occurs before the dispensing of more than 19,000 game media, which is the difference in the number of game media from the start of the dispensing of game media to the end of the dispensing state (e.g., when the difference in the number of game media related to the end of the dispensing state is 18,999), the main control means executes error processing corresponding to the specified error (e.g., processing to display an error code corresponding to the hopper empty error).

When the main control means is executing error processing corresponding to a predetermined error, the sub-control means displays an image corresponding to the predetermined error. Note that when the sub-control means is displaying an image corresponding to a predetermined error, it is not necessary to display a pre-warning image. This configuration allows the sub-control means to notify the user that a predetermined error has occurred without requiring complex control processing.

On the other hand, when the sub-control means is displaying an image corresponding to a specified error, the sub-control means may also display a pre-warning image. By configuring it in this way, the gaming facility staff can understand that the game is approaching a limit-of-play state, and also that a specified error has occurred.

Note that while a hopper empty error has been used as an example of a specified error, the specified error is not limited to a hopper empty error and may be a recoverable error such as a door open error.

<If a specified error occurs during automatic settlement>
Next, in a gaming machine that executes automatic settlement when a game is stopped, an example of a notification that is given when a predetermined error occurs during automatic settlement will be explained using Figures 86 and 87. Note that, although the explanation will be given using a hopper empty error as an example of the predetermined error, the predetermined error is not limited to a hopper empty error, and may be a recoverable error such as a door open error.

For example, suppose that in a non-bonus state (a specified gaming state), after a game in which the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit has exceeded 19,000 has ended (after the limit monitoring process has ended), the credit number display shows 50. Then, when automatic settlement begins, settlement of the 50 gaming media displayed on the credit number display begins. Specifically, automatic settlement causes the value displayed on the credit number display to be decremented by one, such as 50, 49, 48, ..., 0. Furthermore, as the value displayed on the credit number display is decremented by one, gaming media are returned one by one through the return slot.

If a hopper empty error occurs during this automatic settlement, the main control means will execute error processing (processing to display an error code corresponding to the hopper empty error). For example, suppose a hopper empty error occurs when the credit number display is showing 30 (after 20 gaming media have been automatically settled).

<<If a specified error (hopper empty error) occurs during automatic settlement (1)>>
Figure 86 (1) shows an example in which automatic settlement is performed after the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit exceeds 19,000 (after the limit monitoring process is completed), and a hopper empty error occurs during this automatic settlement.

In Figure 86 (1), the complete function activation notification period is in effect while automatic settlement is in progress. In other words, the notification state related to the termination of automatic settlement during its execution is the activation notification state. In other words, the system is configured to be able to issue notifications corresponding to the activation notification state while automatic settlement is in progress. Note that a notification mode such as that shown in Figure 77 (3) can be considered as a notification mode corresponding to the activation notification state during automatic settlement. In other words, while automatic settlement is in progress, notifications are issued to the effect that the termination state has been reached and that automatic settlement is in progress.

If a hopper empty error occurs while this automatic settlement is being performed (for example, when the credit number display shows 30), the sub-control means can issue a notification in one of three ways: (a), (b), or (c).

(a) The normal hopper empty error (also known as an HE error) screen is displayed. At this time, information (images) related to the complete function cannot be seen.

The specific notification mode for (a) above is shown in Figure 87 (a).

Figure 87 (A) is an image that is also displayed when a hopper empty error occurs in a situation where the game is not at capacity (for example, when the difference in the number of game media related to the capacity is 10).

In other words, the occurrence of a hopper empty error will be reported in the same manner whether it occurs when the hopper is in a stalled state or when the hopper is not in a stalled state.

By configuring it in this way, even if a hopper empty error occurs during a stoppage, the system can notify the user that a hopper empty error has occurred without requiring complex control processing.

(a) The normal hopper empty error (also known as an HE error) screen is displayed. At this time, information (images) related to the complete function are visible.

Figure 87 (a) corresponds to the specific image display mode for (a) above.

Figure 87 (a) consists of an image that is displayed when a hopper empty error occurs in a situation where the machine is not in a full play state (for example, when the difference in the number of game media related to the full play state is 10), and an image indicating that the machine is in a full play state (the image "Complete function in operation, please call an attendant").

In other words, the same image is used when a hopper empty error occurs in a stopped state and when a hopper empty error occurs in a state other than a stopped state. However, when a stopped state occurs, an image indicating that a stopped state has occurred is also displayed.

By configuring it this way, even if a hopper empty error occurs during a game-stopping state, it is possible to notify the player that a hopper empty error has occurred and that the game is now stopped, without requiring complex control processing. This means that gaming store staff will also be able to understand that the game will be stopped after the hopper empty error is cleared, saving the player and gaming store staff the trouble of having to call the gaming store staff again after the error is cleared.

(c) Information (images) related to the complete function are displayed. At this time, information (images) related to the hopper empty error are visible.

A specific image display mode for (c) above is shown in Figure 87 (c).

Figure 87 (c) shows a different image from the image (Figure 87 (a)) that is displayed when a hopper empty error occurs in a situation where the game is not at capacity (for example, when the difference in the number of game media related to the game is 10). It also displays an image indicating that the game is at capacity (an image that reads "Complete function in operation. Please call an attendant").

The image indicating this stalled state may be the image that was displayed before the hopper empty error occurred, or it may be a different image from the image that was displayed before the hopper empty error occurred.

In other words, different images are used when a hopper empty error occurs in a stopped state and when a hopper empty error occurs in a state other than a stopped state. Also, when a stopped state occurs, an image indicating that a stopped state has occurred is also displayed. Note that the image indicating that a stopped state has occurred may be the same as the image in Figure 77 (3) (however, the message "Press PUSH to display the menu screen" in Figure 77 (3) does not need to be displayed).

By configuring it this way, if a hopper empty error occurs during a game-stopping state, it is possible to notify the player that a hopper empty error has occurred and that the game is currently stopped. This means that game store staff can also be made aware that the game will be stopped after the hopper empty error is cleared, saving the player and game store staff the trouble of having to call the game store staff again after the error is cleared.

Furthermore, if the image indicating the stalled state is the image that was displayed before the hopper empty error occurred, the burden on the display process can be reduced, and a notification can be given that a hopper empty error has occurred, as well as a notification that the stalled state has occurred.

As in (i) and (iii) above, if a hopper empty error occurs while automatic settlement is being performed, a notification will be sent to inform you that a hopper empty error has occurred and that the process has been halted.

In the above (a), (b), and (c), after the hopper empty error is cleared, automatic settlement will resume from where it left off. In this case, the same presentation as before the hopper empty error occurs will be executed. In other words, instead of notifying the user that a hopper empty error has occurred, the user will be notified that the game has stopped and that automatic settlement is in progress.

When automatic settlement is complete, a notification that the transaction has been stopped is executed (continued). In other words, the notification that automatic settlement is being executed is terminated.

If power-off processing (also called power-off processing) is executed while automatic settlement is in progress, and then the power is turned on (setting key switch off, power switch on) without changing any settings, automatic settlement will resume from where it left off after power-on processing is executed. In this case, the same effect as before the power-off processing was executed will be executed. In other words, a notification will be issued that automatic settlement is in progress.

After that, if automatic settlement ends, the transaction will be terminated.

In addition, if a hopper empty error occurs during automatic settlement and the main control means is executing error processing (processing to display an error code corresponding to the hopper empty error), power interruption processing (also called power-off processing) is executed, and then power is turned on (setting key switch off, power switch on) without changing settings, error processing (processing to display an error code corresponding to the hopper empty error) will resume after the power-on processing is executed.

After that, after the hopper empty error is cleared, automatic settlement will resume from where it left off. In this case, the same presentation as before the hopper empty error occurs will be executed. In other words, there will be no notification that a hopper empty error has occurred, but rather a notification that automatic settlement is in progress.

After that, if automatic settlement ends, the transaction will be terminated.

In this way, if power-off processing is performed while automatic settlement is in progress, or if a hopper empty error occurs while automatic settlement is in progress and power-off processing is performed while error processing is in progress, if power is turned on without changing settings, the machine is configured to resume operation from where it left off before power-off processing was performed after power-on processing.

In other words, when the power is turned on, the stop difference counter related to the stop is reset to its initial value (e.g., 0), but is configured to enter the stop state.

<<When a specified error (hopper empty error) occurs during automatic settlement (2)>>
Figure 86 (2) shows an example in which automatic settlement is performed after the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit has exceeded 19,000 (after the limit monitoring process has ended), and a hopper empty error occurs during this automatic settlement.

In Figure 86 (2), the complete function activation notification period does not occur while automatic settlement is in progress. In other words, the notification state regarding the termination of automatic settlement during its execution is not an activation notification state. In other words, no notification is given that automatic settlement has been terminated while it is in progress.

When automatic settlement is being performed, for example, a presentation corresponding to the activation notification state as shown in Figure 76 (A) (displaying "XX coins remaining until complete function is activated") may be executed, or a presentation indicating that the game is coming to a halt (displaying "Complete function in preparation") may be executed.

First, when automatic settlement begins, the effects that are displayed when automatic settlement is being performed are executed. If a hopper empty error occurs while this automatic settlement is being performed (partway through), an announcement is made indicating that a hopper empty error has occurred.

As an example of a notification indicating that a hopper empty error has occurred, Figure 87 (A) is displayed on the display device 32. Note that Figure 87 (A) is also an image that is displayed when a hopper empty error occurs in a situation where the game is not at its limit (for example, when the difference in the number of game media related to the limit is 10).

Automatic settlement will resume after the hopper empty error is resolved.

Then, after automatic settlement is complete, the complete function activation notification period begins. In other words, after automatic settlement is complete, the notification state related to the end of payment becomes the activation notification state. In other words, after automatic settlement is complete, it becomes possible to notify that the end of payment has occurred.

If power-off processing (also called power-off processing) is executed while automatic settlement is in progress, and then the power is turned on (setting key switch off, power switch on) without changing any settings, automatic settlement will resume from where it left off after power-on processing is executed (after the stop difference counter is reset to its initial value). In this case, the same presentation as before the power-off processing was executed will be executed. In other words, a notification will be displayed that automatic settlement is in progress.

Then, after automatic settlement is complete, the complete function activation notification period begins. In other words, after automatic settlement is complete, the notification state related to the end of payment becomes the activation notification state. In other words, after automatic settlement is complete, it becomes possible to notify that the end of payment has occurred.

In addition, if a hopper empty error occurs during automatic settlement and the main control means is executing error processing (processing to display an error code corresponding to the hopper empty error), power interruption processing (also called power-off processing) is executed, and then power is turned on (setting key switch off, power switch on) without changing settings, error processing (processing to display an error code corresponding to the hopper empty error) will resume after power-on processing is executed (after the stop difference counter is reset to its initial value).

After that, after the hopper empty error is cleared, automatic settlement will resume from where it left off. In this case, the same effect as before the hopper empty error occurs will be executed. In other words, no notification will be given that a hopper empty error has occurred, and the effect that was used when automatic settlement was being carried out will be executed.

After automatic settlement is complete, the complete function activation notification period begins. In other words, after automatic settlement is complete, the notification state related to the limit changes to the activation notification state. In other words, after automatic settlement is complete, it becomes possible to notify that the limit has been reached.

By configuring it this way, the player is notified that play is over after automatic settlement is complete, preventing them from leaving the game in the middle of automatic settlement, etc.

In Figures 86 (1) and (2), if power interruption processing (also referred to as power interruption processing) is executed while automatic settlement is being performed, and then power is turned on (setting key switch on, power switch on) with a setting change, the device will transition to setting change mode, and if the setting change mode termination conditions are met and the setting change mode is terminated, the device will return to the state before play began (a state in which bets on gaming media are accepted) rather than resuming automatic settlement from where it left off. In other words, automatic settlement can be terminated midway and prevented from coming to a halt. In this case, during the setting change mode and after the setting change mode, it is possible to prevent notifications from being issued indicating that play has been halted or that automatic settlement is in progress.

By configuring it this way, for example, if the end of business hours at an amusement parlor occurs during automatic settlement, the amusement parlor will simultaneously shut off the power supplied to all gaming machines (power down), but will still be able to provide players with gaming media up until the end of business hours. After the end of business hours, an amusement parlor staff member can change the settings to return the situation to before gameplay began without having to retrieve gaming media that were in the middle of automatic settlement from the return slot, thereby facilitating smooth operation of the amusement parlor.

Note that while Figure 58 has been explained as a modified example of Figure 57, it can also be applied to Figures 55 and 56.

For example, processing corresponding to "Temporary stop flag ON?" in FIG. 58 is provided before "Replay activation symbol display?" in FIG. 55, processing corresponding to "Temporary stop flag save" in FIG. 58 is provided after "Difference > 19,000?" in FIG. 55 returns YES, and processing corresponding to "Bonus game state?" in FIG. 58 is provided before "Save stop flag" in FIG. 55. By configuring in this manner, even if the number of gaming media exceeds 19,000 during the bonus game state, with the power-on as the starting point (0), information indicating that the stop condition is met is not stored in the stop flag area until the bonus ends. In other words, if the number of gaming media exceeds 19,000 during the bonus game state, with the power-on as the starting point (0), the stop state can be established after the bonus game state ends.

Similarly, for example, processing corresponding to "Temporary stop flag ON?" in FIG. 58 is provided before "Replay activation symbol display?" in FIG. 56, processing corresponding to "Temporary stop flag save" in FIG. 58 is provided after "Difference number > 19,000?" in FIG. 56 returns YES, and processing corresponding to "Bonus game state?" in FIG. 58 is provided before "Save stop flag" in FIG. 56. By configuring in this manner, even if the number of gaming media exceeds 19,000 during the bonus game state, with the power-on as the starting point (0), information indicating that the stop condition is met is not stored in the stop flag area until the bonus ends. In other words, if the number of gaming media exceeds 19,000 during the bonus game state, with the power-on as the starting point (0), the stop state can be established after the bonus game state ends.

Note that Figure 58 can also be applied to a case where the point at which a player has the lowest number of balls dispensed is set as the base (0), and the game is stopped when the difference in the number of game media from that base exceeds 19,000.

For example, if the point at which the player's ball output is at its lowest during the bonus game state is set as the reference (0), and even if the number of gaming media exceeds 19,000, information indicating that the conditions for stopping the game are met is not stored in the stop flag area until the bonus ends. In other words, if the point at which the player's ball output is at its lowest during the bonus game state is set as the reference (0), and the number of gaming media exceeds 19,000, the game can be stopped after the bonus game state ends.

<End monitoring process (decrement version of end difference counter, end state after bonus game state ends according to end difference counter)>
Figure 59 is a modified example of Figures 57 and 58. Like Figure 58, Figure 59 is identical in that, starting from the time of power-on during the bonus game state (0), if the number of game media exceeds 19,000, the game is stopped after the bonus game state ends. However, unlike Figure 58, it does not have a temporary stop flag storage area.

The "value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media that will cause the game to enter a stop state" is set to 19001. In other words, when the power is turned on from an off state without any settings changes, the initial value stored in the stop difference counter is 19001. Similarly, when the power is turned on from an off state with settings changes, the initial value stored in the stop difference counter is 19001.

The following explanation will focus on the differences from Figure 58.

First, "Is the shot difference counter equal to a specific value?" determines whether the value stored in the shot difference counter is a specific value. For example, if the specific value is set to 0, it determines whether the value stored in the shot difference counter is 0. Note that in Figure 58, the specific value is set to 0, but any value other than 0 can be used as long as it is a predetermined value.

Furthermore, games that result in a YES response to "Is the stop difference counter equal to a specific value?" are games that have occurred during bonus game mode after the number of gaming media has exceeded 19,000, with the power-on time being the starting point (0), and games that have occurred up until the "save stop flag" is executed. Details will be provided later.

"Replay activation symbol display?" is the same as "Replay activation symbol display?" in Figure 58 (Figure 57), so explanation will be omitted.

The "Hit and Stop Difference Counter Set" is the same as the "Hit and Stop Difference Counter Set" in Figure 58 (Figure 57), so explanation will be omitted.

Since "Number of coins inserted < number of coins paid out?" is the same as "Number of coins inserted < number of coins paid out?" in Figure 58 (Figure 57), explanation will be omitted.

Since "Upper limit exceeded?" is the same as "Upper limit exceeded?" in Figure 58 (Figure 57), explanation will be omitted.

The "Upper limit set" is the same as the "Upper limit set" in Figure 58 (Figure 57), so explanation will be omitted.

In "Difference Update," the complement of the result of the calculation in "Exceeds Upper Limit?" (Number of Inserts - Number of Payouts) (the value stored in the A register) is calculated and stored in the A register. The calculated complement (the value stored in the A register) is then subtracted from the HL register. In other words, the calculation is performed by subtracting the "Value stored in the Stop Difference Counter" from the "Value of the Difference in the Number of Gaming Media for the Current Game." If the result of this calculation is below a specific value, the specific value is stored in the HL register.

Note that the complement in "difference update" refers to the smallest number that carries beyond one byte (255). For example, it can be derived using the value of the 0-A register, or by using a single instruction for deriving a complement (NEG instruction).

For example, if the value stored in the bet/stop difference counter (HL register value) is 65534, and the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 10, then the A register will be 249. However, in the "difference update" process, the complement of 249, 7, is first derived. Next, 65534 - 7 is calculated, and 65527 is stored in the HL register. Note that since the result of the calculation of 65534 - 7 is not less than 0 (there is no borrowing), the carry flag is 0.

When there is no borrow (when the carry flag is 0), the value of the HL register is not updated to a specific value (0). In other words, the value of the HL register is the result of the calculation: "the value stored in the play end difference counter" - "the value of the difference in the gaming media for the current game."

For example, if the value stored in the bet/stop difference counter (HL register value) is 2, and the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 10, then the A register will be 249. However, in the "bet/stop difference counter update" process, the complement of 249, 7, is first derived. Next, 2-7 is calculated, and 65531 is stored in the HL register. Note that 2-7 is -5, but since this is less than 0 (due to borrowing), 65531 is stored in the HL register. Also, because there is borrowing, the carry flag is set to 1.

When there is a borrow (when the carry flag is 1), the value of the HL register is updated to a specific value (0). In other words, the value of the HL register becomes a specific value (0).

"Update shot difference counter" is the same as "Update shot difference counter" in Figure 58 (Figure 57), so explanation will be omitted.

"Difference > 19,000?" determines whether the difference in the number of gaming media since power-on (starting point: 0) exceeds 19,000. Specifically, it determines whether the value stored in the stop difference counter is a specific value (0). If the value stored in the stop difference counter is the specific value (0), it determines YES; if the value stored in the stop difference counter is not the specific value (0), it determines NO.

The value stored in the stop difference counter is a specific value (0) when a) the result of the calculation performed by "difference update" (the value stored in the stop difference counter) minus "the value of the difference in the number of gaming media for the current game") falls below the specific value (0), or b) the result of the calculation performed by "difference update" (the value stored in the stop difference counter) minus "the value of the difference in the number of gaming media for the current game") becomes a specific value (0).

Specifically, the above a) corresponds to the case where the difference in the number of gaming media from the start point (0) at power-on is greater than 19001, and the above b) corresponds to the case where the difference in the number of gaming media from the start point (0) at power-on is 19001.

In other words, "Difference > 19,000?" determines whether the difference in the number of gaming media since power-on (starting point: 0) has exceeded 19,000 depending on whether the value stored in the play-stop difference counter is a specific value (0).

Furthermore, by storing 19001 as the initial value when the power is turned on without a setting change or when the power is turned on with a setting change, it is possible to store a value equivalent to -46534 as the difference in gaming media, with the time of power-on being the starting point (0). For example, when the initial value is 19001, a situation in which the value of the play-stop difference counter is 49001 means that the difference in gaming media, with the time of power-on being the starting point (0), is -30000.

As described above, by storing 19001, which is the "value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media at which the game is stopped," as the initial value, whether the difference in the number of gaming media since power-on has exceeded 19,000 can be determined by whether the value of the stop difference counter is "0," thereby reducing program capacity. Furthermore, by storing 19001 as the initial value, it is possible to store values up to the equivalent of -46534 as the difference in the number of gaming media since power-on. While this example shows the storage of 19001 as the initial value, values other than 19001 can also be used as the initial value as long as they have the same effect.

Since "Bonus Game State?" is the same as "Bonus Game State?" in Figure 58, some of the explanation will be omitted. If "Bonus Game State?" is judged as YES, the "Save Stop Flag" is not executed and the stop monitoring process is executed. In other words, if "Bonus Game State?" is judged as YES, a specific value (0) is stored in the stop difference counter, and the next game (game in bonus game state) can be played in a situation where no information indicating that the stop condition has been met is stored in the stop flag storage area.

In other words, when the next game is played while the specific value (0) is stored and the stoppage monitoring process is executed, the first determination in the stoppage monitoring process, "Is the stoppage difference counter equal to the specific value?", will be judged as YES. In other words, if the number of gaming media since the power-on start (0) exceeds 19,000 during the bonus game state and "save stoppage flag" has not been executed, the determination will be made as YES for "Is the stoppage difference counter equal to the specific value?" and a determination will be made as to whether or not the bonus game state is in effect without performing processes such as "update the stoppage difference counter."

Since "Save stop flag" is the same as "Save stop flag" in Figure 58 (Figure 57), explanation will be omitted.

As described above, the limit monitoring process shown in Figure 59 does not require a temporary limit flag storage area (without taking up space in the RWM storage area), and can enter a limit state after the bonus game state ends, even if the number of gaming media since the power-on start point (0) exceeds 19,000 during the bonus game state.

Furthermore, if the number of gaming media, starting from the time the power was turned on (starting point 0), exceeds 19,000 during the bonus game state, the machine can be put into a stop state even if the number of gaming media, starting from the time the power was turned on (starting point 0), is below 19,000 in the game in which the bonus game state ends. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not require players to have any strategy.

In addition, since the stoppage monitoring process shown in Figure 59 does not have a temporary stoppage flag storage area, if a power outage occurs (the power is turned off) during a specified game in the bonus game state after the number of gaming media, starting from the point of power-on (0), exceeds 19,000 and a specific value is stored in the stoppage difference counter, and then the power is turned on without a setting change, the stoppage difference counter will be reset from the specific value to its initial value (the bonus game state will continue), and the game will not be stopped after the bonus game state ends.

In other words, if a power outage occurs during bonus game mode after the number of gaming media, starting from the point of power-on (0), exceeds 19,000, and the power is then turned back on and the bonus game mode resumes, the game will not be stopped. This configuration makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that does not mislead players into thinking that a power outage in the middle of a bonus game caused the game to be stopped.

Note that while Figure 59 has been described as a modified version of Figures 57 and 58, it can also be applied as a modified version of Figure 56.

Specifically, in Figure 59, the initial value is set to 19001, which is the "value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media that will cause the game to stop." However, when applied as the modified example of Figure 56, the initial value is set to "value corresponding to the size of the memory area of the stop difference counter" - "value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media that will cause the game to stop." For example, if the memory area of the stop difference counter is 2 bytes, the "value corresponding to the size of the memory area of the stop difference counter" is 65535, the "value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media that will cause the game to stop" is 19001, and the initial value is 46534.

Also, in Figure 59, the specific value is set to 0, but when applied as a modified example of Figure 56, the specific value is set to 65535.

As described above, the initial values and specific values in Figure 59 can be set to any predetermined values.

Furthermore, while Figure 59 provides an explanation using specific examples, the processing order and content are not limited to this, and it is sufficient if the game can be stopped after the bonus game state ends, even if the number of gaming media since the power-on start time (0) exceeds 19,000 during the bonus game state, without providing a temporary stop flag storage area (without putting pressure on the RWM storage area).

Note that Figure 59 can also be applied to a case where the point at which the player has the lowest number of balls dispensed is set as the base (0), and the game is stopped when the difference in the number of game media from that base exceeds 19,000.

For example, if the point at which a player has the lowest number of balls dispensed during a bonus game state is set as the base (0), and the number of gaming media exceeds 19,000, the game can be stopped after the bonus game state ends. However, if the power is turned off during a bonus game state and then turned on again without changing the settings, the stop difference counter will be reset from a specific value to its initial value (the bonus game state will continue), so the game can be prevented from being stopped after the bonus game state ends.

<Example 1 of the configuration of the bet number display lamp 25 and payout number display>
The configuration of the bet number display lamp 25 applicable to this embodiment will be described.
61 to 63 are diagrams showing an example of the configuration of the bet number indicator lamp 25 and payout number indicator applicable to this embodiment. Note that "payout in progress" in FIGS. 61 to 63 refers to the period from the start to the end of the payout process, and "payout number not displayed" refers to the state in which the payout number indicator is off (nothing is displayed), the state in which the payout number indicator displays a predetermined display (e.g., "0"), the state in which the payout number indicator displays information corresponding to a predetermined recoverable error in a predetermined recoverable error state, or the state in which information corresponding to a setting value or information corresponding to the setting check mode is displayed in the setting check mode. Also, in FIGS. 61 to 63, it is assumed that when there are "3" or more credits, the MAX BET switch 18 is operated to place a bet of three coins, a win occurs on any of the push order bells, a high-rank bell wins, and 10 game coins are paid out.

In Figure 61, first, three bets are made by operating the MAX BET switch 18 at the timing shown in Figure 61 (1), and the 1 BET lamp 25a, 2 BET lamp 25b, and 3 BET lamp 25c light up. Note that the 1 BET lamp 25a, 2 BET lamp 25b, and 3 BET lamp 25c are configured to light up approximately simultaneously, but this is not limiting and they may be configured to light up in the following order: 1 BET lamp 25a → 2 BET lamp 25b → 3 BET lamp 25c.

Then, the start switch 12 is operated, and the reels begin to rotate at the timing shown in Figure 61 (2).

Then, when the player stops the reels at the timing shown in Figure 61 (3), the payout process begins when a high-value bell is won, and the payout number display shows "10" as the payout number (this may be configured to be updated by one at a time at a speed that the player can see, such as "0 → 1 → 2 → ... → 9 → 10," or it may be configured to display only the payout number, such as "0 → 10"). Also, at the timing shown in Figure 61 (3), a specific timer begins counting the lighting time of the 1 BET lamps 25a to 3 BET lamps 25c and the display time of the payout number on the payout number display. Note that this specific timer is a decrement timer, and when the specific timer reaches a predetermined value (for example, "0"), it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed.

Then, the payout process ends at the timing shown in Figure 61 (4).

After that, at the timing shown in Figure 61 (5), when the value of a specific timer reaches a predetermined value (for example, "0") (when it is determined that a predetermined time has passed since all reels stopped), the 1 BET lamp 25a to 3 BET lamp 25c turn off, and the payout number display on the payout number indicator becomes invisible.

In the example shown in Figure 61, when a predetermined time has elapsed since all reels have stopped, the 1 bet lamp 25a to 3 bet lamp 25c turn off and the payout number display is hidden.

This configuration prevents a player from avoiding an empty machine when they try to play on it, mistakenly thinking that another player is playing on it.

<Example 2 of the configuration of the bet number display lamp 25 and payout number display>
Figure 62 shows an example in which a predetermined recoverable error (selector-related error (medal retention error, medal backflow error, medal passing time error), hopper 44-related error (hopper retention error, hopper empty error, abnormality detection error), door open error, harness disconnection error, etc.) occurs during measurement of a predetermined time after all reels have stopped.

In Figure 62, first, three bets are made by operating the MAX BET switch 18 at the timing shown in Figure 62 (1), and the 1 BET lamp 25a, 2 BET lamp 25b, and 3 BET lamp 25c light up. Note that the 1 BET lamp 25a, 2 BET lamp 25b, and 3 BET lamp 25c are configured to light up approximately simultaneously, but this is not limiting and they may be configured to light up in the following order: 1 BET lamp 25a → 2 BET lamp 25b → 3 BET lamp 25c.

Then, the start switch 12 is operated, and the reels begin to rotate at the timing shown in Figure 62 (2).

Then, when the player stops the reels at the timing shown in Figure 62 (3), the payout process begins when a high-value bell is won, and the payout number display shows "10" as the payout number. Also, at the timing shown in Figure 62 (3), a specific timer begins measuring a predetermined time (for example, 1 minute).

Then, the payout process ends at the timing shown in Figure 62 (4).

After that, a specified recoverable error occurs at the timing shown in Figure 62 (5), causing an error state, and the payout number displayed on the payout number display becomes invisible. At this time, the payout number display is configured to display information corresponding to the specified recoverable error. For example, if there is a hopper empty error, "HE" is displayed. Furthermore, even during a specified recoverable error, the 1 bed lamp 25 to 3 bed lamp 25c are configured to remain lit. Furthermore, even during a specified recoverable error, a specific timer is configured to continue measuring the specified time.

Then, at the timing shown in Figure 62 (6), the specified recoverable error is cleared, the system returns to normal, and the payout number display again shows "10" as the payout number.

After that, at the timing shown in Figure 62 (7), when the value of a specific timer reaches a predetermined value, the 1 bet lamp 25a to 3 bet lamp 25c are turned off, and the payout number display is hidden.

Also, Figure 62 shows a case where the value of a specific timer reaches a specific value after a specific recoverable error is cleared, but if the value of the specific timer reaches a specific value during a specific recoverable error, the 1 bet lamp 25a to 3 bet lamp 25c will turn off when the value of the specific timer reaches the specific value even during the specific recoverable error, and then when the specific recoverable error is cleared, the 1 bet lamp 25a to 3 bet lamp 25c will remain off and the payout number display will remain hidden without displaying the payout number again.

In this way, in the example shown in Figure 62, the specific timer is configured to continue measuring the specific time even during a specific recoverable error. Furthermore, even during a specific recoverable error, the 1 bet lamp 25a to 3 bet lamp 25c are configured to remain lit until the value of the specific timer reaches a specific value. Furthermore, the payout number display is configured to hide the payout number and display information corresponding to the specific recoverable error during a specific recoverable error, and if the value of the specific timer reaches a specific value during a specific recoverable error, the payout number display is hidden without displaying the payout number again after the specific recoverable error is resolved, and if the value of the specific timer does not reach a specific value during a specific recoverable error, the payout number display is displayed again after the specific recoverable error is resolved, and the payout number display is hidden once the value of the specific timer reaches the specific value.

By configuring it in this way, if a specific recoverable error occurs, an error notification can be issued appropriately, and by keeping the bet number display lamp 25 lit, the notification of the number of bets from the previous game can be maintained. Furthermore, even if the payout number is displayed again after the specific recoverable error is resolved, excessive payout numbers can be prevented from being displayed.

Also, when a predetermined recoverable error occurs and an error state is entered, the timer stops measuring the predetermined time, the 1 BET lamps 25a through 3 BET lamps 25c remain lit, the payout number display does not display the payout number, and displays information corresponding to the predetermined recoverable error. When the predetermined recoverable error is subsequently resolved, the timer resumes measuring the predetermined time, the 1 BET lamps 25a through 3 BET lamps 25c remain lit, and the payout number display again displays "10" as the payout number. When the timer subsequently reaches a predetermined value, the 1 BET lamps 25a through 3 BET lamps 25c turn off, and the payout number display does not display the payout number. Note that in this case, even if a predetermined time has elapsed since all reels actually stopped, the 1 BET lamps 25a through 3 BET lamps 25c remain lit until the timer reaches the predetermined value. Specifically, at a specific timing during a specific recoverable error, the 1 BET lamp 25a to 3 BET lamp 25c will remain lit even if a specific amount of time has passed since all reels actually stopped.

By configuring it in this way, even if an error occurs before a predetermined time has elapsed since all reels stopped, the number of bets and payouts from the previous game can be reported for an appropriate period of time.

Furthermore, when a predetermined recoverable error occurs and an error state is entered, the measurement of the predetermined time by the specific timer is interrupted, the 1 BET lamps 25a to 3 BET lamps 25c are turned off, and the payout number display does not display the payout number but displays information corresponding to the predetermined recoverable error. After that, when the predetermined recoverable error is released, the measurement of the predetermined time by the specific timer is restarted, the 1 BET lamps 25a to 3 BET lamps 25c are turned on again, and the payout number display again displays "10" as the payout number. After that, when the measurement of the predetermined time is restarted and the value of the specific timer reaches a predetermined value, the 1 BET lamps 25a to 3 BET lamps 25c are turned off and the payout number display does not display the payout number. It should be noted that in this case, even if a predetermined time has already passed since all the reels stopped when the predetermined recoverable error is released, the 1 BET lamps 25a to 3 BET lamps 25c will remain lit until the value of the specific timer reaches the predetermined value.
By configuring in this way, during an error, the type of error can be properly notified by the payout number, and the number of bets and the payout number of the previous game can be properly notified to the player.

Also, when a specific recoverable error occurs and an error state is entered, the specific timer stops measuring the specific time (the value of the specific timer is cleared), the 1 bet lamp 25a to 3 bet lamp 25c turn off, and the payout number display does not display the payout number but displays information corresponding to the specific recoverable error; after that, when the specific recoverable error is cleared, the 1 bet lamp 25a to 3 bet lamp 25c remain off and the payout number display on the payout number display remains hidden.

By configuring it in this way, the lighting patterns of the 1 BET lamp 25a to 3 BET lamp 25c and the payout number display can be kept consistent after the error is cleared.

<Example 3 of the configuration of the bet number display lamp 25 and payout number display>
63 shows an example in which the mode is switched to the setting confirmation mode during the measurement of the predetermined time after all the reels have stopped. Note that in this embodiment, the mode is configured to be switched to the setting confirmation mode when the setting key switch signal is turned on while the door open signal is on and no bets have been placed.

In Figure 63, first, three bets are made by operating the MAX BET switch 18 at the timing shown in Figure 63 (1), and the 1 BET lamp 25a, 2 BET lamp 25b, and 3 BET lamp 25c light up. Note that the 1 BET lamp 25a, 2 BET lamp 25b, and 3 BET lamp 25c are configured to light up approximately simultaneously, but this is not limiting and they may be configured to light up in the following order: 1 BET lamp 25a → 2 BET lamp 25b → 3 BET lamp 25c.

Then, the start switch 12 is operated, and the reels begin to rotate at the timing shown in Figure 63 (2).

Then, when the player stops the reels at the timing shown in Figure 63 (3), the payout process begins when a high-value bell is won, and the payout number display shows "10" as the payout number. Also, at the timing shown in Figure 63 (3), a specific timer begins measuring a predetermined time (for example, 1 minute).

Then, the payout process ends at the timing shown in Figure 63 (4).

Then, at the timing shown in Figure 63 (5), the system switches to setting confirmation mode, the 1 bet lamp 25a, 2 bet lamp 25b, and 3 bet lamp 25c remain lit, and the payout number indicator continues to display the payout number. Also, when the system switches to setting confirmation mode, the system stops measuring the specified time using a specific timer.

Then, at the timing shown in Figure 63 (6), the setting confirmation mode ends, the 1 BET lamp 25a, 2 BET lamp 25b, and 3 BET lamp 25c remain lit, and the payout number indicator continues to display the payout number. Also, when the setting confirmation mode ends, a specific timer resumes measuring the specified time.

After that, when the value of the specific timer reaches a predetermined value at the timing shown in Figure 63 (7), the 1 BET lamps 25a to 3 BET lamps 25c turn off and the payout number display on the payout number indicator becomes invisible. It should be noted that in this case, even if a predetermined time has passed since all reels have actually stopped, the 1 BET lamps 25a to 3 BET lamps 25c will remain lit and the payout number indicator will continue to display the payout number until the value of the specific timer reaches the predetermined value. Specifically, at a predetermined timing during the setting confirmation mode, even if a predetermined time has passed since all reels have actually stopped, the 1 BET lamps 25a to 3 BET lamps 25c will remain lit and the payout number indicator will continue to display the payout number.

63, the setting confirmation mode is set to halt the measurement of the predetermined time by the specific timer, and when the setting confirmation mode ends, the measurement of the predetermined time by the specific timer is resumed from the middle. Also, even during the setting confirmation mode, the 1 BET lamps 25a to 3 BET lamps 25c remain lit, and the payout number indicator continues to display the payout number, and when the value of the specific timer reaches a predetermined value after the setting confirmation mode ends, the 1 BET lamps 25a to 3 BET lamps 25c turn off, and the payout number indicator becomes invisible.
It should be noted that even if a predetermined time has passed since all the reels have actually stopped, the 1 BET lamps 25a to 3 BET lamps 25c will remain lit and the payout number display on the payout number display will not be hidden until the value of a specific timer reaches a predetermined value. Specifically, at a predetermined timing during the setting confirmation mode, even if a predetermined time has passed since all the reels have actually stopped, the 1 BET lamps 25a to 3 BET lamps 25c will remain lit and the payout number display will not be hidden.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to continue to notify the number of bets and the number of payouts from the previous game even while the settings are being confirmed.

Also, during the setting confirmation mode, a specific timer may continue to measure a predetermined time, the 1 bet lamp 25a to the 3 bet lamp 25c may remain lit, and the payout number display may be configured to hide the payout number and display information corresponding to the set value (displaying a number corresponding to the set value, displaying a number corresponding to the set value and lighting up the DP on the payout number display, displaying a number corresponding to the set value and an alphabet such as A or C, etc.).
In this case, if the value of a specific timer reaches a predetermined value during the setting confirmation mode, the 1 bet lamp 25a to 3 bet lamp 25c will remain lit until the setting confirmation mode ends, and information corresponding to the set value will be displayed on the payout number display, and when the setting confirmation mode ends, the 1 bet lamp 25a to 3 bet lamp 25c will turn off and the payout number display will no longer be displayed.
In addition, if the value of a specific timer does not reach a predetermined value during the setting confirmation mode, the payout number display may be configured to display the payout number again when the setting confirmation mode ends, and then when the value of the specific timer reaches a predetermined value, the 1 bet lamp 25a to 3 bet lamp 25c will be turned off and the payout number display will no longer display.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to continue to notify the number of bets from the previous game even while the settings are being confirmed, and even if the payout number is displayed again on the payout number display after the setting confirmation mode ends, it is possible to prevent excessive payout numbers from being displayed.

In addition, even during the setting confirmation mode, a specific timer may continue to measure a predetermined time, the 1 bet lamp 25a to the 3 bet lamp 25c remain lit, and the payout number display may display a message corresponding to a door open error.
At this time, even if the setting confirmation mode is in progress, if the value of a specific timer reaches a predetermined value, the 1 bet lamp 25a to 3 bet lamp 25c will be turned off and the payout number display will maintain a display corresponding to a door open error, and when the setting confirmation mode ends, the 1 bet lamp 25a to 3 bet lamp 25c will remain turned off and the payout number display will not be displayed.
In addition, if the value of a specific timer does not reach a predetermined value during the setting confirmation mode, the payout number display may be configured to display the payout number again when the setting confirmation mode ends, and then when the value of the specific timer reaches a predetermined value, the 1 bet lamp 25a to 3 bet lamp 25c will be turned off and the payout number display will no longer display.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to continue to notify the number of bets from the previous game even while the settings are being confirmed, and even if the payout number is displayed again on the payout number display after the setting confirmation mode ends, it is possible to prevent excessive payout numbers from being displayed.

Also, when the setting confirmation mode is entered, the measurement of a predetermined time by a specific timer is terminated (the value of the specific timer is cleared), and during the setting confirmation mode, the 1 bet lamp 25a to 3 bet lamp 25c remain lit and information corresponding to the setting confirmation mode is displayed on the payout number display, and when the setting confirmation mode is ended, the 1 bet lamp 25a to 3 bet lamp 25c are turned off and the payout number display is hidden.

By configuring it in this way, the lighting patterns of the 1 BET lamps 25a to 3 BET lamps 25c and the payout number display can be kept consistent after the setting confirmation mode ends.

In the examples of Figures 61 to 63, the trigger for starting the measurement of the specific timer is set to be when all reels have stopped, but this is not limited to this; it may also be set to be when the payout process has started or when the payout process has ended. In other words, it is sufficient to configure the specific timer to start measuring a predetermined time at a predetermined timing after at least all reels have stopped.

In addition, in the examples of Figures 61 to 63, a specific timer is used to measure the lighting time of the 1 BET lamp 25a to 3 BET lamp 25c and the display time of the payout number on the payout number display, but this is not limiting; a first timer that measures the lighting time of the 1 BET lamp 25a to 3 BET lamp 25c and a second timer that measures the display time of the payout number on the payout number display may be provided separately. In this case, the time until the 1 BET lamp 25a to 3 BET lamp 25c go out and the time until the payout number display disappears may be configured to be the same or different.

<<Configuration of the bet number display lamp 25 during normal operation>>
One or more of the following configurations can be applied to the bet number display lamp 25 during normal times. Note that normal times refer to a situation in which the game can proceed, excluding setting confirmation mode, setting change mode, error mode, etc.
(1) The light goes out when it is determined that a predetermined time has elapsed since all reels stopped.
(2) The light remains on even after a predetermined time has passed since all the reels stopped.
<<Configuration of the bet number display lamp 25 during setting confirmation mode>>
As the configuration of the bet number display lamp 25 during the setting confirmation mode, one or more of the following configurations can be applied.
(1) The light remains on even during the setting confirmation mode, and a specific timer continues to measure a predetermined time during the setting confirmation mode. When the specific timer reaches a predetermined value, the light goes out even during the setting confirmation mode.
(2) The light remains lit during the setting confirmation mode, and the specific timer continues to measure the specified time during the setting confirmation mode. If the setting confirmation mode is ended after the value of the specific timer reaches a specified value during the setting confirmation mode, the light goes out when the setting confirmation mode ends. If the setting confirmation mode is ended before the value of the specific timer reaches a specified value during the setting confirmation mode, the light goes out when the specific timer reaches a specified value after the setting confirmation mode ends.
(3) The light remains on even during the setting confirmation mode, and when the setting confirmation mode is entered, the measurement of the specified time by the specific timer is suspended. After the setting confirmation mode ends, the measurement of the specified time by the specific timer is resumed, and the light goes out when the value of the specific timer reaches the specified value.
(4) The light remains on even during the setting confirmation mode, and when the mode is switched to the setting confirmation mode, the timer stops measuring the predetermined time, and when the setting confirmation mode ends, the light goes out.
(5) The light remains on even during the setting confirmation mode, and when the setting confirmation mode is entered, the specific timer stops measuring the specified time. After the setting confirmation mode ends, the specific timer starts measuring the specified time again, and then turns off when the value of the specific timer reaches the specified value.
(6) When the setting confirmation mode is entered, the light turns off, and the specific timer continues to measure the specified time even during the setting confirmation mode. If the setting confirmation mode is ended after the value of the specific timer reaches a specified value during the setting confirmation mode, the light remains off even after the setting confirmation mode ends. If the setting confirmation mode is ended before the value of the specific timer reaches a specified value during the setting confirmation mode, the light turns on again when the setting confirmation mode ends, and then turns off when the value of the specific timer reaches a specified value.
(7) When the setting confirmation mode is entered, the light goes out, and the measurement of the specified time by the specific timer is suspended. When the setting confirmation mode ends, the light goes out again, and the measurement of the specified time by the specific timer is resumed. Then, when the value of the specific timer reaches the specified value, the light goes out.
(8) When the setting confirmation mode is entered, the light goes out, the measurement of the predetermined time by the specific timer ends, and the light remains off even after the setting confirmation mode ends.
(9) When the setting confirmation mode is entered, the light goes out, the specific timer finishes measuring the specified time, and when the setting confirmation mode ends, the light goes out again, the specific timer starts measuring the specified time anew, and then when the value of the specific timer reaches the specified value, the light goes out.

<<Configuration of the bet number display lamp 25 during a predetermined error>>
As a configuration for the bet number display lamp 25 during a predetermined error, one or more of the following configurations can be applied.
(1) The light remains on even during a specified error, and a specified timer continues to measure a specified time even during the specified error, and when the specified timer reaches a specified value, the light goes out even during the specified error.
(2) The light remains on even during a specified error, and the specific timer continues to measure a specified time even during the specified error. If the specified error is cleared after the value of the specific timer reaches a specified value during the specified error, the light goes out when the specified error is cleared. If the specified error is cleared before the value of the specific timer reaches a specified value during the specified error, the light goes out when the specific timer reaches a specified value after the specified error is cleared.
(3) The light remains on even during a specified error, and when the specified error occurs, the measurement of the specified time by the specific timer is suspended. After the specified error is resolved, the measurement of the specified time by the specific timer is resumed, and the light goes out when the value of the specific timer reaches a specified value.
(4) The light remains on even during a specified error, and when the specified error occurs, the measurement of a specified time by a specific timer ends, and the light goes out when the specified error is resolved.
(5) The light remains on even during a specified error, and when the specified error occurs, the specific timer stops measuring the specified time. After the specified error is resolved, the specific timer starts measuring the specified time again, and then turns off when the value of the specific timer reaches a specified value.
(6) When a specified error occurs, the light turns off, and the specific timer continues to measure a specified time even during the specified error. If the specified error is cleared after the value of the specific timer reaches a specified value during the specified error, the light remains off even after the specified error is cleared. If the specified error is cleared before the value of the specific timer reaches a specified value during the specified error, the light turns on again when the specified error is cleared, and then turns off when the value of the specific timer reaches the specified value.
(7) When a specified error occurs, the light goes out, the measurement of the specified time by a specific timer is suspended, and when the specified error is resolved, the light goes out again, the measurement of the specified time by the specific timer is resumed, and then when the value of the specific timer reaches a specified value, the light goes out.
(8) When a predetermined error occurs, the light goes out, the measurement of a predetermined time by a specific timer ends, and the light remains off even after the predetermined error is resolved.
(9) When a specified error occurs, the light goes out, the measurement of the specified time by a specific timer ends, and when the specified error is resolved, the light goes out again, the measurement of the specified time by the specific timer begins anew, and then when the value of the specific timer reaches a specified value, the light goes out.

The bet number display lamp 25 may be configured to be turned off in one or more of the following situations.
(1) When the demo screen is displayed. (2) When the payment process is started. (3) When the payment process is completed. (4) When the menu screen display starts. (5) When the menu screen display ends.

<<Configuration of the payout number display during normal operation>>
One or more of the following configurations can be applied as the configuration of the payout number display in normal times. Note that normal times refer to a situation in which game play can proceed, excluding setting confirmation mode, setting change mode, error mode, etc.
(1) When it is determined that a predetermined time has elapsed since all the reels stopped, the display is turned off.
(2) The payout number remains displayed even after a predetermined time has elapsed since all reels stopped.
<<Configuration of the payout number display during setting confirmation mode>>
One or more of the following configurations can be applied to the payout number display during the setting confirmation mode.
(1) The number of dispensed coins is maintained on display even during the setting confirmation mode, and a specific timer continues to measure a predetermined time during the setting confirmation mode. When the specific timer reaches a predetermined value, the number of dispensed coins is no longer displayed even during the setting confirmation mode.
(2) The number of dispensed balls is maintained on display even during the setting confirmation mode, and a specific timer continues to measure a predetermined time during the setting confirmation mode. If the setting confirmation mode is ended after the value of the specific timer reaches a predetermined value during the setting confirmation mode, the number of dispensed balls will be hidden when the setting confirmation mode ends. If the setting confirmation mode is ended before the value of the specific timer reaches a predetermined value during the setting confirmation mode, the number of dispensed balls will be hidden when the specific timer reaches a predetermined value after the setting confirmation mode ends.
(3) The number of dispensed balls is kept displayed even during the setting confirmation mode, and when the mode is switched to the setting confirmation mode, the specific timer stops measuring the specified time. After the setting confirmation mode ends, the specific timer resumes measuring the specified time. When the value of the specific timer reaches a specified value, the number of dispensed balls is hidden.
(4) The payout number remains displayed even during the setting confirmation mode, and when the mode is switched to the setting confirmation mode, the specific timer stops measuring the specified time, and when the setting confirmation mode ends, the number is hidden.
(5) The number of dispensed balls is kept displayed even during the setting confirmation mode, and when the mode is switched to the setting confirmation mode, the specific timer stops measuring the specified time. After the setting confirmation mode ends, the specific timer starts measuring the specified time again, and when the value of the specific timer reaches the specified value, the number of dispensed balls is no longer displayed.
(6) When the mode is switched to the setting confirmation mode, the display of the payout number is terminated, and the specific timer continues to measure the specified time even during the setting confirmation mode. If the setting confirmation mode is terminated after the value of the specific timer reaches a specified value during the setting confirmation mode, the number of payouts is displayed again when the setting confirmation mode is terminated, and is then hidden when the value of the specific timer reaches a specified value.
(7) When the setting confirmation mode is entered, the display of the payout number is terminated, and the measurement of the specified time by the specific timer is suspended. When the setting confirmation mode ends, the payout number is displayed again, and the measurement of the specified time by the specific timer is resumed. After that, when the value of the specific timer reaches the specified value, the number is no longer displayed.
(8) When the setting confirmation mode is entered, the display of the payout number is terminated, the measurement of the predetermined time by the specific timer is terminated, and the display is no longer displayed after the setting confirmation mode is terminated.
(9) When the mode is switched to the setting confirmation mode, the display of the payout number is terminated, the specific timer stops measuring the specified time, and when the setting confirmation mode ends, the payout number is displayed again, the specific timer starts measuring the specified time anew, and then when the value of the specific timer reaches the specified value, it is no longer displayed.
In the above (6) to (9), the display may be hidden during the setting confirmation mode, or a display corresponding to the setting value may be displayed, or a display corresponding to the setting confirmation mode may be displayed, or a display corresponding to a door open error may be displayed.

<<Configuration of payout number display during a specified error>>
One or more of the following configurations can be applied to the payout number display during a specified error.
(1) When a specified error occurs, a display corresponding to the specified error is displayed, and a specified timer continues to measure a specified time even during the specified error, and if the error is cleared after the value of the specific timer reaches a specified value during the specified error, the display is hidden when the specified error is cleared, and if the error is cleared before the value of the specific timer reaches a specified value during the specified error, the number of payouts is displayed again when the specified error is cleared, and then the display is hidden when the value of the specific timer reaches the specified value.
(2) When a specified error occurs, a display corresponding to the specified error is displayed, and the measurement of the specified time by a specific timer is interrupted. When the specified error is cleared, the number of payouts is displayed again, and the measurement of the specified time by the specific timer is resumed. Then, when the value of the specific timer reaches a specified value, the display is no longer displayed.
(3) When a predetermined error occurs, a display corresponding to the predetermined error appears, and when the measurement of a predetermined time by a specific timer ends and the predetermined error is resolved, the display disappears.
(4) When a specified error occurs, a display corresponding to the specified error is displayed, the measurement of the specified time by a specific timer is terminated, and when the specified error is cleared, the number of dispensed coins is displayed again, the measurement of the specified time by the specific timer is newly started, and then when the value of the specific timer reaches a specified value, the display is no longer displayed.

The payout number display may be configured to turn off in one or more of the following situations:
(1) When the demo screen is displayed. (2) When the payment process is started. (3) When the payment process is completed. (4) When the menu screen display starts. (5) When the menu screen display ends.

The configurations related to the bet number display lamp 25 and the payout number display described above can be combined as appropriate.

<Configuration Regarding the Gap Between the Medal Selector 34 and the Chute Member>
The configuration relating to the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member that can be applied to this embodiment will be described.

Figure 64 shows the positional relationship when the medal selector 34, chute member, and return member are attached to the back surface of the front panel PS2 applicable to this embodiment.

As shown in Figure 64, a chute member is provided on the back surface of the front panel PS2, adjacent to the medal selector 34, for guiding medals that are permitted to pass through by the medal selector 34 to the hopper 44.

Here, the medal selector 34 requires regular maintenance, such as having amusement parlor staff check the sensor for abnormalities when a selector-related error occurs, and removing dirt that has accumulated as medals pass through. For this reason, in this embodiment, a gap is provided between the medal selector 34 and the chute member to make maintenance work on the medal selector 34 easier.

In addition, on the back surface of the front panel PS2, below the medal selector 34, a return member is provided for returning medals paid out from the hopper 44 and medals rejected from the medal selector 34 to the receiving tray 28 through the medal payout outlet 45.
The return member has a medal return receiving port (sometimes referred to as the entrance of the return passage) that receives medals rejected from the medal selector 34, and a medal payout receiving port that receives medals paid out from the hopper 44.
Furthermore, when the return member is attached to the front panel PS2, a return passage is formed in the space between the return member and the front panel PS2.

64, the chute member has a medal guide passage for guiding medals that have been permitted to pass by the medal selector 34 to the hopper 44. The medal guide passage has a gentle downward slope from upstream (towards the medal selector 34) to downstream (towards the hopper 44). The medal guide passage also has a shape that is gently curved at approximately 90 degrees from around the middle of the medal guide passage towards the hopper 44 in order to guide medals that have been permitted to pass by the medal selector 34 towards the hopper 44.
The chute member has a bottom surface that forms the bottom surface of the medal guide passage, an outer wall that forms the outer side surface of the medal guide passage, and an inner wall that forms the inner side surface of the medal guide passage, and the medal guide passage is open above.The chute member also has a step that is higher on the upstream side than on the downstream side at a position approximately halfway along the medal guide passage on the bottom surface.
The chute member also has a fixing portion for fixing the chute member to the rear surface of the front panel PS2 with a predetermined locking part (screw). The fixing portion is provided at a position that protrudes upward from near the end of the outer wall on the medal selector 34 side, and is configured so that when the chute member is attached to the rear surface of the front panel PS2, the fixing portion and the predetermined locking part are located above the medal guide passage.

The specified locking parts that secure the chute member to the back surface of the front panel PS2 are made of metal and are configured to conduct electricity, so that when the specified locking parts come off and enter the auxiliary tank, the fullness detection electrode of the auxiliary tank 46 can become electrically conductive via the specified locking parts.
The specified locking parts are made of a magnetic material such as iron, and are configured to be attracted to a magnet, while the medals used in the game are made of stainless steel and are configured not to be attracted to a magnet.
By configuring it in this way, even if the predetermined locking parts come off and fall into the hopper 44 or the auxiliary tank 46 due to deterioration over time or an action such as hitting the surface of the front panel PS2 by a player, only the predetermined locking parts can be easily taken out by the magnet.

In addition, although not shown, a locking portion is provided at a predetermined position on the chute member for locking the chute member to the back surface of the front panel PS2. The chute member can be locked to the back surface of the front panel PS2 by hooking the claws of the locking portion onto the front panel PS2, and then secured to the back surface of the front panel PS2 with a screw inserted into the screw hole in the securing portion. This prevents the chute member from falling off the back surface of the front panel PS2 even if the screw securing the chute member comes loose.

Figures 65 and 66 are diagrams explaining the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member.

As shown in Figure 65, an upper edge corresponding to the edge surrounding the return receiving opening at the top of the return member is located vertically below the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member. In other words, the return receiving opening is not located vertically below the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 65, when the thickness of the medal is "A", the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member is "B", and the width of the upper edge is "C", it is configured to satisfy the following configuration.
(1) B>A
That is, the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member is larger than the thickness of one medal.
(2) B ≒ 2 × A
That is, the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member is approximately equal to the thickness of two medals.
(3) C>A
That is, the width of the upper edge is greater than the thickness of one medal.
(4) C>B
That is, the width of the upper edge is larger than the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member.

This allows medals to be placed in the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member. Furthermore, an upper edge is located vertically below the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member, so medals can be placed on the upper edge and retained in the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 66, a medal placed on the upper edge and inserted into the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member will block the exit of the medal passage. Therefore, when a medal is present in the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member, a medal inserted through the medal insertion port 17 will collide with a medal in the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member as it moves from the exit of the medal passage toward the medal guide passage of the chute member, and will be stopped at the exit of the medal passage. At this time, the inserted medal causes insertion sensor 1 and insertion sensor 2 to remain on (it may also be configured so that only insertion sensor 2 remains on), and the main control means will detect an error related to the selector and issue a medal retention error as an error related to the selector.

As shown in Figure 66, when an inserted medal collides with a medal in the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member and becomes stuck at the exit of the medal passage, the upper end of the medal in the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member is positioned higher than the center of the inserted medal. Therefore, the inserted medal cannot pass over the medal in the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member.

With this configuration, it is not possible to directly detect whether a medal is in the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member, but an error related to the selector is reported, so it is possible to indirectly know that a medal is in the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member.

Furthermore, with this configuration, when an amusement parlor employee checks whether the medal selector 34 is properly detecting selector-related errors, if they insert a medal through the medal insertion port 17 with the medal inserted in the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member, the inserted medal will be unable to pass through the exit of the medal passage due to the medal inserted in the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member, creating a situation in which the inserted medal remains detected by insertion sensor 1 and insertion sensor 2, making it easy to check whether the selector-related errors are being properly detected.

As mentioned above, the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member is larger than the thickness of a single medal, so any medals placed by game parlor staff in the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member will not become stuck and become impossible to remove.

Figure 67 shows the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member, and the positional relationship with the hopper 44 when the front panel PS2 is closed.

As shown in Figure 67, when the front panel PS2 is closed, a hopper 44 is arranged below the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member.
Therefore, even if the front panel PS2 is closed while a medal is resting on the upper edge and remaining in the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member, and the medal falls from the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member due to the impact at that time, the fallen medal can be stored in the hopper 44.

With this configuration, even if an amusement parlor employee forgets that they have placed a medal in the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member to check whether the medal selector 34 is properly detecting selector errors and closes the front panel PS2, causing the medal to fall, the fallen medal will enter the medal return slot and will not be ejected from the medal payout outlet 45 to the tray 28, preventing the amusement parlor employee from accidentally giving the medal used in the operation to a player.

Furthermore, by lowering the position at which the return member is attached, the medal in the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member will not block the medal passage even when the medal is resting on the upper edge and remaining in the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member (the top of the medal will be displaced below the medal passage between the medal selector 34 and the chute member even when the medal is resting on the upper edge), and a medal that has been inserted and allowed to pass by the medal selector 34 can pass beyond the exit of the medal passage and pass through the medal guide passage. With this configuration, even if a gaming parlor employee accidentally drops a medal while replenishing medals and the medal gets stuck in the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member, the medal can still be inserted, preventing the progress of the game from being interrupted.

Figure 68 is a diagram explaining the radius of the medal, the height of the medal guide passage, the height of the step portion of the medal guide passage, and the width of the medal guide passage.

As described above, the medal guide passage is gently curved at approximately 90 degrees to guide medals that have been permitted to pass by the medal selector 34 toward the hopper 44 .
Therefore, when a medal that is permitted to pass by the medal selector 34 passes through the medal guide passage, it comes into contact with the outer wall portion and the inner wall portion of the medal guide passage and is decelerated.

Therefore, in this embodiment, a step portion is provided at a position about halfway along the medal guide passage on the bottom surface, with the upstream side being higher than the downstream side.
The medal is then dropped as it passes through the step portion, and the medal, which has been decelerated by coming into contact with the outer and inner wall portions of the medal guide passage, can be accelerated.

By configuring it in this way, even if multiple medals are inserted through the medal insertion port 17 at once, the inserted medals can be stored in the hopper 44 without becoming stuck in the medal guide passage.

Furthermore, when the thickness of the medal is "A" as shown in Figure 65, the radius of the medal is "D" as shown in Figure 68, the height of the medal guide passage is "E", the height of the step portion of the medal guide passage is "F", and the maximum width of the medal guide passage is "G", it is configured to satisfy the following configuration.
(1) G>A
In other words, the maximum width of the medal guide passage is greater than the thickness of the medal.
(2) G<2×D
That is, the maximum width of the medal guide passage is smaller than the diameter of the medal.
(3) F<D
In other words, the height of the step portion of the medal guide passage is smaller than the radius of the medal.
(4) F<E
That is, the height of the step portion of the medal guide passage is smaller than the height of the medal guide passage.

By configuring as described above in (1) and (2), when a medal passes through the medal guide passage, it can pass through while rolling upright, instead of stopping halfway through the medal guide passage in a horizontal position.

Furthermore, by configuring as in (3) and (4) above, the medals can be accelerated by the step in the medal guide passage, while preventing the medals from flying out of the medal guide passage due to the impact of falling as they pass through the step in the medal guide passage. In addition to the configurations in (3) and (4), it is also possible to make E>D (the height of the medal guide passage is greater than the radius of the medal). In this case, it is possible to more reliably prevent the medals from flying out of the medal guide passage due to the impact of falling as they pass through the step in the medal guide passage.

Figure 69 is a diagram explaining the position and dimensions of the locking parts (screws) that secure the chute member when the fixing portion of the chute member is fixed to the front panel PS2 with the specified locking parts.

As shown in Figure 69, when the chute member is fixed to the front panel PS2 with screws, a medal guide passage is located vertically below the screws that secure the chute member, and no medal return receiving opening is located.
Therefore, even if the screw for fixing the chute member comes off and falls, the screw for fixing the chute member is configured not to come out of the tray 28 through the medal return receiving port, the return passage and the medal payout port 45.

By configuring it in this way, even if the screw securing the chute member comes loose and falls, it is possible to prevent a player from cutting their hand by grabbing the screw securing the chute member with too much force along with the medal. It is also possible to prevent the screw securing the chute member from flying out of the gaming machine due to the impact of the fall and becoming lost.

As mentioned above, the chute member is configured so that its locking portion can be locked onto the back surface of the front panel PS2, preventing the chute member from falling off the back surface of the front panel PS2 even if the screws securing the chute member come loose.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 69, when the maximum width of the medal guide passage is "G", the total length of the screw (also referred to as the longitudinal length) is "H", and the diameter of the screw head (also referred to as the lateral length) is "I", it is configured to satisfy the following configuration.
(1) G<H
In other words, the maximum width of the medal guide passage is smaller than the overall length of the screw that secures the chute member.
(2) G<I
That is, the maximum width of the medal guide passage is smaller than the diameter of the screw head that fixes the chute member.

By configuring it in this way, even if the screws securing the chute member come loose and fall, the screws securing the chute member will not get into the medal guide passage, so the screws securing the chute member will not obstruct the passage of medals.

Alternatively, it may be configured so that "G<H" and "G>I." In other words, the maximum width of the medal guide passage may be configured to be smaller than the overall length of the screw that secures the chute member, but larger than the diameter of the screw head that secures the chute member.

When configured this way, if the screw securing the chute member comes loose and falls, there is a possibility that it could get caught in the medal guide passage. However, even if the screw does get caught in the medal guide passage, it will get caught midway along the passage, preventing the loose screw from getting lost.

Alternatively, it may be configured so that "G>H" and "G>I" are satisfied. In other words, the maximum width of the medal guide passage may be configured to be greater than the overall length of the screw that secures the chute member and greater than the diameter of the screw head that secures the chute member.

When configured in this way, if the screw securing the chute member comes loose and falls, it will get stuck in the medal guide passage, but the loose screw will pass through the medal guide passage and fall, so it will not interfere with the passage of medals.

In addition, in this embodiment, the fixing portion of the chute member is configured to be located in a position that protrudes upward from the outer wall of the medal guide passage. However, this is not limited to this; instead, a recess may be formed in the outer wall of the medal guide passage on the front panel PS2 side, and a screw hole may be formed in this recess to serve as the fixing portion. In this case, it is preferable that the depth of the recess be greater than the overall length "H" of the screw that fixes the chute member. By configuring it in this way, even if the screw that fixes the chute member becomes loose, it will not get into the medal guide passage and obstruct the passage of medals.

The medal slot 17 also has a placement section that can hold multiple medals stacked and placed vertically, and is configured so that multiple medals placed vertically on the placement section can be inserted continuously through the medal slot 17.

When the thickness of a medal is "A," the maximum width of the medal guide passage is "G," and the number of medals that can be stacked vertically on the placement section is "J," the system is designed so that "G < (A x J) ÷ 2." In other words, the maximum width of the medal guide passage is designed to be smaller than half the thickness of the number of medals that can be stacked vertically on the placement section.

Furthermore, when the return member is attached to the rear surface of the front panel PS2, the upper edge may be configured to be gently inclined toward the hopper 44 side.
By configuring it in this way, even if a medal rests on the upper edge and gets stuck in the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member, it will roll down, so that medals in the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member will not obstruct the passage of the inserted medal and errors related to the selector are less likely to occur.

Figure 70 shows another example of the positional relationship when the medal selector 34, chute member, and return member are attached to the back surface of the front panel PS2 applicable to this embodiment. The size of the medal return receiving opening differs from that shown in Figure 64, but the other configurations are the same as those shown in Figure 64.

As shown in Figure 70, a medal return receiving opening is located vertically below the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member, rather than at the upper edge.
In the example shown in FIG. 70, the vertical and horizontal lengths of the medal return slot are designed to be larger than the diameter of the medal.
By configuring it in this way, even if a store employee at an amusement parlor accidentally drops a medal while replenishing medals and the medal gets stuck in the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member, the medal will pass through the medal return receiving port, the return passage, and the medal payout outlet 45 and then discharged into the tray 28, so that the medal in the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member will not obstruct the passage of the inserted medal and errors related to the selector are less likely to occur.

<Explanation about error history>
The display of the error history applicable to this embodiment will be described.
The error history can be displayed on the LCD during the setting confirmation mode. Specifically, when the setting confirmation mode is entered, an administrator menu screen (sometimes referred to as a setting confirmation screen) is displayed on the LCD. This administrator menu screen displays multiple administrator menus, and "Error History" is provided as one of the administrator menu items. When "Error History" is selected by operating the sub-cross key switch 21, the sub-switch 20 is operated (when the sub-switch 20 is turned on), the error history is displayed on the LCD. In this embodiment, the setting confirmation mode can be entered when the setting key switch signal is turned on while the door open signal is on and no bets have been placed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when an error notification start command is received from the main control means, the sub-control means notifies the user of an error, and the error content and the time the error occurred are linked and stored as an error history in a specified storage area of the sub-control RAM controlled by the sub-control means. Note that information regarding the time the error occurred is configured to be obtained, for example, using the RTC (real-time clock) function provided in the gaming machine.

The error history is configured so that it is not erased when the power is turned on or off or when settings are changed. The error history is also configured to be able to store a specified number of histories (for example, 120), and if the specified number is exceeded, the oldest error history will be erased.

In addition, while in this embodiment the error history can be displayed in the setting confirmation mode, it may also be configured so that the error history can be checked in the setting change mode.

The error history may also be configured to be displayed on the LCD when the sub-switch 20 is operated on the administrator menu screen, or the error history may be displayed on the LCD when the system transitions to setting confirmation mode, or the LCD may be used as a touch panel so that the error history is displayed on the LCD when the error history item is touched on the administrator menu screen.

In addition, the operation sound output from the speaker S when the sub-cross key switch 21 is operated to select an item displayed on the administrator menu screen is configured to be different from the operation sound output from the speaker S when the sub-cross key switch 21 is operated to select an item displayed on the user menu screen.
Note that the sound output on the administrator menu screen may be different from that on the user menu screen by not outputting the operation sound of the sub cross key switch 21. Also, the operation sound output from the speaker S when the sub cross key switch 21 is operated on the administrator menu screen may be a sound that is not output at all on any screen other than the administrator menu screen. Furthermore, a configuration may be made in which predetermined background music is output from the speaker S on the user menu screen, but no background music is output on the administrator menu screen, resulting in a silent state.
This configuration allows the difference between the user menu screen and the administrator menu screen to be easily recognized, and prevents operational errors by the administrator.

FIG. 71 is a diagram showing an example of the error history screen.
In FIG. 71, door open corresponds to a state in which the door open signal is on, and door close corresponds to a state in which the door open signal is off.

As shown in Figure 71, the error history screen displays the details of each error along with the time it occurred.

In addition, the error history screen is configured to display the most recent history in descending order.

In addition, opening/closing the front door, turning the power on/off, starting/ending a setting change, and starting/ending a setting check are not errors, but are configured to be displayed in the error history.

The error history is also configured to display the start and end points of each error, such as the occurrence and resolution of an error, the start and end of a setting change, and the start and end of a setting check. However, this is not limited to this, and the error history may also be configured to display only the start point of the error.

In addition, the error history is configured to display up to 12 items per page, and the pages of the error history screen can be switched by operating the sub-cross key switch 21.

In this embodiment, the "occurrence time" of each error is displayed on the error history screen, such as "007 Medal retention error occurred 2021/11/11 10:01:01" in Figure 71, but in reality, the "time when notification started" of each error is stored in the error history as the "occurrence time" and displayed on the error history screen. Also, the content of the error and the time when the error occurred are stored as error history at the time when notification of the error started (the time when the sub-control means received the error notification start command), rather than at the time when the error occurred (the time when the error was detected).

The reason for this configuration is that there may be cases where an error is detected but the error notification is not initiated, such as while the reels are rotating, in other words, there may be a time lag between the detection of the error and the notification of the error.
For example, if a predetermined error (such as an error related to the hopper 44 or an error related to the selector) is detected during the rotation of the reels in one game, the error is not notified at the time the predetermined error is detected (occurred), but at a predetermined time after the end of the game (such as when all the reels have stopped or when the payout process has ended), the predetermined error state is entered, preventing the game from proceeding and notifying the predetermined error. In this case, if the player leaves the seat while the reels are spinning and it takes about three minutes for all the reels to stop, there will be a delay of about three minutes between the detection of the error and the notification of the error.
Even in such cases, by displaying the time when the error notification began as the time when the error occurred, there is no difference between the timing of the error notification and the time when the error occurred on the error history screen, which prevents game store staff from mistakenly believing that there is a malfunction in the game machine or that some kind of fraud has occurred.

Furthermore, if a predetermined error is detected during the rotation of the reels in one game as described above, and the power is turned off before the end of the game, the power outage occurs before the end of that game, and the predetermined error and the time of occurrence of the predetermined error are not stored in the error history. If the power is subsequently restored from the power outage and the game transitions to the setting change mode, the information related to the predetermined error is erased in the initialization process in the setting change process, so the predetermined error is not notified even after the setting change mode ends, and is not stored in the error history.
By configuring in this way, errors that have not been reported are not stored as error history and are not displayed on the error history screen, so that the reported errors can be made consistent with the error history, and it is possible to prevent staff at the gaming parlor from mistakenly assuming that there is a malfunction in the gaming machine or that some kind of fraud has occurred.

In addition, the error history screen may be configured so that error history is displayed in a predetermined color (e.g., red), and other history (power on/off, start/end of setting change, etc.) is displayed in a specific color (e.g., white or black).
By configuring in this way, the error history can be displayed more prominently than other histories, making it easier to check the error history.

Furthermore, instead of displaying the start/end of setting changes and the start/end of setting checks in the error history, a separate item called "setting change history" may be set up so that the history of the start/end of setting changes and the start/end of setting checks is displayed along with the time in the setting change history.
By configuring it in this way, the content displayed on the error history screen can be simplified, so that arcade staff will not overlook anything when checking the error history or setting change history.

In addition, the history of the completion of the setting change may be displayed as, for example, "Setting change completed (6)" (where (6) indicates the setting value), so that the setting value set in the setting change process can also be confirmed in the setting change history.
By configuring in this way, if it is suspected that the setting value has been fraudulently rewritten, it is possible to check the setting value set in the immediately preceding setting change process, thereby making it possible to confirm whether or not fraud has occurred.

The error history may be configured to display the time elapsed since power-on, starting from the time the power was turned on. Specifically, if errors occur in the order of "power on" → "door open" → "door close" → "medal retention error," the error history screen may be configured to display the following (from the most recent to the top) in the order "medal retention error occurred: 0 hours, 10 minutes, 0 seconds elapsed" → "door close: 0 hours, 0 minutes, 10 seconds elapsed" → "door open: 0 hours, 0 minutes, 1 second elapsed" → "power on: 0 hours, 0 minutes, 0 seconds elapsed." The time elapsed since power-on is calculated by performing a predetermined calculation using the power-on time and the time each error occurred, which are stored in a predetermined storage area of the sub-control RAM.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to intuitively grasp the time from when the power was turned on until the error occurred.

The error history may also be configured to display the time elapsed since the error occurred. If the error occurred in the order of "power on" → "door open" → "door close" → "medal accumulation error occurred," the error history may be configured to display the following (from the most recent to the most recent): "medal accumulation error occurred: 0 hours, 0 minutes, 0 seconds ago" → "door close: 0 hours, 9 minutes, 50 seconds ago" → "door open: 0 hours, 9 minutes, 59 seconds ago" → "power on: 0 hours, 10 minutes, 0 seconds ago." The time elapsed since the error occurred is calculated by performing a predetermined calculation using the time when each error occurred, which is stored in a predetermined storage area of the sub-control RAM, and the current time obtained by the RTC function.
This configuration allows the user to intuitively grasp the amount of time that has passed since the error occurred.
In this configuration, if a predetermined period (for example, 31 days) or more has passed since the error occurred, it is preferable to display "predetermined period or more has passed."

FIG. 72 is a diagram showing an example of the error history screen when the front door is opened or closed while the error history screen is displayed.
In Figure 72 (1), the front door is open, and "Start setting check" is displayed in 001 (latest error content).
After that, when the front door is closed, the door open signal is turned off, the error history is updated, and "Door Closed" is displayed in 001.
After that, when the front door is opened again, the door open signal turns on, the error history is updated, and "Door Open" is displayed in 001.

In this way, if the front door is opened or closed while the error history screen is displayed, the error history related to the opening or closing of the front door is updated in real time each time the opening or closing of the front door is detected, and the error history screen is also updated.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to accurately determine whether the error history display is working correctly.

While the error history screen is displayed, the error history is updated each time the opening/closing of the front door is detected, but the error history screen may be configured not to be updated, and then the display of the error history screen may be ended and the error history screen may be displayed again, so that the error history screen is updated.
By configuring it in this way, the error history screen will not be updated even if the front door is opened or closed while checking the error history, so when you want to check old error history, opening or closing the front door will not unintentionally erase the old error history from the error history screen.

In addition, while the error history screen is displayed, the opening/closing of the front door is detected, but if the opening/closing of the front door is detected less than a predetermined time (approximately one minute) has passed since the previous error history update, the error history is not recorded, and if a predetermined time has passed since the previous error history update, the error history is updated and the error history screen is also updated.
In other words, opening and closing the front door while the error history screen is displayed may be configured so that it will not be recorded in the error history if a predetermined time has not passed since the previous error history update, but will be recorded in the error history if the predetermined time has passed.
This configuration makes it possible to accurately determine whether the error history display is working properly. Also, since opening and closing the front door before a predetermined time has elapsed since the error history was updated does not remain in the error history, old error history will not be erased from the error history screen even if the front door is opened and closed repeatedly unintentionally.

Also, while the error history screen is displayed, the opening/closing of the front door may not be detected, or may be detected but not stored as error history.
By configuring it in this way, the error history screen will not be updated even if the front door is opened or closed while checking the error history, so if you want to check old error history, opening or closing the front door will not unintentionally erase the old error history.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the opening of the front door is detected (when the door open signal is turned on), a predetermined image (such as "Door is open") is displayed on the LCD as a display corresponding to a door open error, and "dE" is displayed on the payout number display, and a door open sound is output from the speaker S. However, when the setting confirmation mode is entered, the display of the predetermined image is ended and the output of the door open sound is stopped (or the volume is set to "0"). Note that the payout number display may be configured to continue displaying a door open error even after entering the setting confirmation mode, or the display corresponding to the door open error by the payout number display may be ended when entering the setting confirmation mode.
In addition, the device may be configured to continue outputting the door-opening sound when the setting confirmation mode is entered and the administrator menu screen is displayed, and to stop outputting the door-opening sound when the error history screen is displayed.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to check the administrator menu settings and error history in the setting check mode in a quiet environment.

The door opening sound may be continuously output from the speaker S even during the setting confirmation mode or while the error history screen is displayed.
With this configuration, even if a store clerk forgets to end the setting change mode and leaves the gaming machine, the store clerk can be alerted by the sound of the door opening.

In addition, in this embodiment, "Time Setting" is provided as one of the setting items in the administrator menu, and when "Time Setting" is selected by operating the sub-cross key switch 21 and the sub-switch 20 is operated (when the sub-switch 20 is turned on), the time setting screen is displayed on the LCD, and the time can be changed on the time setting screen.

FIG. 73 is a diagram showing an example of the time setting screen.
Figure 73 shows an example in which the time setting screen is displayed when the current time on the gaming machine is November 11, 2021, 11:11:11.

As shown in FIG. 73, when the time setting screen is displayed, the current time is displayed on the LCD.
The time setting screen is configured so that the values of each of the items "year,""month,""day,""hour,""minute," and "second" can be changed, and the time setting screen is initially displayed with the "year" item selected. On the time setting screen, the cursor can be moved to the item to be changed by operating (pressing) the left switch and right switch of the sub cross key switch 21, and the value of the item to be changed can be changed by operating (pressing) the up switch and down switch of the sub cross key switch 21. Then, by operating the sub switch 20, the change to the current time is confirmed, and the changed time is set as the current time.

Note that the current time displayed when switching to the time setting screen is configured not to be updated even as time passes on the time setting screen, but internally the current time continues to be measured.

In addition, when you confirm a changed time on the time setting screen, the number of seconds in the current time will be set to "0" when the changed time is confirmed, and then the current time will begin to be measured.

The system is also configured to be able to detect the opening and closing of the front door even during time setting, and to store this information in the error history. If the front door is opened before the current time change is confirmed on the time setting screen, the change to the current time is not yet confirmed, so the door open history is stored based on the current time before the change. If the front door is closed before the current time change is confirmed on the time setting screen, the change to the current time is not yet confirmed, so the door close history is stored based on the current time before the change.
By configuring in this way, even if the time setting is completed without confirming the change to the current time, the correct time can be stored as error history.

The error history screen is configured to display the errors in descending order, starting with the most recent, in the order in which they were stored in the error history. For example, suppose a first error occurs when the error history is not displayed, and the first error is reported at the current time "t1." After the first error is resolved, the current time is set to a time earlier than "t1" on the time setting screen. Then, a second error occurs, and the second error is reported at the current time "t2" (a time earlier than t1). In this case, the time "t1" is the time the first error occurred, and the time "t2" is the time the second error occurred, are both stored in the error history, but the error history screen is configured to display the second error as the most recent error.
With this configuration, the order of the error history cannot be intentionally changed by setting the time, so that the history of any fraudulent activity can be reliably recorded.

FIG. 74 shows a list of display patterns of the error history when multiple errors occur.
In the setting check mode, errors are detected just as when the reels are rotating, but the error is not reported. For example, if a predetermined error (such as an error related to the hopper 44 or an error related to the selector) is detected during the setting check mode, the predetermined error is not reported at the time when the predetermined error is detected (occurred), but is reported at a predetermined time after the setting check mode ends, and the error content and the time when the error occurred (the time when the error was reported) are stored as error history.
In addition, the system is configured so that the error will not be cleared even if the reset switch is operated during the setting confirmation mode.

In Figure 74, "Checking" corresponds to the setting confirmation mode, and "Normal" corresponds to a state in which errors can be reported when the reels are spinning or when not in setting confirmation mode. "Combined reporting" corresponds to reporting multiple errors that have not yet been reported together, for example, reporting "First error and second error occurred." "Combined display" corresponds to the error history when errors are reported combined together, for example, displayed as an error history, such as "First error and second error occurred." "First error" and "Second error" correspond to errors related to the hopper 44 and errors related to the selector, respectively, with the first error being set as a higher priority for error reporting than the second error.

Pattern 1 in FIG. 74 will be described.
First, if errors occur in the order of a first error and then a second error during confirmation, the first error is notified after the setting confirmation mode ends, and then the second error is notified when the first error is cleared. In this case, the error history is stored in the order of first error occurrence → second error occurrence, and the error history screen is also configured to display the second error occurrence → first error occurrence from the top (from the most recent history).

Next, if errors occur during confirmation in the order of second error → first error, the first error will be notified after the setting confirmation mode ends, and then the second error will be notified when the first error is cleared. In this case, the error history is stored in the order of first error occurrence → second error occurrence, and the error history screen is also configured to display second error occurrence → first error occurrence from the top (from the most recent history).

Next, if errors occur in the order of first error → second error during normal operation, the first error will be notified immediately after the first error occurs, and then the second error will be notified after the first error is resolved. In this case, the error history is stored in the order of first error occurrence → second error occurrence, and the error history screen is also configured to display second error occurrence → first error occurrence from the top (from the most recent history).

Next, if errors occur in the order of second error → first error during normal operation, the second error will be notified immediately after the second error occurs, and then the first error will be notified after the second error is resolved. In this case, the error history is stored in the order of second error occurrence → first error occurrence, and the error history screen is also configured to display first error occurrence → second error occurrence from the top (from the most recent history).

In this way, in pattern 1 of Figure 74, if multiple errors are detected during the setting check mode, the errors are notified in order of priority after the setting check mode ends, and if multiple errors occur during normal operation, the errors are notified in the order in which they occurred.
Even in this configuration, the error history is stored in the order in which the errors are reported, not in the order in which the errors occur, so that the order in which the errors are reported can be made consistent with the order in which the error history is recorded, and it is possible to prevent the staff of the gaming establishment from mistakenly assuming that there is a malfunction in the gaming machine or that some kind of fraud has occurred.

Pattern 2 in FIG. 74 will be explained.
First, if errors occur in the order of a first error and then a second error during confirmation, the first error and the second error are combined and notified after the setting confirmation mode ends. In this case, the error history stores the combined error content of the first error and the second error, and the error history screen also displays the combined content of the first error and the second error.

Next, if errors occur during confirmation in the order of second error → first error, the first and second errors will be combined and reported after the setting confirmation mode ends. In this case, the error history will store the combined error details of the first and second errors, and the error history screen will also display the combined details of the first and second errors.

In addition, if multiple errors are reported together, the system may be configured so that a single error clearing operation (operation of the reset switch) can clear the multiple errors reported together, or it may be configured so that multiple error clearing operations are required for each error reported together.

Furthermore, if errors occur in the order of first error → second error during normal operation, or if errors occur in the order of second error → first error during normal operation, the situation is the same as pattern 1 in Figure 74.

This configuration allows multiple errors to be reported at once, simplifying the content of the error reports.

For example, if errors occur in the order of third error → fourth error (the error notification priority is the same as the third error) during setting check mode, the third error will be notified after setting check mode ends, and then the fourth error will be notified when the third error is cleared. In this case, the error history is stored in the order of third error occurrence → fourth error occurrence, and the error history screen is also configured to display the fourth error occurrence → third error occurrence from top to bottom (from newest to oldest). In this way, even if multiple errors occur during setting check, if the error notification priority is the same, the errors will be notified in the order in which they occurred, and will be stored in the error history in the order in which they occurred.

Also, the configuration may be such that error detection is not performed during the setting check mode.
In this configuration, even if an error occurs, the error will not be notified and the error will not be recorded in the error history.
By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent an unreported error from remaining in the error history, which could lead the administrator to mistakenly believe that the gaming machine is malfunctioning or that some kind of fraud has occurred.

Furthermore, if an error is detected while the error history screen is displayed in the setting confirmation mode, the error history may be updated in real time, and the error history screen may also be updated.
With this configuration, the administrator can immediately know that an error has occurred even while the error history is being displayed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when a specific error occurs, the specific error and a monitoring error of the sensor that detects the specific error may be notified. Note that a "specific error" is an error whose detailed cause can be identified, and a "monitoring error of the sensor that detects the specific error" is an error whose detailed cause cannot be identified.
For example, when a hopper congestion error occurs, the device may be configured to notify the user of both the hopper congestion error and a dispensing sensor monitoring error, which indicates that either an error related to the hopper 44 has occurred.

Here, if a hopper congestion error occurs during normal operation (a state in which errors can be reported when the reels are not rotating or in setting confirmation mode), a hopper congestion error and a payout sensor monitoring error will be reported, and the error history will be stored in the order of payout sensor monitoring error occurrence → hopper congestion error occurrence, and the error history screen may also be configured to display from top to bottom (from newest to oldest) as hopper congestion error occurrence → payout sensor monitoring error occurrence.
In addition, the error history when the hopper congestion error is cleared is stored in the order of dispensing sensor monitoring error cleared → hopper congestion error cleared, and the error history screen may also be configured to display hopper congestion error cleared → dispensing sensor monitoring error cleared in order from top to bottom (from newest to oldest).
In other words, if a hopper congestion error occurs under normal circumstances and the error history screen is displayed after the hopper congestion error is cleared, the screen may be configured to display the following in order from top to bottom (starting from the most recent history): Hopper congestion error cleared → Dispensing sensor monitoring error cleared → Hopper congestion error occurs → Dispensing sensor monitoring error occurs.

On the other hand, if a hopper congestion error occurs while the error history screen is displayed during the setting confirmation mode, a hopper congestion error and a dispensing sensor monitoring error will be notified after the setting confirmation mode ends, and the error history will be stored in the order of hopper congestion error occurrence → dispensing sensor monitoring error occurrence, and when the error history screen is displayed again, the error history screen will also be displayed in order from top to bottom (from the most recent history) as dispensing sensor monitoring error occurrence → hopper congestion error occurrence.
In addition, when the hopper congestion error is cleared, the error history is stored in the order of dispensing sensor monitoring error cleared → hopper congestion error cleared, and the error history screen may also be configured to display hopper congestion error cleared → dispensing sensor monitoring error cleared in that order from top to bottom.
In other words, if a hopper congestion error occurs during setting confirmation mode and the error history screen is displayed again after the hopper congestion error is cleared, the screen may be configured to display the following in order from top to bottom (starting from the most recent history): Hopper congestion error cleared → Dispensing sensor monitoring error cleared → Dispensing sensor monitoring error occurred → Hopper congestion error occurred.

By configuring it in this way, if a specific error occurs while the error history screen is displayed, when the error history screen is displayed again, the specific error will be displayed from the top (starting with the most recent history) followed by a monitoring error for the sensor that detected the specific error. This means that even if fraud is attempted in order to learn the type of error, the type of error will not be immediately revealed.

Furthermore, by configuring it in this way, the error resolution history on the error history screen will be the same both under normal circumstances and when the error history screen is displayed, allowing for an accurate history to be kept.

<Time required for various processes>
The time required for various processes to realize various operations in this embodiment will be described.

In this embodiment, the clock frequency of the main control CPU included in the main control chip mounted on the main control board is 10 MHz, so the time per cycle, which is the smallest unit of cycles indicating the execution time of various instructions, is 0.0001 ms. In other words, the time elapsed during instruction execution is determined by the number of cycles required to fetch and execute the instruction.

For example, the LD instruction (LD_r,n) to store the value n in register r requires 2 cycles, meaning that 0.0002 ms will elapse when the LD instruction is executed.

Since executing a software module consisting of multiple instructions requires the total number of cycles specified for each instruction, the number of cycles is an important parameter when creating a software module.

<<Explanation regarding the lighting control of the bet number display lamp>>
Here, regarding the lighting process of the bet number display lamp, we will explain the case where, when a replay is determined as a result of the internal lottery by the internal lottery means of a specified game that has been started with three bets in a specified game state, three bets are automatically bet as a process to grant a replay after the specified game has ended.

The lighting of the bet number display lamps is controlled using dynamic lighting control. Specifically, the execution cycle of the interrupt process is 2.235 ms, and the lighting location changes for each interrupt process, cycling through the lighting locations over multiple interrupt processes (five interrupt processes in this embodiment). For example, when the LED display counter value is 1, the upper and lower digits of the credit number display are lit, but the other LEDs are not lit; when the LED display counter value is 2, the upper and lower digits of the earned coin display are lit, but the other LEDs are not lit; when the LED display counter value is 3, the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp are lit, but the other LEDs are not lit; when the LED display counter value is 4, the replay lamp is lit, but the other LEDs are not lit; and when the LED display counter value is 5, the start lamp and medal insertion possible lamp are lit, but the other LEDs are not lit.

By dynamically controlling all lamps managed by the main control means, power consumption and lamp wear can be reduced compared to static lighting, in which lamps are always on. With dynamic lighting control, the various lamps will flash rapidly, but because the cycle is such that the various lamps are turned on again before they are completely turned off, it will appear to the human eye that they remain lit. In other words, 11.175 ms (2.235 ms x 5 interrupts) after a specific lamp (e.g., bed 1 lamp, bed 2 lamp, bed 3 lamp) is turned off by interrupt processing, the specific lamp will not be completely turned off. It takes approximately 20 ms from the time the specific lamp is turned off until it is completely turned off.

Note that the combination of LED display counter value and target lamp is just an example, and the 1 BET lamp, 2 BET lamp, and 3 BET lamp do not have to be lit when the LED display counter value is the same (for example, the 1 BET lamp may be lit when the LED display counter value is 1, the 2 BET lamp may be lit when the LED display counter value is 2, and the 3 BET lamp may be lit when the LED display counter value is 3). Lamps lit using this type of dynamic lighting control are also treated as "lit" here.

The lighting control of the bet number display lamps may also be controlled using static lighting control. In this case, while the 1 to 3 bet lamps are lit, the values in the RWM areas for the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp lighting display will not become 0 during interrupt processing. However, when the 1 to 3 bet lamps are turned off, as with dynamic lighting control, the values in the RWM areas for the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp lighting display are stored as 0 during interrupt processing. Furthermore, as with dynamic lighting control, it takes approximately 20 ms from the time the values in the RWM areas for the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp lighting display are stored as 0 during interrupt processing until the bet lamps are completely turned off.

The bet number indicator lamp remains lit during the specified game described above. In other words, during a game that begins with three bets, the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp remain lit. When the specified game ends, the game progress main game end check process shown in Figure 9 is executed. Note that the game end check process may also be referred to as the process related to the end of one game. Furthermore, the game value input process executed thereafter may also be referred to as the process related to the start of one game. Furthermore, when indicating either the game end check process or the game value input process, they may also be referred to as the specified process executed at a specified timing after all reels have stopped.

There are several possible patterns for the lighting of the 1 BET lamp, 2 BET lamp, and 3 BET lamp after a predetermined game has finished, so each pattern will be explained below.

<<Pattern 1: The coin count display data clearing process included in the game end check process clears (initializes) the values in the RWM's 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp display memory areas to 0. Then, the automatic insertion process included in the game value insertion process simultaneously illuminates the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp.>>

During the game end check process, the values in the RWM's memory area for displaying the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp are cleared to 0 (initialized) (number of coins inserted display data clear process). By clearing the values in the RWM area for displaying the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp to 0 in this way, the bet lamps corresponding to the next automatically inserted number can be turned on.

Note that even if the game end check process executes a process to clear (initialize) the values in the RWM memory area for displaying the 1 BET, 2 BET, and 3 BET lamps to 0, the 1 BET, 2 BET, and 3 BET lamps do not immediately turn off. This is because the interrupt process controls the lighting of various LEDs. The interrupt process checks the value of the RWM area for displaying the 1 BET, 2 BET, and 3 BET lamps, and if it is 0, the 1 BET, 2 BET, and 3 BET lamps are turned off. Note that even when the control of the lighting of various LEDs is executed and a lamp switches from on to off, there is a slight lag before a person actually perceives it as off, as it takes time for the signal to be transmitted and for the lamp to turn off.

For this reason, even if the game end check process executes a process to clear (initialize) the values in the RWM's 1 BET lamp, 2 BET lamp, and 3 BET lamp lighting display memory area to 0 (turning them off), the actual time required to turn them off will be the sum of the time from the time the game end check process executes the process to clear (initialize) the values in the RWM's 1 BET lamp, 2 BET lamp, and 3 BET lamp lighting display memory area to 0 until the interrupt process stops the output of the lighting signals for the 1 BET lamp, 2 BET lamp, and 3 BET lamp, and the time until the 1 BET lamp, 2 BET lamp, and 3 BET lamp are actually completely turned off.

After the game completion check process is executed in the game progress main process, the game value insertion process is executed. The automatic insertion process executed in the game value insertion process stores the number of inserted medals when replay is activated, and executes a process to set the value of the RWM 1 BET lamp, 2 BET lamp, and 3 BET lamp lighting display memory area to 1 (the value indicating lighting) (lighting process).

Note that even if the automatic insertion process sets the value of the memory area for displaying the 1 BED, 2 BED, and 3 BED lamps to 1, the 1 BED, 2 BED, and 3 BED lamps will not immediately light up. Instead, the interrupt process controls the lighting of various LEDs and checks the value of the RWM area for displaying the 1 BED, 2 BED, and 3 BED lamps, and if it is 1, the 1 BED, 2 BED, and 3 BED lamps will light up. Similarly, there may be a slight lag before the lamps are fully lit due to the signal transmission time and the lamp lighting time.

In this way, the 1 BET lamp, 2 BET lamp, and 3 BET lamp that were lit during the game end check process for a game in which a replay was won are turned off, and then the 1 BET lamp, 2 BET lamp, and 3 BET lamp are turned on during the subsequent automatic insertion process.

In this configuration, the game end check process for a game in which a replay is won is executed, and the automatic insertion process is executed before the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp are completely extinguished, and then an interrupt process is executed after that, causing the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp to begin lighting up. In other words, the game end check process for a game in which a replay is won is executed, and the value in the RWM's memory area for displaying the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp lighting is cleared to 0, and then the automatic insertion process is executed before the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp are completely extinguished, and then an interrupt process is executed after that, causing the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp to begin lighting up.

Here, Figure 90 shows the values in the memory area for displaying the 1 BET lamp, 2 BET lamp, and 3 BET lamp lighting status of the RWM, and the lighting status of the 1 BET lamp, 2 BET lamp, and 3 BET lamp. Note that there is no correlation between the length of the horizontal axis in Figure 90 and the elapsed time.

Timing T1 in Figure 90 is the timing when the value of the memory area for lighting the RWM's 1 BET lamp, 2 BET lamp, and 3 BET lamp becomes 0 during the game end check process.

Timing T2 in Figure 90 is the timing when the 1 BET lamp, 2 BET lamp, and 3 BET lamp begin to turn off during the interrupt processing executed after the game end check processing.

Timing T3 in Figure 90 is the timing when the value of the memory area for lighting the RWM's 1 bed lamp, 2 bed lamp, and 3 bed lamp becomes 1 during the automatic insertion process.

Timing T4 in Figure 90 is the timing when the 1 bed lamp, 2 bed lamp, and 3 bed lamp begin to light up during the interrupt processing executed after the automatic insertion processing.

Timing T5 in Figure 90 is the time when the 1 BET lamp, 2 BET lamp, and 3 BET lamp are fully lit.

The time from T1 to T2 and the time from T3 to T4 in Figure 90 vary depending on the timing of the interrupt process. For example, if the interrupt process is started immediately after the values in the memory area for displaying the 1 BET lamp, 2 BET lamp, and 3 BET lamp of the RWM are set to 0 during the game completion check process, the time from T1 to T2 is the time until control over the lighting of the various LEDs within the interrupt process is executed. Also, for example, if the interrupt process is started 2 ms after the values in the memory area for displaying the 1 BET lamp, 2 BET lamp, and 3 BET lamp of the RWM are set to 0 during the game completion check process, the time from T1 to T2 is the time until control over the lighting of the various LEDs within the interrupt process is executed plus 2 ms. Also, for example, the time from T3 to T4 is the time until control over the lighting of the various LEDs within the interrupt process is executed when the interrupt process is started immediately after the values in the memory area for displaying the 1 BET lamp, 2 BET lamp, and 3 BET lamp are set to 1 during the automatic insertion process. For example, if the interrupt process is started 2 ms after the value of the memory area for lighting the 1 bed lamp, 2 bed lamp, and 3 bed lamp is set to 1 during the automatic insertion process, the time from T3 to T4 will be the time until control related to lighting the various LEDs in the interrupt process is executed plus 2 ms.

As shown in Figure 90, when a replay is won, the value of the memory area for displaying the 1 BET lamp, 2 BET lamp, and 3 BET lamp is stored as 1 in the automatic insertion process before the 1 BET lamp, 2 BET lamp, and 3 BET lamp are completely turned off from the time of the game end check process, making it possible to turn on the 1 BET lamp, 2 BET lamp, and 3 BET lamp before they are completely turned off.

To achieve this configuration, the total time between the time the RWM's BET 1, BET 2, and BET 3 lamps' illumination display memory area is set to 0 during the game end check process and the game value insertion process (cycle count A x 0.0001 ms) plus the time between the time the RWM's BET 1, BET 2, and BET 3 lamps' illumination display memory area is set to 1 during the automatic insertion process executed if replay is activated from the start of the game value insertion process (cycle count B x 0.0001 ms) plus the maximum time for two interrupt processes, 4.47 ms (2.235 ms x 2), must be less than the approximately 20 ms it takes for the lamps to completely turn off. To ensure the lamps appear to remain lit (as if they are not turned off), it is preferable to design the total time to be less than 11.175 ms (2.235 ms x 5 interrupts), which is the time required for one cycle of dynamic lighting control. Note that the maximum value for two interrupt processes is the maximum delay time for the interrupt process when turning the lamp off and the interrupt process when turning the lamp on.

In other words, the following relationship holds: number of cycles A x 0.0001 ms + number of cycles B x 0.0001 ms + 4.47 ms < 20 ms. In other words, the total number of cycles A + B must be less than 155,300. In addition, to make the lamp appear to be continuously lit (appear not to be turned off), the following relationship holds: number of cycles A x 0.0001 ms + number of cycles B x 0.0001 ms + 4.47 ms < 11.175 ms. In other words, the total number of cycles A + B must be less than 67,050. In this embodiment, the total number of cycles A + B is set to approximately 1,000, so both relationships hold.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to turn on the BED 1 lamp, BED 2 lamp, and BED 3 lamp before the BED 1 lamp, BED 2 lamp, and BED 3 lamp are completely extinguished.

<<Pattern 2: The coin count display data clearing process included in the game end check process clears (initializes) the values in the RWM's 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp display memory areas to 0, and then the automatic insertion process included in the game value insertion process sequentially illuminates the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp.>>

During the game end check process, the values in the RWM's memory area for displaying the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp are cleared to 0 (initialized) (number of coins inserted display data clear process). By clearing the values in the RWM area for displaying the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp to 0 in this way, the bet lamps corresponding to the next automatically inserted number can be turned on.

Note that even if the game end check process executes a process to clear (initialize) the values in the RWM memory area for displaying the 1 BET, 2 BET, and 3 BET lamps to 0, the 1 BET, 2 BET, and 3 BET lamps do not immediately turn off. This is because the interrupt process controls the lighting of various LEDs. The interrupt process checks the value of the RWM area for displaying the 1 BET, 2 BET, and 3 BET lamps, and if it is 0, the 1 BET, 2 BET, and 3 BET lamps are turned off. Note that even when the control of the lighting of various LEDs is executed and a lamp switches from on to off, there is a slight lag before a person actually perceives it as off, as it takes time for the signal to be transmitted and for the lamp to turn off.

For this reason, even if the game end check process executes the process of clearing (initializing) the values in the RWM's memory area for displaying the 1 BET lamp, 2 BET lamp, and 3 BET lamps to 0, in order for the lights to actually be turned off, it will take a total of the time from the time the game end check process executes the process of clearing (initializing) the values in the RWM's memory area for displaying the 1 BET lamp, 2 BET lamp, and 3 BET lamps to 0 until the interrupt process stops the output of the light signals for the 1 BET lamp, 2 BET lamp, and 3 BET lamp, plus the time until the 1 BET lamp, 2 BET lamp, and 3 BET lamp are actually completely turned off.

After the game completion check process is executed in the game progress main process, the game value insertion process is executed. The automatic insertion process executed in the game value insertion process stores the number of inserted medals and sets the value of the memory area for displaying the RWM 1 bet lamp to 1 (a value indicating it is lit) when replay is activated, sets the value of the memory area for displaying the 2 bet lamp to 1 (a value indicating it is lit), and sets the value of the memory area for displaying the 3 bet lamp to 1 (a value indicating it is lit).

Note that even if the automatic insertion process sets the value of the memory area for displaying the BED 1 lamp to 1, the memory area for displaying the BED 2 lamp to 1, and the memory area for displaying the BED 3 lamp to 1, the BED 1, BED 2, and BED 3 lamps will not immediately light up. Instead, the interrupt process checks the value of the RWM area for displaying the BED 1, BED 2, and BED 3 lamps, and if it is 1, the BED 1, BED 2, and BED 3 lamps will light up. Similarly, there will be a slight lag before the lamps are fully lit due to the signal transmission time and the lamp lighting time.

In this way, the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp that were lit during the game end check process for a game in which a replay was won are turned off, and then the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp are turned on during the subsequent automatic insertion process.

In this configuration, the game end check process for a game in which a replay is won is executed, and the automatic insertion process is executed before the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp are completely extinguished, and then an interrupt process is executed after that, causing the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp to begin lighting up. In other words, the game end check process for a game in which a replay is won is executed, and the value in the RWM's memory area for displaying the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp lighting is cleared to 0, and then the automatic insertion process is executed before the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp are completely extinguished, and then an interrupt process is executed after that, causing the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp to begin lighting up.

Here, Figure 91 shows the values in the memory area for displaying the 1 BET lamp, 2 BET lamp, and 3 BET lamp lighting status of the RWM, and the lighting status of the 1 BET lamp, 2 BET lamp, and 3 BET lamp. Note that there is no correlation between the length of the horizontal axis in Figure 91 and the elapsed time.

Timing T1 in Figure 91 is the timing when the value of the memory area for lighting the RWM's 1 BET lamp, 2 BET lamp, and 3 BET lamp becomes 0 during the game end check process.

Timing T2 in Figure 91 is the timing when the 1 BET lamp, 2 BET lamp, and 3 BET lamp begin to turn off during the interrupt processing executed after the game end check processing.

Timing T3 in Figure 91 is the timing when the value in the memory area for lighting the RWM 1 bed lamp becomes 1 during the automatic insertion process.

Timing T4 in Figure 91 is the timing when the value in the memory area for displaying the RWM's 2 bed lamps becomes 1 during the automatic insertion process.

Timing T5 in Figure 91 is the timing when the value in the memory area for lighting the RWM's 3 bed lamps becomes 1 during the automatic insertion process.

Timing T6 in Figure 91 is the timing when the 1 bed lamp, 2 bed lamp, and 3 bed lamp begin to light up during the interrupt processing executed after the automatic insertion processing.

Timing T7 in Figure 91 is the time when the 1 BET lamp, 2 BET lamp, and 3 BET lamp are fully lit.

The time from T1 to T2 and the time from T3 to T6 in Figure 91 will vary depending on the timing of the interrupt process. For example, if the interrupt process is started immediately after the values in the memory area for displaying the 1 BET lamp, 2 BET lamp, and 3 BET lamp of the RWM are set to 0 in the game completion check process, the time from T1 to T2 will be the time until control over the lighting of the various LEDs within the interrupt process is executed. Also, for example, if the interrupt process is started 2 ms after the values in the memory area for displaying the 1 BET lamp, 2 BET lamp, and 3 BET lamp of the RWM are set to 0 in the game completion check process, the time from T1 to T2 will be the time until control over the lighting of the various LEDs within the interrupt process is executed plus 2 ms. For example, if the automatic insertion process sets the value of the memory area for displaying the illumination of bed lamp 1 to 1, the value of the memory area for displaying the illumination of bed lamp 2 to 1, and then sets the value of the memory area for displaying the illumination of bed lamp 3 to 1, and then an interrupt process is started immediately after that, the time from T3 to T6 will be the time until control over the illumination of various LEDs in the interrupt process is executed.For example, if the automatic insertion process sets the value of the memory area for displaying the illumination of bed lamp 1 to 1, the value of the memory area for displaying the illumination of bed lamp 2 to 1, and then sets the value of the memory area for displaying the illumination of bed lamp 3 to 1, and then an interrupt process is started 2 ms later, the time from T3 to T6 will be the time until control over the illumination of various LEDs in the interrupt process is executed plus 2 ms.

As shown in Figure 91, when a replay is won, the automatic insertion process stores 1 in the memory area for displaying the 1 bet lamp, stores 1 in the memory area for displaying the 2 bet lamp, and stores 1 in the memory area for displaying the 3 bet lamp, before the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp are completely turned off from the game end check process. This makes it possible to turn on the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp before they are completely turned off.

In order to configure it in this way, it is necessary to design it so that the total time from when the values in the memory area for displaying the RWM's 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp are set to 0 in the game end check process until the game value input process (cycle number A x 0.0001 ms), the time from the start of the game value input process until the process of setting the value in the memory area for displaying the RWM's 1 bet lamp to 1 by the automatic input process executed when replay is activated in the game value input process (cycle number B x 0.0001 ms), the time until the process of setting the value in the memory area for displaying the 2 bet lamp to 1 (cycle number C x 0.0001 ms), the time until the process of setting the value in the memory area for displaying the 3 bet lamp to 1 (cycle number D x 0.0001 ms), and the maximum value of 4.47 ms (2.235 ms x 2) for two interrupt processes is less than the approximately 20 ms it takes for the lamps to turn off completely. In order to make the lamp appear to be continuously lit (appear not to be turned off), it is desirable to design it so that it is less than 11.175 ms (2.235 ms x 5 interrupts), which is the time for one cycle of dynamic lighting control. Note that the maximum value for two interrupt processes is the maximum delay time for the interrupt process when turning the lamp off and the interrupt process when turning the lamp on.

In other words, the following relationship holds: number of cycles A x 0.0001 ms + number of cycles B x 0.0001 ms + number of cycles C x 0.0001 ms + number of cycles D x 0.0001 ms + 4.47 ms < 20 ms. In other words, the total number of cycles A + B + C + D must be less than 155,300. To make the lamp appear to be continuously lit (appear to be continuously lit), the following relationship holds: number of cycles A x 0.0001 ms + number of cycles B x 0.0001 ms + number of cycles C x 0.0001 ms + number of cycles D x 0.0001 ms + 4.47 ms < 11.175 ms. In other words, the total number of cycles A + B must be less than 67,050. In this embodiment, the total number of cycles A + B + C + D is approximately 1,500, so both relationships hold.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to turn on the BED 1 lamp, BED 2 lamp, and BED 3 lamp before the BED 1 lamp, BED 2 lamp, and BED 3 lamp are completely extinguished.

Furthermore, although the time from T3 to T4 and from T4 to T5 is extremely short (shorter than the interrupt processing cycle), it is possible that interrupt processing will be executed between T3 and T5. In such a case, the 2 BET lamp and 3 BET lamp may be completely extinguished. However, because the time from T3 to T4 and from T4 to T5 is shorter than the interrupt processing, it is possible to immediately turn on the extinguished lamps with the next interrupt processing, making it possible to quickly turn on the lamps even in the rare event that occurs, and maintain the tempo of play.

<<Pattern 3: The coin count display data clearing process included in the game value insertion process clears (initializes) the values in the RWM's 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp display memory areas to 0, and then the automatic insertion process lights up the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp simultaneously.>>

During the game value insertion process, a process is executed to clear (initialize) the values in the memory area of the RWM used to display the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp to 0 (inserted coin count display data clear process). By clearing the values in the RWM area used to display the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp to 0 in this way, the bet lamps corresponding to the next automatically inserted number can be lit.

Note that even if the value of the RWM memory area for displaying the 1 BET, 2 BET, and 3 BET lamps is cleared to 0 (initialized) during the coin count display data clear process of the gaming value insertion process, the 1 BET, 2 BET, and 3 BET lamps will not immediately turn off. This is because the interrupt process controls the lighting of various LEDs. The interrupt process checks the value of the RWM area for displaying the 1 BET, 2 BET, and 3 BET lamps, and if it is 0, the 1 BET, 2 BET, and 3 BET lamps are turned off. Note that even when the control of the lighting of various LEDs is executed and a lamp switches from on to off, it takes time for the signal to be transmitted and for the lamp to turn off, so there will be a slight lag before a person actually perceives the lamp to be turned off.

For this reason, even if the inserted coin count display data clearing process of the gaming value insertion process clears (initializes) the values in the RWM's 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp lighting display memory area to 0, in order for the lights to actually be turned off, it will take the combined time of the time from the time the inserted coin count display data clearing process of the gaming value insertion process clears (initializes) the values in the RWM's 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp lighting display memory area to 0 being cleared (initialized) until the output of the lighting signals for the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp is stopped by the interrupt process, and the time until the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp actually turn off completely.

The game value insertion process in the game progress main process includes an automatic insertion process (which is executed after the insertion count display data clear process). During the automatic insertion process, when replay is activated, the number of inserted medals is stored and the value of the memory area for displaying the RWM 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp is set to 1 (the value indicating that they are lit).

Note that even if the value of the memory area for displaying the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp is set to 1 during the gaming value input process, the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp will not immediately light up. Instead, the value of the RWM area for displaying the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp is checked during the control of the lighting of various LEDs using interrupt processing, and if it is 1, the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp will light up. Similarly, there will be a slight lag until the lamps are fully lit due to the signal transmission time and the lighting time of the lamps.

In this way, the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp that were lit during the inserted coin count display data clearing process of the gaming value insertion process after a game in which a replay is won are turned off, and then the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp are turned on during the automatic insertion process of the subsequent gaming value insertion process.

In this configuration, the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp are configured to begin lighting up due to interrupt processing after the automatic insertion process of the gaming value insertion process is executed, before the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp are completely turned off due to the execution of the insertion number display data clearing process of the gaming value insertion process after a game in which a replay is won. In other words, the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp lighting up due to interrupt processing after the automatic insertion process of the gaming value insertion process is executed, after the execution of the insertion number display data clearing process of the gaming value insertion process after a game in which a replay is won, clears the value of the RWM's memory area for displaying the lighting of the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamps to 0, and then the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp are configured to begin lighting up due to interrupt processing after the execution of the automatic insertion process of the gaming value insertion process, before the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp are completely turned off.

Here, Figure 92 shows the values in the memory area for displaying the 1 BET lamp, 2 BET lamp, and 3 BET lamp lighting status of the RWM, and the lighting status of the 1 BET lamp, 2 BET lamp, and 3 BET lamp. Note that there is no correlation between the length of the horizontal axis in Figure 90 and the elapsed time.

Timing T1 in Figure 92 is the timing when the values in the memory area for displaying the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp of the RWM become 0 during the insertion number display data clearing process of the gaming value insertion process.

Timing T2 in Figure 92 is the timing when the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp begin to turn off during the interrupt process executed after the inserted coin count display data clear process of the gaming value insertion process.

Timing T3 in Figure 92 is the timing when the value of the memory area for lighting the RWM's 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp becomes 1 during the automatic insertion process of the gaming value insertion process.

Timing T4 in Figure 92 is the timing when the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp begin to light up during the interrupt processing executed after the automatic insertion processing of the gaming value insertion processing.

Timing T5 in Figure 92 is the time when the 1 BET lamp, 2 BET lamp, and 3 BET lamp are fully lit.

The time from T1 to T2 and the time from T3 to T4 in Figure 92 will vary depending on the timing of the interrupt process. For example, if the interrupt process is started immediately after the values in the memory area for displaying the 1 BET lamp, 2 BET lamp, and 3 BET lamp of the RWM are set to 0 in the process of clearing the number of inserted coins display data in the game value insertion process, the time from T1 to T2 will be the time until control over the lighting of the various LEDs in the interrupt process is executed. Also, for example, if the interrupt process is started 2 ms after the values in the memory area for displaying the 1 BET lamp, 2 BET lamp, and 3 BET lamp of the RWM are set to 0 in the process of clearing the number of inserted coins display data in the game value insertion process, the time from T1 to T2 will be the time until control over the lighting of the various LEDs in the interrupt process is executed plus 2 ms. For example, if the interrupt process is started immediately after the value in the memory area for displaying the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp is set to 1 during the automatic insertion process of the gaming value insertion process, the time from T3 to T4 will be the time until control over the lighting of the various LEDs within the interrupt process is executed.For example, if the interrupt process is started 2 ms after the value in the memory area for displaying the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp is set to 1 during the automatic insertion process of the gaming value insertion process, the time from T3 to T4 will be the time until control over the lighting of the various LEDs within the interrupt process is executed plus 2 ms.

As shown in Figure 92, when a replay is won, the value of the memory area for displaying the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp is stored as 1 in the automatic insertion process of the gaming value insertion process before the insertion number display data clear process of the gaming value insertion process and the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp are completely turned off. This makes it possible to turn on the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp before they are completely turned off.

To achieve this configuration, the total time (cycle count A x 0.0001 ms) between the time when the values in the memory area for displaying the RWM's 1 BET, 2 BET, and 3 BET lamps are cleared to 0 during the coin count display data clear process of the gaming value input process and the time when the values in the memory area for displaying the RWM's 1 BET, 2 BET, and 3 BET lamps are cleared to 1 during the automatic input process of the gaming value input process, plus the maximum time of 4.47 ms (2.235 ms x 2) for two interrupt processes, must be designed to be less than the approximately 20 ms it takes for the lamps to turn off completely. To ensure the lamps appear to remain lit continuously (i.e., not turned off), it is preferable to design the total time to be less than 11.175 ms (2.235 ms x 5 interrupts), which is the time required for one cycle of dynamic lighting control. The maximum time for two interrupt processes is the maximum delay between the interrupt process for turning the lamps off and the interrupt process for turning the lamps on.

In other words, the following relationship holds: cycle number A x 0.0001 ms + 4.47 ms < 20 ms. In other words, the cycle number A must be less than 155,300. Furthermore, to make the lamp appear to be continuously lit (appear not to be turned off), the following relationship holds: cycle number A x 0.0001 ms + 4.47 ms < 11.175 ms. In other words, the cycle number A must be less than 67,050. In this embodiment, the cycle number A is set to approximately 800, so both relationships hold true.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to turn on the BED 1 lamp, BED 2 lamp, and BED 3 lamp before the BED 1 lamp, BED 2 lamp, and BED 3 lamp are completely extinguished.

<<Pattern 4: The coin count display data clearing process included in the game value insertion process clears (initializes) the values in the RWM's 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp display memory areas to 0, and then the automatic insertion process lights up the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp in sequence.>>

In the coin count display data clearing process of the gaming value insertion process, the values in the RWM's memory area for displaying the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp are cleared to 0 (initialized) (coin count display data clearing process). By clearing the values in the RWM area for displaying the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp to 0 in this way, the bet lamps corresponding to the next automatically inserted number can be lit.

Note that even if the value of the RWM memory area for displaying the 1 BET, 2 BET, and 3 BET lamps is cleared to 0 (initialized) during the coin count display data clear process of the gaming value insertion process, the 1 BET, 2 BET, and 3 BET lamps will not immediately turn off. This is because the interrupt process controls the lighting of various LEDs. The interrupt process checks the value of the RWM area for displaying the 1 BET, 2 BET, and 3 BET lamps, and if it is 0, the 1 BET, 2 BET, and 3 BET lamps are turned off. Note that even when the control of the lighting of various LEDs is executed and a lamp switches from on to off, it takes time for the signal to be transmitted and for the lamp to turn off, so there will be a slight lag before a person actually perceives the lamp to be turned off.

For this reason, even if the inserted coin count display data clearing process of the gaming value insertion process clears (initializes) the values in the RWM's 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp lighting display memory area to 0, in order for the lights to actually be turned off, it will take the combined time of the time from the time the inserted coin count display data clearing process of the gaming value insertion process clears (initializes) the values in the RWM's 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp lighting display memory area to 0 being cleared (initialized) until the output of the lighting signals for the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp is stopped by the interrupt process, and the time until the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp actually turn off completely.

The game value insertion process in the game progress main process includes an automatic insertion process (which is executed after the insertion number display data clear process). The automatic insertion process stores the number of inserted medals when replay is activated, and sets the value of the memory area for displaying the RWM 1 bet lamp to 1 (a value indicating it is lit), sets the value of the memory area for displaying the 2 bet lamp to 1 (a value indicating it is lit), and sets the value of the memory area for displaying the 3 bet lamp to 1 (a value indicating it is lit).

Note that even if the automatic insertion process sets the value of the memory area for displaying the BED 1 lamp to 1, the memory area for displaying the BED 2 lamp to 1, and the memory area for displaying the BED 3 lamp to 1, the BED 1, BED 2, and BED 3 lamps will not immediately light up. Instead, the interrupt process checks the value of the RWM area for displaying the BED 1, BED 2, and BED 3 lamps, and if it is 1, the BED 1, BED 2, and BED 3 lamps will light up. Similarly, there will be a slight lag before the lamps are fully lit due to the signal transmission time and the lamp lighting time.

In this way, the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp that were lit during the insertion number display data clearing process of the game value insertion process for a game in which a replay was won are turned off, and then during the subsequent automatic insertion process, the 1 bet lamp, the 2 bet lamp, and the 3 bet lamp are turned on.

In this configuration, the execution of the input coin count display data clearing process in the game value input process for a game in which a replay is won causes the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp to begin lighting up due to interrupt processing after the automatic input process is executed, before the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp are completely turned off. In other words, the execution of the input coin count display data clearing process in the game value input process for a game in which a replay is won causes the value in the RWM's memory area for displaying the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp to be cleared to 0, and the execution of the automatic input process before the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp are completely turned off causes the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp to begin lighting up due to interrupt processing after the automatic input process.

Here, Figure 93 shows the values in the memory area for displaying the 1 BET lamp, 2 BET lamp, and 3 BET lamp lighting status of the RWM, and the lighting status of the 1 BET lamp, 2 BET lamp, and 3 BET lamp. Note that there is no correlation between the length of the horizontal axis in Figure 93 and the elapsed time.

Timing T1 in Figure 93 is the timing when the values in the memory area for displaying the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp of the RWM become 0 during the insertion number display data clearing process of the gaming value insertion process.

Timing T2 in Figure 93 is the timing when the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp begin to turn off during the interrupt process executed after the inserted coin count display data clear process of the gaming value insertion process.

Timing T3 in Figure 93 is the timing when the value in the memory area for displaying the RWM 1 bet lamp becomes 1 during the automatic insertion process of the gaming value insertion process.

Timing T4 in Figure 93 is the timing when the value in the memory area for displaying the RWM 2 bet lamp becomes 1 during the automatic insertion process of the gaming value insertion process.

Timing T5 in Figure 93 is the timing when the value in the memory area for displaying the RWM's 3 bet lamp becomes 1 during the automatic insertion process of the gaming value insertion process.

Timing T6 in Figure 93 is the timing when the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp begin to light up during the interrupt processing executed after the automatic insertion processing of the gaming value insertion processing.

Timing T7 in Figure 93 is the time when the 1 BET lamp, 2 BET lamp, and 3 BET lamp are fully lit.

The time from T1 to T2 and the time from T3 to T6 in Figure 93 will vary depending on the timing of the interrupt process. For example, if the interrupt process is started immediately after the values in the memory area for displaying the 1 BET lamp, 2 BET lamp, and 3 BET lamp of the RWM are set to 0 in the process of clearing the number of inserted coins display data in the game value insertion process, the time from T1 to T2 will be the time until control over the lighting of the various LEDs in the interrupt process is executed. Also, for example, if the interrupt process is started 2 ms after the values in the memory area for displaying the 1 BET lamp, 2 BET lamp, and 3 BET lamp of the RWM are set to 0 in the process of clearing the number of inserted coins display data in the game value insertion process, the time from T1 to T2 will be the time until control over the lighting of the various LEDs in the interrupt process is executed plus 2 ms. For example, if the value of the memory area for displaying the illumination of the bet 1 lamp is set to 1 in the automatic insertion process of the gaming value insertion process, the value of the memory area for displaying the illumination of the bet 2 lamp is set to 1, and then the value of the memory area for displaying the illumination of the bet 3 lamp is set to 1, and then an interrupt process is started immediately after that, the time from T3 to T6 is the time until control over the illumination of the various LEDs in the interrupt process is executed plus 2 ms.

As shown in Figure 93, when a replay is won, the automatic insertion process of the gaming value insertion process stores 1 in the memory area for displaying the illumination of the 1 bet lamp, stores 1 in the memory area for displaying the illumination of the 2 bet lamp, and stores 1 in the memory area for displaying the illumination of the 3 bet lamp, before the insertion number display data clear process of the gaming value insertion process until the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp are completely extinguished. This makes it possible to light up the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp before they are completely extinguished.

In order to configure it in this way, it is necessary to design it so that the total time (cycle number A x 0.0001 ms) from the time when the value of the memory area for displaying the lighting of the RWM's 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp is set to 0 in the input number display data clear process of the gaming value input process until the time when the value of the memory area for displaying the lighting of the RWM's 1 bet lamp is set to 1 by the automatic input process of the gaming value input process, the time until the value of the memory area for displaying the lighting of the 2 bet lamp is set to 1 (cycle number B x 0.0001 ms), the time until the value of the memory area for displaying the lighting of the 3 bet lamp is set to 1 (cycle number C x 0.0001 ms), and the maximum value of 4.47 ms (2.235 ms x 2) for two interrupt processes is less than the approximately 20 ms it takes for the lamps to turn off completely. In order to make the lamp appear to be continuously lit (appear not to be turned off), it is desirable to design it so that it is less than 11.175 ms (2.235 ms x 5 interrupts), which is the time for one cycle of dynamic lighting control. Note that the maximum value for two interrupt processes is the maximum delay time for the interrupt process when turning the lamp off and the interrupt process when turning the lamp on.

In other words, the following relationship holds: number of cycles A x 0.0001 ms + number of cycles B x 0.0001 ms + number of cycles C x 0.0001 ms + 4.47 ms < 20 ms. In other words, the total number of cycles A + B + C must be less than 155,300. In addition, to make the lamp appear to be continuously lit (appear to be continuously lit), the following relationship holds: number of cycles A x 0.0001 ms + number of cycles B x 0.0001 ms + number of cycles C x 0.0001 ms + 4.47 ms < 11.175 ms. In other words, the total number of cycles A + B + C must be less than 67,050. In this embodiment, the total number of cycles A + B + C is approximately 900, so both relationships hold true.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to turn on the BED 1 lamp, BED 2 lamp, and BED 3 lamp before the BED 1 lamp, BED 2 lamp, and BED 3 lamp are completely extinguished.

Furthermore, although the time from T3 to T4 and from T4 to T5 is extremely short (shorter than the interrupt processing cycle), it is possible that interrupt processing will be executed between T3 and T5. In such a case, the 2 BET lamp and 3 BET lamp may be completely extinguished. However, because the time from T3 to T4 and from T4 to T5 is shorter than the interrupt processing, it is possible to immediately turn on the extinguished lamps with the next interrupt processing, making it possible to quickly turn on the lamps even in the rare event that occurs, and maintain the tempo of play.

Patterns 1 to 4 above were explained assuming dynamic lighting control, but the same relationship between the number of cycles and the time it takes for the bed lamp to turn off applies even with static lighting control. This is because the time it takes for the bed lamp to turn off completely from when it starts to turn off is the same (20 ms) whether dynamic lighting control or static lighting control is used.

In the above-mentioned patterns 2 and 4, the automatic insertion process adds one bet at a time, but visually it appears as if the bets are being added simultaneously. However, this is not limited to this. A timer can be set to indicate a waiting time each time the bet is added by one, and when the timer value reaches 0 in the timer update process for each interrupt process, the bet number can be updated from 1 to 2 and the timer can be set again, giving the player the visual impression that the bet lamps are lighting up sequentially.

In this case, the memory area for displaying the 1 bed lamp is set to store 1 after being cleared until the 1 bed lamp is completely turned off, and the memory area for displaying the 2 bed lamp and the memory area for displaying the 3 bed lamp may be set to be completely turned off after being cleared, or the 1 bed lamp may also be set to be completely turned off. Note that the timer value set when visually indicating the number of bets one by one must be longer than the interrupt period of 2.235 ms if static lighting control is used, and longer than the dynamic lighting period of 11.175 ms if static lighting control or dynamic lighting control is used. As an example, the timer value of the timer may be 30 ms.

Next, we will explain how the bet number display lamp lights up when the bet switch is operated.

When the machine is in a game standby state (waiting for a bet) with 0 bets, and the bet switch (a concept that includes the MAX bet switch and 1 bet switch) is operated, the 1 bet lamp will light up (when the MAX bet switch is operated, the 1 to 3 bet lamps will light up).

The interrupt process executes input port reading processing and input port data generation processing to determine whether the bet switch has been operated. When the bet switch is operated, data indicating that the bet switch has been operated is generated.

The game value input process, which is the main part of game progress, determines whether data relating to the operation of the bet switch has been stored, and if data relating to the operation of the bet switch has been stored, determines whether a bet is possible, and if a bet is possible, executes a process to add game medals one by one.

When adding game medals one by one, 1 is added to the RWM area that stores the number of bets, and then data displaying the number of inserted medals is generated and saved. Also, if the MAX BET switch is operated, the bet processing is repeated until the number of bets reaches 3, or until it is determined that a bet is no longer possible.

In such a situation, the time from when the bet switch operation is accepted to when the value of the inserted coin count display data for one bet is stored is configured to be shorter than the cycle of the interrupt process. Also, the time from when the bet switch operation is accepted to when the value of the inserted coin count display data for one bet is stored may be configured to be shorter than the cycle of the dynamic lighting control.

To achieve this configuration, A can be set so that the number of cycles from the start of the gaming value insertion process to the saving of the inserted coin count display data is A x 0.0001 ms < 2.235 ms. In other words, the number of cycles A from the start of the gaming value insertion process to the saving of the inserted coin count display data is configured to be less than 22,350. Furthermore, in cases where the time from accepting the operation of the bet switch to storing the value of the inserted coin count display data for one bet is configured to be shorter than the cycle of dynamic lighting control, A can be set so that the number of cycles A from the start of the gaming value insertion process to the saving of the inserted coin count display data is A x 0.0001 ms < 11.175 ms. In other words, the number of cycles A from the start of the gaming value insertion process to the saving of the inserted coin count display data is configured to be less than 111,750.

This configuration makes it possible to light up the 1 bet lamp in the shortest cycle possible using interrupt processing or dynamic lighting processing, which prevents disruption to the tempo of play from when the bet switch is operated until the 1 bet lamp lights up, increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Even if the lighting control for one bed lamp is static lighting control, there is no problem in comparing it with the shortest cycle of dynamic lighting control.

In addition, when the MAX BET switch is operated when the number of bets is 0, the 1 BET lamp, 2 BET lamp, and 3 BET lamp are illuminated in sequence, and the time between storing the value of the inserted coin count display data for 1 BET and storing the value of the inserted coin count display data for 2 BET is configured to be longer than the dynamic illumination period.

To achieve this configuration, if the number of cycles were set so that (number of cycles from storing the value of the number of coins inserted display data for one bet until storing the value of the number of coins inserted display data for two bets) × 0.0001 ms > 11.175 ms, bet processing would become redundant and would strain the program capacity of the main control means. Therefore, the number of cycles is set so that (number of cycles from storing the value of the number of coins inserted display data for one bet until storing the value of the number of coins inserted display data for two bets) × 0.0001 ms + wait time > 11.175 ms. In other words, the number of cycles and wait time are determined so that (number of cycles from storing the value of the number of coins inserted display data for one bet until storing the value of the number of coins inserted display data for two bets) × 0.0001 ms < 11.175 ms, and wait time > 11.175 ms - (number of cycles from storing the value of the number of coins inserted display data for one bet until storing the value of the number of coins inserted display data for two bets × 0.0001 ms).

The waiting time is set after the value of the inserted coin count display data for one bet is stored and before the value of the inserted coin count display data for two bets is stored. The waiting time is updated during this time, and when the waiting time reaches 0, the processing for two bets is executed.

In this case, the number of cycles from storing the value of the inserted coin count display data for one bet to storing the value of the inserted coin count display data for two bets is approximately 120, which satisfies the above relationship: 120 (number of cycles) x 0.0001 ms < 11.175 ms, 0.012 ms < 11.175 ms. Also, the standby time is 15 ms, which satisfies the above relationship: 15 ms (standby time) > 11.175 ms - (number of cycles from storing the value of the inserted coin count display data for one bet to storing the value of the inserted coin count display data for two bets x 0.0001 ms), 15 ms > 11.163 ms.

In the case of static lighting control, the time between storing the value of the inserted coin count display data for one bet and storing the value of the inserted coin count display data for two bets can be configured to be longer than the interrupt processing cycle.

To achieve this configuration, the number of cycles from storing the value of the inserted coin count display data for one bet until storing the value of the inserted coin count display data for two bets × 0.0001 ms + standby time > 2.235 ms. In other words, the number of cycles and standby time are determined so that the number of cycles from storing the value of the inserted coin count display data for one bet until storing the value of the inserted coin count display data for two bets × 0.0001 ms < 2.235 ms, and the standby time > 2.235 ms - (the number of cycles from storing the value of the inserted coin count display data for one bet until storing the value of the inserted coin count display data for two bets × 0.0001 ms).

In this case, the number of cycles from storing the value of the inserted coin count display data for one bet to storing the value of the inserted coin count display data for two bets is approximately 120, which satisfies the above relationship: 120 (number of cycles) x 0.0001 ms < 2.235 ms, 0.012 ms < 2.235 ms. Also, the standby time is 15 ms, which satisfies the above relationship: 15 ms (standby time) > 2.235 ms - (number of cycles from storing the value of the inserted coin count display data for one bet to storing the value of the inserted coin count display data for two bets x 0.0001 ms), 15 ms > 2.223 ms.

Regardless of whether dynamic lighting control or static lighting control is used, the above relationship only needs to be satisfied, so the number of cycles and waiting time from when the value of the inserted coin count display data for one bet is stored until the value of the inserted coin count display data for two bets is stored can be changed as appropriate.

The process between 1 bet and 2 bets described above is the same as the process between 2 bets and 3 bets.

By configuring it this way, when the 1st to 3rd bet lamps are lit in sequence, it is possible to prevent the bet lamps from lighting up simultaneously at the timing of interrupt processing, allowing the game to proceed at a good tempo and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Another possible configuration is for the wait time to be set during the lighting process of the interrupt process. In this case, the process for storing the values of the inserted coin count display data for bets 1 to 3 is performed at the same interval or at shorter intervals than the interrupt process, but the 2 bet lamp will not be lit if the wait time has not elapsed after the 1 bet lamp is lit during the interrupt process, and the 3 bet lamp will not be lit if the next set wait time has not elapsed after the 2 bet lamp is lit after the wait time has elapsed. By adopting this configuration, even in a specification where the 1 to 3 bet lamps are lit in sequence, it is possible to prevent the bet lamps from lighting up simultaneously at the timing of the interrupt process, allowing for a more satisfying gameplay and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

<<Explanation regarding the lighting control of the credit number display>>
Here, regarding the lighting process of the credit number display, we will explain the case where, when a small winning combination is determined as a result of the internal lottery by the internal lottery means of a specified game that has been started with three bets in a specified game state, eight game medals are added to the credits as a game medal awarding process after all reels have stopped.

For example, if the credit data "10" is stored in a specified memory area of the RWM and a symbol combination that pays out eight game medals stops, the credit number display will increment as follows: 11 → 12 → 13 → ... → 18.

The process of displaying the credit number on the credit number display controls the lighting of various LEDs during interrupt processing, and for each interrupt processing, the value of the credit data stored in a specified memory area of the RWM is obtained and the corresponding segment is lit.

At this time, the credit data is updated by one as part of the credit addition process, from 10 to 11 to 12 to ... to 18.

The credit data update interval is configured to be longer than the interrupt processing cycle. Specifically, the credit data update interval is 60 ms, and the interrupt processing cycle is 2.235 ms. When lighting the credit number display using dynamic lighting control, it is desirable to set the credit data update interval to be greater than one dynamic lighting cycle interval.

In this embodiment, the number of program cycles to add 1 credit is approximately 120, so 120 x 0.0001 ms = 0.012 ms, which is shorter than the cycle of interrupt processing. For this reason, during the credit addition process, a timer is set to wait after the credit data is changed from 10 to 11 in a specified memory area of the RWM. If the timer value becomes 0 during the timer update process for each interrupt process, it is updated from 11 to 12 and the timer is set again. The timer value set is 60 ms.

In this way, during the credit data addition process, in order to increment the credit display, a timer is set each time 1 credit is added, and if the timer value becomes 0 as a result of a subsequent timer update, the process of adding 1 to the credit data is repeated.

By configuring it in this way, the program size can be reduced, program readability can be improved, and updates to the credit count display can be displayed incrementally, improving the tempo of play and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, regarding the lighting process of the credit number display, we will explain the process that occurs when the settlement switch is operated while the credit number display is showing 10, causing the credit number display to become 0.

For example, if the number of bets is 0 and "10" is stored as credit data in a specified memory area of the RWM, and the settlement switch is operated to execute the settlement process, the credit number display will decrement as follows: 9 → 8 → 7 → ... → 0.

The process of displaying the credit number on the credit number display controls the lighting of various LEDs during interrupt processing, and for each interrupt processing, the value of the credit data stored in a specified memory area of the RWM is obtained and the corresponding segment is lit.

At this time, as part of the settlement process, the credit data is updated by 1, going from 10 to 9 to 8 to ... to 0.

The credit data update interval is configured to be longer than the interrupt processing cycle. Specifically, the credit data update interval is 40 ms, and the interrupt processing cycle is 2.235 ms. When lighting the credit number display using dynamic lighting control, it is desirable to set the credit data update interval to be greater than one dynamic lighting cycle interval.

In this embodiment, the number of cycles of the program that subtracts 1 credit during the settlement process is approximately 120, so 120 x 0.0001 ms = 0.012 ms, which is shorter than the cycle of the interrupt process. For this reason, during the settlement process, the credit data is changed from 10 to 9 in a specified memory area of the RWM, and a timer is set to indicate the waiting time. If the timer value becomes 0 during the timer update process for each interrupt process, it is updated from 9 to 8 and the timer is set again. The timer value set is 40 ms.

In this way, during the settlement process, in order to display the credit indicator as a decrement, a timer is set each time one credit is subtracted, and if the timer value subsequently becomes zero as a result of the timer update, the credit data is decremented by one again.

By configuring it in this way, the program size can be reduced, program readability can be improved, and updates to the credit count display can be displayed in decrements, improving the tempo of play and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

<<Explanation about the start ramp>>
Here, the lighting process of the start lamp will be described in the case where the MAX BET switch is operated after a predetermined game has ended in a predetermined game state, a bet of 3 is made, and the start lamp lights up.

For example, if the number of bets is 0 and "10" is stored as credit data in a specified memory area of the RWM, and the MAX BET switch is operated, the 3 BET lamp will light up, followed by the START lamp. Furthermore, if the previous game was a replay and 3 bets were placed using the automatic insertion process, the 3 BET lamp will light up, followed by the START lamp.

At this time, the system is designed so that the time between storing "1" indicating lighting in the 3 bed lamp lighting display memory area and storing "1" indicating lighting in the start lamp lighting display memory area is less than the interrupt period.

To achieve this design, the number of processing cycles from the processing after storing a "1" indicating that the lamp is on in the 3 bed lamp lighting display memory area until storing a "1" indicating that the lamp is on in the start lamp lighting display memory area x 0.0001 ms < 2.235 ms. In other words, the number of processing cycles from the processing after storing a "1" indicating that the lamp is on in the 3 bed lamp lighting display memory area until storing a "1" indicating that the lamp is on in the start lamp lighting display memory area must be less than 22,350.

Even if a "1" indicating an on state is stored in the 3rd bed lamp display memory area, it will take time for the 3rd bed lamp to light up, including the time until the LED lighting process is executed in the next interrupt process and the time for the 3rd bed lamp to fully light up. Therefore, by setting the number of processing cycles from the time a "1" indicating an on state is stored in the 3rd bed lamp display memory area until a "1" indicating an on state is stored in the start lamp display memory area x 0.0001 ms < 2.235 ms, the 3rd bed lamp and the start lamp can be lit simultaneously or with a delay of one interrupt. In other words, if a "1" indicating an on state is stored in the start lamp display memory area between the time a "1" indicating an on state is stored in the 3rd bed lamp display memory area and the time the next interrupt process is started, the 3rd bed lamp and the start lamp will light up simultaneously. However, if a "1" indicating an on state is stored in the start lamp display memory area after the interrupt process is executed after a "1" indicating an on state is stored in the 3rd bed lamp display memory area, the 3rd bed lamp and the start lamp will light with a delay of one interrupt.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to notify the player that they can play without delay after the 3-bet lamp lights up, improving the tempo of play and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, regarding the start lamp lighting process, we will explain what happens when the start switch is operated while the start lamp is on, causing the start lamp to turn off.

For example, if the start switch is operated while the start lamp is on, an internal lottery process is executed to determine the internal lottery result. The start lamp also turns off.

At this time, the system is designed so that the time from when the start switch is operated to when the internal lottery result is determined is less than the time from when the start switch is operated to when the start lamp is completely turned off.

To achieve this design, the number of processing cycles from when the start switch is operated to when the internal lottery result is determined x 0.0001 ms < the time from when the start switch is operated to when the start lamp is completely turned off (20 ms). In other words, the number of processing cycles from when the start switch is operated to when the internal lottery result is determined must be less than 200,000.

By configuring it in this way, the internal lottery results can be determined before the start lamp goes out, making it difficult to determine when the internal lottery process was executed even if someone tries to obtain the internal lottery results fraudulently, thereby preventing fraudulent activity.

<Bet and start sounds>
Gaming machines output game sounds in response to various triggers, but here we will explain the bet sound that can be output by operating the bet switch or inserting a game medal, the wait sound that can be output by operating the start switch, and the reel start sound that can be output when the reels start to spin.

A bet sound is output for each bet, and if three bets are made by operating the MAX BET switch, the same bet sound is output three times.

The betting sound is a "da" sound that is output for 0.13 seconds per bet. If three bets are made, the betting sound will be output for 0.13 seconds x 3 = 0.39 seconds.

A bet sound can be output when a bet-related command is sent from the main control means and the sub-control means receives the bet-related command, and the sub-control means executes the processing related to the output of the bet sound. Furthermore, since the bet sound is output in one shot, once a bet sound is output, it will not be output repeatedly for that bet.

The wait sound is a sound that notifies the player of the minimum time of one game, which is 4.1 seconds. If it is less than 4.1 seconds between the start of reel rotation based on the operation of the start switch for a certain game and the start of reel rotation based on the operation of the start switch for the game following that game, a waiting period (wait period) occurs from the start of reel rotation based on the operation of the start switch for that game until 4.1 seconds have passed since the start of reel rotation based on the operation of the start switch for that game, during which the player waits for the start of reel rotation for the game following that game, and the wait sound is output during this waiting period.

The output period of the wait sound varies depending on the remaining waiting period, but since it takes a minimum of approximately 1.1 seconds from the start of reel rotation until the start switch for the next game is operated, the waiting period may be output for a maximum of approximately 3 seconds. Also, during the waiting period, the wait sound is output as "Tero, tro, tro, tro...", which is the sound data "Tero" output in a loop during the waiting period. The sound "Tero" is output for 0.2 seconds. In the case of "Tero, tro, tro" it is output for 0.2 seconds x 3 = 0.6 seconds.

The wait sound can be output when a command regarding start switch acceptance is sent from the main control means and the sub-control means receives the command regarding start switch acceptance, and can be stopped when a command regarding starting reel rotation is sent from the main control means and the sub-control means receives the command regarding starting reel rotation, and the sub-control means executes the process regarding output of the wait sound. As a result, the wait sound is output in a loop, so the wait sound does not stop from the time the command regarding start switch acceptance is received until the command regarding starting reel rotation is received. Note that if a command regarding starting reel rotation is received between the "te" and "ro" of the wait sound "te" ("lo"), the output of the wait sound is stopped at that point, so the "te" is output but the "ro" is not.

The reel start sound is the sound that is output when the reels begin to rotate based on the operation of the start switch. If there is a waiting period, the reel start sound is configured to be output when the reels begin to rotate after the start switch is operated.

The reel start sound is a "do" sound that is output for 0.1 seconds for each rotation of the reel. Even if there are multiple reels, the reel start sound is only output once. In other words, the reel start sound can be output when all reels that stopped in the previous game start to rotate when the start switch for the current game is operated.

The reel start sound can be output when a command to start reel rotation is sent from the main control means and the sub-control means receives the command, and the sub-control means executes the processing related to outputting the reel start sound. Furthermore, since the reel start sound is output in one shot, once the reel start sound is output, it will not be output repeatedly for the start of that reel rotation.

The reel start sound is output when the reels start to spin, allowing the player to gauge the time from when the reels start to spin until the operation of the stop switch becomes effective. For this reason, the reel start sound provides necessary information for the player to comfortably press the buttons.

The output times of the bet sound, wait sound, and reel start sound mentioned above do not indicate the playback time of each piece of data, but rather the time from when the first sound is output until the last sound becomes inaudible. For example, if there is 0.1 seconds of silence before and after the sound "da-da" as bet sound data, the playback time of the bet sound data will be 0.1 seconds + 0.13 seconds + 0.1 seconds = 0.33 seconds, which indicates that the output time of the bet sound is 0.13 seconds.

Here, we will explain the volume of various sounds using Figure 94.

The administrator volume in Figure 94 is a volume that cannot be changed by players and can only be changed by the administrator. For example, conditions for adjusting the administrator volume include operating a specific sub-switch (sub-switch 20, sub-cross key switch 21, or effect switch) while checking settings, operating a specific sub-switch (sub-switch 20, sub-cross key switch 21, or effect switch) while changing settings, or operating a specific sub-switch (rotary switch) inside the cabinet (behind the front door or inside the cabinet). In other words, the conditions for adjusting the administrator volume include device conditions that cannot be operated by players. Figure 94 shows that three levels (low, normal, high) can be selected.

The player volume in Figure 94 refers to the volume that can be changed by the player. For example, it is the volume that can be changed on a volume adjustment screen that can be selected from a menu screen that can be displayed by operating a sub-switch, or the volume that can be changed by pressing the left or right arrow on the directional pad. Figure 94 shows that there are 10 levels of volume that can be selected.

The numbers assigned to each sound in Figure 94 indicate the volume, measured in decibels. For example, when the administrator volume is "low" and the player volume is "1," the volume of the bet sound is 12 decibels.

In this embodiment, both the administrator volume and the player volume are adjustable, but it is also possible to have only one of them be adjustable. In that case, the volume relationships between the game sounds and system sounds will remain the same.

Here, we will explain the relationship between the weight sound and the reel start sound.

The wait sound and reel start sound can be triggered by operating the start switch. As mentioned above, the wait sound can be output when the start switch acceptance command is received, and the reel start sound can be output when the reel rotation start command is received after operating the start switch. In other words, the wait sound and reel start sound are output at very close times.

And under certain volume conditions (when the administrator volume and player volume are set to certain levels), the volume of the wait sound is lower than the reel start sound.

This configuration makes it easier for players to hear the reel start sound that is output after the wait sound, making it easier for them to recognize when the reels have started to spin. This makes it clear when the reels start to spin and makes it easier to understand when to operate the stop switch, improving the tempo of the game and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

As mentioned above, one loop of the wait sound is output for 0.2 seconds, and the reel start sound is output for 0.1 seconds.

This configuration allows players to intuitively determine which sound was output when the start switch was turned on. In other words, the wait sound may be output for up to approximately three seconds, but the reel start-up sound is only output for 0.1 seconds. Therefore, by making the duration of one loop of the wait sound longer than the duration of the reel start-up sound, players can intuitively determine that the wait sound was output, for example, 0.2 seconds after operating the start switch. This improves the tempo of the game and increases the enjoyment of the game.

Here, we will explain the relationship between weight sounds and bed sounds.

The bet sound can be output in response to the operation of the bet switch, and the wait sound can be output in response to the operation of the start switch. When the operation of the bet switch results in a bet number that allows play, the operation of the start switch is validated. For this reason, the bet sound and the wait sound are output at very close times.

And under certain volume conditions (when the administrator volume and player volume are set to certain levels), the volume of the waiting sound is lower than the betting sound.

If things continue as they are, there is a possibility that the waiting sound will be obscured by the betting sound, but since the betting sound is an important sound that allows the player to determine whether or not a bet has been placed as a result of the player's operation of the bet switch, it would not be wise to make the betting sound quieter than the waiting sound.

To solve this problem, the bet sound output period and the wait sound output period are designed not to overlap. For example, when three bets are placed by operating the bet switch, a "daddadadda" sound is output for 0.39 seconds. However, even if the start switch is operated and the wait sound is output after the shortest time possible for the start switch to become effective after the bet switch is operated, the final "dadda" sound of the bet sound will end before the initial "te" sound of the wait sound is heard, and will no longer be audible.

This configuration prevents the betting sound from obscuring the waiting sound, and the volume of the betting sound can be made louder than the waiting sound, improving the tempo of the game and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Note that game sounds other than bet sounds may be output when a bet is placed, but these are not bet sounds and therefore do not fall under the bet sound effects described above. Game sounds other than bet sounds output when a bet is placed include, for example, a congratulatory sound that is output when "Press the MAX bet switch!!" is displayed on the LCD screen while waiting to bet, and when the MAX bet switch is operated to notify the player of a result favorable to the player, such as winning the AT. In other words, game sounds that are output when the bet switch is used for anything other than betting medals are not bet sounds.

As shown in Figure 94, the volume of each game sound increases proportionally as the player volume increases, but this is not limited to this; certain game sounds may be configured to increase by a smaller amount. For example, with regard to the wait sound, when the player volume is "1" and the administrator volume is "low," the volume is 8, and when the player volume is "2" and the administrator volume is "low," the volume is 12. The volume of the wait sound is 1.2 times higher when the player volume is "1" than when it is "2." However, the increase in the volume of the wait sound may be smaller, such that when the player volume is "1" and the administrator volume is "low," the volume is 8, and when the player volume is "2" and the administrator volume is "low," the volume is 9 (the increase in other bet sounds and reel start sounds is the same).

In addition to the various game sounds shown in Figure 94, the system also includes background music (BGM), voices, and sound effects (SE) that are played during gameplay. The volume levels of the BGM, voices, and SEs are set higher than the bet sounds, wait sounds, and reel start sounds. For example, when the player volume is "1" and the administrator volume is "low," the volume levels of the bet sounds are "12," the wait sounds are "8," and the reel start sounds are "10." However, in this situation, the volume levels of certain BGM are "30," certain voices are "45," and certain SEs are "50." Note that this does not mean that under certain volume conditions, all BGM, voices, and sound effects are louder than the bet sounds, wait sounds, and reel start sounds; rather, it means that more than half of all BGM, voices, and sound effects are set to volumes louder than the bet sounds, wait sounds, and reel start sounds. Note that the volume of BGM, voices, and sound effects also increases proportionally, or simply increases, as the player volume or administrator volume increases.

Also, while we have already discussed the output time and volume of the bet sound, wait sound, and reel start sound, we will now explain the data capacity of each sound.

The relationship between the data capacity of bet sound data that can be output per bet, the data capacity of wait sound data for one loop of wait sound, and the data capacity of reel start sound data for the reel start sound is wait sound data > reel start sound data > bet sound data. As such, the reel start sound has a shorter output period than the bet sound data, but its data capacity is greater. This is because the reel start sound is not composed of simple sounds, making it more memorable to players than the bet sound. This makes it easier for players to remember the reel start sound, which can help improve the tempo of play.

<<About game sounds in simulated gaming>>
Various game sounds that occur during simulated gaming will now be described.

As mentioned above, simulated gaming is a freeze effect that is triggered by operating the start switch. In particular, during the freeze effect, all reels spin, and when the stop switch is operated, the corresponding reel stops.

Although this type of pseudo game executes fluctuation processing and random delay processing, it operates in the same manner as the actual game, making it difficult for players to tell whether they are playing a pseudo game or an actual game. Since the pseudo game and the actual game operate in a similar manner especially when the reels start to spin, players who are unaware that they are playing a pseudo game can be surprised and delighted by the unique stopping behavior of the pseudo game as a result of operating the stop switch, which is an element that increases the enjoyment of the game.

In this embodiment of the gaming machine, the difference between the actual game and the simulated game is made more difficult to distinguish than in conventional games, further increasing the game's enjoyment.

In this game, a wait sound can be output. The wait sound is output during the wait period. Since the pseudo game starts before the acceleration process, the pseudo game is executed for a period equivalent to the wait period. If the pseudo game were started without setting a wait period when there is still some wait period remaining, the player would feel uncomfortable when the reels start spinning. Therefore, if there is still some wait period remaining at the start of the pseudo game, the reels will not start spinning for the period equivalent to the wait period, and will start spinning when the period equivalent to the wait period ends. Note that the system is configured to output the same wait sound as in this game during the period equivalent to the wait period.

In this case, the timer value for the wait period is obtained when the pseudo game starts, the timer value for the wait period obtained at the beginning of the pseudo game operation is set, the timer value for the wait period that has been set is updated, and when it is determined that the timer value is 0, the reel rotation start process for the pseudo game is executed.

In this case, when transitioning from actual game to pseudo game, the pseudo game begins before determining whether the wait period has elapsed. The timer value for the wait period is either continuously updated during the pseudo game, or initialized after the pseudo game begins. By ensuring that the shortest play time for actual game + the shortest play time for pseudo game is longer than 4.1 seconds, the shortest play time can be guaranteed, and since there is no wait period remaining when actual game begins after the pseudo game ends, actual game can be started smoothly.

This configuration makes it difficult for players to tell whether a real game or a pseudo game has started, creating a sense of surprise when it turns out to be a pseudo game.

Note that while the above example illustrates managing a period equivalent to a wait period during a pseudo game, it is not limited to this; the pseudo game reel spin start process may also be executed when the wait period for the game ends. In other words, before the pseudo game starts, a determination is made as to whether or not the wait period is in progress, and if it is determined that the wait period is in progress, the determination process is repeated until it is determined that the wait period is not in progress, and if it is determined that the wait period is not in progress, the pseudo game reel spin start process is executed.

In addition, when two pseudo games are executed consecutively, a timer (the timer's initial value is 4.1 seconds) is set at the start of reel rotation to determine whether 4.1 seconds have elapsed between the start of reel rotation in the previous pseudo game and the start of reel rotation in the current pseudo game, and if the timer value is not 0 and a start switch operation is received to indicate the start timing of the current pseudo game, the reel rotation start process for the current pseudo game will not be executed until the timer value reaches 0.

Between the previous and current simulated games, a simulated bet sound will be output when the bet switch is operated, but no credit deductions will be performed.

When the start switch operation is accepted in this simulated game, random delay processing may or may not be performed.

Even if random delays are not implemented, the wait period and bet sounds are used to represent the game, so it is possible to some extent to prevent the fact that the game is a pseudo game from being discovered in advance. Furthermore, when random delays are implemented, it is more difficult to tell whether the game is a pseudo game or a real game than when random delays are not implemented.

If a random delay is implemented after the simulated game, the reel start-up sound is output when the reels start spinning. In this case, the timing of the reel start-up sound output may be in accordance with the first reel to start spinning, in accordance with the last reel to start spinning, for each reel that starts spinning, or not at all.

When the reel start sound is output in accordance with the reel that starts spinning first, the reel start sound is output when the first reel spins after the delay time caused by the random delay processing has run out. In other words, the reel start sound is output for the reel that starts spinning first, out of the left reel, center reel, or right reel.

When the timing for outputting the reel start sound is to correspond to the reel that starts spinning last, the reel start sound is output when the reel that last rotates after the delay time caused by the random delay processing has run out. In other words, the reel start sound is output for the reel that started spinning last out of the left reel, center reel, or right reel.

When outputting the reel start sound for each reel that starts spinning, the reel start sound is output each time a reel spins after the delay time caused by the random delay processing has run out. In other words, the reel start sound is output when all reels, including the left reel, center reel, and right reel, have started spinning.

When the reel start sound is output in this way even with a random delay, the reel start sound is output at the same timing as in the actual game, which reduces the player's sense of discomfort when transitioning from the simulated game to the actual game, improves the tempo of the game, and increases the enjoyment of the game.

When the reel start sound is not output, it will not be output even if the reel spins after the delay time has run out due to random delay processing. In other words, the reel start sound will not be output regardless of which reel (left, center, or right) starts spinning. In this case, the absence of a reel start sound will cause the player to feel more uncomfortable than if a reel start sound were present, but since it is possible to prevent the reel start sound from being output at a time not intended by the player, it is possible to avoid causing the player to feel uncomfortable in that respect.

In addition, when transitioning from a pseudo game to a main game, the reel spinning start process for the main game may be executed after waiting for the wait period between the start of reel spinning in the pseudo game and the start of reel spinning in the main game to elapse. Note that the start of reel spinning in the main game is executed after executing a random delay process. In other words, a wait period can be created by operating the start switch for the main game when transitioning from a pseudo game to a main game, and a wait sound can be output.

When configured in this way, changes can be minimized when transitioning from the actual game to the simulated game, from the simulated game to the simulated game, and from the simulated game to the actual game, allowing the player to play without having to worry about whether they are playing the simulated game or the actual game, improving the tempo of the game and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, while an embodiment in which a wait period is set at the start of a simulated game has been described, the present invention is not limited to this; there are cases in which a wait period is set at the start of a simulated game and cases in which a wait period is not set, and it may be possible to increase the probability of awarding a result advantageous to the player as a lottery result related to instruction functions such as AT when a wait period is not set. With this configuration, the player will feel a sense of discomfort due to the lack of a wait period, and at the same time, they will be able to hope for a favorable lottery result, increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, while an embodiment in which a wait period is set at the start of a simulated game has been described, this is not limiting, and no wait period may be set at the start of a simulated game.

Furthermore, when transitioning from the main game to the pseudo game, even if there is still a waiting period remaining from the start of reel rotation in the main game, if the pseudo game is started, the wait sound may not be looped during the maximum remaining waiting period (the period when playing in the shortest time from the start of reel rotation in the main game to the start of reel rotation in the pseudo game). For example, if the maximum remaining waiting period is 2.1 seconds, one loop of the wait sound will be 2.1 seconds or longer. By configuring it in this way, the wait sound will not loop when transitioning from the main game to the pseudo game in the shortest time, which can reduce boredom with the game caused by continually hearing the same sound.

<Measures to prevent fraudulent gaming machines and prevent dangerous installations>
In recent years, due to the fact that the installation ratio of each type of gaming machine within an arcade has been set, there have been cases where gaming machines are installed in a way that differs from the usual installation method in order to increase the installation ratio of a certain type of gaming machine.

In addition, in order to differentiate themselves from neighboring stores, the layout of gaming machines at stores is becoming more diverse.

In addition, there has been an increase in cases where players purchase gaming machines and play them at home. These players are not necessarily skilled in operating gaming machines, which raises the risk of creating dangerous installation situations.

The gaming machine in this embodiment aims to prevent some extreme installation methods in order to enable safe play in a variety of installation situations.

First, the correct installation status of a gaming machine is as shown in Figure 1, with the bottom plate resting on a horizontal surface (or placement space) and the top plate positioned horizontally above the bottom plate. Furthermore, the left and right side plates and back plate are positioned approximately perpendicular to the horizontal surface (or placement space).

If the machine is installed properly like this, it can be played safely.

Next, we will explain dangerous installation situations using Figure 95.

Dangerous gaming machine installation situations include those in which the bottom plate is installed so that it touches an inclined surface (for example, a surface that is inclined 45 degrees downward to the left), as shown in Figure 95. Or, those in which the left side plate is installed so that it touches a horizontal surface (in other words, the left side plate is the bottom, the top and bottom plates are approximately perpendicular to the horizontal surface, and the right side plate is installed so that it is positioned horizontally above the left side plate). Note that Figure 95 shows the bottom plate installed on a surface that is inclined 45 degrees downward to the left when viewed from the front of the gaming machine; if the inclination of the surface were 90 degrees, the left side plate would be installed so that it touches a horizontal surface.

In such dangerous installation conditions, there is a risk that the gaming machine may fall over, making it impossible to guarantee safe play.

<<Preventing dangerous installation situations with selectors>>
For this reason, when the gaming machine is tilted to the left (45 to 90 degrees), an error occurs in the gaming machine and the game stops. Note that when the gaming machine is installed normally, it is said that the gaming machine is installed in the normal position, or that the selector is installed in the normal position. In the following explanation of this example, it is assumed that the gaming machine is powered on and is in a game standby state where no bets have been placed after one game has ended.

Specific methods for triggering an error in a gaming machine include having a movable piece of a path sensor mounted on the selector swing when the gaming machine is tilted to the left (45 to 90 degrees), triggering a selector error and halting game progress. Furthermore, if the path sensor detects a situation where it is not in its initial position for a predetermined period of time, it will trigger a selector error.

Figure 96 shows the movable piece mounted on the selector and the sensor that detects the movable piece. Figure 96(A) is a diagram of the selector when the gaming machine is in a normal installation state, and Figure 96(B) is a diagram of the selector when the gaming machine is in a dangerous installation state.

For example, the sensor in Figure 96 is a passage sensor, and has a selector on which a movable piece that constitutes the passage sensor mounted on a selector is supported by a shaft, and when the selector is installed in the correct position, the movable piece is configured to protrude above the medal passage so that it can come into contact with medals, etc. When a medal, etc. comes into contact with the movable piece, the movable piece rotates, and the sensor that constitutes the passage sensor changes on or off as the movable piece swings, thereby detecting medals, etc.

As shown in Figure 96 (A), in the case of this type of selector, when no medals or other items have been inserted through the medal insertion slot and the selector is installed in the correct position, the movable piece is prevented from swinging by a spring or other elastic member, so that the movable piece is kept in its initial position. Also, when no medals or other items have been inserted through the medal insertion slot and the selector is installed in the correct position, the movable piece is not prevented from swinging by a spring or other elastic member, but the gravity acting on the movable piece may be used to restrict the swing of the movable piece, so that the movable piece is kept in its initial position. In such cases, if the selector is installed at an angle so that the movable piece faces downward, it will be more susceptible to the influence of gravity, allowing the movable piece to remain stably in its initial position.

In gaming machines equipped with such a selector, when the gaming machine is installed in the correct position, the selector's movable piece is in its initial position. In this situation, the passage sensor does not detect an abnormality, and therefore the game does not stop.

As shown in Figure 96 (B), in the case of this type of selector, when no medals or other items have been inserted through the medal insertion slot and the gaming machine is installed in a dangerous installation condition, the elastic member such as a spring and the gravity vector acting on the movable piece are made different from those when the gaming machine is normal, so that the movable piece will swing, and will be displaced to a position different from its initial position. Also, when no medals or other items have been inserted through the medal insertion slot and the selector is installed in the correct position, the swinging of the movable piece is not restricted by an elastic member such as a spring, and the swinging of the movable piece can be restricted by gravity acting on the movable piece, so that the movable piece will be set to its initial position, and the point at which the movable piece is subjected to gravity will change, causing the movable piece to be displaced to a position different from its initial position.

In gaming machines equipped with such a selector, if the machine is installed in a dangerous installation condition, the movable piece will swing due to the different points on the movable piece that receive gravity. When the power is turned on, the movable piece will move from its initial position, and the sensor will no longer detect the movable piece. This will lead to the machine determining that there is an abnormality in the passage sensor and halting the game.

Another potentially dangerous installation situation for gaming machines is when the back panel of the gaming machine is placed on a surface that is horizontal to the ground, with the bottom panel, top panel, or left and right side panels at approximately right angles to the surface.

Even if the gaming machine is installed in such a dangerous installation condition, the operating mode of the selector's movable piece will be the same as described above, and the operation of the movable piece as shown in Figure 96 (B) will make it possible to detect a selector error and halt the progress of the game when the power is turned on.

Furthermore, since using a dedicated sensor to determine whether the gaming machine is in a dangerous installation situation would increase the number of parts and costs, the status of the gaming machine can be detected using a sensor attached to the selector. Therefore, when the gaming machine is in a normal installation situation and the power is on, the above-mentioned selector error can occur if the orientation of the selector is the same as when the gaming machine is in a dangerous installation situation. For example, if the selector is tilted 45 to 90 degrees to the left from the normal position or tilted 90 degrees backward from the normal position, a selector error can be detected and the progress of the game can be stopped.

This configuration makes it possible to prevent gameplay from progressing when the gaming machine is placed in a dangerous installation situation, thereby preventing dangerous installation methods for gaming machines. Furthermore, tilting the selector in a direction similar to a dangerous installation situation will result in a selector error, which can be expected to be effective in detecting fraud when a selector that has been removed due to fraudulent activity is reinstalled in the wrong orientation.

If the gaming machine is installed in a dangerous condition and a selector error is not possible, when the start switch is operated with three bets, the reels will spin and can be stopped by operating the stop switch (play can proceed).

<<Preventing dangerous installation conditions related to medal payouts>>
Dangerous installation situations of gaming machines will be explained using Figure 97.

Figure 97 shows the gaming machine as seen from the back of the front door when the left side panel is placed on a horizontal surface. Although not shown, the front door is actually closed. The black arrow in Figure 97 indicates an enlarged view of the area surrounded by the dotted line.

In gaming machines that do not stop play because a specified error occurs when the left side panel of the gaming machine is placed on a horizontal surface, or that do not stop play even when the situation shown in Figure 97 occurs because a specified error is not detected during play, if the situation shown in Figure 97 occurs during play and a symbol combination that can result in a specified number of payouts after all reels have stopped is stopped, payout processing can be executed.

When a predetermined number of payout processes are executed in the situation shown in Figure 97 (when more than the predetermined number of medals are stored in the hopper), medals are not discharged into the tray 28, and medals can be stored in the receiving section shown in Figure 97.

In addition, under normal installation conditions, the hopper's discharge outlet and the medal payout outlet 45 of the return passage are separated by a predetermined distance even when the front door is closed. In other words, medals paid out from the hopper fly out from the hopper's discharge outlet, pass through the medal payout outlet 45 of the return passage and are guided to the tray 28. The medals remain in the air for at least the predetermined distance from when they fly out from the hopper's discharge outlet until they pass through the medal payout outlet 45 of the return passage.

In the event of a dangerous installation situation, as shown in Figure 97, the gravity vector acting on the medals in the air will differ from that in a normal installation situation, but the medals flying out of the hopper's discharge outlet will not collide with the edge of the medal payout outlet 45 of the return passage, but will pass through the medal payout outlet 45 of the return passage and be stored in the receiving section of the return passage.

In addition, the receiving section of the return passage is designed to be wide and deep enough to accommodate 15 25mm diameter medals (the maximum number of medals that can be paid out under gaming machine regulations) in dangerous installation conditions, so even if the machine is designed to only be able to pay out 15 medals, they can still be stored in the receiving section of the return passage.

Furthermore, medals can be stored in the receiving section of the return passage that protrudes forward as shown in the right side view of the area surrounded by the dotted line in Figure 97. Since game medals are generally about 1.6 mm thick and 25 mm in diameter, in order to be able to store 15 of these medals, the capacity of the receiving section of the return passage (the capacity of the protruding part around the medal payout opening of the return passage) must be 600 ^mm2 or more.

By configuring it in this way, when medals are paid out in a dangerous installation situation, they do not come out into the tray 28 but are instead stored in the receiving section of the return passage. This effectively stops the progress of play by preventing medals from being paid out, making it possible to prevent play in a dangerous installation situation.

In addition, when the payout process is executed with the back panel of the gaming machine placed on a horizontal surface, the medals collide with the edge of the medal payout outlet 45 of the return passage, preventing them from being guided into the tray 28.

Even with this configuration, gameplay cannot be progressed effectively, preventing dangerous installation situations.

<<Speaker fraud prevention measures>>
In recent years, there have been cases of fraudsters intentionally tampering with speakers to make it harder to hear error sounds or unusual sounds (such as the same sound being output repeatedly or a specific sound being output in a situation where it should not be output) that are generated when fraudulent operations are performed.

The purpose of the gaming machine of this embodiment is to ensure that sound can be heard as much as possible even if fraudulent operation is performed on the speaker.

Figure 98 shows the front view of the gaming machine, which is equipped with lower and upper speakers. The speakers are fixed to the back of the front door.

The area indicated by the dotted line in Figure 98 is the entire circumference of the lower speaker's cone paper, so the entire speaker cannot be seen from the front of the gaming machine. The diameter of the speaker's cone paper is 70 mm.

A cover member is placed on the front door of the gaming machine to cover the speaker's cone paper and center cap, and the cover member has many holes formed in it to output the speaker sound toward the player. The cover member is made of non-magnetic metal. Note that Figure 98 is an illustration, and the number of holes in the cover member is not as shown.

The holes in the cover member have a diameter of 2 mm, and there are 300 holes in the cover member corresponding to one of the lower speakers.

In other words, the total area of the holes in the cover member is 942 square millimeters ((2/2) x (2/2) x 3.14 x 300). In contrast, the area of the cone paper and center cap is 3,846.5 square millimeters ((70/2) x (70/2) x 3.14). In other words, the total area of the holes in the cover member is less than 1/4 of the area of the cone paper and center cap.

By configuring it in this way, even if a wire or other object penetrates through all of the holes in the cover member and creates holes in the cone paper and center cap equal to the total area of the holes in the cover member, more than three-quarters of the area of the cone paper and center cap will remain.

As a result, even if the cone paper and center cap are torn by wire or other objects entering through all of the holes in the cover member, at least three-quarters of the cone paper and center cap's area will remain. Because the volume reduction rate is less than 20% when at least three-quarters of the cone paper and center cap's area remains, error sounds and game sounds from the gaming machine can still be heard clearly even through a torn speaker.

In addition, if the cone paper and center cap are torn by wire or other objects entering through all of the holes in the cover member, even if the volume that the player can set is at the lowest setting (excluding silence), the game sound will still be above 50 decibels on average and will be loud enough to be heard. The volume of the error sound cannot be changed by the player.

In addition, the above explanation describes a situation in which the cone paper and center cap are torn by wire or the like entering through all of the holes in the cover member. However, even if all of the holes in the cover member are located only on the front of the cone paper and only the cone paper is torn, and holes are made in the cone paper equal to the total area of the holes in the cover member, more than three-quarters of the area of the cone paper will remain.

Furthermore, the volume reduction rate is designed to be less than 20% when more than three-quarters of the cone surface area remains, so error sounds and game sounds from the gaming machine can be heard clearly.

The number of holes in the cover member, the size of the holes, the size of the cone paper, and the center cap mentioned above are examples only, and as long as the cone paper and center cap are configured so that wires or the like can be inserted through all holes in the cover member and more than 3/4 of the area of the cone paper remains, the design of each can be any value.

In the upper speaker in Figure 98, the area of the speaker's cone paper and center cap is approximately the same as the area of the cover member. In addition, a hole for the cover member is formed on approximately the front surface of the cover member. The speaker's cone paper and center cap are approximately rectangular, measuring 100 mm in length and 30 mm in width.

The holes in the cover member have a diameter of 2 mm, and there are 480 holes in the cover member corresponding to one of the upper speakers.

In other words, the total area of the holes in the cover member is 1507.2 square millimeters ((2/2) x (2/2) x 3.14 x 480). In contrast, the area of the cone paper and center cap is 3000 square millimeters (100 x 30). In other words, the total area of the holes in the cover member is approximately 1/2 (1/1.99) of the area of the cone paper and center cap.

In the case of such upper speakers, even if wire or other materials enter through all of the holes in the cover member and create holes in the cone paper and center cap equal to the total area of the holes in the cover member, the design ensures that between 1/1.5 and 1/2.5 of the area of the cone paper and center cap remains.

The design is such that the volume reduction rate is less than 50% when between 1/1.5 and 1/2.5 of the cone paper and center cap area remains.

With this configuration, the area of the speaker's cone paper and center cap is approximately the same as the area of the cover member, and even if a wire or other object were to penetrate through all of the holes in the cover member, creating holes in the cone paper and center cap equal to the total area of the holes in the cover member, the error sounds and game sounds from the gaming machine would still be audible enough to prevent fraudulent activity against the gaming machine.

Furthermore, in the case of the upper speaker, in a similar situation to the lower speaker, if the cone paper and center cap are torn by wire or the like entering through all of the holes in the cover material, even if the volume that the player can set is at the minimum (excluding silence), the game sound will average 40 decibels or more and will be sufficiently audible. Note that the volume of the error sound cannot be changed by the player.

The number of holes in the cover member, the size of the holes, the size of the cone paper, and the center cap mentioned above are examples only. As long as the cone paper and center cap are configured so that wires or the like can be inserted through all of the holes in the cover member and so that 1/1.5 or more and less than 1/2.5 of the area of the cone paper remains, the design of each can be any value.

Although not shown, the volume reduction rate is set to less than 40% when between 1/2.5 and 3/4 of the area of the paper cone and center cap remains. Therefore, even if the number of holes in the cover member, the size of the holes, the paper cone, and the size of the center cap are configured in such a way that wire or the like penetrates through all the holes in the cover member and holes are created in the paper cone and center cap equal to the total area of the holes in the cover member, the error sounds and game sounds from the gaming machine will still be audible, preventing fraudulent activity against gaming machines.

<<Preventing problems caused by liquids entering through the inlet>>
In recent years, there have been a number of incidents in which tea and other beverages have been poured into the medal slots.

The medal slot has holes to allow medals to be inserted into the gaming machine. If the medal slot hole is large, it is easier to insert medals all at once, and if the medal slot hole is small, it is easier to insert medals one by one.

In addition, medals inserted through the medal insertion slot may be guided through a selector to a hopper, or from the selector through a return passage to the tray 28.

This is because the medal specifications are actually fixed, and the medal slot is designed to guide medals to a predetermined location inside the gaming machine, so medals cannot be guided anywhere other than the predetermined location (although there may be irregular occurrences where medals spill out).

However, if liquid is poured into the medal slot, it can splash into unexpected places, causing fires or malfunctions.

The purpose of this embodiment of the gaming machine is to prevent malfunctions from occurring even if liquid is poured into the medal insertion port.

Figure 99 is a view of the front door from the back, and Figure 100 is a view of the selector from the right side.

The liquids that may be poured into the container are likely to be tea, water, coffee, or juice sold in stores, and their volumes are generally between 150 ml and 500 ml. Of these, water has the lowest kinetic viscosity at 1.004×10 ⁻⁶ m ² /S (20°C).

The following explanation uses water as an example, as it has the lowest kinetic viscosity of any liquid that may be added. It goes without saying that the configuration will still be satisfactory if water is replaced with tea, coffee, or juice, which have higher kinetic viscosities than water.

If liquid inserted through the medal slot were to flow into the power box, it could cause an electrical short circuit and result in a fire. Furthermore, if liquid inserted through the medal slot were to flow into the hopper, it could cause the hopper to malfunction.

For this reason, the gaming machine according to this embodiment is configured to guide as much liquid as possible inserted through the medal insertion port into the tray 28.

First, the size of the medal insertion hole, which is the entrance through which the liquid flows, is made roughly rectangular, measuring between 1.7 mm and 3 mm in length and between 25 mm and 30 mm in width. This is because it is smaller than the 30 mm diameter of a typical plastic bottle.

This configuration prevents the liquid from flowing out of the medal slot all at once, keeping the liquid flow speed below a certain level. This prevents the liquid from increasing in speed and splashing into the gaming machine cabinet.

Next, since the liquid flowing in from the medal insertion port enters the selector, the width of the path through which the medals roll from the selector to the hopper (width A in Figure 100) is set to less than 3 mm to prevent it from being led from the selector to the hopper.

This configuration allows medals to pass through the selector, but allows the liquid to spill out of the passage and be guided into the return passage. This makes it difficult for the liquid to reach the hopper, preventing hopper breakdown. Furthermore, because the passage to the hopper is provided with a chute member (see Figure 99), even if some liquid is guided into the hopper, it is possible for the chute member to stop it.

The liquid that is guided into the return passage is then guided through the return passage into the tray 28. The return passage is fixed to the back of the front door with screws in multiple locations (not shown) and is designed to prevent liquid from leaking around the return passage. The medal payout outlet is also designed not to be positioned in the liquid's flow path, preventing liquid from splashing out from the medal payout outlet. The area behind the front door that is covered by the return passage is made up of a single component, so there are no gaps.

This configuration allows liquid guided from the selector to the return passage to flow down the return passage and be guided to the tray 28. This makes it less likely for liquid to spill into the housing, making it less likely for liquid to be guided towards the power box, preventing fires and malfunctions.

The tray 28 is designed to prevent liquid from spilling from the tray 28. Specifically, the tray's volume is set to 500 ml or more.

By configuring it in this way, even if a liquid the size of a typical plastic bottle is poured into the medal insertion port, it can be received in the tray 28, making it less likely to spill onto the store, thereby reducing the cleaning burden on the store.

It should be noted that 100% of the liquid poured from the medal slot does not have to be guided to the tray. This is because, as the liquid normally flows down, some of it remains in each passageway and on the walls, so even if 500 ml of liquid is poured from the medal slot, less than 500 ml will collect in the tray 28. Also, since a small amount of liquid spilling onto the bottom of the housing is unlikely to cause a fire or malfunction, the objective can be achieved by configuring the device so that 50% or more of the liquid poured from the medal slot collects in the tray 28.

<Regarding the Roulette Effects in the Gaming Machine of the Present Embodiment>
The roulette effect, which is one of the effects in the gaming machine described in this embodiment, will be described.

The sub-control means can receive information from the main control means, such as the results of the internal lottery, the results of processing related to the instruction function, and game states such as the main game state and RT state, and can execute effects according to the received information. For example, based on information from the main control means, the sub-control means can execute effects that notify the player of advantageous results, or effects that do not give advantageous results but give the player hope for advantageous results. A roulette effect is provided as one such effect.

The roulette effect is a series of effects that divide the display area of the display device 32, display the benefits to be given to the player in each divided area, and then move the cursor display cyclically, and then indicate that one of the divided areas has been selected, either automatically or by the player's operation. The cursor display is an effect that points to the currently selected divided display area, and is an effect that displays a light that matches the frame image within each divided display area.

For example, in Figure 101 (A), the display area of the display device is divided into four areas: (1) upper left area, (2) upper right area, (3) lower left area, and (4) lower right area. The cursor display is displayed cyclically in the order of (1) upper left area, (2) upper right area, (3) lower left area, (4) lower right area, (1) upper left area, (2) upper right area, (3) lower left area, (4) lower right area, etc. After a predetermined period of time has passed, the display automatically indicates that a certain area has been selected, triggered by the player's operation of a special effect switch, or by the player's operation of a final stop button. Note that the specific area to stop in is determined when the roulette effect begins, and therefore, even when a certain area is selected and displayed in response to the player's operation of a special effect switch, the predetermined area is selected and displayed regardless of the timing of the player's operation of the special effect switch. Therefore, when the cursor display is displayed cyclically after the roulette effect begins, the cursor display is displayed so that it moves cyclically at high speed. In the case of a four-split display as shown in FIG. 101(A), the interval at which the cursor display is rapidly cycled (for example, the interval at which it moves from (1) to (2)) can be approximately 50 ms. Note that the order of the cycled display in FIG. 101(A) may be (1) upper left area, (2) upper right area, (4) lower right area, and (3) lower left area, in a clockwise circular order. Furthermore, each of the split display areas into which the display area is divided may be referred to as a square.

For example, in (B) of Figure 101, the display area of the display device is divided into four areas: (1) left area, (2) center-left area, (3) center-right area, and (4) right area. The cursor display is displayed cyclically in the order of (1) left area, (2) center-left area, (3) center-right area, (4) right area, (1) left area, (2) center-left area, (3) center-right area, (4) right area, etc., and a display is made that a certain divided area has been selected, either automatically after a predetermined period of time has elapsed or in response to the player's operation of a switch for effects. Note that the divided area to stop in is determined at the start of the roulette effect, and therefore, even when a divided area is selected and displayed in response to the player's operation of a switch for effects, the predetermined divided area is selected and displayed regardless of the timing of the player's operation of the switch for effects. Therefore, when the cursor display is displayed cyclically after the start of the roulette effect, the cursor display is displayed so that it moves cyclically at high speed. In the case of a four-split display as shown in Figure 101 (B), the interval at which the cursor is displayed cyclically at high speed (for example, the interval at which it moves from (1) to (2)) can be approximately 50 ms.

In the roulette effect, the interval at which the cursor display is cyclically displayed at high speed (for example, the interval at which it moves from (1) to (2)) is approximately 50 ms, but this is not limiting; in Figures 101(A) and (B), it may be 40 ms or 60 ms. Also, while an example was described in which the cursor display is cyclically displayed at high speed across four split display areas, it may also be cyclically displayed at high speed across three split display areas, or cyclically displayed at high speed across five split display areas. Regardless of the number of split display areas, if the interval at which the cursor display is cyclically displayed at high speed for one full revolution in the roulette effect is 150 ms to 300 ms, the player will be less likely to perceive the cursor display as having been intentionally stopped, even if the cursor display is stopped when the player operates a switch for the effect.

In addition, the interval at which the cursor display in the roulette presentation is displayed cyclically at high speed does not have to be constant; the cursor display may start moving and make one slow revolution for the first time, gradually approaching maximum speed from the second revolution onwards, or it may make one slow revolution for the first time, and move at maximum speed from the second revolution onwards.

By incorporating a roulette effect in this way, the notification method becomes more interesting and the enjoyment of the game increases. Also, by moving the cursor display more slowly on the first lap than on the second lap, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the content displayed in each split display area.

The cursor display that remains visible even after the roulette effect has started is a display that indicates that a certain split display area is currently selected among the split display areas. For example, it may display the currently selected split display area brightly (or display split display areas other than the currently selected split display area darkly), display a predetermined color effect around the currently selected split display area, or display a predetermined icon display in a certain location in the currently selected split display area. This cursor display that remains visible even after the roulette effect has started is sometimes simply referred to as an effect display (effect display when moving) to refer to the effect it creates.

The roulette effect can be executed after the start lever is operated to start a game or after all the reels have stopped. In other words, the cursor display starts moving in the roulette effect when the start lever is operated to start a game or after all the reels have stopped. Alternatively, each divided display area of the roulette effect may be displayed in the previous game, and the cursor display may start moving when the start lever is operated to start the next game.

When the roulette effect begins, the display contents of the split display areas are displayed. For example, as shown in (1) of Figure 102, the bonuses that can be obtained are displayed in each split display area. Here, the bonus contents may be displayed in the order of the upper left area, upper right area, lower left area, and lower right area, or the bonus contents may be displayed in all split display areas simultaneously.

Next, as shown in Figure 102 (2), the cursor will be displayed to indicate that "No top-up" in the upper left area has been selected first.

Next, as shown in Figure 102 (3), the cursor is displayed to indicate that "+10" in the upper right area is currently selected.

Next, as shown in Figure 102 (4), the cursor is displayed to indicate that "+50" in the lower left area is currently selected.

Next, as shown in Figure 102 (5), the cursor is displayed to indicate that "+100" in the lower right area is currently selected.

Next, as shown in Figure 102 (2), the cursor will be displayed in the lower right area to indicate that "No topping" is currently selected, and the cursors will continue to be displayed in order until they stop.

In (2), (3), (4), and (5) of Figure 102, the split display area selected by the cursor display is bright, and the other split display areas are dark. Note that visibility may be reduced to the extent that the background pictures and text are still visible.

As shown in Figure 102, the bonus for the split display area that is first selected when the roulette effect begins is the lowest bonus (including no bonus) compared to the bonuses for the other split display areas. With this configuration, by first displaying the lowest bonus with the cursor, it is easier to create a sense of anxiety about the roulette effect, making it more suspenseful. Conversely, if the highest bonus is displayed with the cursor first, it is more likely to create a sense of security, and if the roulette effect results in a bad result, the gap with expectations can lead to a motivation to quit playing. In order to embody this psychological effect, the lowest bonus is displayed with the cursor first.

Furthermore, the benefits displayed in each divided display area shown in Figure 102 are examples, and a presentation pattern in which multiple types of benefits are displayed may be provided so that a variety of benefits can be displayed. In other words, multiple presentation patterns are provided according to the expected level of benefit award. However, in all cases, the cursor is first displayed in the upper left area, and the cursor display moves in the same order. Furthermore, the top left area is configured to display the lowest benefit.

In addition, the percentage of all presentation patterns in which the cursor is first displayed in the upper left area may be higher than the percentage of all presentation patterns in which the cursor is first displayed in an area other than the upper left area, or the percentage of all presentation patterns in which the lowest benefit is displayed in the upper left area may be higher than the percentage of all presentation patterns in which the lowest benefit is displayed in an area other than the upper left area.

The display content of the bonus displayed in each divided area may be the same. For example, the display content of the bonus in Figure 102 (1) may be "+10G" in the upper left area, "+10G" in the upper right area, "+50G" in the lower left area, and "+100G" in the lower right area, or "+100G" in the upper left area, "+100G" in the upper right area, "+100G" in the lower left area, and "+100G" in the lower right area.

The bonus to be awarded is already determined before the roulette effect begins, and the game that determines the bonus may be the game that starts the roulette effect, or a game that occurs before the roulette effect begins.

This configuration makes it easier to understand the regularity of the roulette display, making it easier for players to understand the game's characteristics.

Furthermore, by cycling the cursor display in the order of (2), (3), (5), and (4) in Figure 102, it is possible to create a greater sense of anxiety by utilizing the clockwise rule, thereby attracting interest in the roulette presentation.

Figure 103 shows an example in which an image prompting the user to operate a switch for the effect is displayed after the roulette effect shown in Figure 102 has started, and the cursor display stops when the switch for the effect is operated.

Figure 103 (1) shows that an image prompting the user to operate a special effect switch is displayed after the cursor shown in Figure 102 has made at least one full rotation (one rotation is defined as the time from when the cursor starts moving from the upper left area until it reaches the lower right area). As the image prompting the user to operate the special effect switch, an image imitating a special effect switch with the word "PUSH" written on it is displayed so as to cover part of all of the split display areas.

In this way, by displaying an image encouraging the player to operate the effect switch after the cursor movement display has made at least one revolution, the roulette effect does not end immediately after it starts when the effect switch is operated, allowing the player to recognize that the roulette effect has begun. Furthermore, by operating the effect switch after the roulette effect has started and causing the cursor to stop and appear in a split display area that the cursor has not yet reached, the effect of the effect switch being operated, which gives the player a sense of self-reliance, is prevented from being reduced. It is also possible to display an image encouraging the player to operate the effect switch when the cursor movement display has made one or more revolutions.

This configuration can be described as a display device that displays certain information related to the progress of a game in each of the multiple display areas divided into areas, sequentially switches between displaying a selection display indicating that one of the display areas has been selected, and, when a predetermined condition is met, displays a predetermined effect that stops the selection display in one of the display areas, where the predetermined condition includes receiving a press of a display switch, and, while the selection displays are sequentially switched between, displays an operation prompt effect to encourage operation of the effect switch, and the operation prompt effect can be displayed after each display area has been selected and displayed at least once after the predetermined effect has begun.

(2) in Figure 103 shows that the cursor display has moved to the upper right area while the image prompting the player to operate the effect switch remains displayed.

(3) in Figure 103 shows that the cursor display has moved to the lower left area while the image prompting the player to operate the effect switch remains displayed.

In Figure 103 (4), the cursor display has moved to the bottom right area while the image prompting the user to operate the effect switch remains displayed. From then on, the cursor moves cyclically in the order of Figure 103 (1), (2), (3), and (4), while the image prompting the user to operate the effect switch remains displayed.

In this way, the cyclical cursor movement display does not end while the image prompting the user to operate the effect switch remains displayed and the cyclical cursor movement display is displayed, and the cursor display is stopped when the effect switch is operated. However, if the roulette effect is started when the start switch is operated and the final stop switch is operated, the cursor display may be stopped in the same manner as when the effect switch is operated, even if the effect switch is not operated.

(5) in Figure 103 shows that the effect switch was operated at the same time that the cursor display selected the upper right area.

Because it has been decided that the bonus to be awarded before the start of the roulette effect shown in Figure 103 above will be an additional "+100G" (indicating that the number of AT games will be extended by 100 games), even if the effect switch is operated at timing (5) in Figure 103, the cursor display will not stop at "+10G" displayed in the upper right area.

Furthermore, when the effect switch is operated at the timing shown in (5) of Figure 103, the cursor display does not move to the lower left area, but moves and stops in the lower right area as shown in (6) of Figure 103. In other words, regardless of the timing of the effect switch operation, when the effect switch is operated, the cursor display moves to a predetermined cursor display position and then stops.

Because it takes 50 ms for the cursor display to move one square, it is difficult for a player to reliably operate the effect switch at any desired cursor display position, and the player has no way of proving this. Therefore, even if the cursor does not stop at the predetermined cursor display stop position after moving forward in order after the effect switch is operated, it is difficult to perceive that the cursor has been intentionally stopped in the predetermined split display area.

With this configuration, the result of the roulette effect can be instantly notified when the player operates the effect switch, allowing for a fast-paced gameplay and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, in games where roulette effects are executed, even if the game is played in the theoretically fastest time possible from the operation of the start switch to the stopping of all reels, an image prompting the player to operate the effect switch is displayed before all reels have stopped.

This configuration makes it easier for players who play quickly to recognize that a roulette effect is being performed, and by getting them interested in the roulette effect, it increases the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, while Figure 103 displays an image that resembles a special effect switch as an image to prompt the player to operate the special effect switch, it is not limited to this. Alternatively, an introductory effect may be executed before the special effect switch is displayed, or a text image such as "Press it!" may be displayed, or a voice may prompt the player to operate the special effect switch after a character image is displayed.

In addition, when a roulette effect is executed and an image prompting the player to operate the effect switch is displayed, the lamp on the effect switch is made to flash. In this case, the flashing cycle of the lamp on the effect switch (the time from when it lights up to when it goes out) is configured to be longer than the interval between one rotation of the cursor display. This configuration makes it seem to the player that the cursor display is moving relatively quickly.

When the effect switch is operated to stop the cursor display, the split display area where the cursor display is stopped is configured to blink. Blinking means that the brightness of the split display area where the cursor display is stopped is rapidly changed, and the split display area where the cursor display is stopped is displayed by alternating between a bright display state and a dark display state at a regular interval.

The time it takes for the flashing display to switch from a bright display mode to a dark display mode is set to 20 ms. In other words, the time it takes for the flashing display to switch from a bright display mode to a dark display mode is shorter than the interval (50 ms) at which the cursor display is displayed cyclically at high speed.

This configuration makes it visually easier to see that the cursor has stopped, increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, the blinking time in the split display area where the cursor display has stopped is set to be longer than the time it takes for the cursor display to make one full rotation when the cursor display is displayed cyclically at high speed. For example, the blinking time in the split display area where the cursor display has stopped is set to 500 ms.

This configuration makes it easier to visually understand that the cursor has stopped, increasing the enjoyment of the game.

When expressing such a configuration, the display device is capable of displaying certain information related to the progress of a game in each of the display areas divided into multiple areas, sequentially switching between displaying a selection display indicating that one of the display areas has been selected, and displaying a predetermined effect in which the selection display is frozen in one of the display areas when predetermined conditions are met. The display device is capable of displaying a frozen display mode in which the frozen display mode of the selection display when the predetermined conditions are met and the selection display is frozen in one of the display areas alternates multiple times between a mode in which the selected display area is brightly displayed and a mode in which the selected display area is darkly displayed. When the display device sequentially switches between displaying the selection display indicating that one of the display areas has been selected, the time T1 from when a certain display area is selectively displayed in one of the display areas to just before the certain display area is next selectively displayed is compared with the time T2 when the display device switches from a mode in which the selected display area is brightly displayed to a mode in which the selected display area is darkly displayed as the frozen display mode of the selection display, and it can be said that T1 > T2.

Furthermore, the blinking display executed in the split display area where the cursor display is stopped is made more noticeable than the movement of the cursor display. For example, the maximum brightness of the blinking display is brighter than the maximum brightness when the cursor display is moving, the difference between the maximum brightness and maximum darkness when the cursor display is moving is larger in the blinking display, and the range of the effect when the cursor display is moving is larger in the blinking display.

This configuration makes it easier to visually understand that the cursor has stopped, increasing the enjoyment of the game.

This configuration can be described as a display device that displays certain information related to the progress of a game in each of the multiple display areas, sequentially switches between selection displays indicating that one of the display areas has been selected, and can display a predetermined effect that freezes the selection display in one of the display areas when predetermined conditions are met. The display device can also display a specific effect on the selected display area as the frozen display mode of the selection display when the predetermined conditions are met and the selection display is frozen in one of the display areas. When the selection displays are sequentially switched between, a specific effect is displayed on one display area to indicate that it has been selected, and a specific effect is not displayed on one display area to indicate that it has not been selected, with the specific effect being more easily visible than the specific effect.

In addition, before the roulette effect begins, a flashing effect of the side lamps provided on the front panel PS2 is executed. For example, if the roulette effect is executed after all reels have stopped, the flashing effect pattern of the side lamps is executed after all reels have stopped, and then the moving display of the cursor for the roulette effect begins. An example of a flashing effect of the side lamps is an effect in which the side lamps repeatedly light up and go out in white. The time from when the side lamps light up to when they go out is called the flashing cycle, and in this embodiment the flashing cycle is 100 ms. The color of the side lamps is not limited to white and may be changed to another color as appropriate.

This configuration allows the player to recognize when the roulette effect begins by the side lamp, increasing the player's sense of anticipation for the roulette effect.

In addition, the blinking cycle of the side lamp blinking effect pattern is configured to be longer than the time it takes for the cursor display to switch from one split display area to the next when the cursor display in the roulette effect is moving at its fastest speed. For example, the time it takes for the cursor display to switch from one split display area to the next is 50 ms, and the blinking cycle is 100 ms.

With this configuration, the movement time of the cursor display in the roulette effect is shorter than the blinking cycle of the side lamps, making it possible to visually recognize the movement of the cursor display at high speed.By not giving the player any certainty that they have accurately pressed a certain divided display area in the roulette effect, it is possible to prevent a loss of enthusiasm for playing even if the cursor display stops in an unexpected position.

In this configuration, the display device displays certain information related to the progress of the game in each of the multiple display areas, sequentially switches between selection displays indicating that one of the display areas has been selected, and can display a predetermined effect in which the selection display stops in one of the display areas when a predetermined condition is met. A predetermined lamp can flash in a predetermined flashing pattern while the predetermined effect is being performed. When the display device sequentially switches between selection displays indicating that one of the display areas has been selected, the time T1 from when a certain display area is selected to when the next display area to be selected and displayed is selected can be expressed as T1 < T2, where T2 is the time from when the predetermined lamp lights up to when it goes out in the predetermined flashing pattern of the predetermined lamp.

Furthermore, with regard to the effect switch used to stop the cursor display in the roulette effect, the distance from when the effect switch is pressed until it is pushed to a position where its ON state can be detected is set to 0.8 cm. This assumes that the player operating the effect switch moves their hand at a speed of 100 km/h, and it takes approximately 0.3 ms for the effect switch to be pushed 0.8 cm when operated. This approximately 0.3 ms time prevents the player from being certain that they have accurately pressed a certain split display area of the roulette effect, and prevents a loss of enthusiasm for the game even if the cursor display stops in an unexpected position. Furthermore, since a player's hand typically moves approximately 50 cm when operating the effect switch, it takes 18 ms from the time the player begins to move their hand to press the effect switch until the player's hand reaches the effect switch. By taking this 18 ms into account when determining the time it takes for the effect switch to turn on, it is possible to prevent players from being certain that they have accurately pressed a certain split display area in the roulette effect, and to prevent players from losing interest in playing even if the cursor display stops in an unexpected position.

In addition, when a cyclical effect is executed in which the cursor display moves periodically, such as in a roulette effect, the cyclical effect's cycle time is configured to be not synchronized with the reel rotation speed so as not to assist in eye-pressing the main reels. In this embodiment, when the cursor display movement speed is at its fastest, it takes 50 ms for the cursor display to switch from one divided display area to the next divided display area. When the main reel rotation speed is at its fastest (constant speed), a 20-symbol reel rotates 79.5 times per minute, so the time it takes for the cursor display to move from one symbol to the next on the reel is approximately 37.7 ms, meaning that the time it takes for the cursor display to switch from one divided display area to the next divided display area is greater than the time it takes to move from one symbol to the next on the reel.

This configuration allows the cursor display cycle of the roulette effect to be offset from the movement cycle of the symbols on the reels, preventing assistance with eye-pressing on the main reels.

In addition, if the time it takes for the cursor display to switch from one divided display area to the next divided display area when the cursor display movement speed is at its highest speed is set to 20 ms, and the time it takes for a 20-symbol reel to move from one symbol to the next on the reel when the main reel rotation speed is at its highest speed (constant speed), and a 20-symbol reel rotates 79.5 times per minute, the time it takes for the cursor display to switch from one divided display area to the next divided display area may be set to be less than the time it takes for the cursor display to move from one symbol to the next on the reel.

Even with this configuration, the cursor display cycle of the roulette effect and the movement cycle of the symbols on the reels can be shifted, preventing assistance with eye-pressing on the main reels. In other words, the time it takes for the cursor display to switch from one divided display area to the next divided display area does not have to be the time it takes to move from one symbol to the next on the reels, and the time it takes for the cursor display to switch from one divided display area to the next divided display area and the time it takes to move from one symbol to the next on the reels are not limited to the above-mentioned embodiments.

In this configuration, the display device displays certain information related to the progress of the game in each of the multiple display areas, sequentially switches between selection displays indicating that one of the display areas has been selected, and can display a predetermined effect in which the selection display is frozen in one of the display areas when a predetermined condition is met.When the display device sequentially switches between selection displays indicating that one of the display areas has been selected, the time T1 from when a certain display area is selected and when the next display area is selected and when the next symbol is selected and when the reels are rotating at a constant speed, the time T1 can be compared to the time T2 from when a certain symbol is displayed in a predetermined position and when the symbol following that symbol is displayed in the predetermined position, this can be expressed as T1 ≠ T2.

In addition, when a game is started by operating the start switch, a wait period may occur depending on the progress of the previous game. The wait period can be a maximum of 2 to 3 seconds. If the start timing of the roulette effect is set after the start switch is accepted, and there is the maximum wait period after the start switch is accepted, the roulette effect is configured to start after the stop switch can be accepted. Also, even if there is no wait period after the start switch is accepted (if 4.1 seconds or more have passed since the reels began spinning in the previous game), the roulette effect is configured to start before the stop switch can be accepted.

This configuration prevents the roulette effect from being skipped by operating the stop switch. For example, if the roulette effect ends upon acceptance of any stop switch operation, acceptance of a third stop operation, acceptance of a bet operation for the next game, or acceptance of a start switch operation for the next game, there is a possibility that the roulette effect will end before the player can fully enjoy it. To prevent this from happening, the start timing of the roulette effect is set to a timing before the stop switch can be operated. In particular, by starting the roulette effect and completing one or more revolutions around all split display areas or by increasing the movement speed of the roulette effect cursor display to the maximum speed before the stop switch can be operated, the roulette effect can be made more enjoyable and the excitement of the game can be increased.

This configuration can be expressed as follows: a display device that displays certain information related to the progress of a game in each of a plurality of divided display areas; sequentially switching between display areas to show which of the display areas has been selected; and, when a predetermined condition is met, displaying a predetermined effect that stops the display of the selection in one of the display areas; the predetermined effect can be executed by operating the start switch; and, when the predetermined effect is executed by operating the start switch in a situation where no wait occurs, the predetermined effect can be executed before the operation of the stop switch is enabled.

Also, if the roulette effect starts after the start switch is pressed, a freeze may occur after the start switch is pressed (before the reels start spinning), and the roulette effect may start during the freeze. If the roulette effect is started during a freeze, the freeze is executed for a few seconds and the roulette effect starts during the freeze, but the roulette effect may end during the freeze, or may end when the freeze ends, or the roulette effect may continue even after the freeze ends.

With this configuration, the roulette effect can be started during a freeze, allowing players to enjoy the roulette effect.

Furthermore, the roulette effect may have multiple patterns for the cursor display stop. For example, there are patterns in which the cursor moves from the cursor display position when the effect switch is received to a predetermined cursor display position in the shortest possible time; patterns in which the cursor moves from the cursor display position when the effect switch is received to the predetermined cursor display position after making one full rotation; and patterns in which the cursor moves from the cursor display position when the effect switch is received to the predetermined cursor display position after making one full rotation, and the cursor moves at a slow speed. The selection rate of each of these cursor display movement patterns varies depending on the expectation of whether or not it has been determined that a relatively advantageous bonus will be awarded to the player from among the bonuses displayed in the divided display area.

By configuring it in this way, players can see the stopping pattern of the cursor display and feel a sense of anticipation, which can increase the enjoyment of the game.

As mentioned above, the cursor display movement cycle for the roulette effect is 50 ms, and this movement cycle is configured not to be synchronized with the dynamic lighting cycle. In this embodiment, the dynamic lighting cycle is 11.175 ms, and each time the cursor display advances by one position, a certain lamp (one of the credit number indicator, acquired coin number indicator, 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, 3 bet lamp, replay lamp, start lamp, and medal insertion possible lamp) does not light up.

With this configuration, the brightness of the various lamps and the LCD screen are not synchronized, reducing light irritation, reducing fatigue from playing and preventing the onset of photosensitivity, allowing players to play for long periods of time with peace of mind.

<Setting confirmation effect>
In this embodiment, the device is equipped with a presentation to convince the player of the setting value corresponding to the payout rate of the gaming machine, and a presentation to convince the player of the range of setting values corresponding to the payout rate of the gaming machine, and such presentation is called a setting confirmation presentation.

An effect that convinces a player of the setting value corresponding to the gaming machine's payout rate is an effect that only appears with a single setting value. For example, if a setting confirmation effect that only appears when the setting value is 6 is executed, the player can be sure that the setting value is 6 when they see that effect. Such a setting confirmation effect that confirms one setting is called a setting confirmation effect (single).

An effect that convinces a player of the range of setting values corresponding to the payout rate of a gaming machine (excluding the range of all setting values) is an effect that only appears when the setting value is within a certain range. For example, if a setting confirmation effect is executed that only appears when the setting value is 4, 5, or 6, the player can be sure that the setting value is one of 4, 5, or 6 when they see that effect. Such a setting confirmation effect that confirms a setting within a certain range is called a setting confirmation effect (range).

Note that when simply referred to as "setting confirmation effect," it refers to a broader concept that includes both setting confirmation effect (single) and setting confirmation effect (range).

Note that in this embodiment, effects that allow players to guess a setting value that has the potential to appear with all setting values but is particularly likely to appear with a certain setting value are not included in the setting confirmation effects. For example, if the appearance rate of a certain effect is 10% for setting 1, 10% for setting 2, 10% for setting 3, 10% for setting 4, 10% for setting 5, and 20% for setting 6, the effect is likely to appear with setting 6, but has the potential to appear with all setting values, so the player cannot be certain of the setting value when seeing the effect, and therefore is not included in the setting confirmation effects in this embodiment. Note that in the case where the appearance rate of a certain effect is 0% for setting 1, 10% for setting 2, 10% for setting 3, 10% for setting 4, 10% for setting 5, and 20% for setting 6, the fact that the effect does not appear with setting 1 allows the player to be certain that the setting is 2 to 6 when seeing the effect, and therefore this effect is included in the setting confirmation effects in this embodiment.

As shown in Figure 104, setting confirmation effects include sound patterns output by operating the effect switch on the start screen of a game state such as CZ or AT, the end screen of a game state such as CZ or AT, and the end screen of a game state such as CZ or AT, as well as a display of the number of game medals won during the AT, a display of the number of added medals during the AT, and sounds output at specific times (when a button press is successful, at the start of a certain game state, at the end of a certain game state, etc.).

In addition, when an end screen for a game state such as CZ or AT is displayed, operating the start switch for the next game may continue and start the CZ or AT (a so-called revival effect). In this case, it may be possible to select a setting confirmation effect pattern with a different setting value on the end screen. For example, when a revival effect is executed by operating the start switch for the next game when the end screen is displayed in a setting value of 2, a setting confirmation effect of "setting 4 or higher confirmed" may be selected on the end screen. In this way, the condition for the setting confirmation effect may or may not require that a revival effect not occur (as long as the relationship between the setting value and the setting confirmation effect is correct even when a revival effect occurs).

The setting value information revealed by these setting confirmation effects is important information for players when playing the game, so players may use the timing of the setting confirmation effects to decide whether to continue playing or to set a goal to achieve in the game.

Furthermore, if setting value 6, which has the highest payout rate, is determined too early, other gaming machines in the same arcade will be deemed not to have setting value 6, which will lead to a decrease in operation of the entire arcade.

For this reason, the trigger and frequency of appearance of setting confirmation effects are important parameters for increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In particular, the setting confirmation effect that confirms setting values 5 and 6, which are setting values (called high settings) that have the highest ball payout rates of all setting values, is one of the effects that players are most interested in. Therefore, if it appears frequently, players may think that not seeing the setting confirmation effect means that the setting is a setting value (called low settings) that has the lowest ball payout rate of all setting values, which could be a factor in causing them to quit playing early.

In light of this, when the numerator of the setting confirmation effect (single) in which a setting value of 6 is confirmed at the CZ end screen, which is a predetermined setting confirmation effect among the setting confirmation effects, is set to 1, the denominator is set to a value of approximately 10,000 or more, which is the maximum number of plays per day (12-hour business hours). For example, if the probability of winning for setting values 1 to 6 CZ is set to 1/120 (assuming that the CZ end screen is always displayed when a CZ is won) and the probability of winning for the setting confirmation effect (single) in which a setting value of 6 is confirmed at the CZ end screen for each play is set to 1/100, then 1/120 x 1/100 = 1/12,000, and when the numerator is 1, the denominator (12,000) is greater than 10,000, which is the maximum number of plays per day (12-hour business hours). The probability of winning 1/10,000 or more when playing 10,000 times is 63.21%. In other words, the probability of winning a 1/10,000 prize in 10,000 tries is 63.21%, and the probability of not winning a 1/10,000 prize in 10,000 tries is 36.79%.

By configuring it this way, the probability of a setting confirmation effect (single) confirming a setting value of 6 appearing on the CZ end screen after 10,000 plays is 56.54%, below 63.21%. Even if a setting confirmation effect (single) confirming a setting value of 6 does not appear on the CZ end screen, the probability that the setting value is 6 is 43.46%, above 36.79%. Therefore, even if a setting confirmation effect (single) confirming a setting value of 6 does not appear on the CZ end screen, it is unlikely to be a factor in causing players to quit playing. Also, when the numerator is 1, the denominator is a guideline for the number of plays that will result in a winning probability of 50% or more if played up to that point. Therefore, by setting the probability denominator to a value of 10,000 or more, even if it does not appear after playing in one day, it cannot be concluded that the setting is low, preventing a decrease in motivation to visit the arcade again.

Furthermore, when the numerator of the setting confirmation effect (single) in which setting value 6 is confirmed on the AT end screen, which is a specified setting confirmation effect, is set to 1, the denominator is set to a value of approximately 10,000 or more, which is the maximum number of times play can be performed in one day (12-hour business hours). For example, if the probability of winning an AT with setting values 1 to 6 is 1/500 (assuming that the AT end screen is always displayed when the AT is won), and the probability of winning a setting confirmation effect (single) in which setting value 6 is confirmed on the AT end screen is 3/100, then 1/500 x 3/100 = 1/16666.67, so when the numerator is 1, the denominator (16666.67) is set to 1, which is greater than 10,000, which is the maximum number of times play can be performed in one day (12-hour business hours).

By configuring it in this way, the probability of a setting confirmation effect (single) confirming a setting value of 6 appearing on the AT end screen after 10,000 plays is 45.12%, which is less than 63.21%. Even if a setting confirmation effect (single) confirming a setting value of 6 does not appear on the AT end screen, the probability that the setting value is 6 is 54.88%, which is more than 36.79%. Therefore, even if a setting confirmation effect (single) confirming a setting value of 6 does not appear on the AT end screen, it is unlikely to be a factor that causes players to quit playing.

In addition, when the numerator of the probability of the combined appearance of the setting confirmation effect (single) that confirms the setting value of 6 on the CZ end screen and the AT end screen, which are predetermined setting confirmation effects, is 1, the denominator is less than 10,000 times, which is the maximum number of times played per day (12-hour operation).

For example, in the above-described embodiment, the probability of a setting confirmation effect (single) appearing on the CZ end screen for each game in which a setting value of 6 is confirmed is 1/12,000, and the probability of a setting confirmation effect (single) appearing on the AT end screen for each game in which a setting value of 6 is confirmed is 1/16,666.67. Therefore, the combined probability of a setting confirmation effect (single) appearing on the CZ end screen and the AT end screen in which a setting value of 6 is confirmed is 1/6,976.74, and the denominator (6,976.74) when the numerator is 1 is less than 10,000 times, which is the maximum number of times a game can be played in one day (12-hour operation).

The combined probability of all setting confirmation effects (single) that confirm a setting value of 6 appearing is not set to 1/2000 or higher. This is because the average number of plays in a day (12-hour operation) is around 2000, and if the combined probability of all setting confirmation effects (single) that confirm a setting value of 6 appearing was set to more than this average number of plays, players would think that no setting confirmation effect (single) appearing meant the setting was low, which would increase the likelihood of this causing them to quit playing early. For this reason, the combined probability of all setting confirmation effects (single) that confirm a setting value of 6 appearing is set to 1/2000 or higher.

By configuring it in this way, even if the setting confirmation effect (single) is not displayed, it is less likely to be a factor in causing players to abandon play, and it can increase players' motivation to play by continuing until there is a chance that the setting confirmation effect (single) will be displayed.

The selection ratio of presentation patterns with this configuration will be explained based on Figure 105. Note that the payout rates for setting values 1 to 6 in Figure 105 are the same as those for the gaming machine of this embodiment, with setting value 1 having the lowest payout rate and setting value 6 having the highest payout rate. Furthermore, for setting values 2 to 5, the payout rate increases as the setting value increases.

The winning probability of the CZ shown in Figure 105 is 1/120, and the winning probability of the AT is 1/500. Note that the winning probability of the CZ and the winning probability of the AT can be freely designed in the specifications of the gaming machine. Furthermore, the probability of winning the CZ and the probability of winning the AT may vary for each setting value. For example, for setting value 1 the probability of winning the CZ is 1/139 and the probability of winning the AT is 1/556, for setting value 2 the probability of winning the CZ is 1/130 and the probability of winning the AT is 1/541, for setting value 3 the probability of winning the CZ is 1/128 and the probability of winning the AT is 1/538, for setting value 4 the probability of winning the CZ is 1/126 and the probability of winning the AT is 1/532, for setting value 5 the probability of winning the CZ is 1/124 and the probability of winning the AT is 1/528, for setting value 6 the probability of winning the CZ is 1/120 and the probability of winning the AT is 1/500. The higher the setting value (the higher the payout rate), the higher the probability of winning the CZ and the probability of winning the AT. Conversely, the higher the setting value (the higher the payout rate), the lower the probability of winning the CZ and the probability of winning the AT.

In the presentation patterns shown in Figure 105, "default" refers to the normal presentation pattern that is not a setting confirmation presentation. In other words, it is a presentation pattern that can appear regardless of the setting value.

"Setting 2 or higher confirmed" is a presentation pattern that, when it appears, confirms the setting value to be one of setting values 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6. In other words, it is a presentation pattern that does not appear with setting value 1.

"Setting 3 or higher confirmed" is a presentation pattern that, when it appears, confirms the setting value to be either setting value 3, setting value 4, setting value 5, or setting value 6. In other words, it is a presentation pattern that does not appear with setting value 1 or setting value 2.

"Setting 4 or higher confirmed" is a presentation pattern that, when it appears, confirms the setting value to be either setting value 4, setting value 5, or setting value 6. In other words, it is a presentation pattern that does not appear with setting value 1, setting value 2, or setting value 3.

"Setting 5 or higher confirmed" is a presentation pattern that, when it appears, confirms the setting to either setting value 5 or setting value 6. In other words, it is a presentation pattern that does not appear with setting value 1, setting value 2, setting value 3, or setting value 4.

"Setting 6 Confirmed" is a presentation pattern that, when it appears, confirms setting value 6. In other words, it is a presentation pattern that does not appear with setting values 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5.

"Even Number Setting Confirmed" is a presentation pattern that, when it appears, confirms setting value 2, setting value 4, or setting value 6. In other words, it is a presentation pattern that does not appear with setting value 1, setting value 3, or setting value 5.

"Setting 2 Negation" is a presentation pattern in which, when it appears, the setting value is confirmed to be one of setting values 1, 3, 4, 5, or 6. In other words, it is a presentation pattern that does not appear with setting value 2. Note that the probability of winning the "Setting 2 Negation" presentation pattern at a setting value with a ball payout rate lower than the setting value being denied (setting value 1 in FIG. 105) is lower than the probability of winning the presentation pattern at a setting value with a ball payout rate higher than the setting value being denied (setting values 3, 4, 5, and 6 in FIG. 105). Therefore, when the "Setting 2 Negation" setting confirmation presentation appears, it can be expected that the setting value is 3 or higher. Furthermore, the larger the setting value, the more likely the "Setting 2 Negation" setting confirmation presentation will appear. In this case, when the "Setting 2 Negation" setting confirmation presentation appears, the possibility of setting value 6 increases, and the higher the setting, the more reliable the setting value can be estimated.

This type of configuration has multiple setting values with different payout rates, a first setting value negation effect that allows players to recognize that the setting is not the first setting value, a second setting value different from the first setting value, and a third setting value different from the first and second setting values, with the third setting value having a higher payout rate than the second setting value, and it can be expressed as saying that the first setting value negation effect is more likely to appear when playing with the third setting value than when playing with the second setting value.

Furthermore, in Figure 105, the presentation pattern belonging to the setting confirmation presentation (single) is the presentation pattern of "setting 6 confirmed", and the presentation patterns belonging to the setting confirmation presentation (range) are the presentation patterns of "setting 2 or higher confirmed", "setting 3 or higher confirmed", "setting 4 or higher confirmed", "setting 5 or higher confirmed", "even number setting confirmed", and "setting 2 negated".

In addition, the winning probability of the "Setting 6 Confirmed" presentation pattern on the CZ end screen is 1%, and since the winning probability of the CZ is 1/120, the appearance probability of the "Setting 6 Confirmed" presentation pattern on the CZ end screen for each game is 1/12,000.

In addition, the probability of winning the "Setting 6 Confirmed" presentation pattern on the AT end screen is 3%, and since the probability of winning the AT is 1/500, the probability of the "Setting 6 Confirmed" presentation pattern appearing on the AT end screen for each game is 1/16666.67.

Also, even if the "Setting 6 Confirmed" effect pattern is not won when the setting value is 6, the setting value may be confirmed as 6. This is determined as a result of winning the setting confirmation effect (range) multiple times.

For example, in the case of the CZ ending screen pattern in Figure 105, if the "Setting 5 or higher confirmed" presentation pattern and the "Even number setting confirmed" presentation pattern are won, it is determined that the setting value is 6. If the "Setting 5 or higher confirmed" presentation pattern is won, either the setting value 5 or the setting value 6 is confirmed, and if the "Even number setting confirmed" presentation pattern is then won, it is determined that the setting value is 6 because the setting value 5 is odd.

In this way, when the setting value is determined by multiple setting determination effects (ranges), the probability of winning a performance pattern with multiple setting determination effects (ranges) is higher than the probability of winning a performance pattern with a setting determination effect (single).

To explain this using Figure 105, when the setting value is 6, the probability of winning the ``Setting 6 confirmed'' presentation pattern on the CZ end screen is 1%, when the setting value is 6, the probability of winning the ``Setting 5 or higher confirmed'' presentation pattern on the CZ end screen is 2%, and when the setting value is 6, the probability of winning the ``Even number setting confirmed'' presentation pattern on the CZ end screen is 5%. Therefore, with a 1/120 CZ winning probability, the CZ end screen will be displayed an average of 83 times in 10,000 plays, so the probability that the "Setting 6 Confirmed" effect pattern, which is a setting confirmation effect (single) effect pattern, will appear on 83 CZ end screens when the setting value is 6 is 1-(1-1/100) to the 83rd power x 100, or 56.58%, and the probability that both the "Setting 5 or Higher Confirmed" effect pattern and the "Even Setting Confirmed" effect pattern, which are setting confirmation effect (range) effect patterns, will appear on 83 CZ end screens when the setting value is 6 is (1-(1-2/100) to the 83rd power) x (1-(1-5/100) to the 82nd power) x 100, or 80.09%, so the probability of multiple setting confirmation effect (range) effect patterns appearing and revealing the setting value 6 is higher than the probability of a setting confirmation effect (single) effect pattern appearing and revealing the setting value 6.

Furthermore, the probability of the "Setting 6 Confirmed" presentation pattern appearing on the CZ end screen for each game in one day (12-hour operation) is 1/12,000, the probability of the "Setting 5 or higher confirmed" presentation pattern appearing on the CZ end screen for each game in one day (12-hour operation) is 1/6,000, and the probability of the "Even Number Setting Confirmed" presentation pattern appearing on the CZ end screen for each game in one day (12-hour operation) is 1/2,400. Therefore, the probability of the "Setting 5 or higher confirmed" presentation pattern appearing on the CZ end screen for each game in one day (12-hour operation) and the probability of the "Even Number Setting Confirmed" presentation pattern appearing when the numerator is 1 is the denominator (6,000 and 2,400), which is less than the maximum number of games per day (12-hour operation) of 10,000.

For this reason, in the case of a setting value of 6, there is a higher chance that either the "setting 5 or higher confirmed" or "even number setting confirmed" presentation pattern will appear within a day. This means that if you play for a day, you can expect either the "setting 5 or higher confirmed" or "even number setting confirmed" presentation pattern to appear, and you can also expect both the "setting 5 or higher confirmed" and "even number setting confirmed" presentation patterns to appear. Therefore, players who play for a long time are more likely to discover a setting value of 6 than players who play for a short time, which can increase the player's motivation to play.

This configuration can be expressed as follows: when playing with a predetermined setting value, a first setting value confirmation effect can be executed, which allows the player to recognize that the setting value is the predetermined setting value; when playing with a predetermined setting value, a second setting value confirmation effect can be executed, which allows the player to recognize that the setting value is any setting value including the predetermined setting value; when playing with a predetermined setting value, a third setting value confirmation effect can be executed, which allows the player to recognize that the setting value is any setting value including the predetermined setting value; when playing with a predetermined setting value, if the second setting value confirmation effect and the third setting value confirmation effect are executed, the player can recognize that the setting value is the predetermined setting value; and the probability of the first setting value confirmation effect being executed, when playing with a predetermined setting value, is lower than the probability of both the second setting value confirmation effect and the third setting value confirmation effect being executed.

Also, like the CZ end screen, when the "Setting 5 or higher confirmed" presentation pattern and the "Even number setting confirmed" presentation pattern are combined on the AT end screen, it is determined that the setting value is 6. The probability of the "Setting 6 confirmed" presentation pattern being won on the AT end screen when the setting value is 6 is 3%, the probability of the "Setting 5 or higher confirmed" presentation pattern being won on the AT end screen when the setting value is 6 is 4%, and the probability of the "Even number setting confirmed" presentation pattern being won on the AT end screen when the setting value is 6 is 10%. Therefore, with an AT winning probability of 1/500, the AT end screen will be displayed an average of 20 times in 10,000 plays, so the probability that the "Setting 6 Confirmed" effect pattern, which is a setting confirmation effect (single) effect pattern, will appear on 20 AT end screens when the setting value is 6 is 1-(1-3/100) to the 20th power x 100, or 45.62%, and the probability that both the "Setting 5 or Higher Confirmed" effect pattern and the "Even Setting Confirmed" effect pattern, which are setting confirmation effect (range) effect patterns, will appear on 20 AT end screens when the setting value is 6 is (1-(1-4/100) to the 20th power) x (1-(1-10/100) to the 19th power) x 100, or 48.26%, so the probability of multiple setting confirmation effect (range) effect patterns appearing and revealing the setting value 6 is higher than the probability of a setting confirmation effect (single) effect pattern appearing and revealing the setting value 6.

Furthermore, the probability of the "Setting 6 Confirmed" effect pattern appearing on the AT end screen for each game in one day (12-hour operation) is 1/16666.67, the probability of the "Setting 5 or higher confirmed" effect pattern appearing on the AT end screen for each game in one day (12-hour operation) is 1/12500, and the probability of the "Even number setting confirmed" effect pattern appearing on the AT end screen for each game in one day (12-hour operation) is 1/5000, so the probability of the "Setting 5 or higher confirmed" effect pattern appearing on the AT end screen for each game in one day (12-hour operation) and the probability of the "Even number setting confirmed" effect pattern appearing are equal to or greater than the probability of the "Setting 6 Confirmed" effect pattern appearing on the AT end screen for each game in one day (12-hour operation).

For this reason, in the case of a setting value of 6, there is a higher chance that either the "setting 5 or higher confirmed" or "even number setting confirmed" presentation pattern will appear within a day. This means that if you play for a day, you can expect either the "setting 5 or higher confirmed" or "even number setting confirmed" presentation pattern to appear, and you can also expect both the "setting 5 or higher confirmed" and "even number setting confirmed" presentation patterns to appear. Therefore, players who play for a long time are more likely to discover a setting value of 6 than players who play for a short time, which can increase the player's motivation to play.

Also, for a setting value of 6, the probability that a "setting 6 confirmed" presentation pattern will appear, in which setting value 6 is confirmed, on either the CZ end screen or the AT end screen within a day is 100 - ((100 - 56.58) x (100 - 45.62)), or 76.39%, and the probability that both a "setting 5 or higher confirmed" presentation pattern and an "even number setting confirmed" presentation pattern will appear on either the CZ end screen or the AT end screen within a day is 100 - ((100 - 80.09) x (100 - 70.32) x (100 - 54.97) x (100 - 48.26)), or 98.62%. Additionally, the probability that a setting value of 6 will be revealed in a "Setting 6 Confirmed" presentation pattern, in which a setting value of 6 is confirmed on either the CZ end screen or the AT end screen within a day, or in both a "Setting 5 or higher confirmed" presentation pattern and an "Even setting confirmed" presentation pattern on either the CZ end screen or the AT end screen within a day, is 100 - ((100 - 76.39) x (100 - 98.62)), which is 99.67%.

As a result, when the setting value is 6, players can see a presentation that shows that setting value 6 is almost confirmed by playing for a long period of time, which increases players' motivation to play for a long period of time and promotes operation.

In Figure 105, when the setting value is 6, the probability of winning the "Setting 6 Confirmed" presentation pattern on the CZ end screen is 1/100, and the denominator (100) when the numerator is 1 is smaller than the average number of CZ wins (83 times) after 10,000 plays, which corresponds to the maximum number of plays per day, and is greater than the average number of CZ wins (16 times) after 2,000 plays, which corresponds to the average number of plays per day. This makes it difficult for the "Setting 6 Confirmed" presentation pattern to appear on the CZ end screen even after playing for one day.

Also, in Figure 105, when the setting value is 6, the probability of winning any of the setting confirmation effects on the CZ end screen is 20/100, and when the numerator is 1, the denominator (5) is smaller than the average number of CZ wins (83 times) when playing 10,000 times, which corresponds to the maximum number of times played per day, and is also smaller than the average number of CZ wins (16 times) when playing 2,000 times, which corresponds to the average number of times played per day.

With this configuration, the probability of the "Setting 6 Confirmed" effect appearing on the CZ end screen during a single day of play under a setting of 6 is low (56.58%), but the probability of any of the setting confirmation effects appearing is high (99.99%). Therefore, seeing any of the setting confirmation effects motivates players to continue playing, and seeing any of the setting confirmation effects can lead to long-term motivation to continue playing until the next setting confirmation effect is seen.

This configuration has multiple setting values with different payout rates, and has a first setting value with the highest payout rate among the multiple setting values. When playing with the first setting value, it is possible to execute a first setting value confirmation effect that allows the player to recognize that the first setting value is the one on the ending screen indicating that a predetermined game state has ended. When playing with the first setting value, it is possible to execute a second setting value confirmation effect that allows the player to recognize that the setting value is any setting value including the first setting value on the ending screen indicating that a predetermined game state has ended. There are multiple types of second setting value confirmation effects, and when the first setting value is reached, it is possible to execute a second setting value confirmation effect that allows the player to recognize that the setting value is any setting value including the first setting value on the ending screen indicating that a predetermined game state has ended. The average number of times that an end screen indicating the end of a specified game state will be displayed in 10,000 plays is smaller than the denominator when the numerator of the probability that a first setting value confirmation effect will be executed on an end screen indicating the end of a specified game state is set to 1, and it can be expressed as: the average number of times that an end screen indicating the end of a specified game state will be displayed in 10,000 plays in a first setting value situation is greater than the denominator when the numerator of the probability that any one of the multiple types of second setting value confirmation effects will be executed on an end screen indicating the end of a specified game state is set to 1.

In Figure 105, when the setting value is 6, the probability of winning the "Setting 6 Confirmed" presentation pattern on the AT end screen is 3/100, and the denominator (33.33) when the numerator is 1 is greater than the average number of AT wins (20 times) when playing 10,000 times, which corresponds to the maximum number of times played per day, and is also greater than the average number of AT wins (4 times) when playing 2,000 times, which corresponds to the average number of times played per day.

Also, in Figure 105, when the setting value is 6, the probability of winning any of the setting confirmation effects on the AT end screen is 39/100, and when the numerator is 1, the denominator (2.56) is smaller than the average number of AT wins (16 times) when playing 2,000 times, which corresponds to the average number of times played per day.

With this configuration, the probability of the "Setting 6 Confirmed" display pattern appearing on the AT end screen during a single day of play under setting value 6 is low (45.62%), but the probability of any of the setting confirmation displays appearing is high (99.99%). Therefore, seeing any of the setting confirmation displays increases motivation to play, and players who see any of the setting confirmation displays can continue playing until they see the next setting confirmation display, leading to long-term motivation to play.

As with the CZ end screen, when the numerator of the winning probability of the "Setting 6 Confirmed" presentation pattern on the AT end screen is set to 1, the denominator may be smaller than the average number of AT wins (20 times) when playing 10,000 times, which corresponds to the maximum number of times played per day.

In addition, players often use the end of the first AT as a criterion for deciding whether or not to continue playing.

For this reason, it is unlikely that a setting confirmation effect (single) will appear within the average number of plays required to see the initial AT end screen, but it is desirable to configure the system so that there is a possibility that some kind of setting confirmation effect will appear.

If the probability of winning the AT is 1/500, the average number of plays until the AT is reached will be 500, and the number of plays from the start of the AT to its end will vary depending on the AT stay ratio. However, if the AT stay ratio is set to 30%, which is less than the upper limit of 70%, the average number of plays per AT is 150 ((maximum number of plays per day: 10,000 times x 30%) / (maximum number of plays per day: 10,000 times x probability of winning the AT: 1/500)), so the number of plays from the start of play to the end of the first AT will be 650. When this setting value is 6, the probability of winning the "Setting 6 Confirmed" presentation pattern on either the CZ end screen or the AT end screen after 650 plays is 1-(1-1/100) to the fifth power + 1-(1-3/100) to the first power x 100 (%), or 7.90%. Furthermore, the probability that a setting confirmation effect pattern will be won on either the CZ end screen or the AT end screen after 650 plays when the setting value is 6 is (1 - (80/100) to the fifth power) x (1 - (61/100) to the first power) x 100 (%), or 26.22%. In other words, the probability that a "Setting 6 Confirmed" effect pattern will be won on either the CZ end screen or the AT end screen after 650 plays when the setting value is 6 is < the probability that a setting confirmation effect pattern will be won on either the CZ end screen or the AT end screen after 650 plays when the setting value is 6.

Therefore, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, the setting confirmation effect (single) effect pattern is unlikely to appear within the average number of plays required to view the initial AT end screen, but some kind of setting confirmation effect may appear. As a result, when the setting value is 6, it is unlikely that setting value 6 will be confirmed after the initial AT ends, but some kind of setting confirmation effect is likely to appear, which can increase motivation to play for a long time.

In addition, when deciding whether or not to continue playing, players often aim to play until the number of plays at which the AT or CZ is determined (the so-called ceiling number of plays).

For this reason, it is unlikely that a setting confirmation effect (single) will appear within the average number of plays required to view the CZ end screen or AT end screen after reaching the ceiling number of plays, but it is desirable to configure the game so that there is a possibility that some kind of setting confirmation effect will appear.

When the ceiling number of plays required to confirm the AT is 1,000, the number of plays from the start of the AT to its end varies depending on the AT stay ratio. However, if the AT stay ratio is set to 30%, which is less than the upper limit of 70%, the average number of plays per AT is 150 ((maximum number of plays per day: 10,000 x 30%) / (maximum number of plays per day: 10,000 x probability of winning the AT: 1/500)), so the number of plays from the start of play to the end of the first AT is 1,150. In a situation where this setting value is 6, the probability of winning the "Setting 6 Confirmed" presentation pattern on the CZ end screen after 1,150 plays is 1 - (1 - 1/100) to the power of 8, or 7.73%. Furthermore, since the AT has not been won in the 1,000 plays, it has only been won once, which is the ceiling, so the probability of winning the "Setting 6 Confirmed" presentation pattern on the AT end screen is 3%. In other words, the probability of a "Setting 6 Confirmed" effect pattern appearing when the ceiling is reached is 1-(1-0.0773) x (1-0.03) x 100(%), or 35.41%. Also, the probability of any of the setting confirmation effect patterns winning on the CZ end screen after 1,150 plays when the setting value is 6 is (1-(80/100) to the eighth power) x 100(%), or 83.22%. Also, since the AT has not been won in 1,000 plays, it is only the ceiling, so the probability of any of the setting confirmation effect patterns winning on the AT end screen is 31%. In other words, the probability of any of the setting confirmation effect effect patterns appearing when the ceiling is reached is 1-(1-0.8322) x (1-0.61) x 100(%), or 93.46%. In other words, the probability of winning the "Setting 6 Confirmed" presentation pattern on either the CZ end screen or the AT end screen after 1,150 plays when the setting value is 6 is < the probability of winning any of the setting confirmation presentation patterns on either the CZ end screen or the AT end screen after 1,150 plays when the setting value is 6.

Therefore, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, the setting confirmation effect (single) pattern is unlikely to appear within the average number of plays required to view the AT end screen after reaching the ceiling, but some kind of setting confirmation effect may appear. As a result, when the setting value is 6, it is unlikely that setting value 6 will be confirmed after the first AT ends, but some kind of setting confirmation effect is likely to appear, which can increase motivation to play for a long time.

Also, in Figure 105, if the ceiling number of plays is 1000 and the probability of winning the CZ is 1/120, the average number of CZ wins up to the ceiling is 8. And because the probability that any of the setting confirmation effects will appear on the CZ end screen is 1/5, the average number of CZ wins up to the ceiling is greater than the denominator (5) when the numerator of the probability that any of the setting confirmation effects will appear on the CZ end screen is 1.

As a result, even if the player plays until the ceiling is reached, the setting confirmation effect is more likely to appear at least once, which can maintain the player's motivation to continue playing even after the AT ends after the ceiling is reached.

Note that, although this is a different aspect from the present embodiment, if the ceiling number of plays is 1000, the probability of winning the CZ is 1/120, and the probability of one of the setting confirmation effects appearing on the CZ end screen is 1/10, then the average number of CZ wins up to the ceiling will be smaller than the denominator (10) when the numerator of the probability of one of the setting confirmation effects appearing on the CZ end screen is 1. In this case, since the setting confirmation effect is less likely to appear even when playing up to the ceiling, even if the ceiling is reached and the setting confirmation effect does not appear, there is still a possibility of a high setting, which can maintain the motivation to continue playing.

The AT end screen described above is the normal end screen, but a special end screen different from the normal end screen may be provided for the AT. For example, the end screen associated with the ending performance that is executed when the number of wins exceeds a predetermined number or when the number of consecutive ATs exceeds a predetermined number is considered a special end screen.

If the condition for reaching the ending is that the number of coins won exceeds a predetermined number, it is possible to use MY2400, which is the difference in coins that ends the advantageous zone, as the predetermined number. In other words, since the advantageous zone ends at MY2400 coins, the ending effect can be started during the 50 to 100 plays that reach the ending, and the ending effect end screen (special end screen) can be displayed when MY reaches 2400 coins and the advantageous zone ends. Note that any number of coins won can be used as the standard, not just MY2400 coins.

If the condition for reaching the ending is that the number of consecutive ATs exceeds a predetermined number, any number of consecutive ATs may be used as the standard. For example, if the ending performance is to be executed after 10 consecutive ATs, the ending performance may be executed and the ending screen for the ending performance may be displayed after the number of consecutive ATs reaches 10, regardless of the number of games played.

Since these special end screens appear less frequently than the regular end screens, they are designed to increase the probability of the setting confirmation effect appearing compared to the regular end screens.

This configuration makes it more likely that the setting confirmation effect will appear when the player reaches the ending, which gives the player a sense of accomplishment, thereby increasing the player's motivation to play and preventing them from quitting the game after the ending (so-called immediate quitting).

This configuration allows for a setting confirmation effect to be executed when a player is playing with a predetermined setting value, which the player can recognize as the predetermined setting value, or any setting value including the predetermined setting value, and allows for the setting confirmation effect to be executed on an end screen that indicates the end of a predetermined game state.The end screens include a first end screen that can be displayed when predetermined conditions are met, and a second end screen that can be displayed when specific conditions are met, and it can be said that the setting confirmation effect is more likely to appear on the second end screen than on the first end screen.

In Figure 105, a configuration is described in which the same type of effect pattern can be selected on the CZ end screen and the AT end screen. However, this is not limited to this configuration, and different types of effect patterns can be selected on the CZ end screen and the AT end screen. For example, the CZ end screen may be configured so that "Setting 2 or higher confirmed," "Setting 3 or higher confirmed," and "Setting 4 or higher confirmed" can be selected, while the AT end screen may be configured so that "Setting 2 or higher confirmed," "Setting 3 or higher confirmed," "Setting 4 or higher confirmed," "Setting 5 or higher confirmed," and "Setting 6 confirmed" can be selected. This is because the appearance probability is lower on the AT end screen than on the CZ end screen. Therefore, even if setting confirmation effects related to highly accurate high settings are made more likely to appear on the AT end screen, they will not appear frequently due to the low appearance rate on the AT end screen. This prevents setting confirmation effects for high setting confirmation from appearing too early, and also prevents setting confirmation effects for high setting confirmation from appearing too early on the CZ end screen.

Conversely, the CZ end screen may be configured to display a setting confirmation effect for a higher setting than the AT end screen. In this case, the player's goal will be more likely to be the CZ (the probability of winning is higher for the CZ than for the AT), lowering the hurdle to winning the CZ and increasing motivation to play.

This embodiment may have setting confirmation effects different from the setting confirmation effect shown in FIG. 105. For example, it may have "Setting 1 Negated" or "Setting 3 Negated" that negate a certain setting value, "Setting 5 Confirmed" or "Setting 4 Confirmed" that confirm a certain setting value, "Odd Setting Confirmed" that confirms an odd setting value, or "Setting Increase Confirmed" that confirms that the setting has been changed to a setting with a higher payout rate than the previous day's setting. Even in such cases, "Setting 5 Confirmed" and "Setting 4 Confirmed" would be considered setting confirmation effects (single) as described above, and "Setting 1 Negated," "Setting 3 Negated," "Odd Setting Confirmed," and "Setting Increase Confirmed" would be considered setting confirmation effects (range). The configuration of the invention described above may be implemented in embodiments different from this embodiment.

Here is a detailed explanation of the "Setting Increase Confirmation" effect, one of the setting confirmation effects mentioned above.

When the "Setting Increase Confirmed" effect pattern appears, a setting value higher than the previous day is confirmed for the same gaming machine. For example, if the setting value on the previous day is 1 and the setting value on the next day is 2, the "Setting Increase Confirmed" effect pattern may be selected, but if the setting value on the previous day is 3 and the setting value on the next day is 2, the "Setting Increase Confirmed" effect pattern will not be selected.

To determine whether it is the previous day or the next day, the sub-control means stores multiple set values between power outages. This is because a power outage must occur when changing settings. The set values after a certain power outage are stored in a specified memory area of the sub-control means, and the set values after the power outage following the certain power outage are stored in a specific memory area different from the specified memory area of the sub-control means. The specified memory area and the specific memory area are also configured so that they are not initialized by a power outage or setting change. The number of set values stored across power outages is not limited to two; three or more may be stored.

With this configuration, power outages do not occur during normal business hours; a power outage indicates the end of business for the day, and powering on indicates the opening of the amusement center the next day. Therefore, the sub-control means stores the setting values between power outages, and if the setting value stored in a specific memory area is greater than the setting value stored in a predetermined memory area, a presentation table is used that allows the selection of a "setting increase confirmed" presentation pattern. To use a presentation table that allows the selection of a "setting increase confirmed" presentation pattern, a flag that makes the setting increase confirmed presentation pattern selectable can be stored in a certain memory area of the sub-control means.

If a power outage occurs during business hours and the power is turned on again, the setting values will not have changed between the power outage and the power on, so after the power is turned on, a presentation table that does not select the "Setting Up Confirmed" presentation pattern will be selected. As a result, the "Setting Up Confirmed" presentation pattern will no longer appear, but since this does not display information that is disadvantageous to the player, trouble can be prevented.

In addition, the flag for enabling the selection of the setting increase confirmation effect pattern stored in a certain memory area of the sub-control means is configured to be initialized during the initialization process when the power is turned on. With this configuration, the setting increase confirmation effect pattern can be temporarily prevented from being selected when the power is turned on after a power outage, making it less likely that a flag for enabling the selection of the setting increase confirmation effect pattern will be stored due to a malfunction when the setting value drops before and after a power outage.

Furthermore, to determine whether or not to display the "setting increase confirmed" effect pattern, the sub-control means stores multiple set values between power outages. However, this is not limited to this; the sub-control means may also store multiple set values between setting changes. Even in this case, by initializing the flag that allows the setting increase confirmation effect pattern to be selected when the power is turned on, it is possible to prevent the setting increase confirmation effect pattern from appearing even if the setting change device is not operated in preparation for opening the next day (so-called fixed setting).

Alternatively, an RTC (Real Time Clock) may be installed, and the RTC information may be used to determine whether it is the next day, and the setting value information for the previous and next days may be compared. If the setting value has increased, a "setting increase confirmed" effect pattern may be selected.

This configuration can be expressed as follows: the main control means has a first setting value memory area capable of storing setting values, the sub-control means has a second setting value memory area capable of storing setting values, the first setting value memory area is configured to be initialized by the initialization process associated with a setting change, and the second setting value memory area is configured not to be initialized by the initialization process associated with a setting change; when a setting change is executed in a situation where the first setting value is used and the setting value is changed to a second setting value which has a higher ball payout rate than the first setting value, a first setting value confirmation effect can be executed in a game executed in a situation where the second setting value is used, allowing the player to recognize that the current setting value has a higher ball payout rate than the previous setting value.

In this embodiment, the configuration may be such that the more times a game is played since the power is turned on, the more likely the setting confirmation effect will appear.

For example, in the CZ end screen shown in Figure 106, the appearance rate of each setting confirmation effect pattern is configured to differ for 1000G or less (G indicates the number of games played), 1001G to 3000G or less, 3001G to 5000G or less, and 5001G or more. Furthermore, the appearance rate of each setting confirmation effect pattern increases as the number of games played progresses from less than 1000G, to 1001G to 3000G, to 3001G to 5000G, to 5001G or more.

In addition, the appearance rate of the setting confirmation effect on the CZ end screen in Figure 105 is an effect table that can be selected between 3001 and 5000G, and the appearance rate of each effect pattern decreases for earlier game counts. For example, if the game count is 1000G or less, the appearance rate of the default screen on the CZ end screen is 95% or higher for all setting values.

This configuration prevents situations where the setting value is determined first thing in the morning, while motivating players to play until the number of plays that make the setting determination effect more likely to appear, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Note that while Figure 106 only explains the CZ end screen, the appearance rate of the other setting confirmation effects shown in Figure 104 also increases as the number of games played increases.

In this embodiment, an example has been described in which the setting values are set to 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6 in order of decreasing ball payout rate, but the gaming machine may also be set to a setting value L with a lower ball payout rate than setting value 1.

Set value L is designed for a payout rate of approximately 80% to 90%, which is more than 10% lower than the payout rate of setting 1. For example, the payout rate of setting value L is 80%, the payout rate of setting value 1 is 97%, the payout rate of setting value 2 is 98%, the payout rate of setting value 4 is 101%, the payout rate of setting value 5 is 105%, and the payout rate of setting value 6 is 110%. The difference between setting value 1 and setting value 2 is only about 1%, but the difference between setting value L and setting value 1 is 17%. In this way, setting value L can be said to be the setting value that is the most significantly lower than the adjacent setting value when the setting values are sorted by payout rate. Note that a maximum of six setting values can be provided, so if setting value L is provided, one of setting values 1 to 6 will be missing. In the example above, setting value 3 is missing.

Even in the case of gaming machines equipped with a setting value L, the setting value memory area that stores the setting value of the main control means has a storage range of 0 to 5. In other words, the value in the setting value memory area for setting value L is 0, the value in the setting value memory area for setting value 1 is 1, the value in the setting value memory area for setting value 2 is 2, the value in the setting value memory area for setting value 4 is 3, the value in the setting value memory area for setting value 5 is 4, and the value in the setting value memory area for setting value 6 is 5.

In addition, when the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is initialized when the setting value goes out of range due to fraudulent activity or the like, resulting in an abnormal state, either 0 or 1 may be stored in the setting value storage area. If 0 is stored in the setting value storage area, the setting value with the lowest payout rate can be set after fraudulent activity, thereby minimizing losses for the gaming facility, and if 1 is stored in the setting value storage area, losses for players can be minimized even if the setting value becomes 1 due to a malfunction.

Furthermore, since the setting value L is a test setting value and is not generally expected to be used in the operation of an amusement facility, when the setting value L is set, the "Setting L Confirmed" presentation pattern is made more likely to be selected. In other words, the "Setting L Confirmed" presentation pattern is included in the setting confirmation presentation.

The "Setting L Confirmed" presentation pattern involves a dedicated screen and sound being displayed at high frequency (50% to 100%) when the start switch is operated, and a dedicated screen being displayed at high frequency (50% to 100%) at the end of the CZ or AT, allowing players to immediately notice that the setting is L and to avoid gaming machines with a setting of L.

Also, when the setting value is L, the lower panel 5 may be turned off while the demo screen is displayed (when the setting value is 1 or higher, the lower panel 5 is lit while the demo screen is displayed), or the lower panel 5 may be turned off at all times (when the setting value is 1 or higher, the default lower panel 5 is lit), thereby informing the player that the setting value is L. Note that the lower panel 5 may be turned off in eco mode, etc., but in this case, the setting value L is not being notified.

In other words, the probability of meeting certain conditions when the setting value is L and executing the setting confirmation effect of "Setting L Confirmed" is higher than the probability of meeting certain conditions when the setting value is 6 and executing the setting confirmation effect of "Setting 6 Confirmed." Examples of certain conditions include conditions under which the setting confirmation effect can be executed, such as when the start switch is operated or when the CZ or AT ending screen is displayed.

This makes it easier for players to recognize that the set value L is set, and discourages them from playing with a payout rate that is too low.

In addition, of all the setting confirmation effects, the "Setting L Confirmed" effect pattern is the most likely to be selected.

This makes it easier for players to quickly recognize that the set value L is set, and discourages them from playing with a payout rate that is too low.

Also, by not including setting value 3 when setting value L is included (making it a six-level setting of setting value L, setting value 1, setting value 2, setting value 4, setting value 5, and setting value 6), it is possible to make the "even number setting confirmed" presentation pattern appear more easily. If setting value 4 were to be eliminated, there would be six levels of setting value L, setting value 1, setting value 2, setting value 3, setting value 5, and setting value 6, so when the "even number setting confirmed" presentation pattern is displayed, players will have to choose between setting value 2 or setting value 6 (because setting value L is not an even number). This would result in a significant drop in payout rate when "even number setting confirmed" appears and setting value 2 is found, reducing the repeat rate of players playing that gaming machine, and even if the proportion of setting value 6 for "even number setting confirmed" is increased, it would no longer be possible to differentiate it from "setting 6 confirmed."

For this reason, by not including one odd setting value when the setting value L is provided, the gameplay of "even setting confirmation" is expanded, making the game more interesting.

This configuration has multiple setting values with different payout rates, including a first setting value with the highest payout rate among the multiple setting values, and a second setting value that has the lowest payout rate among adjacent setting values when the multiple setting values are arranged in order of payout rate and has the largest difference in payout rate from its adjacent setting value. When playing with the first setting value, a first setting value confirmation effect can be executed, allowing the player to recognize that the setting value is the first setting value. When playing with the second setting value, a second setting value confirmation effect can be executed, allowing the player to recognize that the setting value is the second setting value. When playing with a setting value classified as an even number, a third setting value confirmation effect can be executed, allowing the player to recognize that the setting value is an even number. The probability of the first setting value confirmation effect being executed when playing with the first setting value is lower than the probability of the second setting value confirmation effect being executed when playing with the second setting value. This can be expressed as saying that the setting values classified as even numbers among the multiple setting values have a greater variety of setting values than the setting values classified as odd numbers among the multiple setting values.

However, in cases where setting value 5 has a higher payout rate than setting value 6, or where the payout is designed to have more drastic fluctuations in the payout, or where setting value 5 is the highest setting, or where an "odd number setting confirmed" presentation pattern is provided, the excitement of the game can be increased by not providing one even number setting value when setting value L is provided.

In addition, when the setting value is L, the setting confirmation effect patterns that negate a certain setting value, such as "Setting 1 Negation," "Setting 2 Negation," and "Setting 3 Negation" (if setting value 3 is available), are not selected.

This reduces the risk of gambling when using setting L, making it easier for players to realize that this is not a very good setting.

Also, when the setting value is L, the CZ and AT end screens may be configured to only display the default end screen. In this case, the setting confirmation effect will not be displayed on the CZ or AT end screen.

This reduces the risk of gambling when using setting L, making it easier for players to realize that this is not a very good setting.

Furthermore, when the setting value is L, the average number of plays or average number of coins won when the AT is won is configured to be lower than with other setting values. In other words, the setting value L has a lower AT stay ratio than with other setting values.

This reduces the risk of gambling when using setting L, making it easier for players to realize that this is not a very good setting.

Figures 107 and 108 show the internal lottery data when set value L is provided. In Figures 107 and 108, the setting values are set to L, 1, 2, 4, 5, and 6 in descending order of payout rate. Also, if a BB is won during a non-RT, the machine will transition to RT1, and since it is extremely difficult to win a BB during RT1, the gameplay is such that the machine is played in RT1 except when shipped from the factory.

The items in Figures 107 and 108 are the same as those described in Figure 19. Figures 107 and 108 include a "Role" item, which explains the role of each condition device. For example, "Push Order Bell -123" indicates that when the stop switches are operated in the order of left stop switch, middle stop switch, and right stop switch, a high-point bell will stop and be displayed on an active line. If the stop switches are operated in any order other than left stop switch, middle stop switch, and right stop switch, the high-point bell will not be displayed on an active line, and a low-point bell or a drop-point bell will be displayed on an active line depending on the timing of the stop switch operation. Also, "Biased Bell -312" refers to a group of minor roles in which a high-point bell will not stop and be displayed on an active line when a certain stop switch is stopped first. In Figures 107 and 108, only the first stop of the right stop switch includes a group of minor roles that can stop a high-point bell. In this case, if the right stop switch is operated to stop first without any specific instructions (not AT, etc.), a penalty will be imposed, such as not executing processing related to the instruction function. Additionally, "1-coin role (1/4)" indicates that when the left or right stop switch is stopped first, a 1-coin role with a payout of 1 coin can be displayed on an active line at 1/4, and a spill role can be displayed at 3/4. Additionally, "common bell" indicates that a small role with a payout equivalent to a high-coin bell can be displayed on an active line no matter what push order or timing the stop switch is operated in.

In Figures 107 and 108, in the push order bell group (winning-A1 to winning-A14), the number of settings for setting value L is the smallest compared to the other settings. For example, the number of settings for setting value L is 1080 for all condition devices, while the number of settings for setting value 1 is 2466 for all condition devices, the number of settings for setting value 2 is 2462 for all condition devices, the number of settings for setting value 4 is 2456 for all condition devices, the number of settings for setting value 5 is 2446 for all condition devices, and the number of settings for setting value 6 is 2438 for all condition devices.

In this way, when the setting value is L, the probability that the result of the internal lottery will be one of the push order bell groups is lower compared to other setting values, so it is possible to prevent fluctuations in the number of balls dispensed (reducing variance) caused by the push order bell appearing more or less than average, and to maintain a stable low ball dispense rate.

Also, in Figures 107 and 108, the biased bell group (Winner-B1 to Winner-B4) also has the smallest number of settings for the setting value L compared to the other setting values.

For this reason, even in the case of a biased bell group, when the setting value is L, the probability that the result of the internal lottery will be one of the biased bell group is lower compared to other setting values, so it is possible to prevent fluctuations in the ball payout rate from occurring (reducing variance) due to biased bells appearing more or less than average, and it is possible to maintain a stable low ball payout rate.

Furthermore, in Figures 107 and 108, the difference between the setting value L and setting value 1 of the winning-A1 condition device for the push order bell group is larger than the difference between the setting value L and setting value 1 of the winning-B1 condition device for the biased bell group. Note that this is the same for all condition devices.

As a result, the number of push order bells (12,960) placed is greater than the number of biased bells (8,140), so for condition device groups with a high probability of winning, lowering the number of set values L placed is more effective, allowing for a stable transition at a low payout rate.

Also, in Figures 107 and 108, for the 1-coin roles (Winning-D1 to Winning-D4) that do not simultaneously win Type 1 BB, the number of set values L is the largest compared to the other set values. For example, the number of set values L is 6140 for all condition devices, while the number of set values 1 is 1000 for all condition devices, the number of set values 2 is 1000 for all condition devices, the number of set values 4 is 1000 for all condition devices, the number of set values 5 is 1000 for all condition devices, and the number of set values 6 is 1000 for all condition devices.

In this way, because 1-coin combinations are won more frequently at set value L than at other set values, the payout rate can be prevented from becoming too low. Also, even if the payout rate of 1/4 of a coin becomes higher than average at set value L, the payout rate will not rise suddenly, allowing the payout rate to remain stable at a low level.

Also, in Figures 107 and 108, in non-RT, for the 1-coin roles (Winning-E1 to Winning-E4) that simultaneously win Type 1 BB, the number of settings for setting value L is the smallest compared to the other settings. For example, the number of settings for setting value L is 1131 for all condition devices, while the number of settings for setting value 1 is 2302 for all condition devices, the number of settings for setting value 2 is 2299 for all condition devices, the number of settings for setting value 4 is 2290 for all condition devices, the number of settings for setting value 5 is 2277 for all condition devices, and the number of settings for setting value 6 is 2269 for all condition devices.

As a result, other setting values are more likely to transition into Type 1 BB in a simulation test (a test in which all winning condition devices win) than setting value L, so the payout rate at other setting values different from setting value L in the simulation test can be suppressed. Note that the payout rate during Type 1 BB is less than 100%.

Also, in Figures 107 and 108, for weak watermelon (winning -F), the number of settings for setting value L is the smallest compared to the other setting values. For example, the number of settings for setting value L is 27, while the number of settings for setting value 1 is 601, the number of settings for setting value 2 is 603, the number of settings for setting value 4 is 619, the number of settings for setting value 5 is 651, and the number of settings for setting value 6 is 667.

This reduces the probability of winning a weak watermelon at set value L, thereby lowering the probability that a weak watermelon will cause processing related to the instruction function to be executed. For example, this reduces the chances of winning a CZ or AT from a weak watermelon, allowing for a stable low payout rate.

Also, in Figures 107 and 108, for the common bell (winning - M), the number of settings for setting value L is the largest compared to the other setting values. For example, the number of settings for setting value L is 4842, while the number of settings for setting value 1 is 4, the number of settings for setting value 2 is 51, the number of settings for setting value 4 is 122, the number of settings for setting value 5 is 241, and the number of settings for setting value 6 is 336.

This increases the probability that a small symbol with a payout equivalent to that of a high-value bell will stop and be displayed at setting value L, preventing the payout rate at setting value L from becoming too low. Note that at setting value L, the push order bell group is less likely to win than at other setting values, so the common bell compensates for the fact that the high-value bell is less likely to stop and be displayed.

In addition, while in Figure 107 a lottery for transitioning to a favorable zone (100% transition to a favorable zone) is possible for WIN-E1 through WIN-E4, in Figure 108 a lottery for transitioning to a favorable zone cannot be executed. Therefore, depending on whether a transition to a favorable zone occurs when WIN-E1 through WIN-E4 are won, it can be determined whether the favorable zone end conditions were met during the favorable zone at the time of factory shipment (non-RT) or within a Type 1 BB. For this reason, the game state at the start of the favorable zone when WIN-E1 through WIN-E4 are won during RT1 and the transition to a favorable zone is greater than the game state at the start of the favorable zone when WIN-E1 through WIN-E4 are won during non-RT and the transition to a favorable zone occurs. This allows the player to continue to earn large profits even after reaching the difference in number of 2,400 coins, which is the condition for the end of the favorable zone, and allows the player's favorable state to continue even across favorable zones.

<Structure of the lower panel 5>
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, a lower panel 5 is provided below the front door PS2. As shown in Figure 1, the size of the lower panel 5 is about 1/4 to 1/3 of the area of the front side of the front door PS2 (the side visible to the player), and by lighting a lower panel lamp provided inside the lower panel 5, the machine can be made to stand out in the gaming facility.

The lower panel 5 is constructed with a transparent, translucent acrylic plate to protect the design sheet depicting the characters and game machine titles. The lower panel locking portion extends from the front side of the front door PS2 to a predetermined edge of the lower panel 5, and is inserted into the opening in the front door PS2 to lock onto the back side of the front door PS2, covering the LED board on which the lower panel lamp located on the front door PS2 is mounted. The lower panel locking portion may be located in one place or in multiple places.

The lower panel locking portion extending from the lower panel 5 is also part of the acrylic plate and is a transparent, translucent material. The lower panel locking portion is elastically deformable and has a hook-like shape. After the lower panel locking portion deforms and is inserted into the opening of the front door PS2, the lower panel locking portion elastically deforms and hooks onto the back side of the front door PS2, thereby locking it in place. This allows the lower panel locking portion to be seen from the back side of the front door PS2.

As such, because the lower panel 5 is hooked to the back side of the front door PS2, it is difficult to remove from the front side of the front door PS2, but it can be easily removed from the back side of the front door PS2 by releasing the hook on the lower panel locking portion.

The lower panel lamp is a full-color LED that can light up in white or red, and may be used to indicate the status of the gaming machine. The lighting color of the lower panel lamp may also be approximately white.

When the lower panel lamp lights up white, the entire lower panel 5 (including the lower panel locking portion) glows white, and when the lower panel lamp lights up red, the entire lower panel 5 (including the lower panel locking portion) glows red.

The back side of the front door PS2 will be further explained using Figure 109.

In addition to the lower panel lamps located on the front side of the front door PS2, the front door PS2 also has reel illumination lamps located above or below the display window on the back side of the front door PS2 to illuminate the reels from the front side. In Figure 109, the lamps are located below the reel display window, but they can also be located above, or in two locations, above and below. The reel illumination lamps light up in white or nearly white to improve the visibility of the symbols.

In addition, on the back side of the front door PS2, there is a designated opening (harness opening) for passing a designated harness connected to the LED board on which the lower panel lamp is mounted, and the LED board on which the lower panel lamp is mounted and the sub-board on which the lamp control means is mounted can be connected via the designated harness through the harness opening.

In addition, a transparent member is provided at the location on the back side of the front door PS2 where the lower panel is covered, allowing part of the back surface of the lower panel to be seen. The back side of the front door PS2 is made of a sheet metal frame made of non-transparent resin or sheet metal, but has a transparent member and openings that are partially translucent.

The lower panel locking portion, harness opening, and transparent member shown in Figure 109 do not all need to be provided, and only one of them may be provided. Furthermore, in addition to the examples shown, there may also be a specific viewing means that allows the light from the lower panel to be visible from the back side of the front door PS2.

Next, we will explain the lighting pattern of the lower panel lamp.

The lower panel lamp has a lighting pattern that lights up in white when the front door PS2 is closed. For example, when the front door PS2 is closed, the lower panel lamp lights up in white at a predetermined timing after the power is turned on, and then maintains the white lighting pattern even as gameplay progresses, with bets being processed, reels spinning, and payouts being made. Furthermore, when a demo screen is displayed on the LCD after a predetermined time has passed without a bet being placed, the lower panel lamp switches to a demo lighting pattern. The demo lighting pattern repeatedly lights up and goes out, indicating that play is not in progress and notifying the player that the machine is vacant. Note that the lower panel lamp may remain lit in white even when a demo screen is being displayed. Furthermore, the lower panel lamp may be turned off during play to notify players of expectations or game status.

Then, when the front door PS2 is closed and the lower panel lamp is illuminated in white under certain conditions (e.g., during game standby, during game play, etc.), if the front door PS2 is opened (when the opening of the front door PS2 is detected), the lighting pattern of the lower panel lamp will be switched. Below, we will explain the lighting pattern when the front door PS2 is open, branching into multiple patterns.

<<Pattern 1>>
When the front door PS2 is opened (when the opening of the front door PS2 is detected) in a predetermined situation where the front door PS2 is closed and the lower panel lamp is lit in white (when waiting for a game (waiting for a bet), during a game, when the lower panel lamp is not lit in a demo pattern, etc.), the lighting pattern is switched to one where the lower panel lamp is lit in red.

As a result, when the front door PS2 is open, red light is visible from the lower panel latch, harness opening, and transparent member on the back side of the front door PS2, reducing visibility of the back side of the front door PS2 and the inside of the cabinet PS3 compared to when the lower panel lamp is lit in white.

Because red is less bright than white, even if the light transmitted from the lower panel lamp leaks through the lower panel fastening portion, harness opening, and transparent component, the internal structure is less visible when the lamp is emitting red light than when it is emitting white light. This makes it even more difficult to see the internal structure when the lamp is installed in an amusement facility, especially since the lights may be dimmed during amusement facility operating hours.

By configuring it in this way, even if someone attempts to fraudulently open the front door PS2 and commit a fraudulent act, the visibility of the back side of the front door PS2 and the inside of the cabinet PS3 is reduced, making it more difficult to commit the fraudulent act and thereby preventing fraudulent acts.

This type of configuration has a front door and a lower panel section attached to the bottom of the front door, and can be described as being capable of illuminating the lower panel section in a predetermined color when the front door is closed and waiting for a bed, and being capable of illuminating the lower panel section in a specific color different from the predetermined color when the front door is opened from the predetermined situation of being closed and waiting for a bed.

<<Pattern 2>>
When the front door PS2 is opened (when the opening of the front door PS2 is detected) in a predetermined situation where the front door PS2 is closed and the lower panel lamp is lit in white (when waiting for a game (waiting for a bet), during a game, when the lower panel lamp is not lit in a demo pattern, etc.), the lighting pattern is switched to one where the lower panel lamp is turned off.

As a result, when the front door PS2 is open, light from the lower panel does not leak through the lower panel latch, harness opening, or transparent member on the back of the front door PS2, making it possible to reduce visibility of the back of the front door PS2 and the inside of the cabinet PS3 compared to when the lower panel lamp is lit in white.

When the lower panel lamp is turned off to prevent light from leaking from the lower panel latch, harness opening, and transparent member, the internal structure is less visible than when it is emitting white light. Since the lights may be dimmed during amusement park operating hours, the internal structure can be made even more difficult to see when the device is installed in an amusement park.

By configuring it in this way, even if someone attempts to fraudulently open the front door PS2 and commit a fraudulent act, the visibility of the back side of the front door PS2 and the inside of the cabinet PS3 is reduced, making it more difficult to commit the fraudulent act and thereby preventing fraudulent acts.

This configuration has a front door and a lower panel section attached to the bottom of the front door, and can be described as being able to illuminate the lower panel section in a predetermined color when the front door is closed and waiting for a bed, and being able to turn off the light when the front door is opened from the predetermined situation of being closed and waiting for a bed.

<<Pattern 3>>
When the front door PS2 is closed and the lower panel lamp is lit in white (waiting for a game (waiting for a bet), playing, not lighting up in the demo pattern, etc.), if the front door PS2 is opened (when the opening of the front door PS2 is detected), the lower panel lamp switches to a lighting pattern (flashing pattern) in which it flashes white. An example of a flashing pattern is a pattern in which the lamp alternates between turning on and off every second.

As a result, when the front door PS2 is open, the light from the lower panel lamp flashes white and can be seen through the lower panel latch, harness opening, and transparent member on the back side of the front door PS2, reducing visibility of the back side of the front door PS2 and the inside of the cabinet PS3 compared to when the lower panel lamp is lit in white.

Even if the lower panel lamp is white, by flashing it, the internal structure becomes less visible compared to when the light transmitted from the lower panel lamp and the light leaking from the lower panel latch, harness opening, and transparent member is lit in white. This makes it even more difficult to see the internal structure when installed in an amusement park, especially since the lights may be dimmed during amusement park business hours.

By configuring it in this way, even if someone attempts to fraudulently open the front door PS2 and commit a fraudulent act, the visibility of the back side of the front door PS2 and the inside of the cabinet PS3 is reduced, making it more difficult to commit the fraudulent act and thereby preventing fraudulent acts.

This configuration has a front door and a lower panel section attached to the bottom of the front door, and can be described as being capable of illuminating the lower panel section in a predetermined color when the front door is closed and waiting for a bed, and being capable of illuminating the lower panel section in a flashing pattern when the front door is opened from the predetermined situation of being closed and waiting for a bed.

In addition, the lighting pattern of the lower panel lamp when the front door PS2 is open is not limited to a white flashing pattern; by changing it to a red flashing pattern, it is possible to further reduce the visibility of the back side of the front door PS2 and the inside of the cabinet PS3.

As a common configuration to the above-mentioned <<Pattern 1>>, <<Pattern 2>>, and <<Pattern 3>>, when the front door PS2 is closed, the light may be a specified color other than white. However, a bright color is preferable, so a bright color or a highly saturated color such as orange or pink is desirable.

Also, as a common configuration, the reel illumination lamps that are lit when the front door PS2 is closed may be turned off when the front door PS2 is opened. In other words, when the front door PS2 is closed, the lower panel lamps are lit in a predetermined color, and the reel illumination lamps are lit in white, if the front door PS2 is opened, the lower panel lamps may light up in a specific color darker than the predetermined color, turn off, or flash in the predetermined color, and the reel illumination lamps may be turned off.

This further reduces visibility of the back side of front door PS2 and the inside of cabinet PS3 when front door PS2 is open, thereby helping to deter fraudulent activity.

Also, as a common configuration, when the LCD display when the front door PS2 is closed under certain circumstances switches to a front door PS2 open display (door open error alert) when the front door PS2 is opened, the front door PS2 open display may be displayed in a darker color when comparing the LCD display before switching to the front door PS2 open display with the front door PS2 open display. An example of a darker color would be displaying "Door Open Error" in red letters on a black background.

This means that by dimming the light from the LCD when the front door PS2 is open, visibility of the back of the front door PS2 and the inside of the cabinet PS3 can be reduced, helping to deter fraudulent activity.

Also, as a common configuration, when the setting check mode is entered after the front door PS2 is opened, the lighting pattern of the lower panel lamps after the front door PS2 is opened may be switched to the lighting pattern of the lower panel lamps in the setting check mode. In other words, if the front door PS2 is closed, the lower panel lamps are lit in a predetermined color, and the reel illumination lamps are lit in white, and then the front door PS2 is opened, the lower panel lamps will light up in a specific color darker than the predetermined color, turn off, or flash in the predetermined color. Then, when the conditions for entering the setting check mode are met and the mode is entered, the lower panel lamps will switch to the lighting pattern corresponding to the setting check mode.

The lighting pattern corresponding to the lower panel lamp setting confirmation mode may be a pattern in which the lamp lights up in a specified color, a pattern in which the lamp lights up in a color brighter than a specific color, the same lighting pattern as when the front door PS2 is closed, or a blinking pattern different from the blinking pattern when the front door PS2 is open (for example, a pattern in which the lamp alternates between turning on and off every two seconds).

In such cases, to prevent fraud, the back side of the front door PS2 and the inside of the cabinet PS3 can be made difficult to see when the front door PS2 is open. Then, when an arcade staff member switches to setting confirmation mode to perform setting confirmation work, the lower panel lamps can be switched to a lighting pattern that makes it easier to see the back side of the front door PS2 and the inside of the cabinet PS3 than the lighting pattern when the front door PS2 is open, thereby increasing the work efficiency of the arcade staff member. Furthermore, if the front door PS2 is open when the setting confirmation mode is ended by meeting the conditions for ending the setting confirmation mode, the lower panel lamps are switched back to the lighting pattern when the front door PS2 is open.

Also, as a common configuration, when the front door PS2 is closed, the lower panel lamp is lit in a predetermined color, a demo screen is displayed on the LCD, and the backup lamp is lit in a demo pattern, if the front door PS2 is opened, the lower panel lamp will light up in a specific color darker than the predetermined color, turn off, or switch to a pattern where it flashes in the predetermined color, and the backup lamp will switch to a lit pattern.

This means that the back lamp lights up when the front door PS2 is open, improving visibility behind the front door PS2 and inside the cabinet PS3, making it easier for arcade staff to troubleshoot errors and other malfunctions and check settings.

In addition, when the issue is focused on improving the work efficiency of arcade staff rather than preventing fraudulent activity, the system may be configured so that when the front door PS2 is closed, the lower panel lamp is lit in a predetermined color, a demo screen is displayed on the LCD, and the back lamp is lit in a demo pattern, the lower panel lamp maintains the lighting pattern of lighting in the predetermined color and the back lamp switches to the lighting pattern.

This means that the back lamp lights up when the front door PS2 is open, improving visibility behind the front door PS2 and inside the cabinet PS3, making it easier for arcade staff to troubleshoot errors and check settings, and also achieving more energy savings than controlling the back lamp to flash.

Also, as an alternative to the above-described embodiment, the back side of the front door PS2 may not be provided with a translucent lower panel locking portion, harness opening, or transparent member, and all members visible from the back side of the front door PS2 may be constructed from non-translucent members.

Even in this case, visibility of the back side of front door PS2 and the inside of cabinet PS3 can be reduced when front door PS2 is open, thereby preventing fraudulent activity.

Also, as a variation different from the above-described embodiment, when the front door PS2 is closed and the lower panel lamp is illuminated in white under certain circumstances (e.g., during game standby, during game play, etc.), if the front door PS2 is opened (when the opening of the front door PS2 is detected), the illumination pattern of the lower panel lamp may not change (the illumination pattern of the white lamp may be maintained).

With this configuration, when the front door PS2 is open, the back side of the front door PS2 and the interior of the cabinet PS3 are easily visible due to the light transmitted from the lower panel latch, the harness opening, and the lower panel lamp leaking through the transparent member, making it easier for arcade staff to troubleshoot errors and other malfunctions and check settings.

In this embodiment, a slot machine (reel-type gaming machine) is used as an example of the gaming machine, but the invention can be applied to various gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines, jankyu gaming machines, Parrot, or casino machines.

The technical details of this embodiment described above for the purpose of explaining the present invention can be combined as appropriate.

PS1: Slot machine PS2: Front panel PS3: Cabinet S: Speaker 100: Main control board 1000: Sub-control board 4: Display window 5: Lower panel 6: Reel unit 7: Reel base 8a: Left reel 8b: Center reel 8c: Right reel 11: Operation panel 12: Start switch 13: Stop switch 13a: Left stop switch 13b: Center stop switch 13c: Right stop switch 17: Medal insertion slot 18: MAX bet switch 19: 1 bet switch 20: Sub switch 21: Sub cross key switch 22: Eject switch 24: Operation indicator lamp 24a: Left operation indicator lamp 24b: Center operation indicator lamp 24c: Right operation indicator lamp 25: Bet number display lamp 25a: 1 bet lamp 25b: 2 bet lamp 25c: 3 bet lamp 26: Credit number display 26a : Segment display 26b : Segment display 27 : Acquired coin count display 27a : Segment display 27b : Segment display 28 : Tray 29 : Cigarette ashtray 30 : Sticker storage section 32 : Display device 34 : Medal selector 37 : Setting key switch 38 : Setting switch 39 : Power supply unit 40 : Power switch 44 : Hopper 45 : Medal payout outlet 46 : Auxiliary tank 47 : External output terminal board

Claims (1)

a display device;
The performance switch and
It has a performance switch lamp,
In a display device, information relating to a performance is displayed in each of N display areas (N is an integer of 3 or more) divided into areas, a selection display indicating that one of the display areas is selected is displayed by sequentially switching at a constant speed , and when a performance switch is operated, a predetermined performance can be executed in which the selection display can be stopped and displayed in one of the display areas,
When a predetermined effect is being executed and an operation input of the effect switch is possible, the effect switch lamp can be flashed,
In a display device, when a selection display indicating that one of the display areas is selected is displayed by sequentially switching the display at a constant speed, the time from when a certain display area is selected and displayed among the display areas to when the next display area to be selected and displayed among the certain display areas is selected and displayed is T1, and the time T2 for the selection display to make one revolution of the N display areas is
Comparing the flashing cycle T3 of the performance switch lamp,
T2<T3,
A predetermined effect can be started by operating the start switch,
When a predetermined performance is started by operating the start switch in a situation where no wait occurs, the predetermined performance can be started before the operation of the stop switch is enabled.
Gaming machine.